LG LH-W752TA Owner's Manual

Add to my manuals
44 Pages

advertisement

LG LH-W752TA Owner's Manual | Manualzz
LGEMS_LH-W752TA_ENG
DVD HOME THEATER
MANUAL DE INSTRUÇÕES
MODELO: LH-W752TA - LH-T752TB
LH-W752, LHS-W75TAF, LHS-W75TAC,
LHS-W75TAR, LHS-W75TAL,
LHS-W75TAW, ACC75T,LHS-75TBS,
LHS-75TBC, LHS-75TBW)
R
Por favor leia este manual cuidadosamente antes de operar seu aparelho. Mantenha-o para futuras referências.
Desenhos e especificações estão sujeitos a mudanças sem
prévio aviso.
Índice
light, as there may be a considerable temperature
increase inside the car.
Cleaning discs
Introduction
nd packing materials may
protection, re-pack the
d at the factory.
Fingerprints and dust on the disc can distort the picture
arby TV, VCR, or radio
or reduce sound quality. Before playing, clean the disc
ack. In thisÍndice
case,
position
...................................................................................
2 the centre out- Repetir ...................................................................... 21
with a clean cloth. Wipe the disc from
Introduction
R, or radio,Apresentação
or turn off the
wards.
......................................................................
A-B MP3/WMA
.............................................................
AudioRepetir
CD and
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
. . . 23
Safety Precautions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . 2
Busca por
Playing
an Tempo
Audio.....................................................
CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . 22
. . . 23
Marcador
� Pausede
. .Busca
. . . ...................................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
. . . 23
ZOOM
......................................................................
� Moving
to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
. . . 23
Recursos
especiais
do
DVD.
.........................................
23
� Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Verificando
� Search.o.conteúdo
. . . . . . dos
. . .discos
. . . . de
. . DVD:
. . . .............
. . . . . 23
. . . 23
Tipos
de
VCDs
................................................................
5
Menu
Títulos (TITLE. .MENU)
JPEG DiscdeOperation
. . . . ...............................
. . . . . . . . . . . . 23
. . . 24
About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
Precauções...................................................................... 6
Menu doaDisco
(DISC
Viewing
JPEG
discMENU)
. . . . ..................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
. . . 24
. . . . . . . Front
. . 24 Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Movendo a unidade .................................................... 6
Mudando
o Idioma. do
� Slide Show
. . Áudio
. . . . .....................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
. . . 24
Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . Remote
. . 24
Do not
use strong solvents such as6 alcohol, benzene,Legendas
Limpando a unidade
...................................................
(SUBTITLES)
� Still Picture
. . . . . ..........................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
. . . 24
. . . . . . . . . 24
thinner,
commercially
available
cleaners,
or
anti-static
Notas sobre
DVD� de
Áudio ...............................................................
faces
dirty,discos .......................................................... 6
Moving
to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
. . . 24
. . . . are
. . .extremely
. . 24
Preparation
spray
intended
for
vinyl
records.
Manuseio dos discos .................................................. 6
ed with a mild detergent
Mudando
parapicture.
outro Grupo
� To rotate
. . . .....................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
. . . 24
. . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . dos
. . .discos
. . . ........................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . 8-13
Armazenamento
lvents suchConnections
as alcohol,
Assistindo uma
outra Página
Programmed
Playback
. . . . ..................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
. . . 25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
About
Symbols
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . 8
might damage TV
the
surface
Limpeza
dos discos ....................................................
Reproduzindo
um CD de Áudio
ou Disco
Repeat Programmed
Tracks.
. . . MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . ....
. . 24
. . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 25
Optional
Equipment
Connections . . . . . . . . 6. . . . 9
Sobre
os Símbolos
..........................................................
Pause .......................................................................
Erasing
a Track from Programme List . . . . . 24
. . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 25
Aerial
. .the
. . . . ..................................
. symbol
. . . . . . .display
. . . . . .6. . . 10
Sobre Connections
a exibição
do símbolo
About
Mudando
deComplete
Faixa ...................................................
Erasing
the
Programme List . . . . 24
. . . 25
t . . . . . . . . 25
Speaker
Connection
. . . . . . ............
. . . . . 6. 11-12
Sobre os System
símbolos de
discos para .instruções
Faixa/Tudo/Desl
DivX Repetir
Disc Operation
. . . ..........................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
. . . 26
h-tech,
st
. . . precision
. . . . 25 �device.
“ ”. may
Transmitter.
...................................................
. . .appear
. . . . . on
. . the
. . .TV
. . screen
. . . . .7during
. . . 11operation. Search - Busca ....................................................... 24
Painéis Frontal
e Traseiro
Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
disc
dirty
. . . drive
. . . .parts
. . 26are
This
icon means
the function. explained
� Changing
a channel
of Transmitter
. . . . . . . in
11this owner’s
Controle
Remoto..................................................................8
Operação
Disco JPEG ................................................
Additional
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . 28
.be
. .poor.
. . . . . . 27 � Setting a manual
is not available
disc. de Information
ID of Transmitter
. . . on
. . that
. . . .specific
. .9. . . DVD-Video
11
Conexões ............................................................................
enance
Visualizando
umMemory
Disco JPEG
Last
Condition
. ....................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . 28
. . . . .are
. . .recommended
. 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11
Conexões
da
TV
..............................................................
9
. (This depends on the
Demonstração
Screen
Saver .em
. . Slides
. . . . .........................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . 28
About the disc symbols for instructions
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 10
. . . . 12
Conexão do Equipamento Opcional. ..............................
Imagem Congelada
Controlling
the TV .................................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . 28
. . . . . . . Speaker
. . 28
A
section
whose
title
has
one
of
the
following
symbol
is
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
ur nearest dealer.
Conexões das Antenas ................................................. 10
Mudando
de arquivo
Operation
with
Radio ................................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . 29
. . . . . . . Before
. . 28 Operation
by the symbol.
. . . . . .-only
.LH-T752TB...................
. . to
. . the
. . .disc
. . .represented
. . . . .11. 14-19
Sistema de Caixasapplicable
Acústicas
Zoom ........................................................................
Presetting
the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . 29
. . . . . . . . . 29
DVD-V
Mini Glossary
for Audio
Stream
& Surround
Montando
e Conectando
as DVD
Caixas
Acústicas
.............
11
and
finalized
DVD±R/RW.
ListeningProgramada
to the radio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
. . . 29
Reprodução
.................................................
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mode a. Caixa
. . . . Central
. . DVD-A
. . . na
. . Parede...............................
. . . .Audio
. . . . discs.
. . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . 14
Fixando
DVD
Other
Functions.
. . . . ...............................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
. . . 30
Reprodução
Programada
. . . . . . . . . 29
SounddeMode
. . . da
. .Caixa
. . . .Acústica
. . . . . ......................
. . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . 14
Sistema
Conexões
VCD2.0 Video CDs with the PBC (playback control) Sleep
Timer
Setting
. . . . . . ...............................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
. . . 30
Repetir
as Faixas
Programadas
. . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
Sistema
de
Caixas
Acústicas
LH-W752TA
.................
12
function.
e. of
Dimmer
. . uma
. . . faixa
. . . .da. .lista
. . .de. .programação
. . . . . . . . .........
. . . . 26
. . . 30
Apagando
. .the
. . disc.
. . . . 30
Initial
Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12. 16-19
Transmissor
..............................................................
that
not
VCD1.1 Video CDs without the PBC (playback control)
Mute
. . . . a. lista
. . . de
. . programação
. . . . . . . . .por
. . completo
. . . . . . ......
. . . 26
. . . 30
Apagando
. . . fingerprints
. . . . . . 30will
� General
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
Mudando
o canal
do transmissor
.............................
12
Usingcom
the disco
Headphone
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. . . 30
Operação
DivX ...............................................
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Language . . . . .function.
. . . ...................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
. . . . 16
Definindo a ID do CD
transmissor
the disc.
CDs.
Selecting
theacústicas
Input Source
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . 30
Ajuste
das caixas
............................................
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . Audio
. . . . .Acústicas
. . . . . . .............
. . . . . .12. 16-17
Montando e Conectando as. Caixas
XTS das
(Excellent
True Sound)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . 30
MP3 disc.
Ajuste
caixas acústicas
5.1.....................................
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . MP3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
Conex. do sistema das caixas acústicas- LH-W752TA 13
XTS
prodas
. . caixas
. . . . .acústicas
. . . . . .......................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . 30
Ajuste
WMA WMA disc.
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental
Control)...............................
. . . . . . . . . . . . 13
. . . . 18
Conexões das caixas acústicas
Seleção
das
caixas
acústicas
...................................
28
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . .JPEG
JPEG
disc.
. . . . acústicas
. . . . . . ...........................
. . . . . . . . . . . 14
. . . . 19
Posicionamento das.caixas
Reference
Tamanho das caixas acústicas ................................ 28
DivX DivX disc.
Antes da Operação ...........................................................
15
VolumeCode
.....................................................................
Language
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . 31
Míni Glossário para Canal de Áudio & Modo Surround. 15
Operation
Distância
...................................................................
Country
Code
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . 31
. . . . . . . . . Modo
31 de Som ................................................................ 15
DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Teste.........................................................................
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2832-33
. . . . . . . . . Menu
31 de tela (OSD)....................................................... 16
Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Informação adicional
Specifications
. . .........................................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . 34
. . . . . . . 32-33
Ajustes
iniciais
...............................................................
General
Features
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17. 20-22
Memória da condição anterior ....................................... 29
. . . . . . . . . 34Operações gerais ..................................................... 17
� Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20
Protetor de tela .............................................................. 29
IDIOMA
.....................................................................
� Moving
to another CHAPTER/TRACK . 17
. . . . 20
Controlando a TV ......................................................... 29
DISPLAY
......................................................
� Slow (TELA)
Motion.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
. . . . 20
Operação com o Rádio .................................................... 30
Leitura
(Progressive
Scan) ...................
18 . 20
� StillProgressiva
Picture and
Frame-by-Frame
Playback
5
Prefixando
as estações de rádio ................................... 30
ÁUDIO
......................................................................
� Search.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
. . . . 20
Ouvindo o rádio ............................................................. 30
BLOQUEIO
(Controle
� Repeat
. . . .de
. .Censura)
. . . . . ................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . 19
. . . . 20
Outras funções ................................................................. 31
Classificação
............................................................
� Repeat A-B
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
. . . . 21
Ajuste do Sleep Timer .................................................. 31
Senha
(Código
de Segurança)..................................19
� Time
Search
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DIMMER ........................................................................ 31
Código
Regional........................................................19
� Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mute............................................................................... 31
OUTROS
.......................................................................
20
� Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Usando o conector do Fone ......................................... 31
PBC
...............................................................................
Special
DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
. . . . 22
Selecionando a Fonte Entrada ...................................... 31
Operação
de DVD
ou Vídeo
� Title
Menu
. . . . .CD
. ........................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
. . . . 22
XTS (Verdadeiro Som Excelente) ................................. 31
Reproduzindo
um DVD
� Disc Menu
. . .ou. .um
. . VCD
. . . ..............................
. . . . . . . . . . . . 20
. . . . 22
XTS Pro ......................................................................... 31
Ajuste
de Reprodução
..............................................
� Changing
the Audio
Language . . . . . . . 20
. . . . 22
Códigos de Idiomas ......................................................... 32
Recursos
Gerais ............................................................
� Changing
the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . 21
. . . . 22
Códigos de Países............................................................ 32
Mudando
de Título
� Subtitles
. . .(TITLE)
. . . . . ......................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
. . . . 22
Resolvendo problemas .................................................... 33
Mudando
para
outro.Capítulo/Faixa
DVD
Audio
Discs
. . . . . . . . . .........................
. . . . . . . . . 21
. . . . 22
Especificações.................................................................. 35
Câmera Lenta ........................................................... 21
Assistência Técnica ......................................................... 37
Imagem Congelada e Reprod Quadro-a-Quadro ..... 21
Certificado de Garantia .................................................... 42
Search (Busca ) ...................................................... 21
Introduction
2
Introduction
Meio Ambiente
.................................................................... 3
. . . . . . . Table
. . 23 of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Precauções de Segurança ................................................. 4
sDisc
clean. . . Before
. . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Antes
do Uso ......................................................................
Playable
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . 4
ch. .as. .insecticide
spray,
. . . . . 23
Discos
reproduzíveis.
bber
products
in
Precautions
. . . .......................................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . 5
. . . or
. .plastic
. . . . 23
Termos
They relacionados
will
Notes
on Discs aos
. . . discos
. . . . .....................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . 5
.period
. . . . of
. . time.
. . 23
Introduction
Safety
Precautions
Introduction
.........................2
Table
Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
SafetyofPrecautions
Before
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5
Table ofUse
Contents
.3
Playable
.4
Before
Use Discs
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5
Precautions
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54
Playable Discs
Notes
on Discs
Precautions
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
About
Notes Symbols
on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
Front
Panel
and Rear
About
Symbols
. . .Panel
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65
Remote
Control
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76
Front Panel
and Overview
Rear Panel
Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Preparation
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Preparation
TV Connections
..8
Connections
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13
Optional
Equipment
TV Connections
. . Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98
Aerial
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10
Optional
Equipment. .Connections
.9
Speaker
System Connection
Aerial Connections
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12
. . 10
� Transmitter.
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12
. . 11
Speaker
System. Connection
�
a channel
� Changing
Transmitter.
. . . . . . .of. Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
11
�
a ID
of Transmitter
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
� Setting
Changing
a channel
of Transmitter
11
�
Connecting. .to. .the
� Assembling
Setting a IDand
of Transmitter
. . Speakers
. . . . . . . . 11
11
�
Connections.
. . . . . to
. . the
. . .Speakers
. . . . . . . 12
� Speaker
Assembling
and Connecting
11
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
� Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Before
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19
SpeakerOperation
Positioning.
. . 13
Mini Operation
Glossary for. .Audio
Before
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . 14-19
Mode
. . . . . . . for
. . .Audio
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mini Glossary
Sound
Mode . Mode
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14
14
On-Screen
Sound
Mode Display
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15
14
Initial
SettingsDisplay
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19
On-Screen
. . 15
� General
Operation
. . 16
Initial
Settings
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19
�
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16
� Language
General Operation
16
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-17
� Display
Language
. . 16
�
Audio.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
� Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
�
(Parental
� Lock
Audio.
. . . . . . Control)
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 18
17
�
. . . . . . .Control)
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19
� Others
Lock (Parental
18
� Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Operation
DVD
or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Operation
Playing
a DVD
Video CD.
. . 19
DVD
or Video
CD and
Operation
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22
General
. . . . .CD.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22
Playing aFeatures
DVD and. .Video
. . 19
� Moving
to another
. . 20
General
Features
. . . .TITLE/GROUP
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22
�
� Moving
Moving to
to another
another CHAPTER/TRACK
TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
�
Motion.
. . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
� Slow
Moving
to another
20
�
and
� Still
SlowPicture
Motion.
. . Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
20
�
. . . and
. . . .Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
� Search.
Still Picture
20
�
� Repeat
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
�
� Repeat
Repeat A-B
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
20
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
�
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Marker
Time Search
21
�
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Zoom.
Marker. Search
21
Special
DVD
� Zoom.
. .Features
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
21
� TitleDVD
MenuFeatures
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
Special
22
�
� Disc
Title Menu
Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
�
� Changing
Disc Menuthe
. . Audio
. . . . . Language
. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
�
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Changing
Changing the
the Audio
Audio Channel
Language
22
�
. . .Audio
. . . . .Channel
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Subtitles
Changing. the
22
DVD
Audio Discs
� Subtitles
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playing
an Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . . Disc
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
� Pause
. . . . .CD
. . .and
. . .MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . . .Disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
Playing
an .Audio
23
�
� Moving
Pause .to. .another
. . . . . . Track
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Repeat
Moving Track/All/Off.
to another Track
23
�
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Search.
Repeat Track/All/Off.
23
JPEG�Disc
Operation
Search.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
23
Viewing
JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
JPEG
Disc aOperation
24
� SlideaShow
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Viewing
JPEG. disc
24
�
� Still
SlidePicture
Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
�
to another
� Moving
Still Picture
. . . . . file
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Repeat Programmed
Programmed
Playback Tracks.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Erasing
a Track from Programme
Repeat Programmed
Tracks. . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Erasing
Complete
Programme List
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Erasing the
a Track
from Programme
25
DivX
Disc Operation
. . . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
the Complete
25
Speaker
Setup
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
DivX Disc
Operation
26
Additional
Information
Speaker Setup
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
27
Last Condition
Memory
Additional
Information
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Screen
Saver . .Memory
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Last Condition
28
Controlling
the. TV
Screen Saver
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
Operation
with
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
29
Listening
theradio
radiostations
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
Presettingtothe
29
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Listening
to the. radio
29
Sleep
Timer Setting
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Dimmer
. . . .Setting
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Sleep Timer
30
Mute
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Dimmer
30
Using
Mute .the
. . Headphone
. . . . . . . . . .Jack
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Selecting
Input Source
Using thethe
Headphone
Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
XTS
(Excellent
TrueSource
Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Selecting
the Input
30
XTS
. . . . . .True
. . . .Sound)
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
XTS pro
(Excellent
30
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reference
Language
Code List
Reference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Country
Code
List
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31
Language
Code
List
31
Troubleshooting
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33
Country Code List
. . 31
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3
Introduction
Introduction
Introdução
Apresentação
Precauções de Segurança
Introduction
.......
Disc . . .
.......
.......
.......
.......
.......
Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . Remote
. . 24
. . . . . . . . . 24
O símbolo do raio ao lado alerta o usuário da
. . . . . . . Preparation
. . 24
presença de voltagem perigosa não isolada no
. . . . . . . Connections
. .CAUTION:
24
. . do
. . produto,
. . . . . . .suficiente
. . . . . . . para
. . . .constituir
. . . . . . 8-13
interior
risco
CAUTION:
. . . . . . . . .This
24
receiver .employs
CAUTION:
TVDVD/CD
Connections
. . . . . a.a.laser
. . . system.
.system.
.............8
de choque
elétrico.
This
DVD/CD
receiver
employs
laser
. . . . . . . . .To
25
ensure
proper
use
of
this
product,
please
read
this
owner’s
This
DVD/CD
receiver
employs
a
laser
system.
Equipment
Connections
. . read
. . . .this
. . owner’s
....9
ToOptional
ensure proper
use of this
product, please
. . . . . . . . .manual
25
carefully
for
Aerial
Connections
. .itit.product,
. . future
. . . please
. reference.
.reference.
. . . read
. . . Should
.this
. . owner’s
. . the
.the
10
To
ensure
properand
useretain
of .this
manual
carefully
and
retain
for
future
Should
require
maintenance,
contact
an
authorized
service
locat . . . . . . . .unit
25
manual
carefully
and
retain
it for future
the
Speaker
System
Connection
. .authorized
.reference.
. . .alerta
. . .service
.Should
. .usuário
. 11-12
unit
require
maintenance,
contact
an
locaO
ponto
de
exclamação
ao
lado
o
(see
service
procedure).
st . . . . . . .tion
25
unit
require
maintenance,
contact
an
authorized
service
location �
(see
service procedure).
Transmitter.
. instruções
. . . . . . . . importantes
. . . . . . . . . . . manual,
. . . . . 11
existem
controls,
adjustments,
or carrying outno
procedures
tion
(seeque
service
procedure).
. . . . . . . . .Performing
26 �
Performing
controls,
adjustments,
or carrying out
Changing
a channel
of Transmitter
. .procedures
. . . . . . 11
than
those
specified
herein
may
result
in
hazardous
sobre
o
funcionamento
e
a
manutenção
do radi. . . . . . . . .other
27
Performing
controls,
or carrying
other�than
those
herein may
hazardous
Setting
a specified
ID adjustments,
of Transmitter
.result
. . . .in.out
. .procedures
. . . . . .radi11
other
than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiequipamento.
. . . . . . . . .ation
28 �exposure.
ation
exposure.
Assembling
and
Connecting
to
the
Speakers
11
To
prevent
direct
exposure
to
laser
beam,
do
not
try
to
open
ation
exposure.
. . . . . . . . .To
28prevent
direct Connections.
exposure to laser
� Speaker
. .beam,
.when
. . . .do
. .not
. . try
. . to
. .open
. . 12
enclosure.
Visible
laser radiation
open.
NOT
To
direct
exposure
to laser beam,
do
not DO
try to
open
. . . . . . . Speaker
. .the
28prevent
the
enclosure.
Visible
laser
Positioning.
. . . .radiation
. . . . . .when
. . . .open.
. . . . DO
. . .NOT
. . . 13
STARE
INTO
BEAM.
Advertência:
the
enclosure.
Visible
laser
radiation
when
open.
DO
NOT
INTO BEAM.
. . . . . . . Before
. .STARE
28 Operation
. . . . . . perigo
. . . . . . . choque
. . . . . . . . . . 14-19
STARE
INTO
Para
prevenir
incêndio
TheBEAM.
apparatusou
should notde
be exposedelétrico,
to water
. . . . . . . . .CAUTION:
29
CAUTION:
The apparatus
should
not be
to water
Mini Glossary
for Audio
Stream
& exposed
Surround
(dripping
or The
splashing)
and should
no objects
filled
with
liquids,
such
não exponha
esse
produto
à chuva
ou
à umidade.
apparatus
not be
. . . . . . . . .CAUTION:
29
(dripping
or
splashing)
and
no
objects
filled
Mode
. should
. . . . .be
. . placed
. . . . .on
. .the
. . apparatus.
. . . . .exposed
. with
. . . liquids,
. .to. water
. . .such
. 14
as
vases,
splashing)
and no
filled with liquids, such
as
vases,or
should
be placed
on objects
the apparatus.
. . . . . . . . .(dripping
29
Sound
.esse
. placed
. . .produto
. . on
. . the
. .em
.apparatus.
. espaços
. . . . . . .confinados,
. . . . . . . 14
Aviso:
Não Mode
instalebe
should
. . . . . . . . .as
30vases,
On-Screen
Display
. . .lugares
. . . . . similares.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
como
uma
estante
de livro
ou
This product
may
not be used
outdoor, restricted to
. . . . . . . . .CAUTION:
30
CAUTION:
This product
Initial Settings
. . . . may
. . . .not
. . be
. . used
. . . .outdoor,
. . . . . .restricted
. . 16-19to
only.
CAUTION:
This product may not be used outdoor, restricted to
. . . . . . . . .indoor
30 � use
indoor
use
only.
General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
use only.
. . . . . . . . .indoor
30 � Language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
AVISO:
Esse Produto emprega sistema a laser.
Operation
. . . . . . . . . 31
DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
. . . . . . . Para
. . 31garantir o uso correto desse produto, por favor leia
Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
. . . . . . . 32-33
esseGeneral
de instruções
2manual Features
. . . cuidadosamente
. . . . . . . . . . . . e. .guarde-o
. . . . 20-22
. . . . . . . para
. . 342
referência.
Se a unidade
necessitar
� Moving
to another
TITLE/GROUP
. .de
. . reparo
. . . . 20
2futura
técnico,
Autorizado.
� contate
Moving otoServiço
another
CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20
� Slow exposição
Motion. . .direta
. . . . ao
. . .feixe
. . . de
. . .laser,
. . . .não
. . . abra
. . 20
Para prevenir
� Still
Picture and
Frame-by-Frame
. 20
a tampa
de proteção.
Há radiação
visível de Playback
laser quando
aberta.� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
NÃO OLHE DIRETAMENTE PARA O FEIXE DE LUZ.
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
AVISO:
aparelho
não .deve
�O
Marker
Search
. . . ficar
. . . .exposto
. . . . . . à. água,
. . . . .(gote. . . 21
jamento
ou esguicho)
� Zoom.
. . . . .e. nenhum
. . . . . . objeto
. . . . . cheio
. . . . .de. .líquidos,
. . . . . 21
Special
. . .sobre
. . . . ele.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
como
vasos,DVD
deve Features
ser colocado
� Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
AVISO:
Esse aparelho deve ser usado somente em
� Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22
ambiente
interno.
� Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2
4
About
the symbols
for
About
symbols
for instructions
instructions
Sobre os the
símbolos
para instruções
About
the
symbols
for instructions
Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the
Audio
CD riscos
andhazards
MP3/WMA
. . .causam
. harm
. . . . .danos
. . the
. . .àunit
. 23
Indicates
likelyDisc
to cause
to
unit
Indica
que provavelmente
itself
or other
material
damage.
Indicates
likely
to
cause harm
itself oran
other
material
damage.
Playing
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Discto . the
. . . unit
. 23
unidade
ouhazards
a outros
materiais.
itself
or other
� Pause
. . . material
. . operating
. . . . damage.
. . . .features
. . . . . . of
. . this
. . . unit.
. . . . . 23
Indicates
special
Indica
recurso
de
operação
especial
dessa
unidade.
Indicates
operating
� Movingspecial
to another
Trackfeatures
. . . . . .of. this
. . . .unit.
. . . . 23
Indicates special operating features of this unit.
� Repeat
Track/All/Off.
. . . . . the
. . . task
. . . .easier.
. . . . 23
Indicates
tips
and hints for. .making
Indicates
tips
and hints for
making
the
task easier.
Indica
dicas
e
conselhos
para
tornar
a
tarefa
mais
� Search.
. . and
. . . hints
. . . . for
. . .making
. . . . . .the
. . task
. . . .easier.
. . . .fácil.
23
Indicates
tips
Manufactured
under license .from
JPEG
Disc Operation
. . . Dolby
.Dolby
. . . .Laboratories.
. . . . . . . . .“Dolby”,
. . . . 24
Manufactured
under license from
Laboratories.
“Dolby”,
“Pro
Logic”,
and
the
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
of
Dolby
Manufactured
license
from
Viewing
aunder
JPEG
disc
. symbol
. . .Dolby
. . are
. .Laboratories.
. trademarks
. . . . . “Dolby”,
. . .“Dolby”,
. “Pro
. 24
“Pro
Logic”, sob
and
the double-D
of. .Dolby
Produzido
licença
daUnpublished
Dolby
Laboratories.
Laboratories.
Confidential
works.
Copyright
1992“Pro
Logic”,
and
the double-D
are
Laboratories.
Confidential
1992� eSlide
Show
. . All
.Unpublished
. rights
. symbol
. .são
. reserved.
. .marcas
. works.
. . trademarks
. . . Copyright
. . . . .of. .Dolby
.da
. 24
1997
Dolby
Logic”,
o Laboratories.
símbolo
double-D
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.registradas
Copyright 19921997 Dolby
Laboratories.
All
rights
reserved.
� Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1997
Dolby
Laboratories.
Allfrom
rightsDigital
reserved.
Dolby
Laboratories.
Trabalhos
Confidenciais
Impublicáveis.
Manufactured
under license
Theater Systems,
Inc.
Manufactured
under
from
Moving
to license
another
fileDigital
. . . . Theater
. . . 5,978,762
. . .Systems,
. . . . and
. . Inc.
. 24
US
Pat.� No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
Direitos
Autorais
1992-1997
Dolby
Laboratories.
Todos
os
US
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
and
Manufactured
under
license
from
other
worldwide
patents
issued
� No.
To rotate
picture.
. .and
. .Digital
.pending.
. . . Theater
. . . “DTS”
.5,978,762
. .Systems,
. and
.and
. . “DTS
.“DTS
. Inc.
. 24
other
worldwide
patents
issued
and
pending.
“DTS”
US
Pat.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
Digital
Surround”
are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
direitos
reservados.
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Digitalworldwide
Surround”
are registered
trademarks
of“DTS”
Digital
Theater
other
patents
issued2000
and
pending.
and
“DTS25
Systems,
Inc. Copyright
1996,
Digital Theater
Systems,
Systems,
Inc.Programmed
Copyright
1996,
2000
Digital
Digital
Surround”
are registered
trademarks
of
Repeat
Tracks.
. . . .Theater
. . Digital
. . . .Systems,
.Theater
. . . . 25
Inc.
All
rights
reserved.
Inc. All rights
Systems,
Inc.reserved.
Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems,
Produzido
licençafrom
da Digital
TheaterList
Systems,
Erasing
a Track
Programme
. . . . .Inc.
. . . 25
Inc.
All rightssob
reserved.
the
Complete
Programme
List 5,978,762
. . . . . . . 25
US Erasing
Pat. No.ON
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
e
OTES
COPYRIGHTS:
OTES
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
Disc
Operation
. ., .broadcast,
. . . .and
. . .show
. . . ,. broadcast
. . . . . Surround”
. . . . 26
ItDivX
is forbidden
by COPYRIGHTS:
law
to copy
patentes
mundiais.
“DTS
OTES
ON
Itoutras
is forbidden
by law
to copy,“DTS”
broadcast,
show, Digital
broadcast
Speaker
Setup
. . to
. .copy
. .rent
., .broadcast,
.copyrighted
. . . . . . show
. .material
. ,. broadcast
. . . .without
. . . . . 27
via
play
in public,
or
Itsão
iscable,
forbidden
by
marcas
Digital
Theater
Systems,
Inc.
via
cable,
playregistradas
in law
public,
orda
rent
copyrighted
material
without
permission.
Additional
. . copyrighted
. . . . . . . . material
. . . . . .without
. . . . . 28
via cable, playInformation
in public, or rent
permission.
Copyright
1996,
2000
Digital
Theater
Systems,
Inc.
Todos
This
product
features the
copy protection
Last
Condition
. . . . . . function
.function
. . . . .developed
. . . . . . . 28
permission.
This
product
features Memory
the copy protection
developed
by
Copy protection
osMacrovision.
direitos
This
productreservados.
features
Screen
Saver
. .the
. . copy
. . . .protection
.signals
. . . . .are
.function
. recorded
. . . . developed
. . on
.on. some
.some
. . 28
by
Macrovision.
Copy
protection
signals
are
recorded
discs.
When recording
and playing
the pictures
of these
discs
by
Macrovision.
Copy
protection
signals
are
recorded
on
discs.
When recording
and. playing
the
pictures
of
these
Controlling
the
TV
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. discs
.some
. . 28
on
a
VCR,
picture
noise
will
appear.
discs.
Whenpicture
recording
and
on
a VCR,
noise
willplaying
Operation
with
Radio
.appear.
. . . . the
. . .pictures
. . . . technology
. of
. . these
. . . . discs
. that
. . 29
Notas
sobre
direitos
autorais.
This
product
incorporates
copyright
on
VCR, picture
noise will
appear.protection
Thisa product
incorporates
copyright
protection technology that
Presetting
thecopiar,
radio
stations
. .exibir,
.U.S.
. . .patents
.technology
. . . . and
. . . other
. . 29
is
by
method
claims
of certain
É protected
proibido
lei
transmitir,
transmitir
This
productpor
incorporates
copyright
protection
that
is
protected
by
method
claims
of certain
U.S. patents
andvia
other
intellectual
property
rights
owned
by
Listening
radio
. of
. .certain
. . Macrovision
. . .U.S.
. . . patents
. por
. Corporation
.Corporation
. direito
. and
. . . other
. . 29
is
protected
by to
method
claims
cabo,
publicar
outhe
alugar
material
protegido
intellectual
property
rights
owned
by
Macrovision
and
other
rights
owners.
Use
of
this
copyright
protection
techOther
Functions.
. . .Use
.owned
. .of. this
. by
. . copyright
. . . . . . .protection
. .Corporation
. . . . tech. . . 30
intellectual
property
rights
Macrovision
and
other
rights
owners.
autoral
sem
permissão.
Esse
produto
possui
um
sistema
nology
must
be
authorized
by
Macrovision
Corporation,
and
and
other
rights
owners.
Use
techSleep
Timer
Setting
. .ofMacrovision
. this
. . . copyright
. . . . Corporation,
. . .protection
. . . . . .and
. . .isis30
nology
must
be authorized
by
intended
for home
andcópia,
otherbydesenvolvido
limited
viewingCorporation,
usesMacrovision.
only unless
de proteção
contra
pela
nology
must
be
authorized
Macrovision
and
intended
for home
and
other
limited
viewing
uses
only
unless
Dimmer
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .is30
otherwise
authorized
byother
Macrovision
Corporation.
Reverse
intended
home and
limitedsão
Sinais
defor
proteção
em
alguns
otherwise
authorized
by
Reverse
Mute
. or
. .disassembly
. . . . contra
. . Macrovision
. . is
.cópia
.prohibited.
. . . . viewing
.Corporation.
. gravados
. . . uses
. . . .only
. . . unless
. . . . 30
engineering
otherwise
authorized
by Macrovision
Corporation. Reverse
engineering
or disassembly
is prohibited.
discos
originais.
Quando
copiadas
Using
the
Headphone
. e. .reproduzidas,
. . . . . . . . . .as
. . . 30
engineering
or disassembly
is Jack
prohibited.
Selecting
the
Input
Source
.
.
. . .interferência.
. . . . on
. . the
. . .back
.Esse
. . 30
imagens
desse
disco
aparecerão
com
SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located
SERIAL
NUMBER:
The
serial
number
located
XTS
(Excellent
True
Sound)
. .is. unit
. . .and
. . .on
. .the
. . back
. . . 30
of
this
unit.
This number
is
unique
this
not
available
produto
incorpora
tecnologia
deto
proteção
contra
cópias,
of
this
unit.
This
number
is
unique
to
this
unit
and
not
available
SERIAL
NUMBER:
The
serial
number
is
located
on
the
back
to others.
You
record
XTS
pro
.should
. number
. . .por
.record
. .is
. unique
.requested
. . . .to
. .this
.information
. unit
. . .americanas
. . . not
.here
. .available
. and
. . . 30
to
others.
You
should
requested
information
here
and
of
this
This
and
que
é unit.
reivindicada
algumas
patentes
retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase.
retain
this You
guide
as a permanent
record information
of your purchase.
to
others.
should
record requested
here and
e por this
direito
de as
propriedade
intelectual
pertencentes
retain
guide
a permanent
record of your
purchase.à
Reference
Model
No.
___________________________________
Macrovision
Corporation e a outros detentores do direito. O
Model
No. ___________________________________
Language
Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Serial
No.
Model
No.___________________________________
___________________________________
uso dessa
tecnologia
de proteção deve ser autorizado pela
Serial
No. ___________________________________
Country
Code
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Serial No. ___________________________________
Macrovision Corporation,
ou
Troubleshooting
. . . . . e. é
. .destinado
. . . . . . . a. .fim
. . residencial
. . . . . 32-33
de exibição limitada,
Specifications
. . . salvo,
. . . . .em
. . .caso
. . . .contrário,
. . . . . . .com
. . . prévia
. . . 34
autorização da Macrovision Corporation. Manobras de
reversão e desmontagem desse sistema são proibidas.
Número de série:
Você pode encontrar o número de série na parte traseira
dessa unidade. Esse número é único e não está disponível
para outros equipamentos. Você deverá registrar essa
informação aqui, e guardar esse manual como registro
permanente de sua compra.
Número do modelo: _____________________________
Número de série: _______________________________
Introduction
about
the presence
uninsulated
dangerous
equilateral
triangle isof
to alert
the user
about the presence
ofintended
uninsulated
dangerous
voltage
within
the product’s
enclosure
that may be
about the
presence
of uninsulated
dangerous
voltage
within
the product’s
enclosure
that may be
of
sufficient
magnitude
to
constitute
a
risk
electric
voltage
within
the product’s
enclosure
thatof
may
be
of
sufficient
magnitude
to constitute
a risk
of
electric
shock
to
persons.
of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock
to persons.
shock to persons.
The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle
The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle
is
intended
to alertmark
the user about
the presence
of
The
exclamation
an equilateral
triangle
is intended
to alert the within
user about
the presence
of
important
operating
anduser
maintenance
is
intended
to alert the
about the (servicing)
presence of
important
operating
and maintenance
(servicing)
Introduction
instructions
in
the
instructions
accompanying
the
important
operating
and maintenance
(servicing)
instructions
in the instructions
accompanying
the
PRECAUÇÃO
product.
Safety Precautions
. . instructions
. . . . . . . .accompanying
. . . . . . . . . .the
..2
instructions
product. .in. .the
RISCO
DE
CHOQUE
ELÉTRIproduct.
Table
of
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..3
. . WARNING:
23
TO PREVENT
FIRE
OR
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
WARNING:
Before
UseDO
.TO
. . PREVENT
. . .EXPOSE
. CO.
. . .NÃO
.FIRE
. THIS
. ABRA.
. .OR
. PRODUCT
. ELECTRIC
. . . . . . .TO
. SHOCK
. RAIN
. . . . OR
4-5
. . HAZARD,
23
WARNING:
TONOT
PREVENT
HAZARD,
NOT
PlayableDO
Discs
. .EXPOSE
. . . . FIRE
. . THIS
. . OR
. .PRODUCT
.ELECTRIC
. . . . . . .TO
.SHOCK
.RAIN
. . . .OR
.4
. . MOISTURE.
23
HAZARD,
DO NOT EXPOSE
THISo PRODUCT
TO RAIN OR
Advertência:
Para
reduzir
risco
de
choque
MOISTURE.
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . 23
MOISTURE.
elétrico,
não
remova
a
tampa.
Não
existem
not install
a confined
Notes onDo
Discs
. . . .this
. . equipment
.equipment
. . . . . . .in
. . . . . .space
...5
. .WARNING:
23
WARNING:
Do
not install
this
in. .a .confined
space
as apeças
book
case
similar
unit.
para
ajuste
About
.or
.this
. . .equipment
. . . . .pelo
. .in. usuário.
.a .confined
. . . . . .space
...5
WARNING:
Do internas
not
. .such
23
such
as aSymbols
book
caseinstall
or. .similar
unit.
as
a book
case
or
Front
and
Rear
Panelunit.
.técnico
. . . . . autorizado.
............6
Encaminhe-o
aosimilar
serviço
. .such
24 Panel
(8 cm / 12 cm disc)
ote on DTS-encoded CDs
InWhen
addition,
this DTS-encoded
unit can play aCDs,
DVD-RW,
DVD+RW
playing
excessive
audio
SVCD
and
CD-R
or
CD-RW
that
contains
audioTotitle
DVD
Playable
Discs
may be heard from the analog stereo output.
a
Before
Use
ote
DTS-encoded
Before
AntesUse
do(8Uso
MP3,
WMA,
JPEG
oron
DivX
files.system, CDs
cm / 12 cm disc)
possible
damage
to
the
audio
turn down t
When playing DTS-encoded CDs, exc
volume before playing back such discs, adjust the
Playable
Discs
DVD
Playable
Discs
DVD audio discs
Introduction
Discos
reproduzíveis.
may CDs
be heard from
the analog stereo
ote
on
DTS-encoded
CDs
ote
on
DTS-encoded
otes
otas
CDs decodificados
volume
gradually,
and
keep
level low.
Audio
CDsobre
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . DTS
. . the
. . audio
. .volume
. . .level
. . . . 23
Safety
Precautions
. . ./. 12
. . . cm
. (8
. . .cm
. . . ./ .12
. . .cm
. . . .disc)
. . 2 When
Introduction
(8 cm
disc)
When
playing
DTS-encoded
CDs,
excessive
audio
level
playing
DTS-encoded
CDs,
excessive
possible
damage
to
the
audio
system,
TM
DVD
Ao
reproduzir
CDs
codificados
DTS,
um
nível
de
DVD
�
DVD
Depending
on
the
conditions
of
the
eq
Playing
an
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.. .. 23
Table
of
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
an
enjoy
Digital
Surround
CDDTS
and
MP3/WMA
Disc .output.
. . . . playback,
. To
. .excessivo
.avoid
. .. .. ..recording
23 externa
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 may
mayAudio
be heard
heard
from the
the analog
analog
stereo
output.
To
be
from
stereo
avoid
volume
before
playing
back
such
discs
(8
cm
/
12
cm
disc)
TM
(8
cm
/
12
cm
disc)
de
�
Pause
.Audio
.the
. .CD-R/RW
.audio
.CD
.and
. .Surround
.MP3/WMA
. . (or
. turn
.turn
. .DVD-RW,
.down
.estéreo.
.Disc
. decoder
. the
. .. .. Para
.. ..DVD+RW)
.. 23
Before
. . . Video
. . . .. ..(discos
. .. .. .. .(VCD)
. ..DVD
. .. .. .. .4-5
aúdio
pode
ser
ouvido
da. .saída
analógica
Playing
an
23system
Table ofUse
Contents
.. .CD
..8.. cm
.. .. ../ audio
..12
.. ..cm)
.. .. .. .discs
. 3 possible
possible
damage
to
the
audio
system,
down
the
damage
to
system,
m
channel
DTS
Digital
ment
or
the
d
�
to.volume
.. ..áudio,
.adjust
..diminua
.the
.. .. ..o.. nível
.. 23
Playable
. .. .DVD
. .. .. .. .de
. .. ..áudio
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5
. 4 volume
the volum
evitar
possíveis
sistema
� Moving
Pause
.danos
.another
.back
. ao
. . such
.such
. Track
.gradually,
. discs,
.discs,
. .de
. .. .. ..and
. .. .. keep
23
Before
Use Discs
. . .(8
. .. .cm
.(8
volume
before
playing
before
playing
back
adjust
the
cm
/
12
cm
disc)
DVD
audio
discs
/
12
cm
disc)
DVD
audio
discs
be
connected
to
the
digital
output
of
the
unit.
itself,
some
CD-R/RW
(or
DVD-RW,
DVD+RW)
d
�
Track/All/Off.
. . Digital
. .. ..level
.level
.. ..Surround
.tais
.discos,
.. .. .. .. ..TM
23
Precautions
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54 volume
� Repeat
Moving
to
another
. .. de
. .. .. To
.To
23playback
Playable Discs
volume
gradually,
and
keep
the
volume
low.
gradually,
keep
volume
low.
do volume
antesand
de
iniciarthe
a Track
reprodução
enjoy
DTS
(8 cm
cm //de
128cm
cm
disc)
(8
12
(discos
cmdisc)
/ 12 cm)
cannot
be
�
. played
. . . . . . .playback,
.on
. .. ..the
.. ..an
.unit.
.. .. .. .. .. ..5.1
.. .. .. .. 23
Notes
on Discs
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 enjoy
enjoy
DTS
Digital
Surround
playback,
an
�o Search.
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
. .. .external
.external
Precautions
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Video
DTS
Digital
ajuste
volumeSurround
gradativamente,
e.. mantenha-o
no5.1
nível 23TM decod
CD
(VCD)
Audio
CD
channel
DTS
Digital
Surround
JPEG
Operation
.decoder
.. .. .. ..or
.. ..system
.label
.. .. either
.. .. .. .. 24
About
.. .. Vídeo
.Video
.. .. .. ..CD
.CD
.(VCD)
system
must
channel
DTS
Digital
Surround
CD
(VCD)
DTS
Digital
�Disc
Search.
.Surround
. . . terms
.any
. .. .. ..seal
.decoder
. .. .. .. .. ..must
23side (the
Notes Symbols
on Discs
.Video
. .. ..(VCD)
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 channel
�
Do
not
attach
to
Before
Use
Disc-related
baixo.
Para
usufruir
dadisc
reprodução
cm
12
cm
disc)
be
connected
of th
Viewing
JPEG
.. ..the
.DTS
.unit.
..Digital
.the
..Surround,
.. .. .. .. .. ..output
24
Front
Panel
and(8Rear
Panel
.12
..8.cm
.cm
.. disc)
.disc)
./. ..12
.. .. ..cm
.. .. .. .disc)
be connected
connected
toaOperation
the
digital
output
of
the
(8
12
cm)
to
the
digital
output
JPEG
Disc
. .. .. .. ..of
. ..to
.unit.
. .. .. .. digital
24
About
Symbols
. . (discos
.(8
./cm
.cm
. . //.de
. (8
.cm
.cm
./..12
. .. .. 65 be
labeled
side
or
the
recorded
side)
of
a
disc.
um
decodificador
externo
Surround com 5.124
� Slide
. disc
. . .DTS
.. .. .. .Digital
Title
(DVD
only)
Remote
Control
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76
Viewing
aShow
JPEG
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Front Panel
and Overview
RearÁudio
Panel
CD
Audio
CD
Audio
CD
ddition, this
unitControl
can play
a DVD-RW,
canais
ser
conectado
�
Do
notterms
use
irregularly
heart-sh
CD
�
Still
Picture
.content
.. .. or
.. shaped
.. .da
.. ..unidade.
.. .. .. ..CDs
.. .. .. .. ..(e.g.,
.. .. .. 24
�deve
Slide
Show
. .. .. .. ..à.. saída
.accompanying
24
Disc-related
terms
Remote
Overview
. Audio
.8cm
.cm
. . disc)
./DVD+RW,
.12
. . cm)
. . . . . . . . . 7 Disc-related
Playable
Discs
The
main
film
feature
co
(8
12
(8 cm
cm. //.de
12
disc)
(discos
cm
�
Moving
toDisc-related
another
.. .. .. ..terms
.. ..in
.. .. .malfunctions.
.. 24
DTS-encoded
�octagonal).
Still
Picture
. .ote
. .may
. file
.on
. . ..result
. .. .. .. .. .. .. CDs
24
D and CD-R
or CD-RW that
contains
titles,
(8 cmaudio
/ 12 cm
disc) Title
Preparation
oradditional
It
Titleor
(DVD
only)
(DVD
only)
feature
content,
or
music
album.
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
In
addition,
can
play
aa DVD-RW,
DVD+RW,
InConnections
addition, this
this .unit
unit
can
play
DVD-RW,
DVD+RW,
Moving
toTitle
another
file . only)
. . .DTS-encoded
. . . . . .content
. . . . . . . 24
When
playing
CDs, exc
The main
main�film
film
content
or accompanying
accompanying
feature
content
(DVD
. . . .files.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 The
, WMA,SVCD
JPEG
or DivX
content
or
feature
Preparation
Each
title
is content,
assigned
ena
Programmed
Playback
.or
.music
.. .album.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..number
.. 25
and
or
CD-RW
that
audio
titles,
SVCD
and CD-R
CD-R
orunidade
CD-RW
that contains
contains
audio DVD+RW,
titles, DVD+RW,
� To
rotate
picture.
. .. music
. ..a.. ..title
. .. ..reference
24
In
addition,
this
unit
Além
desses,
essa
reproduz
DVD
or additional
additional
feature
content,
feature
or
album.
TV
Connections
. .. .. ..can
. .. .. .. play
. .. .. .DVD-RW,
. ..a.. ..DVD-RW,
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13
. . 8 or
Connections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Termos
relacionados
aos
discos
may
be
heard
from
the
analog
stereo
The
main
film
content
or
accompanyin
MP3,
WMA,
JPEG
or DivX
DivXque
files.
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks.
.. number
.. .. .. .. .. .. enabling
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
MP3,
WMA,
JPEG
or
files.
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
you
to
locate
it
easily.
Each
title
is
assigned
a
title
reference
SVCD
e
CD-R
ou
CD-RW
contenha
títulos
de
áudio,
Each
title
is
assigned
a
title
reference
number
enabling
SVCD
andEquipment
CD-R . or
titles,
Optional
.contains
.. .. .. .disc)
98
TV Connections
. Connections
. .CD-RW
. . . . (8
. . .cm
.that
. .. ./. ..12
. .. ..cm
. .. .. audio
otes
on
DVDs
and
Video
CDs
possible
damage
system,
Erasing
aeasily.
Track
from
Programme
.. .. .. ..audio
.. .. .. 25
or
additional
content,
music
(somente
DVD)
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks.
.feature
. . .List
. to
. . ..the
25or
youTítulos
to locate
locate
to
itit easily.
otes MP3,
Connections
. .Connections
. . .DivX
. .ou
. . DivX.
.files.
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10
e/ouAerial
arquivos
MP3,
WMA,
JPEG
Optional
Equipment
. 9 you
WMA,
JPEG
or
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
List
.. ..a.back
.title
25
Erasing
a Track
from
Programme
List
.disco
. .. .. ..de
25
otes
Some
operations
ofplaying
DVDs
and
Video
CDs
volume
before
such discs
otes
Each
title
is assigned
reference
Um
títuloplayback
é geralmente
uma
seção
distinta
de.um
Speaker
System Connection
. .. .11-12
Aerial
Connections
. . .of
. . the
. . DVD
.. ..recording
.. .. ..audio
.. .. .. .. .. .. discs
.equip. . 10
epending
on
the
conditions
Chapter
(DVD
only)
DivX
Disc
Operation
. . . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
the
Complete
25
� Depending
Depending
on the
the conditions
conditions
of
the
recording
equip(DVD
only)
�
on
Chapter
(DVD
only)
�
DVD.
Cada
título
está
relacionado
ao
número
específico,
may
be
intentionally
fixed
by
software
manufacturer
� Transmitter.
. . . . . . .of
. .the
. .. ..recording
. .. .. .. .. .. ..equip. .. .. 11-12
. . 11 Chapter
volume
gradually,
and
keep
the
volum
you
to
locate
it
easily.
Speaker
System. Connection
.
.
.
(8 cm
/ 12 cm
disc) Sections
Speaker
.or. picture
.a.musical
.. .. .. .. .. or
. piece
. ..a.. ..musical
.that
.. .. .smaller
..piece
.. .. .. .. .. 27
Sections
ofa. aor
that are s
ent or thement
CD-R/RW
(or
DVD-RW,
DVD+RW)
disc
DivX
Disc
Operation
. .. .. .are
.are
.smaller
26
of
picture
a
that
Sections
of a
aSetup
picture
musical
or
(or
DVD+RW)
disc
ment
or the
the CD-R/RW
CD-R/RW
(or DVD-RW,
DVD-RW,
DVD+RW)
disc
TM
�
a channel
para
lhe
facilitar
localização
e..piece
o.Digital
� Changing
Transmitter.
. . . . . . .of. Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
11
otes
As
this
unit
otas:
playbackt
Additional
Information
..of
.of
.acesso
.or
.several
.. ..rápido.
..Surround
.. ..chap.chap..CDs
.. .. .. .. .according
Speaker
Setup
.enjoy
.title
. . . DVDs
. is
.DTS
. ..one
. ..and
. or
. .. several
. Video
.one
. 28
27
than
titles.
AAtitles.
title
is
composed
than
titles.
title
isplays
composed
one
itself,
some
(or
DVD+RW)
discs
itself,
some CD-R/RW
CD-R/RW
(or DVD-RW,
DVD-RW,
DVD+RW)
discs
than
A
composed
of
or
several
ch
self, some
CD-R/RW
(or
DVD-RW,
DVD+RW)
discs
�
Setting
a
ID
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
� Changing
acondições
channel
of
. .the
. . grava. recording
. . . 11
TM
• cannot
Dependendo
dason
doTransmitter
equipamento
de
Last
Condition
Memory
.. .. .. the
.. .Digital
..software
.. .. .. .. Surround
.. .. .. .. ..manufacture
.. .. 28
Video
CD
(VCD)
�
Depending
the
conditions
ofSpeakers
equipdisc
content
by
channel
ters.
Each
chapter
is
assigned
ters.
Each
chapter
isdesigned
assigned
chapter
number,
be
on
the
unit.
Chapter
(DVD
only)
Additional
Information
. a.a.DTS
.chapter
. ..number,
28 decod
cannot
be played
played
on
theConnecting
unit.
�
Assembling
and
to
the
11
� Setting
a ID unit.
of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 enabling
ters.
Each
chapter
is
assigned
a
chapter
number,
annot be
played
on
the
Capítulo
(somente
DVD)
Screen
Saver
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
you
to
locate
the
chapter
you
want.
Depending
�
enabling
you
to
locate
the
chapter
you
want.
Depending
ção
ou
do
CD-R/RW
(DVD
-R,
DVD
+R,
DVD
–RW,
DVD
� Do
Do
not
attach
any
seal or
or label
label
to
side
(the
Last
Condition
Memory
. of
. . of
.a. picture
.the
. . the
. unit
. . . digital
.or
.may
.a
. . musical
. not
.output
28 be avai
not
attach
any
seal
�
cm
cm
some
playback
features
be
connected
to
of
th
Sections
piec
ment
or the
CD-R/RW
(or
DVD+RW)
disc
�
Speaker
Connections.
. (8
.to
. either
.either
. to
.DVD-RW,
. the
./side
.12
.Speakers
. .(the
. . . .disc)
. 12
�
Assembling
and
Connecting
11 on
Controlling
thesegmento
TV
.not
..de
.. .recorded.
..the
.. ..título,
.. .chapter
.. .. .. .. .uma
.. ..want.
28
enabling
Depe
o not attach
any
seal
orrecorded
label
tonão
either
side
(the
Um
capítulo
é you
um
um
disc,
chapters
may
not
on the
the
disc,
chapters
be
Screen
Saver
.may
.to
. . locate
. .. ..be
.recorded.
. .. ..como
. .you
. .. ..cena
28
labeled
side
ordiscos
the
recorded
side)
of .reproduzido
disc.
labeled
side
or
the
aa.disc.
+RW),
alguns
nesta
Speaker
Positioning.
. podem
. . . . . .side)
.. ..(or
..ser
.of
or
other
functions
may
be
added.
� Speaker
Connections.
. .. DVD-RW,
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .DVD+RW)
. .. 13
12
than
titles.
A
title
is
composed
of
one
o
itself,
some
CD-R/RW
discs
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
� Do
Do
notOperation
use irregularly
irregularly
shaped
CDs
heart-shaped
theentrevista
TV . . . .numa
. .may
. . série.
. . not
. . .Cada
. be
. . .capítulo
. . . . . .está
28
num
filme
uma
�
not
use
CDs
heart-shaped
�
onControlling
theou
disc,
chapters
recorded.
beled side
or
the
recorded
a.. ..disc.
unidade.
Before
. . ..shaped
. .. .(e.g.,
.(e.g.,
Speaker
Positioning.
.. ..side)
..on
.. .. ..the
..Audio
.of
.. CD
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19
. . 13 Group
Make
sure
todiscs
also
refer
to
supplied
Presetting
the
radioonly)
stations
.. .. the
.. que
..terms
.. ..instructions
.você
..is
.. ..assigned
.. .. .. .. .. .. 29
Group
(DVD
audio
discs
only)
ters.
Each
chapter
a
chap
be
played
unit.
(DVD
audio
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
orcannot
octagonal).
It
may
result
in
malfunctions.
Disc-related
or
octagonal).
It
may
result
in
malfunctions.
relacionado
a
um
número,
permitindo
localize
Minicoloque
Glossary
for
&
Operation
. .Audio
. . . CDs
. Stream
. . .nos
.(8
. .lados
. . Surround
. ./heart-shaped
. 12
. um
. . cm
.disco
. . 14-19
o not use
irregularly
shaped
(e.g.,
cm
disc)
•Before
Não
selo
ou
etiqueta
de
(o The
The main
main
audio content
content
or accompanying
accompanying
feature
Listening
to
the
radio
. . CDs.
. you
. . .. .. to
.. .. ..feature
.. .. .. ..DVDs
. .con.. .. .. ..chapter
.made
audio
or
Presetting
the
radio
stations
.con. 29
29
DVDs
and
Video
foryou
bu
enabling
locate
the
� Do
not
any
(the
o or
capítulo
desejado.
Dependendo
doSome
disco,
os .capítulos
Mode
. . .attach
. . . . for
. . .Audio
. . . .seal
. . . . .or
.&
. label
. Surround
. . . . .to
. . either
. . . . 14sidethe
Mini
Glossary
Stream
Group
(DVD
Title
tentOther
additional
feature
Each
Functions.
.audio
. content,
.content,
. (DVD
. .. .. discs
.. .or
.. only)
.music
.. .. ..only)
.. .album.
.. .. .. .. ..Each
.. .. .. .. .. 30
tent
or
additional
feature
impresso
ou
o
de
gravação).
octagonal).
It
may
result
in
malfunctions.
Listening
to
the
radio
.or
.music
.album.
29 on the
Sound
Mode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
ness
purposes
may
not
be
able
to
be
played
on
the
disc,
chapters
may
not
be
reco
podem
não
estar
gravados.
Mode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
In otes
addition,
this
unit
can
play
a
DVD-RW,
DVD+RW,
labeled
side
or
the
recorded
side)
of
a
disc.
otes on
on DVDs
DVDs and
and Video
Video CDs
CDs
group
is
assigned
aSetting
group
number
enabling
group
is
assigned
group
reference
Sleep
Timeraaudio
.. .. .. .. ..film
.. ..number
.. ..content
..accompanying
.. .. ..enabling
.. .. .. ..or
.. .. ..accompanyin
.. .. 30
The
main
or
Other
Functions.
. . . content
.reference
30 feature
The
main
On-Screen
Display
.of
..irregulares
.DVDs
.. ..and
.. .. ..(por
.Video
.. ..CDs
.. .. .. .. .. .. 15
• Não
use
CDs
com
exemplos,
Sound
Mode
.irregularly
. formas
. . or
. . of
.CD-RW
. .. ..shaped
. .. ..CDs
14
Some
playback
operations
and
CDs
youunit.
totitles,
locate itTimer
it easily.
easily.
Some
playback
operations
DVDs
Video
you
to
locate
Dimmer
. . . .Setting
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
SVCD
and
CD-R
that
contains
audio
� Do
not
use
(e.g.,
heart-shaped
Sleep
30oralbum.
tent
or
additional
feature
content,
or
music
or
additional
feature
content,
music
Initial
Settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-19
em
forma
de
coração
ou
octogonal)
porque
eles
podem
On-Screen
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
may be
be intentionally
intentionally fixed
fixed by
by software
software manufacturers.
manufacturers.
may
Grupo
(somente
DVD
Mute
. . .. .. .. ..Group
.. .. .. ..de
.. .. áudio)
.. (DVD
.. .. .. .. .. .. .audio
.. .. .. .. .. .. only)
.. 30
Dimmer
. .. .. .. .. .. ..discs
30
MP3,
WMA,
JPEG
or
or
octagonal).
may
�unit
General
Operation
.Video
. ..files.
. . 16 Scene
Initial
Settings
. . . It
.and
.CDs
. .Video
..DivX
.. ..result
.. CDs
.CDs
.. ..according
..in
.. .. malfunctions.
.. .. .. .. ..to
.. 16-19
otes onAs
and
Video
group
is.do
assigned
a.Jack
group
enab
Each
title
is. ..recursos
assigned
reference
AsDVDs
this
plays
DVDs
according
to
causar
mal
funcionamento.
Scene
(VCD).the
this
unit
plays
DVDs
and
(VCD)
Using
Headphone
.. .. ..reference
.. .. .. adicionais,
.. .. .. ..a.. .title
..number
.. .. 30
O
conteúdo
áudio
principal,
de
Mute
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
code
of
the DVD/CD
receiver
and DVD
The
main
audio
content
or .accompany
�
. .by
. . the
. . ..software
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..manufacturer,
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16
� Language
General
Operation
16 On
disc content
content
designed
the
software
manufacturer,
OnRegional
Video
CD
with
PBC
(Playback
disc
designed
aayou
Video
with
PBC
(Playback
Selecting
the
Input
Source
. .control)
.. it
..é..easily.
.relacionado
.. .. .. .. .. .. a.. .um
e playback
operations
of.by
DVDs
and
Video
CDs
toCD
locate
it easily.
you
to
locate
Using
the
Headphone
Jack
.control)
. .. .functions,
.functions,
. . 30
30
ou
de
álbum
de
música,
Cada
grupo
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
� Language
. . . of
. . the
. . .unit
. . .may
. . . .not
. . be
.be
. .available
. . . . . . 16 moving
This
DVD/CD
Receiver
is. .. divided
designed
and..manufacture
some playback
playback
features
of
the
unit
may
not
available
moving
pictures
and tent
still
pictures
are
into
orSound)
additional
or m
some
features
pictures
and
pictures
are
XTS
(Excellent
True
.divided
.. .. .. feature
..into
.. .rápido.
.sec.. 30
Selecting
the still
Input
. ..acesso
. ..sec. .. .. ..content,
30
otes
be intentionally
fixed
software
otas
sobre
e.. .Vídeo
número
de
referência,
lheSource
permitindo
�
Audio.
. DVDs
.may
.be
.added.
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-17
. . 17 tions
�functions
Display
.DVDs
..by
.. .. .be
.. .. .. .. CDs.
..Video
.. ..manufacturers.
.. .. .. .. .CDs
or other
other
functions
may
added.
tions
called
“Scenes”.
scene
displayed
in
or
called
“Scenes”.
playback
of
“4”
encoded
XTS
pro
. . .region
. group
. Each
.Each
. . . .scene
. . .assigned
. is
.is..displayed
.. .. .. .. .. ..DVD
.. .in
.. the
.the
..software.
.. .. .. reference
.. 30
otes
on
and
is
a
group
n
XTS
(Excellent
True
Sound)
.
.
30
Algumas
operações
de
reprodução
de
DVDs
podem
ser
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
� Depending
the
of
equiphis unit Make
plays
to
(VCD)
Chapter
(DVD
only)
Make
sure
to also
also
refer
to
the
with
menuScene
screen and
and
assigned
scene
number,
enabling
�DVDs
Audio.
.and
.refer
.on
. . Video
.to
. .the
. .conditions
.instructions
.CDs
. . . . .according
. . supplied
.supplied
. . .the
. . .with
.recording
. . 17 menu
sure
to
instructions
screen
assigned
aa scene
number,
enabling
XTS
pro
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
The
region
code
on
the
labels
of
some
DVDs
Some
playback
operations
of
DVDs
and
Video
CDs
you
to
locate
it
easily.
�
. .programadas
. .CDs.
. . software
.Control)
. Some
. . . .pelo
.DVDs
.. ..fabricante
.. .. ..made
.. .. .. .. for
.de
.. .. .. .. 19
intencionalmente
the
DVDs
and
Video
CDs.
Some
DVDs
made
for
busiyouCena
to
locate
the scene
scene
you
want.
� Others
Lock
(Parental
. .. ..software.
18 you
DVDs
and
busito
locate
the
want.
(VCD)
contentthe
designed
by
the
manufacturer,
On
a Video
CDyou
with
PBC
(Playback
Sections
of a picture
or acontrol)
musicalfuncti
piec
ment
orVideo
the
CD-R/RW
(or
DVD-RW,
DVD+RW)
disc
Reference
indicates
which
type
player
candeplay
those
ness
purposes
may
not
be
able
to
be
played
the
may
beOthers
intentionally
by
scene
is VCD
composed
offunções
one or
orof
several
tracks.
ness
may
be
is
composed
of
one
several
tracks.
�
. . .not
. . .DVDs
. . able
.fixed
. de
. .to
.acordo
.be
. . played
. software
.com
. . . on
.oon
.conteúdo
.the
. . manufacturers.
. . . 19 AA scene
Essapurposes
unidade
reproduz
Em
um
com than
as
PBC
(controle
reprodução),
e playback
features
of
the
unit
may
not
be
available
moving
pictures
and
still
pictures
are
divided
into
Language
Code
List
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
titles.
A
title
is
composed
of
one
os
itself,
some
CD-R/RW
(or
DVD-RW,
DVD+RW)
discs
Reference
unit.
unit.
Operation
discs.
unit
can
play
“4” or “A
As
this pelo
unitfabricante
plays DVDs
andportanto
Videoalguns
CDs according
toasThis
projetado
de software,
Scene
mover
imagens
e congelá-las
estão
em
Country
Code
List
. . ..Each
.. only
.. (VCD)
.. .. .. Each
..chapter
.. .. .. .. .DVDs
.. .. ..is
.. ..assigned
..labeled
.is
.. .. 31
Language
Code
List
.divididas
. .. ..displayed
31 a chap
her functions
may
be
added.
tions
called
“Scenes”.
scene
in
ters.
cannot
be
played
on
the
unit.
Types
of
Video
CDs
Types
of
Video
CDs
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
. . .the
. . . software
. disponíveis
. . . . . . . . manufacturer,
19-22
Operation
recursos
de
reprodução
podemby
não
estar
ou
If
you chamadas
try
to play
“Chec
disc
content
designed
Troubleshooting
. . .“.any
. .. Video
. ..discs,
. .. ..é..the
On
(Playback
co
seções
de
Cenas”.
visualizada
Country
Code
List
.a
..assigned
.. other
.. .. ..Cada
.. .CD
..cena
.. .with
..PBC
.. .. ..message
..number,
.32-33
. . 31
Regional
code
of
the
DVD/CD
receiver
and
DVDs
code
of
the
DVD/CD
receiver
and
DVDs
e sure Regional
to
also
refer
to
instructions
menu
and
a
scene
enab
enabling
you
to
locate
you
�
Do
not
any
seal
(the
Playing
aattach
DVD
and
Video
CD.
.with
. 19side
There
are two
twoscreen
types. of
of
Video
CDs:
There
are
types
Video
CDs:
DVD
or
Video
CDthe
Operation
. . .or
.. .. label
.. ..supplied
.. .. .. ..to
.. .. either
.. .. 19-22
outras
funções
podem
ser
adicionadas.
Specifications
.e..relacionadas
. ..um
. the
. .the
. ..cena,
. chapter
. 34 Some
em
menus
de
tela
Troubleshooting
..will
.. .. .. ..appear
..pictures
.. .. .. .a
.. on
.. ..número
.and
.. .. .. ..still
.de
..pictures
32-33
Regional
Code”
TV
screen.
This
DVD/CD
Receiver
is
designed
and
manufactured
for
some
playback
features
of
the
unit
may
not
be
available
moving
are
d
This
DVD/CD
Receiver
is
designed
and
manufactured
for
General
. the
.Video
. . . recorded
. .CD.
. . . .. made
. .. .. .for
. .. ..of
DVDs and
Video
CDs.
Some
Playing
aFeatures
DVD
and
.. .. .. .side)
..busi.20-22
.acom
. 19
you
locate
the
scene
you
want.
the
chapters
be reco
labeled
side
disc.
Certifique-se,
também,
demay
verDVDs
as
instruções
fornecidas
Video
CDsto
equipped
PBC
(Version
2.0)
Specifications
.on
. with
.with
.no
. . PBC
.region
.disc,
.a. (Version
. . .“Scenes”.
.code
. . . 2.0)
. . label
. . . may
.Each
. may
. . .not
. 34
Video
CDs
equipped
playback
of region
region
“4”or
encoded
DVD
software.
playback
of
encoded
DVD
software.
permitindo
quehave
você
localize
cena
que
desejar.
Uma
cena
DVDs
that
still beissud
or
other
functions
be
added.
tions
called
scene
� Moving
to“4”
another
TITLE/GROUP
. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22
. . 20
General
Features
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
purposes
may
not
be
able
toofofDVDs
be
played
onpropósitos
the
PBC
(Playback
control)
functions
allow
you to
to interact
interact
scenede
isvárias
composed
of one
or
several tracks.
PBC
(Playback
control)
functions
allow
you
The
region
code
on
the
labels
some
DVDs
The
region
on
the
labels
some
DVDs
os DVDs
ecode
Video
CDs.
Alguns
feitos
para
�
Do
not
use
irregularly
shaped
CDs
heart-shaped
4 20supplied
4(e.g.,
éA
composta
faixas.
Moving
to
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
area
and
therefore
playable.
Moving
toalso
another
TITLE/GROUP
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
Make�� sure
to
refer
toplay
the
instructions
withrestrictions
menu
screen
and assigned
a scene nu
withtothe
the
system
via menus,
menus,
search
functions,
ornot
other
with
system
via
search
functions,
other
indicates
which
type
of player
player
can
play
those
indicates
which
type
of
can
comerciais
podem
não
lidos
Group
(DVD
audioor
discs
only)
�
Slow
Motion.
.ser
. .may
. .CHAPTER/TRACK
. . nesta
.result
. . . unidade.
.those
. .in
. . malfunctions.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
or
octagonal).
It
�
Moving
to
another
20
typical
computer-likeyou
operations.
Moreover,
still pictures
pictures
typical
computer-like
operations.
Moreover,
still
discs.
This unit
unitand
can only
only
play DVDs
DVDs labeled
labeled
“4”DVDs
or “ALL”.
“ALL”.
the DVDs
Video
CDs.
Some
made
for
busito
locate
the
scene
you
want.
discs.
This
can
play
“4”
or
�
Picture and
The
main
or accompany
Types
ofVCDs
Video
CDs
� Still
Slow
. . Frame-by-Frame
.discs,
. . . . the
. . .message
. . . . . .Playback
.“Check
. . . . . . .. 20
20 of
of high
high
resolution
can
be played
played
they are
arecontent
included in
in
resolution
can
be
ififaudio
they
included
you try
try
to play
playMotion.
any other
other
the
message
“Check
IfIfness
you
to
any
discs,
Tipos
de
purposes
may
not
be
able
to
be
played
on
the
A
scene
is
composed
of
one
or severa
�
Search.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
Código
Regional
do
DVD
Home
Theater
System
e
DVDs.
� Code”
Still
and Frame-by-Frame
ional code
of
thePicture
DVD/CD
receiver
andPlayback
DVDs . 20 the
the disc.
disc.
tenttypes
or additional
Regional
Code”
will appear
appear
on
the TV
TV screen.
screen.
Some
Regional
will
on
the
Some
Theredois
are
two
of Video feature
CDs: content, or m
�
.Theater
.. .. .. .. .System
.. .. .. ..label
.. foi
.. .. .projetado
.. .. .. still
.. .. ..be
.e
.. .. .. .. .. 20
unit.
Existem
tipos
de
VCD.
� Repeat
Search.
. .region
.region
.code
.may
. ..produzido
20
Esse
DVD
Home
DVDs
that
have
no
subject
DVDs
that
have
no
code
label
may
still
be
subject
DVD/CD Receiver
designed
for Video CDs
otes
onisA-B
DVDs
group
is PBC
assigned
a1.1)
group reference n
CDs not
not equipped
equipped
with
PBC
(Version
1.1)
with
(Version
�
Repeat
.. .therefore
.. ..and
.. .. .. ..and
.Video
..manufactured
..região
.. .. CDs
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
�
RepeatDVD
.and
. .na
. codificação
. .. ..de
20 Video
to
area
restrictions
and
not
playable.
para
reproduzir
area
restrictions
therefore
not
playable.
Types
of(versão
Video
Vídeo
CD
equipado
com
2.0)CDs
Operated
in the
the
same
way
asPBC
audio
CDs,
these
discs
Video
CDs
equipped
with
PBC
(Version 2.0)
Operated
in
same
way
as
audio
CDs,
these
discs
back oftoSome
region
“4” encoded
playback
operations
CDs
you
to
locate
it
easily.
�
Search
.. .. ..DVD
.. .. .. .. ..software.
.. .. ..of
.. ..DVDs
.. .. .. .. .. .. .and
.. .. .. ..Video
21
� Time
Repeat
A-B
.
.
21
“4”. O código regional
nasthe
etiquetas
de alguns
Regional
code
of
receiver
andallow
DVDs
A função
PBC
possibilita
uma
interação
com
obut
sistema
playback
of lhe
video
pictures
as well
well
as sound,
sound,
playback
of
video
pictures
as
as
but
�
Marker
Search
.. ..some
.. .. .DVD/CD
.. .. .software
(Playback
control)
functions
allow
you
to inte
There
are
two
types
of
Video
CDs:
�
Time
Search
. ..of
. .. .. .by
.DVDs
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .manufacturers.
. .. .. 21
21 allowPBC
region code
on
the
labels
may
be
intentionally
fixed
DVDs �indica
que. tipo
they
are not
not
equipped
with PBC.
PBC.
they
are
equipped
with
através
defor
menus, como
funções de busca, ou outras opeThis
DVD/CD
Zoom.
. .Receiver
. de
. . .reprodutor
.. .. .. .. ..is
.. ..designed
.pode
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. and
.. .. .. .. ..manufactured
.. 21
�
Marker
Search
.
.
21
with
the
system
via
menus,
search
functions,
or ot
ates which
type
of
player
can
play
those
As
this
unit
plays
DVDs
and
Video
CDs
according
to
Scene
(VCD)
reproduzir
esses
discos.
Este
produto
somente
Special
DVD
.. .. .. .. 22
rações similares asVideo
de computadores.
Além disso,with
imagens
CDs equipped
PBC (Vers
� Zoom.
. .Features
. . . . . “4”
. . .. .encoded
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .DVD
. .. .. .. .. ..software.
21
playback
of region
typical
computer-like
operations.
Moreover,
still
s. This unit
can
only
play
DVDs
labeled
“4”
or
“ALL”.
disc
content
designed
by
the
software
manufacturer,
On
a Video
CD
with
PBC (Playbackpic
co
reproduz
discos
indicados
� Title
Menu
. . . . . no
. .. código
.. .. .. .. .. “4”
.. .. ..ou
.. ..“ALL”.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
congeladas em alta
definição
podem
sercontrol)
reproduzidas.
DVD
Features
22
PBC
(Playback
functions allow
TheSpecial
region
code
on the
labels
of
some
DVDs
of high resolution
can
be played
they
are include
�
Disc
Menu
.. features
.. .. .. .um
..disco
.. .. ..of
.. com
.. .the
.. unit
.. .. .. .“Check
.may
.. 22
u try to play
any
other
discs,
message
Se você
tentar
reproduzir
some
moving
pictures
and ifstill
pictures
are d
� playback
Title
Menu
. .. the
. .. ..código
.diferente
. .. .. .. .. not
22 be available
with
the
system
via
menus,
search
fun
indicates
which
type
player
can
play
�
the
.. .. .. ..Some
.. .Regional”
.. .. 22
� Changing
Disc
Menu
.on
. Audio
. .may
. .of
. Language
.TV
. . .screen.
.added.
. o. .Código
. .. .. ..those
22
do reprodutor,
a mensagem
“Verifique
the CDs
disc.não equipado
onal Code”
will
appear
the
or
other
functions
be
tions called
“Scenes”.
Each scene is d
Vídeo
com PBC
(versão 1.1)
�
the
Audio
Channel
.possuírem
.. .. .. .. .. .labeled
typical computer-like operations. More
discs.
This
unit
can
only
play
DVDs
� Changing
Changing
the
Audio
Language
. .. .a. .. .. .. 22
22“4” or “ALL”.
aparece
na
tela.
Alguns
discos
que
não
Funciona
da mesma
maneira
que os and
CDs convencionais,
s that have
no
region
code
label
may
still
be
subject
Make�� sure
to
also
refer
to
the
instructions
supplied
with
menu
screen
assigned
a scene1.1
nu
Subtitles
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
Changing
the
Audio
Channel
. . . .the
.estar
. . message
. .sujeitos
. . . 22 “Check
Video CDs of
nothigh
equipped
with
PBC played
(Version
resolution
can
if they
If
you try
to play
any
other
discs,
etiqueta
informando
o código
regional
podem
esses
discos possibilitam
tanto
a reprodução
de be
imagem
ea restrictions
and
therefore
4busithe
DVDs
and
for
DVD
Audio
Discs
..CDs.
.. .. ..playable.
.. .. Some
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..DVDs
.. .. .. .. .. ..made
.. 22
you
to
locate
the
scene
you
want.
� Subtitles
. Video
. . .. .. .. .. not
22
Operated
in
the
same
way
as
audio
CDs,
these
di
the sem
disc.
Regional
appear
on
the. . TV
screen.
Some
à restrição doCode”
local e, will
portanto,
não ser
reproduzível.
assim
de áudio,
estarem
com o recurso PBC.
Audio Discs
. . . .not
. . . be
. . . .able
. . . . to
.be
. . .played
. . . 22 on
ness
purposes
may
thecomo
A scene
is composed
oneas
or sound,
severa
44 DVD
playback
of video
pictures asofwell
DVDs
that have no region code label may still beallow
subject
Video CDs not equipped with PBC (
unit.
to area restrictions and therefore not playable. they are not equipped with PBC.
Operated
the same
Types ofinVideo
CDsway as audio C
5
allow
playback
of
video
pictures
as we
Regional code of the DVD/CD receiver and DVDs
There are two types of Video
CDs:
they are not equipped with PBC.
This DVD/CD Receiver is designed and manufactured for
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
TM
Introduction
Introduction
Introdução
yable Discs
Before Use
4
4
4
Before Use (Continued)
Storing discs
Precautions
Storing discs
Precautions
Before Use (Continued)
After playing, store the disc in its case.
After playing, store the disc in its case.
Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or sources of
Do not expose the disc toStoring
direct sunlight
discsor sources of
heat, or leave it in a parked car exposed to direct sunWhen shipping the unit
heat,
or
leave itdiscs
in a parked car exposed to direct sunStoring
When
shipping the unit
Precautions
light,
as
there
may
be
a
considerable
temperature
Storing
discs
After playing, store the
disc in its case.
Storing
discs
The original shipping carton and packing materials may
Precautions
as there may
be a considerable temperature
Introduction
Storinglight,
discs
The
original shipping carton
and packing
may
Handling
the materials
unit
Storing
discs
increase
inside
the
Precautions
Precautions
Docar.
not expose
the disc to direct sunlight or sou
come in handy. For maximum protection, re-pack the
After
playing,
store
the
disc
in
its
case.
increase
inside
the
car.
After playing,
playing,
store
the disc
discDisc
in its
its. case.
case.
come
in
handy.
For
maximum
protection,
re-pack
the
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .car
. . .exposed
23
Safety
Precautions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
After
store
the
in
Limpeza
dos
discos
heat,
or
leave it in a parked
to dire
Handling
the
unit
unit as
it was
originally
at the
Do
not
expose
the
to
direct
sources
of
store
the
discstore
in
itsdisc
case.
Whenpacked
shipping
the factory.
unit After playing,After
Handling
the
unit
playing,
the
disc
in itssunlight
case. or
Do
not
expose
the
disc
to
direct
sunlight
or
sources
of
Movendo
aoriginally
unidade
Handling
the
unit
as
was
Playing
an digitais
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . of
23 temperatu
of
Contents
.packed
. . . . . .at. .the
. . factory.
...............3
Do
not
expose
the
disc
to
direct
sunlight
or
Cleaning
discs
light,
as
there
may of
be
a sources
considerable
As
impressôes
e
a
sujeira
causam
perda
de
. . . . . .unit
. Table
. Handling
.the
23itunit
Handling
the unit
Doand
notpacking
expose
the
disc
to
direct
sunlight
or
sources
The
original
shipping
carton
materials
may
heat,
or
leave
it
in
a
parked
car
exposed
to
direct
sunDo
notor
expose
the
disc
to direct
sunlight or
sources
of
Cleaning
discs
heat,
or
leave
it
in
a
parked
car
exposed
to
direct
sunWhen
shipping
the
unit
heat,
leave
it
in
a
parked
car
exposed
to
direct
sun� Pause
. . . . .increase
. .distorção
. . . . .inside
. do
. . .som.
.the
. . car.
.Antes
. . . . de
. . utilizar
. . . 23
Before
Use
. . . . the
. . up
. unit
. .the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
When
shipping
the
unit
mover
a unidade
Disc . . . Ao
. When
. 23
qualidade
de
eparked
When
setting
shipping
heat,
or leave
itre-pack
in as
a parked
exposed
to
suncomeunit
in handy. For maximum
protection,
theimagem
light,
there
may
be
a considerable
considerable
temperature
heat,
or
leave
itcar
in a
cardirect
exposed
to direct
sunFingerprints
and
dust
onTrack
the
disc
When
the
unit
light,
there
may
be
a
setting
up
unit
The
original
shipping
carton
shipping
the
unit
�as
Moving
to
another
. . .can
. temperature
. the
. distort
. .picture
. . . the
. . .picture
. 23
Playable
Discs
.acessórios
. .sound
. . . . . .and
.awas
. nearby
.packing
. .originally
. . .TV,
. materials
. .VCR,
.packed
. . light,
. or
. .may
.atas
4the
The
original
shipping
carton
and
packing
materials
may
light,
as
there
may
be
apano
considerable
temperature
Fingerprints
and
dust
on
the
disc
can
distort
. . . . . shipping
.When
. A. When
.caixa
23
original
ethe
osand
embalagem
devem
The
picture
radio
The
original
shipping
carton
packing
materials
may
there
may
be
a considerable
temperature
unit asofand
itde
factory.
o
disco,
limpe-o
com
um
macio.
Esfregue-o
no
sentido
increase
inside
the
car.
light,
as
there
may
be
a
considerable
temperature
or
reduce
sound
quality.
Before
playing,
clean
the
The original
shipping
carton
and
packing
materials
may
The
picture
and
sound
of
a
nearby
TV,
VCR,
or
radio
increase
inside
the
car.
come
in
handy.
For
maximum
protection,
re-pack
the
original
shipping
�
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
. . discs
. . .clean
. . . . the
. . . disc
. . . . . . disc
23
Precautions
. For
. . . maximum
. carton
.during
. . . . .and
. protection,
. .packing
. . . . .In. materials
.re-pack
. . .case,
. increase
. .the
.may
. 5 orinside
reduce
sound
quality.
Before
playing,
Cleaning
come
in
handy.
For
maximum
protection,
re-pack
the
increase
inside
the
car.
. . . . . . . estar
. The
. 23
may
be
disturbed
playback.
this
position
the
car.
come
in
handy.
à
mão.
Para
a
máxima
proteção,
re-embale
o
increase
inside
the
car.
with
a
clean
cloth.
Wipe
the
disc
from
the
centre
outdo
centro
para
as
extremidades.
come inmay
handy.
For
maximum
protection,
re-pack
the
be
disturbed
during
playback.
In
this
case,
position
unit
asinit
ithandy.
wasDiscs
originally
packed
at. .the
the
factory.
Forfrom
� Search.
. . . the
. . .disc
. . . from
. . . . the
. . . centre
. . . . . out. . . . . . . 23
Notes
on
. maximum
. When
. .packed
. . .TV,
. . protection,
.VCR,
. up
.or
.factory.
.the
. .re-pack
.unit
. .or. .turn
.the
. .off
5 with
clean
cloth. Wipe
unit
as
was
originally
packed
at
factory.
. . . . . . . produto
. come
. 23
the
away
the
radio,
the aCleaning
unit
as
itunit
was
originally
at
the
setting
wards.
discs
da
mesma
maneira
como
veio
de
fábrica.
Fingerprints
and
dust
on
the
disc
can distort the
unit as itthe
was
originally
packed
at
the
factory.
Cleaning
discs
unit
away
from
the
TV,
VCR,
or
radio,
or
turn
off
the
as
was originally
factory.
JPEG
Disc
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
About
Symbols
. . The
. .packed
. .picture
.disc.
. . .at. and
.the
. . .sound
. . . . .of. a
. Cleaning
.nearby
. . . 5 wards.
Cleaning
discs
. . . . . . . . unit
. 23
unitit after
removing
the
TV,discs
VCR,
or
radio
or reduce sound quality. Before playing, clean t
Cleaning
discs
unitWhen
afterPanel
removing
the
disc.
setting
up
the
unit
Viewing
a
JPEG
disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
and
Rear
Panel
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6
Fingerprints
and
dust
on
the
disc
can
distort
the
picture
. . . . . . . Front
. When
.When
24 setting
up
the
unit
be disturbed during playback. In this
case, position
Fingerprints
and dust
dust
on athe
the
disccloth.
can distort
distort
thedisc
picture
setting
up
themay
unit
with
clean
Wipe the
from the centr
Fingerprints
and
on
disc
can
the
picture
When setting
up
thea unit
The
picture
and
sound
of unit
asurfaces
nearby
TV,
VCR,
or
radio
ajustar
unidade.
and
dust
on
the
upsound
the the
unit
�
Slide
Show
. can
. on
. . distort
.the
. . .disc
. the
. playing,
. can
. picture
. . distort
. . clean
. . . .the
.the
. .picture
.disc
. 24
The
picture
and
of
a
nearby
radio
or
reduce
sound
quality.
Before
Remote
Control
Overview
. away
. . . . .TV,
. . .VCR,
.the
. . TV,
. or
. . Fingerprints
. . . . 7or radio,
Fingerprints
and
dust
Tosetting
keep
the
exterior
clean
. . . . . . . Ao
. When
. 24
from
VCR,
turn
off
thedisc
or or
reduce
sound
quality.
Before
playing,
clean
the
disc
The
picture
and
sound
of
a.VCR,
nearby
TV,
VCR,
or
radio
wards.
or
reduce
sound
quality.
Before
playing,
clean
the
disc
The picture
andpicture
sound
of
a nearby
TV,
orIn
radio
ToAThe
keep
thedisturbed
exterior
surfaces
clean
may
be
disturbed
during
playback.
this
case,
position
or
reduce
sound
quality.
Before
playing,
clean
the
disc
and
sound
of
a
nearby
TV,
VCR,
or
radio
�
Still
Picture
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
imagem
e
o
som
de
TV,
Rádio
ou
VCR,
próximos,
may
be
during
playback.
In
this
case,
position
with
a
clean
cloth.
Wipe
the
disc
from
the
centre
outDo
not
use
volatile
liquids,
such
as
insecticide
spray,
or
reduce
sound
Before
theoutdisc
. . . .be
. . disturbed
. . may
. 24 beduring
unit
after
removing
disc.position
with
a clean
clean
cloth.quality.
Wipe the
the
discplaying,
from the
theclean
centre
disturbed
during
playback.
In
thisthe
case,
may
playback.
Inplayback.
this
position
with
a
cloth.
Wipe
disc
from
centre
outDo may
not unit
use
volatile
liquids,
such
ascase,
insecticide
spray,
with
clean
cloth.
the
disc
from the
the
centre
the
away
from
thenot
TV,
VCR,
orIn
radio,
or
turna
off athe
the
be
disturbed
during
this
case,
position
Moving
to
another
filedisc
. . .from
. .out. .the
. . .centre
. . . . .out. . 24
unit
away
from
the
TV,
VCR,
or
radio,
or
turn
off
wards.
near
theinterferências.
unit.
Do
leave
rubber
or plastic
products
in with
a�Wipe
clean
cloth.
Wipe
sofrer
Nesse
caso,
posicione
. . .unit
. . .near
. podem
. the
. 24
wards.
Preparation
the
unit
away
from
the
TV,
VCR,
or
radio,
or
turn
off
the
the
away
from
the
TV,
VCR,
or
radio,
or
turn
off
the
wards.
theafter
unit.
Do not
leave
rubber
plastic
products
in
unit
removing
the
disc.
away
from
the
TV,
VCR,
or
radio,
orsurfaces
turnwards.
off the
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
unit
after
removing
contact
with
the
for
period
of
will wards.
clean
. . . after
. . .contact
. removing
. the
. 24unit
unidade
distante
equipamentos,
ou
unit
after
removing
the
disc.
Connections
. .desses
. for
. . the
.aunit
.To
. disc.
. keep
. .period
.a. long
.the
. .of
.exterior
.time.
. . .desligue
.They
. .time.
. . will
.a.They
8-13
unit
the
disc.
with
the
unit
long
after
disc.
Programmed
leaveremoving
marks onthe
the
surface.
Do
not use volatile liquids, such as insecticide
spray, Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . .leave
. unidade,
. unit
. 24
após
remover
o
disco.
marks
on the
surface.
TV
Connections
. .surfaces
. . . . . . . clean
................8
keep
the
exterior
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
near
the unit.
Do not leave rubber or plastic
products
in
To
keep
the
exterior
surfaces
clean
. . .keep
. . . .the
. To
. 25
To
keep
the
exterior
surfaces
clean
To
exterior
surfaces
clean
Optional
Connections
. . . . . . . spray,
.....9
Do
not
use
volatile
such
as
insecticide
keep
theEquipment
exterior
surfaces
clean
Erasing
Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25
Do
not
use
volatile
liquids,
such
asthe
insecticide
spray,
Cleaning
theliquids,
unit
contact
with
unit for a spray,
long period of time.
Theyawill
. . .not
. . .use
. . To
.volatile
25
Do
not
use
volatile
liquids,
as
insecticide
Do
liquids,
such
as
spray,
Cleaning
the
unit
Aerial
Connections
. . insecticide
. . such
.such
. . . .as
. or
.insecticide
. plastic
. . . . . .products
. spray,
. . . . 10in
near
the
unit.
Do
not
leave
rubber
Do
not
use
volatile
liquids,
Erasing
the strong
Complete
Programme
. . .benzene,
. . . . 25
Para
manter
a superfície
limpa
leave
marks
on
the surface.
near
the
unit.
Dorubber
not leave
leave
rubber
or plastic
plastic
products in
in
tnear
. . .the
. . .unit.
. near
. 25
Do not use
solvents
such as List
alcohol,
the
unit.
Do
not
rubber
or
Do
not
leave
orexterior
plastic
Speaker
System
Connection
.products
. .or
. .plastic
. .time.
.in. .products
. They
. . 11-12inDo not use
To
clean
theunit
cabinet
strong
solvents such
contact
with
the
for
a
period
of
the
unit.
Do
not
leave
rubber
DivX
Disc
Operation
. . available
. . as
. . .alcohol,
. . cleaners,
. . . .benzene,
. . . or
. . anti-static
. . . . . 26
contact
with
the
unit
for
a long
long
period
ofwill
time.products
They will
will
clean
the
cabinet
thinner,
commercially
líquidos
voláteis,
como
spray
inseticidas,
st
. . . .To
. Não
. near
. the
25use
contact
with
the
unit
for
a
long
period
of
time.
They
will
contact
with
unit
for
a long
period
of.the
time.
They
�
Transmitter.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
Use
a
soft,
dry
cloth.
If
surfaces
are
extremely
dirty,
thinner,
commercially
available
cleaners,
or
anti-static
Não
use
solventes
fortes
como
álcool,
benzina,
thinner,
leave
marks
on the
the
surface.
the
unit
for
a long period
of time. They
Speaker
. . .for
. .vinyl
. . . .records.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
leave
marks
on
surface.
dry
cloth.
If the
surfaces
are
dirty, will
Cleaning
theextremely
unit
spray Setup
intended
. . . . .marks
.Use
. próximo
. contact
. a26
leave
marks
on
the
surface.
àwith
unidade.
deixe
produtos
de
plástico
leave
onsoft,
the
surface.
use
a soft
lightly
moistened
with
�
Changing
aNão
channel
of Transmitter
.a. mild
. . .ou
.detergent
. . 11 sprayouintended
for
vinyl records.
limpadores
comercialmente
oncloth
the
surface.
softmarks
cloth lightly
moistened
with a mild detergent
Additional
Information
. . use
. .disponíveis,
. .strong
. . . . .solvents
. .ou
. .spray
. . such
. . . . as
28 alcohol, be
Do not
. . . . . .use
. borracha
. leave
.a27
em
contato
direto
com
a
superfície
da
unidade
solution.
Do
not
use
strong
solvents
such
as
alcohol,
�
Setting
a
ID
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
To
clean
the
cabinet
Cleaning
the
unit
Do notthe
useunit
strong solvents such as alcohol,
antiestáticos,
como
osthinner,
usados.commercially
para
Last
Condition
Memory
. . . .limpezas
. . . . . . available
.dos
. . .antigos
. . . cleaners,
. 28
or ant
. . . . . .solution.
. . Cleaning
. 28 �
About
Symbols
Cleaning
the
unit
Cleaning
the
benzene,
orunit
thinner,
as
might
damage
the surface
Use
a these
soft,
dry
cloth.
If the surfaces
are
extremely
dirty,
Assembling
and
Connecting
to
the
Speakers
11
por
um
longo
período,
para
evitar
marcas.
About
Symbols
or thinner,
as these might damage the surface
the unit
Screen
Saver
. .solvents
.spray
. . . . intended
. .such
. . . .as
. for
. alcohol,
. .vinyl
. . . .records.
. . . . . . 28
Do
not
strong
benzene,
discos
deuse
vinil.
. . . . . .benzene,
. . Cleaning
. 28clean
Do
not
use
strong
solvents
such
as
alcohol,
benzene,
of
the
unit.
To
the
cabinet
Do
not
use
strong
solvents
such
as
alcohol,
benzene,
use
a
soft
cloth
lightly
moistened
with
a
mild
detergent
�
Speaker
Connections.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
Do
not
use
strong
solvents
such
as
alcohol,
benzene,
To cabinet
clean the
the cabinet
cabinet
To
unit.
To
clean
Controlling
the TV
. . . . .such
. . .cleaners,
.as
. . alcohol,
. . . .or
. . anti-static
. . . . . . 28
thinner,
commercially
available
Do
notalcohol,
use
strong
solvents
benzene,
. . .clean
. . .of. the
.the
. 28
thinner,
commercially
available
cleaners,
or
anti-static
Use
a
cloth.
available
cleaners,
or anti-static
such
as
To
clean
the
cabinet
Speaker
Positioning.
. If
. .the
.are
. .surfaces
.extremely
. Do
. . .not
. .are
.use
. .extremely
.strong
. . . . thinner,
.solvents
. dirty,
. 13 commercially
thinner,
commercially
available
cleaners,
or
anti-static
Use
a soft,
soft,
dry
cloth.
Ifsolution.
the
surfaces
are
extremely
dirty,
About
the for
symbol
Use
Ifadry
the
surfaces
dirty,
Use
a
soft,
dry
cloth.
If
the
surfaces
are
extremely
dirty,
Operation
with
Radio
.records.
. . .display
.Symbols
. .cleaners,
. . . . . . .or
. .anti-static
. . . . . . 29
spray
intended
vinyl
unidade
thinner,
commercially
available
About
the
symbol
display
. . . .a.soft,
. . Limpando
.Before
.dry
28 cloth.
About
spray
intended
for
vinyl
records.
To
obtain
a
clear
picture
spray
intended
for
vinyl
records.
use
a
soft
cloth
lightly
moistened
with
a
mild
detergent
benzene,
or
thinner,
as
these
might
damage
the
surface
Use
a
soft,
dry
cloth.
If
the
surfaces
are
extremely
dirty,
spray
intended
for
vinyl
records.
Operation
. . . with
. . . .a .mild
. . . detergent
.with
...a
. .mild
. . . .detergent
. . 14-19
use a
alightly
soft
cloth
lightly
moistened
with
a
mild
detergent
use a soft
cloth
a clear
picture
use
soft
cloth
lightly
moistened
Presetting
intendedthe
forradio
vinylstations
records.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . .To
. Para
. obtain
. 29
limpar
omoistened
gabinete
DVD/CD
Receiver
issolvents
a high-tech,
precision
device. spray
of the
unit.
solution.
Do
not
use
strong
as
alcohol,
aThe
soft
cloth
with
a mild
detergent
“ ” may appear on the TV screen during operation.
Mini
Glossary
for
Stream
& such
Surround
solution.
Do
not lightly
use
strong
solvents
such
as
alcohol,
solution.The
Douse
not
use
strong
solvents
such
as alcohol,
Receiver
isAudio
amoistened
high-tech,
precision
device.
solution.
Do
not
use
strong
solvents
such
as
alcohol,
Listening
to the radio
. . . . during
. . . . . operation.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 29
“ ” may
appear on
TV screen
. . . . . . . Use
. solution.
. DVD/CD
29
If
the
optical
pick-up
lens
and
disc
drive
parts
dirty
um
pano
seco
e
macio.
Se
as
superfícies
estiverem
benzene,
or
thinner,
as
these
might
damage
the
About
Symbols
strong
alcohol,
Thisaicon
meansdo
the
function
explained
in this owner’s
Symbols
Mode .Do
.or
.not
. . use
.lens
.might
. .as
. .these
.damage
.disc
.solvents
. .might
. .the
. . parts
.such
. . . are
.as
. . the
. . About
.surface
.are
. 14
benzene,
or. these
thinner,
as
these
might
damage
the
surface
Sobre
exibição
símbolo
About
benzene,
orbenzene,
thinner,
as
surface
About
Symbols
If the
optical
pick-up
and
drive
dirty
thinner,
damage
surface
ThisOther
icon
means
the function
this
Functions.
. . . . .explained
. . .the
. . . . in
. .symbol
. . . owner’s
. . . .display
. . . . . 30
. . . . . . . extramente
. benzene,
. 29
worn,
theuse
quality
About
To
a. .clear
of
the
unit.
or
thinner,
these
damage
sujas,
pano
manualSymbols
is not available on that specific DVD-Video disc.
Mode
.picture
. . um
.as
. .will
.obtain
. .be.ligeiramente
.might
.will
.be
. .poor.
. picture
. umidecido
. . .the
. . .surface
. . 14
of Sound
theor
unit.
of the unit.
or worn,
the
picture
quality
poor.
of
the
unit.
manual
is notdevice.
available
on that
Sleep
Timer Setting
. . specific
. . . . . . DVD-Video
. . . . . . . . .disc.
. . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . of
. 30
Regular
inspection
and
maintenance
are
recommended
DVD/CD
Receiver
is
a
high-tech,
precision
The
unit.
“ ” may
appear on the TV screen during oper
On-Screen
Display
. . . .solventes
. . are
. . .recommended
. .fortes
. . . . como
. . . . . 15
comthe
detergente
neutro.
Não. use
Regular
inspection
and
maintenance
About
the
symbol
display
”Dimmer
pode
aparecer
About
the
symbol
display
About
symbol
. display
. . .symbol
. na
. . tela
. . . da
. display
. .TV
. . durante
. . . . . . a. operação.
. . . . . . . . . 30
afterSettings
every
1,000
hours
on
thethe
. . . . . . . .aTo
. clear
30
the
the
pick-up
disc
drive“About
parts
are
dirty
obtain
a clear
clear
picture
About
the disc
symbols
for instructions
This
icon means
the function explained in this o
Initial
. .picture
.of.If
.use.
. . podem
. optical
.of. .use.
. depends
.danificar
. (This
. . . . depends
. alens
. .unidade.
.the
.and
. 16-19
To obtain
picture
after
every
1,000
hours
(This
on
To
obtain
a
álcool,
benzina,
pois
About
the
About
the
disc
To
obtain
a clear
picture
Mute
. .significa
. .symbols
. .symbol
. .que
. . . a.for
. display
. .instructions
. . .explicada
. . . . . . .no
. . manual
. . . . . .de
30
Esse
ícone
função
operating
environment.)
. . . DVD/CD
. . . . thinner,
. To
. 30
oris
the
picture
quality
will
be
poor.
DVD/CD
Receiver
isworn,
a.precision
high-tech,
precision
device.
The
obtain
aisclear
picture
manual
is
not
available
on that specific
DVD-Vi
� environment.)
General
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
Receiver
a
high-tech,
device.
The
DVD/CD
Receiver
a
high-tech,
precision
device.
The
“
”
may
appear
on
the
TV
screen
during
operating
“ ” may appear
the
TV
screen
during
operation.
may
appear
on
the
TV
screen
during
operation.
DVD/CD
Receiver
is
a high-tech,
precision
device.
The
A”” on
section
whose
title
has
one
Using
the
Headphone
Jack
. of
. . the
.during
.específico
.following
. . .operation.
. . . disco
.symbol
. . . 30 is
For
details,
please
contact
yourdrive
nearest
dealer.
““ recommended
may
appear
on
the
TV
screen
operation.
Regular
inspection
and
maintenance
are
. . optical
. .For
. . The
30
instruções
não
está
disponível
naquele
If.details,
theDVD/CD
optical
pick-up
lens
and
disc
parts
are
dirty
Receiver
is
aand
high-tech,
precision
device.
A
section
whose
title
has
one
of
the
following
symbol
is
�optical
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
If. .the
pick-up
lens
and
disc
drive
parts
are
dirty
If
the
pick-up
lens
disc
drive
parts
are
dirty
please
contact
your
nearest
dealer.
This
icon
means
the
function
explained
in
this
owner’s
“
”
may
appear
on
the
TV
screen
during
operation.
This
icon means
the
function
explained
in this
owner’s
This
icon
means
the
function
explained
in
this
owner’s
If
the
optical
pick-up
lens
and
disc
drive
parts
are
dirty
applicable
only
to
the
disc
represented
by
the
symbol.
Selecting
the
Input
Source
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
This
icon
means
the
function
explained
in
this
owner’s
after
every
1,000
hours
of
use.
(This
depends
on
the
. . worn,
. . . . .the
. If
. picture
30
DVD-Vídeo.
or
worn,
the
picture
quality
will
be
poor.
the
pick-up
lens
dirty applicable
only
to
disc
represented
by the
symbol.
About
the
disc
symbols
fordisc.
instructions
or
quality
�optical
Display
. .will
. . be
.quality
. .poor.
. .and
. will
. . disc
. be
. . poor.
.drive
. . . .parts
. . . . are
. .manual
16-17
or
worn,
the
picture
manual
is
not
available
on
that
This
icon
the
function
explained
in
is not
available
onthe
that
specific
manual
ismeans
not
available
onDVD-Video
that
specific
DVD-Video
or
worn,
the
picture
quality
will
be
poor.
XTS
(Excellent
True
Sound)
.specific
. . . . disc.
. .DVD-Video
. .this
. . .owner’s
. . . .disc.
30
manual
is
not
available
on
that
specific
DVD-Video
disc.
operating
environment.)
DVD-V
. . . . . . inspection
. . or
. 30
Notes
on
DVD
and
finalized
DVD±R/RW.
Regular
inspection
and
maintenance
are
recommended
worn,
the
picture
quality
Regular
and
maintenance
�
Audio.
. . . .Discs
.and
. . . maintenance
. are
. .will
. recommended
. .be
. .poor.
. . are
. . . recommended
. . . . . . . . 17 DVD-Vmanual
Regular
inspection
is
not
available
on
that
specific
DVD-Video
disc.
Notes
on
Discs
DVD
and
finalized
DVD±R/RW.
Regular
inspection
and
maintenance
are
recommended
A
section
whose
title
has
one
of
the
XTS
pro
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30 following s
For
details,
please
contact
your
nearest dealer.
. . . .every
. . . . Regular
.after
30 �every
after
1,000
hours
of
use.
(This
depends
on
the
inspection
and
maintenance
are
recommended
after
1,000
hours
of
use.
(This
depends
on
the
DVD-A
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
every 1,000
1,000 hours
hours of
of use.
use. (This
(This depends
depends on
on
the the
About
the
disc
symbols
for
instructions
DVD
Audio
About
disc
symbols
for
instructions
Sobre
os
símbolos
dediscs.
discos
para
instruções
after
every
the
About
the
disc
symbols
for
instructions
applicable
only
to the
disc represented by the s
DVD-A
DVD
Audio
discs.
dos
discos
. . . . . . . Manuseio
.environment.)
.operating
30 �
About
the
disc
symbols
for
instructions
operating
environment.)
operating
Disc
Handling
after
every
1,000
hours
of
use.
(This
depends
on
the
Others
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
environment.)
About
thecujo
disc
symbols
instructions
VCD2.0
operating
environment.)
Video
CDs
with
thefor
PBC
(playback
control) is
Disc
Handling
Uma
seção,
título
tenha
um
dos
seguintes
Reference
DVD-V
Notes
on
Discs
A section
section
whose
title
has
one
of
the
following
symbol
A sectionVCD2.0
whose
title
has
one
of
the
following
symbol
is símbolos,
DVD
and
finalized
DVD±R/RW.
Não
toque
oenvironment.)
lado
de
reprodução
do
disco.
Segure-o
Video
CDs
with
the
PBC
(playback
control)
For
details,
please
contact
your
nearest
dealer.
For details,
please
contact
your
nearest
dealer.
operating
A
whose
title
has
one
of
symbol
is
For
details,
please
contact
your
nearest
dealer.
Aaplicável
section
whose
title
has
one
of the
the following
following
symbol
is
function.
For
details,
contact
your
nearest
Do not please
touch the
playback
side
of thedealer.
disc. applicable only
é
somente
aos
discos
representados
pelo
Language
Code
List
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. símbolo.
. . . 31
applicable
only
to
the
disc
represented
by
the
to
the
disc
represented
by
the
symbol.
A
section
whose
title
has
one
of
the
following
symbol
is
function.
Dopelas
not
touch
the
playback
side
of
the
disc.
For
details,
please
contact
your
nearest
dealer.
applicable only
only to
to the
the DVD-A
disc represented
represented
by
the symbol.
symbol.
extremidades,
para evitar que a impressão digital
DVD
Audio
discs.
Operation
applicable
disc
by
the
symbol.
Hold the disc by the edges so that fingerprints will not Country
VCD1.1Code
Video
CDs
without
the
PBC
(playback
control)
List
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
applicable
only
to
the
disc
represented
by
the
symbol.
the
disc
by the
edges
so that
fingerprints
will not DVD-V DVD DVD-V
Disc
Handling
. . . . . .Hold
.on
. Notes
. 31
DVD-V
Video
CDs and
without
the PBC
(playbackwith
control)PBC (playback con
Notes
Discs
and
finalized
DVD±R/RW.
fique
em
sua
Nunca
fixe
DVD
and
finalized
DVD±R/RW.
on
DVD-V
VCD2.0
DVD
DVD±R/RW.
getVideo
on
theDiscs
surface.
DVD
or
CD
Operation
. . . papel
. . . . ou
. . .etiquetas
. . . . . 19-22 VCD1.1
DVD-V
function.
Notes
onsuperfície.
Discs
DVD
and
finalized
DVD±R/RW.
Troubleshooting
. .finalized
. . . . . .finalizados
.Video
. . . . CDs
. . . . . . . .the
. . . 32-33
the surface.
. . . . . .get
. nos
. Notes
.on
31
DVD
e and
DVD±R/RW
function.
DVD-V
on
Discs
DVD
finalized
DVD±R/RW.
discos.
function.
DVD-ACDdiscs.
Do not
paper
ornot
tape
on .the
Playing
a stick
DVD
andDo
Video
CD.
. . disc.
. playback
. . . . . . . side
. DVD-A
. . 19
touch
the
of the
disc.
DVD
Audio
DVD
Audio
discs.
DVD-A
Audio
CDs.
DVD-A
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . 34
DVD
Audio
discs.
not stick paper or tape on the disc.
DVD-A
.Disc
. . . . Handling
. Do
. 32-33
DVD
Audio
discs.
CD
Audio
CDs.
Disc
Handling
General
Features .Hold
. . . .the
. . .disc
. . . by
. . the
. . . edges
. . . . . so
20-22
that fingerprints
will
not
DVD-A
VCD1.1
Video
CDs without the PBC (playback
Discos
DVD
de
Áudio
DVD
discs.
VCD2.0
VideoVCD2.0
CDs
with
theAudio
PBC
(playback
control)
Video
CDs
with
the
(playback
MP3
MP3
disc.
Disc
Handling
. . . . . . . . Disc
. 34 Handling
VCD2.0
Video
CDs
with
the PBC
PBC
(playback control)
control)
with
the
PBC
(playback
control)
MP3 VCD2.0
MP3 Video
disc. CDs
the surface. . . . . . . . . 20 function.
Disc
�Handling
Moving toside
another
TITLE/GROUP
Do not touch
ofget
theon
disc.
function.
VCD2.0
Video
CDs
withfunção
the function.
PBC
(playback control)
Dothe
notplayback
touch the
the playback
playback
side of
of the
the disc.
disc.
Vídeo
CDs
com
PBC
WMA
disc.
WMA
Do
not
touch
side
function.
Do
not
stick
paper
or
tape
on
the
disc.
function.
Do
not
touch
the
playback
side
of
the
disc.
�
Moving
to
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
.
.
.
.
.
20
WMA
disc.
WMA
CD
Audio
CDs.
Hold the disc
by
the
edges
that
fingerprints
will
not
VCD1.1
CDs without
the
PBC
(playback
control)
function.
Hold
the
disc
byso
the
edges
so that
that
fingerprints
will
not VideoVCD1.1
Do
not
touch
the
playback
side
of the
disc.
Video
CDs
without
the
PBC
(playback
Hold
disc
by
VCD1.1
Video
CDs
without
thePBC
PBC
(playback control)
control)
JPEG
disc.
JPEG
VCD1.1
Hold�the
the
discMotion.
by the
the .edges
edges
so
fingerprints
will
not
Slow
. . . . .so
. . that
. . . .fingerprints
. . . . . . . . will
. . . not
. 20 JPEGVCD1.1
Video
CDs
without
the
PBC
(playback
control)
Vídeo
sem
função
get on the surface.
JPEG
disc.CDs
MP3
MP3
disc.
get on
onthe
thedisc
surface.
Hold
by the edges so that fingerprints will not function.
function.
VCD1.1
Video
CDs
without
the
PBC
(playback control)
get
the
surface.
function.
get
on
the
surface.
DivX
�
Still
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
Playback
.
20
DivX
disc.
function.
Do not stickget
paper
or tape
on the
disc. on the disc.
Do
not
stick
paper
or tape
tape
DivX CDs.
DivX
disc.
on the
surface.
CD
Audio
WMA
disc.
WMA
function.
Do
not
stick
paper
or
on
the
disc.
CD Discos
Audio CDs
CDs.
Do not
stick paper
CD
� Search.
. . . or
. . tape
. . . . on
. . .the
. . .disc.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
CD
Audio
CD
Audio CDs.
CDs.
Do not stick paper or tape on the disc.
CD
Audio
CDs. JPEG JPEG disc.
MP3
MP3
� Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP3
. . 20 MP3 disc.
MP3
MP3 disc.
disc.
Discos
MP3
MP3
MP3
MP3
disc.
disc. MP3
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WMA
. . 21 WMAWMA
MP3
WMAdisc.
disc. DivX DivX disc.
WMA
WMA
WMA Discos
WMA disc.
disc.
WMA
WMA
� Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .JPEG
. . 21 JPEGWMA
disc. WMA
disc.
JPEG
disc.
JPEG
JPEG JPEG
disc.
JPEG Discos
JPEG
disc.
� Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DivX
. . 21 DivX JPEG
disc.
Armazenamento dos discos
JPEG
disc.
JPEG
DivX
DivX
disc.
DivX
DivX
disc.
DivX Discos
� Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DivX
DivX
disc.
DivX
ApósSpecial
o uso, guarde
o disco na
DivX DivX disc.
DVD Features
. . sua
. . . embalagem.
. . . . . . . . . .Não
. . . . . 22
o exponha
à incidência
� Title
Menu . . .direta
. . . . de
. . .luz
. . solar
. . . . ou
. . próximo
. . . . . . . . 22
de fontes
de calor,
� Disc
Menue. não
. . . o. .deixe
. . . .dentro
. . . . .de
. . veículos
. . . . . . . . . 22
5
5
� Changing
estacionados
sob othe
sol.Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Sobre os Símbolos
Notas sobre discos
5
6
5
5
5
5
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Precauções
Introduction
Before
Use
(Continued)
Handling
the unit
Before
Use
(Continued)
Antes
dounit
Uso
(continuação)
Handling
Precautions
Before
Use
(Continued)
Before
Usethe
(Continued)
Painéis Frontal e Traseiro
Front Panel and Rear Panel
STANDBY/ON
Conector de FONES
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playing
an Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Audio
CDStandby
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . . Disc
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
Indicador
� Pause
. quando
. . . .CD
.o.equipamento
.and
. . .MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . . .Disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
Acende
em vermelho
Playing
an .Audio
23
�
Moving
estiver
modo Standby
�no
Pause
.to. .another
. (desligado)
. . . . . Track
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Repeat
Moving Track/All/Off.
to another Track
23
�
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
FUNCTION/PLAY
� Search.
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
23
Pressione
JPEG�Disc
Operation
.. .. .. tecla
.. .. ..durante
.. .. .. .. .3. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Search.
.e .segure
. . . .esssa
23
segundos,
em seguida
Viewing
aOperation
JPEG
disc. .pressione-a
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
JPEG
Disc
. .. .. .. .. .. ..repetida24
mente
para
selecionar
outra
função.
� SlideaShow
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Viewing
JPEG. disc
24
�
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .de
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
� Still
SlidePicture
Show .. .. Controlador
. .. VOLUME
24
�
to another
� Moving
Still Picture
. . . . . file
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
Preparation
Janela
do DISPLAY
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Preparation
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
TV Connections
..8
Connections
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13
Repeat Programmed
Programmed
Playback Tracks.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Optional
Equipment
TV Connections
. . Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98
Erasing
a Track from Programme
Repeat Programmed
Tracks. . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Aerial
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10
Optional
Equipment. .Connections
.9
Erasing
Complete
Programme List
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Erasing the
a Track
from Programme
25
Speaker
System Connection
Aerial Connections
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12
. . 10
DivX
Disc Operation
. . . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
the Complete
25
� Transmitter.
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12
. . 11
Speaker
System. Connection
Speaker
Setup
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
DivX Disc
Operation
26
�
a channel
� Changing
Transmitter.
. . . . . . .of. Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
11
Additional
Information
Speaker Setup
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
27
�
Setting
a
ID
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
� Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
Last Condition
Memory
Additional
Information
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
ABRE/FECHA
(OPEN/CLOSE)
�
Assembling
and
Connecting
to
the
Speakers
11
� Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Screen
Saver . .Memory
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Last Condition
28
�
Connections.
. . . . . to
. . the
. . .Speakers
. . . . . . . 12
� Speaker
Assembling
and Connecting
Sensor do11
Controle Remoto
Controlling
the. TV
Screen Saver
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
� Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Before
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19
SpeakerOperation
Positioning.
. . 13Teclas MONO/STEREO/
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
Operation
with
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
29
PAUSE/STEP
Mini Operation
Glossary for. .Audio
Before
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . 14-19
Listening
theradio
radiostations
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
Presettingtothe
29
Mode
. . . . . . . for
. . .Audio
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mini Glossary
Teclas
SINTONIA
(-/+)/SKIP
Tecla
STOP
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Listening
to the. radio
29
Sound
Mode . Mode
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14
14
Sleep
Timer Setting
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
On-Screen
Sound
Mode Display
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15
14
Dimmer
. . . .Setting
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Sleep Timer
30
Initial
SettingsDisplay
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19
On-Screen
. . 15
Mute
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Dimmer
30
� General
Operation
. . 16
Initial
Settings
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19
Using
Cabo de força
Mute .the
. . Headphone
. . . . . . . . . .Jack
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
�
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
� General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Selecting
Input Source
Using thethe
Headphone
Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Conectores
das
Caixas
Acústicas
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
� Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
XTS
(Excellent
TrueSource
Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Selecting
the Input
30
�
. . 17
� Audio.
Display. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-17
Antena FM XTS
. . . . . .True
. . . .Sound)
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
XTS pro
(Excellent
30
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
� Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
�
. . . . . . .Control)
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19
� Others
Lock (Parental
18
Conector do
Conectores de Entrada de AV2
Reference
� Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TRANSMISSOR
ÁUDIO (L/R) VÍDEO
Language
Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . .(Saída
. . . .DC. .7V)
. . . . 31
Reference
Operation
Country
Code
List
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . LH-W752TA
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31
31
DVD
or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Operation
Troubleshooting
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33
Country Code List
. . 31
Playing
a DVD
Video CD.
. . 19
DVD
or Video
CD and
Operation
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
General
. . . . .CD.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22
Playing aFeatures
DVD and. .Video
. . 19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
� Moving
to another
. . 20
General
Features
. . . .TITLE/GROUP
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22
�
� Moving
Moving to
to another
another CHAPTER/TRACK
TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
�
Motion.
. . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
� Slow
Moving
to another
20
�
and
Playback
� Still
SlowPicture
Motion.
. . Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Antena
. . . . AM
. . Loop
. .. 20
20
�
. . . and
. . . .Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
� Search.
Still Picture
20
Conector de Saída S-VÍDEO OUT
�
� Repeat
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
Conector OPTICAL IN
�
.. ..Saída
.. .. .. .MONITOR
� Repeat
Repeat A-B
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Conector
. .. .. .. .. ..de
. .. .. .. 21
20VÍDEO OUT
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
�
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Terminais
.. .. .. .. .. .. de
.. ..Saída
.. .. .. ..VÍDEO
21
� Marker
Time Search
21 Componente
com entradas Y Pb Pr
�
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Conecte
.. .. .. .. ..a..uma
.. .. .TV
� Zoom.
Marker. Search
. .. .. 21
21
Special
DVD
� Zoom.
. .Features
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
21
AV1 ÁUDÍO Input (L/R)/VÍDEO IN
� TitleDVD
MenuFeatures
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. ..Conector
.. .. .. .. .. ..de.. .Entrada
Special
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
�
� Disc
Title Menu
Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
Changing
the
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
Disc nos
Menu
. . Audio
. .metálicos
. . . Language
. . . . .dos
. . .conectores
Não��toque
pinos
do 22
�
the
Channel
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Changing
Changing
the Audio
Audioeletrostática
Language
22
painel
traseiro. Descarga
�
. . .Audio
. . . . .Channel
. . . . . . .. .. ..pode
.. .. .. .. causar
.. .. .. .. .. 22
� Subtitles
Changing. the
22
danos
permanente
à unidade.
DVD
Audio Discs
� Subtitles
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table
ofPrecautions
Contents
ou em ambos.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
SafetyMIC2
Before
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5
Table ofUse
Contents
.3
Playable
.4
Before
Use Discs
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Compartimento
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..de
.. ..Disco
.. .. .. .. 4-5
Precautions
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54
Playable Discs
Notes
on Discs
Precautions
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
About
Notes Symbols
on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
Front
Panel
and Rear
About
Symbols
. . .Panel
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65
Remote
Control
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76
Front Panel
and Overview
Rear Panel
Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
L
AUDIO
R
AV2 IN
AV1 IN
6
7
Introduction
Introduction
Introdução
Introduction
MIC 1 / MIC 2
Safety
Precautions
. . .conectores
. . . . . . MIC1
. . . ou
............2
Introduction
Conecte
um microfone. nos
Remote
Control
Overview
Remote
Control
Overview
Controle
Remoto
Remote
Control
Overview
Remote
Control
Overview
Remote
Control
Overview
Remote
Control
Overview
Introduction
K
N OR
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE (Z
( ) (Z
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z))
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z
)))detray.
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE
Abre
ou and
fecha
a bandeja
disco.
Opens
and
closes
the
disc
Opens
and
closes
the
(Z
) . (Z
Opens
closes
the
disc
tray.
Audio CD andOPEN/CLOSE
MP3/WMA
Disc
.the
. . disc
.disc
. . tray.
.tray.
. . . . . . . 23
Safety Precautions . . . POWER
......................2
Opens
and
closes
Opens
and
closes
the
disc
tray.
Opens
and
closes
the
disc
tray.
DVDDVD
AUX
DVD
AUX
DVD
Opens
and closes the disc
tray.
AUX
AUX
Playing
an
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc . . . . . 23
Table
of
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
DVD
AUX
DVD
AUX
. . . . . . . . .Seleciona
23
DVD
AUX
a
fonte
de
saída
(CD/DVD)
ou
acessos.
Selects
input
source.
Seleciona
uma
fonte
de
entrada.
DVD
AUXSelects
Selects input
input source.
source.
Select
the output
Select
the
source
(CD/DVD)
or
Select
the
output
source
(CD/DVD)
or
DVD
� Pause . . . .Selects
. . . . .input
. . . source.
.source.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Use
. output
.output
. source
. . .source
. . (CD/DVD)
. . .(CD/DVD)
. . . . or
. . .or
. . . . . . . . . . DVD
. . 4-5
Selects
input
DVD
DVD
Selects
input
source.
the
Disc . . . Before
. . 23Select
Select
the
output
source
(CD/DVD)
or
TV TV
DVD
Select
the
output
source
(CD/DVD)
or
Selects
DVD
TV
accesses
accesses
Select
the output
source
TVinput source.
accesses
TV
TV
� Moving To
to control
another
Track
. .TV
. . .TV
. . only)
. . . . . . . . 23
Playable
Discs
. . .(CD/DVD)
. . . . . .accesses
.or. . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD
. . . .DVD
4
accesses
TV
. . . . . . . . . 23
the
TV.
(LG
accesses
TV
To
control
the
TV.(somente
(LGonly)
accesses
To
control
the
TV.
(LG
TV
only)
Para
controle
da
TV
LG).
BAND
BAND
BAND
To
control
the
TV.
To
control
the
TV.
(LG
only)
BAND
SLEEP SLEEP
� RepeatToTrack/All/Off.
. (LG
. TV.
. .TV
.(LG
. only)
. TV
.TV
. .only)
. . . . . . . . 23
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .BAND
.................5
To control
the
(LG
TV
only)
. . . . . . . .Select
. 23
SLEEP
control
the TV.
SLEEP
BAND
SLEEP
BAND
SLEEP
SLEEP
the
System’s
tunertuner
(FMBAND
and
SLEEP
Seleciona
o sistema
de sintonia
(faixas
FMAM
ou AM)
SLEEP
Select
the
System’s
tuner
(FM
and
AM
SLEEP
SLEEP
Select
the
System’s
(FM
and
AM
� Search. . . .SLEEP
. .System
. . . . . to
. .turn
. . .off
. . automatically.
. . . . . . . . . . . 23
Notes
. . . tuner
. . . (FM
.(FM
. . and
. . .AM
..............5
SLEEP
SLEEP
Select
the
System’s
Selecton
theDiscs
System’s
tuner
(FM
and
AM
. . . . . . .Select
. . 23
SLEEP
Select
the
System’s
tuner
and
AM
Set the
bands)
SLEEP
Set
the System
System
topara
turn
offdesligue
automatically.
bands)
Configura
o
sistema
que
automaticathe System’s
tuner (FM
and
AM
Set
the
to
turn
off
automatically.
bands)
Set
the
Set
the
System
to
turn
off
automatically.
JPEG
Disc Operation
. .System
.time.
.to. turn
. time.
. to
. off
.turn
. automatically.
. .off
. .automatically.
. . . . . . . . 24
About Symbols . . . . . . . . . .bands)
................5
bands)
MUTE MUTE
Set
the
System
to
turn
off
automatically.
. . . . . . . . . 23
bands)
at athe
specified
MUTE
MUTE
Set
System
at
a specified
specified
mente
num
tempo
específico.
bands)
at
a
time.
0-9 0-9
numerical
buttons
MUTE
MUTE
0-9Rear
numerical
buttons
at
a
specified
time.
MUTE
numerical
buttons
at
a
specified
time.
Teclas
numéricas
0-9
disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . 24
at
a
specified
time.
and
Panel
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6
MUTE Viewing a JPEG
0-9
numerical
buttons
. . . . . . . Front
. .Select
24 Panel
0-9
numerical
buttons
atMUTE
a specified
0-9
numerical
buttons
MUTE
a service,
programme
number
MUTE time.
MUTE
0-9
numerical
buttons
Select
service,
programme
number
Select
aa
service,
programme
number
Seleciona
um
serviço,
um
número
MUTE
� Slide Show
.the
. . speakers.
.the
. os
. speakers.
. alto-falantes.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Select
a
programme
number
Select
a service,
service,
programme
number
MUTE
Remote
Control
Overview
.de. programa
.in
. a. .in. a. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
MuteMUTE
. . . . . . . directly
. Select
. 24
Mute
Select
a
service,
programme
number
MUTE
or
select
numbered
options
Emudece
Mute
the
speakers.
directly
or
select
numbered
options
a service,
programme
number
directly
or
select
numbered
options
in
a
diretamente
ou
uma
opção
numerada
em
um
menu.
Mute
Mute
speakers.
Mute
the
speakers.
directly
in
directly or
or select
select numbered
numbered options
options
in aa
a
� Still Picture
. . speakers.
. the
.the
. .speakers.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
directly
or
select
numbered
options
in
Mute
the
. . . . . . .directly
. . 24
SUBTITLE
menu.
SUBTITLE
menu.
or select
numbered
options
in amenu.
SUBTITLE
SUBTITLE
SUBTITLE
menu.
SUBTITLE
menu.
SUBTITLE
menu.
� MovingSUBTITLE
to another
. . . language
.de
. legenda.
. .(DVD).
. . .(DVD).
. . . . . . . 24
Selects
a subtitle
language
Selects
afile
subtitle
language
(DVD).
. . . . . . . Preparation
. . 24
menu.
Seleciona
um
idioma
�
Selects
a
subtitle
XTSXTS
pro
�
XTS
pro
�
�
pro
SUBTITLE
Selects
a
subtitle
language
(DVD).
XTS pro
PRO
Selects
SUBTITLE
Selects
subtitle
language
(DVD).
SUBTITLE
SUBTITLE
XTS
XTS
pro �•��
� To rotate
picture.
. aa. subtitle
. .language
. . . .language
. . (DVD).
. . . . (DVD).
. . . . . . . 24
Selects
a subtitle
XTS
RETURN
enjoy
more
natural
and
realistic
SUBTITLE
SUBTITLE
. . . . . . . Connections
.To
.Para
24
RETURN
Tousufruir
enjoy
more
natural
and
realistic
�.pro
XTS
pro
SUBTITLE
RETURN
To
enjoy
more
natural
and
realistic
RETURN
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-13
de
um
som
mais
natural
e
realístico.
SUBTITLE
RETURN
To
realistic
RETURN
To enjoy
enjoy more
more natural
natural and
and
realistic
RETURN
To
enjoy
natural
and
realistic
Removes
the
menu.
sound.
Playback
.ao.setup
.the
. .setup
.de
. Ajuste.
. .menu.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Removes
setup
menu.
sound.
RETURN
more more
natural
and realistic
Removes
the
sound.
. . . . . . . To
. . enjoy
24
MRAKER
- Programmed
SEARCH
AUDIO AUDIO
SOUNDSOUND
Retorna
menu
MRAKER
SEARCH
XTS
•
Removes
the
setup
menu.
MRAKER
SEARCH
AUDIO
SOUND
MRAKER
SEARCH
AUDIO
SOUND
sound.
Removes
the
setup
menu.
sound.
TV Connections . . . . sound.
. . . . sound.
. . . . . . . . . . . AUDIO
.AUDIO
. . . .SOUND
. 8 MRAKER--SEARCH
Removes
the setup
SEARCH
SOUND MRAKER
Removes
theTracks.
setup
menu.
� MARKER
�som.��
MRAKER - SEARCH
AUDIO
SOUND
XTSde
. . . menu.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 25
MARKER
XTS
. . . . . . . . . 25
Para usufruir
de um grande
efeito
MRAKER - SEARCHRepeat Programmed
AUDIO
SOUND
��
�
MARKER
XTS
•�MARKER
��
MARKER
��
XTS
Optional
Equipment
Connections
�
MARKER
�. . . . . . . . . . . . 9
XTS
MARKER
XTS
Marks
a point
during
playback.
To enjoy
great
sound
effect.
Marks
a point
point
during
playback.
PRESET/ PRESET/
CH
To enjoy
enjoy
great
sound
effect.
� MARKER
�
XTS
Erasing a Track
from
Programme
. . . . . . . . 25
CH
Marks
aponto
during
playback.
To
great
sound
effect.
PRESET/ CH
CH
PRESET/
. . . . . . . . . 25
Marca
um
durante
aList
reprodução.
Marks
a
point
playback.
To
enjoy
great
sound
effect.
Marks
a
point
during
playback.
To
enjoy
great
sound
effect.
PRESET/
PRESET/ CH
CH
Marks
a during
point during
during
playback.
Aerial
Connections
. . AUDIO
.sound
.effect.
. . . .effect.
. . . �. . . . . . . . . .PRESET/
. . 10
To enjoy
� Marks
SEARCH
PRESET/
CH
�
SEARCH
a
point
playback.
To enjoy
great great
sound
�
�
�
SEARCH
CH
AUDIO
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
List
. . . . . . . 25
ÁUDIO •��
•
SEARCH
AUDIO
�
SEARCH
�
SEARCH
t . . . . . . . . 25
�
SEARCH
Displays
MARKER
SEARCH
menu.
�
AUDIO
� . . . . . . . . . 11-12
AUDIO
Displays
MARKER
SEARCH
menu.
Speaker
System
Connection
.
.
.
.
� SEARCH
�
AUDIO
+
Displays
MARKER
SEARCH
menu.
Selects
an
audio
language
(DVD)
or
+
Selects
an
audio
language
(DVD)
or
�(DVD)
AUDIO
Seleciona
um idioma
de áudio
+
Selects
an
audio
language
(DVD)
or
Displays
Exibe
menu
Displays
MARKER
SEARCH
menu.
. o.MARKER
. . . MARKER
.de. Busca
. SEARCH
. . . por
.SEARCH
. marca.
. . menu.
. . . menu.
.menu.
. . . . 26
Displays
MARKER
SEARCH
st . . . . . . . 25 �Selects
an
language
Selects
an audio
audio
language
(DVD)
or. . . . .. . . . . . . . 11 ++++ DivX. Disc Operation
� Displays
DISPLAY
Selects
an
audio
(DVD)
channel
DISPLAY
Transmitter.
.audio
.language
. .ou(DVD)
.channel
. . (CD).
.(DVD)
.or. (CD).
.(CD)
. or
.or
an audio
channel
(CD).
�
+
��
DISPLAY
Selects
an audio
language
an
um
canal
. ..
. ..
• .DISPLAY
��
DISPLAY
�
DISPLAY
an
Speaker. .. Setup
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . 27
an audio
audio channel
channel (CD).
(CD).
..
DISPLAY
. . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing
an
audio
channel
(CD).
.
Accesses
On-Screen
display.
� DISPLAY
an audio
channel
(CD).
Accesses
On-Screen
display.
�
SOUND
MODE
. . . . . . . . . 11
.
a channel
of
Transmitter
SOUND
MODE
•
�
Accesses
On-Screen
display.
SOUND
MODE
Acessa
os
menus
de
tela
(OSDs).
��
SOUND
MODE
Accesses
Accesses
On-Screen
display.
Additional Information
. . . .On-Screen
. . . . display.
. . . display.
.display.
. . . . . . . . . 28
��
SOUND
MODE
�
SOUND
MODE
Accesses
On-Screen
. . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting
SOUND
MODE
Selects
the
sound
mode.
� Accesses
INPUT
On-Screen
Selects
the
sound
mode.
INPUT
Seleciona
osound
modo
de
som
�
SOUND
MODE
•
aSelects
ID
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
�INPUT
Selects
the
mode.
��
INPUT
��
Selects the
the sound
sound mode.
mode.
� INPUT
INPUT
Last Condition
Memory
.fonte
. . TV’s
.da. TV.
. .source.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Selects
the
sound
mode.
INPUT
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling
Selects
theaTV’s
source.
Selects
the
sound
mode.
� INPUT
SETUP
Seleciona
Selects
the TV’s
SETUP
and
Connecting
Selects
the
source.
SETUP
SETUPto the Speakers 11
Selects
TV’s
Selects
the
TV’s
source.
SETUP
SETUP
Screen Saver
. ./�•B
.(///
.v./the
. /.v
. /the
.V
.)(left/right/up/down)
.(esq/dir/acima/abaixo)
. . . source.
.source.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Selects
the
TV’s
SETUP
Accesses
or removes
setup
menu
.
. . . . . . . . . 28
� Selects
b
/b
/B
V
(left/right/up/down)
Accesses
or
removes
setup
menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . 12
TV’s
source.
- -SETUP
Accesses
or
removes
setup
menu
.
�
�
�Accesses
Speaker
Connections.
.
.
.
.
.
.
b
/
B
/
v
/
V
(left/right/up/down)
Acessa
ou
remove
o
menu
de
ajuste
-menu
Accesses or
or removes
removes setup
setup
menu ...
��
b
/.//B
///.v
///V
�
b
B
vuma
V
(left/right/up/down)
or
removes
setup
menu
MENU
Selects
the
Controlling �the
TV
.an
.option
.V
.(left/right/up/down)
.option
. in. .no
.inin
. menu.
.the
. . menu.
. . . . . . . . 28
b
B
v
(left/right/up/down)
seleciona
opção
menu.
MENU
Selects
an
option
the
menu.
. . . . . . . Speaker
. . Accesses
28 Accesses
or removes
setup
menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .- 13 MENU
Selects
an
b
/
B
/
v
/
V
(left/right/up/down)
MENU
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
MENU
Selects
an
option
in
the
MENU
Selects an
option in
the menu.
menu.
MENU
Selects
Accesses
the menu
on aon
DVD
disc.
Accesses
the menu
menu
on
DVD
disc.
• ENTER
MENU
Operation with� Selects
Radio
. . option
. .an
. .option
.in. the
. . in
.menu.
.the
. . menu.
. . . . . . . . 29
an
Accesses
the
aa
DVD
disc.
ENTER
. . . . . . . Before
. . 28
�
ENTER
Accesses
the
menu
on
a
DVD
disc.
�
�
ENTER
Accesses
the
menu
on
a
DVD
disc.
Acessa
o
MENU
em
um
disco
de
DVD.
SCAN
Operation
.on
. .a. DVD
.on. .a.disc.
. . .�disc.
. . . . . . . . . . . . SCAN
14-19
Accesses
the menu
DVD
SCAN
��
ENTER
�
ENTER
SCAN
the menu
Aceita
as seleções
SCAN-/+(bb/BB)
ENTER
Acknowledges
the
SCAN-/+(bb/BB)
Presetting the
radio
stations
. dos
.menu
. .menus.
.menu
.selection.
. . .selection.
. . . . . . . 29
SCAN
Acknowledges
the
menu
selection.
SCAN
�
��
� ENTER
SCAN-/+(bb/BB)
. . . . . . . . . Accesses
29
Acknowledges
the
SCAN
SCAN
-/+ forward.
(Stream )&•�
SCAN-/+(bb/BB)
�Surround
SCAN-/+(bb/BB)
SCAN
Acknowledges
the
menu
Mini Glossary
for
Audio
Acknowledges(/)
the
menu selection.
selection.
�
SCAN-/+(bb/BB)
Search
backward
or
•radio
PRESET/CH(+/-)
Acknowledges
menu
Search
backward
or forward.
forward.
PRESET/CH(+/-)
(v
�
SCAN-/+(bb/BB)
PRESET/CH(+/-)
Search
backward
or
Acknowledges
selection.
Listening to �the
. . . .the
. . menu
. the
. . /.V):
.(v
.////V):
.V):
. selection.
. . . . . . . 29
� PRESET/CH(+/-)
��
(v
V):
Busca
em
avanço
e
retrocesso
. . . . . . . . . 29
Search
backward
or
forward.
Search
backward
or
forward.
�
PRESET/CH(+/-)
(v
�
PRESET/CH(+/-)
(v
V):
Search
backward
or
forward.
t/T
). �. .)).���. . . . . . . . . . . . 14
ModeSearch
. . . . backward
. .SLOW-/+(
. . .SLOW-/+(
. . or
. .forward.
. . . t/T
.t/T
Seleciona
aprogramme
programação
de
TV
ou
Rádio.
�
PRESET/CH(+/-)
(v
/Radio.
V):
SLOW-/+(
Select
programme
of
TV
or
�
PRESET/CH(+/-)
(v
/
V):
Select
of
TV
or
Select
programme
of
TV
or
Radio.
Other Functions. .•.TURN
. . . (-/+)
. .programme
. (/)
. . . . . . .of
.TV
. .or
. Radio.
.Radio.
. . . . . 30
SLOW-/+(
t/T
SLOW(
�
SLOW-/+(
t/T)))) •��
. . . . . . . . . 29
SLOW-/+(
Select
Reverse/
Forward
slow
playback.
Select
programme
of. TV
or
Radio.
Reverse/
Forward
slow
playback.
�
Select
programme
of
TV
or
Radio.
SLOW-/+(
t/T
).t/T
Reverse/
Forward
slow
playback.
Sound
Mode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
� Select
TUN(-/+)
(b/B):
�
TUN(-/+)
(b/B):
programme
of
TV
or
Radio.
�
�
Reverse/
Forward
slow
playback.
TUN(-/+)
(b/B):
Reverse/
Forward
slow
playback.
Reprodução
lenta
emSKIP(.
avanço
ou retrocesso
Sleep Timer Setting
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . 30
Reverse/
Forward
slow
playback.
REVERSE
) � )) ���
��
TUN(-/+)
(b/B):
�
TUN(-/+)
(b/B):
. . . . . . . . . 30Reverse/
REVERSE
SKIP(.
Para
a
sintonia
da
estação
de
rádio
desejada.
Forward
slow
playback.
TUN(-/+)
(b/B):
REVERSE
SKIP(.
To tune
in(b/B):
the
desired
radioradio
station.
SKIP
On-Screen
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
To
tune
in
the
desired
radio
station.
SKIP
�
TUN(-/+)
�
REVERSE
SKIP(.
)
�
REVERSE
SKIP(.
)
To
tune
in
the
desired
station.
SKIP
SKIP
REVERSE
SKIP(
)
•
�
REVERSE
SKIP(.
backward*/go
to beginning
SKIP
Search
backward*/go
to
beginning
of
Dimmer . . . . . . . To
. . tune
. . . in
.in. the
. . .desired
. . . . .radio
. . . .station.
. . . . . 30
To
tune
the
desired
radio
station.
SKIP
REVERSE
SKIP(.
) �of )of
Search
backward*/go
to
beginning
. . . . . . . . .Search
30
To
the
desired
radio
station.
SKIP
Search
backward*/go
to
beginning
To TITLE
tune
intune
the in
desired
radio station.
Search
backward*/go
to.track
beginning
of
TITLE
Initial
Settings
. .or
. .beginning
. or
.to
. . go
. ao
.ofto
.início
. .of
. . . . . . .SKIP
. . . 16-19
TITLE
Buscachapter
em
retrocesso/vai
Search
backward*/go
beginning
of
current
chapter
track
or
TITLE
current
chapter
or
go
to
backward*/go
to
current
or
track
or
go
to
Mute . . . . .Displays
. . .TITLE
. . the
. . disc’s
. the
. . disc’s
.Title
. . menu,
.Title
. . .menu,
. . .if .available.
. . . . . . 30
TITLE
. . . . . . . . Search
. 30 � General
current
chapter
or
track
or
go
to
TITLE
current
chapter
oratual
track
or
go
to. . . . . . . . . . . . 16
if. available.
Displays
current
chapter
or
track
or
go
to
do
capítulo
ou
faixa
ou
anterior
previous
chapter
or
track.
TITLE
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Displays
the
disc’s
Title
menu,
if
available.
Para
exibir
o
título
do
disco,
se
disponível.
previous
chapter
or
track.
current
chapter
or
track
or
go
to
previous
chapter
or
track.
Displays
Displaysthe
thedisc’s
disc’s
Title
menu,
available.
Using the Headphone
Jack
. .Title
. . menu,
.menu,
. . . if.ififavailable.
.available.
. . . . . . 30
previous
chapter
or
Displays
the
disc’s
Title
previous
chapter
or
track.
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Language
previous
�track.
FORWARD
). track.
Displays
the disc’s
FORWARD
VOLUME
(+/-)
FORWARD
VOLUME
(+/-)Title
VOLUME
(+/-)menu, if available.
previous
or
.chapter
. .SKIP(>
. chapter
. SKIP(>
.SKIP(>
.SKIP(
.track.
. .or
. .))))).•�����. . . . . . . . . . . . 16
FORWARD
SKIP(>
VOLUME
(+/-)
FORWARD
FORWARD
SKIP(>
VOLUME
(+/-)
VOLUME
(+/-)
Selecting the
Source
. volume
. .and
. .das
.TV
.caixas
.volume.
.TV
. volume.
.acústicas
. . . . .e30
FORWARD
SKIP(>
)�
Search
forward*/go
to next
VOLUME
(+/-)
To Input
adjust
speaker
volume
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Display
Busca
em
avanço/vai
para
Search
forward*/go
to
next
To
adjust
speaker
volume
and
volume.
Ajusta
o(+/-)
nível
do. volume
�
FORWARD
SKIP(>
)
VOLUME
Search
forward*/go
to
next
To
adjust
speaker
and
TV
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
Search
forward*/go
to
next
Search
forward*/go
totrack.
next
To
speaker
Toadjust
adjust
speaker. volume
volume
and
TV
volume.
Search
forward*/go
to
next
chapter
or
To
adjust
speaker
and
XTS (Excellent
True
Sound)
. . .TV
.and
.volume.
. TV
.TV
. volume.
.volume.
. . . . . 30
chapter
or
o próximo
capítulo
ou
faixa
Search
to track.
next
da
TV.(B)
To
speaker
volume.volume
and
chapter
or
track.
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio.
� adjust
PLAY
�
PLAY
(B)
or
track.
�
�
PLAY
(B)
chapter
or
track.
. .forward*/go
. .chapter
. . .chapter
.chapter
.PROG.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
or �track.
PLAY
(B)
PLAY
(B)
or track.
PLAY
(B)
XTS pro . . �. .PLAY
. .���• .PLAY()
. (B)
.playback.
. . playback.
.playback.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Starts
�
PROG.
D.INPUT
Starts
PROG.
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control)
D.INPUT
Starts
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
PROG.
PROG.
.�menu.
. . .•�����. . . . . . . . . . . . 18 D.INPUT
Starts
playback.
Starts
playback.
D.INPUT
PROG.
PROG.
Starts
playback.
or removes
Program
menu.
� Starts
PAUSE/STEP
(X) (X
D.INPUT
Inicia
a reprodução.
PROG.
Accesses
or removes
removes
Program
PAUSE/STEP
(X))
playback.
Accesses
or
Program
menu.
� PAUSE/STEP
��
D.INPUT
. . . . . . . . Accesses
. 30Accesses
or
removes
Program
menu.
�
PAUSE/STEP
Accesses
or
removes
Program
menu.
�
PAUSE/STEP
(X)))
� Others
. .ou
. remove
. Program
. . . .oProgram
.menu
. menu.
. MEMO.
. Programa
. .menu.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Accesses
or
removes
�
PAUSE/STEP
(X
Pause
playback
• PAUSE/STEP
( )) (X
�. . .��
MEMO.
Pause
playback
Accesses
orAcessa
removes
� PAUSE/STEP
(X
Pause
playback
�
MEMO.
Reference
Pause
playback
Pause
playback
�
MEMO.
�
MEMO.
Pause
playback
�
MEMO
•
STOP
(x
)
�
MEMO.
STOP
(x))
Pausa
a reprodução.
Enter
a radio
station’s
frequency
into
Pause
playback
� STOP
��
(x
� into
MEMO.
Enter
a radio
radio
station’s
frequency
into
Enter
a
station’s
frequency
��
(x
� STOP
STOP
(x
Stops
radio
frequency
into
STOP
(x
Language Code
List
.playback.
. .) playback.
.playback.
. . ))). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Enter
a
radio station’s
station’s
frequency
into
Stops
EntraEnter
com aaa
frequência
de uma estação
de tuner.
rádio
radio
station’s
frequency
into
Stops
• STOP()
� STOP
(x
the tuner.
the
Enter Enter
a radio
station’s
frequency
intotuner.
Stops
playback.
Operation
Stops
playback.
the
Stops
the
the tuner.
tuner.
no sintonizador
Stops
Country Code �List
. ZOOM
.playback.
.a.reprodução.
. .playback.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
the
tuner.
ZOOM
Pára
. . . . . . . . . 31
�
CLEAR
the
tuner.
�
CLEAR
� ZOOM
��
�
�
CLEAR
DVD or Video CD Operation
.CLEAR
. . . . •�.��. . . . . . . . . 19-22
ZOOM
CLEAR
CLEAR
ZOOM
CLEAR
Troubleshooting
. ���.• ZOOM
.ZOOM
. . . the
. . .DVD
. . DVD
.DVD
. . .video
. image.
. . .image.
. . . . . 32-33
Enlarges
video
a track
number
on
the
� ZOOM
Enlarges
the
video
image.
. . . . . . . . . 31 Removes
�
CLEAR
Removes
a track
track
number
on the
the
Enlarges
the
Removes
a
number
on
DVD
Playing
a DVD
and
Video
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Removes
aa
track
number
on
Remove
um número
de faixa
no
menu
Programa
ou
Enlarges
the
DVD
video
image.
Removes
a
track
number
on.the
the
a. imagem
Enlarges
DVD
Removes
track
on
the
program
or
a or
mark
onCD.
the
Specifications�.Enlarges
. .��Amplia
. Enlarges
. . .the
. DVD
. the
.the
. .de
. vídeo
. . video
.video
.do. DVD.
. image.
.image.
. . . . . . . 34
DIMMER
video
image.
program
menu
ornumber
a mark
mark
on the
the
amenu
track
number
on
the
DIMMER
. . . . . . . 32-33Removes
program
menu
a
on
� DIMMER
program
menu
or
a
mark
on
the
uma
marca
no
menu
de
Busca
por
marca
program
menu
or. a
a
mark
on
the
��
DIMMER
�
DIMMER
Generalprogram
Features
.or
. .on
. .the
. on
. . .the
. . . . . . . . . . 20-22
• DIMMER
menu
mark
DIMMER
MARKER
menu.
MARKER
SEARCH
menu.
menu
orSEARCH
a.mark
Press
to change
brightness
of the
� DIMMER
MARKER
SEARCH
menu.
Press
to change
change
brightness
of the
the
. . . . . . . . . 34 program
Press
to
brightness
of
MARKER
SEARCH
menu.
REPEAT
MARKER
SEARCH
menu.
Pressione
para
mudar
obrightness
brilho
da
janela
Press
to
change
of
MARKER
SEARCH
Press
to
change
brightness
of the
the
� Moving
to another
TITLE/GROUP
. . . . . . . . 20
�
REPEAT
Press
to
change
brightness
of
the
MARKER
SEARCH
menu.menu.
REPEAT
display
on
the
front
panel
�
��
REPEAT
Press
to window
change
brightness
thepanel
display
window
on
the of
front
panel
display
window
on
the
front
Repete capítulo, faixa, título,
tudo (All)�
REPEAT
�
REPEAT
dodisplay
display
no
painel frontal,
quando
window
on
front
display
window
on the
the
front panel
panel
�
REPEAT
� Moving
to chapter,
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . . . 20
Repeat
chapter,
track,
title,
all.
display
window
on
the
front
panel
� all.
dur-ing
in
power-on
status.
REPEAT
Repeat
chapter,
track,
title,
all.
dur-ing
in
power-on
status.
Repeat
track,
title,
display
window
on
the
front
panel
dur-ing
in
power-on
status.
REPEAT
A-B
Repeat
chapter,
track,
title,
all.
Repeat
chapter,
track,
title,
all.
estiver
ligado.
dur-ing
in
power-on
status.
dur-ing
in
power-on
status.
chapter,
dur-ing
in power-on
�. . all.
REPEAT
�Repeat
SlowRepeat
Motion.
. REPEAT
.REPEAT
. . track,
. .A-B
.sequência
. title,
.A-B
. �. . . . . . . . . . . . 20
chapter,
track,
title,
all.
� dur-ing
D.INPUT
A-B
in power-on
status.status.
D.INPUT
��
D.INPUT
Repete
uma
•�D.INPUT
REPEAT
A-B
REPEAT
A-B ����
��
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
REPEAT
D.INPUT
Repeats
sequence.
�A-B �
REPEAT
A-B
Repeats
sequence.
� Still Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
Playback . 20
To�Para
select
a digital
input
source.
� D.INPUT
Repeats
sequence.
Toselecionar
select
digital
input
source.
To
select
aa
digital
input
source.
uma
fonte
de entrada
digital:
Repeats
Repeats sequence.
sequence.
To
select
a
digital
input
source.
Repeats
sequence.
To
select
a
digital
input
source.
To select
a digital
input
source.
� Search. .Repeats
. . . . . .sequence.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
To select
a edigital
input source.
AV1,AV2
OPTCAL..
MICMIC
VOL.(V/v)
MIC
VOL.(V/v)
VOL.(V/v)
� Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
MIC
VOL.(V/v)
MIC
VOL.(V/v)
MIC
VOL
(/)
MIC
VOL.(V/v)
Adjusts
microphone
volume.
Adjusts
microphone
volume.
MIC
VOL.(V/v)
ECHO
VOL.(V/v)
Adjusts
microphone
volume.
ECHO
VOL.(V/v)
ECHO
VOL.(V/v)
Adjusts
microphone
volume.
Adjusts
microphone
volume.
Ajusta o volume
do microfone.
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECHO
.ECHO
. . . VOL
. .VOL.(V/v)
.(/)
21
Adjusts
microphone
volume.
ECHO
VOL.(V/v)
ECHO
VOL.(V/v)
Adjusts
microphone
volume.
Adjusts
echo
volume.
Ajusta
o volume
do
eco
Adjusts
echo
volume.
ECHO
VOL.(V/v)
Adjusts
echo
volume.
echo
volume.
� Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Adjusts
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
Adjusts echo
echo volume.
volume.
Adjusts
hin an
Adjusts
echo volume.
� Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
r
Faixa �deZoom.
operação
Instalação das pilhas do controle remoto
. . . do
. . .Controle
. . . . . . .Remoto
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Aponte
oControl
controle
remoto
ao .sensor
e. pressione
as
teclas.
Retire
a tampa
do compartimento
de
Special
DVD
Features
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
y be
Remote
Operation
Range
Remote
control
battery
installation
Remote
Control
Operation
Range
Remote
control
battery
installation
Remote
Control
Operation
Range
Remote
control
battery
installation
Remote
Control
Operation
Range
Remote
control
battery
installation
Remote
Control
Operation
Range
Remote
control
battery
installation
lectric Remote
Remote
Control
Operation
Range
Remote
control
battery
installation
•Point
Distância.
Aproximadamente
7
m
a
partir
do
sensor
do
pilhas
na
parte
de
trás
do
controle
�Control
Title
Menu
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
Operation
Range
Remote
control
battery
installation
the remote
control
at the
sensor
and and
press
the the
Point
the remote
remote
control
atremote
the remote
remote
sensor
and press
press
the
Remove
the battery
cover
on the
of
the
Point
the
control
at
the
sensor
Remove
the battery
battery
cover
onrear
the rear
rear
of the
the
Remove
the
cover
on
the
of
Point
the
remote
control
Point
the
remote
control
at
remote
sensor
and
press
the
� Disc
Menu
. at. .the
. .at
. the
.the
. .remote
. sensor
. . . .sensor
. and
. . . press
.and
. . .press
. . . .the
22
buttons.
Remove
the
battery
cover
on
the
rear
of
painel
remoto
eand
insira
duas
pilhas
tipo
Point
thefrontal
remote
at
the
remote
sensor
and
press
Remove
the
battery
cover
on
the
rearRO3
of
the
buttons.
Remove
the
battery
cover
on
the
of the
the
buttons.
Point
the
remote
controlcontrol
remote
the the
remote
control,
insert
twothe
R03
(size
remote
control,
and insert
insert
two
R03
(size
Remove
the battery
cover
on
rear
ofrear
the
buttons.
remote
control,
and
two
R03
(size
buttons.
� Distance:
About
23the
ft23
(7Audio
m)
from
the front
of
the
remote
senbuttons.
� Distance:
Distance:
About
23
ft
(7
m)
from
the
front
of
the
remote
senremote
control,
and
insert
two
R03
(size
remote
control,
and
insert
two
R03
(size
�
Changing
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
�
About
ft
(7
m)
from
the
front
of
the
remote
senbuttons.
remote
control,
and
insert
two
R03
(size
(tamanho
AAA)
com
oR03
posicionamento
• Ângulo:
Aproximadamente
30°
emthe
cada
na frente
�
About
from
front
of
sen� Distance:
Distance:
About 23
23 ftft
ft (7
(7 m)
m)
from
the
frontdireção
of the
the remote
remote
senAAA)
batteries
with
and
aligned
remote
control,
and
insert
two
(size
angle
sor
AAA)
batteries
with
and
aligned
�
Distance:
About
23
(7
m)
from
the
front
of
the
remote
sensor
AAA)
batteries
with
and
aligned
sor
� Distance:
About 23 ft
(7 Audio
m) fromChannel
the front of
the
remote
senAAA)
batteries
with
and
aligned
�
Changing
the
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
AAA)
batteries
with
and
aligned
sor
sor
AAA)
batteries
with
and
aligned
�sor
Angle:
About
30°
each
direction
in front
of
theof
sensor
sorsensor
correctly.
ce of
�do
Angle:
About
30°
ineach
each
direction
infront
front
ofremote
theremote
remote
sensor
correctly.
doin30°
controle
remoto.
corretowith
dos pólos
-.
AAA)
batteries
and + e aligned
�
Angle:
About
30°
in
direction
in
the
sensor
correctly.
�
About
� Angle:
Angle:
About
30°
in.each
each
direction
in. front
front
of.the
the
remote
sensor
correctly.
correctly.
�
Angle:
About
each
direction
the
remote
sensor
�About
Subtitles
. . in
.in
. . . direction
. . in. .front
. .inin
. the
. . of.of
. .remote
. sensor
. . . .sensor
. 22
correctly.
the
symbols
for
instructions
ng)
�About
Angle:
30°
in 30°
each
direction
offront
remote
correctly.
DVD
Audio
Discs
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
he
Caution
Caution
Caution
Indicates
hazards likely to cause harm to the unit
Caution
Caution
Caution
Do not
mix
old
and
new
batteries.
Never
mix different
types
of batteries
(standard,
alkaline,
etc.).etc.).
Caution
Do
not
mixother
old and
and
new
batteries.
Never
mix different
different
types
of batteries
batteries
(standard,
alkaline,
etc.).
Precaução
7 77
Do
not
mix
old
new
batteries.
Never
mix
types
of
(standard,
alkaline,
itself
or
material
damage.
Do
not
new
Never
Do
not
mix
old
and
new
batteries.
Never
mix
different
types
of
batteries
(standard,
alkaline,
etc.).
Do not mix
mix old
old and
and
new batteries.
batteries.
Never mix
mix different
different types
types of
of batteries
batteries (standard,
(standard, alkaline,
alkaline, etc.).
etc.).
7
Do
not misture
mix old and
newvelhas
batteries.
mixNunca
different
types of
batteries
(standard,
alkaline,
etc.).
Não
pilhas
comNever
novas.
misture
pilhas
de tipos
diferentes
(normal/alcalina,
Indicates special operating features of this unit.
8
Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier.
pace
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
etc.)
7
7
K
N OR
pace
hin an
r
y be
lectric
angle
ce of
wner’s
ng)
d
the
he
oca-
ures
K
s radiN OR
pen
T
pace
er
such
cted to
ner’s
the
oca-
ures
s radi-
pen
T
er
uch
ted to
TV Connections
Conexões
� Make one of the following connections, depending on
Progressive Scan (ColorStream pro)
About
the
symbols for
instructions
the capabilities
Introduction
Conexões
da TV of your existing equipment.
connection
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety
Precautions
. . . .to. . cause
. . . . . harm
. . . . .to. .the
. . .unit
..2
Indicates
hazards. .likely
Introduction
� If your television is a high-definition or “digital ready”
Faça uma das seguintes conexões, dependendo da
®
Conexão
Progressive
Scan
(ColorStream®
Pro)
itself
or other material
Playing
an Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
.. .. .. .. 23
Table
ofPrecautions
Contents
. .. .. .. ..damage.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
Audio
CDtelevision,
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.advantage
. . . . . Disc
. . . of
. .. the
23
Safety
DVD/CD
you de
may
take
• Se�oPause
seuan
televisor
.Audio
. . . . for
.CD
. . .and
.alta
. .MP3/WMA
.definição
. . . . . . .ou
.Disc
. “digital
. . .. .. .. ready”,
. .. 23
23
� Depending on your TV and other equipment you wishPlaying
progressive
scan
output
for
the. highest
Receiver’s
Indicates
special
operating
features
of
this
unit.
você
pode
tirar
vantagem
da
saída
Progressive
Scan
to. .another
Track
Playable
. .. .. .various
. .. .. .. .. .. ways
. .. .. ..could
. 4 connect �� Moving
Pause
. . . . . .possible.
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
Before
UsetoDiscs
. .connect,
. . .. .. .. .. there
.. .. .. .. .are
.. .. .. .. .you
.. 4-5
video. resolution
Repeat
. . . ..para
.. ..the
.. obter
.. .Progressive
.. .. .. .. ..Scan
23
Precautions
. . .. .. .. .. ..Receiver.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. Use
.. .. .. .one
..of
.. ..the
.. .. .connection
do��DVD
Theater
System
toTV
another
Track
. .. .. .a. ..melhor
23
Playable
Discs
. .. ..task
. .. .. .. 54
the
DVD/CD
�Moving
If Home
yourTrack/All/Off.
does not
accept
Indicates
tips
and hints
for making
the
easier.
Dicas:
�
.vídeo
.the
. . picture
. possível.
. . . . .will
.. .. .appear
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. if.. .you
Notes
onmethods
Discs
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..below.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
� Search.
Repeat
. .. .. .. .. ..scrambled
. 23
23 try
Precautions
. . . ..described
resolução
deTrack/All/Off.
format,
JPEG�Disc
Operation
.. .. .the
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
About
.. ..televisor
.. ..from
..Dolby
.. .emanuals
.. Laboratories.
..outros
.. .. .. of
.. ..equipamentos
.. .. .. .“Dolby”,
.. .. ..VCR,
.. .. 55 Stereo
• Dependendo
do license
seu
refer
to.. ..the
your
Search.
. . . . .Scan
. .. .. .. on
. .. .. .DVD/CD
. .. .. .. .. .. ..Receiver.
23
Notes�Symbols
onPlease
Discs
. ..de
.TV,
Manufactured
under
Progressive
Viewing
aOperation
JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
“Pro
Logic”,
the double-D
trademarks
Front
Panel
and
Rear
.. .. várias
..as
.. ..necessary
.. ..formas
.. .. .. .of
..to
.. ..make
.. 65 theJPEG
System
or
devices
Disc
24
About
Symbols
. . other
.Panel
. .symbol
. existem
. . .. ..are
. .. Dolby
que
vocêand
deseja
conectar,
de
•
Se
o
seu
televisor
não
for
compatível
com
Progressive
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
� Connect
SlideaShow
. disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .VIDEO
.. .. .. .. .from
Remote
Control
Overview
. . .. .System.
.. .. .. .. ..Copyright
.. .. ..apenas
.. .. .. .1992.. 76
Viewing
JPEG
. .. .. .. .. .OUT
. .. .. .. jacks
. .. 24
24the
Front
Panel
andconnections.
RearAll
Panel
. ..works.
. .. ..uma
the COMPONENT
conectar
obest
DVD
Home
Theater
Use
1997
Dolby Laboratories.
rights reserved.
Scan,
a imagem
vai
desfocada
�
Still
.. .. .aparecer
.. .. the
.. .. ..corresponding
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ao
.. .. .tentar
.. ..jacks
.. .. .. 24
�DVD/CD
SlidePicture
Show
. .. to
.in
24
Receiver
on the
Remote
Control
Overview
....................7
das
ligações
descritas
a
seguir.
Caution
utilizar
recurso.
Manufactured under
license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
�
Moving
toananother
.. .. .Pr
.. .. .. ..(C).
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
�TV
Stillesse
Picture
. . . . . file
. Y. .Pb
. .. ..cable
24
using
optional
Preparation
US
Pat. No.�5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
Make
sure
the
DVD/CD
Receiver
is connected
directly �� To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
•other
Por
favor,
consulte
os
manuais
do
seu
televisor,
VCR,
Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
worldwide patents
“DTS”
Connections
. . TV.
. . .issued
. . . . and
. the
. . pending.
. correct
. . . . . AV
. . .input
. .and
. .on
.“DTS
. your
8-13TV.
Preparation
to .the
Select
Parte
deTV
trás TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Programmed
Digital
Surround”
are ou
registered
trademarks
of Digital
Theater
Rear Playback
of
sistema
estéreo
de
outros
dispositivos,
para
fazer
TV Connections
. your
. 8-13
. aTV
. 8 via your � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connections
. . . connect
. 1996,
.. .. .. .. .2000
.. .. .. Digital
..DVD/CD
.. .. .. ..Theater
.. .. ..Receiver
.. .. Systems,
.. .. .. .. .to
Systems,
Inc.
� Copyright
Do. not
Repeat Programmed
Tracks.
Programmed
Playback
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
melhor
conexão.
Inc. All
reserved.
Optional
Equipment
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..by
.. 98the copy
TVrights
Connections
. Connections
. . .image
. . . . .could
. . . .. .be
. .. ..distorted
VCR.
The .DVD
Erasing
a Track from Programme
Repeat Programmed
Tracks. . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
About
the
symbols
Aerial
Connections
. .Connections
. for
. . . .instructions
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10
Optional
Equipment
.9
protection
system.
Erasing
Complete
Programme List
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Erasing the
a Track
from Programme
25
Speaker
System
Connection
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12
Aerial
Connections
. . . . to
. . .cause
.. .. .. .. .harm
. . 10
OTES
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
Indicates
hazards
likely
to the unit
DivX
Disc Operation
. . . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
the Complete
25
�
Transmitter.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
It is forbidden
by
law
to
copy
,
broadcast,
show
,
broadcast
Speaker
System
Connection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-12
Precauções
S-Video
connection
itself or
other material
damage.
Speaker
Setup
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
DivX Disc
Operation
26
via cable,
play in public,
rent
�
a channel
.. without
.. .. .. .. .. .. 11
� Changing
Transmitter.
.or.oCAUTION
.DVD
. . copyrighted
. .of
. Transmitter
. . . .Theater
. .material
. . . ..System
11
• Certifique-se
de que
Home
esteja
Additional
Information
Connect
the
S-VIDEO
OUT
jack
on
the
DVD/CD
Speaker Setup
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
27
permission.
RISK
OF
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
�
Setting
a
ID
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
Indicates
special
operating
features
of
this
unit.
� Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
Last Condition
Memory
DO
NOT OPEN
Receiver
to
the
S-VIDEO
INfunction
jack
on
the TV using
ligado
ao
televisor.
Sintonize
oSpeakers
televisor
ao11 theAdditional
Information
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Thisdiretamente
product
features
the
copy
protection
developed
�
Assembling
and
Connecting
to
the
� Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Screen
Saver . .Memory
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
by Macrovision.
Copycable
protection
signals are recorded on some
(S).for
Last Condition
28
canal
deS-Video
entrada
deand
vídeo
corretamente.
Indicates
tips
and
hints
making
�
Connections.
. . . . .THE
. the
. the
.RISK
.task
.Speakers
. . easier.
. .discs
. . . 12
� Speaker
Assembling
Connecting
to
11
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE
discs. When
recording
and playing
the pictures
of these
Controlling
the. TV
Screen Saver
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
OF
ELECTRIC
Video
connection
�ligue
Speaker
Connections.
. .SHOCK
. . . System
. . . . . .através
. . . . . .do
12
on
aNão
VCR,
picture
noise
willHome
appear.
•Manufactured
o
seu
DVD
Theater
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
V
S TV . . . . . . . . . . . C
Controlling the
. . . . . . . . . . . . 28
under
license
DO NOT
(OR
BACK)
Before
Operation
. .REMOVE
.copyright
.from
.DVD
. .. .Dolby
. COVER
.pode
. ..OUT
.Laboratories.
.ficar
. .jack
. ..technology
. ..from
. .. ..“Dolby”,
.the
. .that
14-19
This
product
incorporates
protection
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
Connect
the
MONITOR
DVD/CD
seu
VCR.
A
imagem
do
distorcida
pelo
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
“Pro Logic”, andNO
theUSER-SERVICEABLE
double-D symbol arePARTS
trademarks
of Dolby
Operation
with
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
29
INSIDE
isBefore
protected
by
method
other
Mini Operation
Glossary
for
&
.Audio
. . VIDEO
. of
. Stream
.certain
. .QUALIFIED
.IN
.works.
.U.S.
. . Surround
. patents
.Copyright
. .the
. . and
. . .199214-19the
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
Receiver
to.claims
the
jack
on
TV
using
Listening
theradio
radiostations
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
REFER
SERVICING
TO
SERVICE
sistema
de
proteção
contra
cópia.
Presettingtothe
29
intellectual
property
owned
Mode
.Laboratories.
. . . .cable
. rights
. for
. . supplied
.Audio
. PERSONNEL.
.rights
. . Stream
.by
.(V).
.Macrovision
...&
. . Surround
. . . Corporation
. . . . . . . . 14
1997
DolbyGlossary
All
reserved.
Mini
video
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Listening
to the. radio
29
and other
rights owners.
of this
Sound
.. .. ..Use
.. .. .from
.. ..copyright
.. .. .Theater
.. ..protection
.. ..Systems,
.. .. .. .. ..tech.. .. .. 14
Mode . Mode
.under
. authorized
. . . license
. .. .. ..Digital
. ..Corporation,
14
Manufactured
Sleep
Timer Setting
nology must be
by Macrovision
andInc.
is
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
®. . . . 15
On-Screen
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
US
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
Component
Video
(Color
Stream
)
connection
Conexão
S-Vídeo
Sound
Mode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
intended
for home
and other
limited
viewing
uses
only
unless
Dimmer
. . . .Setting
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
This
lightning
flash
with
arrowhead
symbol
within an
Sleep Timer
30
other
worldwide
patents
issued
and
pending.
“DTS”
and
“DTS
Initial
Settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-19
On-Screen
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
otherwise
by Macrovision
Reverse
Conecte
aauthorized
saída
S-VÍDEO
OUT
doCorporation.
DVD
Home
Theater
Connect
the
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OUT
jacks from the Mute
equilateral
triangle
is intended
to
alert
the
user
Digital
Surround”
are
registered
trademarks
of
Digital
Theater
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Dimmer
30
� General
Operation
. .. .. ..dangerous
.jacks
engineering
orabout
disassembly
prohibited.
Initial
Settings
. .presence
. . .is.do
.. to
..seu
.. the
..Digital
..televisor,
..corresponding
.. .. .Theater
.. ..Systems,
.. .. ..in
.. 16-19
Systems,
Copyright
1996,
2000
the
of
uninsulated
DVD/CD
Receiver
System
àInc.
entrada
S-Vídeo
utilizando
o. 16 on the Using
Mute .the
. . Headphone
. . . . . . . . . .Jack
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Inc. All �
rights
reserved.
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
voltage
within
the
product’s
enclosure
that
may
be
� General
Operation
. . . . (C).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
TV using
an Y Pb .Pr. .cable
Selecting
Input Source
cabo S-Vídeo
(S).
Using thethe
Headphone
Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. L.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
of
sufficient
magnitude
to
constitute
a
risk
of
electric
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
LanguageThe
. .serial
. . . .number
. . . . . is. .located
. . . . .on
. . the
. . .back
. . . 16
SERIAL�NUMBER:
XTS
(Excellent
TrueSource
Sound). .. .. .. .. ..AUDIO
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Selecting
the Input
30
shock
of this
unit.
This
number
�
. .. .to
. ..persons.
. . 17
OTES
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
� Audio.
Display
.. is
.. ..unique
.. .. .. .. ..to.. this
.. .. ..unit
.. .. ..and
.. .. ..not
.. .. available
.. .. .. 16-17
XTS
pro
. . . . . .True
. . . .Sound)
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. R.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
XTS
(Excellent
30
to
others.
You
should
record
requested
information
here
and
Conexão
de
Vídeo
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
It is forbidden
by law
to
copy
,.broadcast,
show
, .broadcast
� Audio.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
retain this
guide
as
a
permanent
record
of
your
purchase.
The
exclamation
mark
within an
equilateral
triangle
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
via
cable,
play
in(Parental
public,
�
. MONITOR
. . . .or. .rent
. . OUT
.copyrighted
. . . do
.. .. DVD
.. .. .material
.. .. .. .. without
..Theater
.. .. .. .. .. 19
Conecte
a saída
� Others
Lock
Control)
. ..Home
18
Reference
permission. is intended to alert the user about the presence of
� àOthers
. .VÍDEO
. . operating
. . . IN
. . da
. .and
.TV
. .maintenance
. . . . . .o. cabo
. .(servicing)
. . de
. . vídeo
. . 19
About
the
symbols for instructions
System
entrada
usando
Model
No.
___________________________________
important
This product features the copy protection function developed
Language
Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Reference
in the instructions
accompanying
the
Operation
Serial
No. ___________________________________
fornecido
(V)instructions
by
Macrovision.
Copy protection
signals are recorded
on some
Parte
deof
trás
do
Rear
Receiver
Country
Code
List
.DVD/CD
. ..likely
.. .. .DVD
.. .. cause
.. .. .. .. .. harm
.. .. .. .. ..to
.. ..the
.. .. ..unit
.. 31
Indicates
hazards
Language
Code
List
. ..to
31
product.
DVD
or Video
CD Operation
. . .pictures
. . . . . of
. . these
. . . . discs
. 19-22
discs.
When
recording
and playing the
Operation
Troubleshooting
.material
. .. .. .. .. ..damage.
itself Code
or other
Country
List
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33
. . 31
on
a
VCR,
picture
noise
will
appear.
Playing
a TO
DVD
and
Video
CD.
. . 19
DVD
or Video
CD
Operation
. OR
. . ..ELECTRIC
..Stream®)
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..SHOCK
.. .. .. 19-22
Conexão
Vídeo
Componente
(Color
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
WARNING:
PREVENT
FIRE
Troubleshooting
otes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
This product
incorporates
copyright
protection
General
Features
. .Video
. . . THIS
. .CD.
. . PRODUCT
. .. .. .. ..technology
. .. that
Playing
a
DVD
and
.. ..do
..TO
.. DVD
.. .RAIN
.20-22
. .OR
19
Indicates
special
otas
HAZARD,
DO
NOT
EXPOSE
a by
saída
COMPONENT
VíDEO
Home
Specifications
. . . operating
. . . . . . .to.features
.“On”
. . . on
. . of
.the
. this
. .Setup
. unit.
. . . menu
. . 34 for
isConecte
protected
method
claims
of certain
U.S.OUT
patents
� Set the. Progressive
� Moving
to another
TITLE/GROUP
. .. ..and
. .. ..other
. . 20
General
Features
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20-22
MOISTURE.
intellectual
propertyà rights
owned
by Macrovision
Corporation
Theater
System
entrada
correspondente
Y
Pb
Pr
da
TV,
progressive
signal,
see
page
17.
•
Ajuste
a
opção
de
Leitura
Progressiva
(Progressive
Indicates
tips
and
hints
for
making
the
task
easier.
�
Moving
to
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
.
.
.
.
.
20
�
Moving
to
another
TITLE/GROUP
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection techusando
oMoving
cabo
(C).
WARNING:
not
install
Set“ON”
the progressive
to “Off” by removing
any disc
Scan)� em
no menu de Configurações,
veja na
�
Motion.
. by
. .this
. .CHAPTER/TRACK
.equipment
. . . . . .Corporation,
.in. a. .confined
. . . .. and
.. ..space
.. is.. 20
nology
must
be Do
authorized
Macrovision
� Slow
to another
20
such�as
ahome
book
caseother
or similar
unit.
Manufactured
under
from
Dolby
“Dolby”,
from
the license
unit and
close
theLaboratories.
disc tray. see
that “no
Still
Picture
and
intended
and
only
página
18.
�for
Slow
Motion.
. . Frame-by-Frame
.limited
. . . . viewing
. . . . . .uses
. . .Playback
. . . unless
. . . . .. 20
20
“Pro
Logic”,
and
the
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
of
Dolby
disc” is displayed on the display window. Then, press
otherwise
authorized
�
. .by. and
.Macrovision
. . .Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . Corporation.
. . . . . . . . Playback
.Reverse
. . . . . . .. 20
� Search.
Still
Picture
20
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.desligado,
Copyright 1992•
Ajuste
o
modo
Progressive
Scan
para
engineering
or disassembly is prohibited.
and hold
it for five
seconds before releasing it.
�
1997 Dolby STOP
Laboratories.
All rights
reserved.
� Repeat
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
removendo
qualquer disco da unidade e feche a bandeja
�
� Progressive scan does not work with the analog
� Repeat
Repeat A-B
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
20
Manufactured
under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Vejaconnections
se a5,956,674,
frase “ Sem
disco”
é5,978,762
exibida
janela
SERIAL�
The .serial
Time
Search
.. .. .. ..number
.. .. .. .. .. is.. ..located
.. .. .. .. ..on
.. ..the
.. .. .back
US de
Pat.disco.
No.video
5,451,942
5,974,380,
and
(yellow
VIDEO
OUT na
jack)
or
�NUMBER:
Repeat
A-B
. .. .. .. 21
21
of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available
other
patents
issued
and pending.
“DTS”
and “DTS
doworldwide
display.
Em
seguida
pressione
STOP
e segure
por
�
Search
.. .. .. .and
S-VIDEO
connection.
CAUTION:
� Marker
Time
Search
. .. .requested
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .information
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. here
. .. .. .. 21
21
to others.
You
should
record
Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
�
Zoom.
. Search
.a .permanent
. . .employs
.. .. .. .. record
.. .a. ..laser
.. ..of.. .system.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
retain
guide as
your
cinco segundos
, antes
de2000
liberá-la.
�
Marker
. .. .. ..purchase.
21
Thisthis
DVD/CD
receiver
Systems,
Inc. Copyright
1996,
Digital Theater Systems,
Inc. All rights reserved.
DVD
.. .. .. .. ..read
.. .. .. .this
.. .. .. 22
� Zoom.
. .Features
. . .of. .this
. . .product,
. .. .. .. .. .. please
. .. .. owner’s
21
ToSpecial
ensure
proper
use
•
A
Leitura
progressiva
não
funciona
com a conexão RF,
Model
No.
___________________________________
� Title
Menu
. .retain
. . . .it..for
.. .. future
.. .. .. .. .reference.
Special
DVD
Features
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Should
. .. .. .. .. .the
. 22
22
manual
carefully
and
8maintenance,
Áudio/Vídeo
ou S-Vídeo analógica.
Serial
___________________________________
�
Menu
.. .. .. .. ..an
.. ..authorized
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. service
.. .. .. .. .. .locaunitNo.
require
� Disc
Title
Menu .. .. .. .. ..contact
. .. 22
22
OTES ON COPYRIGHTS:
tion �
(see
service
procedure).
the
It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast
� Changing
Disc
Menu
. . Audio
. . . . . Language
. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without
�
the
Audio
. .. .. .out
.. .. .. .. .. .. 22
Performing
controls,
adjustments,
or carrying
� Changing
Changing
the
Audio Channel
Language
. .. ..procedures
22
permission.
other�
those specified
Subtitles
. the
. . .Audio
. . herein
. . .Channel
. .may
. . .result
. .. .. ..in.. .hazardous
22
�than
Changing
. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..radi22
This product features the copy protection function developed
ation
exposure.
DVD
Audio Discs
� Subtitles
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
by
Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some
ToDVD
prevent
directDiscs
exposure
Audio
. . . to
. . laser
. . . .beam,
. . . . do
. . not
. . .try
. .to. .open
. . 22
discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs
capacidade
do.ips
seu
Before
. . . .equipamento.
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5
Table ofUse
Contents
.3
Introduction
Introduction
angle
ce of
ng)
the
Connections
S-VIDEO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
L
COMPONENT VIDEO /
PROGRESSIVE SCAN INPUT
Y
Pr
Pb
Preperação
ay be
electric
AV2 IN
the enclosure. Visible laser radiation when open. DO NOT
STARE INTO BEAM.
CAUTION: The apparatus should not be exposed to water
(dripping or splashing) and no objects filled with liquids, such
as vases, should be placed on the apparatus.
AV1 IN
on a VCR, picture noise will appear.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that
is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation 9
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is
Optional Equipment Connections
1Conexões (continuação)
2
Introduction
Conexão
do equipamento opcional
1. Conecte o VCR ou outro DVD player á entrada AV IN
3
Connect a VCR to the AV IN connectors.
Connect a additional VCR to the AV2 connectors.
an optical
Device
the OPTICAL
Audio
CDetc)
andtoMP3/WMA
DiscIN. .connector.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SafetyConnect
Precautions
. . . . .output
. . . . . of
. . DVD
. . . . .Player
. . . . . (or
. . . Digital
2
Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23
. . . . . . . Table
. . 23 of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
� Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Useo. VCR
. . . .adicional
. . . . . . nos
. . . conectores
. . . . . . . . AV2
. . . . . . . . 4-5
Disc . . . Before
.2.. 23
Conecte
� Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . 23
� Repeat Track/All/Off.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . .3.. 23
VCR
Conecte uma saída ótica do DVD Home Theater System ( ou
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Notes on Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
dispositivo
digital,
etc)
à
entrada
OPTICAL
IN
JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . Front
. . 24 Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
� Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Control Overview . . . . . . . . VCR
.Additional
. . Adicional
. . . VCR
......7
. . . . . . . Remote
. . 24
� Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . . . 24
Connect the speakers using the supplied speaker
cords.
To AUDIO
OUT (L/R)/
� Moving
tosaída
another
file
. . . .de. .DVD
. . (ou
. . . . . . . . . 24
Para
. . . . . . . Preparation
. . 24
Aparelho
VIDEO OUT
DVD Player (or Digital
Áudio(L/R)
e
� To rotate
picture.
. .parameters
.Device,
. . . .etc)
. .digital,etc)
. . . . .(volume,
. . . . . . . 24distance,
dispositivo
. . . . . . . Connections
. . 24To obtain
sound, adjust
the
speaker
. . . the
. . . .best
. . . . .possible
. . . . . . . . .surround
. . . . . . . 8-13
Vídeo
Programmed
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 24
Para
saída
To
AUDIO
OUT
(L/R)/
TV Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
VIDEO OUT
Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 25
Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Áudio(L/R) e
Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25
VÍdeo
. . . . . . . . . 25
Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Para a entrada
Erasing thedeComplete
t . . . . . . . . 25
Áudio( L/R) e Programme List . . . . . . . 25
Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
To
AUDIO
IN (L/R)/
VÍdeo
(AV1)
DivX Disc Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
a entrada
st . . . . . . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Para
VIDEO IN (AV1)
11
Áudio(INL/R)
e
To AUDIO
(L/R)/
Speaker
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . de
IN (AV2)
VÍdeo
(AV2)
11VIDEO
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Last Condition Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11
Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . Speaker
. . 28
Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . Before
. . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . LH-W752TA
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . . . 29
otes
Modeotas:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 29
Sound
Mode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
�
Be
sure
to
match
the
speaker
cable
to
the
appropriate
terminal
on
the
components:
formato ÁUDIO da saída digital não combinar as potencialidades
deTimer
seu aparelho
Sleep
Setting de
. . DVD/CD,
. . . . . . . o. .aparelho
. . . . .+. não
.to. .+. and
. 30 – to –.
otes
. . . . . . . . Se
. 30oOn-Screen
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
If the
cables
are
reversed,
the
sound
will
be
distorted
and
Dimmer
. . will
. . . .lack
. . your
. .base.
. . .DVD/CD
. . . . . . . Receiver,
. . . . . . . . the
. . . receiver
30
um
som
forte,
ficará
distorcido
ou
sem
nenhum
som
.
. . . . . . . . produzirá
.�30
If
the
audio
format
of
the
digital
output
does
not
match
the
capabilities
of
will
Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
. . . adjust
. . . . . . the
. . . volume
. . . . . . . carefully
. . . . . . . . to
. . avoid
. . . . 30excessive
�produce
If youause
frontdistorted
speakers
low
inputMute
rating,
. . . . . . . . . 30
strong,
sound
� General
Operation
. . . . . . sound
. . with
. . . .or
. .no
. .maximum
. . . . 16at all.
Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30
�� Language
Do not remove
. . . . . .the
. . .front
. . . . cover
. . . . . .of
. .supplied
. . . . . 16 speaker.
Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
• Conecte
a antena
fornecida
defor
AM/FM
para escutar
rádio.
supplied
FM/AM
aerial
listening
to the oradio.
. . . .Connect
. . . . . 30 the
� Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
L
AUDIO
Connections (Continued)
Introduction
8
8
8
8
AV2 IN AV1 IN
8
OUT
IN
VIDEO
Speaker System Connection
IN
Introduction
R
AUDIO (L)
AUDIO (R)
OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO (L)
AUDIO (R)
OPTICAL
OUT
L
AUDIO
R
AV2 IN
Connections (Continued)
Conexões das Antenas
Aerial Connections
�
�
AV1 IN
L
AUDIO
R
8
8
8
8
AV2 IN AV1 IN
8
• Conecte
o cabo
ao conector
da antena
Connect
the AM
LoopAM
aerial
to the AM
aerialAM.
connector.Reference
• Conecte
o fio
da antena
ao conector
da antena
FM. Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Connect
the FM
Wire
aerial FM
to the
FM aerial
connector.
Operation
Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
. . . . . . . . . 31
DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
. . . . . . . . . 31
Antena
AM
Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . AM
. . . . Loop
19
aerial
(supplied)
Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
. . . . . . . 32-33
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22
. . . . . . . . . 34
� Moving to another TITLE/GROUP .Antena
. . . . . . .FM
20
FM Wire aerial
� Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK
. . .(supplied)
. . 20
� Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
LH-W752TA
� Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
otas:
otes the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22
otes � Changing
Benoise
surepickup,
to
match
the
speaker
cable
appropriate
terminal
the
components:
+ to + and – to –.
� To prevent
keepChannel
themantenha
AM
Loop
the DVD/CD
Receiver
and
other
components.
• ��Para
prevenir
interferência,
longe
de aparelhos
comoon
DVD/CD
players
e outros
Changing
the
Audio
. . . . a.aerial
.antena
. . . away
. to
. AM/FM
. the
22from
� Be sure
to
�componentes.
Subtitles
. . . .the
.are
. .FM
.reversed,
. .wire
. . . aerial.
. . . .the
. . .sound
. . . . . .will
. 22be distorted and will lack base.
If fully
the extend
cables
9
� AfterDVD
connecting
the FM
Discs
. .Wire
. . speakers
. .aerial,
. . . . . keep
. .with
. . it. .as
. .horizontal
. maximum
. . . . 22 as possible.
� IfAudio
you use
front
low
input rating, adjust the volume carefully to avoid excessive
L
AUDIO
R
AV2 IN
• Certifique-se de esticar por completo o fio da antena.
� Do not remove the front cover of supplied speaker.
• Após conectar a antena, coloque-a na melhor posição possível (horizontal).
10
10
AV1 IN
Conexões (continuação) - Exclusivo LH-T752TB
traseira).
Preparation
Connections
. . . . . . . os
. . cabos,
. . . . . .prenda
. . . . .cada
. . . .caixa
. . . . 8-13
Preparation
• Após conectados
TVacústica
Connections
..8
Connections
.nas
. . .suas
. .. .. colunas
.. .. .. .. .. .. (bases).
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13
Optional
Equipment
TV Connections
. . Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98
Aerial
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10
Optional
Equipment. .Connections
.9
Speaker
System Connection
Aerial Connections
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12
. . 10
� Transmitter.
. . CAUTION
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12
. . 11
Speaker
System. Connection
�
aRISK
channel
� Changing
Transmitter.
. . .OF
. .ELECTRIC
. .of. Transmitter
. . . .SHOCK
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
11
DO NOT OPEN
�
a ID
of Transmitter
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
� Setting
Changing
a channel
of Transmitter
11
�
Connecting
� Assembling
Setting aCAUTION:
IDand
of Transmitter
. .to
. .the
. RISK
. Speakers
. . . . . . . . 11
11
TO REDUCE
THE
�
Connections.
. . .SHOCK
. . to
. . the
. . .Speakers
. . . . . . . 12
OF ELECTRIC
� Speaker
Assembling
and
Connecting
11
DO
NOT
REMOVE
COVER
(OR
BACK)
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
� Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
NO USER-SERVICEABLE
Before
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .PARTS
. .. .. .. .. .INSIDE
. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19
SpeakerOperation
Positioning.
. . 13
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
Mini Operation
Glossary for. .Audio
Before
. . PERSONNEL.
. . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . 14-19
Mode
. . . . . . . for
. . .Audio
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mini Glossary
Sound
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14
Mode . Mode
. This
. . . .lightning
14
flash with arrowhead symbol within an
On-Screen
Display
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15
Sound
Mode
. . . .triangle
. . .. .. ..is.. .intended
. .. .. .. .. .. .to
. .. alert
equilateral
the user 14
Initial
Settings
. . .presence
. . . .. .. .. of
On-Screen
.. ..uninsulated
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..dangerous
.. .. .. .. .. .16-19
. . 15
about Display
the
� General
Operation
. .. .. .. .. .. ..enclosure
. . 16
voltage
be
Initial
Settings
.within
. . . . the
. .. .product’s
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..that
.. .. ..may
16-19
�
. . . magnitude
. . . .. .. .. .. ..to.. constitute
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..a.. .risk
.. ..electric
.. 16
of sufficient
� Language
General
Operation
. .. ..of
16
shock
�
. . to
. .. persons.
� Display
Language
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-17
. . 16
�
. . 17
� Audio.
Display. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-17
The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
� Audio.
. . . . . .to. .alert
. . .the
. . user
. . . .about
. . . .the
. . presence
. . . . . .. 18
17
is intended
of
�
. . . . . operating
. .Control)
. . . . .and
. .. .maintenance
� Others
Lockimportant
(Parental
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .(servicing)
. .. .. .. .. .. 19
18
Você pode fixar a caixa central na parede da
� Others
. . . . . . in
. .the
. . instructions
. . . . . . . . accompanying
. . . . . . . . . . the
. 19
instructions
Fixando a Caixa Central na
Parede
seguinteproduct.
forma:
Operation
DVD
or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Operation
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK
Destaque
oand
suporte
1.or Video
Playing
aDO
DVD
Videoda
CD.
. ..inferior
. TO
. . OR
19
DVD
CD
Operation
. parte
. . .PRODUCT
.. .. .. .. .. .da
.. ..cai..RAIN
.. 19-22
HAZARD,
NOT
EXPOSE
THIS
General
Features
. .Video
. . retirando
. . .CD.
. . . .. os
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22
Playing
DVD and
.. .. .parafusos.
. . 19
MOISTURE.
xa aacústica
central
� Moving
to another
. . 20
General
Features
. . . .TITLE/GROUP
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22
WARNING:
Doto
notanother
install this
equipment in a confined
�
CHAPTER/TRACK
.. .. 20
� Moving
Moving
to
another
TITLE/GROUP
. . . .. .. .. space
20
such
as a book
case or
�
Motion.
. . similar
. . .CHAPTER/TRACK
. .unit.
. . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
� Slow
Moving
to another
20
�
and
� Still
SlowPicture
Motion.
. . Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
20
. . . and
. . encaixe
. .Frame-by-Frame
. . . .o. suporte
. . . . . . e. .fixe-o
. . . . . . . .. 20
Still
Picture
Playback
20
2.�� Search.
Vire
a caixa,
�
� Repeat
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
com osA-B
�
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. conforme
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. a.. ..figura.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Repeat
Repeat
. dois
. . .. ..parafusos
20
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
CAUTION:
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Marker
Search. employs
.. .. .. .. .. ..a.. laser
.. .. .. ..system.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
�DVD/CD
Time Search
21
This�
receiver
�
. Search
. .use
. . .of.. this
.. .. ..product,
.. .. .. .. .. ..please
.. .. .. .. ..read
.. .. ..this
.. .. ..owner’s
.. .. 21
� Zoom.
Marker
21
To ensure
proper
Special
DVD
.. .. .. ..reference.
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..Should
.. .. .. .. ..the
22
� Zoom.
. .Features
. . . retain
. . . . .it. .for
. .. ..future
21
manual
carefully
and
�require
Title
Menu
. parede
. . . . contact
. .através
.authorized
.. .. .. .. do
..service
.. .suporte
.. 22
unit
maintenance,
3.
Fixe-o
na
Special
DVD
Features
. .. .. .. .an
. .. dos
. .. .. furos
. .. .. ..loca22
tion�
service
Disc
Menu
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
�(see
Title
Menuprocedure).
22
�
Audio
.. .. .procedures
Performing
� Changing
Disc controls,
Menuthe
. .adjustments,
. . . . . Language
. . . .or. carrying
. . . .. .. ..out
. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
other
than
those specified
herein
may result
�
the
Channel
. .. .. .in
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. radi22
� Changing
Changing
the Audio
Audio
Language
. ..hazardous
22
ation
exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
�
� Subtitles
Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
To
prevent
direct
exposure
DVD
Audio
Discs
.. ..laser
.. .. .. .beam,
.. ..not
.. .. .try
.. .. 22
� Subtitles
. . . .. .. .. ..to
. .. .. .. ..do
. .. .to
. .. open
22
the10enclosure. Visible laser radiation when open. DO NOT
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
STARE INTO BEAM.
CAUTION: The apparatus should not be exposed to water
(dripping or splashing) and no objects filled with liquids, such
as vases, should be placed on the apparatus.
CAUTION: This product may not be used outdoor, restricted to
�
.. .. cabos
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Moving
Pause
.to. .another
. . . . . . Track
. usando
. . . . .. .. os
23
Conecte
as caixas
acústicas
�
Track/All/Off.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Repeat
Moving
to another
23
fornecidos
da caixa
acústica.Track
� Search.
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
23
Para �obter
oOperation
melhor
Surround Sound, ajuste os
JPEG
�Disc
Search.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
23
parâmetros
da
caixa
acústica
(volume,
distância,
etc.).
Viewing
JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
JPEG
Disc aOperation
24
� SlideaShow
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Viewing
JPEG. disc
24
�
� Still
SlidePicture
Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
�
to another
� Moving
Still Picture
. . . . . file
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Repeat Programmed
Programmed
Playback Tracks.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Erasing
a Track from Programme
Repeat Programmed
Tracks. . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Erasing
Complete
Programme List
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Erasing the
a Track
from Programme
25
DivX
Disc Operation
. . . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
the Complete
25
Speaker
Setup
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
DivX Disc
Operation
26
Additional
Information
Speaker Setup
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
27
Last Condition
Memory
Additional
Information
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Screen
Saver . .Memory
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Last Condition
28
Controlling
the. TV
Screen Saver
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
Operation
with
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
29
Listening
theradio
radiostations
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
Presettingtothe
29
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Listening
to the. radio
29
Sleep
Timer Setting
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Dimmer
. . . .Setting
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Sleep Timer
30
Mute
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Dimmer
30
Using
Mute .the
. . Headphone
. . . . . . . . . .Jack
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Selecting
Input Source
Using thethe
Headphone
Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
XTS
(Excellent
TrueSource
Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Selecting
the Input
30
XTS
. . . . . .True
. . . .Sound)
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
XTS pro
(Excellent
30
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
About the symbols for instructions
Reference
Language
Code
List . likely
. . . . .to. .cause
. . . . . harm
. . . . .to. .the
. . .unit
31
Reference
Indicates
hazards
Country
List
. . .. .. .. ..damage.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31
itselfCode
orCode
other
material
Language
List
31
Troubleshooting
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33
Country Code List
. . 31
otas:
Indicates
special
operating
features
of
this
unit.
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
• Esteja
certo tips
ao combinar
cabo
da caixa
Indicates
and hintsofor
making
the acústica
task easier.
ao terminal apropriado nos componentes:(Cabo
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
para
Terminal
Preto)
e (Cabo
Vermelhoof Dolby
“ProPreto
Logic”,
ando the
double-D
symbol
are trademarks
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works. estiverem
Copyright 1992para o Terminal
Vermelho)
se os cabos
1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
invertidos, o som ficará distorcido e faltará graves
Manufactured
under
license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
na estrutura
sonora.
US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and
other
worldwide
patents
issued
and pending.
“DTS” and “DTS
• NãoSurround”
remova aare
tampa
dianteira
das caixas
Digital
registered
trademarks
of Digital Theater
Systems,
Inc. fornecidas.
Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems,
acústicas
Inc. All rights reserved.
OTES ON COPYRIGHTS:
It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast
via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without
permission.
This product features the copy protection function developed
by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some
discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs
on a VCR, picture noise will appear.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that
is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation
11
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
Introduction
Introduction
Caixas Acústicas
Before
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5
Table ofUse
Contents
.3
Playable
. .. .. .. .. .e. ..traseira
. .. .. .. ..separadas
.4
Before
Use Discs
. . . . .. .. .. .frontal
.. .. .. .. .. .estão
.. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5
As
caixas
acústicas
Precautions
. . .. .Conecte
.. .. cabos
.. .. .. .. ..das
.. .. ..caixas
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54
Playable
Discs
. .. .. .. .. .. ..os
da
coluna (base).
Notes
on Discs
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
Precautions
. . . .. .. .. como
acústicas
e monte-os
ilustrado.
About
Notes Symbols
on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
Front
Panel
and Rear
About
Symbols
. . .Panel
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65
• Conecte
os cabos
das caixas
Remote
Control
. . .. .. .. acústicas
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ao
.. .. .terminal
Front Panel
and Overview
Rear Panel
. .. .. .. .. .. 76
apropriado
base de cada
Remote
Controlna
Overview
. . . . caixa
. . . . acústica
. . . . . . .(frontal/
.....7
Sistema
deMP3/WMA
Conexões
Audio CD and
Disc .das
. . . . .Caixas
. . . . . . . . . 23
Playing
an Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . . Disc
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
Acústicas
� Pause
. . . . .CD
. . .and
. . .MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . . .Disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
Playing
an .Audio
23
Preperação
Introduction
Safety
Precautions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . as
..........2
Introduction
Montando
e .Conectando
Connections
Table
ofPrecautions
Contents . .. .. .(Continued)
Safety
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
ay be
electric
angle
ce of
ng)
the
Conexões (continuação) - Exclusivo LH-W752TA
About
the symbols
for instructions
Connections
(Continued)
Introduction
Connections
(Continued)
Conexão
do Sistema
de Caixas
Montando e
Conectando as Caixas Acústicas
Indicates
hazards. .likely
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety
Precautions
. . . .to. . cause
. . . . . harm
. . . . .to. .the
. . .unit
..2
andand
Connecting
toDisc
System
or other
material
Playing an Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
of Contents
. . . . . damage.
. Connection
. . . Connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Assembling
. . . . . . . Table
.Speaker
. 23itself
Assembling
Connecting
to . . . . . 23
Speaker
System
KDisc . . . Before
� Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
. . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 the Speakers
otas:
Speakers
IndicatesDiscs
special
N OR
Asthe
caixas
acústicas
frontais Track
e traseiras
� Moving
to another
. . . .estão
. . . .separadas
. . . . . . . 23
Playable
. . operating
. . . . . . . .features
. . . . . . of
. . this
. . . unit.
......4
. . . . . . . . . 23
ote
front
and rearTrack/All/Off.
speakersosare
the
ote poderá
da
coluna(base).
Conecte
cabos
e
� Repeat
. detached
. . . das
. . . caixas
. from
. . . from
. acústicas
. . . the
. . . 23
Precautions
. . .electromagnetic
. . . . . caso
. . . . haja
. . .wave
.um
. . produto
. product
. . . . . de
. . .onda
. . 5 The
ocorrer
. . . . . . . Interferência
.If. there
23
is
a
strong
The
front
and
rear
speakers
are
detached
Indicates
tips
and hints
for making the
task
easier.
speaker
stands.
Connect
the
speaker
cords
and
assemIf
there
is
a
strong
electromagnetic
wave
product
� Search.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . assem. . 23
Notes
Discs
. . may
. .nas
. .be
. proximidades.
. occurred.
.................5
monte-os
como
ilustrado.
. . . . . . . eletromagnética
.nearby,
. 23
anon
interference
muito. forte
pace
speaker stands. Connect the speaker cords .and
ble
the
front
and
rear
speakers
from
speaker
stands
as
nearby,
an
interference
may
be
occurred.
JPEG
Disc
Operation
. . . . . . . from
. . . . speaker
. . . . . . .stands
. . . . 24
About
. . . .from
. . . Dolby
. . . . Laboratories.
. . . . . . . . . .“Dolby”,
.....5
. . . . . . . Manufactured
.(Ex
. 23
under oven)
license
: MicroSymbols
wave
ble the
front
and rear speakers
as
(Ex
: Micro
wave
oven)
Logic”,
andand
the
double-D
symbol
Viewingos
a JPEG
disccaixas
. . . . .acústicas
. . . . . . .ao
. . terminal
. . . . . . apro. 24
Front
Panel
Rear
Panel
. . are
. . .trademarks
. . . . . . . .of. Dolby
. . . . 6 illustrated.
. . . . . . . “Pro
. . 24
illustrated.
•
Conecte
cabos
das
Transmissor
Confidential
Unpublished
� Slide
Show
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
Remote
Control
Overview
. . . . . works.
. . . . .Copyright
. . . . . . .1992. . . 7 � Connect
. . . . . . . Laboratories.
.Transmitter
. 24
thebase
speaker
cords
to the
appropriate
termipriado
na
cada
caixa
acústica
(frontal/traseira).
1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
�
Connect
the de
speaker
. . each
. . . cords
. front
. . . .toand
. .the
. rear
. appropriate
. . .speaker.
. . . . . . termi. . 24
. . . . . . . . . 24Transmitter
nals �onStill
thePicture
bottom of
nals
on
the
bottom
of
each
front
and
rear
speaker.
Manufactured
under
license
from
Digital
Theater
Systems,
Inc.
LED
indicador
�
Moving
to
another
file
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. acústica
. . . . 24
•
Após
conectados
os
cabos,
prenda
cada
caixa
. . . . . . . US
. . 24
Preparation
� After connecting the speaker cords to the appropriate
Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
Exibeindicator
o status de operação
LED
� After
the .speaker
the
To connecting
rotate
.each
. . . . front
.cords
. . .and
. .to. rear
. . . appropriate
.speak. . . . 24
nas�suas
colunas(bases).
. . . . . . . other
. . 24worldwide patents
indicator
terminals
on
the picture.
bottom of
Connections
. . . . . .issued
. . . . and
. . . pending.
.Displays
. . .LED
. . “DTS”
. .the
. . operated
.and
. . .“DTS
. 8-13
terminals Playback
on the bottom
Surround” are registered trademarks
of Digital
Theater
Programmed
. . rear
. of
. . each
.speakers
. . . front
. . . .and
. .the
. rear
. . . .speak. 25
. . . . . . . Digital
. . 24
Displays
the
operated
er
and
attach
the
front
and
to
TV Connections
. . . . 2000
. . . . Digital
. . . . .Theater
. . . . . Systems,
.......8
Systems,
Inc. Copyright 1996,
status.
er andProgrammed
attach the front
and rear
Repeat
Tracks.
. . .speakers
. . . . . . . to
. .the
. . . 25
. . . . . . . Inc.
. . 25
status.
speaker
stands.
All
rights
reserved.
Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
wner’s
speaker
Erasing
a stands.
Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 25
Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
d the
Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . . 25
CAUTION
toca. . . . . . . . 25
Speaker
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
OTES
ONSystem
COPYRIGHTS:
DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
st . . . . . It. is
. 25
� Transmitter.
. . . DO
. NOT
. . . .OPEN
. . .show
. . ., .broadcast
. . . . . . . . . 11
forbidden
by law to copy
,. broadcast,
Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. . . . . . . via
. . cable,
26 � Changing
play in public,
or rent copyrighted
material
without
ures
a channel
of Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
Conector
de entrada DC IN
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . permission.
. . 27 � Setting aCAUTION:
DC
s. radiTO REDUCE
THE
ID of Transmitter
. IN
.DC
. connector
. IN
.RISK
. connector
. . . . . . . . 11
Last Condition Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
product features the
protection
function
developed
. . . . . . . This
. . 28
OFcopy
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
Tecla
ID/CHANNEL
(ID./CH.)11
� Assembling and
Connecting
to
the
Speakers
ID/CHANNEL
Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Copy
protection
signals
are(OR
recorded
on some
DO
NOT
REMOVE
COVER
BACK)(ID./CH.)
. . . . . . . by
. . Macrovision.
28 � Speaker
pen
ID/CHANNEL
(ID./CH.)
Connections.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
recording
and playing thebutton
pictures
these discs
NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS of
INSIDE
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
T. . . . . . . discs.
. . 28WhenPositioning.
button
Speaker
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
REFER
SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE
Conector do
Sinal de Som
on a VCR, picture
noise
will appear.
Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . This
.Before
. 28
SOUND
SIGNAL
PERSONNEL.
Operation
. . .copyright
. . . . . .protection
. . . .SOUND
. . .technology
. . . SIGNAL
. . . . that
14-19
product
incorporates
Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
connector
29
er. . . . . . . is. .protected
by method
certain
U.S.
patents and other
Mini Glossary
forclaims
AudioofStream
&
Surround
connector
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . intellectual
. . 29
such
property
rights
owned
by
Macrovision
Corporation
Mode . .This
. . . lightning
. . . . . . flash
. . . .with
. . .arrowhead
. . . . . . . symbol
. . . . . within
. . . 14an
Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection tech. . .an
. . . . and
. . 29
thin
Sound Mode
. . . triangle
. . . . . .is. intended
. . . . . . to
. .alert
. . . the
. . .user
. . . 14
equilateral
Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is
r. . . . . . . nology
.Changing
. 30 On-Screen
a channel
about
the
presence
of
uninsulated
Display
. . .of
. .viewing
.Transmitter
. . .Transmitter
. uses
. . .dangerous
.only
. . .unless
. . . . 15
for home and
limited
Changing
aother
channel
of
Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . .to. . . . intended
. . 30
voltage
within
the
product’s
enclosure
that
may
be
cted
Mudando
o
Canal
do
Transmissor
Initial
Settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-19
otherwise
authorized
by
Macrovision
Corporation.
Reverse
ay be
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
is a of
similar
wireless
product
nearby, ainterference
sufficient
magnitude
to
. . . . . . . Interferência
.If. there
30If�there
General
Operation
. . .um
. product
. produto
.constitute
. . . . nearby,
. sem
. . .risk
.fio,
. interference
.ofsimilar,
. electric
. . 16
poderá
ocorrer
se
a similar
wireless
engineering
oris
disassembly
is prohibited.
electric
occur. shock
In thistocase,
change to other channel using
Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
persons.
. . . . . . . .may
. 30may
occur. Nesse
In this
case,
�próximo.
Language
. . .caso,
. . . . mude
.change
. . . .o.canal
.to. other
. . do
. . transmissor,
.channel
. . . . . . using
16
estiver
(ID./CH.) button of transmitter.
Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . .ID/CHANNEL
. 30ID/CHANNEL
(ID./CH.)
button
of
transmitter.
ote
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
SERIAL
NUMBER:
The
serial do
number
is located
on the back
exclamation
mark
within
an equilateral
triangle
com
uso
daThe
tecla
ID./CH.
transmissor
XTS
(Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ote
. . . . . . . of
.Press
.this
30ounit.
angle
ID/CHANNEL
(ID./CH.)
button
for
less
�
You
cannot detach the speaker from the stand after assemThis
number
is
unique
to
this
unit
and
not
available
� the
Audio.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
is intended
to alert the
user about
the presence
ID/CHANNEL
(ID./CH.)
button
forand
lessof
�XTS
You pro
cannot
the
from
.detach
. .rear
. . .speakers.
. . speaker
. .for
. . . .instructions
. . . the
. . .stand
. . . .after
. . . assem. . 30
ce
. .of. . . . . to
.than
.others.
30Press
Youthe
should
record
requested
information
here
bling
the front
About
the. .and
symbols
about
3(Parental
seconds.
important
operating
and. maintenance
(servicing)
�
Lock
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
About
the
symbols
instructions
bling the front and rear speakers.
this guide
as
permanentfor
record
of your purchase.
about
3a seconds.
ng)
. . . . . . . retain
. . 30than
instructions
in
the
instructions
accompanying
the
Pressione
a
tecla
ID./CH.
por
aproximadamente
5
� Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
the
Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the unit
Reference
product.
Indicates
hazards likely to cause harm to the unit
segundos.
Model
No. ___________________________________
itself orCode
other List
material
ote
Language
. . . damage.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
itself
or other material damage.
ote
Operation
Serial
No.
___________________________________
TO PREVENT
OR ELECTRIC
TheWARNING:
wireless speakers
may notFIRE
received
the changedSHOCK
channel of
Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
K. . . . . . . . . 31The wireless speakers may not received the changed channel of Country
otas:
Indicates
special
operating
features of this unit.
HAZARD,
DO
NOT
EXPOSE
THIS
PRODUCT
TO
RAIN
OR
transmitter.
In thisCD
case
set the ID as
DVD
or Video
Operation
. . below.
. . . . . .of. .this
. . .unit.
. . 19-22
otas:
Indicates
operating
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
N. OR
transmitter.special
In this case
set the features
ID as below.
. . . . . . . . 31
MOISTURE.
Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . .the
. . task
. . . .easier.
. . . . 34
. . . . . . . 32-33
Indicates tips and hints for making
ASetting
caixa
acústica
sem
fio
pode
não
sinal
aFeatures
ID
of
Transmitter
General
.hints
. . . .for
. .making
. receber
. . . . .the
. o. .task
. . . easier.
.do
. 20-22
Indicates
tips
and
DoanotID
install
this
equipment in a confined space
Setting
of
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . .WARNING:
34
Você
não
pode
separar
as
caixas
acústicas
das
colunas
transmissor.
caso, TITLE/GROUP
ajuste
a ID como. abaixo.
pace
MovingNesse
to
another
. . . . . . . 20
such�as
case
or similar
unit.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
When
youa book
connect
the
wireless
speaker
for the first
apósLogic”,
ter feita
a the
montagem
caixas
frontal
e
Manufactured
under
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
� Moving
to license
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
. . .first
. 20
When
you
connect
the
wireless
speaker for.“Dolby”,
the
“Pro
and
double-Ddas
symbol
areacústicas
trademarks
of Dolby
time,
the blue
anddouble-D
red LEDsymbol
indicator
of wirelessofspeaker
“Pro
Logic”,
and
the
are
trademarks
traseira.
� Slow
. . . LED
. . . . indicator
. . . . . . .of. .wireless
. . . . Dolby
. . speaker
. 20
Laboratories.
Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992time,
the Motion.
blue and. red
Laboratories.
Confidential
works.
Copyright 1992blinks in turn
and then Unpublished
the ID will be
set automatically.
1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
� Still
and
Playback
. 20
blinks
inaPicture
turn
and
then
the reserved.
ID will be set
automatically.
Definindo
ID do
transmissor
1997
Dolby
Laboratories.
AllFrame-by-Frame
rights
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
If an interference
occurred
or youTheater
use a new
wireless
Manufactured
under is
license
from Digital
Systems,
Inc.
US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and
If�an
interference
use
Repeat
.ID.
. . 5,956,674,
. .is. occurred
. . . . .5,974,380,
. . or
. . you
. . . 5,978,762
. . . .a. new
. . and
. .wireless
. 20
US
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
speaker,
set
the
other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS
Quando
você ligar
a caixa
CAUTION:
speaker,
set
the
other
worldwide
patents
issued
� Repeat
A-B
.ID.
. . . acústica
. .and
. . .pending.
. sem
. . . .fio
.“DTS”
. pela
. . . and
.primeira
. . “DTS
. . . 21
Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
1.This
Press
the
ID/CHANNEL
(ID./CH.)
button
for
more
Digital
are registered
trademarks
of. .Digital
Theater
vez,
o1.Surround”
LED
indicador
azul
e
vermelho
piscará
ao
ligar
e,
em
DVD/CD
receiver
employs
a
laser
system.
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
Press
the ID/CHANNEL
(ID./CH.)
button
for more Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems,
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
1996, 2000 Digital
Theater
Systems,
than
about
3
seconds.
Inc. All rights reserved.
seguida
a IDproper
(identidade)
será
definida.
ToAllensure
use
of .this
�
Marker
Search
. . .product,
.automaticamente
. . . . please
. . . . . read
. . . .this
. . owner’s
. . . 21
Inc.
rights
reserved.
than
about
3 seconds.
wner’s
The blue
LED and
indicator
blinks.
manual
carefully
future
� The
Zoom.
. . .retain
. . . .it. for
. . blinks.
. . . . .reference.
. . . . . . .Should
. . . . .the
21
blue. .LED
indicator
d the
require
maintenance,
contact
2.unit
Turn
theDVD
transmitter
and
wireless
and
OTES ON COPYRIGHTS:
Special
Features
. .and
. . an
. houver
. authorized
. . . speaker
. .sinal
. speaker
. service
. de
. . off
.áudio,
. .loca. 22and
ocaSetion
ocorrer
interferência,
ou se
não
2.(see
Turn
the
transmitter
wireless
off
OTES
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
service
procedure).
then
turn
it on.
It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast
� then
Title
Menu
.on.
.copy
. . ., broadcast,
. . . . . . . .show
. . . ,.broadcast
. . . . . . . . . 22
Itdefina
is forbidden
by
law
to
turn
it
a ID conforme
abaixo:
via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without
Performing
controls,
� Disc
Menu
. adjustments,
. . .rent
. . .copyrighted
. . . or
. .carrying
. . .material
. . .out
. . procedures
.without
. . . . . 22
via cable,
play in
public,
ures
permission.
than those
herein may result
in hazardous
1. other
Pressione
a specified
teclaorID/CHANNEL
(ID./CH.)
por radipermission.
� Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22
s radiThis product features the copy protection function developed
ation
exposure.
aproximadamente
5 segundos.
This product
features the
the Audio
copy
protection
� Changing
Channelfunction
. . . . .developed
. . . . . . . 22
by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some
prevent
direct
exposure
to laser
beam,
do not tryon
tosome
open
by To
Macrovision.
Copy
protection
signals
are
recorded
O
indicador
azul
piscará
rapidamente.
pen
�LED
Subtitles
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs
the When
enclosure.
Visible
laser
radiation
when open.
DO NOT
discs.
recording
and
playing
the pictures
of these
discs
T
on a VCR, picture noise will appear.
DVD
Audio
Discs
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
on STARE
a VCR, INTO
pictureBEAM.
noise will appear.
er
such
cted to
Introduction
Preparation
Introduction
Preparation
Acústicas
SIGNAL
ID./CH.
SIGNAL
DC IN
ID./CH.
DC IN
2. CAUTION:
Desligue
e ligue novamente
a caixatechnology
acústica
sem
This
product
incorporates
copyright
that
The apparatus
shouldprotection
not be exposed
to water
is protected
by splashing)
method claims
of certain
and other
fio . or
(dripping
and no
objects U.S.
filledpatents
with liquids,
such
intellectual
owned
as vases,property
should rights
be placed
on by
theMacrovision
apparatus. Corporation
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology
12 must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is
CAUTION:
This and
product
not be
used uses
outdoor,
intended
for home
othermay
limited
viewing
onlyrestricted
unless to
indoor use
only. by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
otherwise
authorized
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that
is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection 11
technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is11
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
thin an
r
ay be
electric
angle
ce of
ng)
the
K
N OR
pace
wner’s
d the
oca-
ures
s radi-
Conexões (continuação) - Exclusivo LH-W752TA
Introduction
Conexões
do sistema de Caixas Acústicas
L
AUDIO
R
AV2 IN
AV1 IN
SIGNAL
ID./CH.
DC IN
• Se as caixas acústicas sem fio estiverem desligadas, elas não funcionarão.
OTES ON COPYRIGHTS:
It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast
via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without
permission.
This product features the copy protection function developed
by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some
13
Preperação
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playing
an Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . . Disc
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
•Before
Conecte
as. caixas
ou central.
� Pause
. . . . .CD
. . .and
. . .MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . . .Disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
. . . . . acústicas
. .. .. .conectores
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..frontal
Playing
an .Audio
23
Table
ofUse
Contents
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .aos
.. .. .. .. ..(direito/esquerdo)
.4-5
.3
Speaker
System
Connection
�
Playable
Discs
.4
� Moving
Pause .to. .another
. . . . . . Track
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
Use
. . . . .. .. .. ..no
.. ..conector
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..do
.. ..subwoofer.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5
•Before
Conecte
o subwoofer
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
Precautions
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54
� Repeat
Moving Track/All/Off.
to another Track
23
Playable Discs
Speaker
Connections
• Conecte
o
cabo
de
força
da
caixa
acústica
sem
fio
na
tomada.
�
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
Notes
on Discs
� Search.
Repeat Track/All/Off.
23
Precautions
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
� Connect
the .speakers
speaker
JPEGconnectors.
Operation
.. .. ..o.. .cabo
.. .. .. ..DC.
.. .. .. .. .. 24
About
Symbols
.. .. do
..to
.. .transmissor
.. .. .front
.. .. e.. .o
..conector
.. .. or
.. ..center
.. .. 5do
�Disc
Search.
. .traseiro
. . . . .. ..com
. .. .. .. .de
. .. ..força
23
Notes
on
Discs
. .DC
. .. .. IN
.the
. .. .. ..(right,
. left)
5 transmissor
• Conecte
o conector
do painel
�
Connect
subwoofer
Viewing
JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Front
Panel
andthe
Rear
.. .. woofer
.. .. .. .. .. connector.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65
JPEG
Disc aOperation
24
About
Symbols
. . .Panel
. . . . .to.. ..the
� Connect
the power
cord
wireless
speaker to the
•Remote
Conecte
o conector
do SINAL
DEtheSOM
do transmissor
e osoutlet.
conectores
dasaShow
caixas
� Slide
. . . .. .. .. ..traseiras
.. .. .. .. .. .. .(esquerda/direita)
Control
. . .of
Viewing
JPEG.acústicas
disc
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
Front �Panel
and Overview
Rear Panel
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76
Connect
thecom
DC IN
connector
of DE
transmitter and the transmitter connector
of rear panel with the DC power cable.
no painel
traseiro
o cabo
�
Picture
� Still
Slide
Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
Remote
Control
Overview
. . SINAL
. . . . connector
. . . . SOM.
. . . of
. . transmitter
. . . . . 7 and the rear
� Connect
the
SOUND SIGNAL
(right, left) speaker connector of rear panel
�
to another
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
� Moving
Still
Picture
. . . . . file
. dentro
. . .. .. .. .de
. .. ..10
24
•Preparation
Estabeleça
a distância
entre o transmissor
e as caixas acústicas sem
fio (direito/esquerdo)
metros.
with the
SOUND SIGNAL
cable.
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
� Moving
to another
� Set the
left) within
10m. file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connections
. .distance
. . . . . .between
. . . . . .the
. . .transmitter
. . . . . . . and
. . . wireless
. 8-13 speaker (right,
Preparation
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
TV Connections
..8
Connections
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13
Repeat Programmed
Programmed
Playback Tracks.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Front
speaker
Optional
Equipment
Front
speaker
TV Connections
. . Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98
Caixa
Caixa
Acústica
Erasing
aAcústica
Track from Programme
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks. . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
(Left)
(Right). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Aerial
Connections
frontal
frontal
Optional
Equipment
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme List
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Erasing
a Track
from Programme
25
(esquerda)
(direita)
Speaker
System
Connection
Aerial Connections
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12
. . 10
DivX
Disc Operation
. . . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
the Complete
25
� Transmitter.
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12
. . 11
Speaker
System. Connection
Speaker
Setup
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
Caixa Acústica
DivX Disc
Operation
26
�
a channel
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
� Changing
Transmitter.
. . . . . . .of. Transmitter
. . . . . . .Center
. . .. central
11
Additional
Information
speaker
Speaker Setup
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
27
�
Setting
a
ID
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
� Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
Last Condition
Memory
Additional
Information
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
�
Assembling
and
Connecting
to
the
Speakers
11
� Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Screen
Saver . .Memory
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Last Condition
28
�
Connections.
. . . . . to
. . the
. . .Speakers
. . . . . . . 12
� Speaker
Assembling
and Connecting
11
Controlling
the. TV
Screen Saver
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
� Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Before
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19
SpeakerOperation
Positioning.
. . 13
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
Operation
with
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
29
Mini Operation
Glossary for. .Audio
Before
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . 14-19
Listening
theradio
radiostations
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
Presettingtothe
29
Mode
. . . . . . . for
. . .Audio
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mini Glossary
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Listening
to the. radio
29
Sound
Mode . Mode
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14
14
Sleep
Timer Setting
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
On-Screen
Sound
Mode Display
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15
14
Dimmer
. . . .Setting
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Sleep Timer
30
Initial
SettingsDisplay
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19
On-Screen
. . 15
Mute
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Dimmer
30
� General
Operation
. . 16
Initial
Settings
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19
Using
Mute .the
. . Headphone
. . . . . . . . . .Jack
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
�
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
� General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Transmitter
Transmissor
Selecting
Input Source
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Using thethe
Headphone
Jack
30
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
� Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
XTS
(Excellent
TrueSource
Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Selecting
the Input
30
Sound
Cabo
designal
sinal
�
. . 17
� Audio.
Display. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-17
XTS
. cable
. . . . .True
. . . .Sound)
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
de som
XTS pro
(Excellent
30
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
� Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
�
. . . . . . .Control)
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Subwoofer
..Subwoofer
.. .. .. .. 19
� Others
Lock (Parental
18
Reference
� Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Language
Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Reference
Operation
Country
Code
List
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31
Language
Code
List
31
DVD
or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Operation
Troubleshooting
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33
Country Code List
. . 31
Playing
a DVD
Video CD.
. . 19
DVD
or Video
CD
Operation
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22
Caixaand
Acústica
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
Caixa
acústica
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
General
.Video
. . . . .CD.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22
sem
Playing aFeatures
DVD
and.fio
. . 19
Wireless
Speaker
sem fio
Wireless
Speaker
Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
(direita)
� Moving
to another
. . 20
(Right)
(esquerda)
General
Features
. . . .TITLE/GROUP
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22
(Left)
DC
power
cable
Cabo
de força
DC
�
Moving
to
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
.
.
.
.
.
20
�
Moving
to
another
TITLE/GROUP
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
About the symbols for instructions
�
Motion.
. . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
� Slow
Moving
to another
20
�
and
.. 20
Indicates
hazards
� Still
SlowPicture
Motion.
. likely
. Frame-by-Frame
. . . .to. .cause
. . . . .harm
. . .Playback
. to
. . .the
. . .unit
20
itself
or other
�
. .material
. and
. . . .Frame-by-Frame
. damage.
. . . . . . . . . . . . Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
� Search.
Still
Picture
20
�
� Repeat
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
Notes:
Indicates
special. operating
otas:
�
..features
..implemented
.. .. .. .. ..of
.. ..this
..only
.. ..unit.
..when
.. .. .. ..the
21
Repeat
. . . . .. .. .. .. .can
. .. ..be
20transmitter and the wireless speaker within distance of 2m through
� Repeat
OptimumA-B
performance
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
10m is used
since
approaching distance between them.
� melhoria
Repeat
A-B
. .hints
.communication
. . .for
. . making
. .pode
. . failure
. .ser
. . may
.task
. . occur
. easier.
. . . if. closely
. 21 diminuindo-se
• Uma
noand
desempenho
implementada
a distância entre o transmissor e as caixas
Indicates
tips
the
�
Be
sure
to
match
the
speaker
cable
to
the
appropriate
terminal
the components: + to + and – to –. If the cables are
�
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Marker
Timecaso
Search
21 daonfaixa
acústicas,
ocorra
uma
falha
na
comunicação,
dentro
de
distância
de 2 a 10 metros.
reversed,
the
sound
will
be
distorted
and
will
lack
base.
�
. Search
. .license
. . . .. ..from
.. .. ..Dolby
.. .. .. .. Laboratories.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .“Dolby”,
� Zoom.
Marker
. .. .. .. .. 21
21
Manufactured
under
� Do not remove the front cover of supplied speaker.
Special
DVD
Features
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
+ / +, - / -. Se os cabos
• Certifique-se
de
combinar
os
cabos
das
caixas
acústicas
com
os
conectores
apropriados:
“Pro
Logic”,
and
the
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
of
Dolby
�
Zoom.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
� It takes a few seconds (and may take longer) for the transmitter and wireless speaker (left, right) to communicate with each
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
� Title
MenuFeatures
. . .o
. .som
. .. ..poderá
.. .. .. ..works.
.. .ficar
.. .. .. .. .. .. .199222
estiverem
invertidos,
distorcido
Special
DVD
. .. .. ..Copyright
. e.. ..haver
22 queda na qualidade da base sonora.
other.
1997 Dolby
Laboratories.
All
rights
reserved.
�
.. ..set
.. .. is
.. ..turned
.. .. .. ..off,
. . the
.. .. .transmitter
.. ..also
.. .. ..turned
22
�
WhenMenu
the main
� Disc
Title
Menu
. .. .. .. .. .. .. is
22 off automatically and the wireless speaker is in standby mode
• Pode
levar
alguns
segundos
(em. .alguns
que o transmissor e as caixas acústicas (esquerda/direita)
Manufactured
license
�
the
..casos
.. Systems,
.. .. .. ..mais)
.. .. ..Inc.
.. para
22
(red under
LED
indicator).
� Changing
Disc
Menu
. 5,956,674,
. Audio
. . .from
. . Language
.Digital
.5,974,380,
. . . .Theater
. . .. 5,978,762
22
US comuniquem-se
Pat.�No.
5,451,942
and
entre
si. isChannel
If the wireless
speaker
turned off, .the
wireless
speaker
will not function.
�
Changing
the
Audio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
�
Changing
the
Audio
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS
�
. . .Audio
. . principal
. . trademarks
.Channel
. . . .estiver
. . ..of.. .Digital
.. .. .. .. Theater
.. .. .. ..o..transmissor
22
Digital
Surround”
are. registered
� Subtitles
Changing
the
.desligado,
22
• Quando
o Copyright
equipamento
se desliga automaticamente e as caixas acústicas sem
Systems,
Inc.
1996, 2000
DVD
Audio
Discs
.. .. ..Digital
.. .. .. .. .Theater
.. ..Systems,
.. .. .. .. .. .. 22
�
Subtitles
. .standby
. .. .. .. .. .. (LED
. .. .. .. vermelho)
22
no
modo
indicador
Inc.fio
Allficam
rights
reserved.
12
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Introduction
Introduction
Safety
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Introduction
Connections
Conexões
das Caixas
Table
Contents
. .. .. ..Acústicas
.. ..(Continued)
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
SafetyofPrecautions
Conexões (continuação)
Introduction
Introduction
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23
. . . . . . . Table
. . 23 of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
No caso Use
de uma
(2 caixas
acústicas
� Pause
. . .frontais,
. . . . . .1. caixa
. . . . acústica
. . . . . . .central,
.....2
. .caixas
. 23
. . .distribuição
. . . . . . . . normal
. . . . . .use
. . .as
. .6. caixas
. . . . . acústicas
. . 4-5
Disc . . . Before
. . 23
traseiras
� Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playable
DiscsePositioning
. subwoofer).
..........................4
. . . . . . . acústicas
. . 23
Speaker
usufruir de um
ou Dolby
Digital Surround,
� Repeat
Track/All/Off.
. . . . . .você
. . . .deverá
. . . . .conectar
. . . 23
Precautions
. . .excelente
. . . . . . .som
. . . grave,
. . . . . do
. . .sistema
. . . . . .DTS
. . 5Digital Surround
. . . . . . . Para
. . 23
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Notes on Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . 1. .subwoofer.
23
In
the
case
of
normal
position
use
the
6
speakers
(2
front
speakers,
1
center
speaker,
2
rear
speakers
and
JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
subwoofer).
Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Panel
and Rear
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . •Front
. Caixas
. 24If you
Acústicas
frontais.
want to play
the excellent bass sound, DTS digital surround or Dolby Digital surround, you should connect
� Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remote
Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . De
. . 24
a subwoofer.
acordo
com sua posição de montagem, distribua as caixas acústicas
igualmente. use intervalo de ângulo de 45 graus.
� Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . . . 24
�
Moving
to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . Preparation
. . 24• Front speakers
Acústica central.
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . •Connections
. Caixa
. 24 According
speakers for equal distance. And by hearing position set up the
. . .to. your
. . . . listening
. . . . . . .position
. . . . . .set
. . .up
. .the
. . 8-13
caixas
acústicas
central
e frontal possuem
a mesma altura. Mas
normalmente,
posicione-as
Programmed
Playback
. . . . acima
. . . . .ou
. . abaixo
. . . . . da
. . . . . 25
. . . . . . . As
. . 24
between
TV interval
Connections
. .speakers
. . . . . . . to
. .45
. . degree.
............8
Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . TV.
. . 25
Optional
• CenterEquipment
speaker Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 25
Aerial
. . . .and
. . . front
. . . .speakers
. . . . . . . are
. . . ideally
. . 10 the same height. But normally place it above or below the
TheConnections
center speakers
Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . . 25
t . . . . . . •. Caixas
. 25
Acústicas
Speaker
Systemtraseiras.
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
television.
DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
st . . . . . Coloque
. . 25 � Transmitter.
. . . . . .à.direita
. . . . .e. esquerda
. . . . . . . do
. . .local
. . 11
as caixas
acústicas
de audiência.
Estas caixas acústicas reproduzem a atmosfera
• Rear
speakers
Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
Place left
behindpara
the listening
area.Surround.
These speakers
recreate
sound motion
and
required
de movimento
de and
somright
necessária
a reprodução
Para
melhores
resultados,
não
Additional
Information
. . . instale
. . . .atmosphere
. as
. . .caixas
. . . . .acústicas
. . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
formuito
surround
sound
playback.
For
best results,
do not install
the Condition
rear
speakers
too far.dos
behind
the
listening
traseiras
distantes
da
posição
de
audiência
e
as
posicione
no
mesmo
nível
dos
ouvidos
espectadores.
Também
Last
Memory
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . 28é
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11
position
and
install
them
at
or
above
the
level
of
the
listener’s
ears.
It
is
also
effective
to
direct
the
rear
Screen
Saver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
direcionar estas caixas acústicas para a parede ou teto a fim de
dispersar
o som.
. . . . . . . eficaz
. . 28 �
Speakertowards
Connections.
. . ceiling
. . . . . .to. .further
. . . . .disperse
. . 12 the sound.
speakers
a wall or
Controlling
the traseiras,
TV . . . . posicione-as
. . . . . . . . . .uma
. . . de
. . .frente
. . . 28
casoInde
um
ambiente
menor,
se
o
ouvinte
estiver
próximo
das
caixas
acústicas
. . . . . . . No
. . 28
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
the case of a smaller room size, if the audience is near to the rear wall set the rear speakers opposite each
Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . para
.Before
. 28a outra,
acima
de
60
90
cm,
do
ouvido
dos
espectadores.
Operation
. . . rear
. . . .speakers
. . . . . . .above
. . . . .60
. . -. 90
14-19
other,
and set. the
cm than the listener’s ears.
Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mini
Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround
• Subwoofer
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mode
. . .be
. . placed
. . . . . .in. any
. . . .front
. . . position.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 14
• Subwoofer
This. .can
Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 29
Sound
Mode
. . . . em
. . .qualquer
. . . . . . .posição
. . . . . .frontal.
. . . . . . . 14
Este
pode
ser
colocado
Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30
Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Subwoofer
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Subwoofer
. . . . . . . . . . 17
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .Caixa
Speaker
Acústica
Central
. . Center
. . 18
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Reference Caixa
Acústica frontal
Caixa Front
Acústica
frontal
Speaker
Front Speaker
Language Code
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
(Left)
(Right)
direita
Esquerda
Operation
Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
. . . . . . . . . 31
DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
. . . . . . . . . 31
Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
. . . . . . . 32-33
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22
. . . . . . . . . 34
CaixaRear
Acústica
traseira
Caixa
Acústica traseira
� Moving
to another
TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20
Speaker
Rear Speaker
� Moving
to another
(Left) CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20
esquerda
direita
(Right)
� Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speaker
. . . . . . . Positioning
22
Example
Exemplo de distribuição
das Caixas
Acústicas
� Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1614
Introduction
Safety Precautions . . . das
. . . . . Caixas
. . . . . . . . .Acústicas
........2
Posicionamento
When shipping the unit
The original shipping carton and packing materials may
come in handy. For maximum protection, re-pack the
Operation
Before
Operation
Operation
unitBefore
as Before
itBefore
was
originally
packed at the factory.
Before
Operation
Operation
Antes da Operação
Before
Operation
Before
Operation
Before
Operation
Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or sources of
heat, or leave it in a parked car exposed to direct sunlight, as there may be a considerable temperature
increase inside the car.
Introduction
Handling the unit
Cleaning discs
of the
pre-programmed
fields
according
to the
of
the
pre-programmed
sound
according
to the
program
you
want
to
listen
to.
of the pre-programmed
sound
fields
according
to
program
you
want
tosound
listen
to. fields
program
you
want
to the
listen
to.
ofprogram
thevocê
pre-programmed
sound
you
want
unit after
removing
que
quer
escutar
Moving
another
Track
..according
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..to
.. ..the
.. .. .. 23
Playable
Discs
. .. .. .disc.
. .. .. ..Stream
. .. program
. 4-5
. 4Mode
you
to
�program
Pause
.to
.want
.to
. want
.listen
.to
. .listen
.to.
. listen
. fields
.to.
. . ..to.
23
Before
Useyou
. . .to. for
..enjoy
.. .. .the
.. ..discrete
.. .. .. .. .. ..&
.. .. .. .Sound
.. .. .of
program
you
want
to
listen
to.
program
Mini
Glossary
Audio
you want
to �
listen
to.you
Allows
5.1(or
6)
channels
Allows
you
to
enjoy
6)
discrete
channels
of. high
high
Allows
6)
discrete
ofprogram
highWhen
you
want
toanother
listen
to.
Allows
to
enjoy
5.1(or
6)
discrete
�
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. .. .. .. .. 23
Precautions
.you
.you
.6)
..to
..to
.enjoy
.enjoy
.5.1(or
..channels
..6)
..5.1(or
..discrete
.. ..of
..com
.high
..discrete
.channels
.. .. .channels
.. ..channels
.. channels
.of
.. .high
.of
5
DVD
is
inserted
Allows
you
toyou
enjoy
5.1(or
discrete
quality
When
DVD
is
inserted
Allows
5.1(or
6)
of
high
�
Moving
to
Track
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
Playable
Discs
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4
When
DVD
is
inserted
Permite
desfrutar
5.1(or
6)
canais
distintos
alta
qualidade
de
áuQuando
o
DVD
é
inserido.
Allows
you
to
enjoy
5.1(or
channels
of
high
Allows
you
to
enjoy
5.1(or
6)
discrete
high
When
DVD
is
inserted
YouA)
can
enjoy
surround
sound
simply
by
selecting
one
Surround
Mode
quality
digital
audio
from
DTS
program
sources
such
as
When
DVD
is
inserted
quality
digital
audio
from
DTS
program
sources
such
as
quality
digital
audio
from
DTS
program
sources
such
as
When
DVD
is
inserted
By
pressing
SOUND
button
digital
audio
from
DTS
program
sources
such
as
discs,
DVD
When
DVD
is
inserted
To
keep
the
exterior
surfaces
clean
Allows
you
to
enjoy
5.1(or
6)
discrete
channels
of
high
quality
quality digital audio from DTS program sources such as
�
Search.
. change
.o. the
.the
. .toDigital
.de
. .som
. Digital
..Audio
..do
.. ..DVD
..Audio
.Output
.. pressionando
.. .. ..Output
..mode
.mode
..by
.. tecla
.. 23
Notes
on
Discs
.. ..from
.. .. .. .DTS
..from
.. .. program
.. como
..DTS
.. .. ..discos,
.program
.. .. ..DVD,
.. of
.. sources
..the
..e..discos
.. .. as
55such asVocê
You
change
digital
audio
You
can
change
Digital
Audio
� can
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
.Output
. .. .. .. mode
23by
Precautions
.de. .programa
.DTS,
. ..sources
You
can
the
dio quality
digital
dequality
fontes
pre-programmed
sound
fields
according
the
digital
audio
such
pode
mudar
modo
aby
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
When
setting
up
the unitfor
VCD1.1
VCD2.0
CD
DVD
VCD1.1VCD1.1
VCD2.0
Sound
Mode
CD CD
DVD
Mini
Glossary
Audio
Stream
&&Sound
Fingerprints
and
dust
on
the
disc
can
distort
the
VCD2.0
DVD
Sound
Mode
Mini
Glossary
for
Audio
Stream
Sound
Mode
Mini
Glossary
for
Audio
Stream
&
VCD1.1
VCD2.0
CD picture
DVD
Modo
de
Som
Mode
Mini
Glossary
DVD
Sound
Mode
Mini
Glossário
Mini
Glossary
Audio
&
VCD2.0
DVDDVDDisc
VCD2.0
Sound
Mode
Mini
Glossary
Audio
Stream
The
picture
and
sound
of
nearby
VCR,
Sound
Mode
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
. .VCD2.0
.VCD1.1
. . VCD1.1
. clean
. .VCD1.1
. . CD
.the
. .CD
.disc
. CD
23
Safety
Precautions
. para
. . for
.for
.Audio
. afor
. Canal
.Audio
. for
. Audio
. . . TV,
. de
. .Stream
. .Áudio
.Stream
. or
. Stream
. radio
.&
. .&
2& &
Mini
Glossary
Introduction
orYou
reduce
sound
quality.
Before
playing,
Mini
Glossary
for
Stream
Sound
Mode
Mini
Glossary
for
Audio
Stream
&
Sound
Mode
can
enjoy
surround
sound
simply
by
selecting
one
You
can
enjoy
surround
sound
simply
by selecting
one one
You
can
enjoy
surround
sound
simply
by
selecting
Surround
mode
Surround
mode
Você
pode
desfrutar
do
som
surround
simplesmente
selecionando
Surround
mode
You
can
enjoy
surround
sound
simply
by
selecting
one
may
be
disturbed
during
playback.
In
this
case,
position
Playing
an
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.
.
.
.. .. 23
Table
of
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
You
can
enjoy
surround
sound
simply
by
selecting
Surround
mode
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23 one
Safety
Precautions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
with
a
clean
cloth.
Wipe
the
disc
from
the
centre
outYou
can
enjoy
surround
sound
simply
by
selecting
one
Surround
mode
You
can
enjoy
surround
sound
simply
by
selecting
one
Surround
mode
of
pre-programmed
sound
fields
according
toto
the
&
Modo
Surround
Surround
mode
ofthe
the
pre-programmed
fields
You can
enjoy
surround
sound
simply
selecting
one
Surround
of
thesurround
to the
You
can
enjoy
simply
by
Surround
Mode
of
the
pre-programmed
sound
um
dos
campos
de
pré-ajustados
com
the
unit
away
the
�
Pause
.pre-programmed
. som
. . by
. .CD
.sound
. .and
.sound
. .fields
. sound
. .de
.according
.acordo
. fields
. according
.selecting
.Disc
.according
.according
.to..o.the
.. one
.. ..the
23
Before
Use
.Mode
. . .from
. . .. ..the
of
thean
pre-programmed
sound
fields
to
wards.
Playing
Audio
MP3/WMA
. programa
23the
Table
of
Contents
.. .. ..TV,
.. .. ..VCR,
.. .. .. ..or
.. ..radio,
.. .. .. .. ..or.. ..turn
.. .. ..off
.4-5
.3
3 ENG
D
33ENG
ENG2 CH
DD
22CH
CH
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass Bypass Bypass
4 ENG
DTS
4 ENG
5.1 CH
DTS
4 ENG
4 ENG
DTS
DTS
5.15.1
CHCH
4 ENG
DTS
5.1 CH
4 ENG
DTS
44ENG
ENG
5.1 CH
DTS
DTS
5.1
5.1CH
CH
Movie
Movie
Movie
Movie
Movie
Movie
Movie
Movie
Music
Music
Music
Music
Music
2 ENG
D
2 ENG
2 CH D
2 CH
Music
Music
Music
1 ENG
D
1 ENG
5.1 CH D
5.1 CH
2 ENG
2 ENG
D D
2 CH
2 CH
2 ENG
D
2 CH
2 ENG
D
22ENG
ENG2 CH
DD
22CH
CH
Matrix
Matrix
1 ENG
1 ENG
D D
5.15.1
CHCH
1 ENG
D
5.1 CH
Matrix
Matrix
Matrix
1 ENG
D
11ENG
ENG
5.1 CH
DD
5.1
5.1CH
CH
Preperação and Setup
Installation
2 CH
3 ENG
3 ENG
D D
2 CH
2 CH
3 ENG
D
2 CH
Installation and Setup
3 ENG
D
3 ENG
2 CH D
Installation andInstallation
Setup
and Setup
quality
digital
audio
DTS
program
sources
such
as
can
change
the
Digital
Audio
Output
mode
by
and audio
compact
discs,
etc.bearing
the from
trademark.
DTS
Digital
discs,
DVD
and
compact
discs,
etc.bearing
the
tradediscs,
DVD
and
compact
discs,
etc.bearing
the
tradeYou
can
change
the
Digital
Audio
Output
mode
by
discs,
DVD
and
compact
discs,
etc.bearing
the
tradeA)You
Bypressing
pressing
SOUND
button
digital
from
DTS
program
sources
such
You
can
change
the
Digital
Audio
mode
by
Do
not
use
volatile
You
can
change
the
Digital
Audio
mode
discs,
DVD
and
compact
the
on
the
remote
want
to listen
to.
Operation
.button
.. .on
..button
..the
..on
.Output
.. on
..Output
..remote
.the
.. remote
..Embora
..control
.control
..by
.os
..during
24
About
Symbols
..and
.compact
.. .. compact
.of
..discs,
..DTS
..such
.. ..etc.bearing
.etc.bearing
..as
.audio(which
.. insecticide
.as
..etc.bearing
.discs,
.. ..the
.. program
..DVD
.trade.spray,
55tradeEach
youJPEG
press
SOUND
button,
the
mode
discs,
DVD
pressing
theAUDIO
the
Surround
delivers
up
to
6and
channels
transparent
pressing
the
control
during
�Disc
Search.
.AUDIO
.remoto
. AUDIO
. AUDIO
.sound
.button
.durante
.button
.remote
. .. remote
. .. ..during
. during
23during
Notes
on
Discs
. liquids,
. discs,
.discs,
.etc.bearing
.DTS
.up
.the
. .. .the
. .time
.you
acompact
laser,
etc.
com
marca
registrada.
Digital
discs,
DVD
and
compact
the
tradeÁudio
no
controle
a..is
reprodução.
condiscs,
DVD
discs,
tradethe
button
control
mark.
DTS
Digital
Surround
delivers
up
to
6
channels
ofofpressing
andmeans
discs,
etc.bearing
the
trademark.
Digital
mark.
DTS
Digital
Surround
delivers
to
6
channels
pressing
the
on
the
control
mark.
DTS
Digital
Surround
delivers
up
to
6
channels
of
pressing
theaAUDIO
AUDIO
button
on
the
remote
control
during
Allows
you
to
enjoy
5.1(or
6)
discrete
channels
of
high
quality
near
the
unit.
Do
not
leave
rubber
or
plastic
products
in
pressing
the
AUDIO
button
on
the
remote
control
during
identical
to Digital
theDTS
original
masters)
and
results
in
changed
in the
following
order;
mark.
DTS
Surround
delivers
up
to
66
channels
of
playback.
Although
the
DVD
contents
differ
from
disc
toto
Viewing
JPEG
disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
mark.
Digital
Surround
delivers
up
to
6
channels
of
playback.
Although
the
DVD
contents
differ
from
disc
Front
Panel
and
Rear
Panel
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6
playback.
Although
the
DVD
contents
differ
from
disc to
JPEG
Disc
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
About
Symbols
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5
mark.
DTS
Digital
Surround
delivers
up
to
channels
of
Surround
proporciona
até
6
canais
de
áudio
transparentes
(o
que
Each
time
you
press
SOUND
button,
the
sound
mode
isdisc
mark.
DTS
Digital
Surround
delivers
up
to
6
channels
of
teúdos
de
DVD diferem
de disco
para disco,
o que
segue
explica
playback.
Although
the
DVD
contents
differ
from
disc
to
Surround
delivers
up
to
6
channels
of
transparent
audio(which
A)the
Byto
pressing
SOUND
button
digital audio
from
DTS
program
sources
such
as discs,
DVD
transparent
audio(which
means
identical
to
original
exceptional
clarity
throughout
a
true
360
degree
sound
field.
transparent
audio(which
means
identical
to
the
original
playback.
Although
the
DVD
contents
differ
from
transparent
audio(which
means
identical
the
original
playback.
Although
the
DVD
contents
differ
from
disc
to
contact
with
the
unit
for
a. long
period
of
time.
They
playback.
Although
the
contents
differ
from
to to
PRO
LOGIC
� PLIIdisc,
MOVIE
� PLII
MUSIC
transparent
audio(which
means
identical
the
following
explains
operation
transparent
audio(which
the
� in
Slide
Show
.�
.explains
. order;
. estas
.. DVD
.. .. ..the
.the
..the
.operation
..basic
.operation
..operation
..when
.. .usadas.
..when
..disc
.. 24
disc,
the
following
basic
and
compact
discs,
the
trademark.
disc,
the
following
explains
when
Remote
Control
Overview
.means
.. .DTS
.means
.e. Digital
.LLC.
.. .. clarity
..identical
..to
.em
..the
..to
..throughout
.original
.to
.original
..will
76original
transparent
audio(which
means
identical
to
the
original
The
term
DTS
issão
a etc.bearing
trademark
of
DTS
Technology,
a
JPEG
disc
. .. .basic
.the
. ..basic
. .. .forem
.operation
. when
24
transparent
audio(which
identical
significa
que
idênticos
aos
originais)
uma
means
identical
to
the
original
masters)
results
Front
Panel
and
Rear
Panel
.exceptional
.resulta
. in
.the
. .clareza
.time
.MATRIX
changed
the
following
aViewing
operação
básica
quando
características
the
following
explains
the
masters)
and
results
in
exceptional
throughout
masters)
and
results
in
exceptional
clarity
a�disc,
the
following
explains
when
PLII
ROCK
�disc,
POP
�
LIVE
�
DANCE
�
masters)
and
results
in. and
clarity
throughout
a
Each
youapress
SOUND
button,
the
sound
mode
is basic
disc,
the
following
explains
the
basic
operation
when
leave
marks
on
the
surface.
Surround
delivers
up to
6
channels
of
transparent
audio(which
disc,
the
following
explains
the
basic
operation
when
masters)
and
results
in
exceptional
clarity
throughout
a
CAUTION
Manufactured
under
license
from
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
this
feature
is
used.
masters)
and
results
in
exceptional
clarity
throughout
a
this
feature
is
used.
�
Still
Picture
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
this
feature
is
used.
exceptional
clarity
throughout
a
true
360
degree
sound
field.
masters)
and
results
in
exceptional
clarity
throughout
a
masters)
and
results
in
throughout
aCLASSIC
�this
Slide
Show
..�
..�
. . . .MUSIC
. . . . .�
. . . . . . . . . . . 24
excepcional
num
campo
exato
de
360
O
termo
DTS
uma
TECHNO
�trade�
SOFT
�
3D SURROUND
thisLOGIC
feature
isis
used.
Remote
Control
Overview
.exceptional
. results
.Stream
.graus.
.The
.in. .term
. .clarity
. DTS
.term
. . Sound
. is
.DTS
.trade.in7a
means
identical
to the
original
masters)
and
true
360
degree
sound
field.
The
the
following
order;
true
360
degree
sound
field.
term
DTS
is.a.aétradeis.used.
PRO
�feature
PLII
MOVIE
PLII
true
360
degree
sound
field.
The
is
feature
used.
Glossary
for
Audio
&
Mode
this
feature
is
used.
true
360
degree
sound
The
term
DTS
isischanged
aDTS
tradeRISK
OF
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
true
360
degree
sound
field.
The
term
istradea ...
trade-this
TheMini
term
DTS
is
athroughout
trademark
offield.
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
BYPASS
exceptional
clarity
a true
360
degree
sound
field.
�
Moving
to
.. (For
..(For
..canais
..�
..example
.example
.. (por
.. ..example
.. exemplo
.. ..�
.. .. .. .. or
. or
24
truemark
360
degree
sound
field.
The
term
DTS
ais
tradea)
After
you
select
2
true
360
degree
sound
field.
The
term
DTS
alicença
�
Still
Picture
.select
. POP
.channel
. file
.2�
.(For
.dois
.DANCE
24 or
a)Após
After
you
select
2.channel
marca
registrada
de
Tecnologia
de
DTS,
LLC.
Fabricado
sob
A)
ter
selecionado
os
a)você
After
you
channel
(For
PRO
LOGIC
� PLII
MOVIE
�
PLII
MUSIC
�another
of
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
Manufactured
under
Preparation
�
ROCK
�
LIVE
PLII
MATRIX
mark
ofMode
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
Manufactured
under
of
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
Manufactured
under
a)
After
you
select
22select
channel
example
or .or
DOTechnology,
NOT
OPEN
Themark
term
DTS
ismark
a
trademark
of DTS
LLC.
a)
After
you
2
channel
(For
example
or
Cleaning
the
unit
of
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
Manufactured
under
(This
function
available
2-channel
mode
only)
Manufactured
under
license
from
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
You
can
enjoy
surround
sound
simply
by
selecting
one
Surround
a)
After
you
select
channel
(For
example
a)
After
you
select
2
channel
(For
example
mark
of
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
Manufactured
under
�
ROCK
�
POP
�
LIVE
�
DANCE
�
PLII
MATRIX
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..press
.. .. ..a..SOUND
.SOUND
.. or
.. .. .. 24
mark
of
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
Manufactured
under
mark
ofsurround
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
Manufactured
under
The
Dolby
Digital
format
lets
you
enjoy
up
to
5.1
��
Moving
to
another
file
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
ou
)
ao
pressionar
a
tecla
Áudio,
pressione
tecla
license
from
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
Manufactured
under
license
from
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
CLASSIC
�
SOFT
�
3D
SURROUND
�
TECHNO
)
by
pressing
AUDIO
button,
press
license
from
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
)
by
pressing
AUDIO
button,
Connections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-13
license
from
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
)
by
pressing
AUDIO
button,
press
SOUND
Preparation
of the pre-programmed
sound
fields
according
to
license
from
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
� CLASSICDo
� SOFT
�by
3Dpressing
SURROUND
� the such
TECHNO
)
AUDIO
button,
press
SOUND
not
use
strong
solvents
as
alcohol,
benzene,
license
from
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
channels
of
digital
surround
sound
from
a
Dolby
Digital
)
by
pressing
AUDIO
button,
press
SOUND
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
license
from
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
) repetidamente.
by
pressing
AUDIO
button,
press
SOUND
license
from
DTS
Technology,
LLC.
Tips: ...you want
)repeatedly.
by pressing
AUDIO
button,
press
SOUND
�...
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
To
clean
the
cabinet
BYPASS
CAUTION:
TO
REDUCE
THE
RISK
SOUND
button
program
to
listen
to.
BYPASS
button
repeatedly.
button
repeatedly.
TVsource.
Connections
. . 8 Reproduces
Connections
. .play
. . .DVDs
.. .. ..with
.. .. ..“ .. .. ..”..mark,
.. .. .. you
.. .. ..can
.. .. .. .. .. �.. ..ROCK:
8-13
program
If you
button
thinner,
commercially
available
button
repeatedly.
therepeatedly.
acoustics
of2-channel
rock
music.
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks.
.. .. .. .. ..or
.. ..anti-static
.. .. .. .. .. .. 25
button
repeatedly.
OF greater
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
(This function
available
2-channel
mode
only)
button
repeatedly.
AllowsUse
you to
enjoy
5.1(or
6)cloth.
discrete
of
high quality
(This
function
available
aDolby
soft,
dryquality,
Ifchannels
thespatial
surfaces
extremely
Programmed
Playback
. . . mode
. . cleaners,
. .. ..only)
25
even
better
sound
accuracy,
and
The
Dolby
Digital
format
enjoy
to
Optional
Equipment
Connections
..are
..BACK)
.up
.. A)
.5.1
..�By
.. ..POP:
.. .dirty,
ODolby
formato
Digital
Surround
desfrutar
até
canais
TV
Connections
.sources
.lets
. . you
. such
. permite
. .as
. up
.discs,
. enjoy
.(OR
.5.1
. .. ..to
. 5.1
. 98Reproduces
Theenjoy
Digital
surround
format
lets
you
pressing
SOUND
button
theintended
acoustics
of pop
music.
digital
audio
from surround
DTS
program
DVD
spray
for
vinyl
records.
DO
NOT
REMOVE
COVER
Erasing
a
Track
from
Programme
List
.
improved
dynamic
range.
use
a
soft
cloth
lightly
moistened
with
a
mild
detergent
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
channels
of
digital
surround
sound
from
a
Dolby
Digital
Tips:
and
compact
discs,
etc.bearing
the
trademark.
DTS
Digital
Aerial
Connections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
�.. ..Digital.
LIVE:
Reproduces
the
acoustics
of
a
300-seat
live.
som
digital
Surround
a
partir
de
uma
fonte
de
programa
Dolby
The
Dolby
Digital
surround
format
lets
you
enjoy
up
to
channels
of
digital
surround
sound
from
a
Dolby
Digital
NO
USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS
INSIDE
Optional
Equipment
Connections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
The
Dolby
Digital
surround
format
lets
you
enjoy
up
to
The
Dolby
Digital
surround
format
lets
you
enjoy
up
to
Tips:
program
source.
Ifup
you
DVDs
with
“ format
” mark,
you can
time
youup
press
button,
the
sound
mode
is
The
Dolby
Digital
surround
lets
you
enjoy
up
toup
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Surround
delivers
toplay
6 channels
of transparent
audio(which
solution.
Do
not
use
strong
solvents
such
asEach
alcohol,
Erasing
a Track
from
Programme
List
25
The
Dolby
Digital
surround
enjoy
to SOUND
�you
ROCK:
Reproduces
the acoustics
of
rock
music.
The
Dolby
Digital
lets
you
up
�
the acoustics
of
dance
music.
The
Dolby
Digital
surround
lets
you
enjoy
toReproduces
REFER
SERVICING
TO
QUALIFIED
Speaker
System
Connection
.“.. .in
.format
.sound
.and
. lets
.from
. ..changed
.can
11-12
5.1
channels
ofofsurround
digital
a
Se5.1
você
reproduzir
DVDs
com
marca
”.”.,.mark,
você
pode
program
source.
Ifthe
you
play
DVDs
with
“accuracy,
enjoy
even
better
quality,
greater
spatial
5.1
channels
digital
surround
adesfrutar
Dolby
means
identical
tosound
original
masters)
and
Aerial
Connections
.of
. a.digital
.surround
. format
. results
. .format
.sound
..SERVICE
.sound
.from
.enjoy
..the
.POP:
.Dolby
.DANCE:
. to
10
in Dolby
the
following
After
you
select
5.1
channel
b)
5.1
surround
from
a
After
you
select
5.1
channel
example
or
b)order;
About
Symbols
After
you
select
5.1
or
b)
�
ROCK:
Reproduces
the
of
rock
channels
of
digital
surround
sound
from
ayou
Dolby
�
the
acoustics
of
pop
music.
DivX
Disc
Operation
.techno
.5.1
.acoustics
.o.channel
.channel
. (For
.(For
.5.1
. (For
.example
.(For
.List
.example
.example
. .music.
.. .. .or
. 26
benzene,
orchannels
thinner,
as
these
might
damage
surface
After
you
select
5.1
channel
(For
example
b)
5.1
channels
of
digital
surround
sound
from
aReproduces
Dolby
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
. .. ..or
�
TECHNO:
Reproduces
the
acoustics
of
PERSONNEL.
b)
Após
você
ter
selecionado
canal
(por
exemplo
ou
improved
dynamic
range.
After
you
select
or
b)
5.1
channels
of
digital
surround
sound
from
a
Dolby
exceptional
clarity
throughout
asource.
true
360
degree
sound
field.
5.1
channels
of
digital
surround
sound
from
a.and
Dolby
After
you
select
5.1
channel
(For(For
example
or .or. 25
enjoy
even
better
sound
quality,
greater
spatial
accuracy,
After
select
5.1
channel
example
b)
�
Transmitter.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
Digital
program
If
you
play
DVDs
with
“
”
da
melhor
qualidade,
exatidão
espacial
e
uma
faixa
dinâmica
mePRO
LOGIC
�
PLII b)
MOVIE
�
PLII you
MUSIC
�
Digital
program
source.
If
you
play
DVDs
with
“
”
Speaker
System
Connection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-12
Digital
program
source.
If
you
play
DVDs
with
“
”
�
LIVE:
Reproduces
the
acoustics
of
a
300-seat
live.
Use
this
mode
when
playing
movie
or
Dolby
Digital
2
channel
source.
IfTechnology,
you
play
DVDs
with
“ with
”” “ ” �”Speaker
POP:Disc
Reproduces
acoustics
TheDigital
term
DTS
is
a trademark
of DTSsource.
Setup
.pressing
. .the
.tecla
..AUDIO
.. ..Áudio,
.. AUDIO
.. .button,
.. .. of
.. .button,
.press
.. .. ..music.
.SOUND
..SOUND
.. ..button.
.button.
music.
ofdynamic
theprogram
unit.
)Operation
by
SOUND
Digital
program
If LLC.
you
play
DVDs
DivX
.AUDIO
.button,
. pop
. press
. .. .. SOUND.
. 27
26 button.
)pressionar
by
). by
pressing
Digital
program
source.
Ifeven
you
play
DVDs
)�by
aoLIVE
a. �
a..press
tecla
Digital
source.
If. you
� ROCK
�pressing
DANCE
PLII
improved
range.
pressing
AUDIO
button,
press
SOUND
button.
mark,
you
can
enjoy
even
better
sound
�..“..DANCE:
�
channel
Transmitter
.with
..quality,
..with
.quality,
.“.greater
.greater
the )acoustics
music.
lhorada.
mark,
you
can
enjoy
better
which
carries
the
“program
”amark.
mode
the
Manufactured
under
license
from
) of
bydance
pressing
AUDIOpressione
button,
press
SOUND
button.
mark,
you
even
greater� POP
� Changing
Transmitter.
.can
. DTS
.This
.enjoy
.Technology,
. .of
.provides
. . play
.LLC.
.better
.sound
.DVDs
.effect
. sound
. quality,
.MATRIX
. 11
11Reproduces
Matrix
Matrix
Matrix
� CLASSIC:
by
pressing
AUDIO
button,
SOUND
the
acoustics
ofbe
)indicator
by pressing
AUDIO
button,
SOUND
mark,
you
can
enjoy
even
better
sound
quality,
greater
� Reproduces
LIVE:
Reproduces
the
acoustics
of
a
live.
Additional
.displayed
.. na
..be
.. tela
..displayed
.. ..da
.press
..TV.
..press
..300-seat
.on
.TV
..screen.
..TV
.. ..button.
.. .. button.
.. 28
� greater
CLASSIC
�
SOFT
TECHNO
mark,
you
can
enjoy
even
better
sound
- -the
“ “)�
”3D
indicator
will
on
the
TV
Speaker
Setup
. indicator
. .techno
.will
.�
.orchestral
. will
. displayed
.on
.screen.
. .the
. screen.
27
mark,
you
can
enjoy
even
better
sound
greater
”-Information
be
the
“ ””will
será
exibido
mark,
you
can
enjoy
even
better
sound
�. quality,
acoustics
of
“ SURROUND
screen.
About
the
symbol
display
of being
in
a
movie
theatre
concert
house-an
effect
with
spatial
accuracy,
and
improved
This
flash
with
arrowhead
symbol
within
an Reproduces
�
Setting
alightning
ID
oflive
Transmitter
. dynamic
. .channel
. . quality,
.dynamic
.. .quality,
.range.
..range.
.music.
.....11
---“o“ indicador
””indicator
be
on
the
TV
spatial
accuracy,
and
improved
spatial
accuracy,
and
improved
�
Changing
aorbe
channel
of
Transmitter
.range.
.BYPASS
. ..TECHNO:
. greater
11
-Reproduces
” indicator
willdisplayed
be
displayed
TV
screen.
Usespatial
this
mode
when
movie
orand
Dolby
Digital
2dynamic
accuracy,
improved
dynamic
range.
indicator
bedisplayed
displayed
on
the
TV
screen.
Pro
logic
(II)
“BYPASS
”“-Information
indicator
will
be
the
TV
Tospatial
obtain
aplaying
clear
picture
Last
Memory
..be
.be
.only
..on
..displayed
..of
.on
.the
.. .screen.
.. ..the
.the
.do
..the
28
� Additional
DANCE:
the
music.
spatial
accuracy,
improved
dynamic
range.
an
intensity
which
can
onlyand
obtained
through
DOLBY
PRO
music.
--indicador
” ”will
indicator
will
displayed
display
.will
.acoustics
. .will
.only
. ..be
. ..dance
.na
.on
. ..on
.display
28display
-“acoustic
“Condition
BYPASS
indicator
on
spatial
accuracy,
and
improved
dynamic
range.
accuracy,
and
improved
dynamic
range.
“”BYPASS
”will
indicator
only
displayed
O
“BYPASS”
será
exibido
somente
janela
equilateral
triangle
is
intended
to
alert
the
user
(This
function
available
2-channel
mode
only)
�
SOFT:
Ideal
for
soft
sounds.
“
BYPASS
indicator
be
only
displayed
on
the
display
�
Assembling
and
Connecting
to
the
Speakers
11
which
carries
the “surround
”Receiver
mark.
This
mode
provides
- “Saver
BYPASS
displayed
the
display
�Digital
Setting
aThe
ID
of
Transmitter
.to.the
. .effect
.precision
. larga,
. . .�. a.CLASSIC:
.device.
. . 11
LOGIC
SURROUND.
effect
front/back/left/right
-Screen
“BYPASS
” indicator
will
be
displayed
display
The
Dolby
format
letsof
you
enjoy
up
5.1
the
acoustics
orchestral
“window.
BYPASS
” .of
indicator
will
be
on
Dolby
Pro
Logic
II cria
5 presence
canais
dethe
saída
de
banda
partir
de Reproduces
DVD/CD
is
aof
high-tech,
The
.on
.” .indicator
. . the
.TV
. ..only
.will
..be
.. ..only
.displayed
.. ..of
.. ..on
..operation.
..the
.. .. the
..on
.. ..display
.. 28
window.
� TECHNO:
Reproduces
acoustics
techno
“ Display.
” -may
appear
the
screen
window.
Last
Condition
Memory
. .. only
.during
28
about
the
uninsulated
dangerous
of being in
movie
theatre
or
live concert
house-an
window.
of
the
sound
image,
as
as
the
of
�
Connections.
.Dolby
. sense
.oeffect
.uso
.drive
. the
.with
.fixed
.parts
. 2. Tips:
. .are
. . .dirty
12
channels
ofaSpeaker
digital
surround
sound
from
a Dolby
Digital
window.
music.
�
Assembling
and
Connecting
to
Speakers
11
window.
Usemovement
this
mode
when
playing
movie
or.com
Digital
channel
(II)
Iffonte
the
optical
pick-up
lens
and
disc
uma
de
dois
canais.
Isso
éwell
feito
do
decodificador
de
(II)
Controlling
the.the
TV
.. .. .. .. .. .. explained
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..in.. .this
.. .. .. .. 28
B)
Bybe
pressing
button
(II)
an
intensity
which
can
only
be
through
DOLBY
PRO
PLicon
IIwindow.
music.
the
enclosure
that
may
This
means
Screen
Saver
. .music.
.function
. .. .. ..owner’s
28
position
in
the
sound
isobtained
much
clearer
more
dynamic
(II)
program
source.
Ifvoltage
youimage,
playwithin
DVDs
with
“product’s
” and
mark,
you
can
�
SOFT:
Ideal
for
soft
acoustic
sounds.
(II)
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
�
ROCK:
Reproduces
the
acoustics
of
rock
(II)
(II)
�
Speaker
Connections.
.five
.accuracy,
.constitute
.full-bandwidth
.provides
. .and
. . a. .risk
. . of
.espaciais
. electric
. . 12 � Operation
LOGIC
SURROUND.
The
ofque
the
front/back/left/right
When
CD
is
which
thePro
“ sufficient
”effect
mark.
This
mode
the
effect
When
Video
CD
is
inserted
or
worn,
the
picture
quality
will
be
poor.
When
Video
CD
somcarries
deDolby
matriz
de
alta
pureza
extrai
as
propriedades
of
to
than
before.
enjoy
even
better
sound
quality,
greater
spatial
with
Radio
..on
.inserted
.is
.is
.inserted
.specific
.DVD-Video
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. disc.
.. 29
Logic
IImagnitude
output
CLASSIC:
Reproduces
the
acoustics
manual
isVideo
not
available
Video
CD
is
inserted
time
youWhen
press
button,
the
sound
Controlling
the
TV
.is
.inserted
. that
.mode
. ..inserted
. .. .. .. .. ..of
. ..orchestral
28
Dolby
Pro
Logic
IIcreates
creates
five
full-bandwidth
output
PL
IIVideo
Dolby
Pro
creates
five
full-bandwidth
output
�. Each
POP:
the
acoustics
of
popCD
music.
When
Video
movement
the
sound
image,
as
Dolby
Pro
Logic
creates
full-bandwidth
When
Video
CD
isCD
inserted
Before
.Logic
.Logic
.II.. II
.five
.five
.sense
.full-bandwidth
.fixed
.recommended
. ..output
.By
14-19
When
Dolby
Pro
full-bandwidth
output
improved
dynamic
range.
Speaker
Positioning.
.II.as
..creates
.well
.creates
.. ..the
.qualquer
.full-bandwidth
.. .five
.. .of. .som
..This
.. .novo
.effect
. ou
.is
.output
.pressing
. Reproduces
13
of being
inchannels
aofOperation
movie
theatre
or
live
concert
house-an
with
Each
time
you
press
SOUND
shock
toIIIIispersons.
Dolby
Pro
Logic
creates
five
output
Regular
inspection
and
maintenance
are
Dolby
Pro
Logic
Each
time
you
press
SOUND
button,
the
button
da
gravação
original
sem
acrescentar
tons
de inusing
PLfollowing
II
Quando
um
VCD
ou
um
CD
de
áudio
changed
the
order;
Each
time
you
press
SOUND
mode
Presetting
the
radio
stations
..button,
.é. .inserido
..the
..button,
.. the
.sound
.. ..sound
..sound
.the
.mode
.. sound
..mode
..mode
.. 29
from
two-channel
sources.
isB)
done
using
�
music.
LIVE:
Reproduces
the
acoustics
of
aRadio
300-seat
live.
position
in
the sound
image,
much
clearer
and
more
dynamic
channels
from
two-channel
sources.
This
is
done
using
Operation
with
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Each
time
you
press
SOUND
button,
channels
from
two-channel
sources.
This
is
done
Each
time
you
press
SOUND
button,
the
sound
mode
channels
from
two-channel
sources.
This
is
done
using
Mini
Glossary
for
Audio
Stream
&
Surround
Each
time
you
press
SOUND
button,
the
sound
mode
Each
time
you
press
SOUND
button,
the
sound
mode
of
Video
CD
is
changed
on
the
display
window
in
the
channels
from
two-channel
sources.
This
is
done
using
an intensity
which
can
only
be
obtained
through
DOLBY
PRO
Before
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14-19
of
Video
CD
is
changed
on
the
display
window
in
the
channels
from
two-channel
sources.
This
is
done
using
of
Video
CD
is
changed
on
the
display
window
in the
after
every
1,000
hours
of
use.
(This
depends
on
the
than
before.
channels
from
two-channel
sources.
This
is
done
using
(II)
�
DANCE:
Reproduces
the
acoustics
of
dance
music.
coloração.
PRO
LOGIC
� that
PLII
MOVIE
�
PLII
MUSIC
�
Aof
cada
da
tecla
Sound,
o.. ..modo
do
Vídeo
CD
Listening
to
the
radio
. .the
. . for
.sounds.
.. .. ..display
..de
.. ..som
.. .. .window
.. ..the
..in.. .the
29
of
Video
CD
is
changed
on
display
window
in
Each
time
you
press
button,
the
sound
mode
an
high-purity
matrix
surround
decoder
that
PLacionamento
IIIdeal
anadvanced,
advanced,
high-purity
matrix
surround
decoder
that�
About
the
disc
symbols
instructions
SOFT:
for
soft
acoustic
Presetting
the
radio
stations
.
.
29
an
advanced,
high-purity
matrix
surround
decoder
of
Video
CD
is
changed
on
the
in
the
Video
CD
is
changed
on
the
display
window
in
the
an
advanced,
high-purity
matrix
surround
decoder
that
of
Video
CD
is
changed
on
the
display
window
following
order.
Mode
. .IIThe
.advanced,
. .exclamation
.high-purity
.The
.five
. .Audio
.effect
. . mark
.matrix
. of
. matrix
. within
.the
.surround
.&
. front/back/left/right
.channels
. equilateral
.surround
. .decoder
. . decoder
. .changed
.triangle
. that
.MATRIX
14that
following
order.
an
LOGIC
SURROUND.
an
high-purity
matrix
decoder
that
following
order.
�
TECHNO:
the
acoustics
of
PLII
�following
BYPASS
...
Mini
Glossary
for
Stream
Surround
Dolby
Pro
Logic
creates
full-bandwidth
output
an
advanced,
operating
environment.)
is
in Reproduces
the
following
order;
an
advanced,
high-purity
surround
order.
Modo
de
FILME:
muda
naFunctions.
seguinte
ordem;
extracts
the
spatial
properties
ofof
the
original
recording
Other
. techno
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
following
order.
extracts
the
spatial
properties
the
original
recording
extracts
spatial
properties
the
original
recording
following
order.
Listening
toSTUDIO
the
radio
29
Useextracts
this
mode
when
playing
movie
or
Dolby
Digital
channel
following
order.
the
spatial
recording
issources.
intended
user
about
of
from
two-channel
This
using
advanced,
function
available
2-channel
mode
only)
music.
movement
ofdetails,
the
sound
image,
as
sense
BYPASS
→
→
CLUB
→
HALL
→
Sound
Mode
.the
.the
..properties
.to
.is. alert
..done
.. as
.. .the
.well
..of
..an
..the
..nearest
.2.the
.original
.of
.of
.the
..dealer.
..presence
..recording
.of
..(This
.fixed
.. ..recording
14
extracts
spatial
properties
the
original
BYPASS
→
STUDIO
→
CLUB
→
HALL
→
(II)
A
section
whose
title
has
one
of
the
following
symbol
is
BYPASS
→
STUDIO
→
CLUB
→
HALL
→
Mode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
PRO
LOGIC
�
PLII
MOVIE
�
PLII
MUSIC
�
extracts
the
spatial
properties
of
the
original
For
please
contact
your
extracts
the
spatial
properties
of
the
original
recording
→
STUDIO
→
HALL
Ocarries
modo
dewithout
usado
com
em
televisão
estéreo
e Reproduces
without
adding
any
new
sounds
or
tonal
colorations.
STUDIO

HALL
THEATER
I
BYPASS
Sleep
Timer
Setting
.button
.. .CLUB
.→
.→
.PL
..HALL
..ll..llHALL
..MOVIE
..→
..HALL
.. 
..→..→
..→
.→
.. .. .. 30
which
the
“Filme
ӎmark.
This
mode
provides
the
effect
without
adding
any
new
sounds
or
tonal
colorations.
BYPASS
→
STUDIO
→
CLUB
→
high-purity
matrix
surround
decoder
thatexibição
extracts
the
spatial
B)BYPASS
ByTHEATER
pressing
adding
sounds
or
tonal
colorations.
PL
II. CLUB
Other
Functions.
.1orchestral
.→
.CLUB
.
.CLUB
.→
.→
. PL
. .. .. →
30
� CLASSIC:
acoustics
of
BYPASS
→
STUDIO
→
important
operating
and
BYPASS
→
STUDIO
→
→
11CHURCH
→
CHURCH
without
adding
any
new
sounds
or
colorations.
position
inin
the
sound
image,
clearer
and
more
THEATER
→
CHURCH
� BYPASS
... the
PLII
Dolby
Pro
Logic
II
creates
full-bandwidth
channels
THEATER
→
CHURCH
→MOVIE
PL
llby
MOVIE
On-Screen
Display
.any
.. .new
.new
..output
..maintenance
..or
.. tonal
.any
.. ..new
.with
..colorations.
..tonal
..(servicing)
..dynamic
.. ..When
..MATRIX
.. .. 15
without
adding
any
sounds
colorations.
applicable
only
to
the
disc
represented
the
symbol.
THEATER
11PLII
→
→
llPL
MOVIE
DVD
is
inserted.
without
adding
any
new
Sound
Mode
.five
. codificados
.any
.inis.concert
.much
.sounds
.house-an
.em
.tonal
.or
14
of
being
aos
movie
theatre
or
live
effect
without
adding
new
sounds
or
tonal
colorations.
properties
of
the
original
recording
without
adding
→
→
ll.. MOVIE
todos
programas,
Surround.
O music.
resultado
CHURCH
MUSIC
Dimmer
.MUSIC
.→
.1PL
.PL
.→
.ll
.MTRX
..PLII
.→
.ll.PL
.PL
..→
.→
.. .ll
..MOVIE
.PLII
.→
.MTRX
.. .. .. .. 30
THEATER
→
CHURCH
MOVIE
THEATER
1.MOVIE
CHURCH
→
PL
llllTHEATER
MUSIC
→
from
two-channel
sources.
This
is
done
using
anDolby
advanced,
instructions
the
instructions
accompanying
the available
(This
function
2-channel
mode
only)
MOVIE
mode:
Sleep
Timer
Setting
.II→
.MTRX
.ll..BYPASS...
.PL
.BYPASS...
.→
. .. .→
. .. .. →
30
PL
MUSIC
→
llCHURCH
MTRX
BYPASS...
MOVIE
mode:
PL
ll.→
PL
→
thansounds
MOVIE
mode:
anbefore.
intensity
which
can
only
be
obtained
through
DOLBY
PRO
orOn-Screen
tonal
colorations.
PL
ll
MUSIC
PL
ll
MTRX
BYPASS...
Initial
Settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-19
Each
time
you
press
button,
the
sound
mode
MOVIE
mode:
PL
PL
ll
MUSIC
→
PL
ll
MTRX
→
BYPASS...
You
can
change
the
sound
mode
of
DVD
(Dolby
Digital,
DTS,
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
MOVIE
mode:
high-purity
matrix
surround
decoder
that
extracts
the
spatial
�
SOFT:
Ideal for
softDVD-V
Indicates
to
PL
llacoustic
MUSIC
ll.. finalized
PL
ll MUSIC
MTRX
→
MOVIE
mode:
é um
som
de
campo
melhorado
direcionado
parastereo
chegar
a DVD
MOVIE
mode:
and
product.
BYPASS
.....→
Mute
. DVD
.sounds.
..hazards
..PL
.→
.MTRX
.. .. ..→..DVD±R/RW.
..BYPASS...
.. cause
..BYPASS...
.. .. .. .. harm
.. .. .. .. ..to
.. ..the
.. .. ..unit
.. 30
LOGIC
SURROUND.
The
effect
ofisfor
the
front/back/left/right
The
Movie
mode
is
with
stereo
. .. PL
. ..ll..likely
30
The
Movie
mode
for
use
with
stereo
television
MOVIE
The
Movie
mode
is
use
with
inserted.
properties
of
the original
recording
without
by Dimmer
pressingin
thethe
AUDIO
button
onorder;
the remote
�mode:
General
Operation
.is.adding
.use
.with
.shows
. ..new
. ..television
.stereo
. .television
. ..PRO
.television
. LOGIC,
16 isisetc)
The
Movie
mode
is
for
use
stereo
changed
following
Initial
Settings
.de
.with
.programs
.stereo
.for
.5.1
..use
.television
.with
..for
..use
.any
.stereo
..stereo
.fixed
.When
..television
16-19
The
Movie
mode
for
with
movement
of
the
sound
image,
as
well
as
the
sense
of
itself
damage.
The
Movie
mode
isprograms
The
Movie
mode
iscanal
for
use
and
all. . television
ote
The
Movie
mode
is
for
use
with
qualidade
do
som
ote
Using
the
Headphone
sounds
or tonal
colorations.
ote
shows
and
all
encoded
inin.television
Dolby
Surround.
during
playback.
Mute
.or
.DVD
.other
. (Dolby
.Audio
. .material
. Digital,
. .discs.
. . DTS,
.Jack
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
shows
and
all
encoded
Dolby
Surround.
shows
and
all
programs
encoded
inYou
Dolby
Surround.
ote
B)
By
pressing
button
can
change
the sound
mode
of
PLDVD-A
IIote
DVD
ote
position
in
the
sound
image,
is
much
clearer
and
more
dynamic
programs
encoded
in
Dolby
Surround.
The
result
is
enhanced
shows
and
all
programs
encoded
in
Dolby
Surround.
�
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
(II)
ote
shows
all programs
encoded
Dolby
�
General
Operation
. .encoded
.soundfield
.OR
. . .ELECTRIC
.ofin
. discrete
. Dolby
.in
. .Dolby
.inSHOCK
.Surround.
. .Although
. LOGIC,
. . Surround.
16
WARNING:
TO
PREVENT
FIRE
After
you
select
the
“Bypass”
LOGIC
�
PLII
MOVIE
�
PLII
MOVIE
mode:
shows
and
all
programs
the
DVD
contents
differ
from
disc
to
disc,
the
After
you
select
the
“Bypass”
by
shows
and
all
programs
encoded
Surround.
Modo
de
MÚSICA:
After
you
select
the
“Bypass”
by
PRO
etc)PRO
by
pressing
the
AUDIO
button
on
the
remote
Selecting
the
Input
Source
. MUSIC
..of
.of
..sound
.sound
..of
.�
..sound
..mode
.mode
..mode
..mode
.by
.. .. .by
Disc
Handling
The
result
isand
enhanced
directionality
that
soundfield
directionality
that
approaches
the
qualitysoundfield
The
result
is
enhanced
soundfield
directionality
that
than
before.
After
you
select
the
“Bypass”
of
sound
mode
Using
theyou
Headphone
Jack
. (playback
.of
.mode
. ..by
.by
. 30
30
The
result
is
enhanced
directionality
that
After
select
the
“Bypass”
sound
Each
time
you
press
button,
the
sound
mode
PL
II
The
Movie
mode
is
for
use
with
stereo
television
shows
and
all
The
result
is
enhanced
soundfield
directionality
that
VCD2.0
Video
CDs
with
the
PBC
control)
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
After
you
select
the
“Bypass”
of
sound
by
Indicates
special
operating
features
of
this
unit.
After
you
select
the
“Bypass”
of
sound
mode
following
explains
the
basic
operation
when
this
feature
is
otas:
HAZARD,
DO
NOT
EXPOSE
THIS
PRODUCT
TO
RAIN
OR
RISK
OF
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
The
result
is
directionality
that
playback.
pressing
button,
press
AUDIO
5.1-channel
sound.
�
Language
.five
. quality
. enhanced
.full-bandwidth
. The
.soundfield
. result
.ofsoundfield
. .discrete
.soundfield
. gravação
. .output
. .5.1-channel
. . .com
. during
. .música
. .that
. sound.
16
�SOUND
BYPASS
... Sound)
PLII
MATRIX
Dolbyprograms
Pro
Logic
IIresult
creates
channels
pressing
SOUND
button,
press
button.
The
result
directionality
pressing
SOUND
button,
The
is.the
enhanced
directionality
that
O modo
Música
é enhanced
para
uso
em
qualquer
encoded
inis
Dolby
Surround.
is enhanced
XTS
(Excellent
True
.press
.AUDIO
..AUDIO
.. .button.
.. .. ..button.
..button.
.. .. .. .. 30
approaches
pressing
SOUND
button,
press
AUDIO
button.
approaches
the
quality
discrete
5.1-channel
sound.
is
in
the
following
order;
Selecting
theSOUND
Source
.AUDIO
. .press
. AUDIO
. .. ..AUDIO
.button.
30
approaches
the
discrete
sound.
DO
OPEN
pressing
button,
used.
Although
DVD
contents
differ
from
disc
toInput
disc,
the
pressing
SOUND
button,
press
button.
approaches
function.
pressing
SOUND
button,
press
MUSIC
MOISTURE.
�
Audio.
. .the
.the
. ..the
.NOT
.quality
.discrete
.of
. of
.ofof
.5.1-channel
. .. disc.
. .5.1-channel
. ..changed
. . the
17
Do
not
touch
the
playback
side
directionality
that
approaches
the
quality
discrete
The
Left,
Right
and
Stereo
ofof
audio
channel
will
be
approaches
quality
sound.
from soundfield
two-channel
sources.
advanced,
(This
function
available
2-channel
mode
only)
The
Left,
Right
Stereo
audio
channel
will
be
�mode:
Display
.. .. quality
..quality
.This
.. ..is.of
.done
.discrete
.of
.. discrete
.using
.of
..discrete
.the
.an
..5.1-channel
.. .. .5.1-channel
..sound.
16-17
The
Left,
Right
and
of. .audio
channel
will
be
approaches
of
5.1-channel
sound.
approaches
the
quality
sound.
Após
selecionar
do
de
som,
ao
(II)
estéreo.
The
Left,
Right
Stereo
of
audio
XTS
pro
.when
.“BYPASS”
.and
.Right
.sound
.and
. . and
.Stereo
.Sound)
. modo
.of
.Stereo
.audio
.making
..audio
..of
.channel
.channel
.. ..pressionar
..will
.. .. ..be
.. .. .will
30
following
explains
the
basic
operation
this
feature
is
PRO
LOGIC
�you
PLII
MOVIE
�The
PLII
MUSIC
�
The
Music
mode
is for
use with any stereo music recordings.
5.1-channel
sound.
Left,
Stereo
audio
channel
be
XTS
(Excellent
True
.
.
.
.
.a.. tecla
30
Each
time
press
AUDIO
button,
the
mode
of
DVD
is
MUSIC
mode:
Indicates
tips
and
hints
for
the
task
easier.
The
Left,
Right
and
Stereo
channel
will
be
MUSIC
mode:
The
Left,
Right
and
of
will
be
MUSIC
mode:
displayed
on
the
TV
screen.
high-purity
matrix
surround
decoder
that
extracts
the
spatial
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
Hold
the
disc
by
the
edges
so
that
fingerprints
will
not
displayed
onCDs
the
TV
screen.
VCD1.1
Video
without
the
PBC
(playback
control)
displayed
on
the
TV
screen.
MUSIC
mode:
�
Audio.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
used.
�
BYPASS
...
PLII
MATRIX
Dolby
Pro
Logic
II
creates
five
full-bandwidth
output
channels
MUSIC
mode:
displayed
on
the
TV
screen.
MUSIC
mode:
MATRIX
mode:
SOUND,
pressione
a
tecla
Áudio.
Esquerdo
(Left)
,
Direito
(Right)
e
CAUTION:
TO
REDUCE
THE
RISK
Modo
MATRIZ:
following
order;
changed
in
the
MUSIC
mode:
MUSIC
mode:
displayed
on
the
TV
screen.
WARNING:
Do
not
install
this
equipment
inany
a confined
space
XTS
pro
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
When
DVD
is
inserted.
displayed
on
the
TV
screen.
The
Music
mode
is
for
use
with
stereo
music
displayed
on
the
TV
screen.
The
Music
mode
is
for
use
with
any
stereo
music
properties
of
the
original
recording
without
adding
any
new
The
Music
mode
is
for
use
with
any
stereo
music
from
two-channel
sources.
This
is
done
using
an
advanced,
(This
function
available
2-channel
mode
only)
get
on
the
surface.
The
Music
mode
is
for
use
with
any
stereo
music
recordings.
�
Others
. Music
. same
. . OF
.is.as
.for
. . use
. .is. with
.mode
..SHOCK
..use
..any
.. ..with
..stereo
.that
..the
.. ..music
.stereo
.. .. time
.. .. 19
TheThe
Matrix
mode
is
the
the
Music
except
function.
Music
mode
Each
you press AUDIO button,
the sound mode of DVD is
�as
Lock
(Parental
Control)
. .. any
.do
18
ELECTRIC
The
for
music
Estéreo
do canal
de
áudio
seráfrom
exibido
na Laboratories.
tela da TV. “Dolby”,
The
Music
isismode
for
with
any
stereo
music
Oormodo
émode
igual
ao
modo
Música,
com
exceção
modo
such
aMatriz
book
case
or
similar
unit.
The
Music
mode
is
for
use
with
any
music
Manufactured
under
license
Dolby
high-purity
matrix
surround
decoder
thatuse
extracts
the
spatial
directional
enhancement
logic
turned
off.
It
may
be
used
to stereo
sounds
tonal
colorations.
recordings.
�
�
�
When
CD
is
inserted
MATRIX
mode:
recordings.
following
order;
in
the
changed
When
CD
is
inserted
recordings.
When
CD
is
inserted
Do
not
stick
tape
the
disc.
can
change
the
sound
mode
of DVD
(Dolby
Digital,
DTS,
DO
NOT
REMOVE
COVER
recordings.
When
CD
is
inserted
inserted.
�of
Others
. paper
.same
. .making
.as
.or
. without
.them
.ser
. .seem
.on
. .“larger.”
. any
. .(OR
.that
. .BACK)
. . . . When
. . . . .DVD
19 isYou
enhance
mono
signals
by
The
properties
the desativado.
original
recording
adding
new
recordings.
CD
Audio
When
CD
is inserted
“Pro
Logic”,
and
the
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
Dolby
The
Matrix
mode
is the
the
Music
mode
except
the
recordings.
direcional
Pode
usado
para
melhorar
sinais
recordings.
When
CD
isyou
inserted
When
CD
isCDs.
inserted
MOVIE
mode:
Language
Code
List
.press
.SOUND
.the
. . AUDIO
. . .button,
. . .button
.button,
. the
.the
. .on
.sound
.the
.of. sound
.remote
.mode
. 31mode
Matrixor
mode
may
alsoUSER-SERVICEABLE
find
use
in autooff.
systems,
where
NO
PARTS
PRO
LOGIC,
etc)
by
pressing
the
Each
time
press
SOUND
sound
mode
MATRIX
mode:
sounds
tonal
colorations.
directional
enhancement
logic
ismode:
turned
It may be
usedthe
toINSIDEYou can change
� the
�
�
Each
time
you
press
button,
MATRIX
mode:
Each
time
you
SOUND
MATRIX
sound
mode
of
DVD
(Dolby
Digital,
DTS,
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
Copyright
1992Each
time
you
press
SOUND
button,
the
sound
mode
MATRIX
mode:
fluctuations
from
poor
FM
stereo
reception
can
otherwise
cause
MP3
TheMOVIE
Movie
mode
is for
use
with
stereo
television
shows
and all
MP3
disc.
mono,
os
fazendo
parecer
“maior.”
O
Modo
também
pode
Each
time
you
press
SOUND
button,
the
sound
mode
MATRIX
mode:
enhance
mono
signals
by
making
them
seem
“larger.”
Thematriz
Each
time
you
press
SOUND
button,
the
sound
mode
MATRIX
mode:
REFER
SERVICING
TO
QUALIFIED
SERVICE
mode:
Each
time
you
press
SOUND
button,
the
sound
MATRIX
mode:
Country
Code
List
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.mode
..the
31
during
playback.
of
Audio
CD
is
changed
on
the
display
window
in
PRO
LOGIC,
etc)
by
pressing
the
AUDIO
button
on
the
remote
The
Matrix
mode
islogic
the
same
as
the
Music
mode
Language
Code
List
.changed
. rights
. the
.on
. .display
. .on
. display
.the
. .window
.display
. .window
. . .inwindow
. .the
.in
. the
31
ofDolby
Audio
CD
isCD
changed
the
1997
Laboratories.
All
reserved.
of
Audio
is
in the
The
Matrix
mode
is
the
same
as
the
Music
mode
disturbing
surround
signals
from
amode
decoder.
The
ultimate
The
Matrix
is
the
same
as
the
Music
mode
Matrix
mode
may
also
find
use
in
auto
systems,
where
the
Quando
um
CD
é
inserido
of
Audio
CD
is
changed
on
programs
encoded
in
Dolby
Surround.
The
result
is
enhanced
The
Matrix
mode
is
the
same
as
the
Music
mode
The
Movie
mode
is
for
use
with
stereo
television
shows
and
all
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
.the
. otherwise
. as
.same
.tothe
.as
. cause
.the
. the
. .the
. .de
. For
.recepção
19-22
ofCD
Audio
CD
on .the
display
window
in the
The
Matrix
mode
isbe
as
Music
mode
serThe
usado
em
sistemas
automáticos
onde
flutuações
PERSONNEL.
during
playback.
of Audio
is
changed
display
in
the
of
Audio
CD
is order.
display
the
Matrix
mode
is
the
same
Music
mode
your
reference
WMA
disc.
“cure”
forexcept
poor
FM
stereo
reception
simply
force
fluctuations
from
poor
FM
stereo
reception
can
The
Matrix
mode
ismay
the
same
Music
mode
WMA
following
order.
Although
the
DVD
contents
Troubleshooting
.changed
.is.. .changed
. .differ
. on
.on
. ..the
.window
.disc,
. .. ..the
32-33
following
order.
programs
encoded
in
Dolby
Surround.
The
result
is
enhanced
that
the
directional
enhancement
logic
is
following
Country
Code
List
..from
.. .the
.from
..o..disc
.modo
..Theater
.. .to
.de
.. .window
..do
.. ..Vídeo
.in
.Inc.
. 31
except
that
the
directional
enhancement
logic
is
soundfield
directionality
that
approaches
the
quality
of
discrete
except
that
the
directional
enhancement
logic
is
following
order.
A
cada
acionamento
da
tecla
Sound,
som
CD
Manufactured
under
license
Digital
Systems,
Although
the
DVD
contents
differ
from
disc
to
disc,
the
except
that
the
directional
enhancement
logic
is
disturbing
surround
signals
from
a
logic
decoder.
The
ultimate
audio
to
mono.
following
order.
Playing
apodem
DVD
and
Video
.of..odiscrete
. decodificador
. .. .. .. ..logic
. .. logic
.•..isde
.logic
. is19
soundfield
directionality
that
approaches
the CD.
quality
except
that
the
directional
enhancement
is
following
order.
FM
estéreo
ocorrer,
prejudicando
following
order.
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19-22
except
that
the
directional
enhancement
following
explains
the
basic
operation
when
this
feature
is
except
that
the
directional
enhancement
The
DVD/CD
receiver
memorizes
the
last
mode
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
5.1-channel
sound.
→
STUDIO
→
CLUB
→
HALL
→
BYPASS
For
your
reference
off.
Itreception
may
be
toto
mono
signals
“cure” for turned
poor
FMturned
stereo
may
be
simply
toenhance
force
JPEG
disc.
→
STUDIO
BYPASS
JPEG
Troubleshooting
. feature
.5,956,674,
. .CLUB
.→
. .CLUB
. .→
. .CLUB
.→
. .HALL
.→
. .5,978,762
.→
. . . .→
. .and
32-33
US
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,974,380,
following
explains
the
basic
operation
when
this
is
turned
off.
Itoff.
may
beused
used
enhance
mono
signals
→
STUDIO
HALL
BYPASS
It. used
may
be
to.the
enhance
mono
signals
sound.
muda
na
ordem
seguinte;
→
→
→
HALL
BYPASS
turned
off.
Itoff.
may
be
enhance
3D5.1-channel
SURROUND
→CHURCH
STUDIO
→
CLUB
→→
HALL
→ “DTS
BYPASS
General
.be
. .used
. to
.to
.used
.used
.recepção
.symbol
turned
off.
It. “cura”
may
be
signals
audio
to mono.
settings
for
each
source
individually.
sinais
pro
logic.
A
última
para
aenhance
FM
estéreo
→STUDIO
STUDIO
CLUB
HALL
BYPASS
used.
Playing
aFeatures
DVD
and
Video
CD.
..enhance
..to
..The
.enhance
..mono
.mono
.. ..mono
..•used.
..signals
..mono
.20-22
.signals
.fraca
19
→
STUDIO
→
→
BYPASS
turned
off.
Itmaking
may
be
used
signals
THEATER
1patents
→
→
ll.llHALL
MOVIE
turned
Itthem
may
to
other
worldwide
issued
and
THEATER
1CHURCH
CHURCH
PL
MOVIE
This
lightning
flash
with
arrowhead
within
an
THEATER
→
CHURCH
ll→
MOVIE
MUSIC
mode:
The
DVD/CD
receiver
memorizes
the
mode
MUSIC
mode:
by
making
them
seem
“larger.”
The
Matrix
mode
may
by
making
seem
“larger.”
Matrix
mode
may
Specifications
.→
.1last
.1→
.→
.CHURCH
.of
.→
. CLUB
.PL
.→
.→llPL
.llpending.
.→
.→
.PL
.ll→
. “DTS”
.
.→.→
.→and
. .→
.→
. . . 34
CAUTION:
bythem
them
seem
“larger.”
The
Matrix
mode
may
THEATER
11→
MOVIE
DivX
DivX
disc.
STUDIO


HALL
THEATER
I
BYPASS
THEATER
PL
MOVIE
by
making
seem
“larger.”
The
Matrix
mode
may
This
unit
produce
ato
3Danother
Surround
effect,
using
3D Surround
•..mode
You
can
identify
the
encoding
format
program
THEATER
→
CHURCH
→CLUB
PL
MOVIE
→ →
Digital
Surround”
are
registered
trademarks
of
Digital
Theater
�can
Moving
TITLE/GROUP
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
THEATER
1
→
CHURCH
→
PL
ll
MOVIE
Music
mode
is
for
use
with
any
stereo
music
recordings.
by
making
them
seem
“larger.”
The
Matrix
mode
may
PL
ll
MUSIC
→
PL
ll
MTRX
→
BYPASS...
3DThe
SURROUND
PL
ll
MUSIC
→
PL
ll
MTRX
→
BYPASS...
pode
forçar
o
áudio
para
mono.
Each
time
you
press
AUDIO
button,
the
sound
mode
of
DVD
is
by
making
them
seem
“larger.”
The
Matrix
mode
may
The
Music
mode
is
for
use
with
any
stereo
music
recordings.
General
Features
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20-22
PL
ll
MUSIC
→
PL
ll
MTRX
→
BYPASS...
settings
for
each
source
individually.
by
making
them
seem
“larger.”
The
Matrix
may
equilateral
triangle
is
intended
to
alert
the
user
Each
you
press
AUDIO
button,
the→
sound
mode
of DVD is
also
find
use
inin
auto
where
the
fluctuations
lltime
→
PL
llllMTRX
BYPASS...
also
find
use
auto
systems,
where
thechanged
fluctuations
Sound
technology,
which
simulates
multi-channel
audio
also
find
use
in systems,
auto
systems,
where
the
fluctuations
llPLII
MUSIC
→1996,
ll →
MTRX
This
DVD/CD
receiver
employs
ausing
laser
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
2000
Theater
Systems,
software
byPL
looking
at
its
packaging.
PL
llMUSIC
MUSIC
→
PL
→MUSIC
BYPASS...
also
find
use
in
auto
systems,
where
the
fluctuations
MATRIX
mode:
CHURCH
MOVIE

PLII
BYPASS...
PLII
MTRX
PL
llPL
MUSIC
→ PL
llPL
MTRX
→Digital
BYPASS...
following
order;
in
the
This
unit
can
produce
ato
3D
Surround
effect,
3Dsystem.
Surround
also
find
use
in
auto
systems,
where
fluctuations
•.. the
You
can
identify
the
encoding
format
ofMTRX
program
�
Moving
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
.
.
.
.
20
about
the
presence
of
uninsulated
dangerous
also
find
use
in
auto
systems,
where
the
fluctuations
�
Moving
to
another
TITLE/GROUP
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
also
find
use
in
auto
systems,
where
the
fluctuations
playback
from
two
conventional
stereo
speakers
instead
of
the
MATRIX
mode:
following
order;
changed
in
the
The Matrix
mode poor
is
the same
the
Music
mode reception
except
that
the
from
FM
stereo
reception
can
otherwise
Inc.discs
Allatrights
reserved.
from
poor
FMas
stereo
reception
can
otherwise
cause
from
poor
FM
stereo
can
otherwise
cause
Sound
technology,
which
simulates
multi-channel
audio
- cause
Dolby
Digital
arepackaging.
labeled
with the
logo.
from
poor
FM
stereo
reception
can
otherwise
cause
by
looking
its
To
ensure
proper
use
of
product,
please
read
owner’s
 For
BYPASS
...
five
or
more
speakers
normally
required
to.ItMusic
listen
multidirectional
enhancement
logic
is
turned
off.
to
poor
FM
stereo
reception
otherwise
cause
voltage
within
the
product’s
enclosure
be
The
Matrix
mode
is
the
same
the
mode
except
�
Slow
Motion.
.stereo
.this
.as
. speakers
.CHAPTER/TRACK
.reception
.may
. instead
. be
.to
.used
. can
.otherwise
.the
.can
. . that
.this
..that
.software
.. -..the
.Dolby
20
�
�
�reference
your
from
poor
FM
stereo
reception
can
cause
from
poor
FM
stereo
otherwise
For
your
reference
�
Moving
to
another
.may
.cause
20The
playback
from
twofrom
conventional
of
For
your
reference
disturbing
surround
from
awith
decoder.
Surround
encoded
programs
are labeled with
disturbing
surround
signals
from
alogic
logic
decoder.
The
For
your
reference
BYPASS
disturbing
surround
signals
from
a
logic
decoder.
TheFor
enhance
mono
signals
by
making
them
seem
“larger.”
The
-ofto
Dolby
discs
are
labeled
withreference
the
channel
audio
from
a
home
theatre.
feature
works
manual
carefully
and
retain
itsignals
forlisten
future
Should
theDigital
your
surround
signals
from
areference.
logic
decoder.
The
directional
enhancement
logic
isThis
turned
off.
Ita
may
be
used
Para
suaFor
referência
For
your
reference
of
sufficient
magnitude
to
a
risk
electric
�
� logo.
�
fiveMatrix
or disturbing
more
speakers
normally
required
to
toconstitute
multiyour
reference
disturbing
surround
signals
from
a
logic
decoder.
The
�
Still
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
Playback
.
20
disturbing
surround
signals
from
logic
decoder.
The
mode
may
also
find
use
in
auto
systems,
where
the
disturbing
surround
signals
from
a
logic
decoder.
The
�
Slow
Motion.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
• • You
can
identify
the
format
of
thede
DVD
discs
encoded
Dolby
Pro
Logic
and
Dolby
Digital
ultimate
“cure”
for
poor
FM
stereo
reception
may
be
- Dolby
Surround
encoded
arethe
labeled
with
You
can
identify
theencoding
encoding
format
ofprogram
program
• programs
You
can
identify
the encoding
format
of program
ultimate
“cure”
for
poor
FM
stereo
reception
may
be •logo.
ultimate
“cure”
for
poor
FM
stereo
reception
may
beYou
Software
com
sinais
áudio
de
multicanal
surround
é service
reproduzido
enhance
mono
signals
by
making
them
seem
“larger.”
The
channel
audio
from
a with
home
theatre.
This
feature
works
with
unit
require
maintenance,
contact
an
authorized
locacan
identify
encoding
format
of
program
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
fluctuations
from
poor
FM
stereo
reception
can
shock
to
persons.
ultimate
“cure”
for
• pode
You
can
identify
the
encoding
format
of program
• •OTES
Você
identificar
o the
formato
de
codificação
software,
ultimate
“cure”
for
poor
stereo
may
be• Surround
audio
tracks.
You
can
identify
the
encoding
format
of
program
�
Search.
.force
.find
.from
. Pro
.poor
.Frame-by-Frame
.in
.FM
.and
. stereo
.stereo
.otherwise
. FM
.mono.
.ultimate
.reception
.cause
.where
. Playback
. . reception
. the
.may
. .the
.be
20
You
can
identify
encoding
of program
ultimate
“cure”
for
poor
FM
reception
may
-.may
DTS
Digital
discs
are
with
ultimate
“cure”
for
poor
FM
stereo
reception
be
software
by
looking
at
its
packaging.
logo.
DVD
discs
with
Dolby
Logic
Dolby
Digital
�encoded
Still
Picture
and
.be
20
software
bymarked
looking
atDTS.
itsat
packaging.
Matrix
mode
may
also
use
auto
systems,
disturbing
surround
signals
a.the
logic
decoder.
The
simply
to
the
audio
to
mono.
software
by
looking
its format
packaging.
tion
(see
service
procedure).
simply
to
force
audio
to
simply
to
force
the
audio
to
mono.
acordo
com
o
modo
em
que
foi
gravado.
software
by
looking
at
its
packaging.
It
is
forbidden
by
law
to
copy
,
broadcast,
, broadcast
simply
to
the
software
by
looking
at packaging.
itsshow
packaging.
audio
tracks.
your
reference
verificando
sua
embalagem.
“cure”
for
FM
stereo
reception
be
the
simply
to
audio
to
software
by
looking
at
its
by
looking
at packaging.
its
Digital
Surround
discs
are
marked
with
DTS.
BYPASS
fluctuations
from
poor
stereo
can
� poor
Repeat
.FM
.the
.force
. audio
.audio
.may
. the
.reception
.to
.simply
.mono.
.to. to.mono.
.force
. mono.
. otherwise
. . . . . For
. .-cause
.DTS
. . 20
simply
toforce
force
to
mono.
-software
Dolby
Digital
discs
are
labeled
with the
logo.
simply
to. force
the
audio
5.1 CH
About the symbols for instructions
Notes on Discs
CAUTION
Operation
Operation
Reference
Reference
- Dolby
discs
are
labeled
with
the
- Dolby
Digital
discs
arewith
labeled
with
the logo.logo.
Search.
. . . adjustments,
. . . . . mark
. . . .within
. .carrying
. .an
. . equilateral
. out
. . .procedures
. . . triangle
. . . 20
discs
labeled
the
logo.
The
exclamation
audio
to�mono.
via--cable,
play
inDigital
public,
orare
rent
copyrighted
material
without
Performing
controls,
or
- Digital
Dolby
Digital
discs
are
labeled
the
logo.
Dolby
are
labeled
withcom
thewith
logo.
disturbing
surround
signals
from
logic
The
ultimate
receiver
thediscs
last
mode
BYPASS
Dolby
Digital
discs
are
labeled
with
the
logo.
- Dolby
Dolby
discos
Digitais
estão
identificados
oare
logotipo
.with
Note:
--memorizes
Surround
encoded
programs
with
Software
with
multichannel
played
�
Repeat
A-B
.to
..audio
.. .a. .the
.. .may
..decoder.
..is..result
.. .. .. ..in
.the
.hazardous
.. •.. .The
.. .. DVD/CD
..radi21
- Dolby
Dolby
Surround
encoded
programs
arelabeled
labeled
-Digital
Dolby
Surround
encoded
programs
are
labeled
with
�than
Repeat
.specified
.surround
. ..reception
. .. alert
.signals
.user
. to
. ..force
.settings
20for For
is
intended
about
presence
of
permission.
Dolby
Surround
encoded
programs
are
labeled
with
other
those
herein
3D
SURROUND
Dolby
Surround
encoded
programs
are
labeled
with
your
reference
“cure”
for
poor
FM
stereo
may
be
simply
the
each
source
individually.
according
to the
way it wassurround
recorded.
� Sound Mode
is not
applicable
when
headphones
are
used.
Dolby
Surround
encoded
programs
are
labeled
with
Note:
Dolby
Surround
encoded
programs
are
labeled
with
Software with
multichannel
audio signals is played
the
logo.
Dolby
Surround
programas
codificados
estão
identificados
com
the
logo.
the
logo.
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
About
the
symbols
for instructions
important
operating
BYPASS
This
product
features
the
copy
protection
function developed
�
Repeat
. . . . effect,
. . .and
.using
. .maintenance
.3D
. .Surround
. . . . . .(servicing)
. •�. You
.Sound
. . can
. 21
the
logo.
ation
BYPASS
This
unit
can
produce
a A-B
3Drecorded.
Surround
audio
toBYPASS
mono.
identify
the
encoding
format
of logo.
program
according
toexposure.
the
way
it was
Mode
is not
applicable
when
headphones
are used.
the
BYPASS
the
logo.
the
logo.
BYPASS
DTS
Digital
Surround
discs
are
marked
with
DTS.
BYPASS
•
The
DVD/CD
receiver
memorizes
the
last
mode
DTS
Digital
Surround
discs
are
marked
with
DTS.
BYPASS
o
logotipo
.
DTS
Digital
Surround
discs
are
marked
with
DTS.
Sound
technology,
which
simulates
multi-channel
audio
instructions
in
the
instructions
accompanying
the
by-Macrovision.
Copy
protection
signals
are recorded
on
some
�
Search
.to
.. laser
.. .. .. surround
..beam,
.. .. .. .. .do
.not
.. ..try
.. ..signals
.software
.. .. 21
Surround
discs
are
marked
with
DTS.
by looking
at itsDigital
� Marker
Time
Search
. .. ..multichannel
.speakers
. .. audio
.audio
. ..open
21
-packaging.
DTS
Digital
Surround
discs
are
marked
with
DTS.
Software
with
multichannel
isis
To prevent
direct
exposure
to
Software
with
multichannel
surround
signals
- DTS
DTS
Digital
Surround
discs
are
marked
with
DTS.
Software
with
audio
signals
is
- DTS
Digital
Surround
discs
are
marked
DTS.
from two
conventional
stereo
insteadsurround
of the
3D playback
SURROUND
Software
with
multichannel
surround
audio
is
Indicates
hazards
likely
to
cause
harm
to with
the
unit
settings
for
each
individually.
product.
- DTS
Digital
cercam
discos
são
marcados
com
discs.
When
recording
and
playing
the
pictures
ofDTS.
these
discs
Software
Digital
are
labeled
with
thesource
logo.
�
.normally
.multichannel
. with
.multichannel
. laser
. to
..multichannel
.the
..to..way
.way
.. ..surround
.multi.surround
..open.
..recorded.
..audio
.. signals
..signals
.audio
.-NOT
..signals
.is
17
Software
with
surround
Software
with
is isdiscs
5
enclosure.
Visible
DO
� Zoom.
Marker
Search
.radiation
. the
. was
. .. audio
. .. signals
. ..Dolby
. 21
21
five the
or
more
speakers
required
to
played
according
it..when
was
played
according
to..the
itway
played
according
tolisten
itrecorded.
was
recorded.
played
according
to
the
way
it
was
recorded.
itself
or
other
material
damage.
17
- Dolby Surround
encoded
programs
are
labeled
with
Thischannel
unit
can
produce
a
3D
Surround
effect,
using
3D
Surround
on
a
VCR,
picture
noise
will
appear.
ote
•
You
can
identify
the
encoding
format
of
program
played
according
to
the
way
it
was
recorded.
ote
audio
from
a
home
theatre.
This
feature
works
with
ote
played
according
to. .the
Special
DVD
Features
.. .. way
.. it.. .was
..recorded.
.. .. .recorded.
.. .. 22
STARE
INTO
BEAM.
played
according
to
ote
� Zoom.
. .PREVENT
. .simulates
. . the
.way
. ..it..was
. .. .. .. .SHOCK
. .. .. ..the
21 logo.
ote
ote
DVD technology,
discs encoded TO
with
Dolby
Pro Logic
and
Dolby
Digital audio
ote
Sound
which
multi-channel
This
product
incorporates
copyright
protection
technology
that frequenWARNING:
FIRE
OR ELECTRIC
��
When
you
play
tracks
with
sampling
frequenWhen
you
play
sound
tracks
with96kHz
96kHz
sampling
frequen� by
When
yousound
play
sound
tracks
with
96kHz
sampling
software
looking
at
its
packaging.
� Title MenuFeatures
. . . . . should
. .. .. .. ..not
.. .. .be
.. .. .. .to
.-. ..DTS
.. .. 22
�
When
play
sound
tracks
with
96kHz
sampling
frequenaudio
tracks.
Special
. .. .exposed
. .. ..instead
. ..RAIN
22
�you
When
you
play
sound
tracks
with
96kHz
sampling
frequenDigital Surround
discs
are
marked
with
DTS.
When
you
play
sound
tracks
with
96kHz
sampling
frequenIndicates
special
operating
features
of
this
unit.
CAUTION:
The
apparatus
water
�
playback
from twoDVD
conventional
stereo
speakers
of
the
When
you
play
sound
tracks
with
96kHz
frequenis� protected
by
method
claims
ofbe
certain
U.S.
patents
other
otas:
HAZARD,
DO
NOT
EXPOSE
THIS
PRODUCT
TO
OR
cy,
the
output
signals
will
converted
to
48kHz
(sampling
cy,
the
output
signals
will
bewill
converted
tosampling
48kHz
(sampling
cy,
the
output
signals
be
converted
toand
48kHz
(sampling
-intellectual
Dolby
Digital
discs
are
labeled
with
the
logo.
cy,
the
output
signals
will
be
converted
to
48kHz
(sampling
�
Disc
Menu
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
cy,
the
output
signals
will
be
converted
to
48kHz
(sampling
�
Title
Menu
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
or
splashing)
and
no
objects
filled
with
liquids,
such
fiveBYPASS
or(dripping
more
speakers
normally
required
to
listen
to
multiproperty
rights
owned
by
Macrovision
Corporation
cy, frequency).
the
output
signals
will
bedeconverted
toa 48kHz
(sampling
cy,
the
output
signals
will
be
converted
to 48kHz
(sampling
MOISTURE.
• Quando
você
reproduz
faixas
som
com
frequência
de
amosfrequency).
frequency).
frequency).
- Dolby
Surround
encoded
programs
are
labeled
with
frequency).
�
the
Language
.. .. .. .. Note:
.with
Software
with
multichannel
surround
played
as audio
vases,
should
be
channel
from
a home
This
Indicates
tips
and
hints
for
making
the
task
easier.
and
other
rights
owners.
Use
of
this
copyright
protection
techfrequency).
� Changing
Disc
Menu
. placed
. Audio
.theatre.
.audio
. .on
.signals
.the
. . apparatus.
.is.feature
. . . .. ..works
. .. .. .. .. 22
22
frequency).
�� When
you
use
asinais
you
5.1
channel
When
you
amicrophone,
microphone,
youcan’t
can’t
enjoy
5.1
channel
�when
When
you
use
aused.
microphone,
youenjoy
can’t
enjoy
5.1
channel
tragem
com
96kHz,
os
de
saída
serão
convertidos
para
46Khz
�
When
use
ause
you
can’t
enjoy
5.1
channel
according to the way it was recorded.
� Sound Mode is not
headphones
are
�you
When
you
use
abymicrophone,
you
can’t
enjoy
5.1isof
channel
the
logo.
DVD
discs
Dolby
Proequipment
Logic and.in
Dolby
WARNING:
Dowith
notthe
install
this
�
Changing
Audio
Channel
.. a.. ..confined
.. .Digital
.. .. 22
� applicable
nology
must
be
authorized
Macrovision
Corporation,
and
When
you
use
a2microphone,
microphone,
yousound
can’t
enjoy
5.1
channel
� output.
When
you
use
a microphone,
you
can’t
enjoy
5.1
�encoded
Changing
the
Audio
Language
. .. .. .. ..space
22
Only
channel
sound
will
out
by
the
influence
output.
Only
2
channel
sound
will
out
byout
the
influence
ofthe
theof the
output.
Only
2 channel
will
by
thechannel
influence
(frequência
de
amostragem)
output.
Only
22channel
will
out
by
of
the
output.
Only
2 sound
channel
sound
willthe
outinfluence
by
the
influence
of the
audio tracks.
such�
as
a
book
case
or
similar
unit.
intended
for
home
and
other
limited
viewing
uses
only
unless
Manufactured
under
license
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
“Dolby”,
output.
Only
channel
sound
will
out
by
the
influence
of
the
output.
Only
2
channel
sound
will
out
by
the
influence
of
the
DTS
Digital
Surround
discs
are
marked
with
DTS.
Subtitles
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
microphone
system.
microphone
system.
� Changing
the Audio
Channel
. . . . . .restricted
. . . . . 22
microphone
system. não poderá usufruir da saída de
CAUTION:
This product
may not
be used. outdoor,
to
microphone
• Quando
você
usa
microphone
system.
“Pro
Logic”,
andsystem.
theum
double-D
symbol
are trademarks
of Dolby
otherwise
authorized
bymicrofone,
Macrovision
Corporation.
Reverse
microphone
system.
microphone
system.
DVD
Audio
Discs
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
17
BYPASS
� use
Subtitles
indoor
only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
canal
5.1.
Somente
2
canais
terão
saída,
em
função
do
sistema
do
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
Copyright
1992engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Audio Discs
. . . . . audio
. . . . signals
. . . . . is
. .played
. . . . . . . . 22 Note:
1997
Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
SoftwareDVD
with multichannel
surround
microfone.
14
14 way
14it was recorded.
according14
to
the
�
Sound Mode under
is not license
applicable
when
headphones
are used.
14
14 14
Manufactured
from
Digital
Systems,
Inc.
SERIAL
NUMBER: The
serial
number
is Theater
located on
the back
USthis
Pat.unit.
No.This
5,451,942
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
of
number5,956,674,
is unique to
this unit and
not available
other
worldwide
patents
issued
and pending.
“DTS”here
and and
“DTS
to
others.
You should
record
requested
information
CAUTION:
Digitalthis
Surround”
are
of Digital
Theater
15
retain
guide as
a registered
permanenttrademarks
record of your
purchase.
This DVD/CD receiver employs a laser system.
Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, 17
To ensure proper use of this product, please read this owner’s
Inc. All rights reserved.
Model No. ___________________________________
Antes
da Operação
(continuação
Before
Operation
(Continued)
Introduction
Menu
de tela (OSD)
SafetyOn-Screen
Precautions
. . .Display
......................2
Example: On-Screen Display during
Introduction
1
2
1 3
2
3
ABC
Preparation
Preparation
Introduction
Preparation
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
. . . . .de
. . um
. . .Vídeo
. . . . .DVD
23
Exemplos:
OSD
durante aDisc
execução
playing DVD
Video
Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23
Table
of Contents
. . .general
. . . . . .playback
. . . . . . .status
. . . . .on
. . the
. 3 TV
. . . . . . . Você
. . 23pode
You
can
display
the
visualizar
o. .status
de reprodução
atual
na tela
Method
Items
� Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Método
.Selection
. . . . . de
. . .Seleção
. . . . . 23
Before
Use . Some
. . . . .items
. . . . can
. . . .be
. .changed
. . . . . . .using
. . . . the
. . . 4-5
Itens
Disc . . . da
. . sua
23 screen.
TV. Alguns
itens
podem. .ser
trocados com
o usomenu.
do
(Continued)
� Moving to another Track . . . . b
../ ./B,
. .Numbers
. . . . . . 23
Playable
Discs
. . . . . . .display:
..................4
. . . . . . . . Before
. 23
,
números
To use Operation
the on-screen
Title Number
1/3
Número
do Título
menu.
� Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . .ENTER
. . . . . . . . 23
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ENTER
. . . . . . . . . 23
Press
Para
usar OSD
– DISPLAY
On
Screen
Search. . . . .Display
. . . . . . .during
. . . . . .b
../ ./B,
. .Numbers
. . . . . . 23
Notes
on Discs
. . . . .during
.Display:
. . . . playback.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Example:� On-Screen
. . . . . . . On-Screen
. . 23
,
números
Display
Chapter
Number
1 / 12
Número
do
Capítulo
JPEGDVD
DiscVideo
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ENTER
. . . . . . . . 24
About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 playing
ENTER
. . . . . . . . . 23
Press
v
/
V
to
select
an
item.
canPanel
display
theRear
general
playback
Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Front
and
Panel
. . . . .status
.a. reprodução.
. . .on
. . the
. . . TV
...6
1.
Pressione
a tecla
DISPLAY
durante
. . . . . . . You
. . 24
Numbers,
ENTER
Time por
search
0:20:09
números
ENTER
tempo
Selection
ItemsBusca
The items
selected
is highlighted. the menu.
Method
canitem
be changed
. . . . . . . . .Method
. . . . . . . . . 24
Remote
Control
Overview
. . . . . . .using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Items � Slide Show . . . . . . .Selection
. . . . . . . screen.
. . 24 Some
Idioma
do
áudio
Audio
language
b
/
B,
Numbers
To
use
the
on-screen
display:
b
/
B,
Numbers
�
Still
Picture
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.or. . . . 24
Title
Number
1
/
3
. . . . . . . 2.
. . 24
1
Title Number
11 /// 3
33
 /b,/ B
números
Pressione
as teclas
(/
) parathe
selecionar
Press
b / B to
change
setting. um
Youitem.
can alsoTitle Number
Audio
eand
modo
de saída
deto another file . . . . ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
�Digital
Moving
. . . . . AUDIO
.ÁUDIO
. . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . Preparation
. . 24
Press
DISPLAY
during
playback.
Output
mode
Press
DISPLAY
during
playback.
Áudio
Digital
the number
buttons if appropriate (e.g.
O item use
selecionado
é destacado.
� To rotate picture.
. . . . . .b
. .Numbers
. . . . . . . . . . . 24
b. //.B,
B,
Numbers
. . . . . . . Connections
. . 24
11 //// 12
12
Chapter Number
Number
1
12
1
12
. . . . the
. . .title
. . .number).
. . . . . . . For
. . . some
. . . . .functions,
. . . 8-13 Chapter
inputting
ENTER
ENTER
Programmed
Playback .1 ENG
. . . . . . . ENTER
. . .. ./b,
. /.B
. .or. . . . 25
números
. . . . . . . . . 24
Subtitle
language
Press
v
/
V
to
select
an
item.
Idioma
da
Legenda
TV Connections
. . .to. execute
. . . . . . .the
. . .setting.
...........8
press ENTER
SUBTITLES
) para mudar
os
ajustes. Você Time
Pressione
as teclas
(/
Repeat Programmed
Tracks.
. . . . . ENTER
.SUBTITLE
. . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . 3.
. . 25
0:20:09
Numbers,
search
0:20:09
Numbers,
ENTER
Time
search
0:20:09
The
selected
item
is
highlighted.
0:20:09
Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Erasing a Track from Programme
List b
. ./ .B. . . . . 25
pode
também
usar as. .teclas
numéricas se apropriado
. . . . . . . . . 25
Angle
1/3
Ângulo
Aerial
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Audio
Audio language
language
PLAYBACK
STATUS/RESTRICTIONS
Erasing the Complete Programme
List
b
or
b // B
B
or . . . . . . . 25
t . . . . . . . . 25
(por
exemplo,
inserindo
othe
número
algu- and
Press
b
B
change
setting.
and Digital
Digital Audio
Audio
Press
b //Title
B to
to
change
the
setting.
You
can
also
and
Digital
Audio
Speaker
System
Connection
. . .do
. You
.título).
. . .can
. .Para
.also
. . 11-12
AUDIO
Repeat
title
AUDIO
DivX
Disc Operation . .Bypass
. . . . . . . . AUDIO
.....b
. ./ .B. . . . . 26
st . . . . . . . 25
mode
use
the
number
buttons
(e.g.
Output
mode
Som
Sound
mas
funções,
pressione
use
the
number
buttons
appropriate
(e.g.
� Transmitter.
. . . . . a.ififtecla
. appropriate
. . . ENTER
. . . . . . para
. . . .confirmar
. . . . . 11o Output
Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. . . . . . . . . 26
inputting
title
number).
some
A - the
B
inputting
the
title
number).
For
some functions,
functions,
Repeat
sequence
� Changing
a channel
ofFor
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . 11
ajuste.
b
/
B
or
b. .// B
B
or. . . . . . . . . 28
11 ENG
ENG
Additional
. . . . . . . .b
. .or
Subtitle
language
thin
Subtitle
language Information
1
ENG
1
ENG
press
ENTER
to
execute
the
. . .an
. . . . . . 27
press
ENTER
to of
execute
the setting.
setting.
� Setting
a ID
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SUBTITLE
r. . . . . . . . . 28
Last Condition
Memory
. . . . SUBTITLE
. . . .de
. . um
. . . Video
. . . . .CD.
28
Resume play from this point
Exemplos:
OSD
durante Display
a. execução
Example:
On-Screen
during
� Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11
b
/
B
b. //. B
B
Status/Restrições
de reprodução
Angle
. . . . . . . . . . 28
Angle Screen Saver . . .1111.//// 3333. . . . . . . . . . .b
. . . . . . . PLAYBACK
. . 28 � Speaker
STATUS/RESTRICTIONS
Connections.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
playing
VCD
ay be
Action prohibited or not available
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . Speaker
. . 28 Title
Title
electric
Repeat título
title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Title Positioning.
Title
Repetir
Bypass
B
b. //. B
Bypass
Operation with Radio
. . . . . . . . . . 29
Bypass . . . . . . . . . .b
Bypass
Sound
. . . . . . . Before
. . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Sound
Itens
Items
Method
A
Presetting the radio stations . . Método
.Selection
. . . . . .de
. .Seleção
. . . . . 29
A
B
Repeat
sequence
A ---- B
B
A
B
. . . . . . . . . 29
Repetir
seqüência
Mini Glossary
for Audio Stream & Surround
otes
Número
da faixato the radio . .1 ./ 3 . . . . . . . b
Listening
../ ./B,
. .Numbers
. . . . . . 29
,
números
angle
Track
Number
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
�
Some
discs
may
not
provide
all
of
the
features
Resume
play
from
this
point
ENTER
(ou
modo
PBC)
ce
(or PBC
mode)
Other
Functions.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENTER
. . . . . . . . 30
Retoma
a reprodução
a partir
desse ponto
. .of. . . . . . . 29
Sound
Mode
. . . . . . . .for
. . . instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Example: On-Screen Display during
shown
below.
About
the
symbols
ng)
Sleep
Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Numbers
. . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen
VCD
Time
search
Busca
por
tempo
Action
prohibited
or
Display
. . not
.disponível
. for
.available
. .10
. . seconds,
. . . . . . . the
. . .on. . 15 playing
0:20:09
� Ação
If no button
is ou
pressed
números
the
proibida
não
Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ENTER
. . .ENTER
. . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30
Indicates
hazards
likely
unit
Initial
Settings
. . . .disappears.
. . . . to
. . cause
. . . . . .harm
. . . . to
. . the
. . 16-19
screen
display
Mute
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30itself
or otherOperation
material damage.
or
� General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Items
SelectionMethod
/b,/ B
números
Using
the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . AUDIO
.ÁUDIO
. . . . . . . 30
Audio
Canal
deChannel
Áudio
K. . . . . . . . . 30
otes
� Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Track Number
b
Numbers
b. ///.B,
B,
Numbers
B,
Numbers
Track
Number
11 //// 3
33Source . .b
Track
Number
Selecting
the
Input
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . 30
1
otas:
Indicates
special
operating
features
of
this
unit.
1
3
N. OR
. . . . . . ��. .Some
30 � Display
discs may
. . .not
. . .provide
. . . . . all
. . .of. .the
. . features
. . . . . . . . 16-17 (or
ENTER
mode)
(or PBC
PBCXTS
mode)
(or
PBC
mode)
(Excellent True Sound)
. . . ENTER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Sound
Alguns
discos. podem
não
fornecer
todos
os. .recursos
. . . . . . . •. .shown
30 � Audio.
Bypass
below.
Som
b
/
B
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier.
Numbers
XTS pro . . . . . 0:20:09
.0:20:09
. . . . . . . . . . . .Numbers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Time
Time search
search
. . . . . . . ��. .Ifmostrados
30
search
0:20:09
no�button
is pressedControl)
for 10 seconds,
0:20:09
Lock abaixo.
(Parental
. . . . . . the
. . . on. . . . . . . 18 Time
ENTER
pace
ENTER
. . . . . . . Manufactured
. .screen
30 � Others
display
disappears.
.tecla
. .license
. .é .pressionada
. .from
. . . Dolby
. . . . em
. . .10
. .segundos,
. . . . .“Dolby”,
. . .o. 19
under
Laboratories.
• Se nenhuma
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
“Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992OSD
desaparecerá.
Operation
1997
Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
Reference
b
// B
bduring
B or
Example: OSD
On-Screen
Exemplos:
durante Display
a execução
deor um
Audio
Audio Channel
Channel
AUDIO
AUDIO
DVD de
Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
playing DVD Audio
Áudio.
Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
. . . . . . . . . 31
Sound
DVD or Video
CDlicense
Operation
. . . . Theater
. . . . . .Systems,
. . . . . 19-22
Sound
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
Manufactured
under
from
Digital
Inc.
Troubleshooting
.Bypass
. . . . . . . . . . . .Método
.b
. .// .B
b
B. . . . . . . 32-33
. . . . . . . . . 31
Itens
de Seleção
Items
Selection
Method
Playing
a DVD and
Video 5,974,380,
CD. . . . . 5,978,762
. . . . . . . and
. . . 19
US Pat.
No. 5,451,942
5,956,674,
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
. . . . . . . 32-33
otherGeneral
worldwide
patents
issued
and
pending.
“DTS”
and
“DTS
,Numbers
números
b/ /B,
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22
Group
Number
Número
do
grupo
. . . . . . . Digital
. . 34 Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
ENTER
ENTER
� Moving
to another
TITLE/GROUP
. . Systems,
. . . . . . 20
Systems,
Inc. Copyright
1996, 2000
Digital Theater
Example: On-Screen Display during
Inc.
All
rights
reserved.
�
Moving
to
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
.
.
.
.
.
20
b
/
B,
Numbers

/
,
números
wner’s
Track
Number
playing
DVD
Audio
Número
da faixa
ENTER
� Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ENTER
d the
� Still
Picture
and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20
ocaTime por
search
OTES
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
Display
only
0:20:09
tempo
exibição
ItemsBusca
SelectionSomente
Method
� Search.
. .to. .copy
. . ., broadcast,
. . . . . . . .show
. . . ,.broadcast
. . . . . . . . . 20
It is forbidden
by law
b
/
B,
Numbers
b // B,
B, Numbers
Numbers
b
Audiodo
language
áudio
Number
via cable,
play in public,
Group Idioma
Number
� Repeat
. . . . or
. .rent
. . .copyrighted
. . . . . . . .material
. . . . . .without
. . . . . 20 Group
ures
or
 /b,/ B
números
ENTER
ENTER
Digital
Audio
eand
modo
de saída
de
permission.
s radiAUDIO
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ÁUDIO
Output
mode
Áudio Digital
This product
features
the .copy
b
// B,
Numbers
b
B,
Numbers
� Time
Search
. . . protection
. . . . . . . function
. . . . . .developed
. . . . . . . 21 Track
Track Number
Number
by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some
ENTER
ENTER
 / , números
pen
� Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
OFF
Idioma
da Legenda
Subtitle
language
discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs
Display
only
SUBTITLES
T
Time
search
Display
Time
search
0:20:09
Display only
only
� Zoom.
. . . . will
. . .appear.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
0:20:09
0:20:09
0:20:09
on a VCR,
picture. noise
DVD Features
. . . protection
. . . . . . . technology
. . . . . . . .that
. . 22
This Special
product incorporates
copyright
Page (or Angle)
b/B
Audio
Audio language
language
Página
(ou ângulo)
b
er
B or
or
b /// B
is protected
by Menu
method. claims
B
or
b
� Title
. . . . .of. .certain
. . . . .U.S.
. . .patents
. . . . . and
. . . other
. . 22 and
or
and Digital
Digital Audio
Audio
and
Digital
Audio
AUDIO
AUDIO
such
intellectual
property
rights
� Disc
Menu
. . . owned
. . . . .by
. .Macrovision
. . . . . . . . Corporation
. . . . . . . . 22 Output
1/3
Output mode
mode
and other
rights owners.
of this
copyright. protection
� Changing
theUse
Audio
Language
. . . . . . . tech. . . 22
nology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
� Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Subtitle
Subtitle language
language
Display
Display only
only
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
cted to
� Subtitles
. .Macrovision
. . . . . . . . Corporation.
. . . . . . . . .Reverse
. . . . . . . 22
otherwise
authorized.by
Page
(or
Angle)
b
/
B
Page
(or
Angle)
DVD
Audio
Discs
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
b
/
B
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
or
or
SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back
of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available
to others. You should record requested information here and
retain
16 this guide as a permanent record of your purchase.
Model No. ___________________________________
1
33
1
11 //// 3
3
15
3. Use v / V to select the second desired option then
press B to move to the third level.
upper
Pansc
entire s
4. Use v / V to select the desired setting then press
ENTER to confirm your selection. Some items
Before
Operation
(Continued)
Antes
da Operação
(continuação)
DISPLAY Progre
require additional steps.
Initial Settings
Progre
DISP
5. Press SETUP or PLAY to exit the Setup menu.
By using the
Setup menu, you can make various
IDIOMA
picture
LANGUAGE
Introduction
Initial Settings
TV A
adjustments to items such as picture and sound. You
If you
Dispa
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety
Precautions
.menu,
. . . . . you
. . . can
. . . make
. . . . .various
. . . . . .adjust..2
Introduction
By using
the de
Setup
can also set aLANGUAGE
language for the
subtitles and the
Usando
o Contents
menu
Ajustes
(Setup),
você
pode
fazer
vários
LANGUAGE
IDIOMA
connec
Prog
Playing
an
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.
.
.
.
.
23
Table
of
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
Safety
Precautions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
ments
to
items
such
as
picture
and
sound.
You
can
also
Setup
menu,
among
other
things.
For
details
on
each
Before
ajustes
alanguage
itens
de imagem
e..(Continued)
som.
a prog
OSD
� Pause
.Audio
. . .Idioma
.LANGUAGE
.CD
. . .and
. . .MP3/WMA
. . Português
.English
. . . . . .Disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
Before
. como
. . .Operation
. .os
. .. ..Você
. .. .. ..também
set aofUse
for
Playing
an
23
Table
Contents
..the
.. .. ..subtitles
.. .. .. .. .. .. and
.. .. .the
.Setup
.. menu,
.. ..Setup
.. .4-5
. 3 menu item,
see pages 19
to 22.
Disc Audio
Áudio
Original
On.
pode
selecionar
idioma
�
.Original
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
Playable
Discs
. .. ..details
. .. .. e
.para
.4
among
other
� Moving
Pause .to. .another
. .Menu
. .Language
. . Track
. . . . . Desligar
. ..English
23
Before
Use
. . o.things.
. .. .. .. ..For
.para
.. as
.. .. legendas
.. ..on
.. .. .each
.. .Setup
.. .. .. o
.. menu
..menu
.. .. 4-5
Disc Subtitle
Off
Legendas
LANGUAGE
Disc Audio
Initial
Settings
and
exit
the Menu:
item,
see
pages
�
Track/All/Off.
. . . .Original
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
Precautions
. . outras
.16
.. ..19.
.. .. .. .. .. .. Para
.. .. .. .. detalhes
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..sobre
.. .. To
.. .. ..display
54
de ajustes,
além
de
opções.
To Tur
� Repeat
Moving
to another
. ..Original
23
Playable
Discs
. .. ..to
Disc Menu
Menu
do disco Track original
DISPLAY
Initial
Settings
Search.
. .menu.
. .Disc
. .Subtitle
.A. second
. . .. .. .. ..press
..Off.. .. .. .of
Notes
onajuste,
Discs
.. .. .menu,
.. .. ..Menu:
..21.
..you
.. .. ..can
.. .. ..make
.. .. .. .. .various
.. .adjustcada
item
de
pág.
Repeatthe
Track/All/Off.
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
Precautions
.Setup
. exit
.veja
.the
. .. .. .. .. Press
. .. 55 SETUP to��display
To
display
and
By
using
the
Disc Menu
Original
LANGUAGE
Conne
DISPLAY
SETUP
take �you
back
to .initial
JPEG
Disc
Operation
.. .. .various
About
Symbols
.. .. .. .as
.. .. ..menu.
.. ..and
.. .. ..A.sound.
.. .. .. .. ..You
.By
.. ..using
.. .. ..ofalso
55thewill
Search.
. .make
. . screen.
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
23
Notes
on
Discs
. .. ..picture
. second
. press
Press
SET
UP do
tosuch
display
the
ments
to
can
Setup
menu,
you .can
Para
exibir
e items
sair
menu:
your
m
English
OSD
TV Aspect
Viewing
a
JPEG
disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
Front
Panel
and
Rear
.. .. and
.. .. .screen.
.. To
.. .. ..go
65 to to
set
aUP
language
for
SET
will
take
you
back
JPEG
Disc
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
About
Symbols
. .the
.Panel
. .subtitles
. . to
. .. initial
. .the
. .. .. .Setup
. .. .. .adjustments
. .. menu,
items
as picture
and sound. You
the
nextsuch
level:
Original
Disc Audio
to
Com
DVD-V
Display
Mod
Pressione
a other
tecla
SETUP
paradetails
exibir
oon
menu.
Um
segundo
TV
Aspect
�
Slide
Show
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
among
things.
For
each
Setup
menu
Remote
Control
Overview
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
Mudar
Seleciona
Move
Select
To
go
to
the
next
level:
Viewing
a
JPEG
disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
a language
for the
subtitles
Front Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . can
. . . Press
.also
. . 6set
Disc Subtitleand the Off
B on
the Remote
Control.
Progressive
acionamento
da
tecla,
retorna
a tela inicial.
item, B
see
pages
16
to 19.
Still
.. ..Menu
..details
.. .. .. .. .. on
.. .. ..each
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4:3:
.. .. .. ..Select
.. 24
1. Sele
on
the
remote
control.
Press
SlidePicture
Show For
24 when
Disc
Original
among��other
things.
Remote
Control
Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup
. . . . . menu,
.7
a st
Move
Select
OSD
To
go
back
to
the
previous
level:
�
Moving
to
another
file
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
then
To
go
back
to
the
previous
level:
Setup menu item,
see
pages
19 to .22.
� Still
Picture
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
To
and nível:
exit the Menu:
Para
ir display
ao próximo
Preparation
OSD
16:9
Wide:
Select
w
b
on
the
Remote
Control.
Press
Select
a
language
for
the
Setup
menu
and
on-screen
display.
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
Menu
Language
Press
on
PressbaSET
UP
to. .no
display
menu.
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Pressione
tecla
Connections
.the
. ()
. .remote
. .controle
. control.
. . the
. . .remoto.
. . . . . A. .second
. . . . To
. .press
.display
8-13of and
Preparation
Selecione
idioma
para o menu
Setup. .e .para
os .OSDs.
exit theoMenu:
Programmed
Playback
.. .. ..Setup
.. .. .. .. ..menu
.. and
.. .. .. .on-screen
.. .. .. .. 25
SET UP will take you back to initial screen.
� Toarotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
24
Select
language
for
the
TV
Connections
. 8-13
. SETUP
.8
to
display
the
A second
pressDVD-V
of
Connections
. . . . anterior:
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Press
.. .. .GENERAL
OPERATION
Para
voltar
aothe
nível
Disc
Audio
/menu.
Subtitle
/. Menu
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks.
.DVD-A
.. .. .. .. .. 25
To
go to
next level:
Programmed
Playback
. . . . . .. .. .Move
. .. .. .. ..Select
. .. .. Display
25Mode DVDdisplay.
General
Operation
Optional
Equipment
Connections
.. .. .. 9will
you
back to initial screen.
TV Connections
. . controle
. . control.
. . . . remoto.
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .SETUP
. .. .. 1.
8 take
Pressione
()remote
no
Erasing
aSetup
Trackmenu
from
Programme
List
.. ..track
.. .. .. ..(disc
.. .. 25
Press
SETUP.
Thelanguage
appears.
on the
Press aBtecla
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
Select
the
you
prefer
for
the
audio
Aerial
Connections
. .Connections
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10
Display
Mode setting
OSD
Optional
Equipment
.
9
Press
SET
UP.
Erasing
the
Complete
ListDVD-A
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
To go back to the previous level:
To go
to
thevnext
Disco
desubtitles,
Áudio
Subtitle
/Programme
Menu
Erasing
athe
Track
Programme
List
.TV
25DVD-V DVD2.
Use
/audio),
V Disc
tolevel:
select
thenDVD-V
press
andfrom
theoption
menu.
Audio
/ /desired
Subtitle
/disc
Menu
Speaker
System
Connection
Aspect
set to “4:3”.
Aerial
Connections
.appears.
. . control.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Press
.. .. .11-12
. .B
10
Theb
setup
menu
Select
a language
for
the
DivX
Disc
Operation
. The
.Setup
.preferência
. .screen
. menu
. . . . shows
.and
. .List
.on-screen
.a. faixa
.. .. mode
.. ..de
..display.
..áudio
..is26
Press
on the
remote
on
the
Remote
Control.
B
to
move
to
the
second
level.
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
25
Seleciona
o
idioma
de
sua
para
� Transmitter.
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12
. . 11
Operação
geral
Speaker
System. Connection
Select
the
language
you
prefer
for
the
audio
track
the
current
setting
for
the
selected
item,
as
well
as
Original:
Refers
to
the
original
language
in
which
the
Speaker
Setup
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27
4:3:
Select
when
a stand
Letterbox:
Displays
DivX
Disc
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
26
v / V to
Use
select
deAudio
áudio),level:
legendas
e o menu
deDVD-V
disco. DVD-A
to(disco
the
previous
�
a channel
Transmitter
.then
.. .. back
11
� Changing
Transmitter.
.O. menu
. . . the
. .of
. desired
. . . aparecerá.
. . . .option
. . .. .. .. To
. .. ..go
11
1. Pressione
SETUP.
Setup
alternate
setting(s).
Disc
/ subtitles,
(disc
audio),
Additional
Information
../..Menu
.. .the
.. .. .. .. .. .. upper
.. .. .. .. ..and
28
lower por
disc
was
recorded.
General
Operation
Speaker
Setup
.Subtitle
. . . . . . and
. .. .. .disc
. .. .. ..menu.
27
B
press
to
move
to
the
second
level.
16:9
Wide:
Select
when
�
Setting
a
ID
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
b
on
the
Remote
Control.
Press
� Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
Recorre
aoMemory
idioma
Last
Condition
.. .. .. .option
..language
.no
.. ..qual
.then
.. .. o.. in
.disco
.. .. ..foi
..(disc
..the
28
3.
/V
to select
the
second
desired
Additional
Information
.prefer
.original
.for
. the
.audio
. .track
.which
28 Automatic
) para
selecionar
a opção
desejada
2. Use�as
(/
Theteclas
screen
will
be
shown
the current
setting
for Use
the v Original:
Select
the
language
Original:
Refers
toyou
the
original
and
Connecting
Panscan:
Other:
TotoSaver
select
another
language,
press
number
� Assembling
SettingSET
a IDUP.
of Transmitter
. .to. .the
. . Speakers
. . . . . . . . 11
11
Press
B
to
move
the
third
level.
press
Screen
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
gravado.
Lastwas
Condition
Memory
. . .menu.
. . . . . . . . . . . entire
. . . . .screen
28
selected
item,
as wella as
disc
recorded.
e, em
seguida,
pressione
tecla
segundo
audio),
subtitles,
and
the disc
OPERATION
and cut
�
. alternate
. .()
. . to
.para
. the
. setting(s).
. .irSpeakers
.ao
. .GENERAL
. . . . 12
buttons
to
enter
the
corresponding
4-digit
DVD-V
� Speaker
Assembling
and appears.
Connecting
11
The
setupConnections.
menu
the
.. .. .. .. .. .then
.. .. .. .. ..number
..Display
.. .. .. .. .. ..Mode
.. 28
Screen
Saver
. TV
.selecionar
. . ..setting
. .. .. ..press
28
4.
Use v Other
/ V Controlling
to
select
thePara
desired
(outro):
outros
idiomas,
pressione
nível.
APositioning.
tela
os
atuais
Speaker
. . ajustes
. . .the
. . ..second
.. .. .. .. ..para
..desired
.. .. o.. ..item
.. .1.
.. ..Press
.. .. 13
according
to
the
language
code
list
on
page
31.
If .you
2. Sele
�Use
Speaker
. option
12
SETUP.
The
Setup
menu
appears.
Other:
To
select
another
language,
press
number
v /mostra
V Connections.
to select
Original:
Refers
to
the
original
language
in
which
the
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
ENTER
to
confirm
your
selection.
Some
items
Controlling
the
TV
.seguida
.code,
. . . . .press
. . . . CLEAR
. .para
. .Display
. entrar
. Progressive
. . .the
. com
. 28 setting
V to select
Use v /assim
the
desired
option
then
Mode
Scanwo
Before
Operation
.to
as
teclas
e em.tostations
ENTER
enter
thenuméricas
wrong
language
selecionado,
como
alternativos.
Speaker
Positioning.
.. ..move
.. .. os
.. .. .ajustes
.. ..the
.. .. ..third
.. .. .. ..level.
.. .. .. 2.
.. .. .14-19
. . 13
buttons
then
ENTER
enter
the
then
press B. .to
require
additional
steps.
Presetting
the
radio
.press
.. corresponding
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..mode
.. .. on
.. ..4-digit
.. ..set
.. 29
disc
wasthe
recorded.
Use
v / V Operation
to
select
desired
option
then
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
B
press
to
move
to
the
second
level.
is
to
“4:3”.
3.
Pres
Mini Operation
Glossary for. .Audio
remote
control.
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
.........B
14-19
number
to the
language
code
list .in.de
the
número
de
4according
dígitos
correspondente
idioma,
toPress
moveSETUP
to
the
second
The
screen
Vi
Listening
tolevel.
the
radio
. Setup
. . . . .shows
.. .ao
.. ..acordo
.. .. .. 29
segunda
3.Before
Use
asThe
Presetting
the
stations
.menu.
. .. .press
. .. .. .. ..number
. . Progressive
29 ScanThe
be
the
5.
or To
PLAY
to radio
exit
the
select
the
press
Mode
.teclas
.v.screen
./ .V(/)
. to
. for
. will
. .Audio
.para
. . shown
. selecionar
. . desired
. . .the
.&
. current
.a
.setting
. . . .setting
. then
. . opção
. the
. for
. 14
Other:
select
another
language,
reference
chapter.
If
you
enter
the
wrong
language
code,
currentOther
setting
for
the
selected
item,
as
well
as
MiniUse
Glossary
Stream
Surround
Letterbox:
Displays
aflic
w
com
a
lista
de
códigos
no
capítulo
referente
a
este
tópico.
pictures
with
less
Functions.
. radio
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Listening
to
the
29
selected
item,
as
well
as
alternate
setting(s).
desejada
e,
em
seguida,
pressione
a
tecla
()
para
ENTER
to
confirm
your
selection.
Sound
.. .. 14
buttons
to
enterSetting
the corresponding
press
CLEAR.
DISPLAY
Mode . Mode
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..alternate
14 setting(s).
upper
lower
portions
you
using
the C
Sleep
Timer
.. .. .. .. errado,
.. .. .. .. .. .4-digit
.. .. .. .. .number
.. .. aIf
.. .tecla
.and
.. ..are
30
Se
você
entrou
com
o
número
pressione
Other
Functions.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
LANGUAGE
Some
items
require
additional
steps.
mudar
para
On-Screen
.. .. .. .. .3.
..Use
.. .. 15
tosecond
the language
code listthen
on page 31.
If you
Sound
Mode
. to
. . select
. .nível.
. .. .. .the
. .. .. .second
. .. .. .. .. .. ..desired
. ..option
14
vo/ terceiro
VDisplay
Use
v / V CLEAR
toaccording
select
the
Dimmer
.apagá-lo.
. . .Setting
. . .desired
. . .. .. .. ..option
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Panscan:
.. .. connection
.. .. .. .. .. 30
para
Sleep
Timer
30 to a TV o
DISPLAY
Initial
Settings
.UP
.B. to
.) . para
.move
. .. .the
. .. .. .third
.the
. ..ajuste
enter
the
wrong
language
code,
press CLEAR
on theAutomatically
press
to
the
On-Screen
Display
.. .. ..selecionar
.. .to
.o
..setup
..level.
.. .. ..desejado
..menu.
.16-19
. . 15 B to move
then
press
Press
SET
or
PLAY
exit
scan s
4. Use
as
teclas
(/
Mute
. . ..third
.. .. .. ..level.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..entire
.. .. a
.. ..progressive
.. .. .. 30
LANGUAGE
Dimmer
30and cuts
screen
of
control. TV Aspect
� General
Operation
.4... .. Use
. . 16v / V toremote
16 : 9
Settings
. . . . . . ..a..tecla
.. .. .. ..ENTER
.. .. .. .. .. ..para
.. .. .. .confirmar
16-19
On.
select
the
Using
the
.. .Widescreen
e,Initial
em
seguida,
Menu .
Language
Mute
. desired
. Headphone
. . . . Display
. setting
. English
. Mode
. . .Jack
.then
. . . press
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
v / Vpressione
Use
to
select
the
desired
setting
then
press
�
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
DISPLAY
(TELA)
� General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ENTER
. . 16 to confirm
your selection.Original
Some
items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Disc Audio the Input
Selecting
Source
Scan
Using
the Headphone
Jack. .. .Off
. . . . . . . .Progressive
. . To
. . .Turn
. . 30ON
a seleção.
Alguns
itens necessitam
de etapas adicionais.
progres
ENTER
your selection.
Progressive Scan
�
.to. .confirm
require
steps.
DISPLAY
� Display
Language
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-17
. . 16 additional
Disc Subtitle
Off
XTS
(Excellent
True
Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Selecting
the Input
Source
30
Some items
require
additional
steps.
�
Audio.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
Disc
Menu
Original
Progressive
Scan
Video
5. Pressione
SETUP
Setup.
Connect
component
� Display
. . . .ou
. .PLAY
. . . . .para
. . . sair
. . . do
. . menu
. . . . .5.
. . Press
16-17 SETUP XTS
or
PLAY
to
exit
the
Setup
menu.
pro
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
XTS (Excellent TELA
True
Sound) . . . . . . . . .pictures
. . . . . .with
. 30less flickeri
DISPLAY
�
.. .. ..setup
.. .. .. .. ..menu.
.. .. 18
your monitor/televisio
� Lock
Audio.
. . . .UP
. . Control)
.or. .PLAY
. . . . .to
. .. .exit
. .. .. ..the
17
Press(Parental
SET
XTS
pro
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
�
. . . . . . .Control)
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19
TV Aspect
If you
using theInput.
Com
Formato
da tela
1616: 9: 9
to are
Component
� Others
Lock (Parental
18
LANGUAGE
Reference
Display
Mode
Widescreen
Modo
de tela
Widescreen
connection to a TV or m
� Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Progressive
Language
Code List
.Move
. .Scan
. . Select
. . . . Desligar
.Move
. . . . Select
. .a. progressive
. 1.
. . .Select
. . 31 “Progressiv
Reference
Off
Progressive
Scan
scan signa
LANGUAGE
Operation
press B.
Country
Code
List
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..On.
.. .. .. .. .then
Language
Code
List
. .. .. 31
31
English
Menu Language
DVD
or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Operation
Menu Language
Troubleshooting
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
32-33
DVD-A
DVD-V
Country
Code List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
TVDiscAspect
Original
Audio
Playing
a DVD
Video CD.
. . 19
DIS
To Turn. ON
DVD
or Video
CD and
Operation
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22
Specifications
. .Off.. .. ..menu
. 34progressiv
Select a language
for the Setup
Troubleshooting
.. .. .. .. and
.. .. .. ..on-screen
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32-33
Disc Subtitle
General
. . . . .CD.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22
TV A
4:3:
Select
when
a
standard
Playing aFeatures
DVD and. .Video
.
.
19
display. Specifications
Disc Menu
. .Original
. . . . . . . 4:3
. . .TV
. . is
. .connected.
. . . . .Connect
. . . . . . component
. 34
out
Disp
Seleciona
� Moving
to another
. . 20
Move
Select
16:9: Select when a 16:9 wide TV isMudar
connected.
General
Features
. . . .TITLE/GROUP
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22
your monitor/television,
Prog
�
� Moving
Moving to
to another
another CHAPTER/TRACK
TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
Tamanho
de
tela DVD-V DVD-A
to Component Input.
Disc
Audio
/
Subtitle
/
Menu
�
Motion.
. . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
� Slow
Moving
to another
20
DVD-A
DVD-V DVD-A
DVD-V
Display
Mode
TVSelecione
Aspect
quando
estiver
conectado
TV padrão
1. Select
“Progressive S
�
and
language
you prefer
for
the
audio
track a uma
� Still
SlowPicture
Motion.
. . Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback
. . . . . . Select
. .. 20
20 the 4:3:
Move
Select
4:3.
press B.
�
Search.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
(disc
audio),
subtitles,
and
the
disc
menu.
Display
Mode
setting
works
only
when
the TV then
Aspect
4:3:
Select
when
a
standard
4:3 TV
is connected.
� Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20
�
.. .. Language
20
16:9:
16:9 wide
TV is
connected.
mode
isSelect
set towhen
“4:3”.aquando
� Repeat
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Menu
. .. .. Original:
20
16:9
Wide:
estiver
conectado
a uma TV
Refers
to theSelecione
original language
in which
the
DISPLAY
�
.. .. 21
a
language
for the Setup
menu
and picture
on-screen
� Repeat
Repeat A-B
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Select
. .. .. disc
20
Letterbox:
Displays
a wide
with bands on the
16:9.
was
recorded.
TV Aspect
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . display.
. . . . . 21
DVD-V ofDVD-A
upper
and Mode
lower portions
the screen.
Display
Mo
2. Select “On” Display
using
another language, press number
�
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Other:
.. .. 21
� Marker
Time Search
21 To select
Progressiv
Panscan:
Automatically
displays the
wide picture on
ENTER
toTela
enter
the
4-digit
�
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Disc
.. .Audio
Display
Mode
setting
works
the TV Aspect
Modo
de
DVD-Vcorresponding
DVD-Aonly when
� Zoom.
Marker. Search
. .. .. buttons
. 21
21 then
/ Subtitle
/
Menu
the entire
screen
and cuts
off
portions that do
not fit.ENTER to c
3. Press
to
listthe
in the
Special
DVD
.. .. 22
is the
set
to “4:3”.
� Zoom.
. .Features
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. number
21 according
Osmode
ajustes
de language
modo
de code
tela funciona
quando o tamanho
The de
confirm menu
the
prefer
the
audiolanguage
track code,
chapter.you
If you
enterforthe
wrong
� TitleDVD
MenuFeatures
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Select
.. .. 22
Special
. .. .. reference
22 language
Letterbox:
Displays
a
wide
picture
with
bands
on
the
tela estiver em 4:3.
(disc. .audio),
subtitles, and the disc menu.
�
� Disc
Title Menu
Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. press
. . 22
22CLEAR.
upper
and
lower
portions
of
the
screen.
Letterbox: Exibe uma imagem larga, na tela por inteiro,
�
� Changing
Disc Menuthe
. . Audio
. . . . . Language
. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .Original:
. .. .. .. .. 22
22 RefersPanscan:
the original
languagedisplays
whichthe
thewide picture on
mastocorta
asAutomatically
partes
inferior einsuperior
da imagem.
�
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .disc
.. 22
� Changing
Changing the
the Audio
Audio Channel
Language
. .. .. ..was
22recorded.
the
entire
screen
and
cuts
off
the
portions
that do not fit.
Panscan:
Exibe
uma
larga
imagem
automaticamente,
�
Subtitles
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
� Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2. Select “On” using the
Other:
To select
anotheras
language,
press
number
cortando
partes
que
não
se
encaixam
na
tela.
DVD
Audio
Discs
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
� Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
buttons then ENTER to enter the corresponding 4-digit
DVD
. . . . . 22
3. Press ENTER to conf
16 Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number
according to the language code list in the
The confirm menu wi
reference chapter. If you enter the wrong language code,
Introduction
Introduction
Ajustes iniciais
Preperação
1
2
1
32
4
3
5
4
5
press CLEAR.
17
16
cted to
ner’s
the
oca-
Introduction
1
Preparation
Preparation
Introduction
To go back to the previous level:
upper
16:9desired
Wide: option
Select then
when a 16:9 w
Press b on the Remote Control.
3. Use v / V to select the second
Pansc
press B to move to the third level.
entire s
GENERAL OPERATION
DVD-V
DVD-A
4. Use v / V to select the desired
setting
then press
Display
Mode
ENTER
to
confirm
your
selection.
Some
items
1. Press SETUP. The Setup menu appears.
Antes
da Operação
(continuação)
Display Mode setting worksProgre
only
require additional steps.
Before
Operation
(Continued)
2. Use v / V to select the desired option then press
mode is set to “4:3”.
Progre
5. level.
Press
SETUP
orshows
PLAY to exit the Setup menu.
B
to
move
to
the
second
The
screen
Leitura
Progressiva
(Progressive Scan)
Introduction
Progressive
Scan
the current setting for
the selected item, as well as
ÁUDIO
AUDIO
Letterbox: Displays a widepicture
pictur
yous
ASafety
leituraPrecautions
progressiva de. vídeo
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. upper
. . . . .and
. . opções
. lower
. . . . .portions
. 23 ofIf the
. . . . .fornece
. . . . . .a.mais
. . .alternate
.alta
. . .qualidade
. . setting(s).
...2
LANGUAGE
Cada
disco
de
DVD
possui
uma
variedade
de
de
Progressive
Scan. .Video
provides
the
highest
quality
connec
Each
DVD
disc
has
a
variety
of
audio
output
options.
Playing
an
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.
.
.
.
.
23
Table
of
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
com menor vibração.
. . . . . . . de
. . imagem
23
3.
Use
v
/
V
to
select
the
second
desired
option
then
saída
dePause
áudio.
Ajuste
as opções
de .áudio
do aparelho
de
pictures with
Before
a progt
Setthird
the
DVD/CD
according
�
. . . Receiver’s
. .LANGUAGE
. . . . . . AUDIO
. . . . Panscan:
. options
. . . . . .Automatically
. . . . . . 23to displays
Before
. .Operation
. less
. . . .flickering.
.o. conector
. . . . . .(Continued)
.de
. .Vídeo
. . . .press
.Componente
. . . .B. to
. . move
4-5 to the
level.
Disc . . . Se
. . 23
você Use
estiver
usando
acordo
sistema
de som
que
você
portio
On.
the type
ofoaudio
system
you
use.
If you areDiscs
using. the
� com
Moving
to another
Track
. entire
.English
. . utiliza.
. .screen
. . . . .and
. . .cuts
. 23off the
Playable
. TV
. .COMPONENT
.ou
. .monitor
. . . . . .compatível
. . VIDEO
. . . . . .OUT
. . . o.jacks,
.sinal
.4
. . . . . . . para
. . 23
Menu Language
conexão
de
uma
com
4. Use v /(analog)
V to select the desired setting then press
Scan
but are connecting
AUDIO
� Repeat
Track/All/Off.
. . . . .Original
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Precautions
. . . . . the
. . . receiver
. . . . . . .to. a
. .standard
. .ENTER
. . . . . .to. confirm
..5
Disc Audio
. . . . . . . do
. Progressive
. progressive
23
your
selection.
Some
items
Tur
To
scan,
ajuste
o. modo
Progressive
Scan
para
television,
set
Progressive
Off.
AUDIO
. .Disc
. .Subtitle
. . . . . . . . Progressive
.Off. . . . . . . . .Scan
. . . . 23
Notes
on Discs
. . . . .provides
. .Scan
. . . the
. to
. . highest
. . .require
. . .quality
. . additional
. . . . 5 steps. � Search. . . ÁUDIO
. . . . . . . . Progressive
. 23
Scan Video
Each DVD disc has a Disc
variety
of audioOriginal
output options.
Menu
“ON”
ligado.
Conne
JPEG Disc Operation
. Setup
.Acúst
. . . . . .Seleção
. . . . . . . . . Scan
. . . . .Video
24 provides
About
Symbols
. . .Component
. . . . . . . . .Video
. . . . .jacks
.........5
5.1Ajustes
Speaker
5.1
cxs
Progressive
. . . . . . . . pictures
. 23
If you with
are
using
the
less flickering.
5. Press for
SETUP or PLAY
to exit
the Setup
menu.
Set the
DVD/CD
Receiver’s
AUDIOSelect
options according
to
your m
DRC
On
Viewing a JPEGDRC
disc . . . . . . .Ligar
. . . . . . with
. . . .less
. . . flickering.
. 24
Panel and
Panel
. . .that
. . .is. .compatible
. . . . . . . . with
. . 6a
pictures
. . . . . . . Front
. If
. 24
connection
to the
aRear
TV
or
monitor
the type of audio system
you
use.
you
are using
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks,
to Com
Vocal
Ligar
Vocal
On
�
Slide
Show
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
If
you
are
using
the
Component
V
Remote
Control
Overview
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
. . . . . . . Para
. but
. 24
progressive
scanthe
signal,
set Progressive
Scan
to On.
ativar
o Progressive
Scan
are connecting
receiver
to a standard
(analog)
LANGUAGE
� Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . connection
. . . . . . . . .to. a
. .TV
. . or
24monitor
tha
. . . . . . . Conecte
. television,
. 24 a saída
1. Sele
componente
do
DVD
à
entrada
da
set
Progressive
Scan
to
Off.
Move
Select
AUDIO
Select “Progressive Scan” on the DISPLAY
� Moving to another file . . . a. progressive
. . . . . . . . . .scan
. . . 24
signal, setthen
Pro
. . . . . . . TV/monitor,
. . 24
Preparation
ajuste
a televisão
monitorjacks
parafor
entrada LANGUAGE � To rotate5.1picture.
B.ou o Video
menu
then
press
Speaker Setup
you are
using
the
Component
. . . . .Select
. . On.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
MenuEnglish
Language
. . . . . . . Connections
. If
. 24
Menu Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-13
DRC
On
componente.
to a TV orDISPLAY
monitor that is compatible with a Disc AudioProgrammed
Playback
. . . Setup
. .On
. . .Mudar
. . . .Seleciona
.and
. . .on-screen
. . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . connection
. 24
SelectOriginal
a language
for the
menu
Vocal
Move
Select
Turn
ON progressive scan:
To
TV Connections
. . .Scan”
.set
. . Progressive
. .no
. .menu
. . . . Display
. .Scan
. . . .to
.On.
...8
“progressive
e. em
scan signal,
Repeat
Disc Subtitle
Off Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . 1.
. progressive
. Selecione
25
Off
TV Aspect
display.
Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Disc Menu
Original
Connect
out of the DV
pressione
a Display
teclaMode
(). onOnthe DISPLAY
Erasing
a Track from Programme
List .component
. . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . seguida
25
Select
“Progressive
Aerial
Connections
. . . .Scan”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
DVD-A
5.1
Speaker
Setup DVD-V
Progressive Scan
your List
monitor/television,
Erasing
the Complete
Programme
. . . . . . . 25 set your t
t . . . . . . . . 25
DVD-V
DVD-A
B.
menu then
press
Speaker
System
Connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Disc
Audio
/
Subtitle
/
Menu
5.1
Ajuste
da
Caixa
Acústica
Select
speaker
settings,
DivX
Disc
Operation
. . .including
. . . . . . to
.volume
.Component
. . . . .balance
. . . .Input.
. .and
. 26
st . . . . . . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Selecione
os
DISPLAY
distance,
orajustes
test
Speaker
. .the
. .das
.speaker
. you
.caixas
. . prefer
. . settings.
.acústicas,
.Move
. 1.
. . Select
.the
. . incluindo
. . “Progressive
. . .track
. . . . 27 Scan” on t
SelectSetup
the
language
for
audio
Select
. . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing aTELA
channel
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
Move
Select
Speaker
settings
are only
active
on
the
Desligar
Off
da tela
TV Aspect
volume,
esubtitles,
distância
teste
caixa
(discbalanço
audio),
menu.
Additional
Information
.and
.ou
. .the
. . .disc
.os
. then
.ajustes
. .Analog
.press
. . .da. B.
.Multi. . . 28
. . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a IDFormato
ofdeTransmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Ligar
Modo
tela
On
Display
Mode
Channel
Output. (See
“Speaker
Last Condition
Memory
. . .DVD-A
. Setting”
. . . . . . .page
. . . .27)
. . . . 28
acústica.
. . . . . . . . . 28 � AssemblingProgressive
Menu
Language
DVD-V
Original:
Refers
to
the
original
language
in
which
the
5.1
Speaker
Setup
Scan
and
Connecting
to
the
Speakers
11
Progressive
Scan
Move
Select
ithin an
Screen das
Saver
. . . acústicas
. . . . . . . .somente
. . . . . . são
. . . ativos
. . . . .na
. . 28
OsDynamic
ajustes
caixas
disc
was
recorded.
Select
speaker
settings,
including
volume balance
andDISPLAY
er. . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . .Select
Range
Control
(DRC)
. . . . .a. language
. . . . . 12 for the
Setup
menu
and on-screen
Controlling
the
TV
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
“On” using
. . 28 Select
TV Aspect
saída
de or
canal
de
áudio
analógico
.
s. . . . . . . Speaker
distance,
test
the
speaker
settings.
display.
Positioning.
. . . . .the
. . . v. ./ .V. .buttons.
. . . . . . . . . . . 13
DivX
DVD-A
DVD-V
2. Sele
Other: To
select
another
Operation
with
Radio
. . .language,
. . . . . . . press
. . . . .number
. . . . . . . 29
. .be
. . . . . Before
. . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
ay
Speaker settings are only active on the Analog Multi- Display Mode
buttons
thenthe
ENTER
to
enter
With
the DVD
format,
you
canthe
hear
soundPresetting
radio
stations
. . corresponding
. . a. .program’s
. . . .27)
. . .4-digit
. . .Progressive
29 Scan
electric
Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
. . . . . . . . . 29
Channel
Output.
(See
“Speaker
Setting”
page
3.
Pre
Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Disc
Surround
DVD-A to the language code list in the
Audio / Subtitle /Vocal
Menu
number
according
track
inDVD-V
the
most
Listening
to
theaccurate
radio . . and
. . . .realistic
. . . . . .presentation
. . . . . . . . . 29
The confirm menu will appear.
. . . . . . . . . 29
Move
Select
The
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mudar
. . . .Seleciona
. . . . . . . . . 14
reference
chapter.
If
you
enter
the
wrong
language
code,
possible,
thanks
to
digital
audio
technology.
However,
Ajuste
é ligado
Other
Functions.
. .somente
. . . . . (DRC)
. quando
. . . . . . um
. . .multi-canal
. . . . . . . . de
. 30
Dynamic
Control
. . . . . . . . . 29
preferVocal
forRange
the
audio
track
Sound
Mode
. . . . . the
. .menu
.v
. ./ .V.appears
.buttons.
. .Select
. . . .on
.the
. your
. .language
. . screen
. 14 you
When
the. using
confirm
iangle
press
CLEAR.
“On”
you
may
wish
to
compress
Sleep
Timer
Setting
. . reproduzido.
. .the
. . .dynamic
. . . . .Os
. range
. canais
. . . . of
. Karaokê
.the
. . 30
DVD
karaokê
estiver
sendo
and
the
disc
menu.
. . . . . . . . . 30 Select
DivX
DVD-A
DVD-V
On-Screen
. . . . .as. .default.
. . .(disc
. . . Use
.audio),
. . .the
. . subtitles,
.b. 15
ce of
Cancel isDisplay
highlighted
/B
audio
output
(the
difference
between
the
loudest
sounds
Dimmer
. . . . . . . no
. . .som
. . . estéreo
. . . . . .normal.
. . . . . . . . . . . 30
“Ligado”
usando
(/).
. . . . . . . 2.
.About
. Selecione
30
num
disco
se. misturam
the
symbols
instructions
ing)
to. highlight
Initialbuttons
Settings
.to
. . confirm
. . . for
. as
.Enter.
. teclas
.your
. . . .selection.
. . . . . . . .Refers
. 16-19
the
DVD
format,
you can
hear amay
program’s to
soundPrev.
Original:
to theWith
original
language
ENTER
and
the
ones).
Mute
.quietest
. . . . . .in
. which
. . . . Then,
. the
. . . .you
. . . . . . .listen
. . . . . .a. movie
. . 30
.the
. . . . . . . . 30 Press
�
General
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
track
in
the
most
accurate
and
realistic
presentation
disc
was
recorded.
3. Pressione
ENTER
para
confirmar
a
sua
seleção.
O
menu
The
confirm
menu
willwill
appear.
atUsing
a lower
withoutJack
losing. .dialog
hazards
likely
toset
cause
harm to Receiver
the unit
Pressing
ENTER
the DVD/CD
thevolume
Headphone
. . . . .intelligibility.
. . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30Indicates
possible,
thanks
digital
audio technology. However,
� Languageaparecerá.
. . . . . . .damage.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Set
DRC
to the
Ontonumber
for
thisSource
effect.
confirmação
other
material
to or
Progressive
scan mode.
the v / V bu
Selecting
Input
. . . 2.
. . Select
. . . . . “On”
. . . . using
. . . 30
Other:your
To select another language,
press
. . . . . . . . . de
30itself
When
the
you may wish to compress the dynamic range of the
� Display
.confirm
. . . . . . menu
. . . . . appears
. . . . . . . on
. . . . . . .screen
16-17
CK
XTS
(Excellent
True
Sound)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
buttons
then
ENTER
to
enter
the
corresponding
4-digit
. . . . . . . . . 30 Cancel
b. ./ .B17
is. highlighted
as
default.
Use
the
audio
output
(the
difference
between
the
loudest
sounds
�
Audio.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
confirm your
Indicates special operating features
of thisaccording
unit.
otes
otas:
N OR
XTS
pro
. . .list
. .in. .the
. . . . . . . . . . 3.
. . Press
. . . . .ENTER
. . . . . .to. 30
to the language
code
to highlight
Enter.. . . . .number
. . . . . . . . . 30 buttons
ote (Parental
and
quietestfunction
ones). Then,
you mayThe
listen
to a movie
� Lock
Control)
. . . . . . . . . . . 18
confirm
menu
will appear.
� the
The
works
playback
of
reference
chapter.
If you enter
theDRC
wrong language
code,only during
�Indicates
Progressive
Scan
will
not
be
displayed
in
the
setup
. . . . . . . •. . Se
30
sua
TV
não
for
compatível
com
o
formato
Progressive
at
a
lower
volume
without
losing
dialog
intelligibility.
tips
and
hints
for
making
the
task
easier.
� Others .ENTER
. . . . . .will
. . . set
. . . the
. . . DVD/CD
. . . . . . .Receiver
. . . . . . 19
Pressing
Dolby Digital recorded discs.
press CLEAR.
Reference
menu
when
the
VIDEO
OUT
SELECTOR
switch
is
pace
Set
DRC
to
On
for
this
effect.
Scan,
a
imagem
aparecerá
trêmula
se
você
tentar
o
to Progressive scan mode.
� The level of Dynamic Range Compression may differ
at SCART
position.
Manufactured
under license
from
Dolby Laboratories.
Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
modosetProgressive
Scan
no reprodutor
de DVD. “Dolby”,
depending on the DVD disc.
Operation
“Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Country
otes Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
. . .an. . . . .Laboratories.
. 31
hin
Confidential
Unpublished
1992DVD ote
or Video
CD Operation
. . . .works.
. . . . .Copyright
. . . . . . 19-22
Troubleshooting
. . works
. . . . .only
. . . during
. . . . . .playback
. . . . . . .of. 32-33
�
The
DRC function
r. . . . . . . .1997
. 31
Dolby
Laboratories.
All
rights
reserved.
� Playing
Progressive
Scan
not be
displayed
DVD-V
a DVD
andwill
Video
CD.
. . . . . . in
. . the
. . .setup
. . . 19
Caution
Vocal
Specifications
. . . . . . .discs.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Dolby Digital recorded
. . . . . . . 32-33
4Manufactured
- Quando
o
menu
de
confirmação
aparecer
na
tela,
under
Inc.
Once
setting
for. .progressive
scan
entered,
menu the
when
thelicense
VIDEO
is
General
Features
.from
. OUT
. . Digital
. . SELECTOR
. . .Theater
. . . .output
. Systems,
. .switch
. .is. 20-22
y be
� Set
TheVocal
level of
Range
Compression Karaoke
may differ
. . . . . . . .US
. “Cancelar”
34
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
to Dynamic
On only when
a multi-channel
estará
destacado
como
an
willtoonly
be visible
on apadrão.
progressive
set
at
SCART
position.
�image
Moving
another
TITLE/GROUP
. Use
. . . as
. scan
.and
.teclas
. 20
lectric
other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS
depending
on the
DVD
disc. channels on the disc will
DVD
is playing.
The
karaoke
compatible
TV
or
monitor.
IfENTER.
you set ofProgressive
/
para destacar
a opção
�Surround”
Moving
to another
CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . Scan
. 20
Digital
are
registered
trademarks
Digital .Theater
mix into a normal stereo sound.
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
to�On
in error,
you1996,
must
reset
the
Slow
Motion.
. . .2000
. . .oDigital
. reprodutor
. . . unit.
. Theater
. . . .será
. .Systems,
. .ajustado
. . . 20
5Inc.
- Pressionando
a tecla. .ENTER
AllCaution
rights reserved.
angle
Vocal DVD-V
wner’s
� Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20
ce
of
para
oSearch.
modo
progressive
scan.
Once
the
setting
scan
entered,
d the
1)�Remove
any
. .for
. disc
. progressive
. . .from
. for
. . the
. . . unit
. . . and
. output
. . .close
. . .is.the
. . .disc
. 20
About
the
symbols
Set Vocal to On only when a multi-channel Karaoke
ng)
an OTES
image
will
only
be
visible
oninstructions
progressive
scan
locatray.
SeeCOPYRIGHTS:
that
“NO
DISC”
is.a.displayed
on
the
ON
�
Repeat
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . display
. . 20
he
DVD is playing. The karaoke channels on the disc will
compatible
TV
or
monitor.
If
you
set
Progressive
Scan
It is forbidden
byhazards
law
Indicates
�window
Repeat
A-Bto. copy
. likely
. . ,.broadcast,
. .to. .cause
. . . show
. .harm
. ., broadcast
. . to
. . .the
. . .unit
. 21
mix into a normal stereo sound.
to cable,
On
inplay
error,
you
must
reset
the
unit.
via
in public,
or
rent
copyrighted
material
without
dures
Aviso
) .for
five
seconds
then
2)
and
hold
STOP
(x
itself
or
other
material
damage.
�Press
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
permission.
us
release
it.
The
video
output
will
be
restored
to
the
K radiUma
vez
ajustado
o
modo
progressive
scan,
uma
imagem
� Marker
Search
. . . .protection
. . . . . . .function
. . . . . developed
. . . . . . . 21
This
product
features
theoperating
copy
1) Indicates
Remove
any
disc
from
the
unit
and
close
the
discbe
special
standard
a. .picture
again
N OR
� Zoom.
. setting,
. .numa
.protection
. . .and
. . .ou
.features
. . .are
. will
.compatível
.of
.once
.this
. . .unit.
.on
. com
.some
. . 21
somente
será
TV
o
by Macrovision.
Copy
signals
recorded
tray.
See vista
that
“NO
DISC”
ismonitor
displayed
on
the
display
open
visible
on
a
conventional
analog
TV
or
monitor.
discs.
When recording
and
playing
the
pictures
of
these
discs
Special
DVD
Features
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 22
modo
progressive
scan.
Se
você
ajustou
o
modo
progresOT
Indicates
tips
and
hints
for
making
the
task
easier.
window
on a VCR,
picture
noise
� Title
Menu
. . .will
.reajustar
.appear.
. . . . . o. .reprodutor.
. . . . . . . . Primeiro
. . . . . . 22
pace
sive
por
engano,
deverá
five seconds
then that
2) Press
and hold
STOP
(x) for
This
product
� Discincorporates
. . . copyright
. .from
. . .Dolby
. .protection
. . Laboratories.
.be
. . restored
. .technology
. . . . “Dolby”,
.to. .the
. . 22
Manufactured
under
license
release
it.Menu
The
video
output
will
remova
o
disco
do
aparelho
de
DVD.
Em
seguida,
pressioter
is
protected
by
method
claims
of
certain
U.S.
patents
and
other
“Pro Logic”,
and the double-D
symbol
are trademarks
of
�
Changing
the
Audio
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . Dolby
.be
. . 22
standard
setting,
and
a picture
will cinco
once Corporation
again
such
intellectual
property
rights
owned
by
Macrovision
ne
STOP
()novamente
e
segure-o
por
segundos,
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
� Changing
the Use
Audio
Channel
. . or
.Copyright
. monitor.
. . . . . 1992.tech. . 22
visible
on aowners.
conventional
analog
TV
and other
rights
of this
copyright
protection
1997
Dolbyliberá-la.
Laboratories.
All rights
reserved.
antes
A. .saída
ao
�must
Subtitles
. . . by
. de
. Macrovision
. vídeo
. . . . .será
. . Corporation,
. restaurada
. . . . . . . . and
. . .is22
nologyde
be authorized
Manufactured
under
license
ajuste
padrão,
e Discs
aand
imagem
uma
vista
DVD
Audio
. . .from
.será
. .Digital
. mais
. viewing
. . .Theater
. . .uses
.vez
. Systems,
. only
. . . unless
. numa
. .Inc.
. 22
intended
for
home
other
limited
1
2
3
24
3
5
4
5
US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and
otherwise
authorized
byissued
Macrovision
Corporation.
TV
analógica
convencional
ouand
nopending.
monitor.
other
worldwide
patents
“DTS”Reverse
and “DTS
engineering
or disassembly
is prohibited.
Digital
Surround”
are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems,
Inc. All rights reserved.
SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back
of18
this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available
to others.
record requested information here and
OTESYou
ONshould
COPYRIGHTS:
retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase.
It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast
17
17
ENTER to confirm your selection. Some items
equire additional steps.
Progressive Scan
Initial Settings
DISPLAY
Progressive Scan Video provides the highest quality
DIS
pictures By
with
less the
flickering.
using
Setup menu, you can make various
TV A
If you are
using the Component
Video
jacks for
adjustments
to
items
such
as
picture
and
sound.
You
NGUAGEBefore
Disp
Antes da
Operação (continuação)
Operation
(Continued)
connection
a TV
that
compatible
cantoalso
setora monitor
language
foristhe
subtitles with
and the
Prog
a progressive
signal,
setother
Progressive
Scan
to on each
LANGUAGE
Setup scan
menu,
among
things. For
details
digitar
a
senha
de
4
dígitos
ou
mudar
o
nível
da
classificaOn.
Password
(Security
Code)
Introduction
LOCK
(Parental
Control)
Setup
menu
item,
see
pages
19
to
22.
English
Menu Language
ção enter
para
reproduzir
opassword.
disco.
Original. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Disc Audio
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety
Precautions
Introduction
ONdisplay
progressive
scan:
To TurnTo
You
can exit
or Menu:
change
and
the
LOCK
BLOQUEIO
Disc Subtitle
Off
Playing
an
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
Table
of
Contents
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.press
.a .classificação
. . .of
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
Safety Precautions
4.
Pressione
ENTER
para
confirmar
Press
SETUP
to
display
the
menu.
A
second
Disc Menu
Unlock
Rating
out �ofPassword
the DVD
to. .the
1 Select
the
LOCK
press
Pause
.Audio
. .on
.CD
. input
.screen.
.and
. . of
.MP3/WMA
.menu
. . . . then
. . . .Disc
. . . .. .B.
.. 23
Before
. . . . Original
. Censura
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Desbloqueado
. .. .. .. .. .. ..Connect
. .. .. .. .. ..SETUP
.component
4-5
Playing
an
. .. ..sair
23
Table ofUse
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
3
will
take
you
back
to
initial
****
Senha
selecionada,
e em
seguida
pressione“Change”
ENTER para
Password
****
your
monitor/television,
set
your
television
or
monitor
2
Follow
step
2
as
shown
left
(Rating).
or
�
Playable
. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..BR.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5
.4
� Moving
Pause .to. .another
. . . . . . Track
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
Before
Use Discs
. . . . ..Código
.. .. .do.Code
.País
Country
do
menu.
Input.
“New”
islevel:
highlighted.
the
next
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .TV
.. .. 23
Precautions
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. to
.. .. Component
.. .. .. .. To
.. .. ..go
54 to
� Repeat
Moving Track/All/Off.
to another Track
. .. ..Aspect
23
Playable Discs
DVD-V
3
Enter
the
new
4-digit
code,
then
press
ENTER.
Remote
�
. .DISPLAY
. . . . . . . menu
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
Notes
on Discs
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.
.. .. .Select
.. .“Progressive
on Control.
the
� Search.
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
23
Precautions
. . .Move
. .. .. .. Press
. .. 55 B on theScan”
Select
Input
it
again
to
verify.
JPEG
Operation
.. 24
About
.. .. ..go
55 B.
�Disc
Search.
. . level:
. .Segurança)
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4:3:
. .. .. ..Select
23 when a st
Notes Symbols
on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .then
. .. .. .. press
To
back
to the
previous
(Código
4 Senha
Press
SET
UPJPEG
to de
exitdisc
the .menu.
Viewing
.. 24
Front
Panel
and Rear
.. .. .. 65 b onJPEG
u Language
Disc aOperation
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16:9
. .. .. .. Wide:
24 Select w
About
Symbols
. . .Panel
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Press
the
Remote
Control.
VocêViewing
pode
entrar
ou alterar
Password
DISPLAY
� Slide
. . . .. a.. .senha.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Code)
.. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Move
Select
Remote
Control
Overview
.on-screen
. .. .. .. ..Mudar
.. .. .. ..Seleciona
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76
aShow
JPEG. disc
. ..(Security
24
Front
and menu
Rear and
Panel
ct a language
forPanel
the
Setup
If you
forget
y
our Security
1.Aspect
Selecione
Senha
�
.. .. menu
.. .. .. ..Code
..Bloqueio,
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..e..em
.. .. ..seguida
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
TV
� Still
SlidePicture
Show no
24
OPERATION
ay.
Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL
...7
Mode DVDCAUTION
You
can
enter
password.
Display
Mode
�
to another
.. .. ..change
.. .. .. .. it.. ..using
.. .Display
pressione
.
DVD-V
LOCK
� Moving
Still
Picture
. . . .appears.
. file
. .you
. .. ..or
. .. .. .. .. 24
24
Rating
If you
forget
your
security
can
clear
Preparation
1. Press
SETUP.
The
Setup
menucode
Progressive Scan
On
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
�o
Moving
to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . Display
. . . . . 24
Mode setting
steps:
DVD-A
Connections
. . .DVD-V
. . .scenes
.Rating
.DO
. . NOT
. .that
. OPEN
. .may
. . . not
. . . be
. . .suitable
. . . . 8-13 the2.following
Off2, como mostrado à esquerda (classificaSome
movies
contain
Preparation
c Audio / Subtitle
/ Menu
passo
Classificação
Unlock
1Playback
Selectoption
2. Use v Programmed
/ VSiga
to �select
the
desired
.. Password
.. .. .. ..then
.. .. .. .press
.. .. ..the
.. .mode
25
to “4:3”.
To rotate
picture.
. .. .. ..on
. .. .LOCK
. .. ..is
24set menu
for
children
tocontêm
view.
Many
TV filmes
Connections
. Password
. .. .of
. .. these
. .que
. .. .. .não
.discs
. .. ..são
.contain
. ..adequadas
. .. .. ..parental
. .. .. 8-13
. . B8 to 1move
Connections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ção).
“Mudar”
ou
“Nova”
estará
selecionada.
Input
the
6-digit
number
“210499”
on
the
setup
menu
to
the
second
level.
The
screen
shows
Alguns
imagens
****
ct the language you preferCAUTION:
for the audio
track THE RISK
Repeat Programmed
Tracks.
.. .. as
.. .. .. shown
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. left
.. .. .. 25
2theFollow
2
(Rating). “
TO REDUCE
Programmed
. step
.item,
. . . .as
25
control
information
that. applies
to. .the
complete
disc
or
to
the
current
setting
for Playback
selected
well
as
Optional
Equipment
Connections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
Letterbox:
Displays
and
the
security
code
is
cleared.
TV
Connections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8
para
crianças
assistirem.
Muitos
desses
discos
contêm
Country
Code SHOCK
c audio), subtitles, and the disc OF
menu.
ELECTRIC
Erasing
ao
Track
from
.. .. .. .. .. 25
3. setting(s).
Entre
com
código
de Programme
4Tracks.
seguida
Repeat
Programmed
. em
. . .List
. . . .. .. ..pressione
25
“New”
isdígitos,
highlighted.
certain
scenes
onNOT
the REMOVE
disc.
Aerial
Connections
. .Connections
. Movies
. . .COVER
. . .and
. .(OR
. scenes
. ..BACK)
.. .. .. ..are
.. .. ..rated
.. .. 10
and lower por
a newthe
code
as described
above. List . . .upper
Optional
Equipment
.alternate
9 2 Enter
DO
Erasing
Complete
Programme
informação
de
controle
de
censura
que
se. aplica
ao
disco
ErasingPrev.
a Track
from
List . . . . .. .. .. .. 25
25
Entre
novamente
para
verificar
from
1the
to original
8,Connections
depending
on
country.
Move
Enter Programme
inal: Refers
toSpeaker
language
the
System
Connection
NO
USER-SERVICEABLE
3.
Use v DivX
/ VENTER.
toDisc
select
the
second
desired
option
then
3
Enter
the
new
4-digit
code,
then press
Aerial
. . the
.in. .which
. . .. ..PARTS
.. ..Some
.. .. ..INSIDE
.. ..discs
.. .. .. ..offer
.11-12
. . 10
Operation
. . . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .Panscan:
por
completo
ou
a SERVICING
algumas
e cenas
são. . 11
Erasing
. .. .. .. .. 26
25 Automatic
more
suitable
scenes
was recorded.
REFER
TO
toPressione
move tothe
theComplete
thirdpara
level.
press B
� Transmitter.
. as
. . an
. .cenas.
.alternative.
. . QUALIFIED
. .Filmes
ote
Speaker
System
Connection
.. .. .. .. .. .. SERVICE
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12
4.
SETUP
sair
do
menu.
Input
it
again
to
verify.
Speaker
Setup
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27
entire
screen
and cut
DivX
Disc
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
26
PERSONNEL.
classificados
de
1 aa8,channel
�
.. .. Select
.. (País).
.access
.. .“On”
INPUT
PASSWD
� Changing
Transmitter.
.dependendo
. . .number
. .allows
.of. Transmitter
. . da
.you
. .localidade
. to
. .block
. 2.
. .. .. 4.
. 11
11
v
/V
buttons.
Useusing
v Additional
/ Vthe
to“ select
the desired
setting
press
The
parental
control
feature
When
er: To select
another
language,
press
Information
.. .. .. .then
.on
.to
.TV
.. .. .. ..menu.
.. 28
Speaker
Setup
. Press
. . . .” . appears
. ..SET
. ..items
. .. .. the
. .. ..exit
. .. .. ..screen,
27
4
UP
the
Alguns
discos
oferecem
outras
cenas
adequadas
como
�
Setting
a
ID
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
ENTER
to
confirm
your
selection.
Some
� Changing
a rating
channel
Transmitter
. . . . . . . 11 press Last
to scenes
below
youofinput,
thereby. preventing
ons then ENTER
to
enter
thethe
corresponding
4-digit
and Memory
then press
STOP
(x)
Scan
Condition
.. .. de
.. .UP
.. .. move
.. .. .. .. .Progressive
.. .. 28
Additional
Information
. . .. ..SET
. .Segurança.
. .. to
.to.. ..the
28
require
additional
steps.
você
esqueceu
o seu Código
3.
Press
toSe
confirm
your
selection.
This
flash
arrowhead
an setup
�
and
Connecting
to. .the
Speakers
uma
� Assembling
Setting
alightning
ID
of Transmitter
. .material
. .symbol
. .you
. . .within
. .ENTER
. 11
11
yourtoalternativa.
children
from
being
able
to view
menu.
ber according
the
language
code
list
in with
the
Screen
Saver . .Memory
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Move
Select
Lastappear.
Condition
28 Scan Vi
equilateral
triangle is intended
to
alert
the
user
The
confirm
menu
will
Progressive
�
Speaker
Connections.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
Se
você
esqueceu
o
seu
Código
de
Segurança
você
poderá
believe
unsuitable.
� is
Assembling
and language
Connecting
to the Speakers
ence chapter.
If you
enter
the wrong
code,
5. 11
Press SETUP
or PLAY
to
exit .the
Controlling
.. .. Setup
.. .. .. .. .. menu.
..y..our
.. .. .. .. Security
.. .. .. .. .pictures
Ifthe
you
Code
about the presence
Screen
Saver
. TV
. . . .forget
. .. .. .. .. 28
28
with less flic
Speaker
Positioning.
. . censura
. . . . of
. ..uninsulated
.. .. ..permite
.. .. .. .. ..dangerous
..bloquear
.. .. .. .. .. .. o.. 13
cancelá-lo, da
seguinte
maneira:
� Speaker
Connections.
12
s CLEAR. O
recurso
de“Rating”
controle
de
lhe
Operation
with
Radio
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .If. ..you
.. .. ..are
29
DVD-V
voltage
within
the
product’s
enclosure
thatpress
may be
Select
on
the
LOCK
menu
then,
Controlling
the
TV
.
28
Country
Code
using the
Before
Operation
. . .magnitude
. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..to.. .constitute
. .. .. .. .. .. .. a.. .risk
. .. .. of
. .14-19
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
13
DVD-V
LANGUAGE
1.
Pressione
SETUP
para
exibir
o
menu
de
ajuste
of
sufficient
electric
Presetting
radio
stations
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .connection
.. .. .. .. 29
Rating
acesso
cenas abaixo da classificação que você definiu, o
Iftheyou
forget
Operation
with
Radio
. . . . .your
. .. .. .. ..security
. code
29you
B. à Glossary
to acan
TV o
Mini
Before
Operation
. .Audio
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . 14-19 Enter Listening
the code of
the
country/area
whose
standards
shock tofor
persons.
to
thede
radio
. . . .[210499].
.steps:
.. .. .. .. ..19
..O
.. ..aviso
.. .. .. .a.aparece,
..progressive
.. .. .. 29
Presetting
the
radio
stations
29
que Mode
impede
seus
a. materiais
scan s
2. Digite
o numero
6 dígitos
the
following
To
access
the
and
. .que
. . .contain
. . for
.Rating,
.filhos
.Audio
. . scenes
. assistam
.Password
. . . . . .that
. . may
. .Country
. . que
.not
. . você
. .be
14 suitable
LANGUAGE
were
used
to
rate
the
DVD-Video
disc,
based
on
the
list
Some
movies
Mini
Glossary
Stream
&. Surround
Other
Functions.
. radio
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .On.
Listening
to the
. .. .. .. .. 30
29
Code
acredite
não
serem
[OK]e
pressione
within
an
Sound
Mode
.. you
.. .. .. ..must
.. mark
.. .. .a.input
..eles.
.. .. .. ..the
.. .. equilateral
..4-digit
.. .. .. .. .. .. .triangle
English ENTER. O código de segurança
theescolha
reference
chapter.
Menu Language
Mode
.features,
.The
. . view.
.exclamation
. ..adequados
. .. .. 14
14 inparental
for children
to
Many
of
these
discs
contain
Sleep
Timer
Setting
.. .. .. ..6-digit
.. .. .. .. .. .. .number
Other
Functions.
. . Original
. . ..the
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .“210499”
. .. .. 30
30
security
code
is
intended
alert
of
Input
on
Disccancelado.
Audio 1
On-Screen
Display
.. .. .. about
.. .. .. .. .the
.. .. .. .. .. .. 15
estará
Sound
Mode
. you
. . to
. .created.
. .. .. .the
. .. ..user
. .. ..presence
14
Turn
ON progres
To
Dimmer
. . symbols
. .Setting
. .Code”
. .Off. .. .. on
..for
.. ..the
.. .instructions
.. .. .. .. ..menu,
.. .. .. .. .. then
.. .. .. .. 30
About
the
Select
Sleep
Timer
. ..LOCK
30
important
maintenance
If you
have
not. yet
are
control
information
disc
or
to
Disc“Country
Subtitle
Initial
Settings
. operating
.that
.entered
. . .. applies
. ..and
. a.. ..security
. ..Bloqueio
.to
. .. the
.code
. .. .(servicing)
.complete
.you
. .. .16-19
and
the
security
code
is
cleared.
1. Selecione
“Classificação”
no
menu
e
em
On-Screen
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
Mute
.. .. ..novo
.. .. .. .Original
.. .. .. .. ..como
.. .. .. .. o.. .explicado
.Connect
instructions
instructions accompanying the
3. rated
Introduza
Disc
B.Menu
. . ..um
Dimmer
.código
. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..acima.
. .. .. .. .. 30
30component
prompted
to on
do
so.in the
�
General
Operation
. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..and
. . 16 are press
certain
scenes
Initial
Settings
. .the
. . . disc.
. .. .. .. .. .Movies
.. .. .. .. scenes
.. .. 16-19
Indicates Headphone
hazards likely
to cause
harm
to the
unit
seguida
pressione
.
product.
Using
.. 30
Mute .the
. . .2. . Enter
. . . . . .a.Jack
.new
. . . .. .code
. .. .. .. .. .as
. .. .. .described
. .. .your
. .. .. .. monitor/televisi
30 above.
Input
a
4-digit
code
and
press
ENTER.
Enter
it
�
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
� General
Operationon
. . . the
. . . .country.
. . . . . . . . Some
. . . . . 16discs offer
itself or other
material
damage.
from
1 to
8, depending
Selecting
Input
Source
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .to
.. .. .. 30
Input.
Usingstep
thethe
Headphone
Jack
. .. Component
30
2. Para
acessar
os
recursos
de
Classificação,
Senha
e
again
and
press
ENTER
to
verify.
If
you
make
a
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
Follow
2
as
shown
left
(Rating).
WARNING:
TO PREVENT
� Language
. . . . . . FIRE
. . . .OR
. . .ELECTRIC
. . . . . . . SHOCK
. . . . . . 16
XTS
(ExcellentInput
TrueSource
Sound) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
moreCódigo
suitable
scenes
as
alternative.
Selecting
30
mistake
before
Regional,
você
Indicates the
special
operating .features
of this unit.
�
.NOT
.an
.press
. .. ..RAIN
. 16-17
. .OR
17
otas:
HAZARD,
DO
THIS
ote
1.. .Select
“Progressi
� Audio.
Display
.. .. ..pressing
..EXPOSE
.. .. ..deve
.. .. .ENTER,
..entrar
.. .. ..PRODUCT
.. .com
.. .. ..o.. código
..CLEAR.
.TO
.. .de
XTS
pro
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
Move
Select
XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
MOISTURE.
�
(Parental
.. ..criou.
.. .. ..the
..Se
.. ..v
.você
.. .. .. .. 18
segurança
then press B.
Select
a de
rating
1. .to.você
� Lock
Audio.
. 4. dígitos
. .from
. . Control)
.feature
.que
.8. using
. ../ ..V.. ainda
17 access
Select
the
first
using
aparece
Quando
a .mensagem
The parental
control
on
XTS
pro
.When
. . .character
. . . hints
.““. INPUT
. . for
. .PASSWD
.making
..v
. . /. V
. .buttons.
. task
. . .””.easier.
. appears
. . . 30
Indicates
tips
and
the
�
. . . .apto
. . .Control)
. .fazê-lo.
. . . . .. .allows
.. .. .. .. .. .. you
.. .. .. .. .to
.. Menu
..block
.. 19
Language
buttons.
não
fez,
já
está
a
�oOthers
Lock
(Parental
.
.
18
WARNING:
Do notthe
installrating
this equipment
in a confined
space preventing
Reference
na
tela
da
TV,
pressione
STOP
e
em
seguida
pressione
DIS
to scenes
below
you
input,
thereby
and
then
press
SET
UP
press
STOP
(x)
Rating
1-8:
Rating
one
�asOthers
. . . .or. similar
.de. .4.(1)
.unit.
. has
. . . ethe
. .pressione
. most
. . . . restrictions
. . ENTER.
. . . Select
. . 19 a language
for
the
Setup
menu
and
on-screen
Entre
com
um.case
código
dígitos
such
a book
Manufactured
under
license
“Dolby”,
Shift
the
cursor
using
and
Language
Code
List
. . from
.B. button
. .Dolby
.Configuração.
. . .Laboratories.
. . . select
. . . . . .the
. . . . 31
Reference
SET
UP and
para
trocar
ao
menu
TV A
and rating from
eight (8)
is the able
least restrictive.
your
children
being
to
view
material
you
Operation
setup
menu.
“Pro
Logic”,
the
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
of
Dolby
display.
Confirme o seu código, digitando-o novamente e pressio- Country
secondCode
character
List
.using
. .Unpublished
.. works.
.. .. .. .. ..Copyright
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..1992.. .. 31
Dis
Language
Code
List
. .. .. ..v.. ./. .V
. .. buttons.
31
Laboratories.
Confidential
DVD
orisVideo
Operation
. . . . . antes
. . . . .de. .pressionar
. . . 19-22
Operation
believe
unsuitable.
neUnlock
ENTER.
SeCD
você
digitou errado,
Pro
Troubleshooting
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
32-33
1997
DolbyCode
Laboratories.
Country
List . DVD-V
. All
. . rights
. . .DVD-A
. reserved.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Playing
a DVD
and
Video
CD.
. .. not
. . 19Audio
Disc
/ Subtitle
/ Menu
If or
youVideo
select
unlock,
parental
DVD
CD
Operation
. . control
. .. .. .. .. .is
.. .. ..active
.. .. .. 19-22
Código
Regional
Specifications
.to
.license
. .. .. code
. Inc.
. 34
ENTER,
pressione
CLEAR.
thin an
Troubleshooting
..confirm
.. .. .. .. from
.. .. ..your
..Digital
.. .. ..country
.. Theater
.. .. .DVD-V
..Systems,
.. .. .. .. .. 32-33
Press ENTER
Manufactured
under
General
Features
. . . .the
.CD.
. . .LOCK
. .. .. .. .. .20-22
Select
on
press
Country
Code
and the “Rating”
disc
plays
full.
Playing
a
DVD
and.in.Video
.. .. .. .. .. .. .menu
. then,
. 19
r
Entre
código
regional
a. .área
cujos
padrões
foram
US
Pat.com
No.you
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 34
selection.
Select
the
language
prefer
for
the
audio
track
3. Selecione
uma
� Moving
toclassificação
another
. 20-22
. . 20
General
Features
. . . .TITLE/GROUP
. .de
. . 1. .a.8,. .usando
. . .. .. .. as
.. .. .teclas
other
worldwide
patents issued
and pending.
“DTS”
“DTS
B.ote
CAUTION:
usados
para and
classificar
osmenu.
discos
de vídeo
DVD,and
baseado
(disc audio),
subtitles,
theregistered
disc
Digital
Surround”
are
trademarks
of Digital
Theater
�
to
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
.. .. .. .. .. 20
(/)
ay be
Enter
the
code
of
the
country/area
whose
� Moving
Moving
to
another
TITLE/GROUP
.
.
.
20
This set
DVD/CD
receiver
Systems,
Copyright
1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems,
na listatonoInc.
capítulo
dalanguage
referência.
If you
a rating
for
the
electric
�
Slow
Motion.
.employs
. .DVD/CD
. .CHAPTER/TRACK
. .a.laser
. Password
.Receiver,
. .system.
. . . . . all
. . disc
..and
.. .. Original:
.. .. 20
To
access
the
Rating,
Country
Refers
the
original
inrate
whichthe
the DVD-Video disc, b
�
Moving
to
another
20
Inc. All rights
reserved.
were
used
to
Classificação
1-8:
A
Classificação
1
possui
a
mais
alta
To
ensure
proper
use
of
this
product,
please
read
this
owner’s
scenes
with
the
same
rating
or
�
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
� Still
Slow
Motion.
. .you
. .it.for
. must
. lower
. . . . reference.
.are
. . played.
. .Playback
. . the
. . Higher
. . disc
. .the
. 20
20was recorded.
Code
features,
input
4-digit
manual
carefully
and retain
futurean
Should
restrição;
jáare
classificação
in theRegional”
reference
chapter.
rated
scenes
1. Selecione “Código
no menu
Bloqueio,
e em
�
. not
. . and
.played
. . .Frame-by-Frame
. 8. unless
.é. a. menos
. . . . .alternate
.restritiva.
. . Playback
. . . .scene
. . . .. 20
� Search.
Still Picture
20 To select
2. Select “On” using
unit
require
maintenance,
contact
an
authorized
service
locaOther:
another
press number
angle
OTES
ONlanguage,
COPYRIGHTS:
security
code
you
created.
is available
on the. disc.
The alternative must have the
�
.. .. 20
seguida
pressione.
Desbloqueio
� Repeat
Search.
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. buttons
20 then
tion
(see
service..procedure).
ce of
ENTER
to
enter
the
corresponding
4-digit
It
is
forbidden
by
law
to
copy
,
broadcast,
show
,
broadcast
Select “Country Code”
onENTER
the LOC
same
rating
or aA-B
lower
one.
If no .suitable
alternative
is. 21 you are
If
have
entered
�
.. desbloqueio,
..yet
.. .. .. .for
.. ..a.. ..security
.out
.. .. .. .. ..code
3. Press
to
About
the
symbols
� Repeat
Repeat
. not
. . adjustments,
. .. .. ..instructions
. ..carrying
. .. .de
.procedures
. 20 according
ng)
Seyou
você
selecionou
o.. controle
via
cable,to
public,
orcode
rent
copyrighted
material(classificawithout
Performing
controls,
or
number
the in
language
list in the
2. Siga
oplay
passo
2, como
mostrado
à esquerda
found,
playback
stops.
enter
pass�
Time
Search
..You
.. ..herein
.. must
.. .. .. .may
.. ..the
.. ..in.4-digit
.. ..radi21
The confirm menu
B.
press
the
�than
Repeat
A-B
. ativo
. .. .. ..result
. .hazardous
. .. .. .. .. .. reference
21
prompted
to
do
so.
permission.
other
those
specified
chapter.
If
you
enter
the
wrong
language
code,
censura
não
estará
e
o
disco
será
reproduzido
por
wordIndicates
or
change
the
rating
level
in
order
to
play
the
disc.
ção)
hazards
likely
to
cause
harm
to
the
unit
Marker
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. press
.. .. 21
This product features the copy protection function developed
ation�
�exposure.
Time Search
21 CLEAR.
completo.
itself
other
damage.
Input
aorENTER
4-digit
and
Enter
by
protection
on some
�
. Search
. exposure
.material
. .code
. .. .. .to
.. ..your
.. ..beam,
.press
.. .. .do
.. ..try
.. ..to
.. ..open
.. .. 21
to
confirm
selection,
� Zoom.
Marker
. .. laser
. ..rating
. .. .not
.ENTER.
21
3.it Macrovision.
Selecione o Copy
primeiro
icone signals
usandoare
as recorded
teclas (/).
ToPress
prevent
direct
K
discs.
When recording and playing the pictures of these discs
Special
DVD
Features
..exit
.. .. ..the
.. ..when
..menu.
.. ..verify.
..open.
.. .. .. ..DO
.. If
.. .NOT
.. .. .. 22
the
enclosure.
Visible
laser
radiation
again
and
press
ENTER
to
you
make
a
�
Zoom.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
Follow
step
2
as
shown
left (Ratin
then
press
SET
UP
to
Indicates special operating features of this unit.
otas:
N OR
on
VCR, picture
noiseewill
appear. o segundo ícone
4. aPressione
ENTER
selecione
STARE
INTO
BEAM.
� Title
Menu
. . .pressing
. . . .. .. .. .. .. ..ENTER,
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..press
.. .. .. .. .. 22
Special
DVD
Features
22
mistake
before
CLEAR.
Thisusando
productas
incorporates
copyright
protection
technology
that
teclas (/).
�
Menu
.. .. ..hints
.. .. should
.. ..for
.. .. making
..not
.. .. .be
.. o.. .reprodutor,
.. .. .to
.. .. .. .. 22
SeIndicates
você
definiu
uma
classificação
para
� Disc
Title
Menu
. .. .exposed
. the
.task
. .easier.
. water
22
tips
and
CAUTION:
The
apparatus
is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
�
the
.. .. .. liquids,
.. .. .. the
.. .. .such
22
pace
Select
asplashing)
rating
from
(dripping
with
� Changing
Disc
Menu
. disco
. Audio
.and
. . no
.com
. Language
.objects
.1
.to
. .filled
.8. ..using
. .. v
22/ V intellectual
todas
asorcenas
do
a. mesma
classificação
property
rights
owned
by Macrovision
Corporation
Select
the
first
character
5. Pressione
ENTER
para
confirmar
a seleção
do código using v
�
the
Audio
. com
.. .. .. .classificação
Manufactured
underbe
license
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
as
vases,
should
placed
onChannel
theCenas
apparatus.
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection tech� Changing
Changing
the
Audio
Language
. .. .. .“Dolby”,
. .. .. .. .. 22
22
ou
menor
serão
reproduzidas.
buttons.
regional.
“Pro Logic”,
and
the
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
of
Dolby
nology
must
be
authorized
by
Macrovision
Corporation,
and is
�
Subtitles
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
� Changing
the
Audio Channel
. . . que
. . . haja
. . . .uma
. . 22
superior
não
sãoRating
reproduzidas,
a(1)
menos
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
1992- restrictions
Rating
1-8:
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
DVD
Audio
..may
.. .. ..one
.. .. .be
.. .. .has
.. ..Copyright
.. ..the
.. ..restricted
.. .most
� Subtitles
. . . ..All
. .. ..used
. outdoor,
. .. .. .. 22
22
B button an
Shift
the
cursor
using
CAUTION:
ThisDiscs
product
not
to
1997
Dolby
Laboratories.
rights
reserved.
cena alternativa
disponível
nothe
disco, que deverá
ter a
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
and
eight
indoor
use
only.Discs
DVDrating
Audio
. .(8)
. . .is
. . . . . .least
. . . . . restrictive.
. . . . . . . . 22
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Press SETUP or PLAY to exit the Setup menu.
wner’s
d the
Introduction
Introduction
BLOQUEIO (Controle de Censura)
Before Operation (Continued)
Preperação
LOCK (Parental Control)
1
2
1
3
1
2
2
3
4
5
1
4
3
18
Manufactured
under license
Digital
Theater
mesma classificação
oufrom
menor.
Caso
não Systems,
haja cenaInc.
US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and
Unlock
other
worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS
Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
If youInc.select
unlock,
parental
control
is not
Systems,
Copyright
1996, 2000
Digital Theater
Systems,
Inc.and
All rights
thereserved.
disc plays in full.
2
3
4 second character using v / V butt
SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back
active
of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available
19
Press
ENTER
to confirm
to others. You should record
requested
information
here and your cou
retain this guide as a permanent
record of your purchase.
selection.
5
Setup menu item, see pages 19 to 22.
GENERAL OPERATION
Display Mode DVD-V DVD-A
To display and exit the Menu:
1. Press
SETUP.the
The
SetupA menu
appears.
Press SETUP
to display
menu.
second
press of
Display Mode setting worksMove
only Select
when
SETUP 2.
will(Continued)
takevyou
to initial
screen.
Use
/ Vback
to select
the desired
option or
thenVideo
press
modeOperation
is set to “4:3”.
Before
Operation
DVD
CD
Before
Operation
(Continued)
or
Video
CD
Operation
B to move to the secondDVD
level.
The
screen
shows
Antes
da
Operação
(continuação)
Operação
de
DVD
ou
Video
CD
OTHERS
To go to the
level:
thenext
current
setting for the selected item, as wellTV
asAspect
Letterbox:
a wide picture wi
DVD-V Displays
DVD-A
setting(s).
Press B onalternate
the Remote
Control.B.L.E. Playing
OTHERS
upper
and
lower
portions of the scree
(Black a
Level
aExpansion)
DVD
and
Video
CD
The
PBC,
Auto
Play
and
B.L.E.
settings
can
be
OTHERS
Playing
DVD
and
Video
CD
OUTROS
Before
Operation
(Continued)
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
Introduction
Before
Operation
(Continued)
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
4:3:
Select
when
a
standard
4:3
TV is connecte
3. Use
v / previous
V to selectlevel:
the second desired option then
changed.
OTHERS
Panscan:
displays the w
To Audio
select
the
black
level of playback
pictures.
OTHERS
CDor
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . .Automatically
. Set
. . . your
. . . . . 23
Safety
Precautions
. . . . To
. . .go
. (Continued)
. back
. . . .press
.to. .the
.B
. .to. .move
. . . . to
2 the
OUTROS
third
level.
Before
Operation
DVD
Video
CD
Operation
16:9
Wide:
Select
when
a 16:9
wide
TV is cot
Before
Operation
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
entire
screen
and
the portions
VCD2.0
VCD1.1
DVD
and
monitor’s
ability.
Playback
Setup
Playing
an
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.cuts
. . . off
. 23
of Contents
. . . . PBC
. Press
. . . . (Continued)
.b
.ligar
.on
. . the
. On. .Remote
. . . . . . Control.
. . . 3 preference
Ajuste
de
reprodução
PBC
On
PBC
. . . . . . . Table
. OTHERS
. 23 OTHERS
Playing
a
DVD
and
Video
CD
VCD1.1
VCD2.0
DVD
Playback
Setup
OTHERS
Playing
a
DVD
and
Video
CD
4. Use
v / V to select the desired setting then press
Registration
Registro
DivX
®. . . . . . Seleção
DivX(R)
Select
Pause
. items
. scale.
.TV
. . and
. . (0
. a.select
.fonte
. . .cut
.the
. off)
.entrada
. . . . .input
.de
. . vídeo,
.source
. . . .na
23
. . . Registration
. OTHERS
.DivX(R)
. . . ENTER
. .Select
. . . . to
. .confirm
. . . 4-5your
� �Turn
on
the
video
conDisc . . . Before
. .OTHERS
23 Use . . . . .PBC
•
Ligue
a
TV
e
selecione
de
On:
Expanded
grey
IRE
selection.
Some
On
GENERAL
OPERATION
�Playing
Turn on the a
and select
theVideo
video input
source
conOTHERS
DVD
and
CD
Progressive
Mode
�nected
Moving
to
Track
. . . . .DVD-V
. . .Scan
. . DVD-A
. . . . . 23
Playable DiscsAuto
. . Play
. . . . . . . . . Off. . . .require
. . . . . additional
.......4
aTV
DVD
and
Video
CD
to
theanother
DVD/CD
Receiver.
steps.Playing
. . . . . . . . .OTHERS
23
qual
oto
reprodutor
de Display
DVD
está
conectado.
the
DVD/CD
Receiver.
On
PBC
VCD2.0
VCD1.1
DVD
Playback
Setup
OTHERS
VCD1.1
VCD2.0
Off:nected
Standard
grey
scale.
(7.5
IRE
cut
off)
DVD
Playback
Setup
appears.
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 23
Precautions . . B.L.E.
. PBC
. . . .DivX(R)
. 1.
. .Registration
.Press
. . On. On. .SETUP.
. .Select
. . . .The
. . . Setup
. . . . 5menu
� �Audio
system:
Turn
on
the
audio
system
. . . . . . . . . 23
Progressive
Scan
Video
OTHERS
Display
Mode
setting works only provides
when thethe
TV
�to
system:
Turn
onsom,
the caso
audio
system
5.
exit
the
Setup
menu.
DivX(R) Registration
Select Press SETUP or PLAY
•Audio
Ligue
othe
sistema
de
necessário,
eto
��
Turn
on
the
and
the
conand
select
the
input
source
Search.
.and
.TV
. .source
. mode
. DVD
. .select
.the
.is.pictures
.set
. connected
. to
. video
. input
. with
. VCD1.1
. the
.input
.less
. selecione
. the
.source
. .con. . 23
Notes on Discs .PBC
. . . . 2.
. . .Use
...v
.On
. /. V
. .to. .select
. . . . .the
. . desired
.5
VCD2.0
Playback
Setup
� option
Turn
on
TV
select
video
source
then
press
flickering.
. . . . . . . . . 23
“4:3”.
and
select
the
input
connected
to
On
PBC
VCD1.1
VCD2.0
DVD
Playback
Setup
DivX(R)
Registration
Select
nected
toDVD/CD
the DVD/CD
Receiver.
move
The
screen
shows
DVD/CD
Receiver.
a
fonte
de
entrada
na
qual
o
aparelho
de
DVD
está
Disc
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
About Symbols .DivX(R)
. . .Registration
. . . .B. .to. .Select
. . . . to
. . the
. . .second
. . . . . 5level. �JPEG
nected
to
the
Receiver.
If
you
are
using
the
Component
Video
. . . . . . . . . 23
Turn on Receiver.
the TV and select the video input source conDVD/CD
LANGUAGE
Turn
on
thewell
TV
andTurn
select
the
source
conthe
setting
item,
as
as
� Audio
system
Letterbox:
Displays
band
�� Audio
system:
Turn
on
the
Viewing
asystem:
JPEG
disc
.on. audio
.the
.connection
. video
.audio
.system
. . .input
. . to
. .a
.TV
. . or
.picture
. monitor
. 24 with
Move
. . .current
. Move
. . . . Seleciona
.Select
. . . .Select
.for
. . the
. . 6selected
a.wide
that
is c
conectado.
. . . . . . . Front
. . 24 Panel and Rear Panel alternate
nected
to the
DVD/CD
Receiver.
Mudar setting(s).
nected
toselect
the
DVD/CD
Receiver.
and
the .input
source
connected
to
the
upper
and
lower
portions
of
the
screen.
)
to
open
the
disc
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z
and
select
the
input
source
connected
to
the
�
Slide
Show
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. tray.
. 24
a
progressive
scan
signal,
set Progres
Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LANGUAGE
..7
. . . . . . . Remote
. . 24
� Audio
system:
TurnOPEN/CLOSE
on the
audio
system
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z
)
to
open
the
disc
tray.
1.
Pressione
a
tecla
para
abrir
a
bandeja
de
PBC
VCD
�
Audio
system:
Turn
on
the
audio
system
DVD/CD
Receiver.
3. Use Move
v / V Select
to select the second desired
option
DVD/CD
Receiver.
�
Still
Picture
. . . . .connected
.On.
. . Automatically
. . . . . to
. . the
. . .displays
. . . . . 24
. . . . . . . .PBC
. 24 VCD
andEnglish
select
thethen
input. .source
Panscan:
the wide pictu
Menu Language
press B to move
to the
third level.and
select
the to
input
source
connected
to
disco
Move
Select
�
Moving
another
file
. . in
. .and
. . . tray,
. . the
. off
.with
. .the
. .the
. . 24
Set
Playback Control (PBC) toMove
On or
Off. Select Disc Audio
. . . . . . . Preparation
.Set
. 24Playback
DVD/CD
Receiver.
Original
entire
screen
cuts
portions
that do n
Load
your
chosen
disc
the
label
VCD
PBC
Turn
ON
progressive
scan:
To
Control
(PBC)
to
On
or
Off.
DVD/CD
Receiver.
) .to
open
the
disc
tray.
PBC
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z
Load
your
chosen
disc
in
the
tray,
with
the
label
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z
)
to
open
the
disc
tray.
4.
Use
v
/
V
to
select
the
desired
setting
then
press
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
Disc
Subtitle
Off
. . . . . . . Connections
. . 24 PBC
o disco
facing
up.escolhido, com o lado de reprodução
On:
PBC
to the 2. Coloque
VCD
. Control
. . with
. CDs
. . .PBC
.with
. . .are
.para
. .played
. are
.“ON”
. Move
. played
. according
. confirm
.Ligado
.Select
. according
. . . your
.ou
8-13
PBC
VCD Video
Select
Move
ENTER
to
selection.
Some
items
facing
up. Playback
On:Playback
Video
CDs
to. Disc
the
Menu
Original
Ajuste
Playback
(PBC)
–
Set
Control
(PBC)
to
On
or
Off.
Connect
component
out
of
the
DVD to
Programmed
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
Progressive
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z) to
open
the discmake
tray. sure
. . . . . . . . . 24
When
a double-sided
DVD
isScan
inserted,
PBC.
para
baixo.
TVSet
Connections
. . . . .(PBC)
. .require
. . .to
. .On
. . .or. .Off.
. . .steps.
.....8
additional
Press
(Z) is
to
open
disc
tray.
When
a OPEN/CLOSE
double-sided
DVD
inserted,
VCD
Playback
Control
your
your televi
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks.
. tray,
.monitor/television,
. . the
.tray,
. make
.down.
. .with
. .sure
.label
.the
. . set
25
–PBC.
Desligado
Playback
Control
(PBC)
to
On
or
Off.
Load
your
chosen
disc
in
the
label
. . . . . . . “OFF”
. Set
.PBC
25
the
side
you
want
to
play
is
facing
PBC
VCD
Load
your
chosen
disc
in
the
with
the
On:
Video
CDs
with
PBC
are
played
according
Off: Equipment
Video CDs with
PBC are played
the
Optional
Connections
. . . . .or
. .PLAY
.same
. . . . way
9
Scan
Video
the
side
you
want from
to Progressive
play
is to
facing
down.
3. Setup
Pressione
tecla
para
fechar
Component
Press
SETUP
the
menu.
Off:
Video
CDs
with
played
the same
way totoexit
Erasing
aaTrack
Programme
List
. .Input.
.aprovides
. bandeja.
. . . . 25the highest
facing
up. OPEN/CLOSE
On:
Video
CDsPBC
with5.are
. . . . . . . . to
.Set
25
facing
up.
On:
Video
CDs
with
PBC
are
the
PBC.
Playback
Control
(PBC)
On
asConnections
Aerial
. . . .PBC
.to
.played
.are
. or
. played
. Off.
.according
. . . .according
. . . .to. .the
10 the
pictures
with
less
flickering.
Load
your
chosen
disc
in(Z
the
tray,
with
) to
close
the
Press
Playback
Control .(PBC)
to. On
or
Off.
as
A
reprodução
começa
automaticamente.
Caso
isso
Erasing
theaOPEN/CLOSE
Complete
Programme
List
. the
. make
.tray.
. label
. . não
.sure
25 on the D
When
double-sided
DVD
is
inserted,
PBC.
Load
your
chosen
disc
in
the
tray,
with
the
label
t . . . . . . . .Set
25
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z
)
to
close
the
tray.
ON:
Vídeo
CDs
com
PBC
são
reproduzidos
de
acordo
When
a
double-sided
DVD
is
inserted,
make
sure
PBC.
1.
Select
“Progressive
Scan”
Audio
CDs.
Speaker
System
Connection
. . . .the
. .according
.same
. . . . . . to
11-12
If youon
are
using
the Component
Video jacks f
facing
up.
On:
Video
CDs
with
PBC
are
played
the
Move
Select
READING
Video
CDs
with
PBC
are
played
Audio
CDs.
LANGUAGE
Disc
Operation
. play
. the
.to.PLAY.
.is
. the
. .then
. TV
.facing
. .screen,
. .and
.down.
. B.
.playback
.and
. . .playback
. . 26
the
side
youappears
play
is
facing
up.
On:
Video
CDs
with
PBC
are
played
according
to the
ocorra,
pressione
awant
st . . . . . . Off:
. com
25
READING
appears
on
TV
the
side
want
totecla
facing
Off:
CDs
with
are
way DivX
press
oVideo
PBC.Video
connection
to adown.
TV
or
monitor
that is compatib
�
Transmitter.
. . .PBC
. . . .PBC
. . .played
. . . played
. .the
. . .same
.the
. . .same
. . . 11
Off:
CDs
with
are
way
When
a you
double-sided
DVD
isscreen,
inserted,
make
sure
PBC.
starts
automatically.
If
playback
does
not
start,
way
as
Audio
CDs.
Speaker
Setup
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27
When
a
double-sided
DVD
is
inserted,
make
sure
PBC.
starts
automatically.
If
playback
does
not
start,
. . . . . . . . . 26
Em
alguns
casos,
o
menu
do
disco
pode
aparecer:
as
Menu Language
progressive
signal,
set Progressive Sc
as
the side
you
want toa play
is
facing
down.
�DivX(R)
Changing
acom
channel
of
. da
. . .mesma
.way
. . 11
Registration
) to scan
close
the tray.
DivX
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z
press
PLAY.
Off:
Video
CDs
with
PBC são
areTransmitter
played
the.LANGUAGE
same
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z
to
close
the
Vídeo
CDs
PBC
the side
you
want to play
Additional
Information
. . ). is
. .facing
. . . . .down.
. . .tray.
. . . . DISPLAY
. . . . 28
Registration
press
PLAY.
. . . . . . . .DivX(R)
. OFF:
27
Off:
Video
CDs
with
PBCDivX
are reproduzidos
played
same
Audio
CDs.
On.
Audio
CDs.
Select
Setup
menu
andappears
on-screen
READING
appears
on
the
TV screen,
and playback
Setting
a ID
of Transmitter
. . . . the
.a. language
. Menu
. . Language
. . .way
. .for
11theEnglish
In
some
cases,
the
disc
menu
might
appear
as�You
READING
on
the
TV
screen,
and
playback
DVD-V
Last
Condition
Memory
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.Aspect
. . 28
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z
can
show
the
DivX
DRM
(Digital
Right
)
to
close
the
tray.
maneira
que
os
CDs
de
Áudio.
In
some
cases,
the
disc
menu
might
appear
Auto
Play
as
. . . . . . . .You
. 28can
display.
starts
automatically.
If) to
playback
does
not TVstart,
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
(Z
close
the
tray.
� Assembling
and DRM
Connecting
to
the Speakers
11
showCDs.
the DivX
(Digital
Right
instead.
Disc Audio
Audio
starts
automatically.
If. playback
Screen
Saver
. . . . To
.on
.Turn
. . .TV
.ON
. screen,
. does
.progressive
. . . not
. and
. . start,
. .playback
. Display
.scan:
. . Mode
. 28
Management)
Registration code
for your
unit only. Original
READING
appears
the
instead.
Audio
CDs.
um
OSD
forPLAY.
exibido
. . . . . . . Registro
.Management)
. 28 �DivX(R)
Registration
DivX
press
READING
appears
on
the
TV
screen,
and
playback
Registration
code
Speaker
Connections.
. .for
. . your
. .so
. .unit
. Disc
. only.
. Subtitle
. disc
. . . . 12 Off Se press
DivX
(R)
You can
set
up
the
DVD/CD
receiver
a. DVD
DivX(R)
Registration
DivX
Scan
On
starts PLAY.
automatically.
If. .playback
Controlling
the
TV Connect
. the
.disc
. . .component
. . .does
. .might
. .not
. .out
.start,
. of
. Progressive
. the
. . . DVD
28
. . . . . . . Speaker
. automatically
. 28
Disc Menu
Original
to the
inp
In
some
cases,
menu
appear
starts
automatically.
If
playback
does
not
start,
DVD-V
DVD-A
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
starts
playing
whenever
the
DVD
is
Off
Disc
Audio
/ (GerenSubtitle / Menu
In
some
cases,
the
disc
Your registration
code
is :DivX
XXXXXXXX
Você
pode
exibir
o código
de
Registro
DRM
If PLAY.
awith
menu
screen
Youshow
can
show
the DivX
DRM
(Digital
Right
Registration
DivX
press
Operation
Radio
. displayed
. .menu
.is. .displayed
. might
. . . . .appear
. . . . .set
. . your
. . . 29
the
DivX
DRM
. . . . . . . Before
. You
.DivX(R)
28 can
Your registration
code
is(Digital
: XXXXXXXX Right
DivX(R)
Registration
If
a
menu
screen
is
DivX
your
monitor/television,
television
or
instead.
press
PLAY.
inserted.
Operation
. Registration
. . Please
. . .use.para
. .code. atocode
. register
.sua
. .thisfor
.unidade.
. .your
. . . .unit
. . 14-19
this
player
with
instead.
Management)
only.
The
menu
screen
may
be
displayed
first
after
loading
a
ciador
de
direitos
Digitais)
In
some
cases,
the
disc
menu
might
appear
Presetting
the
radio
stations
. .might
.first
. Input.
. .after
. . o. título/capítulo
.loading
. . . . . .a29
Please use this
tocode
register
thisfor
player
with
Registration
your
unitlanguage
only.
Select
forsome
the
audio
track
thecode
DivX(R)
Video On
Demand
service. the
. . . . . . . . Management)
29
Use
a teclas
///
para
selecionar
to
Component
The menu
screen
may
displayed
can
show
the
DivX
DRM
(Digital
Right
In
cases,
thebe
disc
menu
appear
If.You
Auto
Play
mode
is
set
to
On,
this
DVD/CD
receiver you prefer
Mini
Glossary
for
Audio
Stream
&
Surround
the
DivX(R)
VideoDRM
On Demand
service.
DVD
or Video
CD
which
can
show
the
DivX
(Digital
Right
instead.
This will allow you
to rent(disc
and purchase
videos
Listening
to the
radio
. em
. .contains
.seguida
. a. .menu.
. . a. pressione
.menu.
. . . . . . a. .tecla
. . 29
audio),
subtitles,
andDVD
the que
disc
menu.
. . . . . . . . will
.You
29
or Video
CD
which
contains
Management)
Registration
code
for
your
unit
only.
instead.
você
queira
assistir,
search
for
title
that
has
the
longest
playback
time
Your
registration
code
is
:.XXXXXXXX
This
will
allow
you
tothe
rent
and
purchase
videos
Mode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
using
DivX(R)
Video
On
Demand
format.
If
a
menu
screen
is
displayed
1.
Select
“Progressive
Scan”
the DISPLAY
Your
registration
code
is
:
XXXXXXXX
Management)
Registration
code
for
your
unit
only.
If
a
menu
screen
is
displayed
thin
OtherSelect
Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .on
. 30
using the DivX(R)
Video
Ongo
Demand
format.
To learn
more
to www.divx.com/vod
Move
. . .an
. . . . . and
. 29
use automatically.
this code to register this player with
then play
back
title
DVD-V
ENTER
para
iniciar.
Prev.
Move
Sound
Mode
.Please
. .the
. .Please
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
Original:
Refers
to
the
original
language
in
which
the
The
menu
screen
may
be
displayed
first
after
loading
use
this
code
to.register
this
player
with
To
learn
more
go
to. www.divx.com/vod
B.
then
press
r
The
menu
screen
may beis
the DivX(R)code
Videois On
Demand service.
DVD-VSleep
Timerscreen
Setting
. displayed
. displayed
. . . . . . . first
. . . after
. . . . loading
. . . . . . a30 a
Your registration
: XXXXXXXX
If
a
menu
. . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display
the DivX(R) Video On Demand service.
CAUTION
Your registration
code
.code
.allow
. you
. is.to: XXXXXXXX
.rent
.disc
. .purchase
.withwas
. .videos
. .recorded.
. . . . . . . 15
or Video
CD buttons
which
contains
a the
menu.
IfDVD
menu
screen
is
displayed
Menu
Language
will
and
Please useThis
this
to register
this
player
DVD
oraVideo
CD
which
contains
a.menu.
On:
Auto Play function
is
active.
Use
the
b/B/v/V
to
select
title/chapter
you
Pressione
a
tecla
TITLE
ou
DVD
MENU
para
retornar
ao
Dimmer
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
This
will allow
youcode
to
rent
and purchase
videos
The
menu
screen
may
be
displayed
first
after
loading
a
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
Please
use
this
to
register
this
player
with
using
DivX(R)
Video
format.
b/B/v/V
buttons
to displayed
select the first
title/chapter
you
Use
Video
On
service.
ay be
DISPLAY
Initial
.the
.DivX(R)
. .DivX(R)
.OF
. theVideo
.ELECTRIC
. Demand
.go.Demand
.www.divx.com/vod
.aOn.format.
.Demand
. . .VOD
. . . .(Video-On. .the
. 16-19
RISK
SHOCK
Thethe
menu
may
be
av / V buttons
using
the
On
TheSettings
Registration
code
is
used
for
want
to
view,
TITLE
“On”
using
learnSelect
more
to
language
for
Setup language,
menu
and
on-screen
the DivX(R)ToVideo
On
Demand
service.
Other:
To select
another
press
Mute
. screen
. then
.number
.CD
. . then
.which
. . . press
.ENTER
. . . .ENTER
.2..to.Select
. .to. .start.
.after
. . .Press
.loading
. . . the
. . 30
DVDmenu
Video
contains
a.start.
menu.
de
tela.
DO
OPEN
. . . . . . . .The
. 30Registration
ToThis
learn
goyou
tonot
www.divx.com/vod
DVD-V
code
isis
used
for
willmore
allow
to
rent
purchase
electric
toor
view,
Press
TITLE
Off:
Auto
Play function
active.
�Demand)
General
Operation
.NOT
. .and
.Demand
. .VOD
.format.
.videos
. .(Video-On. .then
. . . ENTER
. .or
. .rental
. 16
DVD-V
DVD
or
Video
CDpress
which
contains
a menu
menu.
TV Aspect
service
agent.
You
can
anwant
or
DVD
MENU
to return
to the
screen.
This
you display.
to rentOn
and
purchase
videospurchase
usingwill
theallow
DivX(R)
Video
buttons
to enter
the
corresponding
4-digit
Using
the
Headphone
Jack
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
. . . . . . . .Demand)
. 30 � Language
service agent.
You
can
purchase
or
rental
an
or DVD
MENU
to returnbuttons
to the menu
screen.
using
the
On
Display Modeto confirm your selec
To
. learn
.file.
. more
.DivX(R)
. go. totoVideo
.www.divx.com/vod
.REDUCE
. .Demand
. .number
.format.
. THE
. . . RISK
.according
. . . . . . .to. 16
Press
ENTER
encrypt movie
Use
thelist
b/B/v/V
to3.. select
you
DVD-V
CAUTION:
To learn more goTO
www.divx.com/vod
the language
code
in the
Selecting
the
Input Source
. the
. . . title/chapter
.the
. .Progressive
.title/chapter
. . . Scan
. . you
. . . 30
b/B/v/V
buttons
to select
Use
the
movie
file.
. . . . . . . .encrypt
. 30 �The
DVD-A
On
DVD-V
Registration
(Video-OnThetoconfirm
menuTITLE
will appear.
Note:
Display
. . code
. . OF
. . code
.ELECTRIC
.used
. . is
. .used
. .SHOCK
.VOD
.for
. . VOD
.(Video-On. . .chapter.
. . . . 16-17
want
to view,
then
press
ENTER
start.
DVD-A
The
Registration
is
for
reference
If
you
enter
the
wrong
language
code,
DVD-V
DVD-A
angle
want
to
view,
then
press
ENTER
to
start.
Press
XTS
(Excellent
True
Sound)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .Press
.TITLE
. . .you
. . 30Off
Disc
Audio
/
Subtitle
/
Menu
. . . . . . .O
. •.código
30
b/B/v/V
buttons
to select
the
title/chapter
Use or
theDVD
de registro
é. usado
para
o. agente
do
serviço
VOD
Demand)
service
agent.
You
can
purchase
or
rental
an
DO
NOT
REMOVE
COVER
(OR
BACK)
The
Auto
Play
function
may
not
work
for
some
�
Audio.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
MENU
to
return
to
the
menu
screen.
Use
the .b/B/v/V
buttons
to. .select
an
option
you
Use
theMENU
b/B/v/V
buttons
to
select
the
title/chapter
you
Demand)
service
agent.
You
can
purchase
or
rental
an
ce of
press
CLEAR.
or
DVD
to
return
to
the
menu
screen.
XTS
pro
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
The
Registration
code
is
used
for
VOD
(Video-Onotes
want
to b/B/v/V
view,
then
press
ENTER
toan
start.
Press
TITLE
. . . . . . . About
. .The
30
buttons
to select
option
NO
USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS
(Video
em
demanda).
Você
pode
encrypt
movie
file.Control)
DVDs.
Registration
code
is used
for
�
Lock
(Parental
. the
. comprar
.VOD
. language
. . .(Video-On.INSIDE
.ou. .alugar
. . . .prefer
.um
18 forUse
Select
you
the the
audio
track
the
symbols
for
instructions
want,
then
press
ENTER
to view
the Press
option.
Use
a teclas
///
para
selecionar
ayou
opção
desewant
to
view,
then
press
ENTER
to start.
TITLE
ng)
otes
encrypt
movie
DVD-A
service
agent.
purchase
or rental
an of want,
REFER
SERVICING
TOcan
QUALIFIED
SERVICE
you
rentfile.
the
DivX You
VOD
file,
it has several
options
then
presstoENTER
the option.
DVD
MENU
return to view
the menu
screen.
. . . . . . . . .Demand)
30 �IfOthers
DVD-A
service
You
or
(disc
audio),
the
menu.
the
. . .criptografado.
.agent.
. . . .PERSONNEL.
.file,
. . .itcan
.has
. . purchase
. several
. . .subtitles,
. . .options
. . rental
. .and
. .of. an
19 discor
arquivo
de
filme
or
DVD
MENU
to
return
to
the
menu
screen.
IfDemand)
you
rent
the
DivX
VOD
jada,
em
seguida
pressione
a
tecla
ENTER
para
iniciar.
VCD2.0
encrypt
movie
file. as likely
viewing
limits
show to
below.
Reference
Indicates
hazards
cause
harm
to
the
unit
Use
the
b/B/v/V
buttons
to
select
an
option
you
encrypt
movie
file.
VCD2.0
DVD-A
viewing limits
as show below.
to select an option you
Use
theinb/B/v/V
otes
Original: Refers to the original language
which
thebuttons
DVD-A
itself
other material damage.
Language
Code
ListENTER
. . . . .to
. to
.view
. select
. . .the
. .the
. . .track
. . . .you
. .Prev.
.want
31 Move Enter
otesor
� Use
the
number
buttons
want,
then
option.
want,
then
presspress
ENTER
toto
thethe
option.
Operation
Usethe
the
number
buttons
select
track
you
want
Ifrent
youthe
rentDivX
the DivX
VOD
file,
itrecorded.
has several
options
disc
was
b/B/v/V
buttons
toview
select
an
option
you
This
lightning
flash
with
arrowhead
symbol
within
anof �Use
K. . . . . . . . If. 31
youotes
VOD
file,
it
has
several
options
of
Country
Code
List
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
to
view.
• Display the number which you can watch the file.
b/B/v/V buttons to select an option you
Use
the
VCD2.0
to view.
viewing
limits
asoperating
show
below.
DVD
or
Video
CDshow
Operation
. can
. . . .watch
.to.of.alert
.this
. .the
.unit.
. user
. 19-22
Indicates
special
features
equilateral
triangle
is.intended
otes
want,
then
press
ENTER
the
otas:
N OR
the
number
which
you
the
file.
VCD2.0
limits
as
below.
Press
RETURN
return
menu
screen.
Troubleshooting
. . . .to
.Select
. view
. . . to
.“On”
. the
. .option.
.using
. . . . the
. . .v. ./ 32-33
2.. to
V buttons.
Other:
To select
another
language,
press
number
. . . . . . . .•viewing
.IfDisplay
31
want,
then
press
ENTER
to
view
the
option.
you
rent
the
DivX
VOD
file,
it
has
several
options
of
Press
RETURN
to
return
to
the
menu
screen.
about
the
presence
Playing
DVD
and
Video
CD.
. .several
. . . . dangerous
. .options
. . . . . .of19
If you
rent athe
DivX
VOD
file,of
ituninsulated
has
�
the
number
� Use
Menu
setting
operating
procedures
for
. buttons
. .and
. . buttons
. the
. to
. .exact
. . to
. .select
. the
. . .track
.the
. . .track
. . . want
.you
. . .want
34
buttons
then
ENTER
to enter
the corresponding
4-digit
VCD2.0
�Specifications
. . . . . . . 32-33
Use
select
you
limits
as and
show
below.
Seviewing
você
alugar
um
arquivo,
possui
várias
opções
de be
Indicates
tips
the
Usethe
asnumber
teclas
numéricas
para
selecionar
faixa
de
sua
voltage
within
the
product’s
may
� •VCD2.0
Menu
setting
and
the may
exact
operating
procedures
General
Features
.?hints
.This
. rental
.ele
.for
.video
.making
.has.7 .you
. enclosure
.left..can
. .task
. .that
. easier.
. .the
20-22
viewing
limits
as
show
below.
views
A .view
3. Press
ENTER
to aconfirm
your
selection.
to
using
the
menu
differ
depending
on the for
disc.
• Display
the
number
which
watch
file. code
number
according
to
the
language
list
in view.
the
to
view.
. . . . . . . . •. limitação
34
ends
when
you
stop
playback,
playmostrado
awatch
different
of
sufficient
magnitude
constitute
a
risk
of
electric
video
has
7 views
left.to
Acan
view
pace
? This rental
Display
the
number
which
you
the
file.
de
visualização,
conforme
abaixo:
�
Use
the
number
buttons
to
select
the
track
you
want
using
the
menu
may
differ
depending
on
the
disc.
preferência
� Moving to
another
TITLE/GROUP
. . . . . . . . 20
The
confirm
menu
will
appear.
Press
RETURN
to return
tothe
the
menu
screen.
video,
turn
off your
Follow
the
instructions
on
each
menu
ends when you
stopor
playback,
play player.
a different
� Press
Use
the
number
to
select
the
track
youscreen.
want
reference
chapter. If you
enter the wrong
language
code,
RETURN
tobuttons
return
to
the
menu
screen.
shock
to persons.
Manufactured under
license
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
“Dolby”,
to
view.
video, or turn off your player.
Follow
the
instructions
on
the
each
menu
screen.
�oMoving
todo
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . 20
• Display
thethe
number
which
you
canpode
watch
the.of.file.
�
Menu
setting
and
the
exact
You
also
may
setexact
PBC
to Offoperating
under
setup.
toOs
view.
• Exibe
número
arquivo
que
você
assistir
“Pro
Logic”,
and
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
Dolby
press
CLEAR.
ajustes
do
menu
eto
osOff
procedimentos
deprocedures
operação
� •Menu
setting
and
the
operating
procedures
for for
Do you
want
to useyou
one of
your
7 views
now
• Display
the number
which
can
watch
the file.
Press
RETURN
to
return
to
the
menu
screen.
You
also
may
PBC
under
setup.
A.view
� Slow
Motion.
. This
.one.rental
.video
.7 playback,
.has
. 7now
.Aviews
.play.left.
.different
.equilateral
. . . . . . .1992. . 20
using
theset
menu
may
differ
depending
ondisc.
the disc.
Do
you want .
to?Unpublished
use
of.mark
your
views
Laboratories.
Confidential
works.
Copyright
Press
RETURN
to return
to
thediferir,
menudependendo
screen.
The
exclamation
within
triangle
views
left.
view
? This rental
No
Yes7stop
endsvideo
whenhas
you
aan
using
the
menu
may
differ
depending
on
the
para
utilização
do
menu
pode
do
�
Menu
setting
and
the
exact
operating
procedures
for
ends whenYes
you
stop
playback,
play
a different
video,
or
turn offNo
your
player.
1997 Dolby
Laboratories.
All
rights
reserved.
Follow
theand
instructions
on
the each
menu
screen.
� Still
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
Playback
. 20
is intended
to
alert
the
user about the
presence
of
� Follow
Menu
setting
the exact
operating
procedures
for
video,
turn
off your
player.
the
instructions
on the
each
menu
screen.
otes
This
rental
video
has 7 views left. A view
? or
using
the
menu
may
differ
depending
onsetup.
the
disc.
disco.
Siga
as
instruções
em
cada
OSD.
Você
também
About
the
symbols
for
instructions
important
operating
and
maintenance
(servicing)
rental
video
has
7 views
left.
A .view
You
also
may
set
PBC
to
Off
under
?. .This
�
Search.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
otes
ends
when
you
stop
playback,
play
a
different
using
the
menu
may
differ
depending
on
the
disc.
Manufactured underends
license
Digital
Systems, Inc.
Do youfrom
want to use
one of your Theater
7 views now
You
may
setControl
PBC to
setup.
�also
If Parental
is Off
set
and
the
disc screen.
is not within the
when
you
stop
playback,
a different
or turn
player.
Follow
the
instructions
on
theunder
each
menu
want
use
one
your
7play
The
rental
been
instructions
the
pode
desligar
o PBC
no
menu
ajuste.
US
Pat.�•No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
Parental
is set
and
discmenu
is
not
withincode
the must
Repeat
.Dovideo,
.you.has
. turn.toin
.offoffexpired.
.your
. Yes
.of instructions
.expired.
.5,974,380,
.views
. .now
. . . accompanying
. 5,978,762
. . . . . . . and
. . the
. 20 � IfFollow
video,
or
your
player.
No
theControl
instructions
on
thethe
each
screen.
• The
rental
has
been
Rating
settings
(not
the
4-digit
Yes
No pending. “DTS” and “DTS
hazards
likely
cause
harm
to the unit
YouIndicates
also
may
set
PBC
toauthorized),
Offtounder
setup.
product.
other
worldwide
patents
issued
and
Do you .
want
to
use
one. of.your
7 views
now
Rating
settings
(not
authorized),
the
4-digit
code
must
� Repeat A-B
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
You
also
may
set
PBC
to
Off
under
setup.
otes
be
entered
and/or
the
disc
must
be
authorized
(see
you want to use one of
your 7 views now
Digital Surround” areDo registered
trademarks
of
Digital
Theater
itself
or
other
material
damage.
This rental
is expired.
beotes
entered
and/or
the disc
must
bethe
authorized
(see
� Time
Search
.Yes
.rental
. . is2000
.FIRE
. .No
. . . . .Theater
. . . . . Systems,
.SHOCK
. . . . . 21
Systems,
Inc. Copyright
1996,
� If
Parental
Control
is
set
and
disc is not
within the
This
expired.
Yes
No. Digital
“Parental
Control”,
on
page
WARNING:
TO PREVENT
OR ELECTRIC
• Thereserved.
rental
has
been
expired.
� If Parental
Control
is set
and
the 18).
disc is not within the
Inc.
All
rights
otes
•
The
rental
has
been
expired.
“Parental
Control”,
on
page
18).
� Marker
. . . . . THIS
. . . . PRODUCT
. . . . . . . .TO
. . RAIN
. . . . OR
21
Rating
settings
(not
authorized),
theof4-digit
code must
wner’s
special
operating
features
this
unit.
�Indicates
DVDs
may
have
a region
code.
otas:
HAZARD,
DOSearch
NOT EXPOSE
otes
Rating
settings
(not
the
4-digit
code
must
If Parental
Control
isauthorized),
set
and
the
disc
is authorized
not
within
the
DVDs
may
have
a region
code.
� Zoom.
. . . been
. . . . expired.
. . .This. rental
. . is.expired.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ��
d the
entered
and/or
the
disc
must
be
(see
• MOISTURE.
The
rental has
� be
Your
receiver
will
not
play
discs
that
have
a region
� be
If Parental
Control
is set
and
the
disc
is not
within
the
entered
and/or
the
disc
must
be
authorized
(see
Display
thebeen
authorization
error.
The• rental
has
expired.
• O• aluguel
expirou.
•
Se
o
controle
de
censura
estiver
definido
e
o
disco
não for
This rental is expired.
Rating
settings
(not
authorized),
the
4-digit
code
must
�
Your
receiver
will
not
play
discs
that
have
a
region
ocaIndicates
tips
and
hints
forreceiver.
making
the task
easier.
SpecialON
DVD
Features .error.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
OTES
COPYRIGHTS:
“Parental
Control”,
on
page
18).
code
different
from
your
The
region
code
• Display
the
authorization
Rating
settings
(not
authorized),
the
4-digit
code
must
“Parental
Control”,
on
page
18). The
be
entered
and/or
the
disc
must
be
authorized
(see
WARNING:
Do
not
install
this
equipment
in
a
confined
space
code
different
from
your
receiver.
region
code
for
dentro
da
escolhida,
você deverá
It is forbidden
law to. .copy
broadcast,
�entered
� Titleby
Menu
. This
. .,rental
. .is .expired.
. . . . .show
. . . ,.broadcast
. . . . . . . . . 22
DVDs
may
have
adisc
region
code.
this
player
is
4classificação
(four).
beestiver
and/or
the
must
be authorized
(see
�Manufactured
DVDs
may
alicense
region
code.
rental is expired.
This
player
asplay
a book
case or
orThis
similar
under
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
“Parental
Control”,
on not
page
18).
this
ishave
4a (four).
via such
cable,
in
public,
rent
ures
�player
Your
receiver
will
play
discs
that have a“Dolby”,
region
�• Disc
Menu
. authorization
.video
. .player
. .isvideo
.notcopyrighted
.authorized
.unit.
. is.noterror.
.to authorized
. . .material
.to. . . . .without
. . . . . 22
entrar
com
senha.
“Parental
Control”,
onplay
page
18).
play
this video.
Display
theThis
��“Pro
Your
receiver
will
not
discs
that
a region
Logic”,
and
the double-D
symbol
are have
trademarks
of Dolby
permission.
DVDs
may
have
a
region
code.
s radi• Display
the
authorization
error.
play this video.Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22
code
from
your
receiver.
The
region 1992code for
� Changing the Audio
�Laboratories.
DVDs
maydifferent
have
ater
region
code.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
Copyright
different
from
your
receiver.
The
region
code for
Os this
DVDs
devem
um
código
regional.
This product features the copy protection function developed
�•code
Your
receiver
will
not
play
discs
that
have
a
region
player
is 4
(four).
• Display
theCopy
authorization
error. are. recorded
� Changing
the
Audio
Channel
. . . . . . on
. . some
. . . 22
Dolby
Laboratories.
All rights
reserved.
�1997
Yourplayer
receiver
will
not
play
discs
that have a region
this
is
4
(four).
by
Macrovision.
protection
This videosignals
player is not authorized to
•
Display
the
authorization
error.
code
different
from
your
receiver.
The
region
code
for
pen
erro de autorização
22 • Exibe�oSubtitles
player
to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
• code
Estedifferent
reprodutor
não
reproduz
discos
de
DVD
que não
. This
.and
.video
. .playing
. . is.not
. authorized
.thisthe
. video.
. .pictures
play
from
your
receiver.
The
region
code
for
discs. When recording
of these discs
Manufactured
under
license
from
Digital
Theater
Systems,
Inc.
play this video.
T
this player is
4 (four).
DVD
Audio
Discs
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
US
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
this
player
is
4
(four).
Thiswill
video player
is not authorized to
on a VCR, picture noise
appear.
tenha o mesmo código regional. O código regional para
er
such
cted to
1 1
21 12
1
21 2
322 3
33
3
3
This video player is not authorized to
play this video.
ThisCAUTION:
product incorporates copyright
protection technology that
play this video.
is protected
by method
claims
of certain
U.S.
patents and other
This DVD/CD
receiver
employs
a laser
system.
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation
To
ensure
proper
use
of
this
product,
please
read thistechowner’s
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
manual
and retain
it for future reference.
Should
nology
mustcarefully
be authorized
by Macrovision
Corporation,
and isthe
20
unit require
maintenance,
contactviewing
an authorized
service
locaintended
for home
and other limited
uses only
unless
tion (see
service procedure).
otherwise
authorized
by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
Performing
controls, adjustments,
or carrying out procedures
engineering
or disassembly
is prohibited.
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Introduction
Operation
Operation
Introduction
Reproduzindo um DVD ou VCD
other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS 19
esteSurround”
aparelhoare
é “4”
(quatro).trademarks of Digital Theater
19
Digital
registered
Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems,
Inc. All rights reserved.
19
19
OTES ON COPYRIGHTS:
19
It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast
via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without
19
ay be
ric
electric
NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS
INSIDE
S
Progressive
Scan
Video provides the highest quality
PLAY to exit the Setup
menu.
REFER
SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE
Playing
a DVD
General Features
pictures
with less flickering.
When a disc has more than one title/group, you can
PERSONNEL.
If you are using the Component Video jacks
for to another title/group as follows:
move
e
Note: DVD or Video CD Operation
angle
connection to a TV or monitor that is compatible
with
� Press
DISP.,
then press the appropriate numbered
Playing
aflash
DVD
General
Features
f
PLAYBACK
SETUP
Unless
stated otherwise, all operations described
This lightning
with
arrowhead
symbol
within
an
ce
of
aou
progressive
scan signal, set Progressive Scan
to• (0-9)
GUAGE About
button
to select
a title
number.
the
symbols
for
instructions
Operação
de
DVD
VCD
(continuação)
equilateral
triangle
is
intended
to
alert
the
user
Playing
Playing
a
DVD
a
DVD
General
General
Features
Features
About the
symbols
for
instructions
use
the
remote
control.
Some
features may also be
ng)
1. Turn On.
on the TV and select the video input source
English
General
Features
Language
Note:
about
the presence
of uninsulated dangerous
the
available
on
the
Setup
menu.
Playing
Playing
a
DVD
Playing
a
DVD
a
DVD
General
General
Features
General
Features
Features
Indicates
hazards
likely
to cause
harm
to the
unit
connected
to
the
DVD/CD
receiver.
Original
Audio
Indicates
hazards
likely
to
cause
harm
to
the
unit
voltage within the
product’s
enclosure
that mayscan:
be
PLAYBACK
SETUP
• Moving
Unless
stated
otherwise,
all
operations
described
To
Turn ON
progressive
toNote:
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
Imagem
Congelada
e Reprodução
Quadro-a-QuaIntroduction
Note:
itself
or other
material
damage.
Subtitle
Off
sufficient
magnitude
to audio
constitute
a riskSETUP
electric
itself
or of
other
material
damage.
2. Turn
on the
system
(ifofapplicable)
and select
TO
ANOTHER
use
the MOVING
remote
control.
Some
features
also
be operation
VCD1.1
VCD2.0
DivX
DVD-A• Unless
DVD-V
PLAYBACK
• stated
Unless
stated
all
descri
CD
and
Disc
. . .otherwise,
. . Features
. . . otherwise,
.TITLE/GROUP
.may
.all
. .operations
. . 23
Safety
Precautions
.Playing
.DVD
.TV
. Connect
. and
. .Playing
. PLAYBACK
. . .a
. . DVD
. SETUP
. . video
.a. .DVD
.out
.Note:
. of
. . the
.source
2Note:
1. shock
Turn
onpersons.
the
select
the
input
Introduction
Menu
Original
ote
dro
component
DVDAudio
toGeneral
theNote:
input
of MP3/WMA
General
toFeatures
Playing
Playing
a
a
DVD
General
Features
General
Features
General
Features
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
(Continued)
K
the
input
source
connected
to
the
DVD/CD
on
the
Setup
menu.
use
the
use
remote
the
control.
remote
control.
Some
Some
feature
may a
DVD-A
DVD-V
Indicates
special
operating
of
unit.
connected
receiver.
Playing
an
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.described
.operations
.. .. .features
23
Table
of
Contents
. operating
.. .to
.. .the
..features
.. DVD/CD
.. .features
..on
.. ..Turn
.. ..this
..of
.on
..this
.and
.. ..unit.
.TV
.•. ..set
.. .. your
.the
3select
PLAYBACK
SETUP
PLAYBACK
SETUP
SETUP
R PLAYBACK
Unless
• video
stated
Unless
otherwise,
stated
• available
Unless
otherwise,
all
stated
operations
all
otherwise,
operations
described
all
described
operations
Unless
stated
otherwise,
all
describe
otas:
1.
Turn
1.
the
TV
the
select
and
the
input
video
source
input
source
your
monitor/television,
television
or
monitor
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
Safety
Precautions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
Indicates
special
1.
Pressione
a
tecla
SLOW/SCAN
no
controle
remoto
N OR
When
a
title
on
a
disc
has
more
than
one
chapter
or
a
receiver.
available
the
Setup
the
menu.
Setup
use
remote
the
control.
remote
use
the
control.
Some
may
Some
may
also
be
may
be also be
� Pause
.more
.remote
. Note:
.features
.Some
.CD
. control.
.remote
.and
.features
. .available
. on
.also
.TITLE/GROUP
. be
.features
.on
.can
.Disc
. .move
.features
.. .. .. to
..also
..menu.
23
Before
Use
.Turn
.TV
.exclamation
.on
.on
. the
. .. audio
.TV
.and
.source
.input
.the
. .to
. .. .the
.input
the
control.
Some
may
to
Component
Input.
The
equilateral
triangle
to..the
DVD/CD
receiver.
receiver.
Playing
an
Audio
MP3/WMA
23
Table
of
..the
.select
.video
..mark
..connected
.the
..system
..within
..select
.. diferente,
.connected
..an
.(if
.applicable)
.. ..video
.DVD/CD
..use
..and
.4-5
. the
3select
2.Contents
Turn
MOVING
TO
Note:
1. Turn1.•on
Turn
TV
on
and
1.
the
select
and
the
input
video
source
source
Note:
Note:
disc
has
than
one
you
another
durante
aNote:
reprodução.
Avance
a .imagem
quadro-a-quaWhen
aANOTHER
disc
hastrack,
more
than
one
title/group,
you can
Athe
menos
que
indicado
de
as
Indicates
tips
and
hints
for
making
the
task
Still
Picture
and
Frame-by-frame
3.
OPEN/CLOSE
to.todas
open
discavailable
tray
and
General
Features
on the
Setup
on
available
the
menu.
Setup
menu.
the
Setup
menu.
intended
to
user
about
presence
�
Moving
to. on
another
Track
.. otherwise,
..stated
.ANOTHER
.all
.playback
..operations
..otherwise,
..menu.
.. all
.. .. .operations
.. TITLE/GROU
..described
..all
23
Playable
Discs
.Press
.to.. .maneira
.the
.the
.PLAYBACK
.all
.on
.operations
.Turn
. ..SETUP
.audio
.on
.the
.easier.
.system
.audio
. .. available
.the
. 4-5
.of4
Indicates
tips
hints
for
making
the
task
easier.
available
on
the
Setup
the
connected
to
the
DVD/CD
�
Pause
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
Before
Useis
.connected
.PLAYBACK
.input
.and
..DVD/CD
..otherwise,
.source
.. .alert
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
• toUnless
stated
described
connected
connected
the
DVD/CD
to
the
receiver.
receiver.
DVD/CD
receiver.
PLAYBACK
PLAYBACK
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
•
Unless
•
stated
Unless
•
otherwise,
stated
Unless
•
otherwise,
stated
Unless
all
operations
described
operations
describe
chapter/track
as
follows:
2.
Turn
2.
the
the
(if
system
applicable)
(if
applicable)
and
select
and
select
MOVING
MOVING
TO
TO
ANOTHER
move
another
title/group.
Press DISPLAY TITLE/G
while
DVD-A
DVD-V
1.o and
Select
“Progressive
Scan”
on the
DISPLAY
menu
dro�pressionando
atotecla
SLOW/SCAN
repetidamente.
VCD2.0
load
your
chosen
disc
in
the
tray,
with
the
VCD1.1
DVD-V
DVD-A
DivX
operações
descritas
usam
controle
remoto.
Alguns
About
the
symbols
for
instructions
operating
maintenance
(servicing)
pace
Move
Selectimportant
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
Precautions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5
General
Features
receiver.
�
Moving
to
another
Track
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
Playable
Discs
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4
use
the
remote
control.
Some
features
may
also
be
use
the
use
remote
the
use
control.
remote
the
use
control.
remote
Some
the
features
control.
remote
Some
features
may
control.
Some
also
features
may
Some
be
also
features
may
be(0-9
als
the
input
the
source
input
connected
source
connected
to
the
DVD/CD
to
the
DVD/CD
�
Press
.
or
>
briefly
during
playback
to
select
Manufactured
under
license
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
“Dolby”,
playback
is
stopped
then
the
appropriate
number
Turn
2.
on Turn
the
audio
on
2.
the
system
Turn
audio
on
(if
system
the
applicable)
audio
(if
applicable)
system
and
select
(if
applicable)
and
select
and
select
ut2.source
MOVING
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
TITLE/GROUP
TO
ANOTHER
TITLE/GROUP
TITLE/GROUP
then
press
B.
1.
Turn
1.
on
Turn
the
1.
TV
on
Turn
and
the
1.
TV
select
on
Turn
and
the
the
TV
select
on
video
and
the
the
TV
select
input
video
and
source
the
select
input
video
source
the
input
video
source
input
source
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-V
DVD-V
playback
side
down.
instructions
in
the
instructions
accompanying
the
Manufactured
under
license
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
“Dolby”,
recursos
podem
também
�
.chapter/track
.the
. .available
.more
.likely
. the
. . menu.
. Setup
..on
..to
..one
.. ..another
..Setup
.on
.. .pressione
..to..menu.
.the
.. .TITLE/GROUP
.. ..a.menu.
.can
Notes
Discs
..symbol
.. .. ..estar
..receiver.
..menu.
.. ..disponíveis
.trademarks
.to
.. .. .. .. .the
.no
..Dolby
.menu
.. .. ..tray
.. .. ..and
55
2. Press
Para
sair
modo
imagem
congelada,
tecla
PAUSE/STEP
during
playback.
available
ondouble-D
the
Setup
When
ado
disc
has
than
title/group,
you
� Search.
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
. another
.the
.to
.the
.unit
. 23
23 of
Precautions
.connected
. ..to
.are
. .DVD/CD
.receiver.
.the
.of
“Pro
Logic”,
and
the
double-D
are
of
ote
available
available
on
Setup
on
available
the
menu.
Setup
the
next
or
to
return
beginning
Moving
3.on
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
open
disc
Indicates
hazards
to
cause
harm
the
input
the
source
input
connected
source
the
connected
to
source
the
DVD/CD
to
connected
the
DVD/CD
to. DVD/CD
DVD/CD
or
use
b
/
B
to
move
to
title/group.
“Pro
Logic”,
and
the. input
symbol
trademarks
Dolby
product.
connected
the
connected
DVD/CD
to
the
connected
to
receiver.
the
to
receiver.
the
DVD/CD
receiver.
receiver.
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A title/group.
DVD-V
DVD-V
4.
OPEN/CLOSE
tray.
Playback
Setup.
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
1992JPEG
Disc
Operation
.. adamage.
.. When
.now
.. .. ..Press
..a.. into
.disc
.. .DISPLAY
.PAUSE
.. .than
.. .. one
..while
. .. .title/group,
About
Symbols
.. .Press
.. ..all
.. .. operations
.. ..disc
.. .. ..works.
.. .Copyright
.. described
.. Copyright
..tray,
.. .to
.close
.DVD-V
..the
.. .. 55
Note:
The
Receiver
go
move
another
Unless
stated
otherwise,
use
�DVD/CD
Search.
. .material
.chapter/track.
. . play
. ..will
.disc
. more
.inputting
.has
. ..more
. 24
23onewhile
Notes
on
Discs
.chosen
.the
. .DISPLAY
. with
. .. ..to
.the
the
PLAY.
When
has
title/gro
you
load
your
in
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
1992itself
ortocurrent
other
You
can
any
title
by
its. than
number
receiver.
receiver.
3.Turn
Press
3.Turn
OPEN/CLOSE
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
open
to
the
open
the
tray
disc
and
tray
and
DVD-A
select
orand
thereceiver.
Setup
menu
on-screen
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
TITLE/GROUP
19971997
Dolby
All
reserved.
2.and
Turn
2.on
Turn
the
2.
audio
on
the
system
audio
on
the
(if
system
applicable)
system
audio
applicable)
system
select
and
(ifdisc
applicable)
select
and
select
and
select
MOVING
MOVING
TO
MOVING
ANOTHER
TO
TO
ANOTHER
TITLE/G
starts
automatically.
playback
does
not
start,
• Laboratories.
Unless
stated
otherwise,
Viewing
a
JPEG
disc
..MOVING
.ANOTHER
..another
..the
.. to
.. TITLE/GROUP
.appropriate
.. .another
..TO
..back
..TITLE/GROUP
..ANOTHER
.. ..title/group.
..TITLE/GROUP
.. .previous
mode.
Front
Panel
and
Rear
.all
.your
..load
.. chosen
.audio
..also
.. .the
..TVdescribed
.SHOCK
.. .When
..(if
..disc
..applicable)
65tray,
playback
is
stopped
(0-9)
the
remote
control.
Some
may
be
Dolby
Laboratories.
reserved.
JPEG
Disc
Operation
.then
.title/group,
.to
.title/group.
. ..the
. .. 24
24
About
Symbols
.rights
.All
.Panel
.rights
.features
.load
. .2.
.OR
. ..operations
.on
.If..(if
.Aspect
. .in
.and
�
Press
.
twice
briefly
step
to.number
move
to
move
Press
DISPLAY
Press DISP
wh
playback
side
down.
WARNING:
TO
PREVENT
FIRE
ELECTRIC
playback
is
stopped.
R
a
When
disc
has
a
disc
more
When
has
than
more
a
disc
one
than
has
title/group,
one
more
than
you
one
can
you
title/group,
can
you
can
your
chosen
disc
the
in
the
with
tray,
the
with
the
3. Press
3.
OPEN/CLOSE
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
3.
Press
to
open
OPEN/CLOSE
to
the
open
disc
the
tray
to
disc
and
open
tray
the
and
disc
tray
and
CD
the
input
the
source
input
the
connected
source
input
the
connected
source
input
toSystems,
the
connected
source
DVD/CD
to
the
connected
DVD/CD
to
the DVD/CD
to theDVD-V
DVD/CD
press
PLAY.
use
the
remote
control.
Some
features
may
also
be
DVD-V
DVD-A
Manufactured
under
license
from
Digital
Theater
Inc.
�
Slide
Show
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
available
on
the
Setup
menu.
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
Remote
Control
Overview
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
Indicates
special
operating
features
of
this
unit.
or
use
b
/
B
to
move
to
another
title/group.
chapter/track.
Viewing
a
JPEG
disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
otas:
HAZARD,
DO
NOT
EXPOSE
THIS
Mode
Front
Panel
and
Rear
Panel
. the
. to
.PRODUCT
.playback
.side
.the
. the
. down.
.tray,
. TO
.Display
. with
.RAIN
. down.
.Playback
.the
.OR
.to6move
playback
iswhile
stopped
is
stopped
then
then
appropriate
the appropriat
numbe
ut source
Manufactured
under
from
Digital
Theater
Systems,
Inc.
move
another
toYou
another
title/group.
move
title/group.
to another
Press
DISPLAY
Press
title/group.
DISPLAY
Press
while
DISPLAY
while
When
aplayback
disc
has
more
than
one
title/group,
you
playback
side
4.receiver.
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
close
the
tray.
can
advance
the
picture
frame-by-frame
bythe
pressDV
load
your
load
chosen
your
chosen
disc
load
inlicense
your
the
disc
tray,
chosen
inreceiver.
the
with
tray,
disc
with
in
US Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
Mudando
de
Título
(TITLE)
receiver.
receiver.
available
on
the
Setup
menu.
�
Still
Picture
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
Progressive
Scan
On
In
some
cases,
the
disc
menu
might
appear
You
can
play
any
title
by
inputting
its
number
while
US
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
MOISTURE.
�
To
go
directly
to
any
chapter
during
DVD
playback,
�
Slidethe
Show
. . use
.appropriate
. .then
. or
.on
.the
.to
.b
.remote
./title/group
.B. .toto
. control.
.move
. . number
.as
. to
. follows:
. another
. 24
or
b
/.use
B
move
another
title/group.
title/gro
Remote
Control
Overview
. . .4.
.playback
.Press
. . . .and
. .does
.“DTS
. you
. playback
.to
. .can
.start,
. 7playback
isclose
stopped
is
playback
stopped
then
then
is
appropriate
stopped
the
number
appropriate
number
(0-9)
(0-9)
(0-9)
move
to
another
otherother
worldwide
patents
issued
and
pending.
“DTS”
ing
PAUSE/STEP
repeatedly
the
starts
automatically.
If. OPEN/CLOSE
not
playback
playback
side
down.
playback
down.
side
down.
When
aside
disc
has
more
than
one
title/group,
4.
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
close
to
the
tray.
the
Playback
tray.
Playback
DVD-V
DVD-A
•
Quando
usar
um
disco
de
DVD
de
Áudio
que
inclua
When
a
When
disc
has
a
When
disc
more
has
a
than
When
disc
more
one
has
a
than
disc
title/group,
more
one
has
than
title/group,
more
you
one
than
can
title/group,
you
one
can
title/grou
you
c
worldwide
patents
issued
and
pending.
“DTS”
and
“DTS
Offand
ay/ and
Indicates
tips
and
hints
for
making
the
task
easier.
le
Menu
3.
Press
3.
OPEN/CLOSE
Press
3.
OPEN/CLOSE
Press
3.
to
OPEN/CLOSE
Press
open
to
OPEN/CLOSE
the
open
disc
to
the
tray
open
disc
and
to
the
tray
open
disc
the
tray
disc
and
tray
and
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
(Con
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
CHAPTER/TRACK
�
Moving
to
another
file
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
instead:
playback
is
stopped.
Digital
Surround”
are
registered
trademarks
of
Digital
Theater
press
Then,
to
�
Still
Picture
.�move
. .Press
.can
. press
.title/group.
.play
.another
. can
.3any
./4
. then
.play
.title/group.
. select
. any
.by. .inputting
.the
.the
. by
. appropriate
. .inputting
24
DVD-V
You
You
title
title
its number
itsnum
nu
wh
Preparation
DISP.,
press
Moving
another
TITLE/GROUP
or
use
orplayback
orstart,
use
b
/ use
B
tobimagem,
move
/B
to
to
move
another
bDISP.
/ to
Bmove
another
to
title/group.
to
and
select
press
PLAY.
Digital
Surround”
are
registered
trademarks
of
Digital
Theater
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
TITLE/GROUP
move
toto
another
title/group.
Press
DISPLAY
starts
automatically.
starts
automatically.
Ifwhile
playback
Ifin
does
not
does
not
start,
WARNING:
Do
not
install
this
equipment
in
aPlayback
confined
space
move
tothe
move
another
to
another
title/group.
to.move
another
title/group.
Press
to
Press
title/group.
DISPLAY
Press
while DISPLA
while
he
4. Press
4.
OPEN/CLOSE
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
4.
Press
to
close
OPEN/CLOSE
to
the
close
tray.
the
Playback
to
tray.
close
the
tray.
Playback
essa
operação
pode
ser
permitida
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
1996,
2000
Digital
Theater
Systems,
load
your
load
chosen
your
load
chosen
disc
your
in
load
the
chosen
disc
your
tray,
in
the
chosen
disc
with
tray,
in
the
the
disc
with
tray,
the
the
with
tray,
the
with
�
To
rotate
picture.
.Then,
.its
.is(0-9)
.inputting
.. enter
.. another
.title/group.
..DISPLAY
..select
.the
.. .. chapter/track
.. .a.em
..Press
.while
.alguns
..number.
.while
.DISPLAY
24
chapter/track
icon.
playback
playback
stopped.
is
stopped.
�
Moving
to
another
file
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
1996,
2000
Digital
Theater
Systems,
DVD-A
DVD-V
you prefer
for
the
audio
track
button
to
title
You
can
You
play
can
any
play
title
You
any
by
can
inputting
title
play
by
any
inputting
its
title
number
by
number
while
while
its
number
CD
Quando
um
disco
possui
mais
de
um
título,
você
pode
DVD-V
Connections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-13
Preparation
Inc.
All
rights
reserved.
playback
is
stopped
then
thenot
appropriate
number
such
asautomatically.
aplayback
book
case
or
unit.
press
PLAY.
press
PLAY.
Manufactured
under
license
from
“Dolby”,
DVD-A
Instarts
some
cases,
the
disc
menu
might
appear
playback
playback
is
stopped
playback
is the
stopped
then
the
stopped
then
appropriate
is
the
then
appropriate
the
number
number
(0-9)
appropriate
number
(0-9)
DVD-V
DVD-A
starts automatically.
starts
If
playback
automatically.
Ifsimilar
playback
does
If
does
start,
playback
not
start,
does
not(0-9)
start, Programmed
playback
side
down.
playback
side
down.
playback
side
down.
side
down.
rights
reserved.
s
segmentos
de
imagem.
Playback
..playback
..is
.. .Dolby
.. ..Laboratories.
..buttons
.stopped
..then
..appropriate
. .. ..the
.. 25
number
using
numbered
VCD2.0
DVD-V
DVD-A
�
To
rotate
picture.
. .. .. VCD1.1
. .. .. .. .. ..(0-9).
24
wner’s
s,
and theInc.
discAll
menu.
General
Features
isSearch
stopped.
isMOVING
playback
stopped.
is
stopped.
“ProorLogic”,
and
the
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
of. Dolby
TV
Connections
.title/group.
.some
.menu
. . disc
8playback
para
outro.
or
use
binstead:
/ .B. .to. PLAY.
move
TO
ANOTHER
CHAPTER/TRACK
Connections
. ..Use
.. .. ..to
..In
..another
..some
.. ..B.. ..v
.cases,
.V
.. buttons
.. .. ..the
.. .. ..disc
..playback
..select
.the
8-13
use
or
or
use
or
bappear
/ use
BWhen
to
b
move
/a
Btitle
toto
b
move
another
/ use
Ba to
to
b
another
/ .has
B
to
another
another
title/group.
title/grou
pressmudar
PLAY.
press
PLAY.
press
on
disc
chapter
or a
In
cases,
might
menu
appear
might
the
b
to
the
title/chapter
Playback
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks.
..move
..title/group.
.. .to
..more
.move
.title/group.
.. ..than
..to
.. ..1992..one
.. 25
4.
Press
4.
OPEN/CLOSE
Press
4.
OPEN/CLOSE
Press
4.
to
OPEN/CLOSE
Press
close
to
OPEN/CLOSE
the
close
tray.
to
the
Playback
close
tray.
to
the
Playback
close
tray.
the
Playback
tray.
Playback
d the
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
Copyright
When
a
disc
has
more
than
one
title/group,
you
can
When
a
disc
has
more
than
one
title/group,
you
can
You
can
play any
its
Optional
Connections
.reprodução
..number
.. .. .press
..while
..ENTER
.. .. .. 98
aystart,
and •OTES
Moving
to
another
CHAPTER/TRA
-he
You
can
You
play
can
any
You
play
title
can
any
by
You
play
inputting
title
can
any
byone
play
inputting
title
itsList
any
number
by .inputting
title
its
by
while
inputting
number
while
whil
M
m
during
playback.
Press
Pressione
a Equipment
tecla
DISPLAY,
enquanto
Prev. to Move
Enter
TV
Connections
.title
. automatically.
.might
.by
.instead:
.inputting
.Ifappear
.to
.disc
.view,
.instead:
. amenu
.Ifappear
.then
. .If
. .not
.playback
disc
has
more
than
track,
toits num
language
in
which
thedisc
MOVING
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
TO
ANOTHER
CHAPT
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
you
want
start.
DVD-A
DVD-V
ot
oca-original
In some
Incases,
some
the
cases,
In
disc
some
the
menu
cases,
menu
the
might
might
appear
Erasing
aor
Track
from
Programme
.you
.. ..number
..can
.. CHAPTER/TR
.. its
..move
25
1997
Dolby
Laboratories.
All
rights
reserved.
DVD-V
starts
automatically.
starts
starts
automatically.
playback
starts
automatically.
playback
does
does
start,
If
not
playback
does
start,
not
does
start,
not
start,
OTES
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
ote
move
to
another
title/group.
Press
DISPLAY
while
move
to
another
title/group
as
follows:
playback
is
he
Aerial
. .Connections
.pressione
. TITLE
. . .show
. . or
.o, .broadcast
. .. .. .. MENU
.. ..correspon.. .. MOVING
.. ..to.. .return
The
DVD/CD
will
now
go
into is
SEARCH
mode.
another
chapter/track
as
follows:
VCD1.1 DivX
VCD2.0
playback
playback
isReceiver
stopped.
playback
is DVD-V
stopped.
playback
is DVD-V
stopped.
stopped.
DVD-A
DVD-V
, broadcast,
It is forbidden
byConnections
lawEquipment
to stopped.
copy
Optional
. 10
. 9MOVING
ote
Press
DVD
toTO
the
menu
parada,
em
seguida
número
ANOTHER
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
TO
ANOTHER
CHAPTER/TRACK
CHAPTER/TRACK
instead:
Search
(Busca
)CHAPTER/TRACK
,PLAY.
broadcast
,then
broadcast,
show
Itestiver
isinstead:
forbidden
byinstead:
to
copy
DVD-A the
DVD-A
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
List
.. .. buttons
.. ..Inc.
.. 25
press
PLAY.
press
PLAY.
press
PLAY.
press
Erasing
Track
from
Programme
List
. .. ..chapter
25
DVD-V
For
two-digit
numbers,
press
numbered
Manufactured
license
from
Digital
Systems,
playback
islaw
stopped
the
appropriate
number
(0-9)
� Press
then
press
the
appropriate
When
aaunder
title
on
a disc
has
moreTheater
than
one
or a use
via cable,
play inDISP.,
public,
or rent
Speaker
System
Connection
. .. .DVD-V
.material
. .. .select
.without
. ..the
Use
the
b
B
title/chapter
Aerial
Connections
.copyrighted
.v
. 2.
.V. Select
.buttons
. .. .material
.to
..numbered
.. .without
.. .. .11-12
. ./ 10
Unless
stated
otherwise,
all
operations
described
screen.
via
cable,
play
in
public,
or
rent
copyrighted
ures
dente
ao
título
(0
a
9).
US
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
DivX
Disc
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. ..during
.and
26
•
Press
SKIP
.
or
>
briefly
playback
to
M
m
“On”
using
the
v
V
buttons.
repeatedly
to
select
the
or
Press
pear
1.
Pressione
e
segure
a
tecla
ou
durante
a.. ..than
her
language,
press
number
When
a
title
on
a
disc
has
more
one chap
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
List
.
.
.has
25
(0-9)
in
rapid
succession.
In
some
In
cases,
some
In
the
cases,
some
disc
In
the
cases,
menu
some
disc
might
the
cases,
menu
disc
appear
might
the
menu
disc
appear
might
menu
appear
might
appear
or
use
b
/
B
to
move
to
another
title/group.
button
(0-9)
to
select
a
title
number.
permission.
disc
has
more
than
one
track,
you
can
move
to
DVD-Vpermission.
DVD-V
DVD-V
diyou
want. Connection
ENTER
� Transmitter.
.to. view,
. . .Use
. .then
. the
. .. .press
.Use
. ..B
. the
.v
. ..V
. .buttons
.B.. .v
.to
. 11-12
.start.
. buttons
11selectother
When
a
When
title
on
a
a
title
disc
on
has
a
disc
more
than
more
than
chapt
on
Playback
b
b
V
to
to
the
select
title/chapter
the
title/chapter
the
remote
control.
Some
features
may
also
beone
worldwide
patents
issued
and
pending.
“DTS”
and
“DTS
Speaker
System
.
.
.
.
.
.
storadinext
to
tomove
the
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
CHAPTER/TRACK
CAUTION:
Speaker
Setup
. .select
.mX2,
.disc
. TO
.. .the
..MOVING
.ANOTHER
.. more
.follows:
.. ..chapter/track
.. ANOTHER
.mX8,
.. ..TO
.. one
..CHAPTER/TRACK
..ANOTHER
.. .track,
..or
.. ..CHAPTER/TRA
..you
..return
.. 27
required
speed:
mX4,
mX16,
enter
theproduct
corresponding
4-digit
has
than
can
tom
DivX
Disc
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
26
This
features
the
copy
protection
function
developed
MOVING
MOVING
TO
MOVING
ANOTHER
TO
CHAPTER/TRACK
CHAPTE
DVD-A
You
can
play
any
title
by
inputting
its
number
while
instead:
instead:
instead:
instead:
reprodução.
another
chapter/track
as
Digital
Surround”
are
registered
trademarks
of
Digital
Theater
Press
TITLE
or
DVD
MENU
to
return
to
the
menu
disc
has
disc
more
has
than
more
one
than
track,
one
you
track,
can
you
move
can
to
�
Changing
a
channel
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
This
product
features
the
copy
protection
function
developed
you
want
you
to
want
view,
to
then
view,
press
then
ENTER
press
ENTER
to
start.
to
start.
ot start,
available
on
the
Setup
menu.
3.
Press
ENTER
to
confirm
your
selection.
�
Transmitter.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
When
a
When
title
on
a
a
title
disc
When
on
has
a
disc
a
more
title
has
on
than
more
a
disc
one
than
has
chapter
one
more
chapter
or
than
a
one
or
a
chapter
or
a
current
Use
theThis
Use
bplayback
BDVD-V
the
v Copy
V
b
buttons
B
Use
v
V
thebuttons
tob
select
B vtoV
the
buttons
title/chapter
thetotitle/chapter
select
the title/chapter
Additional
Information
..DVD-V
.2000
.of
.. Digital
..MX4,
..as
.. chapter/track
..follows:
..Theater
.. ..MX8,
.as
.. ..follows:
.Systems,
..VCD1.1
.. .follows:
mX100
(backward)
by Macrovision.
protection
signals
are
recorded
on some
the language
code
list
inscreen.
the
chapter/track
DVD/CD
receiver
employs
aselect
laser
system.
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
is
stopped.
Speaker
Setup
. menu
.beginning
. DVD-V
. 1996,
. or
. . MX2,
.DVD-V
. .. the
.chapter/track.
. .. .. as
. 28
27
DVD-A
Mudando
para
outro
Capítulo/Faixa
VCD2.0
DVD-A
Motion
another
another
chapter/track
by
Macrovision.
Copy
signals
are
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-V
DVD-V
Moving
to
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
Setting
aand
ID
ofUse
Transmitter
.Press
.of.recorded
.ENTER
.DVD
.MENU
..to
..appear.
..has
11
Press
TITLE
or
DVD
MENU
return
to
to
return
the
menu
to
1ENTER
2TITLE
3press
4.these
the
buttons
to
select
an
option
you
disc
disc
more
has
than
more
disc
one
than
has
track,
one
more
you
track,
than
canSKIP
you
move
one
can
track,
move
you
to
• Slow
Press
SKIP
.
or
>
during
to to the
The
confirm
menu
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
pen enter
Changing
aprotection
channel
of
Transmitter
. .discs
. ..on..will
.some
11to
ou
repetidamente
2.
Pressione
athe
you
want
you
to��want
view,
to
then
you
view,
press
want
then
to
ENTER
press
view,
then
to
start.
to.or
start.
start.
Inc.
All
rights
reserved.
discs.
When
recording
playing
the
pictures
•tecla
Press
to
back
MX16,
MX100
(forward).
Last
Condition
Memory
...
...
..to
..briefly
..or
.twice
.. ..to
.can
.briefly
.. ..move
..playback
..para
.. ..step
.. .. 28
you
the
wrong
language
code,
� Press
during
playback
to
Additional
Information
. .as
. ..>
.briefly
.return
28
To
ensure
proper
use
of
this
product,
please
read
this
owner’s
discs.
When
recording
and
playing
the press
pictures
of
these
discs
�
Assembling
and
Connecting
to
the
Speakers
11
another
another
chapter/track
chapter/track
another
as
follows:
chapter/track
as
follows:
follows:
VCD2.0
VCD1.1
select
the
next
chapter/track
or
to
to
the
screen.
screen.
DVD-V
DVD-A
DivX
T
want,
then
ENTER
to
view
the
option.
� or
Setting
aon
ID
of
Transmitter
.buttons
. the
.select
. .one
. .buttons
.the
.select
. .V.tobuttons
.tothe
.the
11
Press
TITLE
Press
TITLE
DVD
Press
or
MENU
DVD
to
MENU
return
orfor
DVD
to
toreturn
the
MENU
to
to
the
return
menu
the
menu
on a VCR,
picture
will
When
anoise
title
aappear.
more
than
chapter
or
atitle/chapter
•
Press
•
SKIP
Press
.
SKIP
or
.
>
briefly
or
>
during
durin
pear
DVD-V
DVD-A
previous
chapter/track.
selecionar
a
velocidade
desejada.
x2,
x4,
itle/chapter
With
a
Video
CD,
the
Search
speed
changes:
Press
SLOW
-/+
during
pause.
Moving
to
another
TITLE/GROUP
Screen
Saver
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
the
next
chapter/track
or
to
return
tothan
the
begi
When
a
When
title
on
a
When
a
title
disc
on
a
has
When
a
title
disc
more
on
a
has
a
title
than
disc
more
on
one
has
a
than
disc
chapter
more
one
has
than
chapter
more
or
a
one
chapter
orplayb
aone
carefully
and
retain
ithas
future
reference.
Should
on manual
a VCR,
picture
noise
will
appear.
Use
the
Use
bTITLE
Bdisc
the
v
Use
V
b
buttons
B
the
v
Use
V
b
to
Bmenu
v
V
b
to
B
v title/chapter
select
tothe
select
title/chapter
the
title/chapter
Last beginning
Condition of
Memory
. . . chapter/track.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28briefly
the
current
�
Speaker
Connections.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
This
product
incorporates
copyright
protection
technology
that
disc
has
more
than
one
track,
you
can
move
toor
select
the
select
chapter/track
chapter/track
to
return
or
to
re
screen.
screen.
MOVING
ANOTHER
CHAPTER/TRACK
� um
and
Connecting
to
the
Speakers
Quando
disco
possui
mais
que
um
capítulo
ouview,
faixa,
start.screen.
The
receiver
enter
SLOW
mX2,
mX4,
mX8,
(backward)
disc
has
disc
more
has
than
disc
one
than
disc
has
you
track,
can
one
you
move
can
toyou
move
can
totomo
Press
SKIP
Press
.
SKIP
•x8,
orto
Press
.
>
briefly
or
SKIP
>
.
during
briefly
or
>
briefly
to
during
to
playback
to
This
product
incorporates
protection
technology
that
unit
require
maintenance,
contact
an
authorized
service
locaDVD-A
DVD-A
the
current
chapter/track.
•COPYRIGHTS:
directly
to
any
chapter
DVD
playback
Notes:
Controlling
the
TV
.has
..mX16
..x100
.track,
..playback
.during
..(retornando)
..than
..next
.more
.the
.. ..than
.next
..ou
..or
.one
..to
.you
..track,
.. or
..can
28
Vit
x16
ou
x2,
you
want
you
to
want
view,
you
to
then
want
view,
press
you
to
then
want
view,
ENTER
press
to
then
ENTER
to•press
start.
then
ENTER
to•press
start.
ENTER
to
start.
start.
When
aAssembling
title
on
aTO
disc
has
than
one
chapter
a 11
OTES
ON
Screen
Saver
.To
.more
.go
.will
.beginning
.more
.one
. .playback
.mode.
.to
.track,
. during
.move
28
1.copyright
3more
4
Use
the
option
you
DVD-A
is protected
bySpeaker
method
claims
of.2.certain
and
Speaker
Positioning.
.as
.segue:
.follows:
. U.S.
..buttons
.. ..U.S.
..patents
.. .. patents
..to
.. ..select
.. .. .and
.. ..an
.other
..select
.. 13
another
chapter/track
beginning
of
the
current
of
the
chapter/track.
current
chapter/trac
• chapter/track
Press
SKIP
.
twice
briefly
step
back
to
the
�
Connections.
.other
.the
12
the menu
er
is
protected
by
method
claims
of
certain
tion
(see
service
procedure).
another
another
chapter/track
another
chapter/track
as
another
chapter/track
follows:
chapter/track
as
follows:
the
select
next
the
next
select
the
or
next
to
chapter/track
to
return
the
or
to
the
return
MX2,
MX4,
MX8,
(forward).
você
pode
trocá-los
como
se
press
DISPLAY
and
/..as
V
to
select
thethe pr
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
(Continued)
•owned
Ifand
parental
control
is
set
and
disc
isthe
not
within
Itmenu
is
forbidden
bychapter/track
law
to
copy
,MX16
show
,..to
broadcast
disc
has
more
than
one
track,
you
can
move
to
another
Operation
with
Radio
.return
..broadcast,
.or
...
.to
..select
.as
.x100
..follows:
.. ..press
.(avançando)
..required
.follows:
.v
..to
..step
.to
.. .the
29
�
Press
TITLE
Press
or
TITLE
Press
DVD
or
MENU
TITLE
Press
DVD
to
or
MENU
TITLE
return
DVD
to
or
MENU
tothe
return
DVD
menu
to
MENU
toreturn
to
to
return
the
menu
to
the
menu
Press
twice
briefly
back
to
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
x4,
x8,
x16
ou
Controlling
the
TV
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
want,
then
press
ENTER
to
view
the
option.
intellectual
property
rights
by
Macrovision
Corporation
Still
Picture
Frame-by-Frame
DVD-V
DVD-A
Use
the
SLOW
-/+
to
the
speed:
t
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Use
the
Use
the
buttons
buttons
to
select
to
an
select
option
an
you
option
you
previous
chapter/track.
Before
Operation
..
. .owned
. .. .or
. .. .>
. by
. .. .. ..during
. .. ..procedures
REPEAT
19
such
intellectual
property
rights
Macrovision
Speaker
Positioning.
.. ..settings
..or
..screen.
.carrying
.. .. out
.Corporation
.. ..input
.. .14-19
.beginning
13
beginning
of cable,
the current
of
beginning
the
chapter/track.
current
of
the
chapter/track.
current
• or
Press
•more
SKIP
Press
SKIP
twice
.
briefly
twice
to
briefly
step back
to step
to
icon.
Then,
via
play
inthe
public,
rent
material
Performing
controls,
adjustments,
•rights
Press
SKIP
briefly
playback
to password.
chapter/track.
chapter/track
as
follows:
the
rating
you
must
screen.
screen.
screen.
Presetting
radio
stations
..PLAY.
.chapter/track.
...
..1/2
.during
.or
.playback
..without
.. .the
.. .. playback
.chapter/track
29
ou
rapidamente
durante
a.tothe
Pressione
a owners.
tecla
When
achapter/track
disc
has
than
one
you
and •other
owners.
Use
of this
copyright
protection
techOperation
with
Radio
. .•.
.copyrighted
. Press
.x4,
.or
..
.x8,
. .(backward),
. ..
. .input
.title/group,
. during
.>
.during
29
•option.
Press
•option.
Press
•.
SKIP
Press
or
>
SKIP
briefly
>
SKIP
briefly
>
briefly
or
to
briefly
playbac
during
to
To
SEARCH
mode,
press
com
Vídeo
CD:
x2,
want,
press
then
ENTER
press
ENTER
the
to
view
the
T can
1/16,
t
1/8,
t
1/4
or
t
or
Playback
and
other
rights
Use
this
protection
techWhen
a4
title
disc
has
more
than
one
orview
Mini
Glossary
for
Stream
&
1
1
1
2the
2
2of
3
3on
4a
4
Use the
Use
Use
the
buttons
buttons
to
an
buttons
option
an
to
select
option
you
itle/chapter
previous
chapter/track.
•exit
To
goSKIP
directly
to
any
chapter
during
DVD
playback,
Notes:
number
or
use
b
/the
B.
Before
Operation
.(See
.Audio
.chapter/track
.select
.“Lock
.3
. .to
.copyright
.select
.then
.want,
.or
. Surround
.to
. you
.option
.hazardous
.and
.chapter
. 21).
.is
.an
14-19
permission.
than
those
specified
herein
may
result
in
radiselect
the
next
return
to
the
thin
an
•you
Press
•a SKIP
Press
.
SKIP
•select
twice
Press
.
briefly
twice
SKIP
to
briefly
.
step
back
to
step
to
back
to
tofollows:
to
the
�
To
directly
to
chapter
DVD
play
Menu”
on
page
� other
Press
.
or
>
briefly
during
playback
to
select
nology
must
be
authorized
by
Macrovision
Corporation,
Listening
to
the
radio
.go
.twice
.the
.select
.previous
..briefly
..Frame-by-frame
.or
.1/2
.to
.any
.chapter/track.
.step
.the
..chapter/track
..back
.disc.
..the
..or
..during
..to
29
move
to
another
title/group
as
You
can
play
a
title/chapter/all/track/group
on
a
the
select
next
the
chapter/track
select
next
chapter/track
next
the
chapter/track
next
return
or
to
to
return
to
return
the
or
to
to
retu
the
Still
Picture
and
playback
reprodução
para
selecionar
o
capítulo/faixa
seguinte,
ou
Presetting
the
radio
stations
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
General
Features
nology
must
be
authorized
by
Macrovision
Corporation,
and
is
1/16,
T
1/8,
T
1/4
or
T
(forward).
disc
has
more
than
one
track,
you
can
move
to
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
ou
x2,
x4,
then
want,
then
ENTER
press
want,
then
to
view
press
the
to
ENTER
option.
to
option.
press
DISPLAY
and
press
v
/directly
Vany
tox8,
select
thechapter
Mode
.chapter/track
.parental
. DVD-A
. other
. .of
.ENTER
.the
.Audio
. Notes:
.or
. .to
.isreturn
.view
.set
. .uses
.the
. .the
.the
. view
.beginning
.unless
. .the
.is. not
.option.
. previous
. within
14 previous
Thisx16(retornando)
product
features
the
copy
protection
function
developed
• . If
control
and
disc
ation
exposure.
DVD-V
beginning
current
chapter/track.
Mini
Glossary
for
Stream
&
Surround
erstart.want,
chapter/track.
chapter/track.
previous
To
directly
To
any
during
Notes:
intended
forpress
home
and
limited
viewing
only
the
next
to
of
press
DISP.
Then,
selectDVD
the pla
� to
Press
then
press
numbered
Other
Functions.
.the
.•DISP.,
.icon.
.current
.of.. go
.the
.beginning
..VCD2.0
.. input
..go
.. .. to
..the
.the
..apress
..appropriate
.. .chapter
..chapter/track.
.DivX
../4
.. ..to
.during
beginning
beginning
of chapter/track.
beginning
current
of
the
chapter/track.
current
of
the
current
chapter/track.
Press
REPEAT
during
playback
to
select
desired
•do
may
a.uses
region
Your
receiver
does
Listening
the
radio
. •..signals
. chapter/track.
.VCD1.1
.to
.3
. 30
29
intended
for home
and
viewing
only
unless
DVD-V
DVD-A
retornar
ao
início
atual.
another
chapter/track
as
to
chapter/track
Then,
chapter/track
bythe
Macrovision.
Copy
protection
are
recorded
on
some
the to
menu
Sound
Mode
..Use
..other
.DVDs
.capítulo/faixa
.. •3
..limited
.Use
..Corporation.
..follows:
.buttons
..have
..beam,
.If.14
..parental
..control
.do
.. .not
.. is
.back
.code.
.3
.option
..is
..buttons
14
option
you
the
rating
settings
you
must
input
the
password.
x16(avançando).
DVD-A
DVD-V
cted
press
DISPLAY
press
DISPLAY
and
press
and
press
v
/ the
V tochapter/tra
vselect
/ V toths
otherwise
authorized
by
Reverse
Mode
.Notes:
.direct
.Picture
.SKIP
. .Macrovision
.Macrovision
.the
.If14
.the
.the
.3
.4Reverse
.try
.set
.to
.4
14
To
exposure
to
laser
open
parental
•3
control
and
set
the
and
disc
isselect
not
disc
within
is
not
within
SEARCH
To
exit
slow
motion
mode,
press
PLAY.
the
current
chapter/track.
1
1
2
2
2
2
•prevent
Press
.
twice
briefly
to
step
the
chapter/track
icon.
Then,
enter
Use
the
Use
buttons
to
select
buttons
to
an
select
to
an
select
option
an
you
option
an
you
option
you
•.. to
To
go
•you
directly
Toto
go
to
directly
•from
any
To
chapter
to
go
any
directly
chapter
during
to
any
DVD
during
chapter
playback,
DVD
during
playback,
DVD
playback,
Notes:
Notes:
button
(0-9)
to
select
a
title
number.
repeat
mode.
Sleep
Timer
Setting
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
otherwise
authorized
by
Corporation.
not
play
discs
that
have
a
region
code
different
Still
and
Frame-by-Frame
•
Press
•
SKIP
Press
•
.
SKIP
Press
twice
•
.
SKIP
briefly
Press
twice
.
SKIP
to
briefly
step
twice
.
back
to
briefly
step
twice
to
back
the
to
briefly
step
to
back
the
to
step
Other
Functions.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
DVD-V
DVD-A
discs.
When
recording
and
playing
the
pictures
of
these
discs
number
or
use
b
/
B.
1.
Press
PAUSE/STEP
on
the
remote
control
during
REPEAT
ay
be engineering
tion.
orPress
disassembly
is
On-Screen
Display
.want,
..ENTER
.step
.is
..then
.set
.the
.ENTER
.rapidamente
.21).
..then
..the
.. ENTER
.the
.press
.view
.. .NOT
..ENTER
..press
.. view
15
(See
“Lock
Menu”
on
page
chapter/track
chapter/track
icon.
Then,
icon.
input
Then,
theinput
chapter/tr
thetocbt
Visible
laser
radiation
open.
DO
playback.
•enclosure.
SKIP
.
or
>
briefly
during
playback
tomust
ote
Sound
Mode
.want,
.set
.prohibited.
.is
.and
.to
.press
.is
.disc
.when
.to
.press
.view
.within
.previous
. option.
.must
14
previous
chapter/track.
the
rating
settings
rating
settings
you
you
input
the
input
password.
the
password.
• �Ifthe
Pressione
tecla
duas
vezes
para
want,
then
press
then
want,
to
the
to
option.
the
to
view
option.
the
number
using
buttons
(0-9).
DISPLAY
press
DISPLAY
and
press
press
and
DISPLAY
press
v
vVCD2.0
select
to
the
the
to
Press
.
twice
back
to
VCD1.1
DVD-V
DVD-A
prohibited.
• If parental
•engineering
parental
control
•or
is
control
Ifadisassembly
set
parental
and
is.briefly
the
control
disc
the
not
within
and
is
not
the
disc
is
not
within
Dimmer
. .previous
.modo
.Setting
.Press
./ .V
.previous
.to
.PAUSE/STEP
.and
.previous
.chapter/track.
.. select
.. .. v
..the
../during
..V
.numbered
..DivX
.. ..select
...
.. .. .. .the
.. 30
1.
Press
and
SKIP/SCAN
or
>
for
abou
Repeat
previous
chapter/track.
chapter/track.
chapter/track.
your
receiver.
The
region
code
for
this
receiver
is
1option.
3.
sair
do
SEARCH,
Still
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
on
aPara
VCR,
picture
noise
will
Sleep
Timer
.appear.
. ./. .V
.hold
.press
.pressione
./play.
.into
30PAUSE
DVD-V
DVD-A
electric
Playback
playback.
Advance
the
picture
frame-by-frame
by
REPEAT
DVD
Video
Discs
Repeat
Chapter/Title/Off
number
number
or
use
or
use
b
B.
b
/
B.
STARE
INTO
BEAM.
Initial
Settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-19
select
the
next
chapter/track
or
to
return
to
the
The
DVD/CD
Receiver
will
now
go
Unless
stated
otherwise,
all
operations
described
use
(See
“Lock
(See
Menu”
“Lock
on
Menu”
page
on
21).
page
21).
On-Screen
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
chapter/track
chapter/track
icon.
Then,
chapter/track
icon.
input
Then,
the
icon.
input
chapter/track
Then,
the
chapter/track
input
the
chapter/track
chapter/track.
• settings
DVDs
may
have
achapter
region
code.
Your
receiver
does
•rating
To
go
directly
to
any
during
DVD
playback,
voltar
ao
capítulo/faixa
anterior.
the
rating
the
settings
you
the
must
rating
you
input
settings
must
the
input
password.
you
the
must
password.
input
the
password.
can
play
title/chapter/all/track/group
a.. disc.
.discs
..directly
..To
.. -a
..go
..two
.. .to
.. ..go
..another
.chapter
.. .To
.during
..go
.chapter.
.during
.. .playback.
.. .technology
..to.on
..playback,
.DVD
.. .. 30
ThisYou
incorporates
copyright
that
seconds
(one).
DVD-Video
Repeat
Chapter/Title/Off
Dimmer
. ..To
. directly
.any
.protection
. chapter
.to
.any
. ..DVD
. ..any
.chapter
30
to
CHAPTER/TRACK
•Mute
To
go
•.Moving
•DVD-V
directly
any
directly
chapter
during
during
playback,
DVD
during
play
DV
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
pressing
PAUSE/STEP
repeatedly.
and
ture
Still
Frame-by-Frame
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
and
Frame-by-Frame
DVD-A
Playback
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD-A
•product
Chapter:
repeats
the
SEARCH
beginning
of
the
chapter/track.
REPEAT
REPEAT
DVD-V
DVD-A
�
General
Operation
.Notes:
.located
.be
.exposed
. the
.DVD-V
.the
.DVD-A
.region
16
mode.
number
number
oris use
or/ REPEAT
use
number
or
use
b
B.
b
B.
b•current
/ to
B.
the
Some
may
also
be
SERIAL
NUMBER:
The
serial
number
is
on
Initial
Settings
.any
.remote
. page
.chapter
.•current
.should
..control.
.. .have
.during
..may
..page
./.region
.have
..21).
.may
..features
.playback,
..back
..toREPEAT
.. .back
..DVD-V
16-19
�
To
go
directly
to
DVD
not
play
discs
that
code
different
from
press
DISPLAY
and
press
v.a
V
to
select
CAUTION:
The
apparatus
water
ot within
(See
“Lock
(See
Menu”
“Lock
on
(See
Menu”
“Lock
on
21).
Menu”
21).
Press
during
to
protected
by
method
claims
of
and
You
can
play
a./.title/chapter/all/track/group
disc.
DVDs
•not
DVDs
a
region
have
code.
Your
code.
receiver
Your
does
does
Using
Headphone
Jack
..DVD-V
./.U.S.
.V
.and
..patents
.v
.DVD-V
..desired
..ato
..the
..select
.DVD-A
..V
.mode.
SERIAL
serial
number
is
located
on
the
receiver
will
now
go
into
SEARCH
ote
press
DISPLAY
and
press
DISPLAY
press
press
DISPLAY
press
and
press
/.on
V
v
tothe
vselect
/ V tothe
se
Mute
.the
. the
.DISPLAY
.press
.The
. SEARCH
.DVD-A
.press
. ote
.playback
.playing
. SEARCH
.certain
.and
. ..v
.select
. to
. select
.DVD-A
.apress
./other
. 30
30
•NUMBER:
Ifdiretamente
parental
•page
IfThe
parental
control
•qualquer
Iftwice
parental
is
control
set
•on
If.Setup
and
parental
is
control
set
the
and
disc
is
control
set
the
is
not
and
disc
isa.within
set
the
is16not
and
disc
within
the
is
not
disc
within
is receiver
not
within
VCD1.1
VCD2.0
DivX
DVD-V
optionofyou
•
Para
ir
a
capítulo/faixa
durante
a
this
unit.
This
number
is
unique
to
this
unit
and
not
available
•
Title:
repeats
the
current
title.
ck
Playback
DVD-V
DVD-A
�
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
available
on
the
menu.
Repetir
•
Press
SKIP
.
briefly
to
step
back
to
the
To
repeat
currently
chapter,
chapter/track
icon.
Then,
input
the
chapter/track
1.
Press
and
hold
SKIP/SCAN
.
or
>
for
about
(dripping
splashing)
no
with
liquids,
such
3
2.
To
exit
still
motion
mode,
� General
Operation
. /4
.objects
.information
.to
. press
.can
.filled
.You
.does
.PLAY.
.can
.discs
.aYour
.and
.available
. that
.receiver
.aacan
.title/chapter/all/track/group
. 16
select
the
press
DISP.
Then,
press
receiver.
The
code
for
this
receiver
is
1
this
unit.
This
number
isand
unique
to
this
unit
and
not
intellectual
property
rights
owned
by
Macrovision
Corporation
ssword.
angle
repeat
mode.
Press
REPEAT
during
playback
to
select
desired
not
play
not
discs
play
that
have
region
have
acode
region
different
code
different
from
from
CAUTION
Slow
motion
playback
in
not
applicable
for
2.disc.
Press
and
hold
SKIP/SCAN
>
You
can
advance
by
chapter/track
chapter/track
icon.
chapter/track
Then,
icon.
chapter/track
chapter/track
the
chapter/track
input
chapter/tra
thepress
cha
Selecting
the
Input
Source
.input
..Then,
..the
..icon.
..the
.picture
..input
..Then,
..a.icon.
..frame-by-frame
...
.input
.. .or
30
two-digit
numbers,
but
You
play
title/chapter/all/track/group
play
You
play
ainput
title/chapter/all/track/group
on
aHeadphone
on
aFor
disc.
on
areverse
disc.
to others.
You
should
record
requested
here
• DVDs
•of
may
DVDs
have
may
a
•oryour
region
DVDs
have
arecord
may
code.
region
have
Your
code.
aregion
receiver
region
receiver
code.
does
does
1.
Press
on
the
remote
during
the
rating
the
settings
rating
the
settings
you
must
settings
you
rating
input
must
settings
the
you
input
password.
must
the
you
input
password.
must
the
password.
password.
tion.
Using
the
Jack
. is
.press
. .Then,
. the
. .the
.numbered
30
•the
Off
:DVD-A
does
not
play
repeatedly.
to
others.
You
should
requested
information
and
previous
chapter/track.
reprodução
DVD,
aYour
tecla
DISPLAY
e,
em
number
or
B.
�
Display
.icon.
.PAUSE/STEP
.use
.placed
.Then,
.b
.on
.rating
.ofreceiver.
.the
.the
.purchase.
.receiver.
.control
REPEAT.
DVD-A
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
as
vases,
should
be
apparatus.
and
other
rights
owners.
Use
ofa1.
this
techchapter/track
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD-A
two
seconds
during
playback.
ce
of retain
(one).
� that
Language
.have
.discs
.pressione
.. record
.a./ code
.ELECTRIC
.enter
..the
.Press
.different
.your
.. SHOCK
..aREPEAT
.chapter/track
.region
..from
.. .. REPEAT
..here
.code
..Press
..from
.. .16-17
.code
.REPEAT
16SEARCH
Você
pode
reproduzir
um
Título/Capítulo/Tudo/Faixa
em
SEARCH
SEARCH
this
guide
as
ado
permanent
When
arepeatedly
title
on
disc
has
or afor
1.
Press
and
hold
and
.
.
>
or
repeat
mode.
your
your
The
region
The
region
forfrom
code
this
receiver
for
this
receiver
isCD.
1number
is
1number
number
oraDVD-A
use
orSource
use
number
or.Press
or
use
b
/Sound)
B.
b
/copyright
B.
/ .protection
/.the
B.
Video
ing
PAUSE/STEP
repeatedly
on
to
select
the
(0-9)
in
rapid
Press
during
playback
during
playback
to
during
select
to
playback
aselect
desired
to
desired
select
aRepeat
desired
XTS
(Excellent
True
..use
.succession.
.. ..b.more
..SKIP/SCAN
.required
..than
..b
.. .SKIP/SCAN
.one
..speed:
..remote
..chapter
30
not play
not
discs
play
discs
have
not
that
play
apermanent
region
that
region
have
code
different
different
RISK
OF
playback.
Advance
the
picture
frame-by-frame
by
retain
this
guide
as
a(See
record
ofon
your
purchase.
(See
“Lock
Menu”
“Lock
(See
on
Menu”
“Lock
page
(See
Menu”
21).
“Lock
page
on
Menu”
21).
page
on
21).
page
21).
1.Audio.
Press
PAUSE/STEP
on
the
remote
control
during
Selecting
the
Input
.Chapter/Title/Off
.TV
.B.
.hold
.and
30 orcontrol.
DVD
Video
Discs
About
the
symbols
for
instructions
The
Repeat
Chapter
icon
appears
on
the
screen.
nology
must
be
authorized
by
Macrovision
Corporation,
is
ng)
�
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
number
using
the
numbered
buttons
(0-9).
•
To
go
directly
to
any
chapter
during
DVD
playback,
seguida,
as
teclas

do
capíNote:
The
will
mode.
DVD-V
OPEN
�The
Display
.Moving
. code
.region
. . . DO
. para
. The
.NOT
.the
.selecionar
.another
.picture
.(one).
.this
. repeat
.code
.receiver
.o.ícone
.for
. . this
. is
.1..1receiver
16-17
disc
more
one
can
to another
DVD
Audio
Discs
-.now
Repeat
Track/Group/Off
two
seconds
two
seconds
playback.
(one).
to
TITLE/GROUP
um
disco.
repeat
mode.
mode.
repeat
mode.
eiver
does
Press
1.code.
and
hold
and
1.
SKIP/SCAN
hold
Press
and
.
hold
or
SKIP/SCAN
.
>
or
>
about
or
>
for
about
X16
or
X100
XTS
pro
.receiver
.SKIP/SCAN
. has
.does
.X2,
.True
.other
.X4,
.Repeat
.than
.go
.current
. into
.for
..Chapter/Title/Off
..SEARCH
.track,
..during
..
.for
..you
..about
..only
.during
.. ..unless
.. .move
..playback.
.. 30
your
receiver.
your
receiver.
region
your
The
receiver.
for
code
this
region
receiver
for
is
1
isPress
1does
pressing
PAUSE/STEP
repeatedly.
playback.
Advance
frame-by-frame
by
XTS
(Excellent
Sound)
.
.
.
.
.
30
•
Chapter:
repeats
the
chapter.
DVD
Video
Discs
E/STEP
PAUSE/STEP
1.
Press
on
PAUSE/STEP
the
on
remote
the
remote
control
on
the
control
during
remote
during
control
during
intended
for
home
and
limited
viewing
uses
the
•
DVDs
•
may
DVDs
have
•
may
DVDs
a
region
have
•
may
DVDs
a
code.
region
have
may
Your
a
code.
region
have
receiver
Your
a
code.
region
receiver
does
Your
receiver
Your
receiver
does
DVD-V
DVD-A
press
DISPLAY
and
press
v
/
V
to
select
the
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
Model
No.
___________________________________
ot
within
When
using
DVD
audio
disc
that
SEARCH
Press
and
hold
SKIP/SCAN
.
or
>
chapter/track
as
follows:
� Audio.
. product
. a.PAUSE/STEP
. . . likely
.may
. . .not
.o.número
. .repeatedly.
.used
. . .harm
.includes
.capítulo/faixa
. .to
. .restricted
. pictures,
. . unit
.two
. 17
• 2.
Track:
repeats
the
current
track.
tulo/faixa.
Então,
entre
com
do
CAUTION:
This
be
outdoor,
to
The
receiver
will
SEARCH
SEARCH
mode. VC
m
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
To
repeat
the
title
Model
No.
___________________________________
ferent
from
seconds
two
seconds
during
two
playback.
during
seconds
playback.
To
exit
SEARCH
mode,
press
PLAY.
(one).
(one).
Pressione
afrom
tecla
REPEAT
durante
reprodução
SEARCH
SEARCH
SEARCH
Indicates
hazards
to
cause
the
pressing
DVD-A
DVD-V
Motion
otherwise
authorized
by
Macrovision
Corporation.
XTS
pro
.repeats
.3..repeats
.DVD-V
.from
. Slow
.currently
. during
.the
.DVD-A
.SEARCH
.receiver
. playback.
. playing,
.The
. DVD-A
.achapter.
.will
. . now
.press
.VCD2.0
. go
.Reverse
. into
.now
.para
.VCD1.1
.go
. . into
30 VCD2.0
the
current
title.
• •Chapter:
current
vance
ck. (one).
playback.
Advance
the
picture
the
Advance
picture
frame-by-frame
the
frame-by-frame
picture
by
frame-by-frame
by
not
play
discs
discs
play
discs
aDVD
play
that
code
have
region
have
different
from
acode
region
different
from
code
different
chapter/track
icon.
chapter/track
TO
RISK
Video
Discs
Video
-Discs
Video
- Repeat
Chapter/Title/Off
Discs
Chapter/Title/Off
-Title:
Repeat
Chapter/Title/Off
�
Others
. CAUTION:
.not
.DVD-A
.may
.play
.motion
.that
.not
. Then,
.have
.REDUCE
. that
. not
..input
.. region
.have
.in
..the
.by
.discs
..>
..picture
..that
.different
.a. code
..DVD
..about
..Repeat
19
ssword.
To
exit
still
mode,
press
this
operation
be
permitted
some
DVD-V
repeatedly
to
select
the
required
speed:
indoor
use
Serial
No.
___________________________________
• Group:
repeats
the
current
Group.
� 2.
Lock
(Parental
Control)
..
.THE
. DVD
.a
.region
. for
18
� into
Press
.
or
>
briefly
during
playback
select
Search
2.
Press
2.
and
Press
hold
and
SKIP/SCAN
hold
SKIP/SCAN
.toor
.
> or
REPEAT
a
second
time.
ote
1.
Press
and
hold
SKIP/SCAN
or.PLAY.
ceiver
is 1Serial
ou
use
as
teclas
numéricas.
The
receiver
The
will
receiver
now
The
go
will
now
receiver
SEARCH
go
into
will
SEARCH
now
mode.
go
into
mode.
SEARCH
mode.
No.
___________________________________
itself
or only.
other
material
damage.
engineering
or
disassembly
is
prohibited.
Reference
•
Off
:
does
not
play
repeatedly.
selecionar
o
modo
de
repetição
desejado.
•
Title:
repeats
the
current
title.
OF
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
ng
SE/STEP
PAUSE/STEP
pressing
repeatedly.
PAUSE/STEP
repeatedly.
repeatedly.
number
or
use
b
/
B.
1.
Press
1.
and
Press
hold
1.
and
Press
SKIP/SCAN
hold
1.
and
Press
SKIP/SCAN
hold
.
and
SKIP/SCAN
or
hold
.
>
SKIP/SCAN
for
or
.
>
about
for
or
.
>
about
for
or
>
a
your
receiver.
your
receiver.
The
your
region
receiver.
The
your
code
region
receiver.
The
for
code
region
this
The
receiver
for
code
region
this
receiver
for
is
code
1
this
receiver
for
is
1
this
receiver
is
1
is
1
•
Chapter:
•
Chapter:
repeats
•
repeats
Chapter:
the
current
the
repeats
current
chapter.
the
chapter.
current
chapter.
segments.
2.two
To seconds
exit
mode,
X2,
X4,
X16
orchapter/track
X100
•and
Off
:hold
does
not
play
repeatedly.
the
next
orselect
to
to
the
beginning
The
Repeat
Title
icon
appears
on SLOW
the
TV
screen.
�
Others
. When
.still
. . motion
.during
. apress
. disc
. . .playback.
.the
. . .numbered
.press
. .(OR
. than
. PLAY.
. . buttons
.one
. . . title/group,
. . .Press
. 192. and
O
Press
-/+return
during
pause.
For two-digit
numbers,
repeatedly
repeatedly
to
to
the
select
required
the
required
speed: of
spe
has
more
you
can
2.
Press
hold
2.
SKIP/SCAN
Press
SKIP/SCAN
and
.
hold
SKIP/SCAN
.
>
or
>
or
K
DO
NOT
REMOVE
COVER
Note:
during
Press
•title.
Off
:seconds
does
not
play
repeatedly.
Language
Code
List
. or
.m
.seconds
.during
.or
.two
.M
.press
.seconds
.during
. ..
. . .playback.
.playback.
.>
. . . playback.
. . . 31
two
two
seconds
during
two
playback.
playback.
during
(one).
(one).
(one).
(one).
Reference
• Title:
repeats
•BACK)
Title: repeats
the
• Title:
current
the
repeats
current
title.
the
current
title.
3.
To
exit
SEARCH
PLAY.
DVD
Audio
Discs
-mode,
Repeat
Track/Group/Off
the
current
chapter/track.
The
receiver
will
enter
SLOW
mode.
otion
2.still
To
motion
mode,
exitOperation
still
press
mode,
motion
PLAY.
press
mode,
PLAY.
press
PLAY.
eiver
does
th
(0-9)
inNote:
rapid
succession.
Indicates
special
features
ofINSIDE
this
X2,
X4,
X2,
X16
X4,
orwill
X100
X16
or
X100
The
receiver
willoperating
now
go into
SEARCH
mode.
otas:
N
OR
NO
USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS
move
to
another
title/group
as unit.
follows:
repeatedly
repeatedly
to
select
to
repeatedly
the
select
required
the
to
required
select
speed:
the
speed:
required
speed:
The
DVD/CD
Receiver
now
go
into
SEARCH
mode.
When
using
a
DVD
audio
disc
that
includes
•
To
exit
Repeat
mode,
press
REPEAT
a
third
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD-V
DVD-A
SERIAL
NUMBER:
The
serial
number
is
located
on
the
back
Country
Code
List
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
The
receiver
The
will
receiver
now
The
go
will
receiver
into
now
The
SEARCH
go
will
receiver
into
now
SEARCH
mode.
go
will
into
now
SEARCH
mode.
go
into
SEARCH
mode.
mo
•
Off
:
does
•
Off
not
:
does
play
•
Off
not
repeatedly.
:
play
does
repeatedly.
not
play
repeatedly.
Note:
SEARCH
SLOW
SCAN
Language
Code
List
.-To
.twice
.current
. 3.
. .briefly
.To
.Track/Group/Off
.exit
. .to.SEARCH
.step
.mode,
. . back
. . .press
. to
. . the
. PLAY.
31
When
using
a DVD
audio
disc
that SERVICE
includes
pictures,numbered
Discos
DVD
– Discs
Repetir
Capítulo/Título/Desligado
Note:
• Track:
repeats
the
track.
DVD
Audio
Repeat
REFER
TO. QUALIFIED
�
Press
.
previous
ferent fromDVD
19
3.isor
exit
SEARCH
mode,
press
PLAY.
2.or
Press
and
hold
SKIP/SCAN
>
�SERVICING
Press
DISP.,
Video
CD
Operation
.then
...
. press
. . .aor
.sucessão
.the
. . .appropriate
. . 19-22
X2, X4, X2,
X16
X4,
oryou
X100
X16
X2,
or
X100
X4,
X16
X100
of time.
this
unit.
This
number
unique
to
this
unit
and
not
available
Operation
pictures,
this
operation
may
be
permitted
in
some
Use
the
SLOW
-/+
to
select
the
required
sp
2.
Press
2.
and
Press
hold
2.
and
Press
SKIP/SCAN
hold
2.
and
Press
SKIP/SCAN
hold
.
and
SKIP/SCAN
or
hold
.
>
SKIP/SCAN
or
.
>
or
.
>
or
>
Troubleshooting
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
32-33
Para
número
de
dois
digitos,
pressione
de
•
If
press
SKIP
(>)
once
during
Repeat
Chapter
this
operation
may
be
permitted
inspeed:
some
picture
Country
Code
List
.the
. the
.m
.current
. current
. .or. .M
. .Group.
.repeatedly
. . . . . . .here
. .to. and
.select
. . 31 the
PERSONNEL.
using
a
DVD
audio
disc
that
includes
pictures,
Indicates
tips
hints
for
making
the
task
easier.
Press
•Track:
Group:
repeats
•SEARCH
repeats
track.
1.When
Press
andand
hold
SKIP/SCAN
chapter/track.
Note:is 1 Slow
ceiver
to
others.
You
should
record
requested
information
Note:
repeatedly
to
select
the
required
DVD
DVD
Discs
-.Discs
Repeat
Audio
Repeat
Track/Group/Off
Discs
Track/Group/Off
-mode,
Repeat
Track/Group/Off
button
(0-9)
to
select
VCD2.0
VCD1.1
DVD-V
DVD-A
Motion
Playing
a DVD
and
Video
CD.
..
.M
. .Audio
.a
.or
.title
.>
. .Audio
.number.
. .for
. ..DVD
.about
19
3.
To
exit
3. -SEARCH
To
exit
3.
Torepete
exit
press
mode,
SEARCH
PLAY.
press
mode,
PLAY.
press
PLAY.
•
Capítulo:
o
capítulo
atual.
picture
segments.
The
Repeat
Off
icon
appears
on
the
TV
screen.
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19-22
1.
Press
SLOW
SCAN
m
or
+
during
(Track)
playback,
the
repeat
playback
cancels.
1/16,
t
1/8,
t
1/4
or
t
1/2
(backward),
repeatedly
repeatedly
to
select
repeatedly
to
the
select
repeatedly
required
to
the
select
required
speed:
to
the
select
required
speed:
the
required
speed:
spee
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
pace
retain
this
guide
astrack.
arequired
of. your
segments.
this
operation
may
be playback.
permitted
in some
picture
números
(0-9)
rapidamente.
Troubleshooting
.permanent
. .DVD
. . .current
.audio
. record
.any
. . disc
.chapter
.mX2,
.that
. . .purchase.
. . . . . DVD
. 32-33
•
Off
:
does
not
play
repeatedly.
•
Group:
repeats
the
Group.
speed:
mX4,
mX8,
mX16,
�
two
seconds
during
To
go
directly
to
during
playback,
VD
ng
When
aaudio
DVD
using
disc
audio
aGeneral
that
DVD
disc
includes
audio
that
includes
disc
pictures,
that
pictures,
includes
pictures,
•
Track:
•
repeats
Track:
repeats
the
•
Track:
current
the
repeats
current
track.
the
track.
current
X2,
X4,
X16
or
X100
When
using
a
includes
•
Note:
Note:
Features
. .Video
. . . Dolby
. .CD.
. . .Laboratories.
Playing
a
DVDlicense
and
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..“Dolby”,
.. .. .20-22
. . 19
playback.
T
or. .T
1/2
(forward).
X2,
X2,
X16
or
X16
or
X2,
X4,
X16
Manufactured
under
from
segments.
.not
.X4,
.DISP.
. X100
.X2,
. .1/16,
.X4,
. . X100
.X16
.press
. 1/8,
.or
. .X100
.T
./4
.1/4
.or
. .X100
.MX4,
.some
.the
. 34
Press
-/+
during
•Specifications
Título:
repete
othis
título
atual.
•the
Off
:X4,
does
play
repeatedly.
mX100
(backward)
or
MX2,
MX8,
The
receiver
will
gopause.
into
SEARCH
mode.
ay
tion
this
beoperation
may
permitted
be
permitted
may
in
some
beSLOW
permitted
in
picture
some
picture
innow
some
picture
3
press
Then,
select
repeats
repeats
current
the
repeats
current
Group.
Group.
current
Group.
pictures,
operation
may
permitted
in
3.
To
exit
SEARCH
mode,
press
This
lightning
arrowhead
symbol
an
When
When
abePLAY.
using
DVD
audio
atoPLAY.
DVD
disc
audio
that
disc
includes
that inc
• SEARCH
• using
� Moving
to
another
.Dolby
.•the
.Group:
. 20
Moving
to
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
“Pro Logic”,
and
the
double-D
are
DVD-V
Note:
Note:
General
Features
. flash
.SLOW
.symbol
.TITLE/GROUP
.with
. .mode.
.enter
.•DVD-A
.Group:
.trademarks
.PLAY.
. .• .Group:
..mode.
.. .. of
.. .Note:
.within
20-22
DVD-V
Model
No.
Note:
3.CDs
To -___________________________________
exit
3.
SEARCH
To exit
3.
To
mode,
exit
3.
SEARCH
To
press
mode,
exit
SEARCH
press
mode,
press
mode,
PLAY.
press
PLAY.
SCAN
3D
SURROUND
The
DVD/CD
Receiver
will
SLOW
TheSLOW
receiver
will
enter
Video
Repeat
Track/All/Off
MX16,
MX100
(forward).
chapter/track
icon.
Then,
enter
the
chapter/track
.segments.Laboratories.
2.
Press
and
hold
SKIP/SCAN
.
or
>
equilateral
triangle
is
intended
to
alert
the
user
To
exit
slow
motion
mode,
press
PLAY.
•
Off
:
does
•
Off
not
:
does
play
•
Off
not
repeatedly.
:
play
does
repeatedly.
not
play
repeatedly.
picture
segments.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
Copyright
1992pictures,
pictures,
this
operation
this
operation
may
be
may
permitted
be permit
in s
�
Moving
to
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
.
.
.
.
.
20
•
Desligado:
Repetição
desativada.
When
using
When
a
using
DVD
When
audio
a
DVD
using
disc
audio
that
a
DVD
disc
includes
that
audio
includes
disc
that
includes
•
•
•
DVD-V
DVD-A
VCD2.0
VCD1.1
DVD-V
DVD-A
DivX
�
Moving
to
another
TITLE/GROUP
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
•
If
you
press
SKIP
(>)
once
during
Repeat
Chapter
Note:
SLOW
SCAN
Serial No.20
___________________________________
Câmera
Lenta
With
a
Video
CD,
the
Search
speed
changes:
about
the
presence
ofreserved.
uninsulated
dangerous
number
using
the
numbered
buttons
(0-9).
repeatedly
to
select
the
required
speed:
2.
Use
the
SLOW
SCAN
m
or
M
+
to
select
the
1997
Dolby
Laboratories.
All
rights
Toproduce
repeat
track
currently
playing,
pressmultiUse
the
SLOW
-/+
Note:
picture
segments.
picture
segments.
To
athe
3D
surround
effect
thatRepeat
simulates
�
Slow
Motion.
. .tothe
.SCAN
.select
.CHAPTER/TRACK
. .Note:
.- the
.m
. . required
.or
. .M
. . . +.speed:
.during
.. ..may
..pictures,
..t
.. be
20
1.
Press
SLOW
this
this
pictures,
operation
may
be
this
may
permitted
operation
be
permitted
inmay
some
be
in
permitted
some
in some
playback,
the
repeat
playback
cancels.
�DVD-A
Moving
to
another
20 pictures,
• operation
If (Track)
you
press
SKIP
(>)
once
during
Chapter(backward)
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD-A
thin
an
voltage
within
product’s
enclosure
that
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
SCAN
SLOW
SCAN
mX2,
mX4,
mX8,
mX16
or
X2,
X4,
X16
or
X100
1.
Pressione
a
tecla
SLOW/SCAN
ou
+
durante
a
required
speed:
t
1/16,
t
1/8,
t
1/4,
or
t
1/2
When
a
title
on
a
disc
has
more
than
one
chapter
or
a
REPEAT.
channel
audio
from
tworepeat
stereo
speakers
(instead of
When
using
aand
DVD
disc
•1/16,
t
1/8,
t
1/4
(backward),
Manufactured
under
license
Theater
Systems,
Inc.
�
Still
Picture
Frame-by-Frame
20
playback.
1.
Press
SLOW
SCAN
-.•1/2
m
+SKIP
during
picture
segments.
picture
segments.
picture
segments.
(Track)
playback,
playback
cancels.
er
�
Slow
Motion.
.magnitude
. from
.or
.audio
.t
.Digital
.press
.constitute
.orthat
.•PLAY.
.M
.includes
.Playback
. press
.risk
.or
.(>)
.IfT
.you
. .. once
20
of
sufficient
to
a
of
electric
If. you
press
If.T
you
•or
SKIP
press
(>)
during
SKIP
once
(>)
during
once
Repeat
Chapter
during
Chapter
Repeat
When
When
aMX2,
using
DVD
When
audio
a
using
DVD
When
disc
audio
a
using
DVD
that
disc
includes
audio
a
DVD
thatdisc
includes
audio
thatdisc
includes
that inclu
•Repeat
• using
• the
•Chapter
MX4,
MX8,
MX16
(forward).
3.
To
exit
SEARCH
mode,
(backward),
1/16,
T
1/4,
T
has
more
than
one
track,
you
move
tothe
another
The
Repeat
Track
icon
appears
on
the
TV
US reprodução.
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,978,762
and
ote
five+
speakers
normally
required
forscreen.
multi-channel
this
operation
may
in
some
1/16,
1/8,
1/4
T
1/2
(forward).
ote
�
Search.
.disc
.T
.or
.or
.M
.T
.or
.+
.and
.during
.5,974,380,
.pending.
. .be
.1/8,
. permitted
. playback,
.“DTS”
. . Playback
. .and
.mode.
.the
.(Track)
.can
. ..1/2
20
CDs
–this
Repetir
Faixa/Tudo/Desligado
playback.
DVD-V
shock
persons.
�pictures,
Still
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
20
SLOW
1.
SCAN
Press
-SCAN
m
SLOW
or-worldwide
m
M
SCAN
or
+T
during
M
-patents
m
+to
during
3D
SURROUND
(Track)
(Track)
playback,
repeat
the
playback,
playback
repeat Vídeo
playback
the
cancels.
repeat
cancels.
playback
cancels.
The
DVD/CD
Receiver
will
enter
SLOW
other
issued
“DTS
pictures,
pictures,
operation
pictures,
this
operation
may
pictures,
this
be
operation
may
permitted
this
be
operation
may
permitted
in be
some
may
permitted
inbuttons
be
some
permitte
in som
(forward).
chapter/track
as
follows:
2
audio
from
a
home
theater
system).
For
two-digit
numbers,
press
the
numbered
picture
segments.
O
reprodutor
de
DVD
entrará
agora
no
modo
Slow.
ay
be
Slow
motion
playback
in
reverse
is
not
applicab
To
exit
SEARCH
mode,
press
PLAY.
�
Repeat
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
DVD-V
To
repeat
the
disc
currently
playing,
press
Digital
Surround”
are
registered
trademarks
of
Digital
Theater
ck. playback. To� 2.
Search.
.motion
.Press
. . Receiver
. .mode,
..
.SCAN
. . or
. press
.>
.-enter
.m
. .PLAY.
.SLOW
. .M
. .during
. +. . to
. .playback
. . 20 theto• select
3D
SURROUND
The
DVD/CD
will
mode.
exit
slow
segments.
picture
segments.
picture
segments.
picture
segments.
Use
the
SLOW
or
select
Faixa:
repete
faixa
corrente.
�
briefly
Note:
electric
Topicture
produce
a a3D
surround
effect that
simulates multi(0-9)
in
rapid
succession.
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
1996,
2000
Digital
Theater
Systems,
The
exclamation
mark
within
an
equilateral
triangle
Video
CD.
REPEAT
a
second
time.
�
Repeat
A-B
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
3.
To
exit
Slow
Motion
mode,
press
PLAY
(N).
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
�
Repeat
.enter
.the
. . SLOW/SCAN
.SLOW
. .SCAN
. chapter/track
.t
. .3D
.- .m
.SURROUND
.3D
. .1/8,
.SURROUND
. to
.t
.return
.+3D
.para
. select
. SURROUND
.or
. 20
1. Press
DISPLAY during playback.
ou
2.enter
Use
aenter
teclas
a tecla
-. t
Receiver
VD/CD
The
Receiver
will
DVD/CD
will
SLOW
mode.
SLOW
will
mode.
mode.
required
1/16,
1/4,
t
1/2
2.
Use
the
SLOW
or
M
+
to
the
Inc.
All
rights
reserved.
next
or
to
the
beginning
of
When
using
aspeed:
DVD
disc
• Receiver
is
intended
to
of
channel
audio
from
stereo
speakers
(instead
of
produce
a 3D
surround
effect
that
simulates
multiwner’s
The
Repeat
All
icon
appears
on
the
screen.
• To
Tudo:
repete
todas
astwo
faixas
do TV
disco.
�
.. alert
.. ..audio
.. .the
.. ..user
.. .. .. about
.that
.. .. ..includes
.the
.. ..presence
.. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Time
Repeat
A-B
. ..current
.1/16,
.t
21
T
T
1/8,
T
1/4,
or
1/2
(backward),
or
required
speed:
t
1/16,
t.permitted
1/8,
1/4,
orT
t
1/2 About
the
chapter/track.
the
for
instructions
selecionar
aSearch
velocidade
desejada:
1/16,
Note:
important
operating
and
maintenance
(servicing)
this
operation
may
be
inasome
W
2.
ethe
SLOW
SCAN
Use the
-SCAN
m
SLOW
or
-�pictures,
m
M
SCAN
or
+
M
to
select
m
+
to
or
the
select
M
+
the
to
select
the
the
five+
speakers
normally
required
for
multi-channel
d
channel
audio
from
two
stereo
speakers
(instead
of
2.
Use
3
or
4symbols
to
select
the
sound
option.
VCD1.1
VCD2.0
To
produce
To
produce
a
3D
To
surround
produce
3D
surround
effect
a
3D
that
effect
surround
simulates
that
effect
simulates
multithat
simulates
multimultiDVD-A
DVD-V
Slow
Motion
Marker
Searchor
.. .T
.. ..1/16,
.. .. .. ..T
.. .. 1/8,
.. ..accompanying
.. .T
.. ..1/4,
.. .. .. or
.. .. T
..the
.. 21
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
21
angle
To
exit
Repeat
mode,
press
REPEAT
a
third
(forward).
instructions
in
the
instructions
(backward),
1/2
�
Press
.
to step
back
to
the speakers
previous
VCD2.0 VCD1.1
• the
Desligado:
Repetição
desativada.
DVD-V
DVD-Afor multi-channel
DivX
•1/8,
When
using
at
DVD
audio
disc
that
includes
pictures,
ote
ocapicture
segments.
ed:
ed
speed:
required
t 1/16,
tspeed:
t
1/16,
t
t
1/8,
1/4,
1/16,
t
or
1/4,
t
1/8,
1/2
or
t
t twice
1/4,
1/2
orbriefly
taudio
1/2
1/8,
1/4,
ou
audio
from
aoption
home
theater
system).
The
sound
will
be
highlighted.
Repeat
five+
speakers
required
OTES
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
audio
two
audio
two
stereo
from
two
speakers
(instead
stereo
(instead
speakers
of normally
of(instead
of
�
Zoom.
. Search
. . chapter/track.
. . 1/2
. .. ..(regredir),
.. .. .. ..channel
.. .. .. ou
.. ..channel
.. .. .1/16,
.. .. .from
..channel
.. .1/8,
.. .from
.. stereo
21
ce of
Indicates
hazards
likely
to
cause
harm
to
the
unit
�
Marker
.
.
.
.
21
time.
product.
(forward).
this
operation
may
be
permitted
inapplicable
picture
Slow
motion
in,T
reverse
isfive+
not
for
Presstheater
SLOW
-/+-during
pause.
T(backward),
1/16,
1/8,
T
T
T
1/8,
1/4,
1/16,
T
orT
1/4,
T1/8,
1/2
or
T
1/4,
1/2the
or
T
1/2
or
ward),
or T
or
, some
broadcast
broadcast,
show
ItT
is1/16,
forbidden
byplayback
law
to
copy
audio
from
arequired
home
system).
1/4
ou
1/2
(avançar).
DVD-Video
discs
Repeat
Chapter/Title/Off
the
speakers
five+
speakers
the
normally
five+
normally
speakers
required
required
normally
for
multi-channel
for
multi-channel
for
multi-channel
3.
To
exit
Slow
Motion
mode,
press
PLAY
(N).
About
the
symbols
for
instructions
ng)
Special
DVD
Features
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
1.
Press
DISPLAY
during
playback.
itself
or
other
material
damage.
The
Repeat
Off
icon
appears
on
the
TV
screen.
3.
Use
1
or
2
to
to
select
“3D
SUR”.
�
Zoom.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
�
To
go
directly
to
any
chapter
during
DVD
playback,
segments.
Video
CD.
The receiver will enter SLOW mode.
via
cable,
play in public, or rent copyrighted
material
without
ures
rd).
from
audio
from
a. theater
home
theater
system).
a home
system).
theater
system).
the (forward).WARNING:
Todo
exit
Slow
�3.sair
Title
Menu
. Slow,
. .Motion
. .DISP.
.pressione
.. ..mode,
.audio
..OR
.. .. ..ELECTRIC
..press
.. .. ..a..PLAY
.home
./4
..audio
.to
.select
.. .from
TO
PREVENT
FIRE
To
turn DISPLAY
off
the To
3Drepeat
Surround
effect,
select
“Normal”.
1.
Press
during
playback.
Special
DVD
Features
.to
. SHOCK
. (N).
.
. unit
. 22
22the
3. Para
modo
apress
tecla
thesound
currently
playing
chapter, press
permission.
3
press
s radiNote:
Indicates
hazards
likely
to.Then,
cause
harmPLAY
the
2.
Use 3 orspecial
4 tothe
select
the
option.
Indicates
operating
features
of this
otas:
Use
SLOW
-/+
to select
the unit.
required speed:
HAZARD,
DO
NOT
EXPOSE
THIS
PRODUCT
TO
RAIN
OR
Motion
3.Slow
To Motion
exit
mode,
Slow
press
mode,
Motion
PLAY
press
mode,
(N).
PLAY
press
(N).
PLAY
(N).
�
Disc
Menu
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
23t
This
product
features
the
copy
protection
function
developed
DVD-V
DVD-A
REPEAT.
�
Title
Menu
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
1.
Press
1.
DISPLAY
Press
DISPLAY
1.
during
Press
playback.
during
DISPLAY
playback.
during
playback.
chapter/track
icon.
Then,
enter
the
chapter/track
• When
using
a DVD
audio disc that includes pictures, 2. Use
REPEAT
A-B
Note:
itself
or
other
material
damage.
The
sound
option
will
be
highlighted.
3
or
4
to
select
the
sound
option.
MOISTURE.
1/16,
1/8, Chapter
t 1/4 or
tappears
1/2 (backward),
or T
by Macrovision.
Copy
protection
signals
recorded
some
DVD-V
�
Changing
Audio
Language
.. .includes
.. .. ..on
.. ..picture
..pictures,
.. .. 22
Thet
Repeat
icon
ondurante
the TV screen.
SEARCH
ote
�
Disc
Menu
.a. DVD
.may
. . .using
.be
. .permitted
. the
.disc
.are
. numbered
. that
. .. in
.some
22
number
buttons
(0-9). •TIME
this operation
pen
• When
usingthe
audio
K
)
uma
vez
Se
você
pressionar
a
tecla
SKIP
(
Note:
The
sound
option
will
be
highlighted.
Indicates
tips
and
hints
for
making
the
task
easier.
2.
Use
2.
Use
2.
Use
3
or
4
3
to
or
select
4
to
the
select
3
or
sound
4
the
to
select
option.
sound
the
option.
sound
option.
To
repeat
a sequence.
discs. When
recording
andAudio
playingChannel
the pictures
discs
1/16,
Tselect
1/8,must
T
orPBC
T 1/2
(forward).
UseCD
1 or
2 PBC,
to to
“3D1/4
SUR”.
�
Changing
the
. in
. ..ofsome
. these
.. .. ..unit.
..picture
.. .. .. .. 22
Video
with
you
set
to23
Off
�disc
Changing
the
Audio
Language
22 On a a3.
Indicates
special
operating
features
segments.
otas:
N•T
ORaaudio
this
operation
may
beequipment
permitted
23 press 23
WARNING:
Do
not
install
this
in.of
a .this
confined
space
DVD
ing
When
DVD
using
disc
audio
that
DVD
includes
audio
that
includes
disc
pictures,
that
pictures,
includes
pictures,
To
repeat
the
title
currently
playing,
reprodução
de
repetição
detime
capítulo
(faixa),
oon
modo
option
sound
option
sound
be will
highlighted.
option
be
highlighted.
will
highlighted.
on
a aVCR,
picture
noise
will
appear.
To
playing
at
any
chosen
on
the
disc:
To
turn
off
the
3D
Surround
effect,
select
“Normal”.
3. start
Use
1beor
2To
to
tothe
select
“3D
SUR”.
�
Subtitles
. the
.atote
.or
.Audio
.similar
. some
. chosen
. .Channel
. .picture
. The
.starting
. . ..sound
.. The
.. .point.
..The
.will
setup
menu
to
use
Repeat
function.
See
page
�
Changing
. .. .. .. ..“..Athat
. ..” 22
22 theManufactured
segments.
1.
Press
A-B
your
such
as
abe
book
case
unit.
under
license
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
“Dolby”,
exit
slow
motion
mode,
press
PLAY.
may
ation
this
beoperation
may
permitted
be
permitted
may
in
some
permitted
in
picture
some
picture
in
REPEAT
a
second
time.
*
This
product
incorporates
copyright
protection
technology
repetição
será
cancelado.
• Quando
usar
um
DVD
de
áudio
que
contenha
imagens,
Indicates
tips
and
hints
for
making
the
task
easier.
To
turn
off
the
3D
Surround
effect,
select
“Normal”.
1.
Press
DISPLAY
during
playback.
The
time
search
23
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD
Audio
Discs
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
.
19
Use
1
toand
or
select
to
1 “3D
select
or buttons
2SUR”.
to“3D
toLogic”,
select
SUR”.
“3Dthe
SUR”.
“Pro
and
double-D
are appears
trademarks
of Dolby
� REPEAT
Subtitles
. A-B
.claims
. . .on
. .ofthe
. certain
.numbers,
.3.
. . Use
.U.S.
. .3..1press
. or
. . 2. .the
.3.
.tonumbered
.2
.Use
.to. 22
20 symbol
appears
briefly
TV
screen.
The
Repeat
Title icon
on the
TV screen.23
er
s.segments.
is protected
by method
patents
other
For
two-digit
pace
DVD-V
essa
função
pode
não.owned
ser
alguns
box
shows
the
elapsed
playing
time.
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works. Copyright 1992TIME
SEARCH
turn
off
the
Surround
3D off
Surround
the
effect,
3D
select
effect,
Surround
“Normal”.
select
effect,
“Normal”.
select
“Normal”.
REPEAT
A-B
such
DVD
Audio
.DVD-V
. .permitida
. succession.
. Macrovision
. DVD-A
. To
. . turn
.para
. . To
.off
.Corporation
.the
. . .3D
. .To
. .turn
22
intellectual
propertyDiscs
rights
by
(0-9)
in.rapid
To
repeat
alicense
sequence.
Manufactured
under
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
“Dolby”,
2.
Press
A-B
again
at
your
chosen
end
point.
To
exit
Repeat
mode,
press
REPEAT
a third
1997
Dolby
Laboratories.
All
rights
reserved.
DVD-V
segmentos
de
imagens.
TIME
SEARCH
and
otherDVD-A
rights
owners.
this copyright protection techDVD-V DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD-A Use ofsymbol
2. Press v / V to select the time clock icon
TREPEAT
A-B
A-B
“Pro
Logic”,
and
the
Dolby
To start playing
at any chosen time on the disc:
otetime.
To “A
repeat
a double-D
sequence.
B”authorized
appears
briefly
on are
the trademarks
TV screenofand
the
nology must
by
Macrovision
Corporation,
and
is SEARCH
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
Manufactured
under
license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
and
“-:--:--”
appears.
1. be
Press
A-B
at
your
chosen
starting
point.
“
A
”
TIME
TIME
SEARCH
SEARCH
TIME
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
Copyright
1992*
VCD2.0
VCD1.1
DVD-V
DVD-A
Slow
Motion
Slow
motion
playback
in appears
reverse
is the
notsearch
applicable
start
at
any
chosen
time
on The
the
disc:
The
Repeat
Off
icon
on
TV
screen. for
repeat
sequence
begins.
23
USTo1.
Pat.
No.playing
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
Press
DISPLAY
during
playback.
time
ence.
To
a sequence.
repeat 1997
a sequence.
intended
home
and
other
limited
viewing
uses only
unless
Dolby
Laboratories.
rights
reserved.
appears
briefly
onchosen
the
TVstarting
screen.
1.forPress
A-B
at All
your
point.
“A*”
cted to
3. Input
the
required
start time
in
hours,“DTS”
minutes,
and
other
worldwide
patents
issued
and
pending.
“DTS
Video
CD.
20 authorized by Press
otherwise
MacrovisionToCorporation.
Reverse
start
To
playing
start
playing
atToany
start
chosen
at playing
any chosen
time
at
on
time
the
chosen
on
disc:
the
time
disc:
on
the disc:
box
shows
the
elapsed
playing
time.
CAUTION:
21
1.any
Press
DISPLAY
during
playback.
The
timeand
search
SLOW
-/+
during
pause.
appears
briefly
on
the
TV
screen.
Digital
Surround”
are
registered
trademarks
of
Digital
Theater
3.
Press
A-B
again
to
cancel.
seconds
from
left
to
right.
If
you
enter
the
wrong
A-B
your
1. Press
at
chosen
your
A-B
chosen
starting
at
your
starting
point.
chosen
“
point.
A
starting
“
A
point.
“
A
”
”
”
Manufactured
under
license
from
Digital
Theater
Systems,
Inc.
* at your chosen
*
engineering
disassembly
is prohibited.
2. orPress
A-B*The
again
end mode.
point.
box
shows
elapsed
playing
time.
DVD/CD
receiver
employs
a1.laser
system.
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
1996,
2000
Digital
Theater
Systems,
Press
1. 5,978,762
DISPLAY
Press
DISPLAY
1.
during
Press playback.
during
DISPLAY
playback.
during
The
time
playback.
The
search
time
search
The- time
search
receiver
will
enter
SLOW
USThis
Pat.TV
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
and
2.numbers,
Press
vVideo
/ the
V toCLEAR
select
the
time
clock
icon
CDs
Repeat
Track/All/Off
press
to
remove
the
numbers
ly
rs on
briefly
appears
the TV
on
the
briefly
screen.
on
screen.
the
TV
screen.
“A patents
B”A-B
appears
briefly
on
theshows
TV
screen
and
2. Press
again
atproduct,
your
chosen
end
point.
Inc.
All
rights
reserved.
other
pending.
“DTS”
and
“DTS
box
box
the
box
thethe
shows
elapsed
playing
the
playing
time.
elapsed
time.
playing
time.
and
“-:--:--”
appears.
To worldwide
ensure proper
use issued
of this and
please
readshows
thiselapsed
owner’s
2.
Press
v
/ V Then
to
select
clocknumbers.
icon
you
entered.
inputthe
thetime
correct
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Recursos
Gerais
1
2
Introduction
Introduction
DVD Video
DVD Discs
Video
DVD-Discs
Repeat
Video- Repea
Discs
Chap
pressing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly.
•PAUSE/STEP
Chapter:
repeats
the repeatedly.
current chapter. • Chapter:
repeat
mode.
Still
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
pressing
pressing
PAUSE/STEP
repeatedly.
PAUSE/STEP
repeatedly.
DVD-V
DVD
• Chapter:
repeats
• Chapter:
repeats
the current
repeats
the curr
cha
1.
Presspressing
PAUSE/STEP
on
the remote
control
during
REPEAT
2. To
exit still
motion mode,
press
PLAY.
• Title:
repeatsthe
thepicture
current
title.
2. To exit still motion mode, press PLAY.
Playback
• Title: repeats
• Title:
the
•Video
Title:
current
repeats
the
current
title.
playback.
Advance
frame-by-frame
by
DVDrepeats
Discs
- the
Re ti
2.
To
exit
2.
To
still
exit
motion
2.
still
To
motion
exit
mode,
press
mode,
motion
press
mode,
PLAY.
press
PLAY.
• Off
: still
does
not PLAY.
play
repeatedly.
You can play a title/chap
•
Off
:
does
•
Off
not
:
does
•
play
Off
not
:
repeatedly.
does
play
not
repeat
plac
pressing
PAUSE/STEP
repeatedly.
• Chapter:
repeats
the
Note:
DVD-V
DVD-A
Press REPEAT during pl
Note:
Audio Discs
Repeat
Track/Group/Off
• Title:
repeats
the
curre
When
using a DVD
audio
disc
that
includes
picture
Note: Note:
DVD
Audio
DVD
Audio
Discs
DVD
-Discs
Audio
Repeat
- Repea
Discs
Track
2. ToNote:
exitDVD
still motion
mode, -press
PLAY.
repeat
mode.
PAUSE/STEP
oncurrent
the remote
controlmay
during
When using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures, 1. Press
• Track:
repeats the
• Off :indoes
notpicture
play rep
thistrack.
operation
be permitted
some
When
using
When
a
using
DVD
When
a
audio
DVD
using
disc
audio
a
DVD
that
disc
audio
includes
that
disc
includes
pictures,
that
includes
pictures,
pictures,
•
Track:
•
repeats
Track:
•
repeats
the
Track:
current
repeats
the
current
track.
th
playback.
frame-by-frame
by
this operation may be permitted in some picture
• Group:Advance
repeatsthe
thepicture
current
Group.
DVD
Video
Discs
-th
segments.
this
operation
this
operation
may
this
be
operation
may
permitted
be
permitted
may
in
be
some
permitted
in
picture
some
in
picture
some
picture
•
Group:
•
Group:
repeats
repeats
Group:
the
current
repeats
the
curren
Grou
Note:
DVD •Audio
Discs
- Re
pressing
repeatedly.
segments.
•does
Chapter:
repeats
th
• Off : PAUSE/STEP
does not play repeatedly.
segments.
segments.
•
Off
:
does
•
Off
not
:
•play
Offrepeats
not
:repeatedly.
does
play
not
repeat
pla
Whensegments.
using
a
DVD
audio
disc
that
includes
pictures,
Track:
the
curr
SLOW
SCAN DVD-V •DVD-A
• Title: repeats the cu
To exit still
mode, press
PLAY.
this2.operation
maymotion
be permitted
in some
picture
• Group: repeats the cur
Note:
SLOW SCAN DVD-V DVD-A
DVD-V DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-A DVD-A
DVD-A
• Off : does not play
Note:
Note:
Note:
SLOW
SLOW
SCAN
SLOW
SCAN
SCAN
segments.
• Offor: M
does+ not
play rep
Press
SLOW
SCAN
-m
during
• If you press SKIP (>) once 1.
during
Repeat
•Chapter
If you
•press
If you
SKIP
press
• If(>)
you
SKIP
press
once
(>)
SKIP
during
once
(>
Re
du
Note:
DVD Audio Discs 1. Press SLOW SCAN - m or M + during
(Track)
playback,
the
repeat
playback.
1. Press
1. SLOW
Press1.SLOW
SCAN
Press-SCAN
SLOW
mDVD-V
or- SCAN
m
M
or
+
during
-M
mplayback
+orduring
M
+cancels.
during(Track) playback,
(Track)
(Track)
the repeat
playback,
theplayback
repeatthe
pla
cr
DVD-A
Note:playback,
SLOW
WhenSCAN
using a DVD
audio
disc that includes pictures,
• Track: repeats the
playback.
playback.
playback.
playback.
The DVD/CD
enter
SLOW
mode.
If you
SKIP
(>) the
onc
this operation may be permitted
in some
pictureReceiver• will
• press
Group:
repeats
3DThe
SURROUND
The DVD/CD Receiver will enter SLOW mode. The DVD/CD
DVD-V+ the
DVD-V
1.
Press
SLOW
-enter
mDVD-V
or enter
M
+SLOW
during
(Track)
playback,
repeat
3D SURROUND
3D SURROUND
3D
SURROUND
Thesegments.
DVD/CD
Receiver
DVD/CD
Receiver
will SCAN
enter
Receiver
will
SLOW
mode.
will
SLOW
mode.
2.mode.
Use
the
SLOW
SCAN
-m
or
M
to
select
• Off
: does
not
play
playback.
2. Use the SLOW SCAN - m or M + to
the
speed:
t 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4, or t
2. select
Use2.the
Use
SLOW
2.
the
SLOW
SCAN
the-SCAN
SLOW
m
SCAN
m
M or
+ -M
tom
select
+orrequired
to
M
the
select
+ to
the
select
To Use
produce
a 3Dor-surround
effect
that
simulates
multiTo
produce
Tothe
produce
a 3D
Tosurround
produce
a 3D surround
effect
a 3D surro
that
effe
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD-V
required speed: t 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4, or
t 1/2
SLOW
(backward),
ort
T 1/2
1/16,
T 1/8, T 1/4, or T
1/
3DNote:
SURROUND
The DVD/CD
Receiver
will
enter
SLOW
mode.
required
required
speed:
required
speed:
tSCAN
1/16,
t
speed:
t
1/16,
1/8,
t
t
t
1/16,
1/8,
1/4,
t
t
or 1/4,
t
1/8,
1/2
or
tt
1/4,
1/2or
channel
audio
from
two
stereo
speakers
(instead
of
channel
channel
audio
from
channel
audio
two
from
audio
stereo
two
from
speak
stereo
tw
• If you press SKIP (>)
T 1/2 2.
(backward), or T 1/16, T 1/8, T 1/4, or (backward),
(forward).
T
1/16,
TT
1/16,
1/8,
T
T
1/8,
1/4,T
T
orrequired
1/4,
T
1/8,
1/2
Tto
T
1/4,
1/2
or T
(backward),
or
(backward),
or speakers
or T
thethe
five+
normally
for
multi-channel
Use
SLOW
SCAN
-1/16,
m
or
M
+or
select
the1/2
thespeakers
five+
the
speakers
five+
normally
speakers
normally
required
nor
ref
General
General
Features
General
Features
General
Features
Features
To
produce
3D
surround
1. Press SLOW SCAN - m or M + duringthe five+
(Track) aplayback,
the rep
(forward).
(forward).
(forward).
(forward).
audio
from
a
home
theater
system).
required
speed:
t
1/16,
t
1/8,
t
1/2
audio
from
audio
a from
home
audio
aaudio
theater
home
from
a
theater
system).
home
the
3. t
To1/4,
exit or
Slow
Motion
mode,
press
PLAY
(N).
channel
from
two syst
ster
playback.
General
DVD
1/8, T 1/4,Features
or T 1/2
(backward), or T 1/16, T
Note:
Note:
3. To exit
SlowNote:
MotionPlaying
mode, pressaPLAY
(N).
the five+ speakers normally
3.
To
exit
3.
To
Slow
exit
3.
Motion
Slow
To
exit
Motion
mode,
Slow
press
mode,
Motion
PLAY
press
mode,
(N).
PLAY
press
(N).
PLAY
(N).
1.
Press
DISPLAY
during
playback.
DV
General
General
Features
General
Features
General
Features
Features
a
D•Note:
DVD
Press
1.
DISPLAY
Press
1.
DISPLAY
Press
during
DISPLAY
playback.
during
play
du
3D
SURROUND
The
DVD/CD
Receiver
will
enter
SLOW
mode.1.
Note:
(forward).
Unless
• stated
Unless
• otherwise,
stated
Unless
• otherwise,
stated
Unless
all operations
otherwise,
stated
all operations
otherwise,
described
all operations
described
all operations
described
described
audio from a home theater
General
Features
Note:
•or
When
using
a DVD
disc
that
includes
pictur
Note:
Note:
Note:
Note:
2.may
the
SCAN
-m
Moption.
+
to select
3SLOW
or
4 to
select
the sound
2.Use
Use
use
the use
remote
the
use
control.
remote
the use
control.
remote
Some
thefeatures
control.
remote
Some features
may
control.
Some
also
features
may
Some
be3.also
features
may
be
also
be
Usethe
2.audio
Use
3 Use
or 4
3
toproduce
or
select
4 to3
the
select
4
sound
tothe
sele
op
so
To2.
aor3D
surrou
rce
put
video
source
input
source
Note:
To be
exitalso
Slow
Motion
mode, pressthis
PLAY
(N).2. may
operation
be 1.
permitted
in some picture
Press DISPLAY
duringhi
• When
using
a Note:
DVD audio Note:
disc thatNote:
includes
pictures,
PLAYBACK
SETUP
•
Unless
stated
otherwise,
all
operations
described
•
When
•
using
When
a
using
•
DVD
When
a
audio
DVD
using
disc
audio
a
DVD
that
disc
audio
includes
that
disc
includes
pictures,
that
includes
pictures,
pictures,
The
sound
option
will
be
highlighted.
required
speed:
t
1/16,
t
1/8,
t
1/4,
or
t
1/2
The
sound
The
option
sound
The
will
option
sound
be
will
highlight
option
be
available
available
on
the
Setup
on
the
menu.
available
Setup
on
the
menu.
Setup
on
the
menu.
Setup
menu.
channel
audio
from
two
eiver.
UP
SETUP
• available
Unless
stated
• Unless
otherwise,
stated
Unless
•all
otherwise,
stated
Unless
operations
otherwise,
stated
all described
operations
otherwise,
all operations
described
all operations
described
described
Note:
segments.
this operation may
be permitted
in• some
picture
use
the
remote
control.
Some
features
may
also
be
this
operation
this
operation
may
this
be
operation
may
permitted
be
permitted
may
in
be
some
permitted
in
picture
some
in
picture
some
picture
T
1/16,
T
1/8,
T
1/4,
or
T
1/2
(backward),
or
Note:
General
Features
1. remote
Turn
onthe
theuse
TV the
and
select
the
video
input
source
the five+
speakers
norm
3
orto
4to
to“3D
select
the
use
use
control.
remote
Some
use
control.
remote
features
the
control.
remote
Some
may
features
control.
Some
also
be
features
may
Some
may
be
also
may
be also
1
or
2 also
tofeatures
to
select
“3D
SUR”.
3.
Use
3. Use
3.1 2.
Use
3.
Use
or
2Use
1
to or
to
2
select
1
or
select
2
toSUR”.
to“3D
se
Unless
stated
otherwise,
allTO
operations
described
e)
pplicable)
elect
and
select
and
select
segments.
MOVING
MOVING
TO
MOVING
ANOTHER
TOthe
MOVING
ANOTHER
TITLE/GROUP
ANOTHER
TO
TITLE/GROUP
ANOTHER
TITLE/GROUP
TITLE/GROUP
available
onbe
thepictures,
Setup
menu.
t•nput
ed
the
TV
select
video
source
and
the
select
input
video
source
the
input
video
source
input
source
segments.
segments.
segments.
(forward).
• When
using
a DVD
audio
that includes
connected
to
the
DVD/CD
from
home
theat
The
sound
option
will
To turn
off the
3D disc
Surround
effect, select
available
onavailable
the
Setup
available
on
menu.
the
available
Setup
on be
thereceiver.
menu.
Setup
on themenu.
Setup
menu.
DVD-A
ToDVD-V
turnTo
offaudio
turn
the 3D
off
To
the
Surround
turna3D
off
Surround
theeffect,
3Dbe
use
the remote control.
Some
features
may
also
REPEAT
A-B“Normal”.
D/CD
the
DVD/CD
to
receiver.
VD/CD
the
DVD/CD
receiver.
receiver.
Note:
operation
may
be
permitted
in
some
picture
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
2.menu.
Turn
system (ifthis
applicable)
select
MOVING
ANOTHER
TITLE/GROUP
3. ToA-B
exit and
Slow
Motion
mode,
press TO
PLAY
(N).
DVD-V
DVD-Aon the audio
available
onA-B
the Setup
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
1.
DISPLAY
duri“
REPEAT
General
Features
3.
UsePress
1 or 2
to to select
REPEAT
A-B
A-B
segments.
•applicable)
Unless
stated
otherwise,
allTITLE/GROUP
operations
described
le)
e(if
system
audio
applicable)
and select
(if
system
applicable)
and
(ifMOVING
select
and
select
andANOTHER
select
MOVING
TO
MOVING
TOREPEAT
MOVING
ANOTHER
TO
ANOTHER
TOREPEAT
TITLE/GROUP
ANOTHER
TITLE/GROUP
TITLE/GROUP
To repeat a sequence.
the
input
source
connected
to
the
DVD/CD
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
D
TIME
SEARCH
To
turn
off
the
3D
Surro
DVD-A
DVD-V
TIME
TIME
SEARCH
SEARCH
TIME
SEARCH
When
aDVD/CD
When
disc
has
aDVD/CD
When
disc
has
aDVD/CD
than
When
disc
more
one
has
a
than
disc
title/group,
more
one
has
than
title/group,
more
you
one
than
can
title/group,
you
one
can
title/group,
you
can
you
can
d
the
tray
and
tray
and
Note:
use
the
remote
control.
Some
features
may
also
onnected
D/CD
dource
todisc
the
connected
toTO
tomore
the
2. Use 3 or 4 to select
To
repeat
athe
sequence.
MOVING
ANOTHER
TITLE/GROUP
receiver.
input
source
repeat
To
repeat
aDVD-A
sequence.
To
arepeat
sequence.
abe
sequence.
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD-A ToDVD-V
DVD-A
Note:
A-B
at
your
chosen
starting
point.
“
A
”
move
move
another
to
move
another
title/group.
to
move
another
title/group.
Press
to
another
title/group.
DISPLAY
Press
title/group.
DISPLAY
Press
while
DISPLAY
Press
while
DISPLAY
while
DVD-Adisc 1.
*will
ray,
the
withtothe
• When
using
a DVD-V
DVD audio
thatPress
includes
pictures,
REPEAT
A-Bwhile
available
on
the
Setup
menu.
The sound option
To
start
playing
at
any
chosen
time
on
the
disc:
To
start
To
playing
start
playing
To
at
start
any
chosen
at
playing
any
chosen
time
at
any
on
When
a
disc
has
more
than
one
title/group,
you
can
DVD-V
DVD-A
3.otherwise,
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
to
open
the
disc
tray
and
DVD-V
TV screen.
•playback
Unless
stated
operations
described
playback
is
stopped
is stopped
then
is
the
stopped
then
appropriate
is
the
stopped
then
appropriate
the
number
then
the
number
(0-9)
appropriate
number
(0-9)
number
(0-9)
(0-9)
”1.
1. Press
A-B
atplayback
your
chosen
starting
point.
“appropriate
APress
TIME
SEARCH
”can
” briefly
” the
A-B
Press
at
1.than
A-B
your
Press
at
chosen
your
A-B
chosen
at
starting
your
chosen
point.
point.
starting
A in
“ Apoint.
“ A * on
this
operation
may
be starting
permitted
some
picture
*has
* appears
*title/group.
When
aplayback
disc
When
has
more
aall
When
disc
than
has
a1.
When
disc
one
more
title/group,
athan
disc
more
one
has
you
title/group,
more
can
than
title/group,
you
one
can
title/group,
you
can“to
you
EN/CLOSE
pen
SE
tray
to
the
and
open
disc
to
the
tray
open
disc
and
the
traydisc
and
tray
and
move
another
while
1.
Press
DISPLAY
during
The
timePress
search
To
repeat
aone
sequence.
1.
1.Press
DISPLAY
Press
1.Use
DISPLAY
Press
during
DISPLAY
during
play
du
load
chosen
disc
in
the
tray,
with
the
ble)
and
select
TO
ANOTHER
TITLE/GROUP
3.DISPLAY
1 or
2playback.
to to sele
remote
Some
features
may
also
be
or use
or/use
use
use
or
use
b
B briefly
tothe
bor
move
/MOVING
Bontoto
b
move
another
/control.
B
to
to
byour
move
another
title/group.
/title/group.
Bmove
totomove
another
title/group.
toappears
another
title/group.
title/group.
appears
the
TV
screen.
appears
briefly
appears
on
briefly
the
TV
on
briefly
the
screen.
TV
onDISPLAY
screen.
the
TVplayback.
screen.
segments.
rce
move
to
another
move
to
another
tomove
another
Press
title/group.
toDISPLAY
another
title/group.
Press
title/group.
while
DISPLAY
Press
DISPLAY
Press
while
while
while
.he
ck
the
Playback
tray.
Playback
2.
Press
A-B
again
at
your
chosen
end
point.
When
a
disc
has
more
than
one
title/group,
you
can
chosen
disc
the
tray,
in
the
disc
with
tray,
in
the
the
with
tray,
the
with
the
playback
is
stopped
then
the
appropriate
number
(0-9)
To
start
at
any
chos
box
shows
the
elapsed
playing
time.
box
shows
box
shows
the
box
elapsed
the
shows
elapsed
playing
the
elap
pla
tim
playback
side down.
VD/CD
Toplaying
turn
off
the
3D
Su
available
on
the
Setup
menu.
You
can
You
play
can
any
You
play
title
can
any
by
You
play
inputting
title
can
any
by
play
inputting
title
its
any
number
by
inputting
title
its
number
by
while
inputting
its
number
while
its
number
while
while
DVD-V
DVD-A
1.
Press
A-B
at
your
chosen
starting
“appears
A
playback
is
playback
stopped
playback
then
is
stopped
the
playback
is
appropriate
stopped
then
is
the
stopped
then
appropriate
number
the
then
appropriate
(0-9)
the
number
appropriate
number
(0-9)
number
(0-9)
(0-9)
not
,kn.
does
start,
start,again
* ”to another
“A
briefly on
the TV screen and the
move
tonot
another
title/group.
Press
DISPLAY
while
ide
down.
2.
Press
at playback
your
chosen
end
point.
2.
Press
2.close
A-B
Press
again
2.A-B
Press
atagain
your
A-B
chosen
again
your
chosen
at
end
your
point.
end
chosen
point.
end
point.
or
use
b
/point.
Bclock
toB”move
title/group.
1.
during
DVD-A
DVD-V
playback
playback
isA-B
stopped.
playback
stopped.
is
stopped.
isbstopped.
vat
/on
V
to
select
the
time
icon
Press
4.
Press
OPEN/CLOSE
toto
the
tray.
Playback
2. Press
2. v
Press
Press
/ Press
V2.tovselect
/ DISPLAY
V to v
the
select
/V
time
tothe
sele
cloc
ti
appears
briefly
TVYou
screen.
bANOTHER
/on
B
touse
move
/ use
to
B
another
tobor
move
/ use
B
title/group.
to
bmove
another
/“A
B REPEAT
to
to2.
move
another
title/group.
to A-B
another
title/group.
title/group.
orisuse
or
orscreen
repeat
sequence
begins.its number while
playback
is to
stopped
then
the
appropriate
number
(0-9)
elect
anythe
titleand
by the
inputting
MOVING
TO
TITLE/GROUP
“A
B”
appears
briefly
the
TV
and
“Athe
B”
appears
B”
appears
“A
briefly
B”
appears
on
briefly
the the
TV
on
briefly
the
screen
TV
oncan
screen
and
theplay
TV
the
and
screen
EN/CLOSE
lose
SE
. Playback
to
the
close
tray.
the
Playback
close
tray.
the
Playback
tray.
Playback
DVD
When
a
disc
has
more
than
one
title/group,
you
can
box
shows
the
elapsed
and
“-:--:--”
appears.
and
“-:--:--”
and
“-:--:--”
appears.
and
appears.
“-:--:--”
appear
starts
automatically.
If
playback
does
not
start,
TIME
SEARCH
c
tray
and
You
can
play
You
any
can
title
You
play
by
can
any
inputting
You
play
title
can
any
by
its
play
inputting
title
number
any
by
inputting
title
while
its
number
by
inputting
its
number
while
its
number
while
while
playback
is stopped.
or
use
b
/ If
Bnot
todoes
move
tobegins.
another
title/group.
repeat
sequence
repeat
repeat
sequence
sequence
repeat
begins.
sequence
begins.
begins.
To
repeat
aagain
sequence.
ppear
might
appear
2.
Press
A-B
at your
chosen3.end
point.
yback
ly.
not
matically.
If
start,
playback
does
playback
start,
notdoes
start,
not start,
move
to another
title/group. Press
DISPLAY
DVD-V
DVD-A
Press
A-Bminutes,
toand
cancel.
PLAY.
th
the
2.
PressInput
v start
/V
to
select
ths
3. while
Input the required start time
in
hours,
3.again
Input
3.
the
Input
required
the
time
required
start
in time
hou
playback
ispress
playback
stopped.
isCHAPTER/TRACK
stopped.
playback
isCHAPTER/TRACK
stopped.
isCHAPTER/TRACK
stopped.
You
can play
anyMOVING
title
by MOVING
inputting
its playback
number
while
To3.the
startrequired
playing
at any
c
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
TO
ANOTHER
CHAPTER/TRACK
ANOTHER
TO
ANOTHER
“A
B”Press
appears
briefly
oncancel.
the TV screen and the
Y.MOVING
playback
isTO
stopped
then
the
appropriate
(0-9)
and left
“-:--:--”
appears.
3.
Press
3.menu
A-B
Press
again
3.number
A-B
toagain
cancel.
A-B
to
again
cancel.
to
3. Press A-B again
to cancel.
1.might
Press
A-B
atfrom
yourleft
chosen
starting
A seconds
”
seconds
from
seconds
from
to right.
left
from
toIfright.
you
leftetIf
seconds
to right.
If youpoint.
enter“ the
wrong
In
some
cases,
the
disc
appear
*
playback
is
stopped.
When
a disc has more
than
one
title/group,
you
can
repeat sequence begins.
d
1.
Press
DISPLAY
duri
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
or
use
b
/
B
to
move
to
another
title/group.
appear
ases,
eenu
might
the
menu
disc
appear
might
menu
appear
might
appear
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
CHAPTER/TRACK
briefly
on the
TV screen.
numbers,
numbers,
press
CLEAR
press
CLEAR
topress
remove
CL
to tr
instead:
numbers,
press
CLEAR
to remove
the numbers
y.disc
Playback
3.
Inputnumbers,
the
required
start
move to another title/group.
Press DISPLAY while appears
box
the
elaps
You
can
play
any
title
by
inputting
its
number
while
MOVING
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
MOVING
TO
MOVING
ANOTHER
CHAPTER/TRACK
TO
ANOTHER
TO
CHAPTER/TRACK
ANOTHER
CHAPTER/TRACK
CHAPTER/TRACK
you entered.
youseconds
entered.
Then
youshows
input
entered.
Thenleft
the
input
Then
correc
thei
you
entered.
input
the correct numbers.
Press
A-B
again
to
cancel.
select
not
start,
from
to
righ
DVD-V
When
When
title onaWhen
atitle
disc
onahas
When
atitle
disc
more
on
ahas
atitle
than
disc
more
on
one
has
athan
disc
chapter
more
one
has
than
chapter
more
or 3.
aone2.
than
chapter
orPress
aone
chapter
or
a again
orThen
a your
is
stopped
then
the
appropriate
number
(0-9)
e
apter
title/chapter
theaplayback
title/chapter
A-B
at
chosenDVD-A
end point.
playback
isDVD-V
stopped.
2.
v
/ Vconfirm.
to
select
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
CHAPTER/TRACK
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
numbers,
press
CLEAR
4. the
Press
4. the
ENTER
Press
4.Press
ENTER
to
Press
confirm.
ENTER
to
Playbac
to cP
4.“AtoPress
ENTER
to confirm.
Playback
from
disc
has
more
has
than
disc
more
has
disc
track,
more
one
has
you
track,
more
can
one
than
you
move
track,
can
one
to
you
move
track,
canto
you
move
can
move
to
toNTER
start.
todisc
start.
b
/ DVD-V
Bone
tothan
move
tothan
another
title/group.
use
B” appears
briefly
on the TV
screenstarts
and
ckanotheror
When
a
title
on
a
disc
has
more
than
one
chapter
or
a
“-:--:--”
appears.
Useas
the
bB
V buttons
to select the
title/chapter
youand
entered.
Then
input
another
chapter/track
another
chapter/track
asanother
chapter/track
follows:
follows:
asvfollows:
as follows:
selected
selected
time.
selected
time.
time.
DVD-V
DVD-A
selected
time. begins.
tto
appear
You
can
play
any
title
bychapter/track
number
while
enu
return
the
to
the
menu
sequence
a the
title
When
on
ainputting
disc
aWhen
titleview,
has
onits
amore
When
atitle
disc
on
than
ahas
atitle
disc
one
more
onhas
chapter
arepeat
than
disc
more
has
or
than
achapter
more
onethan
chapter
or disc
aone has
chapter
or amoreorthan
a one track, you3.can
move
to
B
title/chapter
select
v Vmenu
buttons
to
the
select
title/chapter
toWhen
the
select
title/chapter
title/chapter
,ebuttons
you
want
to
then
press
ENTER
toone
start.
Input
thetorequired
st
MOVING
4. Press
ENTER
to confir
is
stopped. TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK
disc
has
more
disc
than
has
disc
one
more
has
track,
than
disc
more
you
one
has
than
can
track,
more
move
one
than
you
track,
to
can
one
you
move
track,
can
to
you
move
to
move
to
• view,
Press
•playback
SKIP
Press
SKIP
Press
or
•
.
>
SKIP
Press
briefly
or
.
>
SKIP
during
briefly
or
.
>
playback
during
briefly
or
>
during
briefly
playback
during
to
to
to
another
chapter/track
as
follows:
to
then
to
ss
start.
ENTER
press
ENTER
toon
press
start.
ENTER
to
start.
to
start.
Press
TITLE
or
DVD
MENU
to
to playback
the
menu
When
a then
title
a•.
disc
has
more
than
one
chapter
orplayback
ato
3.return
Press
A-B
again
tocan
cancel.
seconds
from left to r
selected
time.
another
chapter/track
another
another
chapter/track
asor
follows:
another
chapter/track
chapter/track
follows:
follows:
follows:
select
the
select
next
the
chapter/track
select
next
the
chapter/track
select
next
or
the
chapter/track
to
next
return
chapter/track
to
toreturn
the
orasto
to
return
the
orastoto
return
theas to
the
DVD-V
DVD-A
VD
LE
to
U to
the
or
MENU
return
DVD
menu
to
MENU
to
return
the
menu
to
to
return
the
menu
to
the
menu
disc
has
more
than
one
track,
you
can
move
to
screen.
numbers,
presstoCLE
• Press SKIP . or > briefly during
playback
beginning
beginning
of thebeginning
current
offollows:
thebeginning
chapter/track.
current
of the chapter/track.
current
of the chapter/track.
current chapter/track.
another
chapter/track
as
• When
Press
SKIP
•DVD-A
Press
.
• or
SKIP
Press
>
briefly
SKIP
Press
orthan
.
>
during
SKIP
briefly
orplayback
.
>
during
briefly
or >
toplayback
brieflyplayback
during
to select
playback
to the next
to chapter/track or toyou
return
to the Then in
TO
CHAPTER/TRACK
entered.
aANOTHER
title
on
a disc
has•.
more
one
chapter
or
aduring
he
title/chapter
n
select
you
option
anMOVING
you
option you
•
Press
•
SKIP
Press
•
.
SKIP
Press
twice
•
.
SKIP
briefly
Press
twice
.
SKIP
to
briefly
step
twice
.
back
to
briefly
step
twice
to
back
the
to
briefly
step
to
back
the
to
step
back
the
the
select
next
select
chapter/track
the
select
next
the
chapter/track
select
or
next
the
return
chapter/track
next
or
toto
chapter/track
to
the
return
orto
toto
return
the
or totoreturn
the
to the of the current chapter/track.
beginning
disc
has
more
than
one
track,
you
move
to
•ew
SKIP
or
>the
briefly
during
playback
totocan
toPress
start.
ption.
the
option.
4. Press ENTER to con
DVD-V .
DVD-A
previous
previous
chapter/track.
previous
chapter/track.
previous
chapter/track.
chapter/track.
2beginning
3offollows:
4the
Use
buttons
tochapter/track.
select
optionchapter/track.
you
beginning
ofthe
beginning
current
chapter/track.
beginning
current
of the
current
of thean
chapter/track.
current
chapter/track
as
• Press SKIP . twice briefly to step
back time.
to the
the next another
chapter/track
orthe
to1 return
to
the
selected
n toselect
the menu
3
2
an
s
to
option
select
you
to
an
select
option
an
select
you
option
an
option
want,
then
press
ENTER
to
view
the
option.
•buttons
To4go
•buttons
directly
Toof
•title
directly
To
any
go
•achapter
to
directly
To
any
go
chapter
during
to
directly
any
DVD
chapter
during
tobriefly
any
playback,
DVD
chapter
during
playback,
DVD
during
playback,
DVD
When
ago
on
disc
has
more
than
one
chapter
or.
a
chapter/track.
beginning
the
current
chapter/track.
•toto
Press
SKIP
•you
Press
.
•you
twice
SKIP
Press
•.
SKIP
Press
twice
to
.
step
SKIP
briefly
twice
back
tobriefly
to
step
twice
the playback,
back
tobriefly
step
to back
the
to step
to previous
back
the to the
apter
•DISPLAY
Press
SKIP
or
briefly
during
to
to
option.
NTER
press
view
the
to
view
option.
the
to more
view
option.
the
option.
press
DISPLAY
press
press
and
press
DISPLAY
press
and
press
DISPLAY
press
and
press
vprevious
/.
Vand
tov
select
/>
V
tothe
vprevious
select
/ V to
the
vselect
/ V playback
tothe
select the
not
disc
within
isENTER
not
within
disc
has
than
one
track,
can
to
previous
chapter/track.
previous
chapter/track.
chapter/track.
chapter/track.
• To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback,
Notes:
•in
Press
SKIP
. twice
briefly
to stepyou
back
tomove
the
select
the
next
chapter/track
or
to
return
to
the
chapter/track
chapter/track
icon.
chapter/track
Then,
icon.
chapter/track
input
Then,
icon.
the
input
Then,
chapter/track
icon.
the
input
Then,
chapter/track
the
input
chapter/track
the
chapter/track
assword.
ut
. the
password.
another
chapter/track
enu
pressplayback,
DISPLAY and press v / V to select the
previous
chapter/track.
• To go
• asTofollows:
to
go
•control
any
directly
Tochapter
go
• to
directly
To
any
during
gochapter
to
directly
DVD
during
to
playback,
chapter
during
playback,
DVD
during
playback,
DVD
• Ifdirectly
parental
is
set
and
theany
discchapter
is any
not DVD
within
beginning
of
the
current
chapter/track.
number
number
or
use
number
or
use
number
or
use
or
use
b
/
B.
b
/
B.
b
/
B.
b
/
B.
chapter/track
icon. Then, input the chapter/track
press
DISPLAY
press
and
DISPLAY
press
press
DISPLAY
press
and
DISPLAY
and
press
and
press
v
/ playback
Vpress
to
select
vthe
/V
the
tovselect
/ V tothe
vselect
/ V tothe
select
the
not
set
the
within
and
disc
is •set
the
isyou
not
and
discwithin
the
is•SKIP
not
disc
within
isthe
not
within
rating
settings
you
must
input
password.
t•ontrol
an
option
Press
.
or
>
briefly
during
to
To
go
directly
to
any
chapter
during
DVD
playback,
Press
SKIP
.
twice
briefly
toicon.
step
back
to
the theinput
number or use b / B.
chapter/track
chapter/track
Then,
chapter/track
icon.
input
chapter/track
Then,
the
chapter/track
input
Then,
icon.
the
input
Then,
chapter/track
chapter/track
the chapter/track
oes
Your
receiver
does
does
ettings
tceiver
ou
assword.
input
must
the
you
input
password.
must
the
input
password.
the
password.
(See
on
page
21).
select
the
next
chapter/track
or to
return
to
the
option.
press
DISPLAY
and
press
v“Lock
/ Vicon.
toMenu”
select
the
previous
chapter/track.
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
SEARCH
SEARCH
SEARCH
SEARCH
or
use
number
number
or
use
number
or
use
or
use
b
/
B.
b
/
B.
b
/
B.
b
/
B.
different
n
from
code
different
from
from
beginning
of
the
current
chapter/track.
Menu”
21).
n
page
on
21).
page
21).
chapter/track
icon.number
Then,
input
the
chapter/track
• go
DVDs
may
have
a regionduring
code. Your
receiver does
directly
to
any
chapter
DVD
DVD-A
DVD-V
you
1.
Press
Press
hold
and
Press
SKIP/SCAN
hold
1.receiver
and
Press
SKIP/SCAN
hold
.
and
SKIP/SCAN
or
hold
.
>
SKIP/SCAN
for
or .
>
about
for
orto.
>
about
for
orplayback,
>
aboutfor about
receiver
for
is
1this
receiver
is•1.receiver
1and
is1.receiver
1•b
SEARCH
number
or
use
/ To
B.
Press
SKIP
.
twice
briefly
to
step
the
not
play
discs
that
have
a/ region
code
different
from
region
ode.
have
ceiver
awithin
code.
does
region
Your
code.
does
Your
does
does
24
press
DISPLAY
and
press
vback
V to
select
the
is
notYour
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-V
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
DVD-A
two
seconds
two
seconds
during
two
seconds
playback.
during
two
seconds
playback.
during
playback.
during
playback.
SEARCH
SEARCH
SEARCH
SEARCH
previous
chapter/track.
1. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > for about
your
receiver.
The
region
code
for this receiver is 1
egion
cs
different
ave
that
acode
region
have
from
different
acode
region
different
from
code
different
from
from
chapter/track
icon.
password.
24Then,24input the
24 chapter/track
The receiver
The
will
receiver
now
The
go
will
receiver
into
now
The
SEARCH
go
will
receiver
into
now
mode.
go
into
now
mode.
go
into
SEARCH
mode.
mode.
DVD-V
DVD-A
SEARCH
two seconds
(one).
1.directly
Press
and
1.
hold
Press
SKIP/SCAN
and
Press
hold
1. SEARCH
and
Press
SKIP/SCAN
.
hold
and
or
SKIP/SCAN
>
hold
.
for
SKIP/SCAN
about
or .
> for
or .
>
aboutfor
or >
about
for aboutduring playback.
• 1receiver
To
go
to
any
chapter
during
DVD
playback,
er.
ode
receiver
egion
The
for
code
region
this
is
for
code
this
receiver
for
is
1this
receiver
is
1
is1.
number
or
use
b1SEARCH
/will
B.
Press
2. and
Press
hold
2. and
Press
SKIP/SCAN
2.
and
Press
SKIP/SCAN
.
and
SKIP/SCAN
or
hold
.
>
orselect
.
>seconds
or
>playback.
or >playback.
press
andhold
press
/ VSKIP/SCAN
to
the.
The receiver will now go into SEARCH mode.
twohold
seconds
two
during
seconds
two
playback.
seconds
during
two
playback.
during
during
in2. Press
1.
and
holdDISPLAY
SKIP/SCAN
.
orv>
for
about
24
receiver
does
repeatedly
repeatedly
to select
repeatedly
toreceiver
the
select
repeatedly
required
toThe
the
select
required
speed:
toThe
the
select
required
speed:
the
required
speed:
speed:
chapter/track
icon.
Then,
input
the
chapter/track
Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or >
Theplayback.
will
now
receiver
go
into
will
receiver
SEARCH
now
The
go
will
receiver
into
now
mode.
SEARCH
go
will
into
nowSEARCH
mode.
go into SEARCH
mode. 2.mode.
. two
DVD-V
DVD-A
seconds
during
SEARCH
different
from
X2, X4,
X2,
X16X4,
or X100
X2,
X16
X4,
orand
X100
X2,
X16
X4,
or X100
X16
or hold
X100
number
or
use
b
/ B.
repeatedly to select the required speed:
Press
2.
hold
Press
2.
SKIP/SCAN
and
Press
2. and
Press
SKIP/SCAN
.
holdand
orSKIP/SCAN
>
hold
.
SKIP/SCAN
or .
> or .
> or >
The receiver will2.now
go into
SEARCH
mode.
Press
and
hold
SKIP/SCAN
.
or
>
for
about
receiver
1
3.
To exit
3.is SEARCH
To exit
3.1.SEARCH
To
mode,
exit
3. SEARCH
To
press
mode,
exit
PLAY.
SEARCH
press
mode,
PLAY.
mode,
PLAY.
PLAY.
X2, X4, X16 or X100
repeatedly
to
repeatedly
select
repeatedly
the
topress
required
select
repeatedly
topress
the
select
speed:
required
tothe
select
required
speed:
the required
speed: speed:
2.
.
or >
oesPress and hold SKIP/SCAN
two
seconds
during
playback.
DVD-V
DVD-A
SEARCH
3. To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY.
X2,
X4,required
X16
X2,
or X100
X4,
X2,
X16X4,
or X100
X2,
X16X4,
or X100
X16 or X100
repeatedly
to select
the
speed:
from
24
The
receiver
will
now
go
into
SEARCH
mode.
Note:
Note:
Note:
3.and
Tohold
exit
SEARCH
3. To exit
3.mode,
SEARCH
To
exit
3.
press
To
mode,
exit
PLAY.
press
mode,PLAY.
press
mode,PLAY.
press PLAY.
1.
Press
SKIP/SCAN
.
orSEARCH
>
forSEARCH
about
X16
or
X100
isNote:
1X2, X4,
2.
Press
and
hold
SKIP/SCAN
.
or
>
When
DVD
When
audio
a• using
DVD
When
disc
audio
aplayback.
using
DVD
thatdisc
includes
audio
a DVD
thatdisc
includes
audio
that
disc
includes
that
includes
• using
Note:
two aseconds
during
3.• When
To exit• using
SEARCH
mode,
press
PLAY.
repeatedly
to
select
the
pictures,pictures,
this operation
pictures,
this
operation
may
pictures,
thisbe
operation
may
permitted
thisbe
operation
may
permitted
inrequired
be
some
may
permitted
in speed:
be
some
permitted
in somein some
• When using a DVD audio disc that includes
The
receiver
will
now
go
into
SEARCH
mode.
Note:
Note:
Note:
X2,
X4,
X16
orNote:
X100
picture segments.
picture segments.
picture
segments.
picture
segments.
pictures, this operation may be permitted in some
and
hold
SKIP/SCAN
.
or
>
When
using
When
a DVD
When
audio
a• using
DVD
disc
When
that
audio
aPLAY.
using
DVD
includes
disc
audio
a DVD
thatdisc
includes
audio
thatdisc
includes
that includes
•SEARCH
• using
Note: 2. Press• 3.
To
exit
mode,
press
picture
segments.
pictures,
this
pictures,
operation
pictures,
thismay
operation
pictures,
be
thispermitted
operation
may
thisbe
operation
inmay
permitted
some
be may
permitted
in be
some
permitted
in some
in some
repeatedly
to select
the
speed:
a DVD
audio
disc
thatrequired
includes
• When using
picture segments.
picture segments.
picture segments.
X2,operation
X4,picture
X16 orsegments.
X100
pictures, this
Note: may be permitted in some
To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY.
picture 3.
segments.
• When using a DVD audio disc that includes
pictures, this operation may be permitted in some
Note:
picture segments.
• When using a DVD audio disc that includes
pictures, this operation may be permitted in some
picture segments.
1
2
1
2
1
3
2
3
1 1
2 2
3
3
1
21
32
3
1
2
Operação
3
1
3
2
Operation
2
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
1
2
ation
n
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
3
3 1
1
1
2
1
2
3
3
DVD-A
Search
DVD-V
DVD-A
VCD2.0
VCD1.1
1
2
Introduction
1
12
2
3
3
1
1
1 2
2
23
3
3
4
4
Operation
Introduction
Operation
When a disc has more than one title/group, you can
Press m or M during playback.
move to another title/group as follows:
The DVD/CD Receiver will now go into SEARCH mode.
Operação
de
DVD
ou
VCD
(continuação)
� Press
DISP.,or
then
press theCD
appropriate
numbered (Continued)
DVD
Video
Operation
Press m or M repeatedly to select the
button (0-9) to select a title number.
required speed: mX2, mX4, mX8, mX16,
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
(Continued)
Introduction
VCD2.0 VCD1.1
DVD-V
General Features (continued)
Markerde
Search
mX100
(backward)
or MX2, MX4, MX8,
Marcador
Busca
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety
Precautions
. . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK
....................2
Moving
Repetir
A-Bto another
MX16,
MX100
(forward).
Como
marcar
um
ponto
de
reprodução.
You
can
start
playback
from
a
memorized
to
Playing
an
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Discpoint.
. . . .Up
. 23
Table
of
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
VCD1.1
VCD2.0
DVD-V
VCD1.1(continued)
VCD2.0DVD-V
DivX VCD2.0 VCD1.1
DVD-A Features
DVD-V
DVD-A
. . . . . . . . . General
23 Repeat
Marker
Search
A-B
With
apoints
Video
CD,bethe
Search speed changes:
nine
can
� Pause
. . a. reprodução
. . .memorized.
. . . . . . a. partir
. . . . .de. .9. pontos
. . . . . memo. . . 23
Você
pode
iniciar
Disc . . . Before
. . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
mX2,
mX4,
mX8,
mX16
(backward) orUp to
When
title Discs
onaasequence
disc
You
can
start
playback
a memorized
To
amarcar
mark,
follow
these
steps.
Toa repeat
in.DVD-A
�enter
Moving
to another
Track
. . . . . .a.point.
. . . .MARKER
. . . . 23
Playable
. .DVD-V
. has
. . . .more
.a. title:
.than
. . VCD2.0
. .one
. . .chapter
. VCD1.1
. . . . .or. .a. 4
rizados.
Para
umfrom
ponto,
pressione
tecla
. . . . . . . . . Repeat
23
A-B
MX2,
MX4,
MX8,
MX16
(forward).
discPrecautions
has more
nine
points
can disc
be
memorized.
umathan
seqüência.
� ponto
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
. .press
. .ícone
. . .MARKER
. do
. . marcador
. . . . when
. . . . 23
. . . one
.at
. .your
.track,
. . .chosen
. you
. . . can
. . starting
. .move
. . . . to
.point.
.another
.....5
. . . . . . . Para
.chapter/track
. 23repetir
During
playback,
Press
A-B
em
um
desejado
no
disco.
O
as follows:in a title:
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
To
enter
a
mark,
follow
these
steps.
To
repeat
a
sequence
To �exit
SEARCH
Search.
. .reaches
. .mode,
. . . . the
.press
. . spot
. . .PLAY.
. that
. . . .you
. . . want
. . . . .to. 23 (Contin
Notes Aonappears
. . . no
. .on
. .the
. . TV
.inicial
. screen.
. . . escolhido.
. . . . . . . .“A
. .–”
..5
briefly
. . . . . . . 1.
. . Pressione
23
playback
aDiscs
tecla
A-B
ponto
aparece
na tela rapidamente.
Repita
esse
procedimento
� Press .
or
>
briefly
during
playback
to
select
JPEG
Disc
Operation
. . . press
. . . . . MARKER
. . . . . . . .when
. . . . . . 24
About
Symbols
.again
. . . chosen
. . . .your
. . .starting
. . . . . . point.
. end
. . . .point.
....5
During
disc
playback,
Press
A-BA-B
. . . . . . . . . aparece
23
memorize.
na
tela at
dayour
TV rapidamente.
the
nextPress
chapter/track
or at
to returnchosen
to the beginning
of
paraViewing
marcar
atéJPEG
9 pontos.
a
. .spot
. . . on
.that
. .the
. you
.TV
. . screen
.want
. . . . to
. . . . 24
The
marker
icondisc
will
appear
briefly.
Aappears
briefly
onPanel
the
Panel
Rear
. . .screen,
. . . . .and
. . .the
. .repeat
....6
General
Features
playback
reaches
the
. . . . . . . Front
. . 24
A-B and
appears
briefly
onTV
the.screen.
TV
the current
chapter/track.
� Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
aA-B
tecla
A-B no
ponto
Remote
Control
Overview
. . . chosen
.final
. . . escolhido.
. . . . . . point.
. .“A
. .–. B”
..7
. . . . . . . 2.
.�. Pressione
24
sequence
begins.
memorize.
Press
again
at to
your
Repeat
step
1
to
enter
up
to
nine
Marker
points
Press
.
twice
briefly
step back toend
the previous
VCD1.1
VCD2.0
DivX
DVD-A
DVD-V
Repeat
Como
ou
The
marker
iconeliminar
will
TV
�buscar
Still
Picture
. .appear
. . . a. cena
.on
. .the
. .marcada.
. . .screen
. . . . .briefly.
. . . . . . 24
nacancel
tela briefly
da the
TVonesequence,
a repetição
daand
seqüência
. . . . . . . . . aparece
24 A-B To
appears
the
TV screen,
the
repeatirá
press
A-B.
on discs
a disc.
chapter/track.
ote - Repeat Chapter/Title/Off
DVD-Video
�
Moving
to
another
file
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.O
. 24
1.
Durante
a
reprodução,
pressione
a
tecla
SEARCH.
sequence
begins.
. . . . . . . Preparation
.�. iniciar.
24 go directly to any chapter during DVD playback,
Repeat
stepstated
1 to enter
up to all
nine
Marker points
To
Unless
otherwise,
operations
described use
�
To
rotate
picture.
. .playing
. . .Scene
. .aparecerá
. chapter,
. . . . . . na
.press
. tela.
. . . . . 24
. . . . . . . Connections
. . 24
menu
do
Marcador
de pesquisa
ToDISP.
cancel
the
sequence,
press
A-B.
To
repeat
the currently
on
a
disc.
To
Recall
a
Marked
3
press
Then,
press
/4
to
select
the
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-13
the
remote
control.
Some
features
may
also
be
a tecla A-B novamente para cancelar.
Programmed
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . 3.
. . Pressione
24
chapter/track
icon. Then,
the
available
on the Setup
menu.
TVTime
Connections
. . . DVD-V
. . enter
. . . . VCD2.0
. . . chapter/track
. . . VCD1.1
..........8

para
2. REPEAT.
Dentro
de
10
segundos,
pressione
as
Search
During
disc
playback,
press
SEARCH.
Repeat
Programmed
. . the
. . .TV
. .screen.
. . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 25
Repeat
Chapter
icon Tracks.
appears
on
ToThe
Recall
a Marked
Scene
number
using
the numbered
buttons .(0-9).
Optional
Equipment
Connections
...........9
selecionar
número
da
marca
você.deseja
Erasing
aum
Track
from
Programme
.on
. . the
. . buscar
.screen.
. 25
The MARKER
SEARCH
menuque
will List
appear
. . . . . . . . . 25
The Search
Time
SearchDVD-V
you
Aerial
Connections
.function
. . . . .VCD2.0
.allows
. . . . .VCD1.1
. . . to
. .start
. . . .playing
. . 10 at
DVD-V
To
repeat
the
title
currently
playing,
press
Time
Moving
to
another
TITLE/GROUP
Busca
por
Tempo
During
disc
playback,
press
SEARCH.
ou
eliminar.
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
List
.
.
.
.
. . 25
t . . . . . . . . 25
any
chosen
time
on
the
disc.
1
Within
10 seconds,
press /2 to select a. marker
Speaker
System
Connection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-12
ote
REPEAT
a
second
time.
iniciar
aSearch
reprodução
em qualquer
tempo
escolhido
noat
MARKER
SEARCH
DivXThe
Disc
Operation
. . .menu
. . . .will
. . appear
. . . . . on
. . .the
. .screen.
. . . . 26
DVD-A
st . . . . . Para
.For
. The
25two-digit
Time
function
allows
you
to
start
playing
number
that
you
want
tothe
recall.
Pressione
aTitle
tecla
ENTER
e aonreprodução
começa a
Repeat
icon
appears
TV screen.
� Transmitter.
. .during
.press
. . . . the
.playback.
. .numbered
. . . . . .The
. .buttons
. on-screen
. . . . . . 11 dis- 3. The
numbers,
Press
DISP.
Speaker
Setup
. . . . . . . press
. . . . .1. /2
. . to
. . select
. . . . . a. .marker
. . . . 27
. . . . . . . disco:
.(0-9)
. any
26 �in
chosen
time
the
Within
10 seconds,
rapid
Changing
aon
channel
of screen.
Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
playsuccession.
appears
ondisc.
the
partir
da
cena
Ou,
pressione
a. title/group,
e can
Press
ENTER.
When
amarcada.
disc
has .press
more
than
one
To
exit
Repeat
mode,
REPEAT
atecla
Additional
Information
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.third
. . .CLEAR
. . . you
. 28
. . . . . . . 1.
. . Pressione
27 �Press
a
tecla
DISPLAY
durante
a
reprodução.
number that you want to recall.
during
playback.
disTheDISP.
Time
Search
box
shows .the
Setting
a ID
of Transmitter
. The
.elapsed
. . .on-screen
. . .playing
. . . . .time
11 of
o
número
da
marca
é
apagado
da
lista.
move
to
another
title/group
as
follows:
Playback
will
start
from
the
Marked
scene.
time.
Last
Condition
Memory
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
. . . . . . . . .A
28quadro
theappears
decurrent
buscadisc.
porthe
tempo
mostrará
o tempo
de 11
on
screen.
�play
Assembling
and
Connecting
to the
Speakers
VCD1.1
VCD2.0
DVD-A
DVD-V
Slow
Motion
Press
� ENTER.
Press
The
Repeat
Off icon
TV
Screen
Saver
.DISP.,
.the
. appears
. .MARKER
.then
. . .on
.press
.the
.marca,
.SEARCH
. the
. .screen.
.appropriate
. . .menu,
. . . .o. seu
.numbered
. 28
To
remove
press
. . . . . . . . . reprodução
28 �The
pode
reproduzir
qualquer
teclando
Timedecorrido.
Search
box showspress
ofTime 4. Você
Speaker
Connections.
. the
. . .elapsed
.3. /4
. . to
. playing
. select
. . . . time
. .the
. 12
Within
10 seconds,
Playbackbutton
willthe
start
from
scene.
(0-9)
a. title
Controlling
TV
. to
. the
. select
. .Marked
. . .de
.pesquisa.
. . number.
. . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . Speaker
. . 28Press
the Positioning.
current
disc.
SEARCH.
SLOW
-/+
during
pause.
número
no
menu
do
marcador
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
Search
icon( in
the on-screen
display.
/)
para
selecionar
o ícone do
as teclas
Operation
withthe
Radio
. . . . .SEARCH
. . . . . . . .menu,
. . . . .press
. . . . 29
To remove
MARKER
receiver
enter
. . . . . . . 2.
. . Pressione
28The
Within
10 will
seconds,
to
Time Video CDs - Repeat Track/All/Off
The “-:--:--”
in
Before
Operation
.appears
. . . SLOW
. .press
. .the
. mode.
. Time
.3. /4
. . Search
. . select
. . . box.
. . .the
. 14-19
Moving
to
another
Presetting
the
radio
stations
. . .CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
e
“-:--:-”
aparecerá
na
tela.
SEARCH.
To
clear
a
Marked
Scene
. . . . . . . . . relógio
29
Search
icon
in
the
display.
To repeat the track currently playing, press
Mini
Glossary
for
Audio
Stream
&required
Surround
Use
the
SLOW
-/+
to on-screen
select
thethe
speed:
t to
Within
10
seconds,
use
number
buttons
Listening
to theDVD-A
radio . VCD2.0
. . . . . . VCD1.1
. . . . . . DivX
. . . . . . . . 29
DVD-V
. . . . . . . . . 29
ZOOM
The
Time
box.
REPEAT.
Mode
.“-:--:--”
. .o1/8,
. tempo
.the
.appears
.t
.required
. inicial
. . in
. or
.the
.em
. start
. horas,
. . . Search
. . minutos
. . .Enter
. . . e. hours,
.segundos
.T
. . . 14
3. Entre
com
1/16,
t
1/4
t
1/2
(backward),
or
enter
time.
During
disc. .playback,
Other
Functions.
. . . .Scene
. . . on
.press
. . . . TV
.SEARCH.
. screen.
. . . . . . . . . . 30
To
clear
apara
Marked
. . . . . . . . . 29
CAUTION
Repeat
Track
icon
1. The
Use
Zoom
ampliar
imagem
deappear
vídeo.
Sound
Mode
.T
.and
. 1/4
. . seconds
.or
. .use
.Se
. 1/2
.the
. from
. (forward).
.number
. teclou
. .left
. . .to
. número
.right
. . . .in. to
14
When
a title
onappears
a adisc
hasthe
more
thanon
one chapter
or a
Within
10
seconds,
buttons
1/16,
T
1/8,
T
minutes,
the
da
esquerda
para
a
direita.
você
o
The
MARKER
SEARCH
menu
will
Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .the
. . .screen.
. 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display
RISK OF .start
ELECTRIC
discdisc
hasplayback,
morecurrently
than press
one playing,
track, youpress
can move to another
.para
. . .time.
.apagá-lo,
. .SHOCK
. Enter
. . . . .hours,
. . . . . . . 15
enter
the required
During
box.
repeat
pressione
CLEAR
2. To
Pressione
a. .reprodução
Dimmer
.athe
.1tecla
. /2
. disc
. to
. ZOOM
. select
. . . . durante
. the
. . . marker
. . SEARCH.
. . number
. . . . . . ou
.that
. .com
. 30
DO
NOT press
OPEN
To exit
slow motion
mode,
PLAY.em seguida
Press
you
. . . . . . . . . errado,
30
chapter/track
as follows:
Initial
Settings
. .the
. . wrong
. . . . .numbers,
. . . . .left
. press
. .to. .right
. . . .in. 16-19
If you enter
CLEAR
to
remove
minutes,
and
seconds
from
the
The MARKER
REPEAT
. . a.congelada
.second
. erase.
. SEARCH
. . . . time.
. . .menu
. ativar
. . .will
. .aappear
. função
. . . . on
. ZOOM.
. .the
. .screen.
. . A. . 30
oGeneral
número
correto.
aMute
imagem
. . . . . . . . . tecle
30 �box.
want
to
the numbers
you entered.
� Press
.
orpara
>on
briefly
during
playback
to select
Operation
. . .Then
. . .THE
.enter
. .RISK
. the
. . .correct
. . . . .num16
The
Repeat
All
icon
appears
the
TV
screen.
CAUTION:
TO. .REDUCE
Using
the
Headphone
Jack
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . you
.da
. 30
1
Press
/2
to
select
the
marker
number
. . . . . . . 4.
. . Pressione
30 �If Language
bers.
moldura
quadrada
aparece no canto
the
next chapter/track
or to direito
return inferior
tothat
the beginning
of
you
enter
the. wrong
remove
.para
. .ELECTRIC
. confirmar.
.numbers,
. . . . . SHOCK
. press
.A. reprodução
. . CLEAR
. . . . . .to.inicia
. . . 16
ENTER
a
Press
CLEAR.
OF
Selecting
the
Input
Source
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
To
exit
Repeat
mode,
press
REPEAT
a
third
want
to
erase.
. . . . . . . . . 30ote
you
entered.
DO. NOT
COVER
current
chapter/track.
tela. Thethe
Within
10
ENTER
�the
Display
.selecionado.
. .seconds,
.REMOVE
. . . . . .Then
.press
. . .enter
. (OR
. . the
. BACK)
. .correct
. .to. .confirm
.num16-17 the
marker
number
will be erased from the list.
partir
donumbers
tempo
XTS
(Excellent
True
Sound)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
time.
bers.
. . . . . . . .Slow
. 30 �motion
NO
USER-SERVICEABLE
playback
� CLEAR.
Press . twice briefly to step back to the previous
Press
start
Audio.
.time.
. . . . . in
. . reverse
. . . . . . is. PARTS
.not
. . .applicable
. INSIDE
. . . . . . .for
. . 17
2. The
Cada
vez
for
Repeat
and
Repeat
TV
XTS
prochapter/track.
.que
.Off
.steps
.aicon
. tecla
. . appears
.2.ZOOM
. . . .3on
. to
.the
. erase
.pressionada,
. . .screen.
.additional
. . . . . o. .tamanho
. marker
. . 30
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
. . . . . . . .Video
. 30 �Within
CD.
10 seconds,
press
Playback
starts from
the selected
on
the
you
Lock
(Parental
Control)
. ENTER
. . . .time
. . .to
. .confirm
. . disc.
. . . If. the
18
The marker
number will be erased from the list.
PERSONNEL.
numbers.
da
imagem
na
TV
muda
na
seqüência:
100%,
400%
,
. . . . . . . . . 30 �start
enter
an
invalid
time,
playback
will
continue
from
the
current
�
To
go
directly
to
any
chapter
during
DVD
playback,
time.
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Repeat
stepsScreen
2 and fit
3 (ajustar
to erasea additional
marker
Reference
point. starts from the selected time on the disc. If you
800%,
100
%.
Playback
3tela)
press DISP.
press
/4 toe select
the
To1600%,
remove
the Then,
MARKER
SEARCH
menu,
press
numbers.
ote
This
lightning
withwill
arrowhead
an
enter an
invalid
time, flash
playback
continue symbol
from thewithin
current
Language
Codefit
List
. .icon.
. . tela
. .Then,
. a. .partir
. enter
. . . de
. .the
.400%)
. chapter/track
. . . . . . 31
chapter/track
ModoSEARCH.
Screen
(ajustar
Operation
equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user
On
a Video
CD
with
must
Country
Code
List
.o.jeito
. .you
. da
. .numbered
.imagem
. . . set
. . .PBC
.buttons
.menu,
. .to. .Off
.(0-9).
. on
. tela
. . 31
number
using
the
To remove
thePBC,
MARKER
SEARCH
press
. . . . . . . . . 31 point. about the presence of uninsulated dangerous
Você
pode
mudar
aparecer
na
DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 the
setup
menuDVD-V
to use
page
Troubleshooting
. . .the
. . .Repeat
. . .VCD2.0
. . function.
. . . .VCD1.1
. . . See
. . . .DivX
. . 32-33
SEARCH.
DVD-A
. . . . . . . . . 31
Zoom
quando
você
estiver
reproduzindo
um
filme
em
DVD.
voltage
within
the
product’s
enclosure
that
may
be
Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 19Specifications
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
. . . . . . . 32-33
ote
sufficient magnitude
electric
Pressione
asfunction
teclas /
para
selecionar
entre
Normal,
GeneralofFeatures
. . . . . . . .to. constitute
. . . . . . . a. risk
. . . of
. 20-22
The Zoom
allows
you
to
enlarge
the video
VCD1.1
VCD2.0
DivX
DVD-A
DVD-V
shock to persons.
. . . . . . . . . 34
For
two-digit
numbers,
press
the numbered
buttons
Zoom
� Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20
Enhanced
e Máximo.
image(0-9)
and(melhorado)
to rapid
movesuccession.
through
the enlarged image.
in
� Moving
to another mark
CHAPTER/TRACK
. . .triangle
. . 20
The
Zoom
function
allows
you
to
enlarge
the
video
The exclamation
within an equilateral
paraplayback
mover através
imagem to
3. Use as
teclas
Press
ZOOM during
or stilldaplayback
� Slow
. . . .the
. . user
. . . about
. . . . .the
. . presence
. . . . . . 20
is Motion.
intended .to. alert
of
image and to move through the enlarged image.
VCD2.0 VCD1.1
activate
the
Zoom function.
DVD-A
DVD-Vinstructions
Slow
Motion
ampliada.
20 � Still important
About
the symbols
for
operating
and maintenance
(servicing)
Picture and
Frame-by-Frame
Playback
. 20
Press
ZOOM
playbackthe
or magnification
still playback
to
If you
press during
ZOOM repeatedly,
level
instructions
� Search.
. . . . .in. .the
. .instructions
. . . . . . . .accompanying
. . . . . . . . . .the
. 20
4. Para
retornar
aZoom
reprodução
normal,
pressione
tecla
Press
SLOW
-/+to
during
pause.
Indicates
hazards
likely
cause
harm to athe
unit
activate
the
function.
product.
increases
up to four
steps.
� Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The receiver
willdamage.
enter SLOW mode.
CLEAR.
or other
material
Ifitself
you
press
ZOOM
repeatedly,
100%
size
→
400%
size the
→ magnification
800% → level
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK
Use
increases
upsize
to the
four
steps.
1600%
→SLOW
100% -/+
sizeto select the required speed: t
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
Indicates special operating features of this unit.
otas:
HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR
1/16,
t 1/8,
t→
1/4800%
or t→
1/2 (backward), or T
100% size
→ 400%
size
� Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Use the 1 2 3 4 buttons to move through the
MOISTURE.
size
→
100%
size
1/16,
T
1/8,
Tfor
1/4
or
T the
1/2
(forward).
• O1600%
Zoom
pode
não
funcionar
em
alguns
DVDs.
Indicates
tips
and
hints
making
task
easier.
� Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
zoomed
picture.
WARNING:
Do not
install this. .equipment
Special DVD
Features
. . . . . . .in. a. .confined
. . . . . .space
. . 22
1
3Fit
4slow
Use
theScreen
buttons
to
move
through
the
To2exit
motion
mode,
press
PLAY.
•
O
modo
(ajustar
à
tela)
está
disponível
such�as
a
book
case
or
similar
unit.
Manufactured
under
license
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
“Dolby”,
Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
zoomed
picture.disco DVD, VR e arquivo de filme.
reproduzir
“Proquando
Logic”,
and
the
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
of
Dolby
ote
� Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992zoom
function
may
not
work
for
some
DVDs.
� Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1997The
Dolby
Laboratories.
All
rights
reserved.
ote
ote
� Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Slowunder
motion
playback
in reverse
is Systems,
not applicable
Manufactured
license
from Digital
Theater
Inc. for
ThePat.
zoom
function
may not work for some DVDs.
� Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
US
No.
5,451,942
Video CD. 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and
other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
CAUTION:
31
1
12
2
1
21 2
32 3
34
4
1
1
21 2
32 3
34
45
5
1
1
2
1
2
2 3
This DVD/CD receiver employs a laser system.
To ensure proper use of this product, please read this owner’s
manual carefully and retain it for future reference. Should the
unit require maintenance, contact an authorized service loca22
tion (see service procedure).
Performing controls, adjustments, or carrying out procedures
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radi-
Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems,
21
Inc. All rights reserved.
OTES ON COPYRIGHTS:
21
It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast
via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without
permission.
Installation and Setup
Introduction
Introduction
Installation Installation
and Setup a
This lightning flash with arrowhead symbol withinDISPLAY
an
Initial
Settings
Progressive Scan Video provides the highest quality
GENERAL
OPERATION
equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user
5. Press SETUP or PLAY to exit the Setup menu.
DVD-V
DVD-A
Display Mode
DISPLAY
To go to theabout
nextthe
level:
less flickering.
DVD-V
DVD-A
presence
uninsulated
dangerous
TVpictures
Aspect with
By using
the Setup
menu,
canofmenu
make
various
1.
Press
Theyou
Setup
appears.
B onSETUP.
the
Remote
Control.
Press
16 : 9
TV Aspect the Component
voltage
within
the
product’s enclosure
that may be
If
you
are
using
Video
jacks
for
Display
Mode
setting
works
only when
the
TV Aspect
adjustments
to items such as picture and sound. You
LANGUAGE
Display a
Mode
Widescreen
sufficient
magnitude
to constitute
a risk of electric 4:3:
Select when
standard
4:3
TVthat
is connected.
connection
to“4:3”.
TV
or monitor
is compatible with
2. go
Use
/ of
V
select
thesubtitles
desired
option
mode
is set to
To
to to
the
previous
level: and
can also
setback
avlanguage
for
the
thethen press
Progressive Scan
Off
shock
to
persons.
B to move to theLANGUAGE
second level. The screen shows
a progressive
scan
signal,
setwide
Progressive
Scan to
Operação
de
DVD
ou
(continuação)
16:9
Wide: Select
when
a 16:9
TV is connected.
SetupPress
menu,
among
other
things.
For
details
on each
on the
Remote
thebcurrent
setting
forControl.
theVCD
selected
item,
as well as
Letterbox:
Displays a wide picture with bands on the
On.
English
within
an equilateral triangle
Menu Language
Setup menu
item,The
seeexclamation
pages
19mark
to 22.
alternate
setting(s).
upper
and
lower
portions
of
the
screen.
alert the userOriginal
about the presence of
Discto
Audio
GENERALis intended
OPERATION
para
gravações
posteriores.
ON progressive
scan: DVD de áudio contém
To Turn
DVD-V
DVD-AMuitos
Mode
v /exit
V tothe
select
the second
desired option
then Display
3. Use
ToIntroduction
display
and
Menu:
About
the
symbols
for
instructions
Disc
Subtitle
Off
important
operating
and maintenance
(servicing)
Panscan:
Automatically
displays
picture
texto de
tela,
como
a biografia
dosthe
artistas,
letras
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. .wide
. to
. . the
.lista
. . input
. ou
. .on
. of
.the
. . 23
Safety
Precautions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. accompanying
. . press
. . . . .of. . .the
.2
press
B
to
move
to
the
third
level.
1.
Press
SETUP.
The
Setup
menu
appears.
Introduction
Discin
Menu
Press SETUP to instructions
display the
menu.
A second
the instructions
Original
Connect
component
out
of
thewhen
DVD
entire
screen
and
cuts
off
the
portions
that
do
not
fit.
Display
Modean
setting
works
only
the
TV
Aspect
Verificando
o
conteúdo
dos
discos
de
DVD:
Move
Select
Indicates
hazards
likely
to
cause
harm
to
the
unit
de
músicas.
Alguns
DVD
de
Áudio
contém
galeria
Playing
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.de
.. .fotos
.. .. 23
Table
of
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
product.
SETUP
take
you
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
Safety
Precautions
. . to
. the
. initial
. . desired
. . screen.
. . . . setting
. . . . . then
. . . .press
....2
your
monitor/television,
set
your
television
or
monitor
4. will
Use
v // V
V to
toback
select
then
2.
Use
v
select
option
mode is
set or
to other
“4:3”.material damage.
itself
� Pause
.Audio
.Input.
. . . .CD
. . .and
. . .MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . . .Disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
Before
Use
. .to. .to
. .the
. ..your
. .level.
. .. .. .. ..The
. .. ..shows
ou
vídeo
clips.
Menus
ENTER
confirm
toContents
move
an
23
Table B
of
.. .. .second
.. .. .. .selection.
.. ..Some
.. screen
.. .. .. .items
.. .. .4-5
.3
to Playing
Component
Progressive
Scan
To goPlayable
tothe
thecurrent
next
level:
WARNING:
TO
PREVENT
FIRE
OR
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
require
additional
steps.
DVD-V
DVD-A
�
Track
.. .. ..bands
.. .. .. .. ..on
. .. .the
Discs
. .. .. .. ..for
. .. .. selected
. .. ..possibilitam
.as4TV Aspect
Letterbox:
Displays
Os
DVDs
podem
menus
que
� Moving
Pause
.to. .another
.a. wide
. . . .picture
. . . .features
. ..with
. .. .. .. 23
23
Before
Use
. .DO
.oferecer
.setting
.NOT
.. .. .the
.. .. .. .lhe
..item,
.. .. .. ..as
.. .. well
.. .. .. 4-5
Indicates
special
operating
of this .unit.
otas:
HAZARD,
EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR
B alternate
on the Remote
PressPrecautions
1. Select
“Progressive
Scan”
on
menu
setting(s).
�
Track/All/Off.
. screen.
. .the
..the
.. ..highest
.DISPLAY
. . especiais.
.. ..or
..Control.
..PLAY
.. .. .. ..Para
..to.. .exit
.. .the
..do
.. .. .. .. .. .. 54
Progressive
Scan
provides
upper
and
lower
portions
of
the
� Repeat
Moving
toVideo
another
Track
. .. .. .. .. .quality
. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
Playable
Discs
. ..usar
. .. o.Move
. .Setup
. .. .. ..Select
acessos
a recursos
menu
5.
Press
SETUP
menu.
MOISTURE.
4:3: Select
when
a
standard
4:3
TV
is
connected.
B.
then
press
• Para
usufruir
da
qualidade
pictures
with
less
�
. flickering.
. and
. . . hints
. . . . for
.máxima
.. .making
.. do
.. ..the
.efeito
.. ..task
.. .surround
.. .. .. .. ..do
23
Notes
.. .. .. .. .the
.. .. .second
.. desired
.. .. .. .. .. .. option
.. .. .. then
.. .. 55
v the
/Discs
Va.to
Useon
Todisco,
go3.
back
to
previous
Indicates
tips
� Search.
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
. .. .. wide
.picture
. ..easier.
Precautions
. .select
. level:
. .. .. .. ..Entre
pressione
tecla
DVD
MENU.
com .o. ..número
Panscan:
Automatically
displays
the
on
the 23
Menu
Language
press
toDomove
IfJPEG
you
are
using
the
not
Disc
Operation
.. wide
.. ..usar
.. .. TV
..Video
.o. ..canal
.. ..saída
..for
.. .. .. de
.. .. áudio
.. .. 24
About
Symbols
.. .install
..to.. .the
.. .third
.. .. ..level.
.. .. .. .. in
.. ..a..confined
.. .. .. .. .. ..space
.. .. 516:9
DVD
de
Áudio,
Wide:
Select
when
is.. .connected.
bWARNING:
on the
PressLANGUAGE
�
Search.
. você
. a.Component
.16:9
. deve
.the
. .jacks
. ..de
23
Notes
onBRemote
Discs
.Control.
. ..this
. equipment
5
entire
screen
and
cuts
off
portions
that
do
not
fit.
DISPLAY
correspondente
ou
use
as
teclas

para
destacar
a
CAUTION
such
as a
a book
case or
similar
Manufactured
under
license
Select
language
for
menu
connection
aJPEG
TV
ordisc
monitor
that
Viewing
.. ..de
.. Dolby
.. saída
.. .. .is
.. compatible
.. .. .Áudio
..“Dolby”,
..with
.do
Front
Panel
.. .. .. ..setting
.. .. .. .. ..and
.. .. .. on-screen
..press
.. .. .. .. 65
analógico
5.1
(conectores
de
JPEG
DisctoaOperation
.from
. Laboratories.
. .. .. .. ..5.1
. .. .seu
. .. 24
24
Symbols
. . .Panel
. the
. the
. .desired
. .Setup
.unit.
4.About
Use
v /and
V toRear
select
then
TV
Aspect
“Pro
Logic”,
and
the
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
of
Dolby
sua
seleção.
Emtoseguida
pressione
ENTER.
RISK
OF ELECTRIC
a progressive
scan
signal,
GENERAL
OPERATION
� Slide
Show
. disc
. . . ..set
.. .. Progressive
.. .. .. ..works.
.. .. .. a.. .Copyright
..to
..1992.. .. .. 24
ENTER
your
selection.
LANGUAGE
Remote
Control
Overview
. .. .. OPEN
..a..tecla
.. SHOCK
.. .Some
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 7Display
Viewing
a
JPEG
. .Scan
. .. .. ..Digital
24
Frontdisplay.
Panel
andconfirm
Rear
Panel
. .. .. .. .. items
6
Home
Theater
System).
saída
DVD-V
DVD-A
Laboratories.
Confidential
DO. NOT
Progressive
Scan
DisplayUnpublished
ModeSe você usar
Mode
require additional steps.
On.
�
Picture
..na
.. All
..sua
.. rights
..Scan
..conexão
.. ..reserved.
.. .. ..On..de
.. .. áudio,
.. .. .. .. ..o..som
.. .. .. .será
1997
Dolby
� Still
Slide
Show Progressive
. .. 24
24
Menu Language
Control
Overview
. . . .appears.
. .English
..............7
1. Remote
Press SETUP.
The
Setup
menu
(Ótica
ouLaboratories.
Coaxial)
Progressive
Scan
highest
DVD-V
DVD-A
Mode
setting
works
only
�
toVideo
another
file
..Off.Theater
.TV
.. ..Systems,
..quality
.. .. .. .. .. Inc.
.. 24
THE
RISK
Disc
Audio
/ CAUTION:
Subtitle
/TO
Menu
Menu
de Títulos
(TITLE
MENU)
� Moving
Still
Picture
. de
. .provides
.from
. when
. mesmo
. Digital
. .. .the
.the
.reproduzindo
. .. ..Aspect
24
5. Disc
Press
SETUP
or Audio
PLAY
toREDUCE
exitOriginal
the
Setup
menu. Display
Turn
ON
progressive
scan:
To
Manufactured
under
license
similar
a qualidade
CD,
um..DVD
2. Preparation
Use v / V to select Disc
theOF
desired
option
then press
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
Subtitle
Off
with
less
flickering.
modepictures
isUSset
to
“4:3”.
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.
a .tecla
TITLE.
Se
corrente
um
Connections
.language
. .second
.NOT
. . .REMOVE
. you
.level.
. . oprefer
. título
.COVER
. . Original
. for
. .(OR
.the
. .BACK)
.shows
.possui
. . .track
. 8-13
BPressione
toSelect
move the
to
the
The
screen
Preparation
áudio.
audio
DO
Disc Menu
other
worldwide
patents
issued
and
pending.
“DTS”
and
“DTS
component
out
of
the
DVD
to
the
input
of
IfConnect
youdeare
using
the
Component
Video
jacks
for
CAUTION:
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
�Surround”
To rotate
picture.
. . trademarks
.with
. . . bands
. . . .of. Digital
. . .the
. .Theater
. . . . . 24
LANGUAGE
the
current
setting
item,
DigitalDisplays
registered
aare
wide
picture
on
menu,
este
aparecerá
na
contrário,
TV
Connections
.selected
. ..TV.
. ..INSIDE
. o. 8Letterbox:
(disc
audio),
subtitles,
and
Connections
. NO
. .receiver
.USER-SERVICEABLE
.for
.. ..the
..employs
.. .tela
.. .. ..da
.the
.. disc
..PARTS
..Caso
.. ..menu.
.as
..well
.. .. ..as
.. .. 8-13
your
monitor/television,
setTracks.
connection
toProgrammed
a
TV
or monitor
Repeat
.. ..compatible
.. Theater
.. .. .. or
.. .. monitor
..Systems,
.. with
.. .. .. .. .. 25
This DVD/CD
laser system.
Systems,
Copyright
2000
Digital
alternate
setting(s).
REFER
SERVICING
TOa QUALIFIED
DVD
Audio
Discs
Programmed
Playback
.your
. .that
. .television
. is
25
and
lowerInc.
portions
of 1996,
the
screen.
Optional
Equipment
Connections
.. .. .. .SERVICE
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 9upper
Moving
to
another
GROUP
menu
do
disco
poderá
não
aparecer.
TV
Connections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8
to
Component
Input.
Inc.
All
rights
reserved.
a
progressive
scan
signal,
set
Progressive
Scan
to
PERSONNEL.
Prev.
LANGUAGE
Erasing
a
Track
fromGrupo
Programme
Original:
Refers
toofsecond
the
language
which
the
To
proper
use
thisoriginal
product,
please
readinthen
this
owner’s
Mudando
para
outro
Repeat Programmed
Tracks.
. . Move
. .List
. . Enter
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
v ensure
/V
toEquipment
select
the
desired
option
3. Use
Aerial
Connections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
Optional
Connections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
On.
Panscan:
Automatically
displays
the
wide
picture
on
the
manual
carefully
retain
it level.
for future
Should
disc
was
recorded.
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
List
.. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Some
DVD
Audio
discs
divide
content
into
Englishreference.
Menu
2.press
OSpeaker
menu
oferece
recursos
como
ângulo
da
câmera,
ethethe
Erasing
adeTrack
from
Programme
List
. .different
. menu
25
B to
move
toand
the
DVD
Audio
is Language
a third
new
disc
format
1.Alguns
Select
“Progressive
Scan”
the
DISPLAY
DVD
Áudio
divide
o on
conteúdo
em
diferentes
System
Connection
.Original
. .. .. .building
. ..Select
. .. .on
. .11-12
Move
Aerial
Connections
. . . .contact
. . with
. .. .an
.. .authorized
..symbol
.. .service
. loca. 10
unit require
maintenance,
screen
and ON
cuts
off
the portions
OTES
COPYRIGHTS:
Disc Audio flash
groups.
Your
player
DivX
Disc
Operation
.enables
.de
.v
.DVD
./ .Vthat
.you
.lhe
. do
.to
. quickly
.not
.List
. fit.
. .o ..access
.. .. .. .. .. .. 26
This
lightning
arrowhead
within
an To
success
of
DVD
toeprovide
highe
quality,
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
25
Turn
ON
progressive
scan:
B.
then
press
opções
idiomas
em
áudio
legendas,
capítulos
para
oentire
grupos.
O seu
reprodutor
permite
acesso
buttons.
2.
Select
“On”
using
the
Other:
select
another
language,
press
number
4. Use
v Transmitter.
/ (see
V
toTo
select
the
desired
setting
then
press
�
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
tion
service
procedure).
Speaker
System
Connection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-12
Disc
Subtitle
Off
,
broadcast
,
broadcast,
show
It
is
forbidden
by
law
to
copy
equilateral
triangle
is intended
to alert
user
different
groups
Speaker
Setup
. diferentes
. .during
. . .. .. ..playback
.. .. .. .. .. durante
.. via
.. .. ..the
.. ..a.on-screen
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
uncompressed,
multi-channel
audio
forthe
a new
DVD
Audio
Discs
Menu
Language
DivX
Disc
Operation
. reprodução,
26
ENTER
to
confirm
selection.
título.
rápido
eScan
fácil
aos
grupos
buttons
then
ENTER
corresponding
�
a your
channel
.. ..procedures
.. .. ..4-digit
.. .. 11
Disc
Original
Moving
to
another
GROUP
via
cable,
play
in public,
or of
rent
copyrighted
without
Performing
controls,
adjustments,
or
component
out
the
DVD
to
input
of
about
the
presence
uninsulated
dangerous
� Changing
Transmitter.
.in.Menu
.audio
.to. .enter
.of
. Transmitter
.of.the
.Some
. carrying
. items
. . .Audio
.out
11
Progressive
experience
quality.
A. .DVD
disc
can
beConnect
Additional
Information
.. .. .. ..selection.
.. .. the
.material
3. display.
Press
ENTER
require
additional
steps.
Speaker
Setup
.DISPLAY
. to
. . confirm
. . ). .. .. .. your
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
27
Select
a
language
for
the
Setup
menu
and
on-screen
number
according
to
the
language
code
list
in
the
permission.
other
than
those
specified
herein
may
result
in
hazardous
radivia
menus
de
tela
(OSDs
voltage
within
the
product’s
enclosure
that
may
be
�
Setting
a
ID
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
your
monitor/television,
set
your
television
or
monitor
� Changing
aby
channel
ofsair.
Transmitter
. . .disc
. . . jacket
. 11 or
3. Pressione
a tecla
TITLE
para
identified
the DVD
logo format
on. the
The
confirm
menu
will. appear.
Some
DVD
discs
Last
Condition
Memory
.. playback
.. ..highest
.. divide
.. ..function
.. ..on
.quality
.. in
.. .developed
.. .. .into
.. .. .different
TVprovides
Aspect
DVD
Audio
isenter
aaudio
new
disc
building
on theAdditional
Information
.the
.content
.stop
. mode.
. .. 28
28
Progressive
Scan
Video
1.
Press
DISPLAY
during
This
product
features
theAudio
copy
protection
ation
exposure.
of
sufficient
magnitude
to
constitute
a risk
of electric
display.
reference
chapter.
If
you
the
wrong
language
code,
5. Press
SETUP
or
PLAY
to
exit
the
Setup
menu.
�
Assembling
and
Connecting
to
the
Speakers
11
to
Component
Input.
� Setting
adisc
ID of
Transmitter
. . . . . .high
. . . quality,
. . . . . 11
on the
Display
groups.
Screen
Saver
. Your
.Memory
. Mode
. .player
. . . .signals
.. .. .you
.. .. .to
.. ..on
.. ..some
.. ..access
.. 28
Macrovision.
Copy
protection
success
of DVD
to provide
shock
toitself.
persons.
picturesbywith
flickering.
Lastless
Condition
. .enables
. .. .. .. are
.recorded
. .. quickly
28
press
CLEAR.
To
prevent
direct
exposure
to laser
�
Connections.
. . . .beam,
. to
. . the
.do
. .not
. . try
. . to
. .open
. 12
3/4
2. When
Press
toTV
select
Group
icon.
1.Select
Pressione
DISPLAY
durante
reprodução
modo
� Speaker
Assembling
and Connecting
Speakers
11
different
groups
during
playback
the
discs.
recording
and
playing
pictures
these
Controlling
theProgressive
..Scan
.. ..Video
.. on
.. ..athe
.the
.On
.. .DISPLAY
.. ..for
.. ..ofvia
.. ou
.. ..menu
.no
.. discs
.on-screen
.. .. .. 28
uncompressed,
multi-channel
audio
forthan
aIfnew
Scan”
you1.are
using“Progressive
the
Component
jacks
the enclosure.
Visible
laser
radiation
when
open.
DO NOT
Screen
Saver
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
DVD
Audio
can
provide
higher
quality
stereo
DVD-V
DVD-A
Move
Select
Off
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
Disc
Audio
/
Subtitle
/
Menu
LANGUAGE
MenuSTARE
Disco
(DISC
MENU)
on a
VCR,
picture
noise
will .appear.
�do
Speaker
Connections.
. . within
. . quality.
. . .an. .equilateral
. .DVD
. . . .Audio
. . 12
display.
Stop
(parado).
The
exclamation
mark
triangle
experience
in
audio
A
disc
can
be
INTO
BEAM.
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
3.topress
Press
1/2
orTV
the .numbered
connection
a TV B.
or
monitor
that
then
Audio CDs. .with
sampling
192kHz
Controlling
the
. . . is
. . compatible
. . buttons
. . . . . . (0-9)
.with
. . .to. .select
. . . 28
Thisor
product incorporates copyright protection technology that
Before
Operation
.MENU
. to
.a.by
.alert
. .the
.e..the
. DVD
. .user
. .. rate
.audio
.do
. .of
. disco
. up
. .. .to
.presence
.on
. .14-19
is intended
about
the
of jacket
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
Pressione
a
tecla
DISC
o
menu
identified
logo
the
disc
a
group
number.
19
Presetting
the
radio
stations
.. .o. U.S.
..ícone
.Scan
..to
.. ..on
.and
.. other
..stop
.. .. 29
Menu
Language
Select
the
language
you prefer
for
theexposed
audioAudio
trackdigital
a progressive
scan
signal,
set
Progressive
(compared
to operating
44.1kHz
fornot
CDs).
DVD
1.
Press
DISPLAY
during
playback
mode.
Operation
with
Radio
. .of.for
.certain
. .instructions
. .. .patents
. ..Grupo.
. .. in
29
/
para
selecionar
2. protected
Pressione
LANGUAGE
CAUTION:
Thefor
apparatus
should
is
by
method
claims
About
the
symbols
important
(servicing)
Mini
Glossary
&
Surround
Before
Operation
. be
.Audio
. disc
. .and
. Stream
. .the
. and
. with
.disc
.maintenance
. be
.up
. .to. .24. .bits
. to. .water
on the
itself.
DISPLAY
aparecerá.
Listening
tothe
the
radio
. . . by
. . Macrovision
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Corporation
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
(disc
audio),
subtitles,
menu.
sound
can
delivered
of14-19
data
On. intellectual
(dripping
orinstructions
splashing)
and
noEnglish
objects
filled
withon-screen
liquids,
such
property
rights
owned
Presetting
radio
stations
29
Select
a
language
for
the
Setup
menu
and
in
the
instructions
accompanying
the
Menu
Language
Mode
. . . . . . . for
. . .Audio
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . . . 14
Note:
3/4
2. /
Press
select
icon.
as.likely
teclas
3. Pressione
Mini
Glossary
Indicates
hazards
cause
the
(compared
toplaced
16 bits
a apparatus.
standard
CD).
as vases,
should
be
onfor
the
TV Aspect
andListening
other
rightstoowners.
Other
Functions.
.ou
. .Use
.to
.of
..to
.. .numéricas
..Group
.. .. .. ..harm
..protection
..(0-9)
.. .. to
.. ..para
.. .tech.. .. 30
Pressione-a
novamente
para
sair.
product.
the
radio
. ..this
.copyright
. ..unit
29
DVD
provide
stereo
than
display.
Disc
Audio Audio
Move
Enter hidden
Prev. disc
Original:
which
ON
progressive
scan:
To Turn
Sound
.. .. the
.. .. ..original
..can
.. .Original
.. .. .. ..higher
.. .. ..in
.. ..quality
.. .. .. .. ..the
14
Sometimes
the
author
of
the
creates
Mode . Mode
. .Refers
. Disc
. . .Subtitle
. .. to
. .. .. ..language
14
selecionar
um
número
de
grupo.
Display
Modeby
nology
must
beother
authorized
Macrovision
Corporation,
itself
or
material
damage.
Sleep
Timer
Setting
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .is. to
30select
3.
Press
1/2
or
the
numbered
buttons
(0-9)
Off a sampling rate of up to 192kHz
Audio
CDs
with
Other
Functions.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .. ..and
AMode
typical
DVD
Audio
disc
contains
up
to
seven
times intended
disc
was
recorded.
content
that can
only
be
accessed
byuses
entering
a. . . . 30
On-Screen
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
Progressive
Scan
On
for
home
and
other
limited
viewing
only
unless
Sound
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
WARNING:
TO
PREVENT
FIRE
OR
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
Disc Menu
Connect
Dimmer
. .aIfout
. group
.Setting
. of
. lock
.the
.number.
. icon
..DVD
.. .. ..appears
..to..Off.the
.. ..the
. .of..TV
.. .. screen,
.. .. .. .. .. 30
(compared
toaOriginal
44.1kHz
foradditional
CDs). DVD
Audio
CAUTION:
This
product may
not be
used
outdoor,
restricted
to digitalcomponent
Sleep
Timer
. .. .. .input
.on
30
the
data
capacity
of
This
space
is
password.
the
Disc
Audio
/DO
Subtitle
authorized
by
Macrovision
Corporation.
Reverse
Mudando
ouseIdioma
Initial
Settings
.NOT
. .do
. EXPOSE
. ./Áudio
. .. .. CD.
. .. ..DVD-V
. .. DVD-A
. .. ..RAIN
Indicates
special
operating
features
of. .this
unit.
HAZARD,
OR
On-Screen
Display
..Menu
.be
.THIS
..PRODUCT
..press
.. .with
..number
..up
.. .TO
.16-19
. bits
. 15
otas:
2.otherwise
Select
“On”
/..V.. ..buttons.
indoor
only.
Other:
To
select
another
language,
your
monitor/television,
sound
can
delivered
to 24
of data
Mute
. .or..password
..using
.. .. .set
..your
.. (sometimes
..v
.is
.. .. ..you’ll
.. or
.. .. monitor
..find
.. .. ..it.. on
.. .. .the
Dimmer
. .. the
. ..television
. .. .. .. 30
30
used
for
music,
either
Advanced
Resolution
multiengineering
disassembly
prohibited.
enter the
�MOISTURE.
General
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
Note:
Pressione
a
tecla
ÁUDIO
repetidamente
durante
a
reproInitial
Settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-19
buttonsthe
then
ENTER
toquality
enter
the
corresponding
4-digit
(compared
to 16
bits
aaudio
standard
CD).to Component
Select
language
prefer
for
the
track
Input.
Using
the
.. cria
.site).
.. ..conteúdos
..the
.This
..password
.. ..easier.
..ocultos
.. .. .. .. 30
channel
soundyou
that
isfor
closer
to the
artist’s
• Press
Algumas
autor
disco
Mute
.jacket
. vezes
. Headphone
. tips
. cover
.to.oand
.confirm
. the
. hints
. on
.do
.Jack
.afor
.web
. making
. of
.the
. .. ..task
30
Indicates
disc’s
or
3.
ENTER
your
selection.
Sometimes
author
disc
creates
hidden
�
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
�
General
Operation
. . the
. equipment
. ou
.disc
. faixa
. code
. menu.
. recordings.
. in
.list
.aáudio.
.confined
. . the
. . Com
.Many
.space
. 16DVD
dução
para
ouvir
diferente
idioma
de
number
according
toinstall
the
language
in
(disc
audio),
subtitles,
and
Selecting
the
Input
Source
.DVD/CD
.. .is. ..located
..com
.. ..receiver
..o..on
.uso
..the
.. de
.. back
.. .. it.. .is
WARNING:
Do
not
this
master
recording
or
for
longer
control
isn’t
dictated
by
your
—
Using
the
Headphone
Jack
.by
. 30
30
que
somente
podem
ser
acessados
A
typical
DVD
Audio
disc
contains
up
to
seven
times
SERIAL
NUMBER:
The
serial
number
1.
Select
“Progressive
Scan”
on
the
DISPLAY
menu
content
that
can
only
be
accessed
entering
a
The
confirm
menu
will
appear.
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
�
Language
. .Ifcontain
. you
.or.no
. enter
. modo
.on-screen
. .Move
. .VR
.wrong
.Select
. .text,
. possui
.language
.such
. . . .tanto
. .code,
. 16
reference
the
such
as
achapter.
book
case
similar
unit.
license
from Dolby
“Dolby”,
discos
DVD-RW
gravados
que
o thenManufactured
Audio
discs
as
artist
XTS
(Excellent
True
Sound)
..aparecer
.. Laboratories.
..appears
.. .. .Enter
..on
..tela
..available
.. ..da
..TV
.. .. screen,
30
ofisthis
unit.
This
unique
to. this
unit
and
not
a function
of
the
disc.
Selecting
the
Input
Source
. .. ..na
30
additional
Move
Prev. icon
senhas.
Seunder
onumber
ícone
de
Bloqueio
password.
Ifis
the
lock
the
Original:
Refers
language
B.You
�
. ..the
. ..to
.data
.the
. .. capacity
.original
. .. .. ..or.. ..of
. .a. ..CD.
. Some
. ..This
.in
. ..which
. .. .. 16-17
. the
. 17 space
“Pro
Logic”,
and
the
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
of
Dolby
� Audio.
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
topress
others.
should
record
requested
information
here
and
press
CLEAR.
biographies,
playlists,
lyrics.
DVD
Audio
XTS
pro
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
áudio
principal
como
o canal
de áudio
bilíngüe,
você
pode multiused
for music,
either
Advanced
Resolution
XTS
(Excellent
True
Sound)
. .vezes
.your
. . você
.purchase.
.varies,
. .poderá
.find
. .1992.it. on
. 30
enter
password
(sometimes
you’ll
the
disc
was
recorded.
Menu
Language
retain
this
guide
asthe
permanent
record
of. Discs
TV,
entre
com
aa senha
(algumas
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
Copyright
Since
the
authoring
of
DVD
Audio
some
�
(Parental
.. .. .. .. .or
.. video
.. .. .. .. .clips.
� Lock
Audio.
.contain
.channel
. . . . Control)
. .sound
. . .galleries
. .quality
.that
. .. .. .. .. .. 18
17
discs
photo
is closer to the artist’s1997
DISPLAY
XTS
pro
. .na
. jacket
. embalagem
. . display
. . All
. . rights
. .choices
.do.reserved.
.disco
. .amight
.web
.ou
. .em
.not
. um
. be
. This
. web
. . .password
. . 30
disc’s
cover
or
on
site).
Laboratories.
alternar
entre
Principal
Bilíngüe
misturá-los
ofDolby
the“On”
on-screen
Others
. .for
. another
. the
. .(E),
.Setup
. .CAUTION
. . .menu
. .. ..(D),
.. and
.press
..ou
.. .on-screen
..number
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19
encontrá-la
site).
Select
a��language
2.
Select
using
the
v
/
V
buttons.
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
18
Other:
To select
language,
master
recording
or
for
longer recordings. Many
DVD
Reference
Model
No. ___________________________________
control
isn’t
dictated
by your
DVD/CD
receiver
TVfor
Aspect
available
disc
you’re
OF ELECTRIC
Manufactured
under
license
from
Theater
Inc. —19it is
(Principal
+then
Bilíngüe)
a.corresponding
display.
Essa
senha
dethecontrole
não Digital
éplaying.
imposta
peloSystems,
seu Home
� Others
. .Audio
. . pressionando
. RISK
. to
. .enter
.DO
. contain
. NOT
.the
. . OPEN
.tecla
.SHOCK
. . ÁUDIO.
. . . . text,
. . 4-digit
. .such
. . 19as artist
buttons
ENTER
discs
on-screen
aCode
function
of
US
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
Display
Mode
Serial
No.
___________________________________
.the
. . disc.
. . .5,974,380,
. selection.
. . . . . . 5,978,762
. . . . . . .and
. . . 31
Reference
3.Language
Press
ENTER
toList
confirm
your
Note:
Theater
System
–
ela
é
uma
função
do
disco.
Operation
number
according
to
the
language
code
list
in
the
other
worldwide
patents
issued
and
pending.
“DTS”
and
“DTS
biographies,
playlists,
or
lyrics.
Some
DVD
Audio
Progressive Scan
CAUTION:
Code
List
.will
. .. appear.
.. .. On
.. trademarks
.. .of
.. .. .. ..Audio
..of.. Digital
.. .. .Discs
.. ..varies,
.. .. .. 31
The confirm
menu
Language
Code
List
. .. DVD
. .. ..Theater
31some
Digital
Surround”
are
registered
Since
the
authoring
DVD-V
DVD-A
enjoy
maximum
sound
and
effect Country
CAUTION:
TO
THE
reference
chapter.
you
enter
wrong
code,
Off
Disc
Audio
/ToSubtitle
/IfMenu
discs
contain
photo
clips.
Legendas
(SUBTITLES)
DVD
or
CD
Operation
.REDUCE
.the
. quality
.galleries
. .system.
. .language
.RISK
.or
. surround
.video
. . 19-22
Operation
ThisVideo
DVD/CD
receiver
employs
a. laser
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
1996,
2000
• Uma
vez
aon-screen
autoria
DVD
Troubleshooting
. . ..PAGE
. .. .dos
. ..display
. .discos
. .. ..Digital
. .choices
. de
. ..Theater
. .. .. might
.de
. .Systems,
. Áudio
. .not
. .. .32-33
OF
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
ofque
theList
be
Country
Code
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 31
Viewing
another
of
DVD
Audio,
you
must
use
5.1
channel
analog
audio
press
CLEAR.
Inc. All rights reserved.
Playing
a DVD
and
Video
CD.
. audio
.please
. .(OR
. .. ..durante
.read
. .. ..this
. ..a19-22
. . 19
Pressione
aoutput
tecla
SUBTITLE
repetidamente
DVD
or2ensure
Video
CD
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
DO
NOT
REMOVE
COVER
BACK)
To
proper
use
of
this
product,
owner’s
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
Select
the
language
you
prefer
for
the
track
mude,
algumas
das
opções
de
tela
podem
não
estar
available. for
Troubleshooting
. . .the
. . disc
. . . .you’re
. . . . playing.
. . . . . . . . . . 32-33
(5.1CH AUDIO OUT jacks on the DVD/CD
General
Features
.diferentes
.Video
. . .disc
. for
.CD.
. idiomas
.future
. .. .PARTS
. ..reference.
. .. .20-22
Since DVD Audio discs can hold a lot of content, there
NO
manualsubtitles,
and
retain
Playing
acarefully
DVD
and
.. das
.. OUT
.. INSIDE
.. legendas.
.. ..(OPTICAL
.Should
. . the
19 or Specifications
reprodução
para
verUSER-SERVICEABLE
os
(disc
audio),
and
the
menu.
disponíveis
no
receiver).
If
you
useitthe
DIGITAL
. disco
. . . . que
. . . você
. . . .esteja
. . . . reproduzindo.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 34
REFER
SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED
are
various
ways to see what’s available on the disc.
unit
require
maintenance,
contact
an
authorized
� Moving
toNote:
another
TITLE/GROUP
.SERVICE
. ..service
. .. .. 20-22
. .loca20
OTES
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
General
Features
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
COAXIAL)
for
your
audio
connection,
the
sound
will effect
19
PERSONNEL.
To
enjoy
maximum
sound
quality
and
surround
Move
Enter
Prev.
tion
(see service
procedure).
Original:
Refers
toto
the
original
language
in which
the
It is forbidden by law to copy
, broadcast,
show, broadcast
�
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
.
.
.
.
.
20
� Moving
Moving
to
another
TITLE/GROUP
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
only beofsimilar
to CD-quality
sound
even
though analog audio
1. Press
DISPLAY
duringPAGE
playback.
Viewing
another
DVDadjustments,
Audio,
youormust
useout
5.1procedures
channel
disc wasPerforming
recorded.
via
cable, play
in public,
or rent
copyrighted material without
controls,
carrying
Assistindo
uma
outra
Página
�
Motion.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
� Slow
Moving
to
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
.
.
.
.
.
20
you’re playing
a DVD AUDIO
Audio disc.
(5.1CH
OUT in
jacks
onwithin
theradiDVD/CD
permission.
other
than
those
specified
herein
result
hazardous
This
lightning
flash
withmay
arrowhead
symbol
3
2. vez
Press
/4DVD
tovselect
Page
icon.
Since
Audio
discs
canconter
hold auma
lot of
content, there
O DVDTo
Áudio
éoutput
um
novo
disco
desenvolvido
�
Still
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
20
Uma
que
um
DVD
de
Áudio
pode
grande
2.anSelect
“On”
using
the
buttons.
�de
Slow
Motion.
. . triangle
. .Ifformato
. you
. . is.press
.intended
.de
. the
. number
. .DIGITAL
. .Playback
. . . . . .user
. .. (OPTICAL
20
Other:
select
another
language,
This
product
features
the/ V
copy
protection function developed
receiver).
use
or
ation
exposure.
equilateral
to alert theOUT
are
various
waysa to
see number.
what’s
available
on the disc.
�
Search.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
quantidade
de1/2
dados,
existem
várias
maneira
de acessar
no
sucesso
do
DVD
para
fornecer
áudio
de
alta
qualidade,
� Still
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
Playback
. 20soundby
to protection
select
page
3. Press
buttons To
then
ENTER
to exposure
enter
the
4-digit
Macrovision.
Copy
signals
are
recorded
on some o
COAXIAL)
for
your
audio do
connection,
the
will
about
the
presence
of uninsulated
dangerous
prevent
direct
tocorresponding
laser
beam,
not
try to open
3. Press
to
confirm
your
selection.
�
.the
.. within
.. ..laser
.similar
.. .radiation
.to
.. CD-quality
.. ..list
.when
.in
.. the
.. .. sound
..uma
.. DO
.. .. .nova
.. .. 20
When
recording
and
playing
the pictures
of these discs
� Repeat
Search.
. .. multi-canal,
. .. the
. ..product’s
.para
. ..enclosure
.obter
.NOT
20
number
according
language
code
queENTER
está
disponível
no
disco.
voltage
that
may
be
descompactado
eto..only
de
se
be
even
thoughdiscs.
1.
Press
DISPLAY
during
playback.
the
enclosure.
Visible
open.
What
appears
onwill
the
screen will vary from disc to
confirm
menu
will
appear.
VCR,
picture
noise
appear.
�
Repeat
A-B
.. ..playing
..magnitude
.. the
.. .. ..wrong
.constitute
.. .. .. .. ..disc.
..a..code,
.. .. ..of.. electric
21
ofIf
risk
reference
you
� chapter.
Repeat
.sufficient
. . .. enter
. ..to.. DVD
.language
20 The on
STARE
INTO
BEAM.
you’re
DVD
Audio
1. aPressione
DISPLAY
durante
aprotection
reprodução.
experiência
na
qualidade
de
som.a.. .Um
Áudio
pode..ser
disc because
information
available
depends
This product
copyright
technology
that
3/4
2.incorporates
Pressthe
to select
Page
icon.
shock
to
�
Time
Search
..persons.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
press CLEAR.
�
Repeat
A-B
.
21
upon
the
way
the
disc
created.
CAUTION:
The
apparatus
should
not
be exposeddo
to disco,
water
is
protected
by /
method
claims
ofwas
certain
U.S.
patents
and other
identificado
pelo
logo
DVD
Áudio
na
embalagem
para
selecionar
o
ícone
Página
2.
Pressione
�
Search
.. ..and
.. .. .no
.. .objects
.. .. .. .. filled
.. .. .. ..with
.. .. ..liquids,
.. .. .. .. .such
21
1/2
to
select
a
page
number.
3.
Press
� Marker
Time or
Search
.
.
.
.
21
(dripping
splashing)
intellectual
property
rights
owned
by
Macrovision
Corporation
The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle
ou no as
próprio
disco.
�
. Search
.intended
. . be
. . placed
.. .to
.. ..on
.. the
..the
.. ..user
.. .. ..about
.. .. .. ..the
.. .. presence
.. .. .. .. .. 21
Note:
vases,
apparatus.
para
selecionar
um número
de página.
3. Pressione
� Zoom.
Markershould
. ..alert
21
and
other rights/
owners.
Use
of this copyright
techis
of
What
appears
on the screenprotection
will vary from
disc to
19
O DVD
Áudio
Special
DVD
.. .. .maintenance
.. .. ..qualidade
..(servicing)
.. .. .. .. .. 22
the
DVD
Audio
Discs
varies,
some
nology
must
beauthoring
authorized
Macrovision
Corporation,
and
is
About
the
symbols
for
instructions
important
�de
Zoom.
. pode
.Features
. . . fornecer
. operating
. . . .. .. .estéreo
. ..and
. .. .de
. .. ..alta
21
OSince
que
aparece
no telaofbyirá
variar
de disco
para
disco,
disc and
because
the
information
available
depends
intended
for
home
other
limited
viewing
uses
only
unless
of the on-screen display choices might not be
instructions
the
accompanying
� Title
Menu
.product
. . . .incom
.may
.. .. .a.instructions
..faixa
.. be
.. .. used
..de
.. ..amostragem
..outdoor,
.. .. .. .. .. restricted
.. .. .. de
..the
22
superior
aos DVD
CD
deFeatures
áudio,
Special
22to
CAUTION:
This
not
porque
a informação
disponível
depende
daReverse
maneira
upon
the Macrovision
way
the disc
was harm
created.
Indicates
cause
to
the unit
otherwise
authorized
Corporation.
product.
available
forhazards
theby
disclikely
you’retoplaying.
�
Disc
Menu
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..aos
.. .. ..16
.. ..bits
.. .. ..de
.. .. um
.. .. ..CD
.. .. .. 22
only. ..(comparado
até 24indoor
bits
deuse
dados
�
Title
Menu
22
como
disco
foimaterial
criado.is prohibited.
engineering
or other
disassembly
itselfo or
damage.
�
Changing
the
Audio
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
Note:
�
Disc
Menu
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
padrão).WARNING:
Um típicoTODVD
de áudio
possui
até 7 vezes
mais
PREVENT
FIRE
OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK
Since
the authoring
offeatures
DVD Audio
Discs
varies, some
�
Changing
Channel
. .. .. .. .. .. ..TO
.. ..RAIN
.. .. .. 22
�
Changing
the
Audio
Language
Indicates
special
operating
of this
unit.
otas:
HAZARD,
DO the
NOTAudio
EXPOSE
THIS
PRODUCT
OR
capacidade
de armazenamento
de
dados
do que um
CD.22
SERIAL
NUMBER:
The serial
number
is located
on the
back
of the
on-screen
display
choices
not
be
�
Subtitles
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
�
Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 22
22
MOISTURE.
of this unit. This
number
is unique
to this
unit andmight
not available
EsseDVD
espaço
adicional
é
usado
para
música,
tanto
em
qua• others.
Uma
vez
que
a autoria
discos
deplaying.
DVD
de
áudio
available
for hints
thedos
disc
you’re
Indicates
tips
and
for
making
the task
easier.
to
You
should
record
requested
information
here
and
Audio Discs
� Subtitles
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
retain
this guide
as adas
permanent
your purchase.
WARNING:
not install com
this equipment
a confined space
lidade
de som
deDo
multicanal
resoluçãoinavançada,
que
mude,
algumas
opçõesrecord
de telaof podem
não estar
DVD
Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
such as a book case or similar unit.
Operação
Recursos especiais do DVD.
DVD de Áudio
está bem próxima ao som master de gravação do artista, ou
Manufactured
under
license
Dolby
Laboratories.
“Dolby”,
disponíveis
no disco
quefrom
você
esteja
reproduzindo.
Model
No. ___________________________________
“Pro
Logic”,
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992Serial No. ___________________________________
1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
23
2
CAUTION:
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and
other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS
Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
/ V to select
theplayback.
time clock
icon
2.
1. Press
Press vDISPLAY
during
The
time search
and “-:--:--” appears.
box shows the elapsed playing time.
3. Input the required start time in hours, minutes, and
2. Press v / V to select the time clock icon
2.
at chosen
your chosen
end
point.
1. Press
PressA-B
A-B again
at your
starting
point.
“A*”
“A
B” appears
TV screen and the
appears
brieflybriefly
on theon
TVthe
screen.
repeat sequence begins.
2. Press A-B again at your chosen end point.
Audio CD and MP3 / WMA Disc
Features
Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame
n Audio CD or MP3/WMA
DVD-V playback. The time search
TIME
SEARCH
1.
Press
DISPLAY during
box shows the elapsed playing time.
To start playing at any chosen time on the disc:
Operação de DVD ou VCD (continuação)
REP
Playback
You
Introduction
CD
MP3
WMA
um CD de Áudio ou
DVD-V
DVD-A
PAUSE
RepetirStill
Faixa/Tudo/Desl.
receiver canReproduzindo
play MP3/WMA formatted
Picture
and Frame-by-Frame
Pres
RE
MP3
/
WMA
disc
compatibility
with
this
player
is
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
Safety
Precautions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
CD-ROM, CD-R,
or CD-RW
Você pode
tocar uma
ou PAUSE/STEP
todas
emremote
um disco.
repe
Playback
Playing
andiscs.
Audio
CD
or
MP3/WMA
1.faixa
Press
during
playback.
1.
Press
PAUSE/STEP
on the
control
during
Disco
MP3/WMA
limited
as
follows:
Playing
an
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.
.
.
.
.
23
Table
of
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
You
. . . . . . . . . 23
1. Pressione
a tecla
REPEAT enquanto
o disco estiver
playback.
DVD-V
Playing
Sampling
(MP3),
Pause
. .DVD-A
. .2.Advance
. . To
. . return
. . .the
. .to.picture
.playback,
. . . . frame-by-frame
. . . press
. . . . .PLAY,
. . 23by
Use . .an
. de
. . Audio
. . . .pode
. . . CD
.reproduzir
. . .• .or
. . .MP3/WMA
. . . . .frequency:
. . . . . 4-5within 8 - 48� kHz
ENTERPres
orD
Disc . . . Before
. Este
.Disc
23 reprodutor
DVD
discos
CDsendo
tocado.
O
ícone
de
repetição
aparece
na
tela.
pressing
PAUSE/STEP
repeatedly.
within
32
48kHz
(WMA)
•
repe
� 1.
Moving
toPAUSE/STEP
another
.the
. . .remote
. . .again.
. . control
. . . . . during
. 23
Playable
Discs
. . . . contendo
. . . . . . . gravações
. . . . . . . .em
. . formato
......4
pressTrack
PAUSE/STEP
Disc
.rt .an
. .audio
. . . . ROM,
.CD
23
Press
on
CD-R
ou
CD-RW
a DVD/CD
menu appears
on the play MP3/WMA
within
(MP3),
•
The
receiver
�2.
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
. . . picture
.this
. . . player
. frame-by-frame
.PLAY.
. .o. modo
. . . . de
. . 23by
Precautions
. . . . . .can
. . . . . . . •. .Bit
. . rate:
. . . .formatted
. . . . .8 .- .320kbps
. 5 MP3
2.
Pressione
a
tecla
REPEAT
para
selecionar
To
exit
still
motion
mode,
press
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
playback.
Advance
the
/
WMA
disc
compatibility
with
is
ess v / V toMP3/WMA.
select
a track
then
press CD-R,
32 - 192kbps
(WMA)
•D
recordings
CD-ROM,
The
DVD/CD
receiver
MP3/WMA
formatted
� Search.
. . .MOVING
. . . . . . . . TO
. . repeatedly.
. ANOTHER
. . . . . . . . . . .TRACK
. . . 23
Notes
onon
Discs
. . . can
. . . .play
. . .or
. .CD-RW
. . . . . .discs.
. . . . . . . . 5 limited
CD
repetição
desejado.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
pressing
PAUSE/STEP
as
follows:
•
ER and playback
MP3
/ WMA disc
compatibility
with this player is
• The
player cannot read an
MP3/WMA
file that
has
CDAbout
destarts.
Áudio
on CD-ROM,
Note:
Disc
Operation
. . 8. -. .48. .kHz
. . . (MP3),
. . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Symbols
. . . . . CD-R,
. . . . . or
. . CD-RW
. . . . . . discs.
. . . . . . . . 5 • JPEG
D•
Sampling
frequency:
within
. . . . . . . . . recordings
23
•
Faixa:
repete
a
faixa
atual.
follows:
a file
extension
other thanlimited
“.mp3”as
/2.
“.wma”.
MP3
WMA
Toausing
exit
still
motion
mode,
press
PLAY.
Uma vez
inserido um CD de áudio, um
Audio
and
MP3
/
WMA
Disc
R
When
aCD
DVD
audio
disc
that
includes
pictures,
Viewing
JPEG
disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
•
CD and Rear Panel . . •. .CD-R
. .menu
. . physical
. .aparecerá
. . . . .format
. . . 6 should
within
32
48kHz
(WMA)
. . . . . . . Front
. .Audio
24 Panel
•
• Sampling
frequency:
8 - 48
(MP3),
• Tudo:
repete
todaswithin
as faixas
dokHz
disco.
be
ISO 9660
da
TV. Pressione
asCD
teclas
/. appears
this
operation
some
•
an audio
�32
Slide
Show
. Press
. . be
.(MP3),
. .permitted
. . . .(.
. . .in. or
. . >)
. . .picture
. briefly
. . . . 24
Bit
rate:
within
8 - 320kbps
Control
. . a. .menu
.para
. record
. . selecionar
. . on
. MP3
. .the
. . /.aWMA
7 • files
. . . . . . . Remote
. na
.Once
24tela you
1..may
SKIP
during playba
Audio
CDinsert Overview
Features
within
- 48kHz
(WMA)
•. .If. you
using
software
that
1.
•
Desligado(sem
display):
função
desativada.
Note:
em
seguida
a tecla
ou
ENTER
e asystem
•D
v audio
/ V to CD
select
aPLAY
track
then
press
Presspressione
-rate:
192kbps
(WMA)
�segments.
Still
Picture
. . to
. .go
. (MP3),
. to
. .the
. . .next
. . . track
. . . . or
. . to
. . return
. . . 24to the beginn
. . . . . . . . faixa,
.TV
24 screen.
Once
you
insert
an
a menu
appears
ona the
• 32
Bit
within
8it- is
320kbps
cannot
create
file
(eg.
Direct-CD)
When
using
a DVD
audio
disc that
includes
pictures,
•
PLAY
or
ENTER
and
playback
starts.
•
The
player
cannot
read
an
MP3/WMA
file
that
has
�
Moving
to
another
file
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
reprodução
começa.
of
the
current
track.
. . . . . . . Preparation
. . TV
24 screen. Press v / V to select aimpossible
track then to
press
- 192kbps
(WMA)
playback MP332/ WMA
files.
We
this
operation
may DVD-V
be permitted
DVD-A in some picture
•
Note
SLOW
SCAN
a
file
extension
other
than
“.mp3”
/
“.wma”.
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
CDan MP3/WMA
MP3
WMA
The player
cannot
read
file that has
Creator,
which
. . . . . . . Connections
. . PLAY
24 or ENTER
Search
-PAUSE
Busca
segments.
. . . . and
. . . playback
. . . . . . . starts.
. . recommend
. . . . . . . . . that
. . . you
8-13use••Easy-CD
If2.y•
2. should
Press be
SKIP
.
twice briefly to go back to• the
CD-R
physical
format
ISO
9660
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
a file
extension
other
than
“.mp3”
/ “.wma”.
. . . . . . . . . 24
1. Press
SLOW
SCAN
- track.
m
or M
+ during
(Tr
Pressione
a tecla
SKIP/SCAN
durante
a
previous
TV Connections . . . . . . . . . . .creates
. . . . . .an
. .ISO
. . . 9660
. . . 8file system.
If1.
you
record
MP3
/ PAUSE/STEP
WMA
files
using
1.
during
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks.
. .software
. . .playback.
. . . that
. . . . . . . 25
DVD-V
DVD-A
CD-R
physical
format
should
be
ISO
9660
• File names should have •a• maximum
of
8Press
letters
Not
. . . . . . . . . 25
SLOW
SCAN
playback.
Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
reprodução.
cannot
create
a
file
system
(eg.
Direct-CD)
it
is
3.
You
can
play
any
track
by
inputting
its
number.
• If you
record
MP3
/ WMA
files using
software
and must incorporate an .mp3
or .wma
Erasing
aextension.
Track
from
Programme
List
. .that
.ENTER
. . . . . 25
• If
. . . . . . . . . 25
2.The
To
return
to
playback,
press
PLAY,
or
3D
DVD/CD
Receiver
will enter
SLOW
mode.
Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . •. .They
. . . .should
. . . . . not
. . .contain
. 10 special
impossible
to
/ WMA
files.
We
1.
Press
SLOW
SCAN
- Direct-CD)
m
or List
M
cannot
create
atecla
file
system
(eg.
it+is
letters
such
asPAUSE/STEP
/ MP3
(T
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
. during
. . . . . . 25
repetidamente
2.
Pressione
aplayback
SKIP/SCAN
press
again.
t . . . . . . . . 25
Speaker
System
Connection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-12
recommend
that
you
use
Easy-CD
Creator,
which
2.
Use
the
SLOW
SCAN
m
or
M
+
to
select
the
impossible
to playback
We
playback.
? * : “ < > l etc.
V
and press ENTER
To3.
pr
CD
MP3
DivX
Disc
Operation
.MP3
. . . /. WMA
.desejada:
. . . .files.
. . . x2,
. . .x4,
. . x8
. . . . . 26
para
selecionar
aREPEAT
velocidade
TRACK/ALL/OFF
st to. select
. . . . .a. folder,
25 � Transmitter.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
creates
an
ISO
9660
file
system.
required
speed:
t
1/16,
t
1/8,
t
1/4,
or
t
1/2
recommend
that
you
Creator,
folder
• The total number of files onSpeaker
the disc Setup
should
chan
.be
. . .use
. Receiver
. . Easy-CD
. . . . will
. . .enter
. . . .SLOW
. . which
. . mode.
. . . . CD
. . 27
3D
The
DVD/CD
. . . . .contents.
. . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter
avanço
ou
retrocesso.
WMA
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
TRACK
•
File
names
should
have
a
maximum
of
8
letters
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
T
1/16,
T
1/8,
T
1/4,
or
T
1/2
(backward),
or
creates
an
ISO
9660
file
system.
less than 650.
V. to
then press PLAY or
Additional
Information
.SCAN
. . . . .- .m
. . .or
. .M
. . . +. . to
. .select
. . 28 the the f
. . select
. . . . .a. track
27 Setting
2. incorporate
Use
the SLOW
must
an busca,
.mp3
or .wma
extension.
a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 • and
To p
(forward).
MP3
File
names
should
have
a maximum
of
3.
Para
sair
do modo
de
a.letters
tecla
PLAY.
WMA
MP3 �/ WMA
ayback starts.
Last
Condition
Memory
. .pressione
.letters
.t
. such
. 8.1/8,
.on
.t
.a./1/4,
. . . or
. .t
28 1/2 audio
You
can
play
a. .track/all
disc.
. . . . . . . . .MP3
28 �/Assembling
ThistoDVD/CD
receiver11requires
discs
and
recordings
required
speed:
t
1/16,
WMA
• They
should
not
contain
special
as
chan
and
Connecting
the
Speakers
and
must
incorporate
an
.mp3
or
.wma
extension.
/
para
selecionar
uma
pasta,
1.
Pressione
as
teclas
Screen
Saver
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
3.
To
exit
Slow
Motion
mode,
press
PLAY
(N).
to
in>order
to SKIP
3D
. . . . . . . . .1.
28 Press
T 1/16,
T 1/8,
Tas
1/4,
T
1/2 The repea
or(.
1. Press
REPEAT
when
playing
disc.
1.
P
*:“<
l (backward),
etc.
v / V Connections.
to select a folder,
1.
Press
orletters
>)
briefly
during
the
MP3
/ WMA
� Speaker
. .para
. and
. meet
. ver
. press
. .ocertain
. seu
. .ENTER
. conteúdo.
. technical
. . . . 12 standards
• ?They
should
not contain
special
such
/ or aplayback
em
seguida
pressione
ENTER
Controlling
the
TV
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
Pre-recorded
icon
appears.
(forward).
. . . . . . . . . 28 to see the folder contents. achieve optimal playback quality.
to gooftofiles
the
next
to return
• The total
number
on
thetrack
discorshould
be to the beginning audi
1 / 12
List CD
AUDIO
Track1
0:52:07
Program
1 / 12
Program
• Offpress
: does
not(>)
playonce
repeatedly.
• If you
SKIP
during Repeat Chapter
(Track) playback, the repeat playback cancels.
Track2
List
Track3
Track1
Track4
Track2
Track5
Track3
Track6
Track4
Track7
Track5
Track8
Track6
Clear All
Note:
• When using a DVD audio disc that includes
DVD-A this operation may be permitted in some
REPEAT DVD-V pictures,
picture segments.
You can play a title/chapter/all/track/group on a disc.
DVD-V
Press
REPEAT
duringDVD-A
playback to select a desired
REPEAT
repeat mode.
You can play a title/chapter/all/track/group on a disc.
DVD
Video Discs
Repeat Chapter/Title/Off
Press
REPEAT
during- playback
to select a desired
• Chapter:
repeat
mode. repeats the current chapter.
• Title: repeats the current title.
Discs - Repeat Chapter/Title/Off
•DVD
Off : Video
does not
play
repeatedly.
• Chapter: repeats the current chapter.
DVD
Audio
Discs
Repeattitle.
Track/Group/Off
• Title:
repeats
the -current
•• Track:
repeats
the current
track.
Off : does
not play
repeatedly.
• Group: repeats the current Group.
Discs
Repeat Track/Group/Off
•DVD
Off : Audio
does not
play- repeatedly.
• Track: repeats the current track.
• Group: repeats the current Group.
Note:
Track7
PROGRAM Edit
Track8
23
MUSIC
0:00:00
1 / 12
Note:
PROGRAM Edit
(Track) playback, the repeat playback cancels.
0:52:07
• If you press SKIP (>)
once during Repeat Chapter
3D
SURROUND DVD-V
Clear All
Track8
Clear All
PROGRAM Edit
Introduction
Operation
Introduction
AUDIO CD
Track7
Playback
1.
Press PAUSE/STEP on the remote control during
DVD-V
DVD-A
playback.
Advance the picture frame-by-frame by
pressing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly.
1. Press PAUSE/STEP on the remote control during
2. To
exit still Advance
motion mode,
press frame-by-frame
PLAY.
playback.
the picture
by
pressing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly.
Note:
2. Tousing
exit still
motion
mode,
PLAY. pictures,
When
a DVD
audio
discpress
that includes
this operation may be permitted in some picture
Note:
segments.
When using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures,
this operation
may DVD-V
be permitted
DVD-A in some picture
SLOW
SCAN
segments.
1. Press SLOW SCAN - m or M + during
SLOW
SCAN DVD-V DVD-A
playback.
To produce a 3D surround effect that simulates multichannel audio from twoDVD-V
stereo speakers (instead of
3D
SURROUND
the five+ speakers normally required for multi-channel
To produce
3D surround
effect that simulates multiaudio
from aahome
theater system).
channel audio from two stereo speakers (instead of
1.
DISPLAY normally
during playback.
thePress
five+ speakers
required for multi-channel
audio
theater
3 ora 4home
to select
thesystem).
sound option.
2.
Usefrom
sound
optionduring
will beplayback.
highlighted.
1. The
Press
DISPLAY
Track6
The DVD/CD Receiver will enter SLOW mode.
3.
selectthe
“3D
SUR”.
or24tototoselect
sound
option.
2. Use
Use 13or
To
turn
off the
3D Surround
effect, select “Normal”.
The
sound
option
will be highlighted.
Track5
1. Press SLOW SCAN - m or M + during
2. Use
the SLOW SCAN - m or M + to select the
playback.
required speed: t 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4, or t 1/2
The DVD/CD Receiver will enter SLOW mode.
(backward), or T 1/16, T 1/8, T 1/4, or T 1/2
2. Use the SLOW SCAN - m or M + to select the
(forward).
required speed: t 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4, or t 1/2
3. To
exit Slow Motion
mode,
PLAY
Tpress
1/8, T
1/4, (N).
or T 1/2
(backward),
or T 1/16,
3. Use 1 or 2 to to select
TIME
SEARCH DVD-V “3D SUR”.
To turn off the 3D Surround effect, select “Normal”.
To start playing at any chosen time on the disc:
Track4
DVD-A
Program
Track3
DVD-V
1 / 12
List
Track2
(forward).
Note:
•3.
When
using
a DVD
audio
discpress
that includes
pictures,
To exit
Slow
Motion
mode,
PLAY (N).
this operation may be permitted in some picture
Note:
segments.
• When using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures,
this operation
be permitted
DVD-A in some picture
REPEAT
A-BmayDVD-V
segments.
To repeat a sequence.
0:52:07
Track1
REPEAT
A-B
1.
Press A-B
at your chosen starting point. “ A * ”
on the TV screen.
To appears
repeat a briefly
sequence.
AUDIO CD
Clear All
0:00:00
1 / 12
List
PROGRAM Edit
0:00:00
Program
1 / 12
1-Music1
List
2-Music2
Program
3-Music3
1-Music1
4-Music4
2-Music2
5-Music5
3-Music3
6-Music6
4-Music4
7-Music7
5-Music5
6-Music6
DISPLAY Info
7-Music7
DISPLAY Info
Clear All
PROGRAM Edit
Clear All
PROGRAM Edit
2. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or >
repeatedly to select the required speed:
X2, X4, X16 or X100
3. To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY.
The receiver will now go into SEARCH mode.
1. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > for about
two seconds during playback.
•
DVD-A
Operation
Operation
Use the b B v V buttons to select the title/chapter
you want to view, then press ENTER to start.
Press TITLE or DVD MENU to return to the menu
screen.
•
Press SKIP . or > briefly during playback to
select the next chapter/track or to return to the
beginning of the current chapter/track.
Press SKIP . twice briefly to step back to the
previous chapter/track.
To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback,
press DISPLAY and press v / V to select the
chapter/track icon. Then, input the chapter/track
number or use b / B.
Operation
•
DVD-A
DISPLAY Info
Use the 1 2 3 4 buttons to select an option you
want, then press ENTER to view the option.
7-Music7
DVD-V
6-Music6
SEARCH
5-Music5
Notes:
• If parental control is set and the disc is not within
the rating settings you must input the password.
(See “Lock Menu” on page 21).
3-Music3
4-Music4
Program
• DVDs may have a region code. Your receiver does
not play discs that have a region code different from
your receiver. The region code for this receiver is 1
(one).
2-Music2
Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame
Playback
DVD-V Picture
DVD-A and Frame-by-Frame
Still
1-Music1
Operation
Operation
?A*compatibilidade
: “ <Note:
> l etc. dos discos MP3/WMA com este reprodu1. Press
v / V to select
Speaker
Positioning.
. . . . a. .folder,
. . . . .and
. . .press
. . . . ENTER
. . . . . . 13
2. To
U
with
Radio
. .track.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DVDs
are automatically
set toOperation
these
standards.
. Before
. 2.
.2.28
ofusing
the
current
than
650.
/asVfolder
to .select
then
or
Press
para
Pressione
teclas
toOperation
seevthe
The
total
number
of
onse
the
disc
should
be a desired
•DVD
When
acomo
DVD
audio
disc
that includes
pictures,
. contents.
./
. . a. .track
. . . .selecionar
. . . press
. . . . a.PLAY
.faixa
. . . dese14-19 • less
2.files
Press
REPEAT
to
3.
To
exit
Slow
Motion
mode,
TP
tor
de
é limitada
segue:
1.ch
There
are
many
different
types
of
recordable
disc
Presetting
the
radio
stations
. . . .press
. .inselect
. some
. PLAY
. . . .picture
.(N).
. . . 29repeat mod
ENTER.
Playback
starts.
. . . 2.
29
less
than
650.
this
operation
may
be
permitted
v
/
V
to
select
a
track
then
press
PLAY
or
Press
jada Glossary
e pressionefora Audio
tecla PLAY
ou
ENTER.
A reprodução This• DVD/CD
Mini
Stream
& Surround
the
requires
discs
2. receiver
SKIP
.
briefly
back
the
Freqüência
de
amostragem:
de
kHz
e. 29
formats (including CD-R containing
MP3
orPress
WMA
Listening
to
the
radio
. . dentro
. twice
.repeats
. . .and
. .8 .–recordings
.48
. to
.current
. go
. .(MP3),
. . track
. . to
• Track:
the
Note:
3.
UU
. . . 29
2.au
ENTER.
segments.
Mode
. . . . Playback
. . . MUSIC
. . . . starts.
. . . . . . . files)
. . . . and
. . . these
. . . . .require
. . . 14certain
previous
track.
to
meet
technical
standards
in and
order
to
começa.
32certain
–Functions.
kHz
(WMA)
This
DVD/CD
receiver
recordings
pre-existing
a.disc.
Other
. .requires
.All:
. . .repeats
.discs
. . . .disc
.all. .the
. . tracks
. includes
. . . . on
. . .pictures,
30
TT
•48
When
using
a. •DVD
audio
that
. . . 29
achieve
optimal
playback •standards
quality.
Pre-recorded
Sound Mode . .MUSIC
. . . . . . . . . . conditions
. . . . . . . .(see
. . . .above)
. . . 14to ensure
to meet
certain
technical
in
order
to
compatible
display):
1.
this
operation
may
be
permitted
in
picture
Setting
. DVD-V
. .320
. .track
. .DVD-A
. .by
. .inputting
.does
. e.some
. .not
.192
.play
. kbps
. .repeatedly.
30
3.Timer
You
can
play
number.
• Sleep
Taxa
de
bit:
dentro
de
32Off(No
–any
kbps
(MP3),
32
–. its
. . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 DVDs
REPEAT
A-B
areoptimal
automatically
set
to
these
standards.
3. U
achieve
playback
Pre-recorded
playback.
segments.
Dimmer
. .different
. . . . . .types
.quality.
. . . of
. . recordable
. . . . . . . . disc
. . . . . . . . . 30
TIM
(WMA)
. . . . . . . . . 30
are
many
Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 There
Note:
T
DVDs
are
automatically
set
to
these
standards.
To
repeat
a
sequence.
Mute
. . . .is.CD-R
. . . .TRACK/ALL/OFF
. . . . . . . . MP3
. . . . or
. . . . . .CD
. . . . . MP3
. 30
triangle
. . . . . . . . . 30 � General
REPEAT
2.
formats
(including
containing
•permission
Oare
reprodutor
não A-B
consegue
lerofSKIP
um
arquivo
MP3/WMA
If you
press
(>) WMA
once
duringque
Repeat Track To
playb
Operation
. . . . . Customers
. . . . . . . . . should
. . . . . .note
16 that
General
Features
st
There
many
different
types
recordable
disc
DVD-V
DVD-A
REPEAT
nce
Using
the
Headphone
Jack
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
such as track
required
in
order
to
download
MP3
/
WMA
files
”
1.
Press
A-B
at
your
chosen
starting
point.
“
A
.a .file
. of. containing
. . . . . 30information
and
these
require
certain
pre-existing
*
the
repeat
playback
cancels.
tenha
outra
extensão
que
não
sejaMP3
“.mp3”
“.wma”.
� Language
. . . . . . . .for
. . . instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 files)
WMA
formats
(including
CD-R
containing
or/ WMA
TIM
About
the symbols
cing)
1.
P
by pressing
DISPLAY.
Selecting
the has
Source
. TV
. . .screen.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
and music from the Internet. Our
company
appears
briefly
on the
.see
. . the
. . .information
. . . 30 � Display
(see
above)
tocertain
ensure
compatible
To
repeat
aInput
sequence.
files)
and
these
require
pre-existing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 conditions
g the Year, Comment
Album,
] Note:
b
•
O
formato
físico
do
CD-R
deve
ser
padrão
ISO
9660.
XTS
(Excellent
True
Sound)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
no
right
to
grant
such
permission.
Permission
You can
playtoaensure
track/allcompatible
on a disc.
To s
. . . . . . . . . 30 �Indicates
• Unless
conditions
(see
above)
Audio.
. hazards
. . . .stated
. . .likely
. .otherwise,
. . to
. . cause
. . . .all. harm
.operations
. . . .to. .the
. .described
.unit
17 playback.
2.
Press
A-B
again
at
your
chosen
end
point.
”
1.
Press
should
always bemay
sought from
thevocê
copyright
2.
WMA
pro
.Press
. . .A-B
. REPEAT
.SEARCH
. at
. .your
. MP3/WMA
. . when
.chosen
. . . CD
. com
. starting
. . software
. MP3
. . disc.
. point.
. . que
. The
. .“ A
. .*30
nformation,
TAG”
on
theFeatures
Se
gravou
arquivos
. . . . . . . .“NO
.ID3
30ID3
General
itself
orappear
other
material
damage.
1.
playing
use
the
remote
control.
be• XTS
1. PP
playback.
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
. owner.
. . .Some
. . . . features
. . . . . . . . 18alsoCustomers
“A
B” appears
briefly
the
TV
and repeat
the
TAG
should
note
that
isascreen
deo input source
appears
briefly
onpermission
theon
TV
screen.
a
. . . . . . . . .•30
não
cria
um
arquivo
de
sistema
(por
exemplo,
Direct-CD)
CK
icon
appears.
available
on
the
Setup
menu.
b
When
playing
a
file
containing
information
such
as
track
repeat
sequence
begins.
�TAG
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 required
in order
to note
download
MP3 / (WMA
ver.
1. Press
SCAN
m or
M) during playback.
ID3otas:
Customers
should
thatatpermission
isfiles
Indicates
of DISPLAY.
this unit.
3. In
Reference
Note:
AIN OR
2.
Press
A-B
again
your
chosen
end
point.
é
impossível
a
sua
reprodução.
Recomenda-se
utilizar
o
titles,
you
canspecial
see the operating
information features
by pressing
and
musicin2.
from
the
Internet.
Our
company
hasrepeat mode.
2. P
• When playing
a file containing
information such
as track
Press
REPEAT
to
select
a
desired
required
order
to
download
MP3
/
WMA
files
plicable) and select
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
TITLE/GROUP
3. Press
A-B
again
to
cancel.
• Unless
otherwise,
2.
Press
M
“A
B”such
appears
[ Title, Artist,
Album,stated
Year, Comment
] all operations described
Easy-Cd
Creator,
que
cria
dethe
Language
Code
List
. . briefly
.arquivos
. .SCAN
. . on
. .Permission
.(m
.sistema
. TV
. or
. .screen
.no
. ).padrão
.repeatedly
. and
. . . the
31 to select sta
right
to grant
permission.
titles,
youestiver
cantips
see
information
by pressing
DISPLAY.
• Se
você
nathe
lista
de arquivos
MP3/WMA
eeasier.
deseja no
and
music
from
thesequence
Internet.
Our
company
has backward or forwa
e DVD/CDOperation
Indicates
hints
for making
the
task
n
use
theand
remote
control.
Some
features
may alsoshould
be
speed:
repeat
DVD-V
DVD-A
•be
Track:
ISO
9660.
Country
Code
List
.repeats
. required
. .from
. .begins.
.the
.the
. current
. .copyright
. . .X2,
.track
. .X4,
. . .X8
. . . . . 31
Title, Artist,
Album,
Year,“NO
Comment
] appear
deo
always
sought
.file
. .input
. . on
. .source
. .•31
If[ there
isàno
information,
ID3 as
TAG”
onpara
the
3. yI
space
no
right
to
grant
such
permission.
Permission
retornar
lista
das
pastas,
use
teclas/
list
the
MUSIC
menu
and
want
to
DVD or Video
CD Operation
. . . . menu.
. . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
on the Setup
• All: repeats
all
disc.
Troubleshooting
.3.. .again
.To.devem
.exit
. to
.the
.SEARCH
.the
.tracks
.nocopyright
. .máximo
. on
.mode,
. .a.oito
. .press
.caracte. . 32-33
display. available
er.
owner.
. . . . list,
. . .use
. Manufactured
. •the
31
PLAY.
3.
Press
A-B
cancel.
•
Os
nomes
dos
arquivos
ter
under
license
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
“Dolby”,
s
should
always
be
sought
from
If
there
is
no
information,
“NO
ID3
TAG”
appear
on
the
When
a
disc
has
more
than
one
title/group,
you
can
v
/
V
to
highlight
and
Folder
selecionar
o
ícone
e
pressione
a
tecla
ENTER.
e disc tray andPlaying a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
• Off(No
does
4. P
Specifications
. . . .display):
. . .mp3
. . . .ou
. ..wma.
. . not
. . . play
. . . .repeatedly.
. . . . . . . 34
“Pro
Logic”,MOVING
and the
symbol are trademarks
of Dolby
.. . . . . .and
. 32-33
display.
select
n
TO
ANOTHER
TITLE/GROUP
res e conter a extensão
move
todouble-D
another
title/group.
Press
DISPLAY
while owner.
y,icable)
with the Laboratories.
General
Features
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20-22
s
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
Copyright
1992Pressione
DVD MENU
Para irthen
à próxima
página. number (0-9)
. . . . . . . •. 34
e. DVD/CD
y
playback
is stopped
the appropriate
Note:
DVD-Vto another
DVD-A
�Dolby
Moving
TITLE/GROUP
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
•
Eles
não
devem
conter
caracteres
especiais
como
/
?
*
;
“
<
ENU to move1997
to
the
next
page.
Laboratories.
All
rights
reserved.
orcom
use
b
/ B toMP3/WMA
move
to another
title/group.
If you press SKIP (>) once during Repeat Track playback, 4. P
•Tip:
Num
CD
arquivos
e JPEG
você
pode
� Moving
to
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
.
.
.
.
.
20
>
!
etc.
eMP3/WMA
tray. Playback
•
If
you
are
in
a
file
list
on
the
MUSIC
menu
and
want
to
Manufactured
under
license
from
Digital
Theater
Systems,
Inc. can
and
JPEG you
can
switch
When
a disc
has
more
than
one title/group,
you
Tip:
You
can
play
any
the repeat playback cancels.
disc not
traystart,
and
s
alternar
entre
eles.
Pressione
a.by
tecla
e. a.number
� Slow
Motion.
.5,956,674,
. .use
. . the
.title
. .v
.inputting
.to. TITLE
. . .5,978,762
. .its
.palavra
.and
.and
. 20while • A quantidade
does
USTITLE
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,974,380,
d JPEG.
Press
MUSIC
or
/. V
highlight
to
the
list,
total de arquivos em um CD deve ser menor
move
to
title/group.
Press
DISPLAY
while
• return
If worldwide
youand
are
in Folder
apatents
fileanother
list
on the
MUSIC
menu
and
want
playback
is
stopped.
with the
issued
and
pending.
“DTS”
andto“DTS
� is
Still
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
Playback
.
20
on top of theother
menu
highlighted.
MÚSICA
ou
FOTO
no
topo
do
menu
é
selecionada.
press
ENTER.
stopped
then
the
number
(0-9) que 999.
Digital
Surround”
are is
registered
trademarks
of Digital Theater
return
toplayback
the Folder
list,
use the
v/V
to appropriate
highlight
and
� Search.
.b
. . /. B
. 1996,
.to. .move
. .2000
. . . Digital
. another
. . . .Theater
. . . . . Systems,
. . . . . 20
might appearSystems,
Inc.
Copyright
CD
MP3
WMA
press
ENTER.
SEARCH
or use
• Press
DVD
MENU
to move
to thetonext
page. title/group.
Pause
Esse aparelho
de DVD requer discos e gravações que se
e tray. Playback
Inc.
All
rights
reserved.
�
Repeat
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
CHAPTER/TRACK
owner’s
You
can play
any title
bynext
inputting
its
number while
CD
Audio
CD
MP3
/
WMA
Disc
REPEAT
A-B
Press
DVD
MENU
to. .move
toand
the
page.
enquadrem
em
certosSCAN
padrões
técnicos
de) during
qualidade
a fim
does not start,
1.
Pressione
PAUSE/STEP
durante
a
reprodução.
•• On
aRepeat
CD
with
MP3/WMA
and
JPEG
you
can
switch
1.
Press
(
m
or
M
playback.
�
A-B
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
uld the
playback
isDVD-A
stopped.
MP3/WMADVD-V
and JPEG.
de atingir uma excelente qualidade de reprodução. DVDs
On
a retomar
CDON
with
MP3/WMA
� Time
Search
. .Press
. . and
. .TITLE
.JPEG
. . . and
. you
. . MUSIC
.can
. . .switch
. or
. . . . . . 21
e locaFeatures
1.2. ToPress
repeat
a sequence
during
disc playback
press
OTES
2.• PHOTO
Para
a reprodução,
pressione
PAUSE/STEP
SCAN
(
m or M
)
repeatedly
to select
the
word COPYRIGHTS:
on
top of the menu
is highlighted.
sãoatautomaticamente
ajustados
para The
esses
MP3/WMA
and
Press
TITLE
When
aJPEG.
title
more
than
or pré-gravados
a
ghtthe
appear
ect
title/chapter
� Marker
Search
. on
. ., a.broadcast,
.disc
. . . has
. .and
.show
. .MUSIC
. ,. broadcast
. . .or.one
. . . chapter
. 21
It isnovamente
forbidden
by
law
to copy
A-B
your
chosen
Repeat
icon
required
speed:
X2,starting
X4, X8point.
backward
or forward.
PHOTO
word
on
top
of
the
menu
is
highlighted.
disc
has
more
than
one
track,
you
can
move
to
padrões.
Existem
vários
tipos
de
diferentes
formatos
de
discos
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
CHAPTER/TRACK
TER
to
start.
via
cable,
play
in
public,
or
rent
copyrighted
material
without
edures
� Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
and “A” appear on the menu screen.
chapter/track
regraváveis
CD-R contendo
arquivos
ou WMA)
3. (incluindo
To exit SEARCH
mode,
press MP3
PLAY.
eturn
to the permission.
menu
ous
radiMudando
de
Faixa
DVD-V
DVD-A CD. . . . MP3
PAUSE
Special another
DVD
Features
.as
. .follows:
. . . WMA
. . . . . . . . . . 22
2. Press
A-B
again at
your chosen
endacima)
point.para
The
This product• features
the
copy
protection
function
developed
que
requerem
certas
condições
pré-existentes
(veja
28
Press
SKIP
or
to
� Title Menu
. .SKIP
. . . .(.
. . . .ou
. .>
. . . )briefly
. brevemente
. . . . during
. . . . . playback
. 22
1.
Pressione
a
tecla
Repeat icon and “A-B” appear on the menu
by Macrovision.
Copy
protection
signals
recorded
on some
1.select
Press
PAUSE/STEP
during
playback.
When
a title
on a disc
has are
more
than
one
chapter
ct
the title/chapter
open
to theor agarantir a compatibilidade de reprodução.
� Disc Menu
. . the
. . .next
. . . chapter/track
. . . . . . . . . . or
. . to
. . return
. . . . 22
List
within
. . . .an
..
ser
......
us
......
may be
.....
f .electric
durantedisc
arecording
reprodução
irone
àthe
próxima
faixa
ou move
retornar
screen, and the27
sequence begins to play
andpara
playing
pictures
ofcan
these
discsto
has more
than
track,
you
TER
OT to start.discs.�When
of
the
current
chapter/track.
2.beginning
To
return
playback,
press
Changing
the
Audio
Language
. . . . PLAY,
. . . . .ENTER
. . 22 or O24usuário deve
notar que é necessária a permissão para
on a
VCR,
picture
noise
will to
appear.
ao
início
da
faixa
atual.
another
chapter/track
as follows:
repeatedly.
eturn
to the
menu
elect an
option
you
• incorporates
Press
.
twice
briefly
press
PAUSE/STEP
again.
� Changing
theSKIP
Audio
Channel
. . . .technology
. to
. .step
. . . back
. that
. 22to the baixar arquivos MP3 / WMA e músicas na Internet. Nossa
This
product
copyright
protection
w the option.2. Pressione
• byaPress
or
toempresa3.não
previous
duas
tecla
Totem
exitcomo
the sequence
return toa normal
play,
ater
is protected
method
other
� Subtitles
. . .SKIP
.claims
. chapter/track.
. ..
. of
. .certain
..>
. . vezes
.U.S.
.briefly
. . patents
.rapidamente
. .during
. . and
. . .playback
. 22
garantir taland
permissão,
qual deve
select
the
next
chapter/track
or
to return
toplayback,
the
24
press A-B again.
The Repeat
icon
disappears from
, such
intellectual
rights
owned
by
Macrovision
Corporation
•faixa
To
go
directly
to
any
chapter
during
DVD
para irAudio
àproperty
anterior.
CD
DVD
Discs
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
ser
obtida diretamente
do detentor
do direito
autoral.
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
TRACK
beginning
of
the
current
chapter/track.
the menu screen.
and other rights press
owners.
Use of this
copyright
tech- the
DISPLAY
and
press vprotection
/ V to select
27
isc is not within
lect an option
3. you
Vocêmust
pode
tocar
qualquer
faixa,
pressionando
ochapter/track
seu
MP3
WMA
• bePress
SKIP
.
twice
briefly
tothe
step
backisto the
nology
authorized
by
Macrovision
Corporation,
and
chapter/track
icon.
Then,
input
the
27
the password.
option. intended
for respectivo.
home
and other
limited
uses only unless
previous
chapter/track.
número
number
or
use
b / viewing
B.
ricted to
3D SURROUND CD
1. Press
SKIP (. Corporation.
or >) briefly
during playback
otherwise authorized
by
Macrovision
Reverse
• To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback,
our receiverengineering
does
to go to the
next DVD-A
track or to return to the beginning
or press
disassembly
is prohibited.
DVD-V
DISPLAY
and press v / V to select the
To produce a 3D surround effect that simulates multisc is not
within
SEARCH
24from
code
different
of the current
track.
chapter/track
icon.
Then, input the chapter/track
channel audio from two stereo speakers (instead of
1. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > for about
rthe
thispassword.
receiver is 1
number
or
use
b
/
B.
SERIAL NUMBER:
The
serial
number
is
located
on
the
back
the five+ speakers normally required for multi-channel
2.two
Press
SKIPduring
. twice
briefly to go back to the
seconds
playback.
DVD-V
When a title on a disc has more than one chapter or a
disc has more than one track, you can move to
another chapter/track as follows:
DVD-V
In some cases, the disc menu might appear
instead:
4. Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the tray. Playback
starts automatically. If playback does not start,
press PLAY.
load your chosen disc in the tray, with the
playback side down.
DVD-A
MOVING TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK
move to another title/group. Press DISPLAY while
playback is stopped then the appropriate number (0-9)
or use b / B to move to another title/group.
You can play any title by inputting its number while
playback is stopped.
of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available
28
>>> (Fast), >> (Normal), and > (Slow).
Use v V b B to highlight the Speed. Then, use b / B to
select the option you want to use then press ENTER.
• On a disc with MP3/WMA and JPEG you can switch
MP3/WMA and JPEG. Press TITLE and MUSIC or
PHOTO word on top of the menu is highlighted.
• Press RETURN, information of file is hidden.
JPEG disc com
limited as follo
• Depending up
files, it could t
receiver to rea
see an on-scr
some of the fi
JPEG
Viewing a JPEG Disc
ZOOM
Introduction
resolution of t
JPEG
Zoom
SLIDE
SHOW
JPEG
Viewing
ZOOM
as 2760 x 204
Audio
CD
and
Disc no
. . controle
. . . . . . remoto,
. . . . . . . 23
Safety
Precautions
. . . . .you
. .a.can
.JPEG
. .view
. . . Kodak
. . Disc
. . . . . . . . . Use
2 zoom
Introduction
to Ao
enlarge
theMP3/WMA
photo
image.
Using this
DVD/CD
receiver
pressionar
a tecla
ZOOM
Usando
este
aparelho
de
DVD
você
pode
visualizar
an
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.. .. .. .. •.. 23
Table
ofPrecautions
Contents
. .. this
.. ..with
.. DVD/CD
.. ..JPEG
.. .. .. .. .files.
.. .. .. .. .. ..you
.. .. ..can
.. .. ..view
.. .. (see
32Kodak
Usepage
v
VPlaying
bB
to
highlight
the
(Slide
Show)
then
Audio
CD
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
Safety
.receiver
25)
Use
zoom
to
enlarge
the
photo
image.
PICTURE
CDs
and
discs
Using
The total num
a� palavra
“. ZOOM
ON”
aparecerá
no canto
imagens
de fotos
e.discos
JPEG.. 4-5 press ENTER.
Pause
. . . 25)
. .CD
. . .and
. . .MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . . .Disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
Before
. . .CDs
. . .Kodak
. .. ..com
. .. ..arquivos
. .. .. ..JPEG
Playing
anpage
Audio
23
Table ofUse
Contents
.. .. .. .. ..CDs
. .. .. .and
.discs
.. .with
.. .. .. .. .files.
..3
(see
PICTURE
should be less
direito
superior
da
tela.
1.Insira
Insert
a
disc
and
close
the
tray.
The
PHOTO
menu
1.Before
um
disco
e
feche
a
bandeja.
O
PHOTO
Menu
�
Playable
. TO
4 ROTATE
� Moving
Pause
.to. .another
. . .JPEG
. . . Track
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
Use Discs
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5
PICTURE
appears
on
the
TV
screen.
•
Some discs m
1.
Insert
a
disc
and
close
the
tray.
The
PHOTO
menu
JPEG
(Menu
de Foto)
�
Track/All/Off.
. . . ..você
.. .. ..JPEG
..pode
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
Precautions
.aparece
. .. .. .. .. .na
.. .. .da
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54STILL PICTURE
Utilizando
as

� Repeat
Moving
to teclas
another
Track
23
Playable
Discs
.tela
. .. ..TV.
TO
ROTATE
PICTURE
JPEG
Viewing
a. .. .JPEG
Press v / VZOOM
during
showing
different recor
appears
on the TVDisc
screen.
�
. . . a. .picture
. . . . .toEssa
.. .rotate
.. .. função
.. ..the
.. .. .. .varia
.. .. .. da
.. .. .. .. .. 23
Notes
on Discs
� Search.
Repeato modo
Track/All/Off.
.
.
23
Precautions
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 551. Press PAUSE/STEP
controlar
ZOOM.
PHOTO
slide
show. a picture to rotate the
clockwise
or Operation
counter
Press
v / during
Vclockwise.
during
showing
JPEG
Disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
About
.. .. .. .. .. .. .receiver
.. .. .. .you
.. .. .. picture
55
•
Ensure that a
Use
zoom
to
enlarge
the
photo
image.
�
Search.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
Notes Symbols
on
Discs
. .. ..PHOTO
. .. .. .can
. .. .. .view
. .. .. ..Kodak
Using
this..DVD/CD
seguinte
forma:
The player
will now
go into PAUSE
mode.
picture
clockwise
JPEG
Viewing
aOperation
JPEG
disc. ..or.. ..counter
.. .. .. .. .. .clockwise.
extensions wh
Front
Panel
and Rear
Panel
.. .. ..JPEG
.. .. .. .. files.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. TO
65 LISTEN
Viewing
(see
page
25)
ZOOM
JPEG
Disc
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
About
Symbols
.CDs
. .a
. and
.JPEG
. . discs
. .. .. .. .with
.Disc
PICTURE
TO
MP3/WMA
MUSIC
2.
To
return
to
the
slide
show,
press
PLAY
or
press
JPEG
Viewing
aPanel
JPEG
025
PCT;
050 PCT;
ZOOM
�
Slide
Show
. disc
. . .100
.. .. ..PCT;
.. .. .. ..150
.. .. ..PCT
.. .. .. .e. ..200
.. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Remote
Control
Overview
. . .. .. .. .. .Disc
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76
Viewing
aagain.
JPEG
24
Front Panel
and
Rear
. .. ..tray.
TO
LISTEN
TO
MP3/WMA
MUSIC
•
If the files hav
PAUSE/STEP
1.
Insert
a
disc
and
close
the
The
PHOTO
menu
Use
zoom
to enlarge
the
Using this DVD/CD receiver you can view KodakWATCHING
PICTURE
PCT.
�
Picture
.. .JPEG
.. .. photo
.. .. .. .. ..image.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
� Still
Slide
Show
. ..the
24
TO
ROTATE
PICTURE
Remote Control
Overview
. . screen.
. . . .you
. . .can
. . .view
.......7
please renam
Use
zoom
to enlarge
photo JPEG
image.
Using
this
DVD/CD
receiver
appears
onand
the .discs
TV
(see
page
25)
JPEG
PICTURE
CDs
with JPEG
files. Kodak
WATCHING
PICTURE
�
Moving
to
another
file
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
You can display
filesPicture
while
listening
MP3/WMA
� Still
. .showing
. uma
. . to
. .vez
.a. picture
.a
.tecla
. . . to
.ZOOM
. rotate
. . . .a.the
. . . . 24
Preparation
(see
page
25)during
Pressionando
mais
PICTURE CDs and discs with JPEG files.
JPEG
Press
vANOTHER
/V
MOVING
TO
FILE
•
File names wi
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
music
files picture
recorded
on
the
same
disc.
You
can
display
files
1. Insert
menu
� JPEG
Moving
to
another
file“while
.JPEG
. . listening
. . . . no
. . to
.canto
. MP3/WMA
. . . . . . 24
Viewing
Disc
Connections
. . .a
. a. JPEG
.disc
. . .and
.PHOTO
. . close
. . . . the
. . .tray.
. . . The
. . . PHOTO
. . . 8-13
clockwise
or counter
clockwise.
Preparation
ZOOM
indicação
“ ZOOM
OFF
aparecerá
TO
ROTATE
PICTURE
able to be rea
1. appears
Insert a disc
and
the tray. The PHOTO menu
Programmed
Playback
.. .. ..on
.. .. the
.JPEG
.. ..same
.. .. .. ..disc.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
music
files
recorded
on the
TVclose
screen.
�(.
To
rotate
picture.
.
24
Press
SKIP
or
>)
or
cursor
(b
or
B)
once
TO
ROTATE
PICTURE
TV Connections
. . 1.
8 Insert thedireito
Connections
. . . . . ..on
.. .. the
.. .. ..TV
.. .. screen.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13
da
though the file
disc
containing
the
two
types
file
appears
Repeat
Tracks.
.of
.next
.. ..to..in
..rotate
.. .. .. ..the
.. .. .. .. .. 25
UseProgrammed
zoom
toLISTEN
the
photo
image.
Press
venlarge
/Programmed
V tela.
during
showing
a. .the
picture
Using vthis
DVD/CD
receiver
you
can
view
Kodak
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
TO
TO
MP3/WMA
MUSIC
2.
Press
/
V
to
select
a
folder,
and
press
ENTER.
while
viewing
a
picture
to
advance
to
or
Optional
Equipment
.. .. .. .. .. 98 the player.
2. Pressione
/
para
Windows
Exp
TV
Connections
.selecionar
. Connections
. .PHOTO
. with
. . . uma
.JPEG
. . .pasta
. .files.
. .. ..e,.. .em
. .. ..segui1.
the
disc
containing
the
two
in
Press
/aInsert
VTrack
during
showing
a picture
to
rotate
(see page
25)v
Erasing
from
Programme
List
.. .types
.. .the
.. .of
.. .file
25
picture
clockwise
or
counter
clockwise.
PICTURE
CDs
and
discs
Este
indica
que
o
modo
ZOOM
está
desativado.
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
A
list
of
files
in
the
folder
appears.
previous
file.
2.
Press
v
/
V
to
select
a
folder,
and
press
ENTER.
PHOTO
Aerial
Connections
. .Connections
. . . Uma
. . . .lista
. . . de
.. .. arquivos
.. .. .. .. .. .. da
.. .. .. 10
JPEG
Optional
Equipment
. 2.9 Press TITLE
WATCHING
PICTURE
picture
or counter
clockwise.
theComplete
player.
da,
pressione
aatecla
ENTER.
toclockwise
display
PHOTO
menu.
Erasing
the
Programme
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Erasing
a
Track
from
Programme
List
25
If
you
are
in
file
list
and
want
to
return
to
the
A
list
of
files
in
the
folder
appears.
1. aparece.
Insert
a disc
and
Speaker
System
Connection
. .. .. .lista
.The
.PHOTO
Aerial
Connections
.close
. . . . the
. . uma
.tray.
.. .. .de
.. ..arquivos
.. .. .. ..menu
.11-12
. e. 10 TODivX
TO
MP3/WMA
ithin an
pasta
Se list,
você
visualiza
Press
TITLE
to
PHOTO
Operation
. while
.file.
.JPEG
. display
. listening
. . . . MUSIC
. . to
. .List
. . menu.
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
You
can
display
files
MP3/WMA
PICTURE
If. .you
list and
want
theROTATE
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
25
on
the. to
previous
Folder
use
the
v
/Disc
VLISTEN
to2.select
aTO
photo
3. to
Press
appears
on the
TV
� Transmitter.
. . screen.
.are
. . in
.v.a./ .file
.V.. buttons
.return
. 11
TO
LISTEN
TO
MP3/WMA
MUSIC
Speaker
Connection
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. as
.. .. teclas
. .. 11-12
er
music
files
recorded
Speaker
Setup
. .PICTURE
.v. /. V..on
. .picture
.select
.photo
.. .. .. ..file.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
desejar
vertoaSystem
lista anterior
de
pastas,
pressione
DivX
Disc
Operation
.the
. .. .same
. .JPEG
. .to
.a.. rotate
.disc.
26
v
/
V
buttonsPress
on
the
previous
Folder
list,
use
the
3.
Press
remote
highlight
and
press
ENTER.
v
/select
V during
showing
a.to
the
�
a channel
s
B WATCHING
to
icon
then
press
ENTER.
4. UseAdditional
� Changing
Transmitter.
.PHOTO. . . . . .of. Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
11
WATCHING
Information
.. .. .. ..JPEG
..JPEG
.. .. .. ..com
.. .. .. .este
.. .. .. .. .. 28
/
no controle
remoto
para
destacar
e. pressione
Speaker
Setup
. .PICTURE
. de
. . while
. clockwise.
. will
. .. .. .. reprodu27
remote
to highlight
and
press
ENTER.
picture
clockwise
or
counter
A
compatibilidade
discos
ay be
JPEG
�
Setting
a
ID
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
Playback
starts.
The
playback
continue
until
You
can
display
files
listening
to
MP3/WMA
Viewing
a
JPEG
Disc
B
to
select
icon
then
press
ENTER.
4.
Use
ZOOM
1.
Insert
the
disc
containing
the
two
types
of
file
in
� Changing
a channel
of Transmitter
. . . . . . . . 11
3.ENTER.
If you
want
to view
press and
Last
Condition
Memory
.. .. .. .. .. ..to.. ..MP3/WMA
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
2. Press
v a/ particular
VConnecting
to selectfile,
a folder,
press ENTER.
Additional
Information
. . .The
.listening
28
You
can
display
files
while
electric
STOP
is
pressed.
tor
se
limita
como
segue:
music
files
recorded
on
the
same
disc.
Playback
starts.
playback
will
continue
until
�
Assembling
and
to
the
Speakers
11
the
player.
30
�
Setting
alist
Transmitter
. . appears.
.a .particular
. . or
. . PLAY.
. . .file,
. . .press
11
3.IDof
Ifaoffiles
you
want
tofolder
view
v Using
/V
to this
highlight
file
and
press
ENTER
Screen
Saver
. the
.Memory
. . photo
. . .the
. image.
..MUSIC
.. .. .. .. .disc.
ADVD/CD
in the
UseLISTEN
zoom
tofiles
enlarge
TO
TO
MP3/WMA
Last Condition
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
music
recorded
on
same
receiver
STOP
is
pressed.
�
Connections.
. .you
. . .can
. . the
.view
.and
.pressione
. Kodak
.press
. . . . . 12
• Controlling
Dependendo
doTV
tamanho
de arquivos
� Speaker
Assembling
and
Connecting
Speakers
3. SeViewing
você
deseja
ver
um
em
2. Insert
Press
TITLE
to
display
PHOTO
theIffile
proceeding
starts.
v
/ arquivo
V
to
highlight
atofile
PLAY.
the
.. .. JPEG
.. .. .e
..do
.. .. número
.two
.. ..menu.
.types
you
are
indiscs
a file
list particular,
and
want
to
return ENTER
to 11
the
(see
page
25)Saver
Tip: or
PICTURE
CDs
and
with
JPEG
files.
Screen
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .. .. .. ..of.. .file
. .. ..in.. .. .. 28
28
1.
the
disc
containing
the
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
WATCHING
PICTURE
� Speaker
Connections.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
2.
Press
v
/
V
to
select
a
folder,
and
press
ENTER.
JPEG,
pode
demorar
um
pouco
para
que
o
aparelho
viewing
a
file,
you
can
press
STOP
to
move
iangle
Viewing
the
file
proceeding
starts.
asWhile
teclas
/
para
destacar
o
arquivo
e
pressione
1.
Insert
the
disc
containing
the
two
types
of
file
in
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
/ V press
buttons
on
previous
list, use
the vand
v the
/ V to
select
file.
3.
Press
Tothe
listen toControlling
only
the
desired
music
Tip:
the
player.
TV
. . .watching
.a.photo
. . . . picture,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2. APress
/.Folder
V
to
ENTER.
Before
Operation
.v
.files
.(PHOTO
.close
. .the
.select
. ..the
. .menu).
.a.atray.
. .file,
.folder,
.appears.
.The
. .. .. PHOTO
. .. .. press
. .. .14-19
1.
Insert
a
disc
and
menu
list
of
in
folder
ce of
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
to
the
previous
menu
While
viewing
you
can
STOP
to
move
the
player.
You
can
display
files
while
listening
to
MP3/WMA
leia
o
conteúdo
do
disco.
Se
você
não
visualizar
ENTERthe
ou PLAY.
Aofdemonstração
dosand
slides
inicia
a
Presetting
theRadio
radio
stations
.. .. ..music
.. .. .. .. ..watching
.. .. .. .. .. .. picture,
.. .. 29
programmed
desired
tracks
from
the
remote
to highlight
press
ENTER.
Towith
listen
to
desired
Operation
.the
.icon
.JPEG
. . then
.“MUSIC”
29
TO
ROTATE
PICTURE
list
files
in.file
2.
Press
toonly
display
PHOTO
menu.
About
symbols
4. the
Use
BTITLE
to
select
press
ENTER.
ing)
Mini Operation
Glossary
for
Stream
Surround
appears
on
the
screen.
IfAyou
are
list
want
to the music
Before
.to
.Audio
.inTV
. a.for
.the
. instructions
. folder
. .and
.&
. .appears.
. .(PHOTO
. .to. return
. . . menu).
. 14-19
the
previous
menu
files
recorded
onde
the
same
disc.
tothe
the
radio
.desired
. .PHOTO
. um
. ..tracks
..longo
..will
..menu.
.. ..continue
.. .. .. the
. . . de
.. .. .. .. 29
.após
menu and Listening
then
proceed
as
above
programmed
the
from
“MUSIC”
2.
Press
TITLE
to
display
nenhum
menu
tela
período
partir
do.arquivo
se
Presetting
radio
stations
29
and
the
the
starts.
The
Tips:
Mode
.3.. previous
.IfIf. you
. selecionado,
. for
. are
. .Audio
.in. to
.a .file
.list,
. list
. a.use
.opção
.&
.the
.want
. velocidade
. ./ .to
. return
. .press
. .não
.to. on
14
/Playback
V during
showing
a aplayback
picture
to
rotate
the. . .until
v
V
buttons
the Press3.v Press
Folder
v
/
V
to
select
photo
file.
Mini
Glossary
Stream
Surround
you
want
view
a
particular
file,
Other
Functions.
. then
. select
.arquivos
. .proceed
.. .a. ..photo
..podem
.. .as
..above
.. .ser
...muito
.. .. .. .. .grandes
. . . . 30
menu
and
Indicates
hazards
likely
to cause
harm
to the
unit
Listening
tocontaining
the
radio
. .. file.
. .. file
tempo,
alguns
dos
desativada.
Folder
use
the1.picture
vis
/or
Vcounter
to
3.
Press
STOP
pressed.
• estiver
Press
MENU
to move
to
clockwise
clockwise.
Insert
the
disc
the
two
types
of
in . . . . . 29
Sound
Mode
.. .. to
..to
.PHOTO
.highlight
.. ..next
.. ..list,
..page.
.. ..and
..the
.. ..press
.v
.. .. .. .. .. on
14
Mode
. remote
.previous
.highlight
.the
. ../..V.. .ENTER.
.buttons
14PLAY.
v. /./Tips:
a.. ..file
and
press
ENTER
or
Sleep
Timer
Setting
.. .. .arquivos
.. ..JPEG
.. .. .ENTER.
.. .. .. menos
.. .. .. .. 30
itself
or. .visualiza
other
damage.
B atoresolução
select
4.
Use
2. Press
v
VV
to
a folder,
and
press
ENTER.
Other
Functions.
. . . . .dos
. icon
. .then
. .. .. ..press
. .. ..para
30
•material
Press
MENU
tovocê
move
the
next
page.
remote
toselect
highlight
and
press
ENTER.
–player.
reduza
um
arquivo,
pode
pressionar
the4.
• Enquanto
There
are Mode
three
Slide
Speed
options
:to
On-Screen
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
Sound
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
Viewing
the
file
proceeding
starts.
B
to
select
icon
then
press
ENTER.
Use
CK
Playback
A list
ofIf (Normal),
files
in the
folder
appears.
Dimmer
.TO
. .starts.
.Setting
. .with
. .The
. this
.. ..playback
.. .player
.. .. .. .will
.. .. .. .. .. .. .until
.. .. .. 30
Tip:
JPEG
disc
compatibility
is
Sleep
Timer
. .2048
.MUSIC
. .. ..continue
. ..outro
30
TO
LISTEN
MP3/WMA
3. >>
you
want
to
view
a.Slide
particular
file,
press
>>>
(Fast),
and
>three
(Slow).
•
There
are
Speed
options
:
de
2M
pixels,
como
2760
x
pixels
e
grave
STOP
para
ir
ao
menu
anterior
(PHOTO
Menu).
Initial
Settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-19
Playback
starts.
The
playback
will
continue
until
While
viewing
a
file,
you
can
press
STOP
to
move
2.
Press
TITLE
to
display
PHOTO
menu.
On-Screen
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
Indicates
special
operating
features
of
this
unit.
N OR
STOP
pressed.
IfVyou
are
in awant
file the
list
and want
to use
return
to
the
To
listen
picture,
. JPEG
. .to
.. ..disc
.. .the
.. .. .. .. .. ..music
. . . .with
.watching
. . this
. . . .player
. . . . .is. 30
3. Bv
Iftoyou
to view
a Then,
particular
file,
press
limited asMute
follows:
Dimmer
.isis.. only
. .. .compatibility
. desired
b
/ENTER
to
Use�vGeneral
b
highlight
Speed.
V.>>>
to.previous
file
(Fast),
and
JPEG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. ..v.(PHOTO
.and
. ..press
.B..on
. .or16PLAY.
STOP
pressed.
to/ Operation
the
menu
disco.
WATCHING
PICTURE
Initial
.highlight
.list,
. to. use
..use
..>>
..aathen
..(Normal),
.file
../ .V
.. .. ..>menu).
..(Slow).
.ENTER
.. ..the
16-19
buttons
previous
the
programmed
the
v
/ .the
Vlimited
afollows:
file.
3.
Using
Headphone
.. .. ..the
.. .. ..“MUSIC”
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
v /Folder
VUse
towant
highlight
and
press
or use
PLAY.
select
theSettings
option
you
press
ENTER.
Mute
. to
.the
. select
. size
. .as
. desired
.and
. photo
. .number
.Jack
.tracks
. . . .of
. .from
. JPEG
30
v
V
b
B
to
highlight
the
Speed.
Then,
b / Press
B to
Viewing
the
file
proceeding
starts.
Indicates
tips
and
hints
for
making
the
task
easier.
Dicas:
•
Depending
upon
�
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
Tip:
General
Operation
.proceeding
.and
. .you
.press
. want
.can
. .starts.
.to. use
. . .then
. . . press
. . 16ENTER.
menu
and
then
proceed
as above
• On a� disc
withWhile
MP3/WMA
and
JPEG
you
switch
remote
to
highlight
ENTER.
Viewing
thethe
filea.option
You
display
files
while
listening
to
Selecting
the
Input
Source
.. ..MP3/WMA
... .. .. .num
.. ..disco
.. .. .. .. deve
.. .. .. 30
select
•it can
O
número
total
de
arquivos
e.DVD/CD
pastas
Using
the
Headphone
Jack
. ..number
30
viewing
file,
you
can
press
STOP
to move
Tip:
Tips:
pace
B
to
select
icon
then
press
ENTER.
4.
Use
files,
could
take
a
long
time
for
the
•
Depending
upon
the
size
and
of
JPEG
To
listen
to
only
the
desired
music
watching
picture,
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
� Language
.viewing
. Press
.disc
.página
. TITLE
.with
.file,
. MP3/WMA
.próxima.
.you
. . MUSIC
.can
. . and
.press
. or. JPEG
. . STOP
. . you
. . .to
16move
MP3/WMA
and
JPEG.
and
• MENU
On
a. à
can
switch
• Pressione
DVD
MENU
While
aDolby
music
files
recorded
on
the
samewill
disc.
XTS
(Excellent
True
Sound)
..continue
.. ..watching
.. .. .. ..until
.. .. ..picture,
. .. .. .. .. .. 30
to
menu
(PHOTO
menu).
Selecting
the
Input
Source
30
Manufactured
license
from
•under
Press
to
to.Laboratories.
the
next
page.
To
to
only
desired
Playback
starts.
The
playback
ser
menor
quer
650.
tolisten
read
the
disc’s
contents.
If.long
you
don’t
files,
itthe
could
take
amusic
time
the. DVD/CD
programmed
the
desired
tracks
from
thefor
“MUSIC”
. the
.previous
. view
.amove
.menu
. ..“Dolby”,
. .. ..and
. MUSIC
. 17 receiver
PHOTO
wordwant
on
top
3.�� Audio.
IfDisplay
you
..the
.. to
.MP3/WMA
.of
..the
.. ..symbol
.menu
..particular
.and
.. is
..are
.highlighted.
..(PHOTO
.. ..file,
..Press
.. ..press
.. .TITLE
.. 16-17
JPEG.
or
to
previous
menu).
“Pro Logic”,
and the
double-D
trademarks
of. Dolby
XTS
pro
.receiver
.display
. the
. . .True
.after
. .read
.Sound)
. .tracks
. . .disc’s
..minutes,
.. .. .. contents.
..the
.. .. .“MUSIC”
.. .. ..If.. .you
XTS
(Excellent
.
. .. .. .don’t
. 30
30
programmed
desired
from
STOP
is
pressed.
•
There
are
three
Slide
Speed
options
:
:
•Laboratories.
quatro
opções
de
velocidade
de
Slide
see
an
on-screen
several
to
the
.
menu
and
then
proceed
as
above
• Existem
Press
RETURN,
information
of
file
is
hidden.
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
the
thediscos
disc containing
theincompatíveis
two
types
of file
inis
/Tips:
V to.highlight
press
ENTER
or
�v
Audio.
. . PHOTO
. . Unpublished
. . a. word
.file
. . and
.on
. works.
.top
. . of
. .Copyright
. . menu
. . . . is
. highlighted.
. PLAY.
. . . 17 1. • Insert
Confidential
1992Alguns
podem
ser
em
função
do
JPEG
disc
compatibility
with
this
player
and.may
then
above
2.
Press
/.(Normal)
V
a.(Lento).
XTS
pro
. . .an
.proceed
.on-screen
. . .large
. .as
. .—
. .reduce
. . .. .after
. the
. . several
. . . . . .minutes,
. . . 30
>>>
>>
>
ofmenu
the
files
be
too
see
display
>>>
(Rápido),
>>
e. >.reserved.
Use
Press
RETURN,
General
Features
�
Others
.v
.•(Fast),
.file
.to
. proceeding
.select
. (Normal),
.move
.folder,
..information
.and
.. next
.. and
.. .(Slow).
.. press
.as
.. .teclas
.. .ENTER.
.. .. .. 19
Tips:
1997
Dolby
Laboratories.
All
rights
Viewing
the
starts.
the
player.
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.the
. page.
.of
.file
.is.. hidden.
18 some
Press
MENU
to
to
the
Tip:
limited
asgravação
follows:toou
formato
damay
condição
dos
mesmos.
A••list
of files
in B
the
folder
appears.
Reference
to
Use
vMENU
V
b
highlight
Speed.
Then, use b / B resolution
of thede
JPEG
less
than
2Mtoo
pixels
some files
of the files
be
large
— reduce the
JPEG
Press
to.to.move
to
the
next
page.
viewing
aoption
file,
you
can
press
STOP
to
move
SLIDE
SHOW
para
destacar
Velocidade
(Speed).
Em
� While
Others
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
Manufactured
under
license
from
Digital
Theater
Systems,
Inc.
2.
Press
TITLE
to
display
PHOTO
menu.
To
listen
to
only
the
desired
music
watching
picture,
•
There
are
three
Slide
Speed
options
:
select
the
you
want
to
use
then
press
ENTER.
If you are in a file list and want
to return to the
Language
Code
List
.the
.the
. os
. .JPEG
. .and
. .this
.number
. .player
. . less
. of
. .is
. . . .2M
. . 31
as 2760
x• 2048
pixels
and
burn
another
disc.
resolution
of
files
to
than
pixels
Reference
Note:
Depending
upon
size
JPEG
JPEG
• Certifique-se
que
todos
arquivos
selecionados
US
Pat. No.
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
to 5,451,942
the
previous
menu
(PHOTO
menu).
JPEG
disc
compatibility
with
SHOW
•• >>>
There
are
three
Slide
Speed
options
:can
Operation
(Fast),
>>
(Normal),
and
>
(Slow).
seguida
a opção
desejada
ethe
pressione
ENTER
. switch
On
aSLIDE
disc
with
MP3/WMA
and
JPEG
youand
programmed
the
desired
tracks
from
the
“MUSIC”
v
/Show)
V buttons
on
the
previous
Folder
list,
vCode
/ disc
V
tofollows:
select
3.Country
Press
other
patents
issued
anduse
pending.
“DTS”
and
“DTS
JPEG
compatibility
with
this
player
2760
2048
burn
List
. x.a“.jpg”,
.. aphoto
.. .long
..quando
.file.
.. .. .and
.. .copiados
..the
.. .. DVD/CD
.. another
.. ..is
.para
.. .. 31
files,
itas
could
take
for
otherwise,
all
operations
described
Useworldwide
v•VUnless
bB
to stated
highlight
the
(Slide
then
Language
Code
List
. ..pixels
.time
.the
. disc
. .. .. ..disc.
31
limited
as
>>>
(Fast),
>>
(Normal),
and
>TITLE
(Slow).
tenham
a
extensão
o
MP3/WMA
and
JPEG.
Press
and
MUSIC
or
b
/
B
to
Use
v
V
b
B
to
highlight
the
Speed.
Then,
use
•
The
total
number
of
files
and
folders
on
.
menu
and
then
proceed
as
above
or
Video
CD
Operation
.JPEG
. . . press
.ofvocê
. Digital
. . .ENTER.
. .Theater
. . . . 19-22
Digital
Surround”
are
registered
trademarks
Operation
remote
to
highlight
and
limited
as follows:
•DVD
EmTips:
um
disco
com
MP3/WMA
. . ..icon
. .. .. .press
. ..contents.
32-33
receiver
to
read
press
ENTER.
use
the
remote
control.
features
may
Use
vBV
byou
BeDigital
to
highlight
the
(Slide
then
b Show)
/ be
B to 4.Troubleshooting
Use
v
V
b
to
highlight
the
Speed.
Then,
usealso
Country
List
..the
.. ..da
.disc’s
.. .. ..ENTER.
.. .. ..folders
.If. ..you
.. .. ..don’t
.. .. .the
. . disc
31
select
the
option
want
toTheater
PHOTO
word
on
top
ofSome
the
ispode
highlighted.
B
toCode
then
Use
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
1996,
2000
nput source
be
less
than
650.
•select
The
total
number
ofand
files
and
on
layout
do
CD,
na
hora
gravação.
Playing
a
DVD
and
Video
CD.
. menu
.use
. .. .then
.then
. Systems,
. .press
.press
. .. .. .ENTER.
.ENTER.
. . 19 should
•
Depending
upon
the
size
number
of
JPEG
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19-22
•
Press
MENU
to
move
to
the
next
page.
select
the
option
you
want
to
use
available
on
the
Setup
menu.
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
see
an
on-screen
display
after
several
minutes,
press
ENTER.
•reserved.
a disc
with MP3/WMA
can switch
Inc.alternar
All rightsentre
eles.
Pressione
a teclaandTITLE
ahidden.
palavra
• On
Press
RETURN,
information
ofJPEG
file e
isyou
Playback
starts.
The
Troubleshooting
. be
. .playback
.the
. . size
.than
. . will
.and
. . continue
.number
. . . . . of
.until
. JPEG
. . . . 32-33
• files,
Depending
upon
should
less
650.
wner’s
3. If •you
want
towith
file,
press
General
Features
.view
.Video
.MP3/WMA
. a. .particular
.CD.
. . .and
. TITLE
. .JPEG
. .. .:. .and
. .you
. ..MUSIC
.can
. .. .20-22
it be
could
take
a
long
time
for
the—
DVD/CD
On
a disc
switch
Playing
a
DVD
and
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
•
Some
discs
may
incompatible
due
to
a
MP3/WMA
and
JPEG.
Press
or
some
of
the
files
may
be
too
large
reduce
the
JPEG
•
Se
os
arquivos
possuírem
extensões
“.jpe”
ou
“.jpeg”,
•
There
are
three
Slide
Speed
options
STOPfiles,
is pressed.
STILL
PICTURE
Specifications
. . take
. . the
. .a.disc’s
. . . .time
. . .for
. . the
. . If.DVD/CD
. . . don’t
. . . . . . 34
MP3/WMA
ou
JPEG
no
alto
do menu
éTITLE
destacada.
d the
it could
long
le)
and select
v(Fast),
/ PHOTO
V
to
highlight
file
PLAY.
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
receiver
to read
contents.
youdue
JPEG disc
compatibility
with
this
player
isthan
MP3/WMA
and
JPEG.
and
�>>>
Moving
to
another
. .or20 different
word
top
of.and
the
menu
General
Features
. .on
.a
.TITLE/GROUP
. .JPEG
.(Slow).
. .press
.TITLE/GROUP
.JPEG
. .isENTER
. highlighted.
.. .. ..MUSIC
.. ..or.. 20-22
recording
format
or JPEG
the
condition
of disc.
>>
(Normal),
and
>Press
• renomeie-os
Some
discs
may
be“.jpg”
incompatible
to a
resolution
the
files
to less
2M
pixels
por
favor
para
STILL
PICTURE
locaSLIDE
SHOW
OTES
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
receiver
to of
read
the
disc’s
contents.
If you
don’t
D/CD
Viewing
file
proceeding
PHOTO
word
on
top
ofSpeed.
thestarts.
menu
isishighlighted.
see
an different
on-screen
display
after
several
minutes,
limited
as
follows:
�
Moving
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
.. ..to.. 20
•vRETURN,
Press
RETURN,
information
ofThen,
file
hidden.
Press
PAUSE/STEP
during
show.
•It 1.
Pressione
as
informações
do
arquivo
não
b.. ./. B
V
bto
Bthe
to
highlight
theslide
use
Tip:
DVD-V
DVD-A
recording
format
or
the
condition
of disc.
�Use
Moving
to
another
TITLE/GROUP
.
.
.
20
as
2760
x
2048
pixels
and
burn
another
disc.
is forbidden
by
law
to
copy
,
broadcast,
show
,
broadcast
see
an
on-screen
display
after
several
minutes,
•
Ensure
that
all
the
selected
files
have
the
“.jpg”
•
Press
RETURN,
information
of
file
is
hidden.
While
viewing
a. want
you
press
some
of
thenomes
files may
beatoo
large —picture,
reduce
the
option
you
ENTER.
•listen
Arquivos
com
sem
extensão
“.jpg”
nãothe
serão
The
player
will
now
go
into
�
Slow
Motion.
.rent
.file,
.copyrighted
.CHAPTER/TRACK
.toPAUSE
. use
. can
. . then
.the
. mode.
. press
.during
. .STOP
.without
. .slide
.. to
..Show)
..move
.. .. 20
Press
PAUSE/STEP
show.
ToDepending
to only
the
desired
music
watching
�select
Moving
to1.V
another
20
Use
v
b
B
to
highlight
(Slide
then
•
upon
the
size
and
number
of
JPEG
via desaparecem.
cable,
play
in
public,
or
material
dures
some
of
the
files
may
be
too
large
—
reduce
the
extensions
when
copying
into
the
CD
layout.
•
Ensure
that
all
the
selected
files
have
the
“.jpg”
•
The
total
number
of
files
and
folders
on
the
disc
to
the
previous
menu
(PHOTO
menu).
• On
a disc
with
MP3/WMA
and
JPEG
you
can
switch
When
a disc
has
than
resolution
ofreprodutor
the JPEG
files
tothe
less
than 2M
pixels
c tray
The
player
go
into
mode.
Still
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
20
desired
tracks
from
“MUSIC”
lidos
porthe
este
de
DVD,
mesmo
que
sejam
SLIDE
SHOW
Slow
. .more
. . . .JPEG
.will
. . one
.now
.PLAY
. .title/group,
. .or
.Playback
.press
. PAUSE
. . .you
. . ..can
20 programmed
2. To��return
toMotion.
the
slide
show,
press
press
ENTER.
us
radi-and permission.
files,
it resolution
could
take
a the
long
time
for
the
of
JPEG
files
to DVD/CD
less
2M
extensions
when
copying
intothan
the disc.
CD pixels
layout.
MP3/WMA
and
JPEG.
Press
TITLE
and MUSIC
or while
should
be
less
than
650.
JPEG
move
to another
title/group.
Press
DISPLAY
as
2760
x 2048
pixels
and
burn
another
SLIDE
SHOW
Demonstração
em
Slides
h the
�
Search.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
.
menu
and
then
proceed
as
above
•
If
the
files
have
“.jpe”
or
“.jpeg”
extensions,
This
product
features
the
copy
protection
function
developed
PAUSE/STEP
again.
�PHOTO
Still Picture
and
Playback
. 20 or press
2.onTo
to
the isslide
show,
press PLAY
visualizados
como
arquivos
imagem
JPEG
receiver
readxthe
disc’s
contents.
If you
don’t
Tips:
word
topreturn
ofFrame-by-Frame
the
menu
highlighted.
asto2760
2048
pixels
anddeburn
another
disc.no
playback
stopped
then
the
appropriate
(0-9)
Use
vis
B
then
by
Copy
signals
recorded
some
please rename
as
“.jpg”
file.
� Repeat
..V.protection
.b
..para
.. ..to
.. .selecionar
.. .the
.file
.again.
..isopage.
..hidden.
..on
.. ..number
..Show)
.. .. .. .. 20
UseMacrovision.
as

“.. .. ..”.(Slide
•them
IfExplorer.
the
files
have
“.jpe”
“.jpeg”
• The
Some
discs
may
beafter
incompatible
due
tothe
a disc
JPEG
Search.
. PICTURE
. PAUSE/STEP
.highlight
. ..of..next
.are
.the
.(Demonstra20
•an
total
number
of
files
andor
folders
onextensions,
on-screen
display
several
minutes,
open
Press
MENU
to
move
to
STILL
• •�setas
Press
RETURN,
Use
Vand
b.information
B
to
highlight
the
(Slide
Show)
then seeWindows
orRepeat
use
bvA-B
/ENTER.
B
to
move
to
another
title/group.
discs.
When
recording
playing
the
pictures
of
these
discs
press
•
The
total
number
of
files
and
folders
on
the
please
rename
them
as
“.jpg”
file.
�
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
y.
Playback
different
recording
format
or
the
condition
ofdisc
disc.
JPEG
OT
ção
de
Slide),
em
seguida
pressione
a
tecla
ENTER.
should
be
less
than
650.
�
Repeat
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
some
of
the
files
may
be
too
large
—
reduce
the
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
FILE
•
File
names
without
“.jpg”
extension
will
not
be
•
There
are
three
Slide
Speed
options
:
press
ENTER.
You
can
play any
title by inputting
its number
while
picture
noise
will
appear.
should
be JPEG
less than
650.
1. Search
Press
PAUSE/STEP
not start, on a VCR,
�
Time
.. JPEG
.. .. .. ..TO
..and
.. .. ANOTHER
.. .during
.. .. .. .. .slide
.. .. ..show.
.. .. .. .. .. ..JPEG
21
JPEG
disc
compatibility
with
this
player
ispixelswill not be
resolution
of
the
files
to
less
than
2M
�playback
Repeat
A-B
.
.
.
21
MOVING
FILE
>>>
(Fast),
>>
(Normal),
>
(Slow).
able
to
be
read
by
this
DVD/CD
receiver.
Even
•
File
names
without
“.jpg”
extension
SLIDE
SHOW
This
product
incorporates
copyright
protection
technology
that
•
Ensure
that
all
the
selected
files
have
the
“.jpg”
is stopped.
• Some discs may be incompatible due to a
Imagem
Congelada
The
player
will
PAUSE
STILL
PICTURE
�
Marker
.. certain
..cursor
.now
.. ..JPEG
.Speed.
..(b
..into
..patents
.. Then,
..B)
.. .. once
..and
.. .. ..mode.
.. ..to21
limited
asx follows:
(.
>)
or
or
as 2760
2048
pixels
burn
another
disc.
�SKIP
Time
Search
. .. ..of
. the
.go
21 though
b.. ./. B
Use
v
V Search
b or
B
to
highlight
use
ter
isPress
protected
method
claims
U.S.
other
• different
Some
discs
may
be
incompatible
due
aof disc.Even
the
files
are
shown
as
JPEG
image
files
able
to
beand
read
by or
this
DVD/CD
receiver.
JPEG
extensions
when
copying
into
the
CDinto
layout.
recording
format
the
condition
Pressione
abySTILL
tecla
PAUSE/STILL
durante
whileUse
viewing
aTo
to
�
Zoom.
.picture
.option
.toPICTURE
. .highlight
.you
..to..advance
.the
.by
..the
.Macrovision
..to
.or
..the
.a. ..demonstração
.next
.. or
..Show)
..or
..ENTER.
.PLAY
.. .then
..(b
..or
..or
21
select
want
to.. use
then
press
2. the
return
slide
show,
press
press
Press
SKIP
(.
>)
cursor
B)
once
appear
such
intellectual
property
rights
owned
Corporation
�
Marker
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
v1.V
b
B
(Slide
different
recording
format
or
the
condition
ofimage
disc. files in
Windows
Explorer.
though
the
files
are
shown
asJPEG
JPEG
Press PAUSE/STEP during slide show.
Depending
upon
the
size
and
number
of
• •The
total
number
of
files
and
folders
on
the
disc
•
On
a
disc
with
MP3/WMA
and
JPEG
you
can
switch
de
Slides.
If the files
“.jpe”
or “.jpeg”
previous
file.
next or
Special
Features
..now
.. copyright
.a. ..picture
.. during
.. .into
..to
.PAUSE
..advance
.. .. ..show.
..tech.. .. to
.. ..the
.. 22
PAUSE/STEP
again.
ANOTHER
and
other
rights
owners.
Use
• • Ensure
thathave
all the
selected
files extensions,
have the “.jpg”
press
ENTER.
1.DVD
Press
�MOVING
Zoom.
. .while
.TO
.PAUSE/STEP
. .viewing
.of
. .this
. .CHAPTER/TRACK
. protection
.slide
21
Windows
Explorer.
The
player
will
go
mode.
files,
itbe
could
take
a650.
long
time for the
DVD/CD
should
less
than
MP3/WMA
and
JPEG.
Press
TITLE
and
MUSIC
or
•
Ensure
that
all
the
selected
files
have
the
“.jpg”
please rename
as “.jpg”
file.CD layout.
nology
must
be
authorized
previous
file.
extensions
whenthem
copying
into the
� Title
Menu
.modo
. .by. .Macrovision
. .. now
.. .. .. .go
..into
.. .. ..PAUSE
.. .. .. .. and
.. .mode.
.. .. 22
O aparelho
estará
no
Slow.
The
player
will
Special
DVD
Features
. .. Corporation,
. ..is.. or
22
DVD-V
DVD-A
receiver
to read the
disc’s
contents.
If you
don’t
PHOTO
on top
of the
menu
isuses
highlighted.
2. Toword
return
tolimited
slide
PLAY
press • Some
extensions
when
copying
into
layout.
intended� for
home
and
other
viewing
JPEG
discs
may be
incompatible
duethe
to CD
a will
Disc
Menu
.. .. ..TO
.. ..the
.JPEG
.de
..slides,
.. .. show,
.show,
.. .. .press
..only
.. .. .unless
.. .. .or
MOVING
FILE
Para retornar
àPICTURE
demonstração
a.. ..tecla
cted to
Title
Menu
.ANOTHER
. ..slide
. .. pressione
.press
. PLAY
. .. 22
22
STILL
File
names
without
“.jpg”
extension
not be
2.
To return
to
the
press
see• •an
on-screen
display
after
several
minutes,
If
the
files
have
“.jpe”
or
“.jpeg”
extensions,
•�When
Press
RETURN,
information
of
file
is
hidden.
PAUSE/STEP
again.
otherwise
authorized
by
Macrovision
Corporation.
Reverse
a titlethe
on a
disc has
more than
one
chapter
or a different
e title/chapter �� Changing
recording
format
or
the
condition
of
disc.
Audio
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
•
If
the
files
have
“.jpe”
or
“.jpeg”
extensions,
Disc
Menu
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
able
torename
be read
by
receiver.
Even
PAUSE/STEP
again.
PLAY oudisc
pressione
a tecla
novamente.
someplease
of the
files
maythem
bethis
too
large —
the
as DVD/CD
“.jpg”
file.reduce
orhas
disassembly
isSLOW/SCAN
prohibited.
more
than
one
track,
you
can
move
to
1.� Changing
Press
PAUSE/STEP
during
slide
show.
to start. engineering
Press
SKIP
(.
or
>)
or
cursor
(b
or
B)
once
the
Audio
Channel
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
please
rename
them
as
“.jpg”
file.
� Changing
the
Audio
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
though
files
are
shown
as than
JPEG
image
resolution
files
to less
pixelsfiles in
• Ensure
that of
allthe
theJPEG
selected
files
have
the 2M
“.jpg”
JPEG
JPEG
another
chapter/track
asinto
follows:
SLIDE
SHOW
TO
ANOTHER
FILE
to the menu
TheMOVING
player
will
now
go
PAUSE
mode.
Mudando
de
arquivo
•
File
names
without
“.jpg”
extension
will
not
be
while
viewing
a
picture
to
advance
to
the
next
or
�
Subtitles
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
Windows
Changing
Audio
Channel
. .FILE
. . the
. . back
. JPEG
. . . . . 22
as 2760
xnames
2048Explorer.
pixels
and
burn
another
disc.
extensions
when
copying
into
the
CD layout.
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
30 SERIAL�NUMBER:
Thethe
serial
number
is located
on
• able
File
without
“.jpg”
extension
will not
be
to be read
by this
DVD/CD
receiver.
Even
previous
file.
Pressione
aPress
tecla
SKIP
(.highlight
ou
o(Slide
()
SKIP
.
or
2.
return
to. the
PLAY
DVD
Audio
.. .. ..ou
..show,
.. >
..the
.. .. )press
..briefly
.. ..and
.. .cursor
.. ..Show)
..or
.. .playback
.. .then
.. 22
�• To
Subtitles
.slide
. .during
.not
.press
. .. once
22to
of
this
unit.
This
unique
to
this
unit
available
Use
v
Vnumber
bDiscs
B .tois. (.
30
Press
SKIP
or
>)
or
cursor
(b
or
B)
able
to
be
read
by
this
DVD/CD
receiver.
Even
total
number
of or
files
and folders
on the
disc files in
though
the“.jpe”
files
are“.jpeg”
shown
as JPEG
image
• •If The
the files
have
extensions,
select
the
next
chapter/track
or tohere
return
to the
PAUSE/STEP
again.
to
others.
You
should
record
requested
information
and
uma
vez
durante
enquanto
visualiza
uma
imagem,
para
DVD
Audio
Discs
.a .picture
. .or. .>)
. . .advance
.or. cursor
. . . . to
. (b
.the
. or
. .next
. . .once
22
Press
SKIP .(.
B)
press
ENTER.
while
or
though
the
filesas
are
shown
should
be less
than
650.
retain this guide
as viewing
a permanent
recordto
ofchapter/track.
your purchase.
beginning
of the
current
Windows
Explorer.
please
rename
them
“.jpg”
file. as JPEG image files in
while viewing
a picture
to advance to the next or
avançar à próxima
oufile.
retornar
à anterior.
previous
Windows Explorer.
an option you
• Press
SKIP
.
twice
briefly
to
step
back
to
the
JPEG
MOVING
TO
ANOTHER
FILE
previous
file.
Some
discs
may be
incompatible
to abe
JPEG
• •File
names
without
“.jpg”
extension due
will not
STILL
PICTURE
option. Model No.
___________________________________
previous
chapter/track.
different
format
or thereceiver.
condition
of disc.
able
to be recording
read by this
DVD/CD
Even
Serial Press
No.
___________________________________
25
•
To
go
directly
to
any
chapter
during
DVD
playback,
SKIP
(.
or
>)
or
cursor
(b
or
B)
once
1. Press PAUSE/STEP during slide show.
though the files are shown as JPEG image files in
30
•
Ensure
that
all
the
selected
files
have
the
“.jpg”
press
DISPLAY
and
press
v
/
V
to
select
the
whileThe
viewing
a
picture
to
advance
to
the
next
or
not within
player will now go into PAUSE mode.
Windows Explorer.
extensions when copying into the CD layout.
chapter/track
Then, input the chapter/track
previous
file. to theicon.
password.
2. To return
slide show, press PLAY or press
Operação de Disco JPEG
Introduction
Introduction
Visualizando um Disco JPEG
Preview
List
JPEG Folder 1
JPEG Folder 2
List
JPEG Folder 3
JPEG Folder 1
JPEG Folder 4
JPEG Folder 2
JPEG Folder 5
JPEG Folder 3
JPEG Folder 6
JPEG Folder 4
JPEG Folder 7
JPEG Folder 5
JPEG Folder 8
JPEG Folder 6
Preview
JPEG Folder 7
JPEG Folder 8
Preview
List
JPEG Folder 1
JPEG Folder 2
JPEG Folder 3
JPEG Folder 4
JPEG Folder 5
List
JPEG Folder 6
JPEG Folder 1
JPEG Folder 7
List
JPEG Folder 2
JPEGFolder
Folder1 8
JPEG
JPEG Folder 3
JPEG Folder 2
JPEG Folder 4
JPEG Folder 3
JPEG Folder 5
JPEG Folder 4
JPEG Folder 6
JPEG Folder 5
JPEG Folder 7
JPEG Folder 6
JPEG Folder 8
JPEG Folder 7
List
JPEG Folder 8
Preview
Preview
Preview
JPEG Folder 1
JPEG Folder 2
JPEG Folder 3
JPEG Folder 4
JPEG Folder 5
JPEG Folder 6
JPEG Folder 7
JPEG Folder 8
Preview
List
JPEG Folder 1
JPEG Folder 2
JPEG Folder 3
JPEG Folder 4
JPEG Folder 5
JPEG Folder 6
JPEG Folder 7
Operação
JPEG Folder 8
Note:
• When using a DVD audio disc that includes
pictures, this operation may be permitted in some
picture segments.
2. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or >
repeatedly to select the required speed:
X2, X4, X16 or X100
3. To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY.
• DVDs may have a region code. Your receiver does
not play discs that have a region code different from
your receiver. The region code for this receiver is 1
(one).
Notes:
• If parental control is set and the disc is not within
the rating settings you must input the password.
(See “Lock Menu” on page 21).
Use the 1 2 3 4 buttons to select an option you
want, then press ENTER to view the option.
The receiver will now go into SEARCH mode.
1. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > for about
two seconds during playback.
SEARCH
•
•
DVD-A
DVD-V
Operation
Use the b B v V buttons to select the title/chapter
you want to view, then press ENTER to start.
Press TITLE or DVD MENU to return to the menu
screen.
In some cases, the disc menu might appear
instead:
•
DVD-V
DVD-A
Press SKIP . or > briefly during playback to
select the next chapter/track or to return to the
beginning of the current chapter/track.
Press SKIP . twice briefly to step back to the
previous chapter/track.
To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback,
press DISPLAY and press v / V to select the
chapter/track icon. Then, input the chapter/track
number or use b / B.
When a title on a disc has more than one chapter or a
disc has more than one track, you can move to
another chapter/track as follows:
DVD-V
DVD-A
MOVING TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK
23
OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK)
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
2. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or >
repeatedly to select the required speed:
X2, X4, X16 or X100
3. To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY.
Repetir asPROGRAMMED
Faixas Programadas
REPEAT
TRACKS
1. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > for about
two seconds during playback.
eceiver does
different from
receiver is 1
1. Pressione
a tecla
REPEATDisc
durante
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
. . .a. reprodução
. . . . . . . . .de
. . um
23
Safety Precautions
. . . .the
. . product’s
. . . . . . enclosure
. . . . . . .that
. . may
. . . .be2
voltage within
ATable
função
de programação
lhe permite
gravar
suas. faixas
1. Press
REPEAT
when
a disc. The
repeat
Playing
an Audio
CDplaying
and aparece.
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . 23
of Contents
. . . magnitude
. . . . . . . to
. .constitute
. . . . . . a. .risk
. of. .electric
..3
disco.
O
ícone
de
repetição
of sufficient
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
ithin an
REPEAT
PROGRAMMED
TRACKS
favoritas
de qualquer
reprodutor
icon�appears.
Playback
Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Before
Use
. shock
. .function
. . to
. disco
.persons.
. . enables
. na
. . memória
. . . you
. . . .todo
. .store
. . . .your
. . . . de
. 4-5
Disc . . . Programmed
. . The
23 program
er
2. Pressione
a tecla
REPEAT
para .selecionar
Uma programação
�
Moving
to to
another
Track
. The
.repeat
. . .repeat
. .mode.
.o.modo
. . . . . 23
Playable
Discs
. . .any
. pode
. . disc
. . conter
. .in. the
. . 30
. player
. faixas.
. . . . memory.
. . . . . . .A. 4 1. 2.Press
tracks
from
REPEAT
when
playing
a disc.
. . favorite
23
s . . . . . . . DVD.
Press
REPEAT
select
a desired
The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle
desejado.
program
can
contain
� Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Precautions
. . . . . .30
. . tracks.
.....................5
o
disco.
ay
icon
appears.
. .be
. . . . . 1.
.The
. Insira
23
program function
enables
youuser
to store
is intended
to alert the
about your
the presence of
•
Track:
repeats
the
current
track
electric
PROGRAMMED
� Search.
. a. .faixa
. . TRACKS
. atual.
. .for
. . . instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Notes
on Discs
.MP3/WMA
.operating
. disc
. . . .in. and
. . . maintenance
. . . . . memory.
. . . .(servicing)
. . .A.REPEAT
..5
detracks
áudio
e Playback
CDany
About
the
symbols
. . . Programmed
. . . . favorite
. . CD
23
• Faixa:
repete
from
the
player
1.
Insert
a important
disc.
2. Press
to
a desired
repeat mode.
• All:REPEAT
repeats
all select
the tracks
JPEG
Disc
Operation
. .faixas
. .on
. . programmed
. . . . . . . . . .list.
. . . . . . 24
About
Symbols
.áudio
. . in
. .the
. . instructions
. . MÚSICA
. . . . . . . aparece
. . . . . . na
. . the
..5
instructions
. . . . . . . program
. .O
23
menu
docontain
CD
deMP3/WMA
ou
de
can
30
tracks.
• Off(No
Tudo:
repete
todas
as
programadas.
1.tela
Press REPEAT
when
playing
a disc.
The
repeat
Audio
CD
or
Discs: accompanying
•
display):
does
not
play
repeatedly.
Indicates
hazards
likely
to
cause
product.
Viewing
a
JPEG
disc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . harm
. . . . .to. .the
. . unit
. . . 24
•
Track:
repeats
the
current
track
Front
Panel
and
Rear
Panel
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
iangle
icon appears.
AUDIO
CD
or MUSIC
menu
appears.
da
TV.
•
OFF
(sem
display):
função
desativada.
itself
or
other
material
damage.
The program
function
enables
you
to
store
your
Insert Control
a disc. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
�
Slide
Show
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . 24
•
All:
repeats
all
the
tracks
on
programmed
list.
Remote
ce
. . of. . . . . 1.
. . 24
Note:
CAUTION
WARNING:
TO
PREVENT
FIRE
OR
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
favorite
tracks
from
any
disc in the
player
memory. A
Audio
CD
or MP3/WMA
2. Press •REPEAT
to select
a desired
2.
Press
PROGRAM.
the
symbols
forDiscs:
instructions
2.
PROGRAM
ng)
Off(No
display):
does
� Still
Picture
.operating
. not
. .Repeat
.play
. repeat
. . features
.repeatedly.
. . .mode.
. playback,
. of
. . this
. . . unit.
.the
. . . . . 24
. . . . . . . About
. .Pressione
24
If you
press
>
once
during
Track
Indicates
special
otas:
HAZARD,
DO
NOT
EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT
TO RAIN OR
RISK
OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK
contain
30 MUSIC
tracks.
AUDIO
CD
or
appears.
the program Acan
E aparecerá
� Moving
to another
file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
The
mark
will appear
to
the
right of
the word • Track:
marca
à menu
direita
da
palavra
“PROGRAM”,
DO
OPEN
repeat
playback
cancels.
. . . . . . . Preparation
. . 24
MOISTURE.
repeats
the
current
track
Indicates
hazards likely
toNOT
cause
harm to
the unit
Note:
• SeIndicates
tecla
SKIP
�pressionar
Tothe
rotate
. for
. . .making
. . .uma
. .list.
. vez
. . task
. durante
. . easier.
. . . . a. . 24
“Program”
on
the right
side of the menu screen. • All:
tipsapicture.
and
the
aitself
disc.
. . . 1.
. . .Insert
. 2.
. . no
24
lado
direito
de
Press
PROGRAM.
repeats
all
tracks
onhints
programmed
or
other
Connections
.Do
. do
.material
. menu
. . . . .damage.
.this
. tela.
. equipment
. . . . . . THE
. in. .aRISK
.confined
. . . . . .space
8-13 If you
press > oncePlayback
during Repeat
CAUTION:
TO
REDUCE
WARNING:
not install
Programmed
. de
. . Track
.faixa,
. . . playback,
.a. repetição
. . . . .the
. . será
. . . . . 25
reprodução
de
repetição
CD
or
Discs:
. . . . . .Audio
. . . 24
CK
•
Off(No
display):
does
not
play
repeatedly.
E MP3/WMA
The
mark
will
appear
to
the
right
of
the
word
ELECTRIC
TV
Connections
. .similar
. . . . unit.
. . .SHOCK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 repeat
playback cancels.
such
book case.OF
or
Note:
Manufactured
under
license from
Dolby “PROGRAM”
ERASING
A
TRACK
FROM
Repeat Programmed
Tracks.
.Laboratories.
. . . . . . . . “Dolby”,
. . . . . . 25
Indicates
special
operating
features
of this
unit.
CD as
or aMUSIC
menu
appears.
otas:
N. OR
. . . . .AUDIO
. . . 25
cancelada.
DO
NOT
REMOVE
COVER
(OR
BACK)
“Program”
on
the
right
side
of
the
menu
screen.
“Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Optional
Equipment
Connections
. . . will
. . .disappear
......9
PROGRAM
again,
then the E PARTS
mark
Note: LIST
Erasing Confidential
a Track from
Programme
. . . . 1992. . . . 25
NO USER-SERVICEABLE
INSIDE
. . . 2.
. . .Press
. . . Press
25
Unpublished
works.List
Copyright
Connections
. mode.
. . for
. . TO
. . QUALIFIED
. . . em
. the
. .seguida
.task
.SERVICE
. . easier.
. . a. marca
. .If .you
10 pressLaboratories.
PROGRAM.
• Pressione
PROGRAM
novamente,
Indicates
tips and
hints
making
toAerial
exit the
Program
Edit
Apagando
uma
faixa
da
lista
de programação
REFER
SERVICING
>
onceALaboratories.
during
Repeat
Track
playback,
the
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
List . . . . . . . 25
1997
Dolby
All
rights
reserved.
ERASING
TRACK
FROM
“PROGRAM”
tpace
. . . . . . Note:
. . 25
System
Connection
.of
. . .de. .word
. . . . .do
. . progra11-12
1. Use
v V B to select the track that you wish to
PERSONNEL.
The ESpeaker
mark
will
appear
tosair
the
right
MUSICthe
AUDIO CD
desaparecerá
para
do
modo
edição
repeat
playback
cancels.
1. UseDisc
as setas

DivX
Operation
. .para
. .Digital
. selecionar
. . .Theater
. . . . . aSystems,
. faixa
. . . . que
. .Inc.
. você
. 26
st . . . . . Manufactured
. . 25 PROGRAM
Manufactured
license. from
Press
again,
the
under
license
from
Dolby
erase fromunder
the Program
list.
� Transmitter.
. . .then
.of. .the
. . menu
. E. Laboratories.
. mark
. .screen.
. .will
. . disappear
. .“Dolby”,
. . . . . . 11 LIST
“Program”
on the
right
side
US deseja
Pat. No.Setup
5,451,942
ma.
Speaker
. da
. .5,956,674,
. . . .de
. .programação.
. 5,974,380,
. . . . . . . 5,978,762
. . . . . . . and
. . . . 27
to
the Program
Edit mode.
apagar
lista
Logic”,
and the double-D
symbol
are trademarks
of. .Dolby
. . . . . . . “Pro
. . exit
26
�
Changing
a
channel
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
other
worldwide
patents
issued
and
pending.
“DTS”
and
“DTS
This lightning
flash with
arrowhead
symbol
within an1. Use
CAUTION:
V CLEAR.
B to
select
the track
you
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
Copyright
1992Information
. .trademarks
. that
. . . .additional
. . of.wish
.Digital
. . .totracks
. Theater
. . . . . . 28
MUSIC
AUDIO CD
. . .Note:
. . . . Laboratories.
. . 27
2.Additional
Repeat
to
erase
Digital
Surround”
are
registered
Avfrom
TRACK
FROM
“PROGRAM”
� Setting
areceiver
ID ofAlltriangle
Transmitter
. . . .to. alert
. . . .the
. .user
. ERASING
. . 11
equilateral
is aintended
2. Press
Pressione
a Program
tecla
CLEAR.
Repita
1997 Dolby
Laboratories.
rights reserved.
erase
the
list.2000
DVD/CD
employs
laser system.
Systems,
Copyright
1996,
Last
Condition
Memory
. . Digital
. . . .para
.Theater
. . apagar
. . . Systems,
. . .outras
. . . . 28
on
theInc.
list.
. . . Press
. . . . PROGRAM
. . 28This
about
the
presence
of uninsulated
dangerous
E mark
again,
then
the
will to
disappear
� Assembling
and
Connecting
the
Speakers
11
Inc.
All
rights
reserved.
faixas
daSaver
lista de. .programação.
LIST
under
license
Theater
Systems,
To ensure
proper
use
offrom
this
product,
please
readthat
thisInc.
owner’s
Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . .an
. .exit
. . Manufactured
. . 28
voltage
within
theDigital
product’s
enclosure
may
be
to
the
Program
Edit
mode.
ithin
�
Speaker
Connections.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
2.
Press
CLEAR.
Repeat
to
erase
additional
tracks
US
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
manual carefully
and retain
it for future
reference.
Should
the
Controlling
thetrack
TV
. . . you
. . . wish
. .PROGRAM
. . to
. .por
. . . completo
. . . . . . . 28
of sufficient
magnitude
to constitute
a risk
of electric
. other
. . 28worldwide
Use v
V the
B
tolist.
select
the
that
ERASING
THE
COMPLETE
patents
issued
er. . . . . .AUDIO
Apagando
aCOPYRIGHTS:
lista
de.programação
CD
Speaker
Positioning.
. . . MUSIC
.and
. . .pending.
. .an
. .authorized
. .“DTS”
. . . .and
.service
. .“DTS
. . .1.
. 13
on
unit
require
maintenance,
contact
locaOTES
ON
shock
to persons.
Surround”
are
registered
trademarks
of Digital Theater
Operation
with
Radio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
erase
from
the
Program
list.
s . . . . . . . Digital
.Before
. 28tion
(see
service
procedure).
.1996,
. . . .2000
. . . Digital
. . . MP3/WMA
. .Theater
. . . . . Systems,
. .Menu
. . . 14-19
Audio
CD Menu
It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast
Systems, Operation
Inc. Copyright
LIST
ay
Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. .be. . . . . Inc.
. . 29
All
rights
reserved.
via
cable, play
in public,
or
rent copyrighted
material without
Performing
controls,
adjustments,
or carrying
out procedures
The
exclamation
mark within
an equilateral
triangle
Mini
Glossary
for Audio
Stream
& Surround
ERASING
THE
COMPLETE
1. Press
Pressione
para
mover
Programação.
wner’s
electric
2. Press
CLEAR.
Repeat
to erase
Listening
to
the
radio
.“Program”
.à. lista
. .PROGRAM
. de
. .tracks
.list.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.permission.
B
to 
move
to
theadditional
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
other
than
those
specified
herein
may
result
in
hazardous
radiis
intended
to
alert
the
user
about
the
presence
of
d the
Mode
. . .CD:
. . . Press
. . . . .PROGRAM
. . . . . . . . . while
. . . . playback
. . . . . . . is
. . 14
Video
on
the
list.
Other
Functions.
. . copy
. . . .protection
. “Limpar
. . instructions
. . . function
.Tudo”,
. . . . .developed
. . .seguida
. . . . . 30
Audio
CDimportant
Menu operating and
MP3/WMA Menu
LIST
About
the
symbols
for
This
product
features
the
´stopped.

para
selecionar
em
2. Use
ation
exposure.
. . . . . . . . . 29
locaOTES
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
The
appears.
Sound
Mode
. . program
. . . . . . .menu
. . . .maintenance
. . . . . . . Press
. .(servicing)
. . . . . 14
v
/
V
to
select
“Clear
All”,
then
2.
Use
by Macrovision.
Copy
protection
are
the
instructions
the
Sleep
Timer
Setting
. . .signals
. . . . .list.
. . recorded
.press
. . . . ENTER.
. on
. . some
. . . . 30
. . . . . . . It. is
. 30
ToOn-Screen
prevent
direct
exposure
to.hold
laser
beam,
do
not
to. open
iangle
pressione
ENTER.
, .accompanying
broadcast
broadcast,
forbidden
by instructions
law Display
toagain
copy,in
1. Press
B to move
to and
thelikely
“Program”
PROGRAM
and
it.show
down
for
a.try
few
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
Indicates
hazards
to
cause
harm
to
the
Vídeo
CD:
pressione
a
tecla
PROGRAM
com
a
reprodiscs.
When
recording
playing
the
pictures
of
these
product.
ERASING THE
COMPLETE
Video
CD:
Press
while
playback
Dimmer
. . . . . . . . . . PROGRAM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .discs
. unit
. . . 30
the enclosure.
Visible
lasercopyrighted
radiation
when
open.
DOisNOT
ce
play
in public,
orPROGRAM
rent
material
without
. . of. . . . . via
. . cable,
30
ures
seconds
to
exit
the
menu.
Initial
Settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-19
on
a
VCR,
picture
noise
will
appear.
itself
or
other
material
damage.
About
the
symbols
for
instructions
STARE
INTO
BEAM.
paralisada.
O
menu
de
programação
aparece.
Note:
ng)
stopped.
The
program
menu
appears.
Press
permission.
Mute
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . 30
s. radi2.
Use
v
/
V
to
select
“Clear
All”,
then
press
ENTER.
. . . . . .Audio
. . dução
30
CD
Menu TO
MP3/WMA
Menu
LIST
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that
WARNING:
PREVENT
FIRE
OR
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
�
General
Operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
the
programs
areHeadphone
also cleared when
the
product features
the
copy
function
PROGRAM
again
and protection
hold itnovamente
down
for developed
ae few
Using
the
. .U.S.
.disc
. .patents
.is. removed.
. . .and
. . .other
. . . 30
ahazards
tecla
PROGRAM
segure-a
por The
Note:
. . . . . . . This
. . Pressione
30
CAUTION:
The
apparatus
be
is protected
by method
ofJack
certain
Indicates
specialclaims
operating
features
of
this
unit.
otas:
HAZARD,
DO
NOT
EXPOSE
THIS
TO
RAIN
Indicates
to
harm
the
unit
� Language
. . .likely
. . . should
.signals
. .cause
. . not
. .PRODUCT
.recorded
. exposed
. . . to
. .on
. to
.some
.water
. .1.. OR
16
by Macrovision.
Copy
protection
are
B toSelecting
moveproperty
to the
“Program”
list.
seconds
to
exit
the
menu.
pen
the rights
Inputowned
Source
. . . . . . . . Corporation
. . . . . . . . . 30
(dripping
orCD
splashing)
and
no
objects
liquids,
suchPress
intellectual
by Macrovision
On
a Video
with
PBC,
you
must
setfilled
PBCwith
to Off
on the
segundos
para
sair
do
menu.
. . . . . .Video
. discs.
. . alguns
30
MOISTURE.
CD:
Press
PROGRAM
while
playback
is
Note:
itself
or
other
material
damage.
When
recording
and
playing
the
pictures
of
these
discs
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
OT
• AXTS
programação
também
apagada
as vases,
should
placed
on the apparatus.
other
rights
owners.
Use
of éthis
copyright
protection
Indicates
tipscleared
and
hints
for
making
the
menu
tonoise
use be
the
programmed
playback (See “PBC” on The and
(Excellent
True
Sound)
. . . .iscom
. removed.
. . task
.a.remoção
. easier.
. .tech. . . .do
30
. . . . . .stopped.
. on
. . asetup
30
programs
are also
disc
The
program
CK
VCR,
picture
will
/ V tomust
select
All”,when
then the
press
ENTER.
Use vnology
� 22).
Audio.
. . .not
. menu
.install
. .appear.
. .appears.
. . .equipment
. . . .Press
. . .in. a. confined
. . . . . . .2.. 17
Note:
be. “Clear
authorized
WARNING:
Do
disco.
Indicates
special
operating
features
of
this unit.thatspace
XTS pro
. . . . . . . by
. . Macrovision
. . . . . . . . Corporation,
. . . . . . . . and
. . . is. . 30
otas:
N. OR
product
incorporates
copyright
protection
technology
again
and
hold
it this
down
for
a. .few
. . . . .PROGRAM
. This
. . page
30
On
a such
Video
CD
with
PBC,
you
must
set
PBC
to
Off
on
the
intended
for
home
and
other
limited
viewing
uses
only
unless
� Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
as
book case
or similar
unit.U.S. patents and other
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
er
byamethod
claims
of
certain
This
product
may
not be
used outdoor, restricted to
to exit
the
menu.
VIDEO CD
. . . . . .seconds
. is
. .protected
30CAUTION:
menu
to use
the
programmed
otherwise
authorized
by Macrovision
Reverse
“Pro
Logic”,
and the double-D
symbolCorporation.
are trademarks
of Dolby
�um
Others
. CD
.rights
. . com
. hints
. . .PBC,
. for
. by
. making
.você
. playback
. . .deve
. the
. . (See
.ajustar
. . .“PBC”
. .PBC
. . on
.Note:
. 19
•setup
Em
Vídeo
Indicates
and
task
easier.
such
intellectual
property
owned
Macrovision
Corporation
indoor
usetips
only.
Press SKIP . or > briefly during playback to
select the next chapter/track or to return to the
beginning of the current chapter/track.
Press SKIP . twice briefly to step back to the
previous chapter/track.
To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback,
press DISPLAY and press v / V to select the
chapter/track icon. Then, input the chapter/track
number or use b / B.
•
•
•
When a title on a disc has more than one chapter or a
disc has more than one track, you can move to
another chapter/track as follows:
DVD-A
Track4
Track4
Track1
7-Music7
E
Clear All
2-Music2
1-Music1
PROGRAM Edit
4-Music4
DISPLAY Info
2-Music2
6-Music6
1-Music1
3-Music3
Track5
PROGRAM Edit
4-Music4
Track6
5-Music5
DVD-A
6-Music6
Track7
Clear All
Clear All
7-Music7
PROGRAM Edit
MOVING TO ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP
Track8
PROGRAM Edit
DISPLAY Info
Note:
• Unless stated otherwise, all operations described
use the remote control. Some features may also be
available on the Setup menu.
General Features
Reference
Operation
Operation
Track7
Operation
Track5
Track3
input source
Track8
Track1
Track2
Program
DVD-V
1-Music1
5-Music5
1 / 12
6-Music6
List
Clear All
PROGRAM Edit
DISPLAY Info
4-Music4
0:00:00
E
Clear All
6-Music6
3-Music3
Track1
PROGRAM Edit
Track6
1 / 12
Track7
Program
4-Music4
2-Music2
Track5
List
E
2-Music2
le) and select
D/CD
Track4
Track4
0:52:07
Program
5-Music5
c tray and
h the
Track8
Track3
4-Music4
6-Music6
1-Music1 7-Music7
Clear All
When a disc has more than one title/group, you can
move to another title/group. Press DISPLAY while
playback is stopped then the appropriate number (0-9)
or use b / B to move to another title/group.
You can play any title by inputting its number while
playback is stopped.
List
E
Program
Track5
Track7
1-Music1
3-Music31 / 12
0:00:00
Track1
1 / 12
y. Playback
not start,
6-Music6
2-Music2
appear
2-Music2
DVD-V
Track4
MOVING TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK
4-Music4
Track3
e title/chapter
to start.
to the menu
1-Music1
Track7
E
Program
Track7
Track4
0:52:07
Track5
List
Track6
Track1
Track2
1 / 12
List
E
Program
Track5
an option you
option.
DVD-A
0:00:00
1 / 12
List
not within
password.
DVD-V
Introduction
SEARCH
Operation
0:52:07
Track1
Track2
Introduction
This lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an
equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user
Introduction
Reprodução
Programada
Programmed
Playback
about the presence
of uninsulated dangerous
The receiver will now go into SEARCH mode.
Reprodução Programada
engineering orConfidential
disassemblyUnpublished
is prohibited.works. Copyright 1992Laboratories.
page 22).
paceNote:and
other rights owners.
Use
this copyright
protection
tech-The programs are also cleared when the disc is removed.
“desligado”
no menu
deofajuste,
para usar
a reprodução
1997 Dolby Laboratories.
Language
Code ListAll. .rights
. . . .reserved.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Manufactured
license
Dolby Laboratories.
nology
must beunder
authorized
byfrom
Macrovision
Corporation,“Dolby”,
VIDEO CD
On a Video
CD
with PBC,
you “PBC”
must
set
PBC
to20)
Off on the and is
programada.
(Veja
na
pág.
Manufactured
under
license
from
Systems,
“Pro
Logic”,
and
the
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
of
Dolby
intended
for
home
and
other
limited
viewing
uses
only
unless
SERIAL
NUMBER:
The
serial
located
Country
Code
List
.
.
.
.
.number
. .Digital
. . .is.Theater
. . . . . on
. . the
. . .back
. .Inc.
. . 31
. . .setup
. . . . menu
. . 31to use the programmed playback (See “PBC” on
cted
to
US
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
DVD or authorized
Video
CDbyOperation
.Corporation.
. works.
. . . . .Copyright
. .Reverse
. . . . 1992. . 19-22
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
of this unit. This number
is
this
otherwise
Macrovision
Troubleshooting
. . issued
. .unique
.requested
. .and
. to
. .pending.
. .information
.unit
. . and
. . . not
.here
.and
.available
. and
.“DTS
. 32-33
. . .page
. . . .22).
. . 31Dolby
other
worldwide
patents
“DTS”
to
others.
You
should
record
1997
Laboratories.
All
rights
reserved.
CAUTION:
engineering
prohibited.
Playingor adisassembly
DVD and isVideo
CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Digital
Surround”
are
Specifications
.a .registered
. . . . . . .trademarks
. . . . of
. .your
. of. .Digital
. . . . Theater
. . . . . . 34
retain this
guide as
permanent
record
purchase.
. . . . . . . 32-33
VIDEO
CD
This DVD/CD
receiver
employs
Manufactured
under
license. from
Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems,
General
Features
. . . .Digital
. . a. laser
. Theater
. . .system.
. . Systems,
. . . . . . .Inc.
20-22
List
Operation
Track5
Track2
Track2
Track3
Track3
Track4
List
E
Program
Track1
Track1
Track5
Program
Track1
Track5
Track2
Track2
Track3
Track3
Track4
E
Clear All
Track1
Track5
. . . . . . . US
. . 34
Pat.�No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380, 5,978,762
and
Moving
to
another
TITLE/GROUP
.the
. . this
.“DTS
. .owner’s
. . 20
To NUMBER:
ensure
proper
use
of this
product,
please
read
SERIAL
The
serial
number
is seguida
located
onpressione
back
3. Selecione
uma
faixa
na
lista,
em
other
worldwide
patents
issued
and
pending.
“DTS”
and
Video
CD
Menu
of
thismanual
unit.
This
number
is unique
unitofreference.
and
not available
carefully
and
retaintrademarks
ittoforthis
future
Should
� Moving
toregistered
another
CHAPTER/TRACK
. . de
. . .the
20
Digital
Surround”
are
Digital
Theater
ENTER
para
colocar
a
faixa
selecionada
na
lista
to
others.
You
should
record
requested
information
here
and locaunit
require
maintenance,
contact
an
authorized
service
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
1996,
2000
Digital
Theater
Systems,
3. this
aMotion.
on. .the
then
�Select
Slow
. . .“List”,
. . . . of
. .your
. outras
.press
.purchase.
. . . faixas.
.ENTER
. . . . . .to20
retain
guide
astrack
aRepita
permanent
record
programação.
para
adicionar
Inc.
All
rights
reserved.
tion
(see
service
procedure).
Video
CD Menu
wner’s
selected
track
on the “Program”
list. . 20
�place
Still the
Picture
and Frame-by-Frame
Playback
Performing
controls,
adjustments,tracks
or carrying
out procedures
d the
to
the
Model
No.
___________________________________
.
4.
�Repeat
.place
. specified
. .the
. additional
. .“List”,
. herein
. . . then
. .may
. .press
.result
. .on
. .ENTER
. . .list.
. . .to. . radi20
3. Pressione
Select
a track
other
than
thoseon
in hazardous
2Search.
locaOTES
ON
COPYRIGHTS:
Serial
No.
___________________________________
�Press
Repeat
. . .que
. .track
.,você
.broadcast,
. .on
.queira
. the
. . .show
.que
. ., .broadcast
. . . a.list.
.primeira
. . . . . 20
Selecione
aselected
faixa
seja
a
place
thebyB.
“Program”
ation
exposure.
It is 4.
forbidden
law to copy
Repeat
A-B
.de
.you
.Menu
. .copyrighted
.to. laser
.tracks
. to
. .beam,
. .on
. .playing
. . not
.list.
. .tryon
. .to.the
. . 21
Video
CD
Repeat
place
additional
the
tocada
na
lista
programação.
Select
track
want
start
via ser
cable,
playtointhe
public,
or
rent
material
without
To�
prevent
direct
exposure
do
open
ures
� enclosure.
Time Search
. . . .radiation
. . . . . .when
. . . .open.
. . . .DO
. . NOT
. . . 21
permission.
Visible. laser
s radilist.
3. Select
athe“Program”
track
on
the
“List”,
then
press ENTER
to
5.
a tecla
PLAY
4. Pressione
Press
B.
This
product
features
the
copy
protection
developed
STARE
INTO
BEAM.
� Marker
Search
. . ou
. . .ENTER
. . . . function
. .para
. . . iniciar.
. . . . .A
. . . . 21
place
thePress
selected
track
on
thesignals
“Program”
list.faixas
thePLAY
track
the
5.Select
or
to
start.
Playback
in
by Macrovision.
Copy
protection
are
recorded
some
reprodução
começa
em
� Zoom.
. . .apparatus
.you
. ENTER
.na
.want
.ordem
. . .to
. .start
. not
. .que
.playing
. exposed
.as
. . . on
.on. to
.begins
.foram
. . . 21
pen
CAUTION:
The
water
Repeat
tothe
place
additional
tracks
onpictures
thebelist.
discs.“Program”
When
recording
and playing
the
of these
discs
list.
order
inAFeatures
which
youshould
the
tracks.
OT
memorizadas.
reprodução
as
Special
DVD
.programmed
.pára
. . . depois
. .filled
. . . with
.que
. .liquids,
.todas
. . . .such
. 22
(dripping
or splashing)
and .no
objects
on a VCR,
picture
noise
will
appear.
stops
all
the
as�Playback
vases,
should
placed
4. Press
B.
Title
Menu
.be. copyright
.after
. tocadas.
. . to
. on
. start.
.ofthe
. the
. .apparatus.
. tracks
. . technology
. . . on
. .begins
. . that
. . .in. 22
5. faixas
Press
PLAY
or foram
ENTER
Playback
gravadas
This
product
incorporates
protection
“Program”
list
have
played
once. on
Select
the
track
you
want
er
is protected
by method
� order
Disc
Menu
.claims
. .you
.to. ofstart
.programmed
.certain
. . playing
. . U.S.
. . . .patents
.the
. the
. tracks.
. .and
. . other
. . . . 22
the
in
which
6.
Para
retornar
à
reprodução
normal,
selecione
uma
faixa
such
intellectual
property
rights
owned
Macrovision
“Program”
list.
stops
after
all
ofby
the
tracks
on
�ToChanging
the
Audio
Language
.Corporation
. the
. . . .restricted
. . . . 22to
CAUTION:
This
product
may
not
be
used.programmed
outdoor,
6.Playback
resume
normal
playback
from
andde
other
rights
Useplayed
of CD
this copyright
techáudio
deowners.
uma
lista
de
deAUDIO
áudio.protection
e. CD
em
seguida
indoor
use
only.
“Program”
list
have
once.
�
Changing
the
Audio
Channel
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
playback,
select
a
track
of
(or
MUSIC)
5. Press
PLAY
tobystart.
Playback
begins inand is . 22
nology
must or
be ENTER
authorized
Macrovision
Corporation,
pressione
PLAY.
and
�list
Subtitles
. press
.other
. . . limited
.PLAY.
. . . .viewing
. . the
. . .uses
. . . only
. . . unless
. . . . . . 22
for
homethen
and
theintended
order
in
which
you
programmed
tracks.
6.
To
resume
normal
playback
from
programmed
cted to
DVD
Audio
Discs
.track
.the
. . .of
. AUDIO
. Corporation.
. . .on
. . the
. . . (or
. . .MUSIC)
. . . . . . 22
otherwise
authorized
by
Reverse
Playback
stops
after
allaMacrovision
of
tracks
playback,
select
CD
engineering
disassembly
isonce.
prohibited.
“Program”
listorthen
have
played
list and
press
PLAY.
List
Program
Track1
Track5
Track2
Track2
Track3
Track3
Track4
Track1
E
Clear All
Track5
Clear All
6. ToSERIAL
resumeNUMBER:
normal playback
from programmed
The serial number
is located on the back
playback,
select
a trackisofunique
AUDIO
CDunit
(orand
MUSIC)
of this unit.
This number
to this
not available
to
others.
You
should
record
requested
information here and
list and
26 then press PLAY.
retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase.
Model No. ___________________________________
Inc. All rights reserved.
Model No. ___________________________________
Serial No. ___________________________________
OTES ON COPYRIGHTS:
It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast
via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without
permission.
This product features the copy protection function developed
by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some
discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs
on a VCR, picture noise will appear.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that
is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back
of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available
to others. You should record requested information here and
retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase.
29
29
Model No. ___________________________________
Serial No. ___________________________________
29
Operação com disco DivX
A compatibilidade de discos DivX com este reprodu-
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
torPlaying
se CD
limita
segue:
ancomo
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Table
Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
Audio
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . . Disc
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
SafetyofPrecautions
Using this
DVD/CD
can play
DivX. .disc.
� Pause
. . . . .CD
. .with
.and
. . this
.MP3/WMA
. . .player
. . . . . is
.Disc
. limited
. . .. .. .. .. .. 23
. . . . e.Receiver
.you
1Before
Insira
um. disco
an .Audio
23
Table
ofUse
Contents
..feche
.. .. .. .. a.. .bandeja.
.. .. .. .. .. ..O
.. ..Menu
.. .. .. .. FILME
. . .. .. .. .4-5
.3
DivXPlaying
disc
compatibility
�
to. .resolução
another
.. .. arquivo
.. .. .. .. .. ..DivX
.. .. .. 23
Playable
Discs
. .TV.
. .. .. ..the
.4
Insert
a disc
� Moving
Pause .de
. . . . . . Track
. disponível
. . . . .. .. .. ..do
23
Before
Use
. . tela
. and
. .. da
.. .close
.. .. ..tray.
.. .. .. The
.. .. .. ..DivX
.. .. .. ..menu
.. .. .. .. .. 4-5
aparece
na
as• follows:
Operation
Tamanho
é
�
Track/All/Off.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
Precautions
. . .. TV
.. .. ..screen.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54
appears on
the
� Repeat
Moving
to another
Track
23
Playable
Discs
abaixo
de 720x576
(Larg
x Altura)
pixel.
•
Available
resolution
size
of
the
DivX
file
is
under
�
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
Notes
onDivX
Discs
� Search.
Repeat Track/All/Off.
Precautions
. disc.
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
Receiver you can
play
•720x576
O
nome
do
arquivo .legenda
DivX é limita-se a 56 23
(W
x H)
JPEG
About
.. .. .. ..disc
.. .. .. ..compatibility
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
with this
player
isOperation
limited
�Disc
Search.
. . pixel.
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
23
Notes Symbols
on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..DivX
caracteres.
d close theFront
tray.
The
DivX
menu
Viewing
aOperation
JPEG
.. .. .. .. .. .is
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..by
.. .. .. .. .. 24
Panel
and
Rear
.. .. follows:
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65
Disc
. .. ..subtitle
. ..available
24
About
Symbols
. . .Panel
. . . . .as
•JPEG
The
file
name
of thedisc
DivX
TV screen.Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Se
houver
um (different
código
� Slide
Show
. disc
. . . ..impossível
.. ..by
.. ..language).
.. .. .. ..para
.. .. .. ..expressar
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. um
.. 24
Viewing
JPEG
24
characters
Front Panel and Rear Panel • . Available
. . . . . . . .resolution
. . . . . . . size
. . 6 of the•20~40
DivX
file
isaunder
�
.. ..poderá
.. .. .. .. .. .ser
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. como
.. .. .. .. ..marca
.. .. .. 24
arquivo
DivX,
“
� Still
SlidePicture
Showele
. .. ..mostrado
24
Remote Control Overview . . . 720x576
. . . . . . . (W
. . .x. H)
. . pixel.
....7
• If there
is impossible
code to express
in the DivX
�
to another
�-Moving
Still
Picture
. . . . . file
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
“
na
tela.
Preparation
file, it� available
mayrotate
be displayed
as
_. ." .mark
• The file name of the DivX subtitle
by
picture.
. .file
. ".na
..on
.. ..the
.. ..que
..dis.. ..30
.. .. .. 24
� To
Moving
to
another
. .tela
. .. ..é.. maior
24
•play.isSe
o número
de
quadros
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Preparation
20~40 characters (different by
language).
Programmed
Playback
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
� To rotate
picture.
24
TV Connections
..8
por
segundo,
essa
unidade
pode
não
funcionar
Connections
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13
Programmed
Tracks.
.. .. over
.. .. .. .. 30
.. .. .per
• express
If Repeat
the number
of the screen
Playback
. . . . frame
. . .. .. .. is
. .. .. .. 25
25
in the DivX
Optional
Equipment
.. ..impossible
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. code
.. 98 to Programmed
corretamente.
TV Connections
. . Connections
. . . . .• . If. .there
. . . .. is
Erasing
athis
Track
1 second,
unitfrom
mayProgramme
not operate
Repeat
Tracks.
. . . .List
.normally.
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
mark onProgrammed
the
disAerial
Connections
. . . . . .file,
. . .it .may
.. .. .. .be
.. .. .. .. .. 10
Optional
Equipment. .Connections
. .. ..displayed
. 9as " _• " Erasing
Se
a
estrutura
de
vídeo
e
áudio
do
arquivo
gravado
theTrack
Complete
Programme List
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Erasing
from structure
Programme
Press v System
/ V to select
a folder,. and
press ENTER. A
Speaker
Connection
• If the
videoa and
audio
of recorded
file 25
Aerial Connections
. . . . . . . play.
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12
. . 10
não
intercalada,
DivX
Discestiver
Operation
. . . Programme
. .tanto
. . . .o.vídeo
. . .List
. como
. . .. .. ..o..áudio
.. .. .. 26
Erasing
the Complete
25
list
of files /
in the .folder
If you
are. in
file
2 Speaker
Pressione
is
not
interleaved,
either
video
or
audio
is
out� Transmitter.
. . .selecionar
. .appears.
. .• . If
. ..the
. .em
.a..the
. . 11
Systempara
Connection
..uma
.. ..number
.. pasta
.. .. .. .. .e,
.of
11-12
screenSpeaker
frame
is Setup
over
30
. . per
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
serão
liberados.
DivX
Disc
Operation
26
list
and want
to
to theTransmitter
FolderUma
list, lista
use the
putted.
�
a return
channel
.
.
.
.
11
seguida,
pressione
� Changing
Transmitter.
. . a. tecla
. . . .ofENTER.
. . 1. .second,
. . . . . . .this
. .. .. ..de
.
.
.
.
11
unit may notAdditional
operate normally.
Information
.. .. .. .. .a
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Speaker
Setup
. .for
. . gravado
. . . .. .. .. .com
. .. .. ..GMC,
. ..unidade
27
•
Se
o
arquivo
v�/ Setting
V buttons
onofthe
remote to .highlight
and
a
ID
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
daENTER.
pasta
aparece.
você visualiza
� Changing
a channel
ofSe
Transmitter
. . . .uma
. . . lista
. 11
•Additional
If Last
the file
is
recorded
with
Condition
Memory
..do
.. ..nível
.. ..the
.. ..de
..unit
..gravação.
.. .. .supelect a folder, arquivos
and
press
A
Information
. . ..GMC,
. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
press
ENTER.
• If thetovideo
and audio
structure
of
recorded
file
somente
suporta
1
ponto
�
Assembling
and
Connecting
the
Speakers
11
Setting
ID
. . . . . . de
. . pastas,
. . . . . . 11
ports
some
of 1-point
de�Ifarquivos
eindesejar
ver a lista
anterior
folder appears.
you area
a of
fileTransmitter
Saver
. .Memory
. . . .of
. . the
.. .. ..record
.. .. .. .. .. .level.
Last
Condition
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
either videoScreen
orOaudio
outithin an
Speaker
.is. not
.file,
. to
. .interleaved,
. . .Speakers
.v
. . /. V. .to
que
é is
GMC?
Assembling
and/
the
11
If��you
want
view
a Connecting
particular
press
* GMC?
return to the Folder
list,
use
the
pressione
astoConnections.
teclas
no. controle
remoto
para . 12
Controlling
the. TV
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Screen
Saver
.
.
.
28
putted.
er
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
GMC- is
the acronym
for Global
Motion
Compensation.
It
GMC
é
o
acrônimo
para
Compensação
de
� Speaker
. . . . . or
. .PLAY.
. . . . . . . . . . 12
highlight
a fileConnections.
and
press ENTER
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
n
the
remote
to
highlight
and
destacar
“
“ e. pressione
Controlling
the specified
TV . . . in
. .MPEG4
. . . . . .standard.
. . . . . . Some
. . . . . . 28
s
is an
encoding
tool
Before
Operation
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .•.ENTER.
.If.. ..the
. .. ..file
. .. .is
. .. .recorded
. .. .. .. .14-19
with GMC,
the
unit
supSpeaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
13
Movimento
Global.
Ele
é
uma
ferramenta
de
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
.. .. ..option.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
ay be
Operation
with
. .or. .Xvid,
. . .. .have
. .. .. .. this
29
Press
STOP to
like DivX
some
record encoders,
level.
Mini
Glossary
forexit.
Before
Operation
. .Audio
. . . . Stream
. . . .ports
..&
. . Surround
. . . . . of
. . 1-point
. . 14-19of the MPEG4
electric
codificação
especificada
Listening
tothe
the
radioof
.GMC
. . no
. .encoding,
.padrão
.usually
Presetting
radio
stations
. .. .. .. .. ..MPEG4.
. .. .. .. .. .called
. .Alguns
. .. .. .. 29
29
There
are different
levels
3 Mode
Se
em
ew a particular
file,você
press
. . .deseja
. .v. /. for
.Vver
. to
.Audio
.um
. . arquivo
. Stream
. . . .* .GMC?
.&
. .particular,
. . . . . . . pressio. . . . 14
Mini
Glossary
Surround
Other
Functions.
.Itradio
. . . .GMC.
.. ..como
.. .. .. .. DivX
.. .. .. ..ou
.. .. Xvid,
.. .. .. .. possuem
.. .. .. .. .. 30
codificadores
MPEG4,
1-point,
2-point,
3-point
Listening
to or
the
29
is
Global Motion
Compensation.
nd press ENTER
or PLAY.
Sound
Mode
.. .. .. ..destacar
.. .. .. .. .GMC
.. ..arquivo
.. ..the
.. .. acronym
.. .e. ..pressione
.. .. .. .for
ne as
Mode
.teclas
. . . . /
. .. .. ..para
. .. o
. .. 14
14
Sleep
Timer
Setting
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. níveis
.. .. .. .. ..de
.. ..codificação
.. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. ..diferentes
30
is. an
encoding
tool
specified
in MPEG4
standard.
Some
essa
opção.
Existem
iangle
On-Screen
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
otes
Sound
Mode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
ENTER
ou
PLAY.
exit.
. . . .Setting
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
MPEG4 encoders, like DivX or Xvid, Dimmer
have
this
option.
Sleep
Timer
30
ce of
GMC,
sempre
chamada
GMC
ponto-1,
ponto-2
ou
Initial
Settings
. . . . . . .. .. .ON”
. .. .. ..mode
. .. .. ..before
. .. .. .. .playback
. .. .. .. .16-19
• Be
sure
to select Display
“SUBTITLE
a15
On-Screen
.
.
.
.
Playable
DivX
There are different levels of GMC
encoding,
Mute
. usually
. .. ..file
.. ..called
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
About
the
symbols
for
instructions
ing)
Dimmer
30
DivX
by pressing
� file
General
Operation
. . 16GMC.
ponto-3
Initial
Settings
. . para
.ENTER
. . .sair.
.. ..every
.. .. ..1-point,
..time.
.. .. .. ..2-point,
.. .. .. .. .. or
.. ..3-point
.. 16-19
z ".avi
the
", ".mpg
Using
4• When
Pressione
STOP
Mute
.the
. . Headphone
. ",. .".mpeg
. . . . . ". .Jack
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
the
subtile
has
more
than
two
languages
in
the
file,
�
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
Indicates
hazards
likely
to
cause
harm
to
the
unit
� General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Selecting
Input Source
Using thethe
Headphone
Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
original
subtile
ismaterial
only
available.
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
itself
or
other
damage.
� Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Playable
Codec
format
Arquivos
DivX
reproduzíveis
XTS
(Excellent
TrueSource
Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Selecting
the
Input
30
• The
Pro
logic playback
mode
is. not
available
for DivX
file.
UBTITLE ON”
mode
before
�
.II..Sound
. . 17
CK
� Audio.
Display
.. .. ..will
.. ..anot
.. .. ..be
.. .Playable
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..DivX
.. .. .. ..file
.. .. .. .. 16-17
z •"DIVX3.xx
",
XTS
pro
. ."DIVX4.xx
. . . .“.mpeg”
. . . .",
. "DIVX5.xx
. . . . .. .. .. .. ",
.. .."XVID
.. .. .. .. ..",.. .. .. .. .. 30
“.avi”,
“.mpg”,
• Subtitle
in Chinese
displayedofduring
playback a
XTS
(Excellent
True
Sound)
30
gNENTER
every
time.
Indicates
special
operating
features
this
unit.
OR
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
� file.
Audio.
. . . in
. .English
. . . . . is. z
.available)
. ".avi
. . . .",. ".mpg
. . . . . ",. .".mpeg
. . . . 17
"
"MP43
",
"3IVX
",
"MP42
".
DivX
(Subtitle
as more than two languages in the file,
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
�
. . . . . . .Control)
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19
� Others
Lock tips
(Parental
18
Indicates
and hints for making
the task easier.
ly available. Dicas:
Reference
Formatos
Codec
reproduzíveis
Playable
Codec
format
Playable
Audio
format
�
Others
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
pace
nd mode is• not available
forDVD
DivX MENU.
file.
Pressione
Language
Code List
. . . . “,. .“DIVX5.xx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
•"AC3“DIVX3.xx
“DIVX4.xx
z "DIVX3.xx
"DIVX4.xx ", "DIVX5.xx
"XVID",“,","PCM
zReference
",", "DTS
", "MP3 ", "WMA “,". “XVID “,
Operation
under
license a
from Dolby
Laboratories.",“Dolby”,
will not be Manufactured
displayed
during
playback
Code
List
.“.. ..within
.. .. .. .. ..32
.. ..-.. 48
.. .. .kHz
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31
•available)
Em umanddisco
com arquivos
MP3/WMA,
JPEG
e "MP42
DivX ". Country
Language
Code
List
. .. .. ..(MP3),
31
"MP43
",
"3IVX
",
Logic”,
the
double-D
symbol
are
trademarks
of
Dolby
•
Sampling
frequency:
“MP43
“,
“3IVX
n English is“Pro
DVD
or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Operation
Troubleshooting
. . .(WMA)
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
Copyright
1992- Foto
Country
Code
List
. . 31
Movie
você
pode
alternar
entre
os
menus
Musica,
within
24
48kHz
Playing
a DVD
Videoreserved.
CD.
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22
. . 19
DVD
or Video
CD and
Operation
.
.
.
.
1997
Dolby
Laboratories.
All rights
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
Playable
Audio format
Troubleshooting
. . -. 320kbps
. . . . . . .(MP3),
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
• Bit rate: within
32
e Filme. aFeatures
Pressione
tecla
General
.Video
. . . .TITLE
. . . . ..e.. a.. .palavra
. .. .. .. .. .. Música,
. .. .20-22
Formatos
de Áudio
reproduzíveis
Playing
DVD
and.afrom
Manufactured
license
Digital
Theater
Systems,
Inc.. . 19
.(WMA)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
zCD.
"AC3
", "DTS
",. "PCM
", "MP3Specifications
", 40
"WMA
".
- 192kbps
“Foto”
eunder
“Filme”
no alto
�No.
Moving
to another
TITLE/GROUP
. . 20
General
Features
. . . .do
.5,974,380,
.menu
. .• .Sampling
. é. .destacada.
. . . .. frequency:
.. .. and
.. .. .. 20-22
“AC3
“,
“DTS
“,
“PCM
“,
“MP3
“, “WMA “.
US Pat.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,978,762
within 32 - 48 kHz (MP3),
other worldwide
patents
issued and
pending. “DTS” and
�
to
CHAPTER/TRACK
.. .. .. .. .. 20
� Moving
Moving
to another
another
TITLE/GROUP
.48kHz
.“DTS
20
• Frequencia de amostragem: entre 8 - 48 kHz (MP3),
within
24 .-Theater
(WMA)
Digital Surround”
are
registered
trademarks
of
Digital
�
Motion.
. . . 2000
. .CHAPTER/TRACK
. .Digital
. . . .Theater
. . . . . Systems,
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
� Slow
Moving
to another
20
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
1996,
• Bit rate: within
32 - 320kbps
(MP3),
32 - 48kHz (WMA)
Picture
and
Inc. All �
rights
reserved.
� Still
Slow
Motion.
. . Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . 40
. . .- .192kbps
. . .Playback
. . . .(WMA)
. . . .. 20
20
wner’s
•
Faixa de Bit: entre 8 - 320kbps (MP3), 32 - 192kbps
�
Search.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
� Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20
d the
(WMA)
�
Repeat
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
loca� Search.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
OTES
ON COPYRIGHTS:
�
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..show
.. .. .. ,..broadcast
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
It is forbidden
by lawA-B
� Repeat
Repeat
.to. copy
. .. .. .,. broadcast,
20
via
cable,
play
in
public,
�
Time
Search
.. .. .copyrighted
.. .. .. .. .. .without
dures
� Repeat A-Bor. ..rent
. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..material
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
21
permission.
us radi�
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Marker
Time Search
21
This product
features. the
developed
�
. . .copy
. .. ..protection
.. .. .. .. .. .. .function
� Zoom.
Marker. Search
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
21
by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some
open
Special
DVD
.. .. .. .. .. of
.. ..these
.. .. .. .discs
� Zoom.
. .Features
.and
. . .playing
. . . .. .the
. .. ..pictures
. .. .. .. .. .. 22
21
discs. When
recording
OT
� Title
Menu
. will
. . appear.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
Special
DVD
Features
22
on a VCR,
picture
noise
�
Menu
.. .. .. .. .. ..protection
.. .. .. .. .. .. .technology
.. .. .. .. 22
This product
incorporates
� Disc
Title
Menu .. ..copyright
. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..that
22
ter
is protected
by method
claims
�
.. .. ..other
.. .. .. .. 22
� Changing
Disc
Menuthe
. . Audio
. . .of. certain
. Language
. . . .U.S.
. . .patents
. .. .. .. ..and
22
such
intellectual
property rights
Macrovision
�
the
Audio
. .. Corporation
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Changing
Changing
theowned
AudiobyChannel
Language
22
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection tech�
. the
. . .Audio
. . . . .Channel
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Subtitles
Changing
22
nology must
be authorized
by Macrovision
Corporation, and is
DVD
Audio
Discs
.. .. .. .. viewing
.. .. .. .. .. uses
.. .. .. ..only
.. .. .unless
�for
Subtitles
. other
. . .. ..limited
. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
intended
home and
cted to
otherwise
by Macrovision
DVDauthorized
Audio Discs
. . . . . . .Corporation.
. . . . . . . .Reverse
. . . . . . . . . 22
1
0:00:00
1 / 12
DIVX
List
Movie Folder 1
Movie Folder 2
Movie Folder 3
1 / 12
Movie Folder 4
Movie Folder 5
Introduction
Introduction
Usando
este aparelho de DVD você pode reproduzir discos
Introduction
DivX
Disc Operation
DivX
Movie.
Safety
Precautions
.........................2
Introduction
Movie Folder 6
Movie Folder 7
er 1
Movie Folder 8
er 2
er 3
er 4
er 8
2
3
4
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back
26 unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available
of this
to others. You should record requested information here and
retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase.
27
Operação
er 5
er 6
er 7
Ajuste das Caixas Acústicas
Introduction
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
This
chapter
includes
importantimportantes
reference information
Este
capítulo
contém
informações
que lhe
of you
Contents
. .DVD/CD
. . . . . . .receiver.
.................3
. . . . . . . Table
. .to23help
set your
ajudarão
no
ajuste
do
seu
equipamento.
Disc . . . Before
. . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Playable
Discsacústica
...........................4
da Caixa
. . . . . . . Ajuste
. .Speaker
23
Setup
Precautions
. . . .O. .menu
. . . . Setup
. . . . .aparecerá.
..............5
SETUP.
. . . . . . . 1.
. . Pressione
23
Notes
Discs .settings
. . . . . . for
. . .the
. . built-in
. . . . . .5.1
. . .channel
.....5
theon
following
. . . . . . . . .Make
23
)
para
selecionar
2. surround
Use
as
teclas
(/
decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .a.opção
About Symbols
. . . . .Áudio
. . . . e,
.5
. . . . . . . . . 23
pressione
a tecla.()
Panel and
Rear Panel
. . . para
. . . .ir. ao
. . segundo
.......6
. . . . . . . Front
. . em
24 seguida,
Control
Overview
. . menu
. . . . .appears.
.............7
. . . . . . . Remote
. .1.nível.
24Press
SETUP.
The setup
. . . . . . . 3.
. . Use
24 as teclas (/) para selecionar a segunda opção
v / V to select the AUDIO option then press
. . . . . . . Preparation
. .2.de
24Use
ajuste da caixa
acústica
to the
second(Speaker
level. Setup) e, em se. . . . . . . Connections
. . 24B to move
. . . .a. tecla
. . . . ()
. . . para
. . . .mudar
. . . . .para
. . . .o.terceiro
. . 8-13
guida,
pressione
. . . . . . . . .3.24
Use
v / V to select
TV
Connections
. . .the
.estará
. .Speaker
. . .destacada.
. . . Setup
. . . . . option
. . . . . then
...8
nível.
A
palavra
“Select”
. . . . . . . . . 25
press BEquipment
to move to Connections
the third level. .“Select”
Optional
. . . . . .is. . . . . 9
. . . . . . . 4.
. . Pressione
25
a
tecla
ENTER
e
o
menu
5.1
Speaker
Setup
highlighted.
Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
t . . . . . . . . aparecerá.
25
SpeakerENTER
Systemand
Connection
. . . Setup
. . . . .menu
. . . . . 11-12
5.1 Speaker
st . . . . . . .4.25Press
� Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . . . . . . 26appears.
� Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID
AUDIO
of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Frontal
Colunas
Speaker
FrontEL
. . . . . . . Speaker
. . 28
Positioning.
. Pequeno
. Large
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Tamanho
Size
. . . . . . . Before
. . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Volume
dB
Volume
0
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mini Glossary
for Audio
Stream
& Surround
Distância
Distance
m(ft)
0
0.6(2)
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mode . . .Teste
. . Test
. . . .Desligado
. .Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
. . . . . . . . . 29
Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
. . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Selecionar
Select
Move
Return
Enter
Mover
. . . . . . . . . 30
Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
. . . . . . . . . 30 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
as teclas
(/)
selecionar
a caixa acústica
b / B to
selectpara
the desired
speaker.
. . . . . . . 5.
. .5.Use
30Use
� Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
. . . . . . . . . desejada.
30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
6. Adjust
options using v / V / b / B buttons.
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
///
6. Ajuste as ENTER
opções usando
as teclas
to confirm
your selection.
Returns to
. . . . . . . . .7.30Press
� Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
previous
menu.
ithin
ENTER
para
confirmar
a
sua
seleção
e
. . .an
. . . . 7.
. . Pressione
30the
� Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
er
s
ay be
.....
electric
retornar ao menu anterior.
Speaker selection
Operation
. . . .Select
31 a speaker that you want to adjust. (Front
DVD or Video
CD Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Seleção
da(Left),
Caixa
acústica
. . . . . . . . .speakers
31
Center
Speaker, Front speakers
Playing
a DVD
and Video
CD. ajustada.(caixas
. . . . . . . . . . . . acús. . 19
Selecione
a caixa
acústica
que será
(Right), Rear
speakers
(Right),
Rear speakers (Left),
. . . . . . . 32-33
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22
iangle
frontais (Esquerda) e (Direita), caixa acústica Central,
.ce. of. . . . . ticas
. .or34SubWoofer)
� Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20
About
the symbols
for instructions
caixas
acústicas
Traseiras (Esquerda),
caixas acústicas
Note:
ng)
� Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20
the
Certain
speaker
prohibited
Traseiras
(Direita)
esettings
Subwoofer
� Slow
Motion.
.likely
. . .are
.to. .(Inferior)).
. . . . .harm
. . .by
. to
.the
. the
. .Dolby
. unit
. . . 20
Indicates
hazards
cause
Digital
licensing agreement.
� Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20
CK
N OR
pace
wner’s
d the
loca-
ures
s radi-
pen
OT
Audio
CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Distância
Distance
Playing
an Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. .receiver,
. . . 23
Se você
conectou
as caixas
acústicas
ao seu
DVD
If you connected
� Pause speakers
. . . . reconhece
. . . .to. .your
. . a. DVD/CD
.distância
. . . . . . receiver,
.necessária
. . . . . . . .para
23
o ajuste
da distância
setting the
Distance
the speakers
� Moving
to lets
another
Track . .know
. . . . how
. . . .far
. . . . . 23
o
ponto
de
origem
do
aparelho.
Assim,
o
som
de
thealcançar
sound
has
to
travel
to
reach
your
set
listening
� Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
cadaThis
caixa
acústica
será
ao
point.
allows
the
� Search.
. . .sound
. . . emitido
. .from
. . . .each
. . mesmo
. .speaker
. . . .tempo.
. . to
. . . . . . 23
reach
the
listener
at the
same
(1 ft=30,48
JPEG Disc
Operation
. . . time.
. cm).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Press
b / B toaadjust
Distance
selected
Pressione/
parathe
ajustar
Viewing
JPEG
disc
. .a. distância
. . .of. the
. . .da
. . caixa
. . . . acústica
. . . . . 24
speaker.
� Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
selecionada.
[0.3m(1ft)
- 6.0m(20ft)]
� Still
Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Teste� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Test
Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
b / B ENTER
to test the
signals
of
speaker.
Adjust
Press
Pressione
para
testar
oseach
sinais
Repeat
Tracks.
. . .signals
.de
. .cada
. . . .caixa
. . . . . 25
the volume
to Programmed
match the volume
of test
acústica.
Ajuste
o
volume
para
combinar
os
sinais
Erasing
a Track
from Programme List . . . . dos
. . . . 25
memorized
in the
system.
testes
memorizados
no sistema.
Erasing
the�
Complete
. . . . . . . 25
Center
�Programme
Front RightList
(R) �
Front
Left (L)
DivX
Operation
..
. (L)
. .Frontal
.�. .SubWoofer
. . Direita(D)
.......
. . . . 26
Frontal
� Rear. .(E)
Left
RearDisc
Right
(R)Esquerda
Speaker Setup
. . .. .Traseira
. . . . . . Esquerda
. . . . . . . (E)
. . .
. . . . . . . 27
Central
You
can
adjust
the
volume
during
operating
the
test
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
DireitaVolume
(D)  Subwoofer
tone, first
vTraseira
/ V toMemory
select
Lastuse
Condition
. . . . . or
. . Speaker
. . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Você
podeuse
ajustar
o nível
do volume,
enquanto
executa o
b/B
option
then
Screen
Saver
. . buttons
. . . . . . to
. .select
. . . . .volume
. . . . . .or. . . . . . 28
speaker,
thatPrimeiro
all
testeControlling
desotom.
thespeaker’s
TVuse
. . .as.volume
.teclas
. . . . /
.is. same
. . .para
. .from
. selecionar
. . . . . . 28a
theOperation
listener’s
position.
opção
Volume
ouRadio
Caixas .Acústicas,
with
. . . . . . . em
. . . seguida
. . . . . . pressione
. . . . . 29
DuringPresetting
operating the
the radio
test tone,
if you
. então
. adjust
. . . .o. the
. . . . . .de
. .todas
. 29
/para
selecionar
um stations
dos dois,
volume
volume, it will be paused in the current speaker
Listening
to theserá
radioo .mesmo,
. . . . . .a. partir
. . . . da
. . posição
. . . . . . do
. 29
as caixas
acústicas
channel.
Other
ouvinte.Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Durante
o teste de tom, se você ajustar o volume, ele pára
Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
no canal
Mute da
. . caixa
. . . . acústica
. . . . . . .atual.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reference
Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
itself or other material damage.
�
Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
otas:
Indicates
special
� Repeat
. . . .operating
. . . . . . .features
. . . . . .of. .this
. . .unit.
. . . . . . 20
Size
� Repeat
A-B settings
. . . . . . acústicas
. . . fixed,
. . . . são
.you
. . proíbidos
. cannot
. . . . . . .pelo
. 21
• Since
Alguns
ajustes
the
speaker
Indicates
tips das
and caixas
hints forare
making the
task
easier.
� Time
Search
. . Dolby
. . . . .Digital.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
change
the
contrato
de settings.
licença da
� Marker
Search
. . . Dolby
. . . . Laboratories.
. . . . . . . . . “Dolby”,
. . . . . . 21
Manufactured
under
license.from
“Pro Logic”,
and the
� Zoom.
. .double-D
. . . . . . symbol
. . . . . are
. . .trademarks
. . . . . . . of. .Dolby
. . . . 21
Volume Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992Laboratories.
Specialdas
DVDCaixas
Features
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Tamanho
Acústicas
1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
� Title
Menu
. . . .the
. .ou
. . grande),
. . . .level
. . .não
. . the
.pode
. . selected
. .ser
. . . . 22
b /éBfixo
to adjust
output
of
O Press
tamanho
(pequeno
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Disc
Menu
.5,956,674,
. . . . . . .5,974,380,
. . . . . . .5,978,762
. . . . . . .and
....
speaker.
(-6dB
~ +6dB)
US
Pat.�No.
5,451,942
modificado
pelo
usuário.
other worldwide
patents
andLanguage
pending. “DTS”
� Changing
theissued
Audio
. . . .and
. . .“DTS
....
Digital Surround”
are
registered
trademarks
of
Digital
Theater
� Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems,
Volume
Subtitles
...........................
Inc.
All �
rights
reserved.
22
22
22
22
Pressione
ajustar
DVD/
Audiopara
Discs
. . o. .nível
. . .de
. .saída
. . . .da. .caixa
. . . acústica
. . . . . . 22
selecionada
(-6dB
~ +6dB)
OTES ON
COPYRIGHTS:
It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast
via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without
permission.
This
28product features the copy protection function developed
by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some
discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs
on a VCR, picture noise will appear.
33
Operation
Introduction
Ajuste
das Caixas Acústicas 5.1
Introduction
title
5.1 Speaker Setup
CK
N OR
pace
wner’s
d the
loca-
ures
s radi-
pen
OT
er
such
cted to
Introduction
Memória
da condição
anterior
CAUTION
Safety
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Introduction
Este
aparelho
de DVD .memoriza
os. ajustes
OF ELECTRIC
SHOCKfeitos para o
Table
Contents .RISK
.. .. .NOT
SafetyofPrecautions
. .. .. DO
. .. .. .OPEN
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
último
disco.
Os
na memória mesmo. 3
Before
. . ajustes
. . . . .. ..permanecem
Table ofUse
Contents
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5
que
o disco
Playable
Discs
. .aparelho
. ..REDUCE
. ..RISK
.4
Before
Useseja
. . removido
. .CAUTION:
.. .. .. .. .. do
.. .TO
.. .. .. .. .. de
..THE
.. .DVD,
.. .. ..ou
.. ..este
.. .. .. 4-5
. .você
.. .. ..OF
.. ..ELECTRIC
.. .. .. um
.. .. ..disco
..SHOCK
.. .. ..que
.. .. .. tenha
.. .. .. .. ..suas
.. .. .. .. 54
sejaPrecautions
desligado.Discs
Se
inserir
Playable
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK)
About
the
symbols
for
instructions
Notes
on Discs
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .a.PARTS
..reprodução
.. .. .. ..INSIDE
.. .. .. .. .inicia-se
últimas
configurações
Precautions
. . ..memorizadas,
. .. .. .. .. 55
NO. USER-SERVICEABLE
About
Symbols
..ponto
..likely
.. .. .. em
..to.. TO
..que
.. .QUALIFIED
.. ..harm
.. .. .. ..SERVICE
.. .. the
.. .. ..unit
.. .. .. .. 55
Notes
on
Discs
. ..parou.
exatamente
noREFER
últimoSERVICING
Indicates
hazards
cause
to
PERSONNEL.
Front
Panel
andmaterial
Rear
About
. . .Panel
. damage.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65
itself
orSymbols
other
Remote
Control
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76
Front Panel
and Overview
Rear Panel
This lightning
flash features
an
Indicates
special
operating
otas:
Remote
Control
Overview
. .with
. . .arrowhead
. . .of. .this
. .symbol
.unit.
. . . .within
...7
equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user
–Preparation
OsIndicates
ajustes armazenados
na
memória
podem
ser
utilizaabout
thehints
presence
of uninsulated
dangerous
tips
and
for making
the task
easier.
dos
a qualquervoltage
be
Connections
.momento.
. . . . within
. . . . the
. . .product’s
. . . . . .enclosure
. . . . . . that
. . .may
. 8-13
Preparation
ofde
sufficient
magnitude
Manufactured
under
license
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
–Connections
Este
DVD
TVaparelho
Connections
. ..não
. .. ..memoriza
. .. .. .. to
. ..constitute
. .os
. .. ..ajustes
. .. .a. “Dolby”,
.risk
. de
. of
. ..electric
..8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-13
shock
to persons.
“Pro Logic”, and the
double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Optional
Equipment
.. ..iniciar
.. ..1992.. .. ..a.. .. 98
um disco,
seConfidential
você
desligar
TV Connections
. . Connections
. o. .gravador
. . . .works.
. . antes
. . .Copyright
. .. ..de
Laboratories.
Unpublished
Aerial
Connections
.Connections
. . mark
. reserved.
. . .within
. . . .an
.. ..equilateral
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..triangle
.. .. 10
1997
Dolby Laboratories.
All. rights
The
exclamation
Optional
.9
reprodução
doEquipment
disco.
is intended
of
Speaker
System
Connection
.Theater
. ..the
.presence
Aerial Connections
.to
. alert
. .Digital
. the
. .não
.user
.. ..funciona
..about
.. .. .Systems,
.. .em
.. ..alguns
..Inc.
.11-12
. . 10
Manufactured
under
license
from
- A memória
da
condição
anterior
important
operating
and
maintenance
(servicing)
US Pat.
5,451,942 5,956,674,
�No.
Transmitter.
. Connection
. . . . . .5,974,380,
. . . .. .. .. ..5,978,762
. . 11
Speaker
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..and
.. .. 11-12
discos
de DVDSystem
instructions
in the
accompanying
other
worldwide
patents
issued
andinstructions
pending. “DTS”
and “DTS the
�
a channel
� Changing
Transmitter.
. . . . .trademarks
. .of. Transmitter
. . . . of
. . Digital
. . . .. .Theater
. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
Digital
Surround”
are registered
product.
- A função
memória
daof
condição
anterior
um
título 11
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
2000ofDigital
�
a ID
Transmitter
. Theater
. . para
. . . .Systems,
� Setting
Changing
a 1996,
channel
Transmitter
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
11
Inc.
All �
rights
reserved.
anterior
de
DVD
apagada,
assim
que
diferente
and
Connecting
WARNING:
TO
PREVENT
FIRE OR
� Assembling
Setting
aé ID
of Transmitter
. ELECTRIC
.toum
. .the
. título
. Speakers
. . .SHOCK
. . . . . 11
11
for reproduzido.
HAZARD,
DO
NOT
EXPOSE
THIS
PRODUCT
TO
RAIN
OR
�
Speaker
Connections.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
� Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11
MOISTURE.
OTES
ON COPYRIGHTS:
Speaker
Positioning.
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 13
� Speaker
Connections.
12
, broadcast
show
ItBefore
is forbidden
by law to copy
Operation
. install
. .. .,. broadcast,
. .. .. equipment
Speaker
Positioning.
.. .copyrighted
.. .. .. .. .. material
.. .. in
.. ..a..confined
..without
.. .. .. .. .14-19
. . 13
WARNING:
Do
not
this
space
via cable, play in public, or rent
Mini
Glossary
for. .Audio
Before
. .similar
. . Stream
. . unit.
....&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . 14-19
suchOperation
as a book case
or
permission.
Mode
. features
. . tela
. . . .aparece
. . copy
.Audio
. . protection
.quando
. Stream
. . . . .você
.&
. . Surround
. . developed
. . .o. DVD
. . . .no
. 14
This
product
the
function
Mini Glossary
for
O protetor
de
deixa
by Macrovision.
Sound
..protection
.. .. .. .. .. .. .signals
.. .. ..recorded
.. .. .. .. .. ..on.. ..some
.. .. .. .. 14
Mode
. Mode
. .Copy
. . .muito
. .. .. .. .. are
14
modo
parado
por
tempo.
discs. When
recording
and
playing
the
pictures
of
these
discs
On-Screen
Sound
Mode Display
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15
14
on a VCR, picture noise will appear.
Initial
SettingsDisplay
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19
On-Screen
This product
incorporates copyright
protection technology that . . 15
� General
Operation
. .. .. ..patents
. .. 16-19
. . 16
Initial
Settings
.claims
. . . . of
. ..certain
.. .. .. .. .U.S.
.. .. .. .. ..and
.. .. .other
is protected
by
method
CAUTION:
�
. . owned
. . . . ..by
.. ..Macrovision
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Corporation
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16
intellectual
property receiver
rights
� Language
General
Operation
16
This
DVD/CD
employs
a laser system.
and other
rights owners.
�
Display
. . . . Use
. .. .. .. .. .. .protection
. .. .. .. .. .. ..tech�ensure
Language
.. ..of
..of
..this
..this
.. product,
.. .copyright
.. .. owner’s
.16-17
. . 16
proper .use
please
read and
this
nologyTomust
be authorized
by
Macrovision
Corporation,
is. . 17
�
Audio.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
� Display
. . .other
. . retain
. limited
. . . it. for
.viewing
. .future
. . . uses
.reference.
. . only
. . . unless
. Should
. . . 16-17
manual
carefully
the
intended
for home
and and
�
(Parental
.. ..authorized
.. .. .. .. Reverse
.. .. ..service
.. .. .. .. ..loca.. 18
unit
require
maintenance,
� Lock
Audio.
. . by
. . Macrovision
. . Control)
. . .contact
. . .Corporation.
. ..an
17
otherwise
authorized
tion
(see
service
procedure).
�
. . . . . . .isControl)
.prohibited.
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19
� Others
Lock
(Parental
18
engineering
or disassembly
Protetor de tela
Performing
� Otherscontrols,
. . . . . adjustments,
. . . . . . . . .or. .carrying
. . . . .out
. . procedures
. . . . . . 19
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiSERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back
ation
exposure.
of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available
DVD
or You
Video
CD exposure
Operation
. . . beam,
. . . . .do. .here
. . .and
. to. 19-22
to
others.
should
requested
To prevent
directrecord
to laserinformation
not try
open
retain
this
guide
aVisible
permanent
record
Playing
a as
DVD
and
Video
CD.
. . 19
DVD
orenclosure.
Video
CD
Operation
. . of
. ..your
.. .. ..purchase.
..open.
.. .. .. ..DO
.. .. NOT
.. 19-22
the
laser
radiation
when
General
. . . . .CD.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22
STARE INTO
BEAM.
Playing
aFeatures
DVD
and. .Video
. . 19
Model No.
___________________________________
� Moving
to another
. . 20
General
Features
. . . .TITLE/GROUP
. . . . not
. . .be. .exposed
. . .. .. .. to
.. ..water
.. 20-22
CAUTION:
The apparatus
should
Serial No.
___________________________________
�
to
.. 20
� Moving
Moving
to another
another
TITLE/GROUP
. .liquids,
. .. .. .. ..such
20
(dripping
or splashing)
andCHAPTER/TRACK
no objects filled with
Slow
Motion.
. . . .CHAPTER/TRACK
. . the
. . .apparatus.
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
as�
should
be .placed
on
�vases,
Moving
to another
20
�
and
� Still
SlowPicture
Motion.
. . Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
20
�
. .product
. and
. . . .Frame-by-Frame
. . . not
. . .be. .used
. . . outdoor,
. . Playback
. . . .restricted
. . . .. 20
CAUTION:
This
may
� Search.
Still Picture
20to
indoor
use only.
�
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20
� Repeat
Search.
20
Operation
Operation
�
� Repeat
Repeat A-B
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
20
�
Search
� Time
Repeat
A-B . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
21
�
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Marker
Time Search
21
�
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Zoom.
Marker. Search
21
Special
DVD
� Zoom.
. .Features
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
21
� TitleDVD
MenuFeatures
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
Special
22
�
� Disc
Title Menu
Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
�
� Changing
Disc Menuthe
. . Audio
. . . . . Language
. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
�
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Changing
Changing the
the Audio
Audio Channel
Language
22
�
. . .Audio
. . . . .Channel
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
�2Subtitles
Changing. the
22
DVD
Audio Discs
� Subtitles
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Controlando a TV
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
O seu
controle
remotoCD
pode
operar
tanto o seu DVD
Home
Playing
an Audio
and
MP3/WMA
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . . Disc
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
Theater
system
como
as
� Pause
. . . . algumas
.CD
. . .and
. . .funções
. . . . . .de
. . sua
.Disc
. . TV.
. .. ..siga
.. .. .. 23
Playing
an .Audio
MP3/WMA
23
instruções
abaixo
para
operar
a
sua
TV
LG.
�
� Moving
Pause .to. .another
. . . . . . Track
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Repeat
Moving Track/All/Off.
to another Track
23
�
. . o. .controle
. . . . . .remoto,
.. .. .. .. .. .pressione
.. ..tecla
.. .. .. 23
1. Antes
de usar
� Search.
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. a
23
JPEG
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..a.. ser
.. .. ..operado.
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..Para
.. .. 24
�Disc
Search.
. . . . . .o..dispositivo
23
TV
paraOperation
selecionar
Viewing
JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
JPEG
DiscoaOperation
mudar
modo
de operação do controle (operar um24
� SlideaShow
. disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Viewing
JPEG
dispositivo
diferente),
certifique-se de pressionar a 24
�
� Still
SlidePicture
Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
tecla
TV primeiro.
�
to another
� Moving
Still Picture
. . . . . file
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
2. As� teclas
POWER,
CH. ,. VOLUME
To rotate
picture.
. . . . . . . e. .INPUT
. . . . . do
. . controle
. . . 24
Repeat
Tracks.
.. .. ..TV
.. .. .LG.
Programmed
. . operar
. . . . .. .a
. ..sua
. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
remoto Programmed
sãoPlayback
usadas para
Erasing
a Track from Programme
Repeat Programmed
Tracks. . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Erasing
Complete
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Erasing
acódigos
Track
from
List
25
Ajustando
osthe
para Programme
aProgramme
TV LG
DivX
Disc
Operation
. . .for
. . . instructions
. . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme
25
About
symbols
•Speaker
Segure
athe
tecla
POWER
e
pressione
PR/CH(+/-)
repetidaSetup
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
DivX Disc
Operation
26
menteSetup
até
a .TV
Indicates
hazards
Additional
Information
.. to
.. .. cause
.. .. .. .. ..harm
.. .. .. .. .to
.. .. .. 28
Speaker
. .ligar
. .likely
. .e..desligar.
. .. .the
. .. .. unit
27
itselfCondition
or other material
damage.
Last
Memory
Additional
Information
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Screen
Saver
. .Memory
.operating
. . . . . .. ..features
.. .. .. .. .. .. of
.. ..this
.. .. ..unit.
.. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Last
Condition
28
Indicates
special
otas:
Controlling
the. TV
Screen Saver
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Se o Indicates
controle
remoto
não
operar
a
sua
TV,
tente
um
outro
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Controllingtips
theand
TVhints
. . . for
. . .making
. . . . . the
. . .task
. . . easier.
. . . . . . 28
código.
ou
use
o
controle
remoto
originalmente
fornecido
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
Operation
with
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
29
Manufactured
license
from
“Dolby”,
comListening
a sua TVunder
LG.
(LG
e Gold
Star)
to
the
radio
. . .Dolby
. . .. .Laboratories.
.. .. .função
.. .. ..vários
.. .. .. 29
the
radio
stations
.em
. .. .. .. .. ..dos
29
“Pro Presetting
Logic”, and the
double-D
symbol are
trademarks
of
Dolby
Other
Functions.
. fabricantes,
.Unpublished
. . .. .. .. .. .. ..NOSSA
.. .. .. .. ..Copyright
..EMPRESA
.. .. .. .. .. 1992.. .. .. .. 30
códigos
usados
Listening
topelos
the. radio
29
Laboratories.
Confidential
works.
Sleep
Timer
.. .. .reserved.
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..com
.. .. .. todos
.. .. .. .. ..os
30
1997
Dolby
Laboratories.
Other
Functions.
. . All
. . .rights
. ..remoto
. .. .. funcione
30
não
garante
que oSetting
controle
Dimmer
. . .LG.
.Setting
. . . . . from
.. .. .. .Digital
.. .. .. .. .. Systems,
.. .. .. .. .. .. .Inc.
SleepdeTimer
. .. .. .. ..Theater
. .. .. 30
30
Manufactured
under
license
modelos
TV
US Pat.
No.. 5,451,942
Mute
. .. .. .. .. .. ..5,956,674,
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..5,974,380,
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5,978,762
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..and
.. .. .. .. 30
Dimmer
30
other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS
Using
.. .. .. ..Theater
.. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Mute
.the
. . Headphone
. are
. . .registered
. . . . . .Jack
. . . . .. .. .. ..of.. ..Digital
30
Digital
Surround”
trademarks
Systems,
Inc.
Copyright
1996,
2000
Selecting
the
Input
Source
. .. .. .. ..Theater
.. .. .. .. ..Systems,
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Using
the
Headphone
JackDigital
30
Inc. XTS
All rights
reserved.True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
(Excellent
Selecting
the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
XTS
. . . . . .True
. . . .Sound)
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
XTS pro
(Excellent
30
OTES
ON
XTS pro . .COPYRIGHTS:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast
Reference
via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without
Language
Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Reference
permission.
This
product
features
the. copy
Country
Code
List
. .. .. ..protection
.. .. .. .. .. .. function
.. .. .. .. .. ..developed
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31
Language
Code
List
31
by Macrovision. Copy .protection
signals are recorded on some
Troubleshooting
Country Code List. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33
. . 31
discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
Troubleshooting
. .will
. . appear.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
on
a VCR, picture noise
Specifications
. . . . copyright
. . . . . . .protection
. . . . . . technology
. . . . . . . that
. . . . 34
This
product incorporates
is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back
of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available
to others. You should record requested information here and
retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase.
Model No. ___________________________________
Serial No. ___________________________________
29
Introduction
Introduction
iangle
ce of
ng)
the
Informação adicional
Operação
ithin an
er
s
ay be
electric
Operação
comwith
o Rádio
Operation
Operation
with
Radio
Radio
Introductionas estações de rádio
Prefixando
Presetting
Presetting the
the radio
radio stations
stations
Ouvindo
o rádio
Listening
Listening
to
to the
the radio
radio
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Você pode
prefixar 50. estações
para
FM
e.pode
AM. .(MW).
Prefixe
estações
de rádio
primeiramente
naDisc
memória
do
Playing
an Audio
CDin
. . . memory
. . 23
of Contents
. . stations
. . . . . . for
.for
. .FM
. . .and
. .AM
. . .(MW).
. . .Before
3
You
can
can preset
preset 50
50
stations
FM
and
AM
(MW).
Before
. . . . . . . Table
. . 23You
Preset
Preset radio
radio
stations
stations
inand
the
theMP3/WMA
DVD/CD
DVD/CD Receiver’s
Receiver’s
memory
Antes
deUse
sintonizar,
certifique-se
do
Receptor
de DVD/CD
� (see
Pause
. . . . . (veja
. . radio
. . “Prefixando
. . stations”
.stations”
. . . . . .“estações
. . the
.the
. . left).
.left).
. de
. . rádio
. . 23
.make
. . . .sure
. . . .that
. . .you
. . de
.have
. .que
. . turned
.o. nível
. . . down
.down
. . volume
. .the
. 4-5
tuning,
make
sure
that
you
have
turned
the
volvolfirst
first
(see “Presetting
“Presetting
radio
on
on
Disc . . . Before
. . 23tuning,
baixo. Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
à esquerda).
� Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playable
ume.
ume.
. . . . . . . esteja
. . 23
Press
Press BAND
BAND until
until AM
AM (MW)
(MW) or
or FM
FM appears
appears in
in the
the
� Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
Press
Press BAND
BAND on
on the
the remote
remote control
control until
until FM
FM or
or
display
display window.
window.
� Search.BAND
. . . . . até
. . .AM
. . .(MW)
. . . . ou
. . .FM
. . aparecer
. . . . . . . na
. 23
Notes
on Discs
. .no
. . controle
. . . . . . .remoto
. . . . . .até
. . .FM
. . ou
. . .AM
.5
Pressione
BAND
1
Pressione
. . . . . . . 1. . 23
AM
AM (MW)
(MW) appears
appears in
in the
the display
display window.
window.
The
The last
last received
received station
station is
is tuned
tuned in.
in.
JPEG
Disc
Operation
About
Symbols na
. . janela
. . . . . do
. . .Display
. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
(MW) aparecer
janela
do
display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Viewing
a PR(
JPEG
disc
. . . . . . . .on
. . the
. . . remote
. . . . . . control
. . 24
And
Andand
then
then
every
every
time
time.you
you
press
press
BAND,
BAND,
FM
FM
and
and
Panel
Rear
Panel
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6
D
D//E
E
Press
Press
PR(
)
)
repeatedly
repeatedly
on
the
remote
control
. . . . . . . 2Front
. . 24Então,
cada vez que você pressiona BAND, FM e
A última estação recebida é sintonizada.
AM
AM (MW)
(MW)
changes
changes. alternately.
� to
Slide
Show
. . . . . .station
. . . . . .you
. . .want.
. . . . . . . . . 24
Control
Overview
.alternately.
..................7
to select
select
the
the. preset
preset
station
you
want.
. . . . . . . Remote
. . 24AM (MW)
muda alternadamente.
� Each
Still
. . . .the
. . button,
.button,
. . . . the
. . .DVD/CD
. . . . . .Receiver
. . . . 24
EachPicture
time
time you
you.press
press
the
the
DVD/CD
Receiver
. . . . . . . . . 24
Press
Press and
and hold
hold TUNING
TUNING
or
or
on
on
2 Pressione
PRESET(/)
repetidamente
ou
tunes in
in one
one
preset
preset station
station
at
time.
� tunes
Moving
to another
file .at
. a.a.time.
. . . . . . . . no
. . .contro. . 24
. . . . . . . 3Preparation
. . 24Pressione e segure TUNNING
the
the front
front
panel
panel
for
for about
about
two
two seconds
secondsdois
until
until the
the
le� remoto
para
selecionar
a. estação
frontal
durante
aproximadamente
To
rotate
picture.
. .by
. . rotating
.rotating
. . . . .VOLUME
. .prefixada.
. . . . . on
.on
. .the
24
. . . . . . . Connections
. . 24no painel
Adjust
Adjust
the
the
volume
volume
by
VOLUME
the
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-13
frequency
frequency indication
indication starts
starts to
to change,
change, then
then
Programmed
Playback
.pressing
. tecla,
....o
. .aparelho
. . . . . . .de.++.DVD/CD
. . --. on
.on
25the
A cada
acionamento
da
segundos
até
que
a
indicação
de
freqüência
. . . . . . . . . 24
front
front
panel
panel
or
or
by
by
pressing
VOLUME
VOLUME
or
or
the
TV Connections
.........................8
release.
release.
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks. . .de
. .cada
. . . .vez.
. . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 25
sintoniza
as
estação
prefixadas
comece
a
mudar,
então
libere
a
tecla.
remote
remote
control
control
repeatedly.
repeatedly.
Scanning
Scanning
stops
stops when
when
the
the DVD/CD
DVD/CD
tunes
Optional
Equipment
Connections
. Receiver
.Receiver
. . . . . .tunes
. . . .inin9aa
Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 25
A busca
pára quando
o. Receptor
sintoniza
station.
station.
“TUNED”
“TUNED”
and
“STEREO”
stereo
program)
Aerial
Connections
. and
. . .“STEREO”
. . .de. DVD/CD
. . . (for
.(for
. . stereo
. . . . .program)
. uma
. . 10
To
To turn
turnthe
off
offComplete
the
the radio
radioProgramme List . . . . . . . 25
Erasing
t . . . . . . . . 25
estação.
“TUNED”
eConnection
“STEREO”
(para
appear
appear
in
in the
the
display
display window.
window.
3 Press
Ajuste
o volume
girando
VOLUMEReceiver
no painel
frontal
Speaker
System
. . .programa
. . . . . . estéreo)
. . . . 11-12
Press
POWER
to
to turn
turn
off
DivX
DiscPOWER
Operation
. . the
.the
. . DVD/CD
.DVD/CD
. . . . . . Receiver
. . . . . . . off
. . or
.or. 26
st . . . . . . . 25apareça
na
janela
do
display.
� Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ou pressionando
+.ou
no
select
select
another
another
function
mode
AV
etc.,).
Speaker
Setup
. .function
. . . VOLUME
. . .mode
. . . . (DVD/CD,
.(DVD/CD,
. . -. repetidamente
. . .AV
. . 1,
.1,. etc.,).
. . . . 27
. . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing
Press
Press PROG./MEMO.
PROG./MEMO.
on
on
the
the
remote
remote
control.
control.
a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
controle
remoto.
Additional
Information
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
. . . . . . . 4. . 27Pressione
AA preset
preset
number
will
will flash
flash
the
the
display
window.
PROG./MEMO.
noinincontrole
� Setting
a number
ID
of Transmitter
. . .display
. . . remoto.
. .window.
. . . . . . 11
To
To listen
listen
to
to non-preset
non-preset
radio
stations
Last
Condition
Memory . . radio
. . . . . stations
. . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11
Um número prefixado piscará na janela do display.
�
� Use
Useestações
manual
manual
or
automatic
step
2.
Screen
Saver .or
. .automatic
. . . . .não
. . tuning
.tuning
. . . . in
.in. step
. . . .2.
. . . . . . 28
Escutar
de
rádio
prefixadas
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker
D//E
E)) on
Press
Press PR
PR
((D
on the
the
select
Connections.
. . remote
.remote
. . . . . control
.control
. . . . . to
.to. .select
12
thetuning,
TV . .press
. ou
. . automática
. TUN(-)
.TUN(-)
. . . . .b
. .or
. .TUN
. . . .(+)
.2.. B
.B28
�Use
For
For amanual
manual
tuning,
press
b
or
TUN
(+)
on
on
. . . . . . . Speaker
. . 28
• �Controlling
sintonia
manual
no
passo
the
the preset
preset number
number
want.
Positioning.
. . . . . . you
.you
. . .want.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
o PRESET
(/) no controle remoto
with
with
Radio
Radio
Operation
with control
Radio
.repeatedly.
.Pressione
. . . . . . . TUN
. . . . (-)
. . . .TUN
. . . .(+)
. 29
the
the remote
remote
control
repeatedly.
. Operation
.Operation
. . . . . 5Before
. . 28Pressione
•
Para
sintonia
manual,
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Presetting
the radio
stations
. . . hold
.hold
. . .TUN(-)
.....b
.b. or
.or29
para selecionar
o número prefixado.
Press
Press PROG./MEMO.
PROG./MEMO.
on
on the
the
remote
remote control
control
. . . . . . . . . 29
�
�no
For
For
automatic
automatic
tuning,
tuning,
press
press.and
and
TUN(-)
controle
remoto
repetidamente.
Mini Glossary
for Audio Stream
& Surround
Listening
the
radio
. . .seconds
. . . . . . on
.on
. .the
. . .remote
. . . . . 29
again.
.Presetting
. . . . . . . . 29
B
B
for
for
about
about .two
two
seconds
the
remote
TUN
TUN
(+)
(+)to
Presetting
the
the
to
to
the
the
radio
radio
Mode
.again.
. . radio
.radio
. . . . . .stations
.stations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listening
.Listening
. . 14
•
Para
sintonia
automática,
Pressione
TUN
(-)
TUN
Othercontrol.
Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
The
The station
station is
is stored.
stored.
. . . . . . . 6. . 29
control.
Pressione
PROG./MEMO.
Sound
Mode
. . . . . . . . . .no
. . controle
. . . . . . .remoto
. . . . . . . . 14
(+)inTimer
aproximadamente
Sleep
Setting .Receiver’s
. . . . . . dois
. . memory
.memory
.segundos,
. . . . . . . .no
. . . 30
You
can
preset
50
50stations
stationsfor
forFM
FMand
andAM
AM(MW).
(MW).Before
Before Preset
Presetradio
radiostations
stations
inpor
the
theDVD/CD
DVD/CD
Receiver’s
.You
. . .can
. . .preset
. . 30novamente.
Repeat
Repeat Display
steps
steps 33 .to
to
to
store
other
On-Screen
. .66. to
. . store
. . . . .other
. . . . stations.
.stations.
. . . . . 15
controle
tuning,
make
sure
surethat
thatyou
youhave
haveturned
turneddown
downthe
thevolvolfirst
first(see
(see“Presetting
“Presetting
radio
radio
Dimmer
.remoto.
. stations”
.stations”
. . . . . .on
.on
. the
.the
. . left).
.left).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
.tuning,
. . . . .make
. . . 30
Initial
Settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-19
To
To
select
select
a
a
preset
preset
radio
radio
station
station
directly
directly
A
estação
é
armazenada.
ume.
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
.ume.
. . . . . . . . 30 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press
PressBAND
BAND
until
AM(MW)
(MW)
or
orFM
FMbuttons
appears
appears
in
the
the
16
You
Youuntil
can
canAM
use
use
the
the number
number
buttons
on
onin
the
the
remote
remote control
control
Using the
Headphone
Jack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . Press
. Press
. . . . BAND
. BAND
30 � Language
Selecionar
estação
rádio. .directly.
prefixada
on
onthe
theremote
remote
control
control
until
until
FM
FM
or
or
display
display
window.
window.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
to
to select
selectuma
aa preset
preset
radio
radiode
station
station
directly. diretamente
To
To
tune
tune
in
in
a
a
station
station
with
with
a
a
weak
weak
signal
signal
7
Repita
os
passos
de
3
a
6
para
armazenar
outras
Selecting
the
Input
Source
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 30
. . . AM
. AM
. . .(MW)
. . 30appears
pode
usarisisastuned
teclas
no controle
remoto
(MW)
appears
in
in. the
The
Thelast
lastVocê
received
received
station
station
tuned
in.
in.numéricas
For
For
example,
example,
to
to
listen
listen
to
to preset
preset station
station
4,
4, press
press
44 on
on the
the
� Display
.the
. . display
.display
. . . . . window.
.window.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Press
Press TUNING
TUNING
or
or
repeatedly
repeatedly in
in step
step 33
. . . . . . . . . 30estações.
remote
remote
control.
control.
To
To
listen
listen
to
to
preset
preset
station
station
19,
19,
press
press
11
para
selecionar
uma
estação
de
rádio
prefixada
diretamen�
Audio.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
And
And
then
then
every
every
time
time
you
you
press
press
BAND,
BAND,
FM
FM
and
and
D
D
E
E
Press
Press
PR(
PR(
/
/
)
)
repeatedly
repeatedly
on
on
the
the
remote
remote
control
control
to
to
tune
tune
in
in
the
the
station
station
manually.
manually.
XTS
pro
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
then
thenexemplo,
99 (within
(withinpara
33 seconds).
seconds).
te.the
Por
awant.
estação prefixada 4, Pressio(MW)
changesalternately.
alternately.
to
toselect
select
thepreset
presetstation
stationouvir
you
youwant.
. . . AM
. AM
. . .(MW)
. . 30changes
Sintonizar
uma.estação
� Others
. . . . . . com
. . . . um
. . . sinal
. . . . fraco
. . . . . . . . . . . Each
19
ne
4
no
controle
remoto.
ouvirReceiver
a estação prefixada 19,
Eachtime
time
you
you
press
press
the
the
button,
button,
the
thepara
DVD/CD
DVD/CD
Receiver
To
To clear
clear all
all the
the stored
stored stations
stations
Reference
For
For
your
your
reference
reference
Press
Press
and
andhold
hold
TUNING
TUNING
or
or
on
on
Pressione
TUNNING
ou
repetidamente
tunes
tunesininPressione
one
onepreset
presetstation
station
atataatime.
time.
1FM
emprogram
seguida
9is
(em
3.segundos).
Press
Press
and
and hold
hold PROG./MEMO.
PROG./MEMO.
for
for about
about
two
two seconds
seconds
Language
Code
List
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
�
�
If
If
an
an
FM
program
is
noisy
noisy
the
thefront
front
panel
panel
for
for
about
abouttwo
two
seconds
seconds
until
untilthe
the
Operation
passo
3 para
sintonizar
estação
manualmente.
and
and
“CLEAR
“CLEAR
ALL”
ALL”ais
is
appeared
appeared
in
in the
the display
display window
window
Adjust
AdjustCountry
the
thevolume
volume
by
byList
rotating
rotating
VOLUME
on
Code
. . .on
.VOLUME
.the
. . .front
. . . on
.panel
. .the
.the
. so
. . that
.that
. . . . . . 31
Press
Press
MONO/ST.
MONO/ST.
on
the
front
panel
so
. . . frequency
. frequency
. . . . . 31 indication
indicationstarts
startsto
tochange,
change,then
then
DVD and
or
CD Operation
. . . . . again,
. . . . . the
. . .stations
. . 19-22
andVideo
then
then press
press
PROG./MEMO.
PROG./MEMO.
again,
the
stations
are
are panel
front
front
panel
or
by
by
pressing
pressing
+.+or
on
Troubleshooting
. . VOLUME
.VOLUME
. . . . .in
. .the
.or
.display
.--.on
. . the
.the
. . . . . . 32-33
Paraor
sua
referência
"STEREO"
"STEREO"
disappears
disappears
in
the
display
window.
window.
. . . release.
. release.
. . . . . 31
Playing
a DVD
and Video
CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . remote
19
cleared.
cleared.
Apagar
todas
armazenadas
remoteSpecifications
control
repeatedly.
repeatedly.
. . no
.no
. .stereo
. . FM
. . .effect,
. . . . .but
.com
. .the
. ruídos
. reception
.reception
. . . . . . .will
34
There
There
will
will be
be
stereo
effect,
but
the
will
ithin
stops
stops
when
whenas
the
theestações
DVD/CD
DVD/CDReceiver
Receiver
tunes
tunesininaa
•control
Se
um
programa
de
estiver
. . . an
.Scanning
.Scanning
. . 32-33
General
Features
. .(for
. . .stereo
. . . .program)
.program)
. . . . . . . . . . . 20-22
er. . . station.
eand
segure
PROG./MEMO.
aproximadamente
dois
improve.
improve. Press
Press the
the button
button
again
again
to
to restore
restore
the
theque
stereo
stereo
“TUNED”
and
“STEREO”
“STEREO”
(forstereo
you
have
have
accidentally
accidentally
entered
entered
into
into the
the “CLEAR
“CLEAR
ALL”
ALL”
. station.
. . . Pressione
. .“TUNED”
34�� IfIf you
Pressione
MONO/ST,
no
painel
frontal
de
forma
To
To
turn
turn
off
off
the
the
radio
radio
�display
Moving
to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20
s
appear
appear
ininthe
the
display
window.
window.
effect.
effect.
and
and
you
you
do
do not
not
wish
wish
to
to clear
clearna
the
the
memory,
memory,
do
do
not
not POWERtoto
segundos
e “CLEAR
ALL”
aparecerá
janela
do display,
turn
turnthe
theDVD/CD
DVD/CD
Receiver
Receiver
off
offor
or display. Não
“STEREO”
desapareça
da janela
do
ay be
� Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . Press
.Press
. . 20POWER
press
press
any
any
key.
key.
After
After
a
a
few
few
seconds,
seconds,
the
the
“CLEAR
“CLEAR
ALL”
ALL”
�
�
To
To
improve
improve
reception
receptionAV
em
seguida,
pressione
PROG./MEMO.
novamente,
as
select
select
another
another
function
function
mode
mode
(DVD/CD,
(DVD/CD,
AV
1,1,etc.,).
etc.,).
electric
haverá
nenhum
efeito
de
estéreo,
mas a recepção
� Slow Motion.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
Press
PressPROG./MEMO.
PROG./MEMO.
on
on
the
the
remote
remote
control.
control.
display
display
will
will go
go off
off by
by itself
itself and
and change
change to
to mode.
mode.
Reorient
Reorient the
the supplied
supplied antennas.
antennas.
estações
sãoPicture
apagadas.
� Still
Frame-by-Frame
Playback . 20
melhorará. Pressione a tecla novamente para restabeAApreset
presetnumber
number
will
willflash
flashininand
the
thedisplay
display
window.
window.
listento
tonon-preset
non-presetradio
radiostations
stations
• Se� você
acidentalmente
não
Search.
. . . . . . . . . entrar
. . . . .em
. . “CLEAR
. . . . . . .ALL”
. . To
.To
.e.listen
20
iangle
lecer o efeito estéreo.
Use
manualor
orautomatic
automatictuning
tuningininstep
step2.2.
. . aremote
.remote
. . . . . control
.control
. .não
. . . pressione
.to
. select
.select
. . . . .qualquer
. . . �.�.Use
. 20manual
memória,
ce of Press
ote
ote
E
PressPR
PRdeseja
(�
(DD/Repeat
/E
))apagar
on
onthe
the
to
About
the
symbols
ng) the
�
Repeat
A-B
. . . already
. .for
.segundos,
. . instructions
. been
. . . . entered,
.entered,
. . . . .the
. “CLEAR
. �.FULL
.For
. 21manual
�
For
manualtuning,
tuning,press
pressTUN(-)
TUN(-)bbor
orTUN
TUN(+)
(+)BBon
on
IfIf
all
all
stations
stations
have
have
already
been
the
FULL
thepreset
preset
number
number
you
you
want.
want.
tecla.
Depois
de
alguns
a .exibição
• control
Melhorar
recepção
the
remotecontrol
repeatedly.
repeatedly.
� Time Search
.likely
. . .in
.to
.modo.
. .display
. . .harm
. . window
. . to
. . the
. . for
. unit
. .athe
. 21remote
message
message
will
will eappear
appear
in
the
display
window
for
athe
ALL”
apagará
mudará
a.the
Indicates
hazards
cause
Posicione melhor as antenas fornecidas .
� Marker
Search
.aa.remote
. . . . . number
.number
. . . . . will
.will
. . flash.
. . . . �.�.For
. 21automatic
moment
moment
and
and
then
then
preset
preset
flash.
Press
PressPROG./MEMO.
PROG./MEMO.
on
on
the
the
remote
control
control
For
automatictuning,
tuning,press
pressand
andhold
holdTUN(-)
TUN(-)bbor
or
itself
or other
material
damage.
� Zoom.
. . .preset
. . . . .number,
. . . . . .follow
. . . . .the
. . steps
.steps
. . . .5-6
.TUN
. as
21
To
To
change
change. the
the
preset
number,
follow
the
5-6
as (+)
again.
again.
CK
forabout
abouttwo
twoseconds
secondson
onthe
theremote
remote
TUN
(+)BBfor
Indicates
special
operating
Thestation
station
is
isstored.
stored.
Special
DVD
Features
. . .features
. . . . . .of. .this
. . .unit.
. . . . .control.
. 22
above.
above.
otas:
N ORThe
control.
�todas
Title
Menu
.store
. . . .other
. . estações
. . stations.
.stations.
. . . . já
. .estiverem
. . . . . . . sido
. . . 22
Se steps
em
as
as
Repeat
Repeat
steps
33to
to
66memórias
to
to
store
other
Indicates
tips
and
hints
for
making
the
task
easier.
� Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
gravadas,
a mensagem FULL aparecerá na janela do
pace
To
Toselect
selectaapreset
presetradio
radiostation
stationdirectly
directly
� Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Manufactured
under
license from
Dolby
“Dolby”,
display por um
momento
e então
umLaboratories.
número prefixado
You
Youcan
canuse
usethe
thenumber
numberbuttons
buttonson
onthe
theremote
remotecontrol
control
� Changing
the Audio
Channel
. . . . . . of. .Dolby
. . . . 22
“Pro Logic”,
and the double-D
symbol
are trademarks
totoselect
selectaapreset
presetradio
radiostation
stationdirectly.
directly.
piscará.
ParaConfidential
Mudar
oa. número
prefixado,
To
Totune
tuneLaboratories.
in
inaastation
station
with
with
weak
weak
signal
�
Subtitles
. .a
.Unpublished
. . . . .signal
. . .works.
. . . . Copyright
.siga
. . . os
. . passos
.1992. . . . 22
For
Forexample,
example,totolisten
listentotopreset
presetstation
station4,4,press
press44on
onthe
the
1997
DolbyAudio
Laboratories.
5-6 como
acima.
Press
PressTUNING
TUNING
or
orDiscs All
DVD
. . rights
.repeatedly
.repeatedly
. . reserved.
. . . . . in
.in.step
.step
. . .33. . . . . . . 22
remote
remotecontrol.
control.To
Tolisten
listentotopreset
presetstation
station19,
19,press
press11
under
license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
tototune
tuneininManufactured
the
thestation
stationmanually.
manually.
then
then99(within
(within33seconds).
seconds).
US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and
Introduction
Introduction
Operation
1
1
2
3
2
3
7
11
22
33
11
22
Operation
Operation
4
5
6
33
44
55
66
77
other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS
Surround”
arestations
registered trademarks of Digital Theater
To
Toclear
clearDigital
all
allthe
the
stored
stored
stations
For
Foryour
yourreference
reference
Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems,
Press
Pressand
and
hold
hold
PROG./MEMO.
PROG./MEMO.
for
forabout
abouttwo
twoseconds
seconds
Inc.
All rights
reserved.
��IfIfan
anFM
FMprogram
programisisnoisy
noisy
wner’s
30ALL”
and
and“CLEAR
“CLEAR
ALL”isisappeared
appearedininthe
thedisplay
displaywindow
window
d the
and
andthen
thenpress
pressPROG./MEMO.
PROG./MEMO.again,
again,the
thestations
stationsare
are
locaOTES ON COPYRIGHTS:
cleared.
cleared.
Press
PressMONO/ST.
MONO/ST.on
onthe
thefront
frontpanel
panelso
sothat
that
"STEREO"
"STEREO"disappears
disappearsininthe
thedisplay
displaywindow.
window.
29
29
CK
N OR
pace
wner’s
d the
loca-
dures
us radi-
open
OT
ter
such
cted to
ithin an
er
s
ay be
electric
iangle
ce of
ng)
the
OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK)
Introduction
Ajuste
do Sleep
Timer
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE
Safety
Precautions
. . . . . . .TO
. .QUALIFIED
. . . . . . . SERVICE
.........2
Introduction
REFER
SERVICING
Você
podeContents
ajustar
o aparelho
de DVD/CD
para desligar
Table
. .. .. .. ..PERSONNEL.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
SafetyofPrecautions
automaticamente
momento pré determinado.
Before
. . . em
. . .um
Table ofUse
Contents
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5
.3
1Before
Pressione
marcar
Playable
. .. .para
. .. .. ..flash
. 4an
Use Discs
. SLEEP
. . . .lightning
.. .. .. with
.. .. .a. arrowhead
..hora
.. .. .. desejada.
.. .. .. symbol
.. .. .. .. ..within
.. .. 4-5
This
• Precautions
O indicador
SLEEP
. . .. .. .. e..triangle
.o. ..tempo
.. .. ..is.. intended
..aparece
.. .. .. .. ..to..na
..alert
..janela
.. ..the
.. ..user
.do
equilateral
Playable
Discs
. .. .. .. 54
about
Notes
.. .. presence
.. .. .. .. .. .. .of
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .dangerous
display.on Discs
Precautions
. . .the
. ..uninsulated
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
voltage. within
.. .. product’s
.. .. ..do
.. .. SLEEP
.. enclosure
.. .. .. .. ..muda
.. ..that
.. ..na
.may
Notes
on
Discs
. .. .. .o. ..the
. .. .. .be
. 55
2 About
A cadaSymbols
acionamento,
tempo
of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric
About
the
symbols
Front
Panel
and
Rear .Panel
About
Symbols
.for
. . . instructions
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65
seguinte
ordem.
shock to. .persons.
Remote
Control
Overview
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76
Front
Panel
and
Rear
Panel
SLEEP
180
1501209080706050
Indicates
hazards
likely
to cause
harm to the unit
The
exclamation
Remote
Control
Overview
. . . within
. . . . an
. . equilateral
. . . . . . .triangle
...7
itself
or
other
material
damage.
40302010OFF .mark
is intended to alert the user about the presence of
Preparation
important
operating
and maintenance
(servicing)
Indicates special
otas:
Connections
.instructions
. . . .operating
. . . in. .the
. .features
. . . . . .of. accompanying
.this
. . unit.
. . . . . . 8-13
Preparation
instructions
the
•Connections
Você
pode
TV
Connections
.for
. .. .. task
. .. ..que
..8
product.
. conferir
. and
. . . hints
.. .. o..CAUTION
.tempo
.. ..making
.. .. ..restante
.. .. .the
.. antes
.. .. .easier.
.. .. ..o8-13
Indicates
tips
aparelho
de DVD/CD
se
desligue.
Optional
Equipment
RISK
TV
Connections
. . Connections
.OF
. .ELECTRIC
. . . . . . SHOCK
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98
DO
NOT
OPEN
WARNING:
TO
PREVENT
FIRE
OR
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
Manufactured
under
licenseO.from
Aerial
Connections
.Connections
. .Dolby
. . restante
. .Laboratories.
. . . . aparece
.. .. .. ..“Dolby”,
.. .. na
.. .. .janela
Pressione
SLEEP.
tempo
Optional
Equipment
. .. .. 10
.9
HAZARD,
DO
NOT
EXPOSE
PRODUCT
OR
“Pro Speaker
Logic”,
andSystem
the
double-D
symbol THIS
are. trademarks
ofTO
Dolby
Connection
. ..RAIN
Aerial
Connections
. . . TO
. . REDUCE
. . works.
. .. .. ..THE
.. .. ..RISK
.. .. .. .1992.. .11-12
. . 10
doMOISTURE.
display.
CAUTION:
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
Copyright
� Transmitter.
.OF
.rights
.ELECTRIC
. . reserved.
. . . . ..SHOCK
. . 11
System.All
Connection
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12
1997 Speaker
Dolby
Laboratories.
DOa
NOT
COVER
�
channel
Transmitter
.. .. .. .. .. ..space
.. .. 11
WARNING:
Do
not
� Changing
Transmitter.
. install
. REMOVE
. . .this
. .of.equipment
. .Theater
. . . (OR
. .inSystems,
.aBACK)
. confined
11
Manufactured
under
from
Digital
NOlicense
USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS
INSIDEInc.
as
a book
case
similar
unit. . . 5,978,762
�
Setting
a ID
of or
Transmitter
. . . . .. .. ..and
.. .. .. .. .. 11
US Pat.such
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
�No.
Changing
channel
of
11
REFERa
SERVICING
TOTransmitter
QUALIFIED SERVICE
other worldwide
patents issued
and pending. to
“DTS”
and “DTS
�
Connecting
PERSONNEL.
� Assembling
Setting
IDoand
of Transmitter
.do
.display
.the
. . Speakers
.Theater
.do
. . painel
. . . . 11
11
Digital
Surround”
area registered
trademarks
of. Digital
Esta função
mudará
brilho
da janela
�
Speaker
Connections.
. . . .Theater
. to
. . the
. .Systems,
.Speakers
. . . . . . . 12
Systems,
Copyright
1996,
Digital
� Inc.
Assembling
and 2000
Connecting
11
frontal,
quando
ligado. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Inc.
All rights
reserved.
Speaker
Positioning.
DIMMER
�
Speaker
. . arrowhead
. . . . . . . .symbol
. . . . within
. . . 12
ThisConnections.
lightning flash with
an
Pressione
DIMMER
repetidamente.
Before
. . ..triangle
. ..alert
equilateral
SpeakerOperation
Positioning.
.. .. .. .. .. is
.. ..intended
.. .. .. .. .. .to
.. .. .. the
.. .. ..user
.14-19
. . 13
OTES
ON COPYRIGHTS:
aboutfor
the
presence
Mini Operation
Glossary
Before
. .Audio
. . . . Stream
. . of
. .uninsulated
..&
. . Surround
. . . .dangerous
. . . . . 14-19
CAUTION:
voltage
be
,.broadcast
,. broadcast,
It is forbidden
Mode
. .by. .law
. .to. for
.copy
.within
.Audio
. .the
. Stream
.product’s
. . .show
..&
. enclosure
. . . . . .that
. . may
. . . 14
Mini
Glossary
Surround
Thisplay
DVD/CD
receiver
employs
a to
laser
system.
of sufficient
magnitude
constitute
a risk of electric
via cable,
in public,
or rent
copyrighted
material
without
Sound
Mode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
Mode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14
persons.
permission.
To ensure shock
propertouse
of this product, please read this owner’s
On-Screen
Display
.. .. it..temporariamente
.for
.. .. .. .reference.
.. .. .. ..de
..the
15
Pressione
MUTE
para
som
Sound
Mode
. .and
.eliminar
. retain
. .protection
. .. .future
. function
. .. .developed
. .. .. ..o.. Should
14
This
product
features
the
copy
manual
carefully
Initial
Settings
. . . . . . .signals
.contact
.an
. .. .equilateral
. .. .on
. ..service
. .. .. .triangle
16-19
by
Copy
protection
The
exclamation
On-Screen
Display
..mark
.. .. .. are
.within
.. ..recorded
.. .an
.some
.loca. 15
unit
require
maintenance,
authorized
seuMacrovision.
aparelho
de
DVD/CD.
discs.Initial
When
recording
and
is intended
of
� General
Operation
. ..the
.presence
. . 16
tion
(see
service
Settings
. procedure).
. .playing
. to. .alert
.. .the
..pictures
.. user
.. .. .. about
.. of
.. ..these
.. the
.. .. .discs
.. .. .. 16-19
on a VCR,
pictureimportant
noise.will
appear.
�
. .operating
. . . .. .. ..and
.. .. or
..maintenance
..carrying
.. .. .. .. .. out
.. .. .(servicing)
.. .. .. .. .. 16
Performing
controls,
adjustments,
� Language
General
Operation
.procedures
16
This product
incorporates
copyright
technology
that
instructions
in the protection
instructions
accompanying
the
�
. . .claims
. .. .. .. of
. .. .. .patents
.result
. .and
.hazardous
other
than
those
herein
may
� Display
Language
.specified
.. ..certain
.. .. .. .. .U.S.
.. .. .. .in
.. ..other
.. .. .16-17
. .radi16
is protected
by
method
product.
ation
exposure.
�
. .rights
. .. .. .. owned
. .. .. .. ..by.. .Macrovision
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Corporation
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-17
. . 17
intellectual
property
� Audio.
Display
.
.
Conecte
um plugue
de
fone
estéreo
(3.5mm)
no
conector
To
prevent
direct
exposure
to
laser
beam,
do
not
try
to
open
and other
rights
owners.
Use
of
this
copyright
protection
tech�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
WARNING:
TO
PREVENT
FIRE
OR
ELECTRIC
SHOCK
� Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PHONES.
nology
must
be authorized
Macrovision
and
the
enclosure.
laser
HAZARD,
DO
NOT
EXPOSE
�
. . Visible
. . . .by
.Control)
. . . radiation
. . THIS
. .. ..Corporation,
.PRODUCT
.. .. .. ..open.
.. .. ..TO
..DO
.. RAIN
..isNOT
.. .. ..OR
19
� Others
Lock
(Parental
.when
18
intended
foracústicas
home
and
otherautomaticamente
limited viewing usesdesligadas,
only unless quanSTARE
INTO
BEAM.
MOISTURE.
As caixas
� authorized
Others . .by.são
.Macrovision
. . . . . . . Corporation.
. . . . . . . . Reverse
. . . . . . . . . . 19
otherwise
CAUTION:
The
apparatus
should
not be
exposed
to water
do você
insere
osDo
fones
de
ouvido
(não
fornecidos).
engineering
or disassembly
is prohibited.
WARNING:
not
install
this
equipment
in
a confined
space
(dripping
splashing)
no objects
filled with liquids, such
as a or
book
or and
similar
unit.
DVDsuch
or vases,
Video
CDcase
Operation
. . apparatus.
. . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
as
should
be placed on. the
SERIAL
NUMBER:
The and
serialVideo
numberCD.
Playing
a DVD
. .. .. .. 19-22
. . 19
DVD
or
Video
CD
Operation
. is. located
. .. .. .. .. on
.. .. the
.. .. .back
of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available
General
Features
. requested
.Video
. . . . .CD.
.information
. . .. .. .. .. ..here
. .. ..and
Playing
a
DVD
and
.
.. .. .. .20-22
. . 19
to others.
You
should
record
CAUTION: This product may not be used outdoor, restricted to
retain
this
guide
asVideocassetes
atopermanent
purchase.
VocêGeneral
pode
usar
� Moving
another
. . 20
Features
. . . record
.TITLE/GROUP
. ou
. . outras
.of. your
. . . unidades
. . . .. .. .. ..conecta.. .. 20-22
indoor use
only.
Moving
CHAPTER/TRACK
20
das ao��AV
1, AV 2to
ou conector
Óptico. Veja .o.manual
Moving
toINanother
another
TITLE/GROUP
. .. .. .. .. ..da
20
ModelCAUTION:
No.
___________________________________
�
Slow
Motion.
. .adicional
. . .CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . na
. . .operação.
. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
� para
Moving
to another
20
unidade
informação
Serial This
No.
___________________________________
�
Picture
and
Frame-by-Frame
DVD/CD
� Still
Slow
Motion.
. .employs
. repetidamente
. . . . a. .laser
. . . system.
. .no
. .Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
20
Pressione
AUX
e receiver
D.INPUT
controle
Search.
. . .use
. . of
. .Frame-by-Frame
. . .product,
. . . . . please
. . . . .read
. . . this
. . .owner’s
. .. 20
To�
proper
this
�ensure
Stillselecionar
Picture
and
Playback
20
remoto
para
a
fonte
de
entrada
desejada.
manual
carefully
�
.. .. and
.. .. ..retain
.. .. .. ..it..for
.. .. future
.. .. .. .. reference.
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..Should
.. .. .. .. ..the
20
� Repeat
Search.
20
a cada
acionamento,
o. modo
unit
require maintenance,
�
A-B
.. .. .. ..contact
.da
.. ..função
.. ..an
.. ..authorized
..muda
.. .. .. .. na
.. ..service
.seguinte
.. .. .. ..loca.. 21
� Repeat
Repeat
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
tion (see service procedure).
sucessão:
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Performing
controls,os
adjustments,
orde
carrying
out procedures
• AV 1:
por
selecionar
conectores
sinal
analógico
de
�
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Marker
Time
Search
21
other
than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radi�
. Search
. . (L/R)
. . . ..&.. .VÍDEO
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
AV1
AUDIO
IN
� Zoom.
Marker
. .. .. .. .. ..IN
21
ation
exposure.
DVD
Features
..conectores
.. .. ..beam,
.. .. .. ..do
..do
..not
..sinal
.. .try
..open
.. .. 22
Zoom.
. .selecionar
. exposure
. . . . . . .os
.to.. laser
. .. .to
.digital
21
• AVSpecial
1To�OPT:
para
prevent
direct
� enclosure.
Title
Menu
. . .INlaser
. .&. OPTICAL
..radiation
.. .. .. .. .. ..when
.. .. ... .open.
.. .. .. 22
the
Visible
Special
DVD
Features
. .. .. .. .DO
. .. ..NOT
22
2 VÍDEO
óptico
AV1
IN
STARE
INTO
BEAM.
� Disc
Menu
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
Title
Menu
• AV 2:� por
selecionar
os conectores do sinal analógico 22
�
the
.. .. .. .. .. ..to
.. ..water
.. .. .. 22
� Changing
Disc
Menu
. . Audio
. . . for
. should
. Language
. .instructions
. . be
. . exposed
22
About
the
symbols
CAUTION:
The apparatus
AV2
AUDIO
(L/R)
&
VÍDEO
IN. ..not
�
the
Channel
. .. ..with
.. .. ..liquids,
.. .. .. .. ..such
.. 22
(dripping
or splashing)
and no
objects filled
� Changing
Changing
the Audio
Audio
Language
22
• AV Indicates
2as��OPT:
por
selecionar
digital
hazards
likely
unit
vases,
should
on
the
Subtitles
. the
.be. .placed
. . .Conector
.to
.Channel
.cause
. . .apparatus.
.do
.harm
..sinal
.. .. ..to
.. ..the
.. .. ..óptico
.. .. .. 22
Changing
Audio
22
Mute
Usando o conector do Fone
Operation
Operation
Selecionando a Fonte Entrada
itself
or other
material
de
AV2
DVD
Audio
Discs
..damage.
.. .. .. .. ..IN.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
�VÍDEO
Subtitles
. IN
. . &.. ..ÓPTICO
22
CK
N OR
•
CAUTION:
This
product
DVD
Audio
Discs
. . .may
. . .not
.features
. be
. . used
. . .of.outdoor,
.this
. . unit.
. . restricted
. . . . . 22to
Indicates
special
operating
otas:
indoor use only.
A
função
de
entrada
Óptica
só
está
disponível
quanIndicates tips and hints for making the task easier.
pace
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
“Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 19921997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
do as frequências de amostragem das outras unidades
forem
~ 96kHz.
Audio
CD 32
and
MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playing
an Audio
CDselecionar
and
MP3/WMA
•Audio
Você
pode
de
CDtambém
and
MP3/WMA
Disc
.a. fonte
. . . . Disc
. . entrada
. . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
� Pause
. .a. tecla
. .CD
. . FUNC.
.and
. . .MP3/WMA
. no
. . .painel
. . . . frontal.
.Disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
pressionando
Playing
an .Audio
23
�
� Moving
Pause .to. .another
. . . . . . Track
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Repeat
Moving Track/All/Off.
to another Track
23
�
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Search.
Repeat Track/All/Off.
23
JPEG�Disc
Operation
Search.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
23
Viewing
JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
JPEG
Disc aOperation
24
� SlideaShow
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Viewing
JPEG. disc
24
�
Picture
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
� Still
Slide
Show do
Você pode
desfrutar
som estereofônico víndo da fonte24
�
to another
� Moving
Still Picture
. . . . . file
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
original
digital
sem
qualquer
distorção
About
the
symbols
�
rotate
.file
. . instructions
.. .. .. .. ..de
.. ..sinal.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
� To
Moving
topicture.
another.for
24
Cada acionamento
da
tecla
XTS
durante
o
modo
de
canal
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
� To rotate
picture.
. . . . .harm
. . . .to. .the
. . .unit
. . . 24
Indicates
hazards
likely. .to. .cause
2,
osRepeat
ajustesother
mudam
na ordem
Tracks.
Programmed
Playback
. . . .seguinte.
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
itself or Programmed
material damage.
a Track
XTSErasing
- 1  XTS
- 2 from
XTSProgramme
- 3  NORMAL...
Repeat
Programmed
Tracks.
. . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Erasing
Complete
Programme
List
Indicatesthe
operating
features of
this. .unit.
Erasing
aspecial
Track
from
Programme
List
. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
DivX
Disc Operation
. . . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
the Complete
25
Indicates
tips. and
Dicas
Speaker
Setup
. . . hints
. .. .. ..for
.. .. making
.. .. .. .. .. ..the
.. .. .task
.. .. .. .. .. .. 27
DivX
Disc
Operation
. .. .. ..easier.
26
Additional
Information
.. .. ..grave
.. .. .. .. .fraco
.. .. ..relação
.. .. .. .. .. 28
•Speaker
XTS-1: Para
filme
à
Setup
. . .com
. . . o. ..som
. .. .. .. ..com
27
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
Last
Condition
Memory
..are
.. .. .trademarks
..of.. som
.Dolby
.. 28
Additional
Information
. . ..a.. sensibilidade
. .. .. .. .. .. ..do
. .. .. ..do
28
música
geral.
Ele
reforça
“Pro
Logic”,
and
the double-D
symbol
Screen
Saver
. .Memory
. .Unpublished
. . . . .. .. .. ..works.
.. .. .. .. Copyright
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..1992.. .. .. .. 28
Laboratories.
Confidential
Last
Condition
28
woofer
para lhe
satisfazer.
1997Controlling
Dolby Laboratories.
the. TV
.. .. .. ..reserved.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Screen
Saver
. . All
. .. rights
28
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Manufactured
under
license
Controlling
the
TV .from
. . .Digital
. . . . Theater
. . . . . .Systems,
. . . . . .Inc.
. . . 28
• XTS
2:
No
modo
2
CH
BYPASS,
cria
um
alto
efeito
de
US
Pat.
No.
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
5,978,762
and
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
.. .. .. .. .. 29
Operation
with
. . . . .pending.
. .. .. .. .. .“DTS”
. .. .. .. .and
. .. .. “DTS
29
other exibição,
worldwide patents
issued and
reproduzindo
o. .som
Listening
the
radiostations
. trademarks
. . .. das
.. .. .of
.. Digital
.. .. .. .. acústicas
.Theater
Presetting
the
radio
. caixas
. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
29
Digital
Surround”toare
registered
traseiras
igual
Systems,
Inc. Copyright
Other
Functions.
.1996,
.das
. . 2000
..frontais,
.. .. ..Digital
.. .. .. .. Theater
.. .. .. .. .. .Systems,
Listening
to the.ao
radio
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
29
Inc. All
rightsTimer
reserved.
Sleep
Setting
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Dimmer
. . pode
. .Setting
. . operar
. . . .. .. com
.. .. .. ..ambos
.. .. .. .. ..XTS
.. .. .. ..- .1
.. .. .. .. 30
Sleep
Timer
. ..e.. XTS
30
• XTS
3: Você
OTES
Mute
.ON
. .. .COPYRIGHTS:
.. .. .. ..complementar
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..a..relativa
.. .. .. .. 30
Dimmer
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..e..pode
30
- 2 simultaneamente
It is forbidden
law to copy, broadcast,
Using
Jack
.. .show
.. .. .., .broadcast
.. .. .. .. .. .. 30
About
the
Mute
.the
.by. Headphone
.symbols
. .do. .pico
. . . de
. .for
. . . instructions
.no
. woofer
. .. .no
. .. ..modo
30
degradação
som
via cable,
play in public,
or rent
copyrighted
material
without XTS
Selecting
Input Source
Using thethe
Headphone
Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
permission.
- 2. (Excellent
Indicates
hazards
likely
to cause
the unit
True
Sound)
.. ..harm
.. .. .. developed
.. .to
Selecting
the Input
Source
. .. ..function
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
ThisXTS
product
the
copy
protection
itself orfeatures
other
XTS
. Copy
. . . material
.protection
.True
. . . .Sound)
.damage.
.signals
. . . .. are
.. .. .recorded
by Macrovision.
XTS pro
(Excellent
. .. .. .. .. .. .on
. .. .some
. .. .. .. .. 30
30
discs.XTS
When
recording
and
playing
the
pictures
of
these
discs
pro . special
. . . . . .operating
. . . . . . .features
. . . . . . of
. .this
. . .unit.
. . . . . . 30
Indicates
otas:
XTS (Verdadeiro Som Excelente)
on a VCR, picture noise will appear.
Reference
• O modo
XTS
- 2 é temporariamente
quando
This
product
incorporates
copyright
protectioninválido
technology
that
Indicates
tips and
hints. for
Language
List
. .making
. . U.S.
. . . the
. . . task
. easier.
. . other
. . . . 31
Reference
is
protected
byCode
method
claims
of .certain
patents
and
muda
o canal
de 2.1
CH. .para
5.1
CH,
e fica. .novamente
Country
Code
List
. .owned
.. .. .. ..by
.. ..Macrovision
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Corporation
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31
Language
List
intellectual
property
rights
Manufactured
under
license
from
Dolby
Laboratories.
“Dolby”, 31
disponível
aoCode
mudar
2.1
CH.
Troubleshooting
. .para
. .. .protection
. .. .. .. .. ..of
and
other
rights
Use
Country
Code
.. .. .. of
..symbol
..this
.. .. copyright
.. ..are
.. .. .trademarks
..tech..Dolby
.. .32-33
. . 31
“Pro
Logic”,
andowners.
theList
double-D
nology
must
be
authorized
by
Macrovision
Corporation,
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. ..is32-33
. . 34
Laboratories.
Confidential
Unpublished
works.
Copyright
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..and
.. .1992intended
for Laboratories.
home and other
viewing uses only unless
1997
Dolby
All limited
rights reserved.
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
XTS Pro
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
engineering
disassembly
is prohibited.
US
Pat. No. or
5,451,942
5,956,674,
5,974,380,
and para
A qualidade
de som exclusiva
LG
cria um5,978,762
ótimo som
other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS
Digital
Surround” are
registered
trademarks
of
Digital uma
Theater
você
reproduzir
o
perfeito
som
original
e
sentir
fonte
SERIAL NUMBER:
The serial
is located
on the
back
Systems,
Inc. Copyright
1996,number
2000 Digital
Theater
Systems,
of
This
number is unique to this unit and not available
dethis
som
vivo.
Inc.
Allunit.
rights
reserved.
to others. You should record requested information here and
retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase.
OTES
ON COPYRIGHTS:
Cada
acionamento
da tecla XTS PRO, os ajustes mudam
It
forbidden
by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast
Model
No. ___________________________________
nais ordem
seguinte.
via
cable,
in public, or rent copyrighted material without
Serial
No. play
___________________________________
permission.
This
productON
features
the copy protection
function developed
XTS-PRO
XTS-PRO
OFF
by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some
discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs
on a VCR, picture noise will appear.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that
is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back
of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available 31
to others. You should record requested information here and
retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase.
Introduction
Introduction
iangle
nce of
ing)
the
Outras funções
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK
Operação
ithin an
er
s
ay be
electric
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Códigos de Idiomas
Language Codes
Use a lista para entrar com o idioma desejado para os ajustes iniciais:
Introduction
Introduction
Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23
Contents
. . . . . .Disc
. . . .Menu.
................3
. . . . . . . Table
. .Disc
23 of
Audio,
Disc Subtitle,
Language
� Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Use . . . . . . .Codes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Disc . . . Before
. . 23
Idioma
Código
Idioma
Código
Idioma
Código
Idioma
Código
Language
Language
Code
Language
Code
� Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playable Discs . Code
. . . . . . . . . .Language
. . . . . . . . . . . . .Code
...4
. . . . . . . . . 23
Abkhazian
6566
Finnish
7073
Macedonian
7775
Slovenian
8376
Use
this
list
to
input
your
desired
language
for
the
following
initial
settings:
�
Repeat Track/All/Off.
. .Somali
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8379
. . . . 23
Precautions . . . .6565
. . . . . . . . .French
. . . . . . . . . . . . .7082
...5
. . . . . . . . . 23
Afar
Malagasy
7771
Audio,
Disc Subtitle,
� Search. . . 7783
. . . . . . . . . .Spanish
. . . . . . . . . . . . 6983
. . . . 23
Notes
on Discs
.6570
. . . . .Disc
. . . .Menu.
. . . . . . . . . . . . .7176
...5
Afrikaans
Galician
. . . . . . . . . Disc
23
Malay
JPEG
Disc Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8385
. . . . 24
About
Symbols .8381
. . . . . . . . .Georgian
. . . . . . . . . . . . .7565
...5
Albanian
Malayalam
7776
. . . . . . . . . 23
Language
Code
Language
Code
Language
Code . . . . . .Sudanese
Language
Code
Ameharic
6577
Maltese
7784
Viewing a JPEG
disc . . . . .Swahili
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8387
.8376
. . . 24
Panel and Rear
Panel . .German
. . . . . . . . . . . . .6869
...6
Abkhazian
6566
Finnish
7073
Macedonian
7775
Slovenian
. . . . . . . Front
. . 24
Arabic
6582
Maori
Afar Control Overview
6565
French
7082
Malagasy
7771
Somali
� Slide Show7773
. . . . . . . . .Swedish
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8386
.8379
. . . 24
. . . .Greek
. . . . . . . . . . . . .6976
...7
. . . . . . . Remote
. . 24
Armenian
7289
Greenlandic
7576
Marathi
7782
Tagalog
8476
Afrikaans
6570
Galician
7176
Malay
� Still Picture7783
. . . . . . . . .Spanish
. . . . . . . . . . . . .6983
. . . 24
. . . . . . . . . 24
Assamese
6583
Guarani
7178
Moldavian
7779
Tajik
8471
Albanian
8381
Georgian
7565
Malayalam
7776
Sudanese
� Moving to another
file .Tamil
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8465
.8385
. . . 24
. . . . . . . Preparation
. . 24
Azerbaijani
6590
Gujarati
7185
Mongolian
7778
Ameharic
6577
German
6869
Maltese
7784
Swahili
8387
� To rotate picture.
. . . . .Tatar
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8484
.8386
. . . 24
. . . . . . . Connections
. . 24
Bashkir
Nauru
7865
Arabic
6582
6976
Maori
7773
Swedish
. . . . . 6665
. . . . . . . . . Hausa
.Greek
. . . . . . . . . . . . 7265
. 8-13
Programmed
Playback
. . . . .Telugu
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8469
.8476
. . . 25
Basque
6985
Hebrew
7387
Nepali
7869
. . . . . . . . . 24
Armenian
7289
Greenlandic
7576
Marathi
7782
Tagalog
TV Connections
. . . . . . . . .Hindi
. . . . . . . . . . . . .7273
...8
Bengali;
Bangla
6678
Norwegian
7879
Thai
Repeat Programmed
. . . . . . . . . . . 8472
.8471
. . . 25
Assamese
6583
Guarani
7178
Moldavian
7779 Tracks.
Tajik
. . . . . . . . . 25
Optional Equipment
Connections
. . . . . . . . .7285
...9
Bhutani
6890
Hungarian
Oriya
Tibetan
Azerbaijani
6590
Gujarati
7185
Mongolian
7778
Tamil List . . . . 6679
Erasing a Track7982
from Programme
.8465
. . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 25
Aerial
. . . . . . . .Icelandic
. . . . . . . . . . . . .7383
. . 10
Bihari
6672
Panjabi
8065
Tigrinya
BashkirConnections
6665
Hausa
7265
Nauru
7865
Tatar
Erasing the Complete
Programme
List . . . 8473
.8484
. . . 25
t . . . . . . . . 25
Breton
Pashto,
Pushto
8083
Tonga
8479
Speaker
Connection Indonesian
.Hebrew
. . . . . . . . . . . . 7378
11-12
Basque System6682
6985
7387
Nepali
7869
Telugu
8469
DivX
Disc Operation
. . . . . . .Turkish
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8482
. . . . 26
st . . . . . . . 25
Bulgarian
Persian
7065
� Transmitter.
.6678
. . . . . . . . .Interlingua
. . . . . . . . . . . . .7365
. . 11
Bengali;
Bangla 6671
Hindi
7273
Norwegian
7879
Thai
8472
Speaker
Setup . . 8076
. . . . . . . . . .Turkmen
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8475
.6679
. . . 27
. . . . . . . . . 26
Burmese
7789
Irish
Polish
Bhutani
6890
Hungarian . . . . . .7165
7285
Oriya
7982
Tibetan
� Changing a channel
of Transmitter
. . 11
Additional
Information
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 28
Byelorussian
6669
Italian
7384
Portuguese
8084
Twi
8487
. . . . . . . . . 27
Bihari
6672
Icelandic
7383
Panjabi
8065
Tigrinya
8473
� Setting a ID of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
Cambodian
7577
Japanese
7465
Quechua
8185
Last Condition
Memory
. . .Ukrainian
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8575
.8479
. . . 28
Breton
6682
Indonesian
7378
Pashto,
Pushto
8083
Tonga
. . . . . . . . . 28
� Assembling and
Connecting
to the Speakers
11
Catalan
6765
Javanese
7487
Rhaeto-Romance
Bulgarian
6671
Interlingua
7365
Persian
7065
Turkish
Screen Saver . 8277
. . . . . . . . . .Urdu
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8582
.8482
. . . 28
. . . . . . . . . 28
�
Speaker
Connections.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
Chinese
9072
Kannada
7578
Rumanian
Burmese
7789
Irish
7165
Polish
8076
Turkmen
Controlling the 8279
TV . . . . . . .Uzbek
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8590
.8475
. . . 28
. . . . . . . Speaker
. . 28
Corsican
6779
Kashmiri
7583
Russian
8285
Vietnamese
8673
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
Byelorussian
6669
Italian
7384
Portuguesewith Radio
8084 . . . . . .Twi
Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8679
.8487
. . . 29
. . . . . . . Before
. . 28
Croatian
Samoan
8377
Volapük
Operation .7282
. . . . . . . . . Kazakh
.Japanese
. . . . . . . . . . . . 7575
14-19
Cambodian
7577
7465
Quechua
8185
Ukrainian
8575
Presetting the radio
stationsWelsh
. . . . . . . . . . . . 6789
. . . . 29
. . . . . . . . . 29
Czech
6783
Kirghiz
7589
Sanskrit
8365
Catalan
6765
Javanese
7487
Rhaeto-Romance
8277
Urdu
8582
Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround
Listening
radio . . . . .Wolof
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8779
.8590
. . . 29
Danish
6865
Korean
7579
Scots
Gaelic to the7168
. . . . . . . . . 29
Chinese
Rumanian
8279
Uzbek
Mode
. . . . . . . . .9072
. . . . . . . . . Kannada
. . . . . . . . . . . . .7578
. . 14
Dutch
7876
Kurdish
7585
Serbian
Other
Functions. 8382
. . . . . . . . . .Xhosa
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8872
.8673
. . . 30
Corsican
6779
Kashmiri
7583
Russian
8285
Vietnamese
. . . . . . . . . 29
Sound
Mode . . .6978
. . . . . . . . .Laothian
. . . . . . . . . . . . .7679
. . 14
English
Serbo-Croatian
8372
Yiddish
7473
Sleep Timer Setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . .8679
. . . 30
Croatian
7282
Kazakh
7575
Samoan
8377 . . . . . .Volapük
. . . . . . . . . 30
On-Screen
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
Esperanto
6979
Latin
7665
Shona
8378
Yoruba
8979
Czech
6783
Kirghiz
7589
Sanskrit
Dimmer . . . . . 8365
. . . . . . . . . .Welsh
. . . . . . . . . . . . .6789
. . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30
Estonian
Initial
. . . . . . . . . Latvian,
.Korean
. . . . . Lettish
. . . . . . . 7686
16-19
Sindhi
8368
Zulu
9085
DanishSettings . .6984
6865
7579
Scots
Gaelic
7168
Mute
. . . . . . . 8373
. . . . . . . . . .Wolof
. . . . . . . . . . . . .8779
. . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30
Faroese
7079
Singhalese
� General Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . .7678
. . 16
Dutch
7876 . . . . .Lingala
Kurdish
7585
Serbian
8382
Xhosa
8872
Using the Headphone
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30
Fiji
Slovak
8375
English
6978
Laothian
7679
Serbo-Croatian
8372
Yiddish
7473
� Language . .7074
. . . . . . . . .Lithuanian
. . . . . . . . . . . . .7684
. . 16
Selecting the Input
. . . . . . . . . . . . .8979
. . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30
Esperanto
Shona
8378Source .Yoruba
� Display . . . . 6979
. . . . . . . . . .Latin
. . . . . . . . . . . . 7665
16-17
XTS (Excellent 8368
True Sound)Zulu
. . . . . . . . . . . . .9085
. . . 30
Estonian
6984
Latvian, Lettish
7686
Sindhi
. . . . . . . . . 30
� Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Country
Codes
XTS pro . . . . . 8373
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Faroese
7079
Lingala
7678
Singhalese
. . . . . . . . . 30
Control) . Lithuanian
. . . . . . . . . . . . .7684
. . 18
Fiji� Lock (Parental
7074
Slovak
8375
. . . . . . . . . 30
� Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Reference
Choose a country code from this list.
Language
Code List
. . . . . .Country
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Code
. . . 31
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country Codes
Operation
Country
. . . . . . . .Saudi
. . . .Arabia
. . . . . . . . . . SA
. . . 31
. . . . . . . Escolha
. . Afghanistan
31 um país da lista.
AF
Ethiopia
ET
Malaysia Code ListMY
DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Troubleshooting
. .MV
. . . . . . . Senegal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SN
32-33
AR
Fiji
FJ
Maldives
. . . . . . . .Introduction
. Argentina
31
Choose
aacountry
code
from this .list.
Playing
DVD and
.. 19
Specifications
. . . MX
. . . . . .Disc
. .Singapore
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SG
. . . 34
Australia
Mexico CD and MP3/WMA
Audio
23
Safety
Precautions
.AU
.Video
. . . . .CD.
. Finland
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. FI
.2
. . . . . . . 32-33
General
Features.Code
. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..France
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22
Monaco
MC
Slovak
SK
Country
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
Playing
an Audio
CD and MP3/WMA
Disc .Código
.Code
. . . 23
of Contents
.AT
.. .. .País
.FR
..3
País
Código
Código
País
Código
PaísRepublic
. . . . . . . .Table
. Austria
34
� Moving to another
. 4-5
20
Belgium
Mongolia
SI. . 23
Afghanistan
AF
Ethiopia
Malaysia
MY
Saudi
� Pause . . . .MN
. . . . . . . .Slovenia
. . . . Arabia
. . . . . . . . . . .SA
Before
Use . . . . . . . BE
. . . .TITLE/GROUP
. . . .Germany
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..DE
.ET
� Moving to another
.. 20
Bhutan
Morocco
MA
South
Argentina
AR
Fiji
FJ
Maldives
MV
Senegal
� Moving to another
Track
. .Africa
. . . . . . . . . . ZA
.SN
. . 23
Playable
Discs . . .BT
. . . CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . . Great
. . . . Britain
. . . . . . . .. .. .. ..GB
.4
Bolivia
Nepal
NP
South
Korea
KR
� Slow Motion. .BO
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. Greece
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..GR
.. 20
Australia
AU
Finland
FI
Mexico
MX
Singapore
SG
� Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Precautions
. . . . .BR
.5
Brazil
Greenland
GL
Netherlands
NL
Spain
ES
Austria
ATFrame-by-Frame
France
FR
Monaco
MC
Slovak Republic
SK
� Still Picture and
Playback
.
20
�
Search. . . . AN
. . . . . . . .Sri
. .Lanka
. . . . . . . . . . . . LK
.SI. . 23
Notes on Discs . .KH
. . . . . . . Germany
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DE
..5
Cambodia
Dutch
Antilles
Belgium
Mongolia
MN
Slovenia
� Search. . . . . .BE
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. Islands
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..HM
.. 20
JPEG
Disc Operation
. . . . Africa
. . . . . . . . . . SE
.ZA
. . 24
About
Symbols . .CA
.5
Canada
Hong
Kong
HK
New
Zealand
NZ
Bhutan
Morocco
MA . . . . .Sweden
South
� Repeat . . . . .BT
. . . . . . . Great
. . . . .Britain
. . . . . . . . . .GB
. 20
Viewing a JPEGNG
disc . . . .Switzerland
. . . . Korea
. . . . . . . . . . CH
.KR
. . 24
Chile
CL
Nigeria
Front
Panel and Rear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HU
..6
Bolivia
BOPanel . Hungary
Greece
GR
Nepal
NP
South
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
China
CN
Norway
� Slide Show NO
. . . . . . . .Taiwan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . TW
.ES
. . 24
Brazil Control Overview
BR
Greenland
GL
Netherlands
NL
Spain
Remote
. . . India
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IN
..7
� Time Search .CO
. . . . . . . Indonesia
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HM
. 21
Colombia
ID
Oman
Cambodia
KH
Islands
Dutch�Antilles
AN
Sri
Still Picture OM
. . . . . . . .Thailand
. . Lanka
. . . . . . . . . . . . TH
.LK
. . 24
� Marker Search
. . . . . . . Israel
. . . . Kong
. . . . . . . . . . .HK
. 21
Congo
CG
IL
Pakistan
PK
Canada
CA
Hong
New Zealand
NZ
Sweden
� Moving to another
file Turkey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR
.SE
. . 24
Preparation
� Zoom.
. . . . . .CR
. . . . . . . Italy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HU
. 21
Costa
Rica
IT
Panama
PA
Chile
CL
Hungary
Nigeria
NG . . . .Uganda
Switzerland
CH
� To rotate picture.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG
. . . 24
Connections
. . .Features
. . .HR
. . . .. .. .. .. .Jamaica
8-13
Croatia
Paraguay
PY
Ukraine
UA
China
CN
India
IN
Norway
NO
Taiwan
TW
Special DVD
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..JM
. 22
Programmed
Playback
. . . .United
. . . . States
. . . . . . . . . . US
. . . 25
Czech
Republic
CZ
Japan
JP
Philippines
PH
Colombia
Oman
OM
Thailand
TH
TV� Connections
.8
Title Menu . . .CO
. . . . . . . Indonesia
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID
. 22
Repeat Programmed
. . . . . . . . . . . . UY
.TR
. . 25
Denmark
Poland
PL
Uruguay
Congo
CG
Israel
IL
Pakistan
PK Tracks.
Turkey
Optional
Equipment
.9
� Disc Menu
. . .DK
. .Connections
. . . . . Kenya
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .KE
. 22
Erasing a Track PT
from
Programme
List . . . . . UZ
. . . 25
Ecuador
EC
Kuwait
KW
Portugal
Uzbekistan
Costa
Rica
CR
Italy
IT
Panama
PA
Uganda
UG
Aerial
Connections
. . . . .Language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
10
� Changing
the Audio
Erasing the Complete
Programme
.UA
. . 25
Egypt
EG
Libya
LY
Romania
RO
Vietnam
Croatia
HR
Jamaica
JM
Paraguay
PY
Ukraine List . . . . VN
Speaker
System
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12
� Changing
theConnection
Audio
Channel
.LU
. 22
El
Salvador
SV
Luxembourg
Russian
Federation
RU
DivX
Disc
Operation
. . . . .States
. . . . . . . . . ZW
.US
. . 26
Czech
Republic
CZ
Japan
JP
Philippines
PH . . . . . .Zimbabwe
United
Transmitter.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
�
Subtitles
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
Denmark
DK
Kenya
KE
Poland Setup . . . PL
Speaker
. . . . . . . .Uruguay
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . UY
. . . 27
�
Changing
a
channel
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
DVD
Audio
Discs
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22
Ecuador
EC
Kuwait
KW
Portugal
PT . . . .Uzbekistan
Additional
Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .UZ
. . 28
� Setting a ID ofEG
Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . . . . .LY
. 11
Egypt
Libya
Romania
RO
Last Condition Memory
. .Vietnam
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VN
. . 28
� Assembling and
to the Speakers
El Salvador
SVConnecting
Luxembourg
LU11
Russian Federation RU
Zimbabwe
ZW
Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
� Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
. . 28
Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
32
Before Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31. 29
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Reference
Reference
Introduction
Áudio
disco,
Audio
CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety
Precautions
. do
. . disco
.desired
. . . .e.Menu
. . . . do
. . .disco
.for
. . the
. . .following
..2
Usedo
this
list toLegenda
input .your
language
initial settings:
Introduction
Códigos de Países
Resolvendo problemas
• O aparelho de DVD/CD fica próximo a TV. • Distancie a sua TV dos equipamentos de áudio
33
Referência
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Introduction
Sintoma
Correção
Playing
an Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Table
Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Causa
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . . Disc
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
SafetyofPrecautions
� Pause
.Audio
. . . . .CD
. . .and
. . .MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . . .Disc
. . . . . .. .. .. 23
Before
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5
Playing
an
23
Table ofUse
Contents
.3
• Conecte o cabo de força com firmeza na. .tomada
�
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playable
. ..cabo
.4
Sem
energia.
� Moving
Pause .to. .another
23
Before
Use Discs
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .•. .O
.. .. .. ..de
.. .. força
.. .. .. .. está
.. .. .. ..desconectado.
.. .. .. .. 4-5
da parede. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
�
Precautions
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54
� Repeat
Moving Track/All/Off.
to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playable Discs
EstáNotes
ligado,
�
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
on mas
Discs
� Search.
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
23
Precautions
. o. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
• Insira um
disco. (verifique se o indicador DVD ou,
JPEG�Disc
Operation
About
Symbols
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..disco
.. .. .. ..está
.. .. .. inserido.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
aparelho
Search.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
23
Notesde
onDVD/CD
Discs .. .. .. ..•..Nenhum
CD
de
Áudio
esteja
aceso)
Viewing
JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Front
Panel
and Rear
JPEG
Disc aOperation
24
Symbols
. . .Panel
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65
nãoAbout
funciona.
� SlideaShow
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Remote
Control
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76
Viewing
JPEGo. disc
24
Front Panel
and Overview
Rear Panel
• Selecione
modo
de entrada de vídeo apropriado
�
Picture
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
• A .TELEVISÃO
� Still
Slide
Show
24
Remote Control Overview
. . . . . . . . .não
. . . foi
. . ajustada
. . . . . 7 para
na
TV,
para
que
a
imagem
do
DVD
apareça
na
�
to another
receber o sinal de saída do DVD.
� Moving
Still Picture
. . . . . file
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
Preparation
tela.
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connections
Sem imagem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Preparation
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
� To
rotate picture.
. . Vídeo
. . . . .com
. . . firmeza
. . . . . .nos
. . . . . 24
• Conecte
o cabo de
TV Connections
. .. .. .está
. .. .. ..conectado
. . 8 com
Connections
. . . . . .. .. .. •.. O
.. ..cabo
.. .. .. ..vídeo
.. .. .. .. .não
.. .. 8-13
Repeat Programmed
Programmed
Playback Tracks.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Optional
Equipment
conectores.
TV Connections
. . Connections
.firmeza.
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98
Erasing
a Track from Programme
Repeat Programmed
Tracks. . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Aerial
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10
Optional
Equipment. .Connections
.9
Erasing
the
Programme List
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Erasing
a Track
25
• Ligue
aComplete
TV.from Programme
Speaker
System Connection
Aerial Connections
. .•.A. .TV
. . está
.. .. .. ..desligada.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12
. . 10
DivX
Disc Operation
. . . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
the Complete
25
� Transmitter.
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12
. . 11
Speaker
System. Connection
Speaker
Setup
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
DivX
Operation
26
equipamento
de Disc
• Selecione
o modo de entrada correto do receptor
�
a channel
.. 11
� Changing
Transmitter.
. . . .• .O. .of
. Transmitter
. . . . . . . . conectado
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. com
11 o cabo
Additional
Information
Speaker Setup
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
27
�
Setting
a
ID
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
de
Áudio,
afim
de
que
você
possa
ouvir
o
aparelho
Áudio
não
foi
ajustado
para
receber
a
saída
� Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
Last Condition
Memory
Additional
Information
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
�
Assembling
and
Connecting
to
the
Speakers
11
� Setting a ID of Transmitter
do DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DVD/CD.
Screen
Saver . .Memory
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Lastde
Condition
28
�
Connections.
. . . . . to
. . the
. . .Speakers
. . . . . . . 12
� Speaker
Assembling
Connecting
11
Controlling
the. TV
Sem som
ou nível deand
Screen Saver
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
• Os cabos
conectados
• Conecte
o cabo. de
áudio
com
firmeza
nos
� Speaker Connections.
. . . . de
. . Áudio
. . . . .não
. . . estão
. . . 12
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
som muitoPositioning.
baixo. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19
Before
SpeakerOperation
. . 13
com firmeza.
conectores.
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
Operation
with
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
29
Mini Operation
Glossary for. .Audio
Before
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . 14-19
Listening
theradio
radiostations
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
Presettingtothe
29
Mode
. . . . . . . for
. . .Audio
. . •. O
. Stream
. equipamento
.....&
. . Surround
. . . de
. . som
. . . .está
. . 14
Mini Glossary
desligado.
• Liguetoothe
equipamento.
Other
Functions.
. radio
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Listening
29
Sound
Mode . Mode
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14
14
Sleep
Timer Setting
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
On-Screen
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15
Sound
Mode Display
. . . . . .•..O
14
Dimmer
. . . .Setting
. . .por
. . ..um
.. .. novo.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
cabo de áudio está danificado
• Substitua-o
Sleep
Timer
30
Initial
SettingsDisplay
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19
On-Screen
. . 15
Mute
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Dimmer
30
� General
Operation
. . 16
A imagem
da reproduInitial
Settings
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19
Using
Mute• Limpe
.the
. . Headphone
. .o. disco.
. . . . . . .Jack
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
•. O. .disco
está
sujo.
�
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ção é �ruim.
Selecting
Input Source
Using thethe
Headphone
Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
� Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
XTS
(Excellent
TrueSource
Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Selecting
the
30
�
. . 17
• Insira
umInput
disco.
� Audio.
Display. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. •.. Nenhum
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..disco
.. .. .. ..inserido.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-17
XTS
. . . . . .True
. . . .Sound)
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
XTS pro
(Excellent
30
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
� Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
XTS• pro
. . um
. . . disco
. . . . reproduzível.
. . . . . . . . . . (Confira
. . . . . . o. .tipo
. . .de
. 30
�
. . . . . . .Control)
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19
insira
� Others
Lock (Parental
18 inserido.
Reference
• Um disco não reproduzível está
disco, sistema de cor e código Regional.)
� Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Language
Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Reference
Operation
Country
Code
List
. . .. .. com
.. .. .. ..o..lado
.. .. .. .de
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .para
Language
Code
. .. ..reprodução
. .. 31
31
•
Coloque
oList
disco
DVD
or Video CD Operation
. . . .é.colocado
. . . . . . .de
. . cabeça
. 19-22para Troubleshooting
Operation
• O disco
baixo.
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33
Countrybaixo.
Code List
. . 31
Playing
a DVD
Video CD.
. . 19
DVD
or Video
CD and
Operation
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
General
. . . . .CD.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22
O aparelho
DVD/CD
Playing de
aFeatures
DVD
and. .Video
. . 19
• Coloque. .o.disco
Specifications
. . . . corretamente
. . . . . . . . . . na
. . bandeja
. . . . . . de
. . . 34
� Moving
to another
. .guia.
20
Features
. . •. O
.TITLE/GROUP
. disco
. . . . não
. . . está
. . . ..dentro
.. .. .. .. ..da
20-22
nãoGeneral
inicia
a reprodução
disco dentro da guia.
�
� Moving
Moving to
to another
another CHAPTER/TRACK
TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
�
Motion.
. . . •. O
.CHAPTER/TRACK
.disco
. . . . está
. . . .sujo.
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
• Limpe o disco.
� Slow
Moving
to another
20
�
and
� Still
SlowPicture
Motion.
. . Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
20
�
. . . and
. . . .Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . Playback
. . . . . . .. 20
� Search.
Still Picture
•. Um
menu está na. tela
de TV.20
• Pressione a tela SET UP para desligar o menu.
�
� Repeat
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
�
Repeat
A-B
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
� Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
�
Search
.. ..nível
.. .. .. ..de
.. ..censura
.. .. .. .. .. ..está
.. .. .. .definido.
� Time
Repeat
A-B . .. .. ..•..O
. .. .. 21
21
• Cancele a função ou mude o nível de censura.
�
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Marker
Time Search
21
�
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Zoom.
Marker. Search
21
Special
DVD
.. .. .plugues
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. estão
.. .. 22
• Limpe-os com um pano umidecido em álcool.
� Zoom.
. .Features
. . . . . .•.Os
. .. .. .. .. .. ..e..conectores
21 sujos.
� TitleDVD
MenuFeatures
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
Special
22
�
.. ..disco
.. .. .. ..está
.. .. .. .sujo.
� Disc
Title Menu
Menu .. .. .. .. ..•..O
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
• Limpe o disco.
Alto zumbido
ou barulho
�
� Changing
Disc Menuthe
. . Audio
. . . . . Language
. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
é ouvido.
�
. .. .. .. .. .. .e
.. ..componentes
.. .. 22
• AsChannel
caixas acústicas
� Changing
Changing the
the Audio
Audio
Language
. ..os
22
• Conecte-os corretamente e com firmeza.
�
. . .Audio
. . estão
. . .Channel
. .mal
. . .conectados.
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Subtitles
Changing. the
22
DVD
Audio Discs
� Subtitles
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Introduction
Introduction
Confira
o guia seguinte para a possível causa de um problema antes de contatar serviço.
Introduction
Resolvendo problemas (continuação)
Sintoma
Causa
Correção
Introduction
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Playing
an Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . Table
. . 23 of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
• Conecte
a antena
com
firmeza. Disc . . . . . 23
� Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
. . . . . .está
. . . mal
. . . posicionada
. . . . . . . 4-5ou
Disc . . . Before
. . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . .A. antena
• Ajusteto
asanother
antenasTrack
e conecte
� Moving
. . . uma
. . . .antena
. . . . . externa
. . . 23
Playable Discs . . . . . conectada.
......................4
. . . . . . . . . 23
� Repeat
Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
se necessário
. . . . . . . . . 23
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Notes on Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
rádio não
JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
About de
Symbols
..........................5
. . . . . . . .Estações
. 23
O
sinal
das
estações
é
muito
fraco
(ao
ser sintonizadas.
Viewing
a JPEGa disc
. . . manualmente
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . Front
.podem
. 24 Panel
• Sintonize
estação
sintonizar
� Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Control Overview
. . . . . .automaticamente).
..............7
. . . . . . . Remote
. . 24
� Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . Preparation
. . 24
Nenhuma estação foi prefixada ou toda � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . Connections
. . 24
as
• Prefixe as estações (página 30).
. . . . . . . . .a. memória
. . . . . . .foi
. .apagada
. . . . . . .(ao
. . procurar
8-13
Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 24
TV Connections . . . estações
. . . . . . . ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 25
Optional Equipment Connections
. . . .não
. . .está
. . . direcionado
..9
O controle remoto
para
Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 25
Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
the Complete
List .remoto
. . . . . do
. 25
o sensor do controle remoto no aparelhoErasing
• Aponte
o controleProgramme
remoto ao sensor
t . . . . . . . . 25
Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
DivX Disc
Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
st . . . . . . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . de
Receptor
de DVD/CD.
. . DVD/CD.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
O controle remoto também está longe do Last •Condition
Use o controle
remoto
Memory
. . .dentro
. . . . .de
. . aproximada. . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . .O. 28
controle
remoto não
� Assembling
and Connecting
to
the
Speakers
11
aparelho de DVD/CD.
mente
7 m.
Screen
Saver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . .funciona
. 28 � Speaker
corretamente.
Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . Speaker
. . 28
Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
um
obstáculo
no
entre
o
controle
remoto
. . . . . . . Before
. . 28 Operation . . . . .Há
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
• Remova
obstáculo.
Presetting
the o
radio
stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . . . 29
e oStream
aparelho& de
DVD/CD.
Mini Glossary for Audio
Surround
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 29
Sound Mode . . . . . . •. As
. . .baterias
. . . . . .no
. .controle
. . . . . . remoto
. . . 14 estão
Sleep• Substitua
Timer Setting
. . . . . por
. . .novas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
as baterias
. . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
fracas.
Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30
Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
do display
do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
. . . . . . . .A. exibição
30 � General
Operation
Using• Pressione
the Headphone
Jack
. . . . . . .remoto.
. . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . .painel
. 30 �frontal
está muito
painel frontal.
DIMMER
no controle
Language
. . . . . •. Nada
....é
. .exibido
. . . . . no
. . .display
. . . . . do
. 16
Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . .escura.
. 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Reference
Operation
. . . . . . . . . 31
DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
. . . . . . . . . 31
Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
. . . . . . . 32-33
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22
. . . . . . . . . 34
� Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20
� Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20
� Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
34
Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Introduction
Introduction
Especificações - LH-T752TA
FM
AM
(MW)
35
Referência
AMPLIFICADOR
CAIXAS ACÚSTICAS
SINTONIZADOR
VÍDEO
DVD/CD
GERAL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playing
an Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Table
Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . . Disc
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
SafetyofPrecautions
Massa
3.9 kg
� Pause
. . . . .CD
. . .and
. . .MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . . .Disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
Before
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5
Playing
an .Audio
23
Table ofUse
Contents
.3
Dimensões
Externas
(L
x
A
x
P)
430
x
54
x
350
mm
�
Playable
.4
� Moving
Pause .to. .another
. . . . . . Track
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
Before
Use Discs
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
Precautions
. . .. .. .. ..Operacionais
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Temperatura:
.. .. .. .. .. 54
� Repeat
Moving
to Operação,:
another Track
23
Playable Discs
Condições
5°C a 35°C,
estado Track/All/Off.
de
Horizontal
�
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
Notes
on Discs
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
� Search.
Repeat Track/All/Off.
23
Precautions
. . . .. ..Operacional
Umidade
5% para 85%
JPEG�Disc
Operation
About
Search.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
23
Notes Symbols
on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
LaserRear
comprimento
de disc
onda. .650
Viewing
aOperation
JPEG
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Front
Panel
and
.. .. .. ..de
.. 65semicondutor,
JPEG
Disc
. .. .. nm
24
About
Symbols
. . .Panel
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Laser
� SlideaShow
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Remote
Control
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..PAL
.. .. .. 625/50,
.. .. 76 NTSC 525,/60
Viewing
JPEG. disc
24
Front Panel
and
Rear
Panel
SinalOverview
de Sistema
�
� Still
SlidePicture
Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
Remote Control
Overview
. . . . . (áudio)
. . . . . . . . . .140
. . .Hz
. .a720 kHz
Resposta
de Frequência
�
to another
� Moving
Still Picture
. . . . . file
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
Preparation
Relação de Sinal-Ruído (áudio)
Mais de 75 dB (1 kHz, ��
NOP,
20
LPF/A-filtro
de
kHz)
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Preparation
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Faixa
70 dB
TV Connections
.de. 8
Connections
. . . .Dinâmica
. .. .. .. .. ..(áudio)
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Mais
.. .. .. 8-13
Repeat Programmed
Programmed
Playback Tracks.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Optional
Equipment
.. .. .. ..(1.. kHz,
98 a 12W
TV Connections
. Connections
. . . . . . (áudio)
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..0.5%
Distorção.Harmônica
posição)
(20
LPF/A-filtro
kHz)
Erasing
a Track
from de
Programme
Repeat Programmed
Tracks. . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Aerial
Connections
. .Connections
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10
Optional
Equipment
.
9
Erasing
the
Complete
Programme List
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Entrada de vídeo
1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω, sync
negativo.,
RCAjackx
Erasing
a Track
from1 Programme
25
Speaker
System Connection
Aerial Connections
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12
. . 10
DivX
Disc
Operation
. 1. . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
theRCAjackx
Complete
25
Saída de. Connection
V. .(p-p),
negativo.,
� Transmitter.
.vídeo
. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.0
11 75 Ω, sync
Speaker
System
.. .. 11-12
Speaker
Setup
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
DivX Disc
Operation
26
�
a channel
.. .. 1.0
.. .. 11
V
75 Ω, sync negativo.,
4-alfinete de ESTRONDO de míni x 1 (C) 0.3
� Changing
Transmitter.
. . . . . . .of. Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. ..(Y)
11(p-p), Additional
Information
Saída
S-vídeo
Speaker Setup
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
27
�
Setting
a
ID
of
Transmitter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
V
(p-p),
75
Q
� Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
Last Condition
Memory
Additional
Information
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
�
Assembling
and
Connecting
to
the
Speakers
11
� Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Screen
Saver . RCAjackx
.Memory
. . . . . .1 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Saída Vídeo Componente
(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω,
syncCondition
negativo.,
Last
28
�
Connections.
. . . . . to
. . the
. . .Speakers
. . . . . . . 12
� Speaker
Assembling
and Connecting
11
Controlling
the. TV
Screen Saver
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
Faixa
de Sintonia . . . . . . . . . . . . .87.5
ou 65.0 - 74.0
MHz,
87.5 - 108.0
MHz
� Speaker
Connections.
. . . -.108.0
12 MHz
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Before
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19
SpeakerOperation
Positioning.
.
.
13
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
Freqüência Intermediária
10.7 MHz
Operation
with
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
29
Mini Operation
Glossary for. .Audio
Before
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . 14-19
Listening
theradio
radiostations
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
Presettingtothe
29
Mode
. . . .Relação
. . . for
. . de
.Audio
. Sinal
. . . Stream
.Ruído
.....&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . 60
. . dB
. . (Mono)
14
Mini Glossary
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Listening
to the. radio
29
Sound
.. ..Freqüência
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..140.. .. .. 10,000
.. 14
Mode . Mode
. . .Resposta
. . .. .. .. ..de
14 Hz
Sleep
Timer Setting
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
On-Screen
Sound
Mode Display
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15
14
Dimmer
. kHz
. . .Setting
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Sleep
Timer
30
FaixaDisplay
- 1,720
Initial
Settings
. de
. . Sintonia
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..522
On-Screen
.. .16-19
.- .1,620
15 kHz ou 520
Mute
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Dimmer
30
� General
Operation
.kHz
. 16
Initial
Settings
. . . . Intermediária
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 450
.. .. 16-19
Frequência
Using
Mute .the
. . Headphone
. . . . . . . . . .Jack
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
�
Language
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
� General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Selecting
the
Input Source
Using
the
Headphone
Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Modo
Estéreo
100W
+
100W
(6Ω
a
1
kHz,
THD
10%)
�
Display
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
� Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
XTS
(Excellent
TrueSource
Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Selecting
the Input
30
�
. .. .. ..Surround
. . 17
Modo
� Audio.
Display
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Frontal:
.. .. 16-17
XTS
pro
. . . . . .True
. . . .Sound)
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
100W + 100W.(THD
10%)
XTS
(Excellent
30
�
Lock
(Parental
Control)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
� Audio.(*.Dependendo
. . . . . . . . .das
. . .configurações
. . . . . . . . . . . .Central
. . . . 17
*: 100W
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
�
. .modo
. . . . de
.Control)
. som
. . . e. .da.. .fonte,
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19
do
� Others
Lock (Parental
. .. .. .. ..não
18 100W
Surround*:
+ 100W (6Ω a 1 kHz, THD 10%)
Reference
� Otherspode
. . . haver
. . . . saída
. . . . de
. . som.)
. . . . . . . . . . . .Subwoofer
. . . . 19 *: 200W (4Q a 30 Hz, THD 10%).
Language
Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Reference
Operation
Country
Code
List
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31
Language
Code
List
31
Entradas
AV
IN,
OPTICAL
AUDIO
DVD
or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Operation
Troubleshooting
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33
Country Code List
. . 31
Playing
a DVD
Video CD.
. . 19 MONITOR
Saídas
E FONES: (32
Ω,
1.0
V)
DVD
or Video
CD and
Operation
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. S-VÍDEO,
.. .. 19-22
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
General
. . . . .CD.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Saída
Playing aFeatures
DVD and. .Video
.. .20-22
. .de
19transmissão:
2.4GHz, Alimentação:
Specifications
. . . . . . . .7V
. . DC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Transmissor
� Moving
to another
. . de
20recepção: 2.4GHz
General
Features
. . . .TITLE/GROUP
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. Sáida
.. .. 20-22
�
.. .. 20
� Moving
Moving to
to another
another CHAPTER/TRACK
TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. ..Caixa
20Acústica
Caixa Acústica
Caixa Acústica
�
Motion.
. . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
Subwoofer
� Slow
Moving
to another
20
sem fio
frontal
central
�
and
� Still
SlowPicture
Motion.
. . Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
20
Tipo
1
caminho
1
caminho
1
caminho
1
caminho
�
Search.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20
� Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20
2 Caixas Acústicas 1 Caixa Acústica
2 Caixas Acústicas
�
.. .. 20
� Repeat
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..2.. Caixas
20 Acústicas
�
A-B
� Repeat
Repeat
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
206Ω
Impedância
6Ω
4Ω
6Ω
�
Search
� Time
Repeat
A-B . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
21
Resposta
de
Frequência
150-20000
Hz
150-20000
Hz
40-1500
Hz
150-20000
Hz
�
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Marker
Time Search
21
�
. Search
. . da
. . Pressão
. .. .. .. .. ..de
.. ..Som
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..86dB/W(1m)
.. 21
86dB/W(1m)
82dB/W(1m)
86dB/W(1m)
� Zoom.
MarkerNivel
21
Special
DVD
� Zoom.
. .Features
. . . de
. . Entrada
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
21
Potência
100W
100W
200W
100W
� TitleDVD
MenuFeatures
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
Special
22
Max. Potência
100W
200W
400W
200W
�
.. .. .. .. .. ..de
.. ..Saída
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Disc
Title Menu
Menu
22
�
the
.. .. 22
Dimensões
x1190x270
500x83x105
300x440x10
270 x1190x270
� Changing
Disc Menu
. . Audio
. .(L. .x .ALanguage
. x. P)
. .mm
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 270
22
�
Audio
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
Pesothe
líquido
� Changing
Changing
the
Audio Channel
Language
22
2.9 kg
1.2 kg
8.5 kg
3.6 kg
�
. . .Audio
. . . . .Channel
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Subtitles
Changing. the
22
DVD
Audio Discs
� Subtitles
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
e especificações
sem notificação. (LH-W752TA e LH-T752TB)
DVD Desenhos
Audio Discs
. . . . . . . . . . .estão
. . . . sujeitos
. . . . . . a. mudança
. . 22
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Alimentação
Veja etiqueta principal
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc
Safety
Precautions
. . energia
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Veja
. . . etiqueta
. . 2 principal
Introduction
Consumo. de
Especificações - LH-T752TB
Veja etiqueta principal
AMPLIFICADOR
AM
(MW)
FM
SINTONIZADOR
VÍDEO
DVD/CD
Introduction
GERAL
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety Precautions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Veja
. . .etiqueta
. . . 2 principal
Consumo .de. .Energia
Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23
. .kg. . . . 3
. . . . . . . Table
. . 23 of Contents
Massa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9
� Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Disc . . . Before
. . 23 Use . Dimensões
Externas (L x A x P)
430 x 54 x 350 mm
� Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . 23
Condições
Operacionais
Temperatura:
5°C
a
35°C,
de Operação,:
Horizontal
�estado
Repeat
Track/All/Off.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Notes on Discs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5%
. .para
. . .85%
.5
Umidade. Operacional
. . . . . . . . . 23
JPEG
Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
About Symbols
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Laser
. . . de
. . semicondutor,
.5
. . . . . . . . . 23
Laser
comprimento de onda 650 nm
Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . Front
. . 24 Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sinal de Sistema
NTSC 525,/60
� Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . Remote
. . 24
Resposta de Frequência (áudio)
200Hz a 20 kHz
� Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . . . 24
� Moving
to another
. . . . . . . Preparation
. . 24
Relação de Sinal Ruído (áudio)
Mais de 75 dB (1 kHz, NOP,
20 LPF/A-filtro
de kHz) file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . Connections
. . 24
. . . .Dinâmica
. . . . . .(áudio)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mais
. . . de
. 8-13
Faixa
70 dB
Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 24
TV Connections
. . . . . . .(áudio)
. . . . . . . . . . .0.5%
. . . (1. .kHz,
. 8 a 12W posição) (20 LPF/A-filtro de kHz)
Distorção .Harmônica
Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
. . . . . . . . . 25
Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25
Entrada de Vídeo
. . . . . . . . . 25
Aerial Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.0
. .V. (p-p),
. . 1075 Ω, sync negativo., RCAjackx 1
Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . . 25
t . . . . . . . . 25
Saída deConnection
Vídeo
Speaker System
. . . . . . . . . .1.0
. . V. (p-p),
11-1275 Ω, sync negativo., RCAjackx 1
DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
st . . . . . . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(Y). .1.0
. .V. (p-p),
11 75 Ω, sync negativo., Mini DIN 4-pin x 1 (C) 0.3 V (p-p), 75Ω
Saída S-Vídeo
Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing
a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Saída Vídeo Componente
(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω, sync
negativo.,
RCAjackx
1, (Pb)(Pr)
Last
Condition
Memory
. . .0.7
. . V. (p-p),
. . . .75Ω
. . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling
and Connecting to the Speakers 11
Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker
Faixa
de Sintonia
Connections.
. . . . . . . . . . . .87.5
. . .- 108.0
. . 12MHz
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . Speaker
. . 28
Positioning.
. .Intermediária
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.7
. . .MHz
. . 13
Freqüência
Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . Before
. . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Relação de Sinal Ruído
60 dB (Mono)
Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mode . . . .Resposta
. . . . . .de. .Freqüência
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140. . .10,000
. . 14Hz
Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 29
Sound Mode
. . Sintonia
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
. . -. 1,720
. . 14kHz
Faixa. de
Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Freqüência Intermediária
450 kHz
. . . . . . . . . 30
Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � General
Modo
Estéreo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100W
Operation
. . . +. .100W
16 (6Ω à 1 kHz, THD 10%)
Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Modo Surround
Selecting
100W + 100W.(THD
10%) the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frontal:
. . . 16-17
(* Dependendo das configurações
XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Central *:100W
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio.do. .modo
. . . .de. .som
. . .e .da. .fonte,
. . . .não
. . . . . . . . . . . 17
XTS
. . . THD
. . . 10%)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Surround* 100W + 100W
(6Ω pro
à 1 kHz,
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental
pode haverControl)
saída de som.)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
*: 200W (4Ω a 30 Hz, THD 10%).
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Subwoofer
. . . . . 19
Entradas
Reference
AV IN, ÁUDIO OPTICO
Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
S-VÍDEO, MONITOR E FONES: (32 Ω, 1.0 V)
Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
. . . . . . . . . 31
DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
. . . . . . . . . 31
Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
. . . . . . . 32-33
Caixa
Satélite
Caixa Central
Passivo
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Caixa
20-22
Frontal
Caixa Traseira
Caixa Central Subwoofer
alto-falante
. . . . . . . . . 34
(LHS-75TBS)
(LHS-75TBC)
(LHS-55SBS)
(LHS-55SBC) (LHS-75TBW)
(LHS-55SBW)
� Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . .(LHS-75BS)
. . 20
� Moving
to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . .11.caminho
. 20
1 caminho
Tipo
caminho
1 caminho
1 caminho
1 caminho 1 caminho
� Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31. caixas
.alto-falante
. 20 acústicas 1 alto-falantes
1 alto-falante 1 caixa
1 alto-falantes
acústica
3 caixas acústicas
� Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20
4Ω4Ω
Impedância
8Ω
8Ω
8Ω
6Ω
6Ω
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
- 20,000
- 1,500 Hz
Resposta
Hz Hz 110-20,000
Hz- 20,000
110-20,000
Hz 40 40-1,500
Hz
150
Hz
� Repeat
. . . . .de. .Freqüência
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110-20,000
.150
. . 20
86 dB/W (1m)
� Repeat
A-Bda.Pressão
. . . . . de
. .Som
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82dB/W(1m)
.86. 21
dB/W (1m)
86 82dB/W(1m)
dB/W (1m)
Nivel
82dB/W(1m)
82dB/W(1m)
� Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100W
21
200W
100W
Potência de Entrada
70W
70W
70W
150W
� Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
200W 140W
200W
Max.
Potência
de
Saída
140W
140W
300W
400W
� Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
280
x.1200
500 x 83 x300x116x91mm
90 mm
195 x180x400x355mm
402 x 306 mm
Dimensões
(L x A. .x .P). mm
Special DVD
Features
. . . . . . . . . . . .140
. . .x220x153mm
22 x 280 mm140x220x153mm
Peso Líquido
� Title Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . o.95
. 2,5
22kg
9,18
Kg
1.2 kg 0,84 Kg 1.0 kg
5.6 Kg
kg
� Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Changing
the
Audio .Channel
22 Cabo das Caixas Acústicas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Caixas
Acústicas.
. . . . . . . . ... .. .. ... .. .. . .. .. ... .. ... .. .6
� Subtitles
. . AM.
. . .. . .. . .. . ... .. . ... .. .. ... . .. ... . .. ... . .. . .. . ... 22
Antena
1
Antena FM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
DVD AudioControle
DiscsRemoto.
. . . . . .. . .. . ... .. . ... .. .. ... . .. ... . .. ... . .. . .. 22
.1
Pilhas (AAA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Acessórios
Fornecidos
CAIXAS ACÚSTICAS
OperationSaídas
36
Cabo de Vídeo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Acessórios
válidossem
paranotificação.
os modelos LH-W752TA e LH-T752TB
Desenhos e especificações estão sujeito
a mudança
Introduction
Introduction
Alimentação
.........................2
Table
Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
SafetyofPrecautions
Before
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5
Table ofUse
Contents
.3
Playable
.4
Before
Use Discs
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5
Precautions
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54
Playable Discs
Notes
on Discs
Precautions
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
About
Notes Symbols
on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
Front
Panel
and Rear
About
Symbols
. . .Panel
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65
Remote
Control
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76
Front Panel
and Overview
Rear Panel
Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Preparation
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Preparation
TV Connections
..8
Connections
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13
Optional
Equipment
TV Connections
. . Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98
Aerial
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10
Optional
Equipment. .Connections
.9
Speaker
System Connection
Aerial Connections
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12
. . 10
� Transmitter.
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12
. . 11
Speaker
System. Connection
�
a channel
� Changing
Transmitter.
. . . . . . .of. Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
11
�
a ID
of Transmitter
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
� Setting
Changing
a channel
of Transmitter
11
�
Connecting. .to. .the
� Assembling
Setting a IDand
of Transmitter
. . Speakers
. . . . . . . . 11
11
�
Connections.
. . . . . to
. . the
. . .Speakers
. . . . . . . 12
� Speaker
Assembling
and Connecting
11
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
� Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Before
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19
SpeakerOperation
Positioning.
. . 13
Mini Operation
Glossary for. .Audio
Before
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . 14-19
Mode
. . . . . . . for
. . .Audio
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mini Glossary
Sound
Mode . Mode
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14
14
On-Screen
Sound
Mode Display
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15
14
Initial
SettingsDisplay
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19
On-Screen
. . 15
� General
Operation
. . 16
Initial
Settings
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19
�
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16
� Language
General Operation
16
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-17
� Display
Language
. . 16
�
Audio.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
� Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
�
(Parental
� Lock
Audio.
. . . . . . Control)
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 18
17
�
. . . . . . .Control)
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19
� Others
Lock (Parental
18
� Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Operation
DVD
or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Operation
Playing
a DVD
Video CD.
. . 19
DVD
or Video
CD and
Operation
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22
General
. . . . .CD.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22
Playing aFeatures
DVD and. .Video
. . 19
� Moving
to another
. . 20
General
Features
. . . .TITLE/GROUP
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22
�
� Moving
Moving to
to another
another CHAPTER/TRACK
TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
�
Motion.
. . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
� Slow
Moving
to another
20
�
and
� Still
SlowPicture
Motion.
. . Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
20
�
. . . and
. . . .Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
� Search.
Still Picture
20
�
� Repeat
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
�
� Repeat
Repeat A-B
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
20
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
�
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Marker
Time Search
21
�
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Zoom.
Marker. Search
21
Special
DVD
� Zoom.
. .Features
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
21
� TitleDVD
MenuFeatures
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
Special
22
�
� Disc
Title Menu
Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
�
� Changing
Disc Menuthe
. . Audio
. . . . . Language
. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
�
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Changing
Changing the
the Audio
Audio Channel
Language
22
�
. . .Audio
. . . . .Channel
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Subtitles
Changing. the
22
DVD
Audio Discs
� Subtitles
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playing
an Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . . Disc
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
� Pause
. . . . .CD
. . .and
. . .MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . . .Disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
Playing
an .Audio
23
�
� Moving
Pause .to. .another
. . . . . . Track
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Repeat
Moving Track/All/Off.
to another Track
23
�
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Search.
Repeat Track/All/Off.
23
JPEG�Disc
Operation
Search.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
23
Viewing
JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
JPEG
Disc aOperation
24
� SlideaShow
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Viewing
JPEG. disc
24
�
� Still
SlidePicture
Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
�
to another
� Moving
Still Picture
. . . . . file
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Repeat Programmed
Programmed
Playback Tracks.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Erasing
a Track from Programme
Repeat Programmed
Tracks. . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Erasing
Complete
Programme List
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Erasing the
a Track
from Programme
25
DivX
Disc Operation
. . . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
the Complete
25
Speaker
Setup
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
DivX Disc
Operation
26
Additional
Information
Speaker Setup
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
27
Last Condition
Memory
Additional
Information
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Screen
Saver . .Memory
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Last Condition
28
Controlling
the. TV
Screen Saver
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
Operation
with
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
29
Listening
theradio
radiostations
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
Presettingtothe
29
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Listening
to the. radio
29
Sleep
Timer Setting
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Dimmer
. . . .Setting
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Sleep Timer
30
Mute
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Dimmer
30
Using
Mute .the
. . Headphone
. . . . . . . . . .Jack
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Selecting
Input Source
Using thethe
Headphone
Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
XTS
(Excellent
TrueSource
Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Selecting
the Input
30
XTS
. . . . . .True
. . . .Sound)
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
XTS pro
(Excellent
30
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reference
Language
Code List
Reference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Country
Code
List
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31
Language
Code
List
31
Troubleshooting
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33
Country Code List
. . 31
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Referência
Introduction
Safety
Precautions
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Assistência Técnica
37
Assistência Técnica
Introduction
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . . . . . . Table
. . 23 of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Disc . . . Before
. . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . 23
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
Notes on Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
. . . . . . . Front
. . 24 Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . Remote
. . 24
. . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . Preparation
. . 24
. . . . . . . Connections
. . 24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
. . . . . . . . . 24
TV Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
. . . . . . . . . 25
Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
. . . . . . . . . 25
Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
t . . . . . . . . 25
Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
st . . . . . . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
. . . . . . . Speaker
. . 28
Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
. . . . . . . Before
. . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
. . . . . . . . . 29
Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
. . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
. . . . . . . . . 30
Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
. . . . . . . . . 30 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Operation
. . . . . . . . . 31
DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
. . . . . . . . . 31
Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
. . . . . . . 32-33
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22
. . . . . . . . . 34
� Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20
� Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20
� Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
38
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23
� Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
� Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
� Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
� Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
� Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25
Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . . 25
DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Last Condition Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reference
Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Introduction
Introduction
.........................2
Table
Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
SafetyofPrecautions
Before
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5
Table ofUse
Contents
.3
Playable
.4
Before
Use Discs
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5
Precautions
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54
Playable Discs
Notes
on Discs
Precautions
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
About
Notes Symbols
on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
Front
Panel
and Rear
About
Symbols
. . .Panel
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65
Remote
Control
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76
Front Panel
and Overview
Rear Panel
Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Preparation
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Preparation
TV Connections
..8
Connections
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13
Optional
Equipment
TV Connections
. . Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98
Aerial
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10
Optional
Equipment. .Connections
.9
Speaker
System Connection
Aerial Connections
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12
. . 10
� Transmitter.
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12
. . 11
Speaker
System. Connection
�
a channel
� Changing
Transmitter.
. . . . . . .of. Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
11
�
a ID
of Transmitter
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
� Setting
Changing
a channel
of Transmitter
11
�
Connecting. .to. .the
� Assembling
Setting a IDand
of Transmitter
. . Speakers
. . . . . . . . 11
11
�
Connections.
. . . . . to
. . the
. . .Speakers
. . . . . . . 12
� Speaker
Assembling
and Connecting
11
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
� Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Before
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19
SpeakerOperation
Positioning.
. . 13
Mini Operation
Glossary for. .Audio
Before
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . 14-19
Mode
. . . . . . . for
. . .Audio
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mini Glossary
Sound
Mode . Mode
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14
14
On-Screen
Sound
Mode Display
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15
14
Initial
SettingsDisplay
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19
On-Screen
. . 15
� General
Operation
. . 16
Initial
Settings
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19
�
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16
� Language
General Operation
16
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-17
� Display
Language
. . 16
�
Audio.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
� Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
�
(Parental
� Lock
Audio.
. . . . . . Control)
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 18
17
�
. . . . . . .Control)
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19
� Others
Lock (Parental
18
� Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Operation
DVD
or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Operation
Playing
a DVD
Video CD.
. . 19
DVD
or Video
CD and
Operation
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22
General
. . . . .CD.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22
Playing aFeatures
DVD and. .Video
. . 19
� Moving
to another
. . 20
General
Features
. . . .TITLE/GROUP
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22
�
� Moving
Moving to
to another
another CHAPTER/TRACK
TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
�
Motion.
. . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
� Slow
Moving
to another
20
�
and
� Still
SlowPicture
Motion.
. . Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
20
�
. . . and
. . . .Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
� Search.
Still Picture
20
�
� Repeat
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
�
� Repeat
Repeat A-B
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
20
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
�
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Marker
Time Search
21
�
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Zoom.
Marker. Search
21
Special
DVD
� Zoom.
. .Features
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
21
� TitleDVD
MenuFeatures
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
Special
22
�
� Disc
Title Menu
Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
�
� Changing
Disc Menuthe
. . Audio
. . . . . Language
. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
�
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Changing
Changing the
the Audio
Audio Channel
Language
22
�
. . .Audio
. . . . .Channel
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Subtitles
Changing. the
22
DVD
Audio Discs
� Subtitles
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playing
an Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . . Disc
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
� Pause
. . . . .CD
. . .and
. . .MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . . .Disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
Playing
an .Audio
23
�
� Moving
Pause .to. .another
. . . . . . Track
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Repeat
Moving Track/All/Off.
to another Track
23
�
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Search.
Repeat Track/All/Off.
23
JPEG�Disc
Operation
Search.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
23
Viewing
JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
JPEG
Disc aOperation
24
� SlideaShow
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Viewing
JPEG. disc
24
�
� Still
SlidePicture
Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
�
to another
� Moving
Still Picture
. . . . . file
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Repeat Programmed
Programmed
Playback Tracks.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Erasing
a Track from Programme
Repeat Programmed
Tracks. . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Erasing
Complete
Programme List
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Erasing the
a Track
from Programme
25
DivX
Disc Operation
. . . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
the Complete
25
Speaker
Setup
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
DivX Disc
Operation
26
Additional
Information
Speaker Setup
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
27
Last Condition
Memory
Additional
Information
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Screen
Saver . .Memory
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Last Condition
28
Controlling
the. TV
Screen Saver
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
Operation
with
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
29
Listening
theradio
radiostations
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
Presettingtothe
29
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Listening
to the. radio
29
Sleep
Timer Setting
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Dimmer
. . . .Setting
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Sleep Timer
30
Mute
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Dimmer
30
Using
Mute .the
. . Headphone
. . . . . . . . . .Jack
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Selecting
Input Source
Using thethe
Headphone
Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
XTS
(Excellent
TrueSource
Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Selecting
the Input
30
XTS
. . . . . .True
. . . .Sound)
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
XTS pro
(Excellent
30
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reference
Language
Code List
Reference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Country
Code
List
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31
Language
Code
List
31
Troubleshooting
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33
Country Code List
. . 31
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Referência
Introduction
Safety
Precautions
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Assistência Técnica
39
Assistência Técnica
Introduction
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . . . . . . Table
. . 23 of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Disc . . . Before
. . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . 23
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
Notes on Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . 23
. . . . . . . Front
. . 24 Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . Remote
. . 24
. . . . . . . . . 24
. . . . . . . Preparation
. . 24
. . . . . . . Connections
. . 24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
. . . . . . . . . 24
TV Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
. . . . . . . . . 25
Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
. . . . . . . . . 25
Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
t . . . . . . . . 25
Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
st . . . . . . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11
. . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
. . . . . . . Speaker
. . 28
Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
. . . . . . . Before
. . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround
. . . . . . . . . 29
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
. . . . . . . . . 29
Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
. . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
. . . . . . . . . 30
Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
. . . . . . . . . 30 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
. . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Operation
. . . . . . . . . 31
DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
. . . . . . . . . 31
Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
. . . . . . . 32-33
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22
. . . . . . . . . 34
� Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20
� Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20
� Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
� Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
� Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
40
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23
� Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
� Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
� Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
� Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
� Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25
Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . . 25
DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Last Condition Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reference
Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Introduction
Introduction
.........................2
Table
Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32
SafetyofPrecautions
Before
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5
Table ofUse
Contents
.3
Playable
.4
Before
Use Discs
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5
Precautions
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54
Playable Discs
Notes
on Discs
Precautions
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
About
Notes Symbols
on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55
Front
Panel
and Rear
About
Symbols
. . .Panel
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65
Remote
Control
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76
Front Panel
and Overview
Rear Panel
Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Preparation
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Preparation
TV Connections
..8
Connections
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13
Optional
Equipment
TV Connections
. . Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98
Aerial
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10
Optional
Equipment. .Connections
.9
Speaker
System Connection
Aerial Connections
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12
. . 10
� Transmitter.
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12
. . 11
Speaker
System. Connection
�
a channel
� Changing
Transmitter.
. . . . . . .of. Transmitter
. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
11
�
a ID
of Transmitter
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11
� Setting
Changing
a channel
of Transmitter
11
�
Connecting. .to. .the
� Assembling
Setting a IDand
of Transmitter
. . Speakers
. . . . . . . . 11
11
�
Connections.
. . . . . to
. . the
. . .Speakers
. . . . . . . 12
� Speaker
Assembling
and Connecting
11
Speaker
Positioning.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
� Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Before
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19
SpeakerOperation
Positioning.
. . 13
Mini Operation
Glossary for. .Audio
Before
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . 14-19
Mode
. . . . . . . for
. . .Audio
. . . . Stream
......&
. . Surround
. . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mini Glossary
Sound
Mode . Mode
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14
14
On-Screen
Sound
Mode Display
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15
14
Initial
SettingsDisplay
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19
On-Screen
. . 15
� General
Operation
. . 16
Initial
Settings
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19
�
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16
� Language
General Operation
16
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-17
� Display
Language
. . 16
�
Audio.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
� Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
�
(Parental
� Lock
Audio.
. . . . . . Control)
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 18
17
�
. . . . . . .Control)
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19
� Others
Lock (Parental
18
� Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Operation
DVD
or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Operation
Playing
a DVD
Video CD.
. . 19
DVD
or Video
CD and
Operation
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22
General
. . . . .CD.
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22
Playing aFeatures
DVD and. .Video
. . 19
� Moving
to another
. . 20
General
Features
. . . .TITLE/GROUP
. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22
�
� Moving
Moving to
to another
another CHAPTER/TRACK
TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
�
Motion.
. . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20
� Slow
Moving
to another
20
�
and
� Still
SlowPicture
Motion.
. . Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
20
�
. . . and
. . . .Frame-by-Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback
. . . . . . . .. 20
� Search.
Still Picture
20
�
� Repeat
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20
20
�
� Repeat
Repeat A-B
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
20
�
Time
Search
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
� Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
�
Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Marker
Time Search
21
�
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21
� Zoom.
Marker. Search
21
Special
DVD
� Zoom.
. .Features
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
21
� TitleDVD
MenuFeatures
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
Special
22
�
� Disc
Title Menu
Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
�
� Changing
Disc Menuthe
. . Audio
. . . . . Language
. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
�
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Changing
Changing the
the Audio
Audio Channel
Language
22
�
. . .Audio
. . . . .Channel
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
� Subtitles
Changing. the
22
DVD
Audio Discs
� Subtitles
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22
22
DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Playing
an Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Audio
CD and
MP3/WMA
Disc
. . . . . . Disc
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
� Pause
. . . . .CD
. . .and
. . .MP3/WMA
. . . . . . . . .Disc
. . . .. .. .. .. .. 23
Playing
an .Audio
23
�
� Moving
Pause .to. .another
. . . . . . Track
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
23
�
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Repeat
Moving Track/All/Off.
to another Track
23
�
. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23
� Search.
Repeat Track/All/Off.
23
JPEG�Disc
Operation
Search.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
23
Viewing
JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
JPEG
Disc aOperation
24
� SlideaShow
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
Viewing
JPEG. disc
24
�
� Still
SlidePicture
Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
�
to another
� Moving
Still Picture
. . . . . file
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24
24
�
To
rotate
picture.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Programmed
Playback
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Repeat Programmed
Programmed
Playback Tracks.
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Erasing
a Track from Programme
Repeat Programmed
Tracks. . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
25
Erasing
Complete
Programme List
List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25
Erasing the
a Track
from Programme
25
DivX
Disc Operation
. . . Programme
. . . . . . . . . .List
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26
Erasing
the Complete
25
Speaker
Setup
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27
DivX Disc
Operation
26
Additional
Information
Speaker Setup
. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
27
Last Condition
Memory
Additional
Information
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Screen
Saver . .Memory
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
Last Condition
28
Controlling
the. TV
Screen Saver
. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28
28
Operation
with
Radio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Presetting
theRadio
radio stations
Operation
with
. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
29
Listening
theradio
radiostations
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29
Presettingtothe
29
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Listening
to the. radio
29
Sleep
Timer Setting
Other
Functions.
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Dimmer
. . . .Setting
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Sleep Timer
30
Mute
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Dimmer
30
Using
Mute .the
. . Headphone
. . . . . . . . . .Jack
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
Selecting
Input Source
Using thethe
Headphone
Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
30
XTS
(Excellent
TrueSource
Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
Selecting
the Input
30
XTS
. . . . . .True
. . . .Sound)
. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30
XTS pro
(Excellent
30
XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reference
Language
Code List
Reference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Country
Code
List
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31
Language
Code
List
31
Troubleshooting
. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33
Country Code List
. . 31
Specifications
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Referência
Introduction
Safety
Precautions
Introduction
Introduction
Introduction
Assistência Técnica
41
P/N 3834RH0099R
REV 00 - AGO/2005

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement